24C-042 (3) ATTAUHMENT ICU
August 30, 1994
ARCHITECTS INC.
DIRECTORS FIELD I N S PECT I ON AND ROOF REPORT
Roy s. Brown. AJ-k Northampton High School
Edward L Jens. A.0 Northampton, Massachusetts 01060
PRINCIPALS
C. J. Whtlham
Architects Inc. examined the roof surfaces of
SENIOR AMOCIATFS Northampton High School . The surface is silicone
Mobard E. satmno. over urethane foam. Reportedly this roof was applied
ASSOCIATES about ten (10) years ago after the loose gravel was
Nark T. Dunn. .. vacuumed off, but the built-up roof remained in
Don Hefter place.
Ann rs.z.no. z�
The following was observed:
1. There are small holes on the surface from dime
size to a few inches in diameter .
2. There are some (at least one) spongy areas which
feel like there is water below.
3. There are some areas which crackle when stepped
upon as though they are not well bonded to the
substrait.
4. In one location where the 1966 addition joins the
1940 building, the joint has been caulked several
times.
5. There is evidence of prior cut outs and patches
done by a roofer and evidence of silicone caulk
patches' as small repairs done by the Owner .
The Owner received a proposal (attached) for repair ,
recoat and rewarranty from S .D. Carruthers in January
1993. The letter briefly describes the repairs to be
done, the recoating process, the testing, the granule
application etc. , and the cost of about $150,000.00
recommend this work. Note that, because of the
magnitude, bid specifications and competitive sealed
bids are required. That and the one and one-half
year delay add to the cost. Architects Inc .
proposed to allocate $175,000.00.
i64 GCTICC PTRLCC ; N0RlW3WMX. XASPAcRum"25 01060 (411%) 664-7=4
134
APPENDIX 2
ROOF REPORT
AUGUST 30, 1994
ARCHITECTS, INC.
E1 E2 C�
—F;7
E n P
oW-,
cF u �
„ i ;2
0—
0
B °-
o
B30
000 c
o� a
e �
F p B
Cl
C �
\� I
o
0 Project North
o
P
� ,z Lo
8 71 - -
13
LO
D 18 Il -
>I C q
E
F D B
Roof Plan: Section G Site Visit 5 Nov., 1998
DMB CONSULTING
Drawing No.7(Not to Scale)
P.O.BOX 775 Drawing Supplied Br. NORTHAMPTON
Blandford,MA 01008 KAESTLE BOOS AS50GLATES, INC. HIGH SCHOOL
1 888 476 8545-Fax 413 848 2361 ARGHITECTS
45
-za
� oe
EF-10
FIM
®ff-ZO
[]Or-24 ®EF-21 ®FF-22
RIFI
E V A
F D
DMB CONSULTING Roof Plan: Section F Slte Visit 4 Nov., 1998
Drawing No. 7(Not to Scale)
P.O. BOX 775 Drawn Supplied By NORTHAMPTON
Blandford,MA 01008 ICAFSTI E 8005 AS50CATE5, INC. HIGH SCHOOL
1 888 476 8545 -Fax 413 848 2361 ARCHITEGT5
7
E1 - E2
❑IfF 1 13FfF-3 L LO 31 4 :
VEIT
QFfF-2 }4 u3
E Ix HU-3 F :-25
[]W-4 _
Off
W12 off
J. E C A
F p B
DMB CONSULTING- R°°F P'°": Section E Site Visit 4 Nov., 1998
Drawing No. 6(Not to Scale)
P.O.BOX 775 Drawn Supplied By. NORTHAMPTON
Blandford,MAO 1008 KAESTLE BOOS ASSOCIATES, INC. HIGH SCHOOL
1 888 476 8545-Fax 413 848 2361 ARCHITECTS
6
[3ffF-4
D
mw
DMB CONSULTING Roof Plan: Section D
Drawing No. 5(Not to Scale)
P.O.BOX 775 Drawn 5uppiied By. NORTHAMPTON
Blandford,MA 01008 KAESTLE 8005 ASSOGIATE5, INC. HIGH SCHOOL
1 888 476 8545-Fax 413 848 2361 ARGHITECTS
5
4
[]EF-25 8
13 a
LO�• '
p 18 II -
81 Z
B2
AW-12
5x5
OO —
4x4
B 5
:�
7<HFU-5
.2w
® DEF-17
LO 7
EF-
4 B4
B310 ® I'a-I a
/z
E C A
F w D B
DMB CONSULTING Roof Plan: Section B Site Visit 4 Nov..1998
Drawing No. 3(Nat to Scale)
P.O.BOX 775 Drawn Supplied By. NORTHAMPTON
Blandford,MAO 1008 KAESTI E B005 ASSOGIATES. INC. HIGH SCHOOL
1 888 476 8545-Fax 413 848 2361 ARCHITECTS 10
3
APPENDIX 1
PLAN OF RO(PF SECTIONS
7. Appendix
Appendix#1 Plan of Roof Sections
Appendix#2 Field Inspection and Roof Report, Architects Inc, 8-30-94
4.2.2 Disadvantages
Because a specific roof system has not been suggested no specific disadvantages can be determined.
Analysis
Given the two options, the clear difference is in the cost of restoration verses replacement. Initial
cost comparison is obvious however a true comparison should be over time. It would be difficult to
predict accurately the life expectancy of each option however it reasonable to use the duration of a
warranty for the purposes of comparison. The initial savings would range between$360,000 to
$500,000. Because of 70%reimbursement this would result in savings of$108,000 to $150,000 to
the school district assuming the State is willing to increase the total amount of reimbursement.
Over time it is reasonable to assume the savings will be less because of the length in warranties.
Option 1 can be warranted for 10 years while option two can be warranted for 15 or even 20 years.
The actual savings will be dependent on several factors most notably how the roof is maintained.
Recommendation
From a facilities management perspective, either option would be a responsible course of action to
take. Although there is no absolute assurance of savings over time to the school district Option#1
has the highest probability of minimizing cost over time. This probability would be improved with
the introduction of a formal maintenance program
The potential risks of Option#1 are possible hidden damage caused by the moisture and the concern
that this system may be inappropriate for New England. Damage due to moisture should become
appearent during removal of the wet areas,howver additional analysis of the existing conditions
before restoration is prudent. It has not been our experience that this system in inadequate for New
England.
It is my recommendation that further assessment of the existing roof take place as soon as possible
in order to develop a detailed scope of servicesfor the restoration of the existing roof system.
4.1.2 Advantages
4.1.2.2 Relatively Low Cost.
Compared to other roofing systems the installation of SPF roof is extremely competitive. In this
particular situation restoring our existing system allows the School District to capitalize on the 1982
roof investment.
4.1.2.3 Relatively Minimal Disruption
It is reasonable to assume the restoration of the existing system would be less disruptive than a
complete removal and replacement.
4.1.2.4 System Sustainability
Dr. Rene Dupuis of Structural Research Center Inc. said that based on his initial findings in a jointly
sponsored study of SPF roofing systems. "SPF may be one of the most sustainable roofing systems
to date".'
4.1.2.5 Ease of Maintenance
It has been the experience of this department and other facilities managers that repairing this type of
roof is less costly due to the ability to repair most leaks with in-house personnel.
4.1.3 Disadvantages
4.1.3.1 Possible hidden damage
Concerns about possible hidden damage caused by the moisture especially around the skylights.
4.1.3.2 Relatively easy to damage membrane
Compared to other roof systems SPF roof appears to be more prone to damage from foot traffic.
4.1.3.3 Possibly unsuitable for new England compared to other systems
Chuck Boos raised a concern that this system may be inappropriate for New England.
4_2 Option 2: Replace the Existing Roof System
Replacement of the entire roof with a membrane system would require the removal of all existing
material down to the deck. All flashing,joints and other details would be replaced as part of this
proj ect.
4.2.1 Advantages
4.2.1.1 Allows for complete inspection of a deck areas
By removing the entire existing roof and exposing the deck inspection of all areas is made possible
through visual means. Any damage can also be repaired.
4.2.1.2 Ease of design and bid
By replacing the existing roof specifications can be developed with less concern about the existing
condition of the roof system. Costs are more predicable.
' SPF Roof Performance:A Preliminary Report,Rene Dupuis Ph.D.P.E.Presented at National Roofing Contractors
Association 1996 Annual Convention
At this meeting John Poudrier and I met with Bob Minder regarding the report. He confirmed that it
was highly probable that the existing roof could be restored. He also confirmed that the budget
figure of$250,000 was valid. I explained the concerns of the Architect about this type of roof to
Bob. He stated that any areas damaged would be discovered when those areas were exposed as part
of the repair. Bob provided us with additional information about the roof system and suggested we
contact the Facilities Director at Hampshire College about his experience with this type of roof.
Finally he ask about our experience with the existing roof. Both John and I agreed that the roof has
been very reliable and easy to maintain.
I contacted the Facilities Director at Hampshire College and asked what his experience with this
type of roof had been. He was quite pleased with the system and found no problems relating to
New England Weather. He did recommend that we use the ceramic granules as part of the top
coating to improve the strength and provide footpaths to all areas requiring maintenance.
3.8 Meeting with David Bernier, DMB Consulting Services, 1-13-99
At this meeting John Poudrier and I met with David Bernier from DMB Consulting Services to
discuss the conclusion of the report. He agreed that if we could have the dry section of the roof
resurfaced and warranted that this would be a viable alternative to replacement. We asked if the wet
sections could be quantified and mapped to better assess the damaged sections. He agreed to
provide us with the information within 24 hours.
3.9 Further assessment of the wet sections, 1-14-99
David Bernier provided us with more detailed information which indicated the approximate
dimensions of the wet sections by totaling these areas by section it became apparent the total
damaged area is approximately 10 percent. The spreadsheet below shows a comparison between the
initial report and further study of the information. Although it is unlikely that saturation is 2.4% it is
reasonable to assume that it is not more than 10%. However on Section F the number of wet areas
suggest it would be more practical to replace more than just the wet areas.
Comparison of Moisture Saturated Area Initial verses Further Study
Initial Further Study
LOCATION Sq. Ft. % Wet % Wet Wet % Wet
Section A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
Section B 10498 17% 2048 3.33% 192 0.31%
Section C 10032 16% 0 0.00% 0 0.00%
Section D 3957 6% 2048 3.33% 60 0.10%
Section E 17590 29% 2048 3.33% 311 0,51%
Section F 19438 32% 12303 20.00% 918 1.49%
Total 61514 100% 18448.13 29.99% 1481 2.41%
4. Options
4.1 Option 1: Restore the Existing Roof System
Restoring the existing SPF roof System with footpaths would require removal of approximately
10%of the existing foam. A second surface coat of silicone with ceramic granules and areas that are
saturated with moisture will require replacement. To complete this project successfully a more
thorough assessment of the existing system will be necessary. During this assessment,review of all
details including flashing,joints,penetrations, etc should be examined. This assessment would serve
as a basis for a detailed scope of services that could be used for public bid.
are labeled sections B through F. Section A is the proposed new area that has not been illustrated.
The existing system is a silicone over urethane foam that was installed in 1982 over a multi-ply roof
with gravel ballast. The loose gravel was removed as part of the installation process. The warranty
was for ten years. During the past 16 years the roof has functioned well and has been relatively easy
to repair when leaks have occurred. Presently the system will require restoration to assure
continued sustainability.
3. Background
3.1 Proposal to Repair and Maintain Roof, 1-27-94
A proposal was made by Bob Minder of Carruthers Industrial Contractors to restore and warranty
the existing roof for an additional 10 years.
3.2 Field Inspection and Roof Report, Architects Inc, 8-30-94
In 1994 a five-year building upgrade plan was developed with the assistance of Architects Inc. This
plan contained a field Inspection report. Although this was only a visual inspection they concluded
there was moisture within the roof system in certain areas. Their recommendation was to restore the
roof for 167,000. The entire report was provided to the Kaestle Boos.
3.3 Letter to Michael McKeon,9-24-98
The proposal for scanning services was sent to Kaestle Boos along with a cover letter that briefly
discusses the two options and their costs. At this point we believed the appropriate budget figure to
restore the existing roof be $250,000.
3.3 Roof Infrared Scan Report, 11-5-98
3.4 Meeting with Avi Gladstone,DMB Consulting Services, 12-22-98
At this meeting John Poudrier and I were presented with the High School Roof Scan Report
A preliminary review of the report was made to verify the methodology used. Both John and I were
satisfied that DMB had completed the scan in a professional manner.
3.5 Meeting with Bob Minder, Carruthers Industrial Contractors, 12-23-98
At this meeting John Poudrier and I met with Bob Minder and asked him to review the report and
give us his opinion. He suggested it would be helpful if the wet areas could be plotted on a plan of
the roof and their size quantified. He also stated that the wet areas would require removal of the
foam insulation however, there is no reason the remaining area can not be restored.
3.6 Meeting with Michael McKeon and Chuck Boos, 1-8-99
At this meeting John Poudrier and I met Michael McKeon and Chuck Boos about the roof. This
meeting was the result of the request to the building committee to study the report further. Michael
McKeon mentioned that the amount actually budgeted for the roof restoration was $192,000.
Chuck Boos raised the inappropriateness of this type of roof in New England. He also raised
concerns about possible hidden damage caused by the moisture especially around the skylights. He
stated that it was Kaestle Boos preference to completely replace the roof on buildings they are
renovating however in this case the"owner's"preference was to restore the existing roof and they
were attempting to comply with the owner's wishes. I stated that in this case the building
committee represents the owner. It was unclear to everyone at this meeting whether this subject had
been discussed with the committee. Coordination of this work was also discussed.
3.7 Meeting with Bob Minder,Carruthers Industrial Contractors, 1-12-99
To: NHS Building Committee
From: Brett Jacobus, Director of Central Services
Re: NHS Roof Report
Date: 1/22/99
1. Executive Summary
The purpose of this report is to review the options related to the Northampton High School Roof.
The existing roof will need attention as part of the High School Renovation Project. Until recently,
it has been the plan to repair the existing roof as needed, and recoat the entire roof. Once completed
the existing roof would be warranted for ten years. However, the inspection report states the
existing roof is beyond its useful life, approximately 30%moisture saturated and should be
replaced. Therefor the architect has recommended the option of a total replacement of the roof.
After a quantitative review of the information developed in the scan report conducted by the David
Bernier, DMB Consulting Services and Central Services the following can be concluded from the
inspection and roof scan with relative certainty.
• It appears that moisture saturation is less than 10%of the total roof area.
• The vast majority of the saturated area is located in one area, Section F.
• If properly repaired and maintained the existing roof can be warranted for an additional 10
years, therefore it is not beyond its useful life.
• A conservative budget figure for this work is $250,000.
The option of restoring the existing roof remains viable. It is important to point out that the scan
report is in no way flawed or misleading. In fact it is a very detailed document providing us
valuable information. The recommendations where professional opinions based on the limited
information the consultant had about the roof.
A budget figure for the second option of total replacement would be in excess of$700,000.
Comparing the two options and factoring in 70%reimbursement from the State, The option of
restoration has the highest potential of reducing costs over time. Therefor, it is my recommendation
that further assessment of the existing roof take place as soon as possible in order to develop a
detailed scope of services for the restoration of the existing roof system.
2. Status Quo
The area of the existing roof at the High School has been estimated at 61514 square feet or
approximately 60,000 sq. ft. The existing area has been divided into five sections based on the
building characteristics, elevation, age of structure etc. These areas are illustrated in Appendix 1 and
J"W
Northampton High School
Roof Report
Prepared for
High School Building Committee
January 1999
Prepared by
Central Service/School Maintenance
Memorial Hall, 240 Main Street
Northampton, MA 01060
(413) 587-1260
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, NA R8 #96079
1. Profile: Double dome, 25 percent rise.
a. Outer Glazing Color: White, No. 2067, 3/16-inch-thick
translucent acrylic, 72 percent visible light transmittance.
b. Inner Glazing Color: Colorless, transparent acrylic, 92
percent visible light transmittance.
2. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard glazing system of EPDM
or neoprene, closed-cell sponge neoprene, or EPDM, or of partially
vulcanized butyl tape or liquid-applied elastomeric sealant.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
Coordinate with installation of roof deck and other substrates to
receive accessory units, skylights, vapor barriers, roof insulation,
roofing and flashing, as required, to ensure that each element of the
Work performs properly and that combined elements are waterproof and
weathertight. Anchor units securely to supporting structural
substrates, adequate to withstand lateral and thermal stresses, as well
as inward and outward loading pressures.
1. Except as otherwise indicated, install roof accessory items
according to construction details of NRCA "Roofing and
Waterproofing Manual."
B. Isolation: Where metal surfaces of units are to be installed in contact
with incompatible metal or corrosive substrates, including wood, provide
permanent separation by saturated fabric.
C. Flange Seals: Unless otherwise indicated, set flanges of accessory
units in a thick bed of roofing cement to form a seal.
D. Cap Flashing: Termination of roofing membrane and Installation of base
flashing by other Division 7 Sections.
E. Operational Units: Test operate units with operable components. Clean
and lubricate joints and hardware. Adjust for proper operation.
F. Heat-and-Smoke Vents: Locate, install, and test according to NFPA 204M.
1. Install offsetting pulleys and cable for inside manual release at
location and height to be determined by Architect, coordinate
routing of cables with other installations.
3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces according to manufacturer's instructions.
Touch up damaged metal coatings.
B. Clean and polish plastic skylight units, inside and out, not more than
5 days prior to date of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 07720
ROOF ACCESSORIES 01721 6
a
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KS #96079
" A. General: Construct units to comply with NFPA 204M. Custom fabricate
units only to extent necessary to comply with indicated dimensions,
slope and other special requirements. Unless otherwise indicated,
fabricate to withstand a minimum 40-lbf per sq. ft. external live load
and 20-lbf per sq. ft. uplift.
B. Code Requirements: UL-listed and FM-approved.
C. Framing: Fabricate of the following materials, with manufacturer's
standard welded mechanical corner joints, including cap flashing.
1. Material: Hot-dipped galvanized or galvalume coated sheet steel.
D. Curb: 12"' high (36" High with side louvers and safety grate at elevator
hoistway) , double-wall, 14 gauge steel curb construction with 1-inch
insulation and 3-1/211 mounting flange.
1. Where roof deck slopes more than 1/4 inch per foot, provide tapered
curb heights to match slope and to level tops of units.
E. Hatch-Type Units: Equip units with lid gaskets, automatic self-lifting
mechanisms, UL-listed fusible links or other heat-sensitive or
smoke-sensitive release devices, as indicated, and hardware including
hinges, hold-open devices, and independent manual-release devices for
inside and outside operation of covers.
1. When release is actuated, cover is to open and lock open against
10-lbf per sq. ft. snow or wind load.
2. Lid: Double leaf sheet galvanized steel covers, 14 gauge lid, with
1-inch integral insulation, and 22 gauge liner.
3. Inside Manual Release: Provide offsetting pulleys, cable and
release handles to locate release on side wall of room below.
2.5 PLASTIC UNIT SKYLIGHTS
A. General: Factory-assembled unit consisting of plastic glazing, extruded
aluminum glazing retainer, gasketing, inner frame that may be
incorporated into the curb, and integral curb with self-contained roof
flashing flanges.
B. Curb: Self-flashing, self-supporting double-wall, aluminum curb,
minimum 0.040-inch wall thickness, enclosing minimum 1-inch glass-fiber
board (or equivalent) insulation and with minimum 3-inch roof flanges,
with welded joints at corners.
1. Height: 9 inches above roofing.
2. Taper: Where roof deck slopes more than 1/4 inch per foot, provide
tapered curb heights to match slope and result in level dome
installation.
C. Condensation Control: Fabricate skylight units with 5 degree sloping
integral internal gutters and nonclogging weeps to collect and dispose
of condensation.
D. Thermal Break: Fabricate skylight units with thermal barrier separating
interior metal framing from materials exposed to outside temperature.
E. Shape and Size: As required to match existing openings.
F. Glazing: Thermoformed acrylic.
ROOF ACCESSORIES 07721 - 5
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA XB #96079
a. "Super Thermalized Solar Energy Skydome, Model DD-C4", Wasco
Products, Inc.
b. "Double Glazed Acrylic Dome, Model C", Tristar.
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Structural-Quality Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 446 with G90 coating
complying with ASTM A 525, Grade C, or to suit manufacturer's standards.
B. Commercial-Quality Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 526 with G90 coating
complying with ASTM A 525.
C. Galva lume-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792 with class AZ-50 coating,
Grade 40, or to suit manufacturer's standards.
D. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 alloy 6063-T52, mill finish unless
indicated otherwise.
E. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with water-borne
preservatives for above-ground use, complying with AWPA C2; not less
than 1-1/2 inch thick.
F. Fasteners: Same metal as metals being fastened, or nonmagnetic
stainless steel or other noncorrosive metal as recommended by
manufacturer. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material
being fastened.
1. Where removal of exterior exposed fasteners affords access to
building, provide nonremovable fastener heads.
G. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard tubular or fingered design of neoprene
or polyvinyl chloride, or block design of sponge neoprene.
H. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying,
nonmigrating sealant
I. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, nonasbestos, fibrated asphalt cement
designed for trowel application or other adhesive compatible with
roofing system.
J. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by unit manufacturer that
is compatible with joint surfaces. ASTM C 920; Type S; Grade NS; Class
25; and Uses NT, G, A, and (as applicable to joint substrates indicated)
0.
2.3 FINISHES
A. General: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations
on applying and designating finishes.
B. Finish: Red Oxide Primer.
C. Finish designations prefixed by AA conform to the system for designating
aluminum finishes established by the Aluminum Association.
D. Class I, Clear-Anodized Finish: AA-C22A41 (Chemical Finish: etched,
medium matte; Anodic Coating: Class I Architectural, clear film thicker
than 0.7 mil) complying with AAMA 607.1.
2.4 HEAT-AND-SMOKE VENTS
ROOF ACCESSORIES 07721 - 4
NORTHAMPTON RIG'S SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON. MA R& 196079
identical to those tested for the following fire-test-response
characteristics, per ASTM test method indicated below, by UL. Identify
plastic sheets with appropriate markings of applicable testing and
inspecting organization.
1. Self-Ignition Temperature: 650 deg F (343.33 deg C) or greater
when tested per ASTM D 1929 on plastic sheets in the thickness
intended for use.
2. Smoke density of 75 or less when tested per ASTM D 2843 on plastic
sheets in the thickness intended for use.
3. Relative-Burning Characteristics As follows, when tested per ASTM
D 635:
a. Acrylic: Burning rate of 2.5 inches per minute or .less when
tested on plastic glazing indicated below with a nominal
thickness of 0.060 inch or the thickness intended for use.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. General: . Warranties specified in this Section shall not deprive the
Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the
Contract Documents and shall be in addition to and run concurrent with
other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the
Contract Documents.
B. Skylight Warranty: Provide written warranty signed by manufacturer,
agreeing to repair or replace work that exhibits defects in materials
or workmanship and guaranteeing weathertight and leak-free performance.
"Defects" is defined as uncontrolled leakage of water and abnormal aging
or deterioration.
1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
C. Plastic Warranty: Provide written warranty signed by manufacturer
agreeing to repair or replace work that has or develops defects in the
plastic. "Defects" is defined as abnormal aging or deterioration.
1. Warranty Period for Acrylic: 5 years from date of Substantial
Completion against yellowing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following:
1. Hatch-Type Heat-and-Smoke Vents:
a. "B-D Automatic Smoke Vent, Model UL 6060V2", Babcock-Davis
Hatchways, Inc.
b. "Automatic Fire Vent, Type DSH6060", Bilco Co.
C. "Low Profile Heat and Smoke Vent, Model U-LP-6060", Milcor,
Inc.
2. Smoke Vent at Elevator Hoistways:
a. Single Leaf Smoke Vent Model 6-101VS with Louver & Safety
grille.
3. Plastic unit skylights:
ROOF ACCESSORIES 07721 - 3
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS s
NORTHAMPTON. MA GCB #96079
B. This Section includes the following:
1. Hatch-type heat-and-smoke vents.
2. Plastic unit skylights.
C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that
relate to this Section:
1. Section 06105 "Miscellaneous Carpentry for roof deck and
blocking.
2. Section 07533"Single-Ply CSPE Membrane Roofing, Flashing and Sheet
Metal" for roofing types and roofing accessories included as part
of roofing Work.
3. Section 07820 "Metal Framed Skylights" for individual skylights.
4. Mechanical equipment curbs are specified in a Division 15 Section
and installed under this section.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of product specified. Submit manufacturer's
detailed technical product data, installation instructions and
recommendations, including details of construction relative to
materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes.
1. Data for each type of skylight specified, including details of
construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual
components, profiles, finishes, and glazing light transmission and
thermal characteristics.
C. Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of each roof
accessory specified including fully dimensioned plans, elevations,
sections, details of components, and attachments to other units of Work.
Also show layout, anchorage details, rough-in requirements, and
conditions on the roof or for other accessories.
D. Samples for initial selection purposes in the form of manufacturer's
color charts showing full range of colors, textures, shapes, and sizes
available for each type of roof accessory indicated.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Heat-and-Smoke Vent Compliance: Provide units that have been tested,
listed, or approved as follows:
1. Construction/Operation: UL-listed and FM-approved.
B. Standards: Comply with the following:
1. SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" details for fabrication
of units, including flanges and cap-flashing to coordinate with
type of roofing indicated.
2. NRCA "Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" details for installation
of units.
3. NFPA 204M for smoke-and-heat vent design constraints, operation,
and location.
4 . Massachusetts State Building Code (Sixth Edition) .
C. Skylight Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide plastic sheets
ROOF ACCESSORIES 07721 - 2
XORTHAWTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
SECTION '07721 - ROOF ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 TIME, MANNER AND REQUIREMENTS FOR FILING SUB-BIDS
A. Sub-Bids shall be submitted in accordance with the provisions of General
Laws, Chapter 149, Section 44A to 44I, inclusive, as amended.
B. Sub-Bids for work under this Section shall be received by the Awarding
Authority at the School Department, 212 Main Street, Northampton, MA.
01060, until 2:00 p.m. local time on April 22, 1999, at which time all
filed Sub-Bids shall be opened, read aloud, and duly recorded.
C. Sub-Bids shall be submitted on forms identical to those contained in
Bidding Requirements: Bid Form for Sub-Bidder. The Bid Forms attached
hereto are for information only and shall not be detached, filled in,
or executed. All Sub-Bids shall be submitted on the FORM FOR SUB-BID
furnished by the Awarding Authority as required by Section 44G of
Chapter 149 of the General Laws, as amended. Sub-Bids Forms shall be
completely filled in and -all Sub-Bids which are incomplete, conditional,
obscure, or which contain any additions not called for will be rejected.
D. Sub-Bids filed with the Awarding Authority shall be accompanied by a Bid
Deposit in the form of a certified check or a treasurer's or cashier's
check issued by a responsible bank or trust company, payable to the City
of Northampton. A bid bond shall be:
- 1. on a form satisfactory to the Awarding Authority.
2. With a surety company qualified to do business in the Commonwealth
and satisfactory to the Awarding Authority.
3. Conditioned upon the faithful performance by the principal of the
agreements contained in the Bid. The amount of such bid deposit
shall be five percent (5%) of the value of the Bid.
E. Sub-Bids for work under this Section shall be for the complete work
required as specified and as shown on the drawings.
F. Sub-Bidders are directed to the Instructions to Bidders, and to the
requirements that all bidders visit the site to determine the scope of
work required under this Section.
G. Sub-Bidders must comply with all provisions of Division 1, General
Requirements, in the same manner as the General Contractor.
H. Work to be done under this Filed Sub-Bid is included in the Contract
Documents as listed in LOD-1 through LOD-5 (List of Drawings) .
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this work. Note also all Addenda.
1.3 SUMMARY
A. The Work described in this Section shall be included in the Roofing
Filed Sub Bid.
ROOF ACCESSORIES 07721 - 1
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA RS 496079
B. Upon completion of demolition work, remove tools, equipment, and
demolished materials from site. Remove projections and leave interior
areas broom clean,
1. Repair demolition performed in excess of that required. Return
elements of construction and surfaces to remain to condition
existing prior to start operations. Repair adjacent construction'or
surfaces soiled or damaged by selective demolition work.
END OF SECTION 07533
SINGLE-PLY CSPE MEMBRANE ROOFING, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07533 - 17
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA #96979
I. Provide sheet metal work of watertight and weather tight
construction; lines, arises and angles shall be sharp and true, with
plane surfaces free from waves and buckles.
E. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion type joints are indicated
or required for proper performance of work, form metal to provide for
proper installation of elastomeric sealant, in compliance with SMACNA
standards.
F. Fabricate penetration sleeves with minimum 8-inch-high stack of diameter
1 inch larger than penetrating element. Counterflashing is specified
as work of another section of these specifications.
G. Metal Fascia and Flashings: Provide cold rolled lead coated copper 20
oz. , with 20 oz. copper hook strips.
1. Double back exposed edges 1/2" to conceal edge and provide
stiffness.
2. Lap end joints 2" and solder.
3. External cap flashing required in connection with base flashing at
all intersections of pitched vertical or horizontal surfaces into
masonry wall except where reglet is .used. Bottom edge to have 112"
folded edge and overlap base flashing 2". Extend into masonry 4"
and turn up 1".
a. Note all special flashing conditions as shown in details.
4 . Caulk all flashings set into masonry.
3.13 PROTECTING AND CLEANING
A. Protect sheet membrane roofing from damage and wear during remainder of
construction period. When remaining construction will not affect or
endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage,
describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to
Architect and Owner.
B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing that does not comply with
requirements, repair substrates, reinstall roofing, and repair sheet
flashings to a condition free of damage and deterioration at the time
of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.
C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning
agents and procedures required by manufacturer of affected construction.
3.14 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A. Remove from building site debris, rubbish, and other materials resulting
from demolition and removal operations. Transport and legally dispose
off site.
1. Dispose of all removed material and all debris at the end of each
working day.
2. If hazardous materials are encountered during demolition operations,
comply with applicable regulations, laws, and ordinances concerning
removal, handling, and protection against exposure or environmental
pollution.
3. Burning of removed materials is not permitted on project site.
4. Provide all necessary trash removal containers. Include the cost of
rubbish removal-and containers and their disposal.
SINGLB-PLY CSPE ME)MRAN8 ROOFING, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07533 - 16
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON,, NA KB #96079
• F. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to
substrate through termination bars.
3.10, WALKWAY INSTALLATION
A. Walkways: Install walkway pads in locations indicated. Heat weld or
adhere walkway pads to substrate with compatible adhesive according to
roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily, according to
manufacturer's written instructions, and repair seam sample areas.
1. Perform on-site evaluation of welded seams in locations as directed
by the Owner's representative or the roofing Manufacturer's
representative.
B. Quality Control of Welded Seams: Check all completed welded seams after
cooling for continuity using a rounded screwdriver or other suitable
blunt object. Visible evidence that welding is proceeding acceptably is
smoke during the welding operation, shiny membrane surfaces, and an
uninterrupted flow of black material from the edge of completed joints.
1. Take two inch wide cross section samples a minimum of three times a
day through completed seams.
2. Correct welds that display failure from shearing of the membrane
prior to separation of the weld.
3. Patch each test cut at no extra charge to the Owner.
C. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's
technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion and
submit report to Architect.
1. Notify Architect or Owner 48 hours in advance of the date and time
of inspection.
3.12 FABRICATING SHEET METAL ACCESSORIES
A. SMACNA and NRCA Details: Conform metal work with details shown and with
applicable fabrication requirements of Architectural Sheet Metal Manual
by SMACNA. Comply with installation details of NRCA Roofing and
Waterproofing Manual.
B. Prefabricate units as indicated or provide standard manufactured units
complying with requirements; fabricate from lead-coated copper.
1. Tin edges of sheet of metal to be soldered on both sides for a width
of not less than 1-112".
2. Perform soldering with well-heated coppers to thoroughly heat sheet
and completely sweat solder through full width of seam. When
soldering lead-coated copper, brush a liberal amount of flux into
seam.
C. Provide 4-inch-wide flanges set in roofing cement for applying
thermoplastic single-ply roofing system membrane concealed by flashing.
D. Fabricate work with flat-lock soldered joints and seams; except where
joint movement is necessary, provide 1-inch-deep interlocking hooked
flanges filled with mastic sealant.
SINGLE-PLY CSPE MEMBRANE ROOFING, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07533 - 15
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #9$,479
F. Apply roofing sheet with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck
where possible.
G. Spread sealant bed over deck drain flange at deck drains and securely
seal roofing sheet in place with clamping ring.
3.8 SEAM INSTALLATION
A. Clean seam areas, overlap sheets, and weld side and end laps of sheets
and flashings according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure
a watertight seam installation. Weld seam as follows:
1. Weld Method: Hot air.
2. Minimum Lap areas: 3 inches wide when machine welding; 4 inches wide
when hand welding.
3. use only welding equipment provided by or approved-by -the roofing
Manufacturer.
4. Only mechanics that have successfully completed a course of
instruction provided by a Manufacturer's representative prior to
welding may perform welding operations.
B. Hand Welding: Complete hand welded seams in three stages. Allow
equipment to warm up for at least one minute prior to start of welding.
1. Tack weld the lap every 3 feet to hold the material in place.
2. Weld the back edge of the lap a thin, continuous weld to prevent
loss of hot air during the final welding.
3. Insert the hot air nozzle into the lap, keeping the welding
equipment at a 45 degree angle to the side lap. Once the proper
welding temperature has been reached and the material starts to
flow, the hand roller shall be applied at a right angle to the
welding gun and pressed lightly. For straight laps, use the 1-1/2"
wide nozzle; for corners and compound connections, use the 3/4" wide
nozzle.
C. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply seam
calk to seal cut edges of sheet membrane,
D. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not meet
requirements.
3.9 FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere
to substrate according to roofing system manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of flashing sheet at
required rate and allow to partially dry. Do not apply bonding adhesive
to seam area of flashing.
C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with
sheet flashing as recommended by manufacturer.
D. Clean seam areas, overlap sheets, and firmly roll flashings into the
adhesive. Weld side and end laps to ensure a watertight seam
installation.
E. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap
sealant and seal exposed edges of sheet flashing terminations.
SINGLE-PLY- CSPS MBMBRANB ROOFING, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07533 14
i r
NORTHAWTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA RS #96079
C. Install one or more layers of insulation under area of roofing to
achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation thickness is 2
inches (50 mm) or greater, install required thickness in 2 or more
layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of
previous layer a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) in each direction.
D. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed
surface is flush and does not restrict flow of water.
E. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous
straight line with end joints staggered between rows, abutting edges and
ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch (6 mm) with
insulation.
1. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch (6 mm) of nailers,
projections, and penetrations.
F. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes
indicated and to Shop Drawings.
G. Attached Insulation: Secure first layer of insulation to deck using
mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening
specified board-type roof insulation to deck type indicated. Install
subsequent layers of insulation in a solid application of adhesive
approved by the Roofing Manufacturer, at a rate required by insulation
manufacturer.
1. Fasten insulation according to requirements of FM's "Approval Guide"
for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification and the insulation
and roofing system manufacturers' written instructions, but not less
than 1 fastener for each 4 sq. ft. (0.38 sq. m) and at least 2
fasteners per board.
H. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous
straight lines with end joints staggered between rows. Loosely butt
cover boards together and fasten to roof deck according to roofing
system manufacturer's written instructions.
I. Install slip sheet over insulation and immediately beneath sheet.
3.7 ADHERED SHEET INSTALLATION
A. Install thermoplastic sheet over area to receive roofing according to
roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll sheet and
allow to relax for a minimum of 30 minutes.
1. Install sheet according to ASTM D 5036.
B. Start installation of sheet in presence of roofing system manufacturer's
technical personnel.
C. Accurately align sheets and maintain uniform side and end laps of
minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.
D. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet at rate
required by manufacturer and allow to partially dry. Do not apply
bonding adhesive to seam area of sheet.
E. Mechanically fasten sheet securely at terminations and perimeter of
roofing.
SINGLE-PLY CSPE MEMSRANE ROOFING, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07533 - 13
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RSNOVATIONS {
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate of dust,, debris, and other substances detrimental to
roofing installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written
instructions.
1. Remove sharp ridges, projections and accumulations of bitumen above
the surface.
B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors
and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction.
Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is
forecast.
C. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to
prevent water from entering completed sections of the roofing system at
the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and discard
temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.
3.4 WOOD NAILERS AND BLOCKING
A. Install continuous treated wood nailers at the perimeter of the entire
roof, around roof projections and penetrations and other locations
required.
B. Anchor nailers to resist a minimum force of 300 lbf in any direction.
Provide a 1/2" space between lengths of nailers.
1. Fasten nailers with fasteners spaced at 12 inches on center,
staggered 1/3 the nailer width and installed within 6 inches of each
end.
2. Comply with the requirements of Factory Mutual Loss Prevention Data
Sheet 1-49.
C. Do not use nailers less than three feet in length.
D. Build up nailer thickness as required to match thickness of substrate
or insulation, with smooth transitions.
1. Wood nailers and blocking are generally indicated in nominal lumber
sizes. Where required, whether indicated or not, furnish ripped,
continuous shims to create `nailer heights to match substrate or
insulation height.
E. Firmly anchor existing blocking designated to remain to meet the
requirements set forth for new wood as stated above.
3.5 FIBERGLASS FACED GYPSUM ROOF BOARD INSTALLATION
A. Install reinforced fiberglass faced gypsum roof board onto metal deck
substrate with sufficient mechanical fasteners to prevent movement and
blow off.
3.6 INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation is not
exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday.
B. Comply with roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for
installing roof insulation
SINGLB-PLY CSPB MMMRANB ROOFING, FLASHING AND SHMM MBTAL 07533 - 12
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KS #96079
without excessive oil-canning, buckling, and tool marks, true to line
and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
B. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams.
For metal other than aluminum, tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and
solder. Form aluminum seams with epoxy seam sealer, rivet joints for
additional strength where required.
C. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions
in work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently water/weatherproof,
form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1
inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints)
D. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion type joints are indicated
or .required for proper performance of work, form metal to provide for
proper installation of elastomeric sealant, in compliance with SMACNA
standards.
E. Separations: Provide for separation of metal from noncompatible metal
or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces at locations of
contact, with bituminous coating or other permanent separation as
recommended by manufacturer/fabricator.
F. Prime all surfaces of pitch pockets prior to filling with pourable
sealer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 REMOVAL OF EXISTING ROOFING SYSTEMS
A. Erect dust chutes for the removal of rubbish and debris from the roof.
B. Removal of Existing Roof Systems: Remove existing roof system, where
indicated.
1. Thoroughly clean existing substrate of all debris, fasteners, etc.
C. Provide services for effective air and water pollution controls as
required by local authorities having jurisdiction.
D. If unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that
conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate
and measure both nature and extent of the conflict. Submit report to
the Architect in written, accurate detail. Pending receipt of directive
from the Architect, rearrange selective demolition schedule as necessary
to continue overall job progress without undue delay.
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions under which roofing will be
applied, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements.
B. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and set and
braced and that roof drains are properly clamped into position.
C. Verify that wood nailers are in place and secured and match thicknesses
of insulation required.
D. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected.
SINGLE-PLY CSPE MEMSRANS ROOFING, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07533 - 11
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS ,
NORTHAMPTON, XA KB #96079
1. Facer Type: Type II, 2 lb glass-fiber mat on both major surfaces.
2. Subject to compliance with requirements„provide roof insulation '
manufactured by the following:
a. "SarnaTherm I Isocyanurate Insulation with Manniglas 1279 for
GAF Ultra Facer" as supplied by Sarnafil, Inc. For system
warranty applications, Manufacturer's approved insulation must
be used.
3. See drawings for required thickness.
2.6 INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A. General: Furnish roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation
manufacturer for intended use and compatible with sheet roofing
material.
B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates
meeting corrosion-resistance provisions of FM 4470, designed for
fastening roof insulation to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system
manufacturer.
C. Protection Mat: Woven or nonwoven polypropylene, polyolefin, or
polyester fabric mat, water permeable and resistant to ultraviolet
degradation, type and weight as recommended by roofing system
manufacturer for application.
2.7 WALKWAYS
A. Walkway Pads: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, slip-resisting,
surface-textured walkway pads, approximately 3116 inch (5 mm) thick, of
materials acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
2.8 SHEETMETAL FLASHINGS AND TRIM MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Manufacturer's coated aluminum in widths as indicated on the
drawings and exposed to view.
1. Roof Edge: Manufacturer's standard two-piece system comprised of a
.100-inch thick anchor bar, fabricated from 6063-T6 aluminum,
finished with the Manufacturer's Kynar 500, 20 year warranteed
finish system, prepunched for fasteners; and snap-on fascia cover
fabricated from .040-inch thick aluminum.
2. Fascia Extension: Provide Manufacturer's extended fascia materials
where required, fabricated from and finished the same material as
the fascia cover.
3. Manufacturer's flashing in concealed locations as indicated on the
drawings.
B. Submit color chart of standard finishes for selection by the Architect.
2.9 SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. General Metal Fabrication: Shop-fabricate work to greatest extent
possible. Comply with details shown and with applicable requirements
of SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and other recognized
industry practices. Fabricate for waterproof and weather-resistant
performance, with expansion provisions for running work, sufficient to
permanently prevent leakage, damage, or deterioration of the work. Form
work to fit substrates. Comply with material manufacturer instructions
and recommendations for forming material. Form exposed sheet metal work
SINGLE-PLY CSPE MEMBRANE ROOFING, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07533 - 10
NORTHAMPTON NIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
C. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard sheet flashing of same
material, type, thickness, and color as sheet membrane.
D. -Flashing Membrane: Manufacturer's fiberglass-reinforced, asphalt-
compatible, 60 mil thickness membrane used where asphalt contamination
is anticipated or when adhering to smooth asphalt fleshings.
E. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard bonding adhesive.
F. Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's recommended slip sheet, of type required for
application.
G. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard aluminum bars,
approximately finch (25 mm) wide, roll formed and prepunche.d.
H. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates
meeting corrosion-resistance provisions of FM 4470, designed for
fastening sheet to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system
manufacturer.
I. Miscellaneous Fasteners and Anchors: Furnish fasteners meeting Factory
Mutual Standard 4470 for corrosion resistance; of the same type as metal
being secured. In general, provide fasteners, anchors, nails, straps,
fabricated from zinc or cadmium plated steel, galvanized, or stainless
steel.
1. Provide fasteners in lengths sufficient for a minimum embedment of
1-1/4", and of approved type for such use by the fastener
manufacturer.
2. Fasteners for attachment of metal to wood blocking: Annular ring
nails.
3. Fasteners for attachment of metal to masonry: Expansion type
fasteners.
J. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and
vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet
flashings, T-joint covers, seam calk, termination reglets, and other
accessories recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use.
2.5 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. General: Provide preformed roof insulation boards that comply with
requirements, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes and of
thicknesses indicated.
1. Provide preformed, tapered insulation boards where indicated for
sloping to drain. Fabricate with the following taper;
a. 1/4 inch per 12 inches (1:48) , unless otherwise indicated.
b. Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.
2. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other
insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate
to slopes indicated.
B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: Rigid, cellular polyisocyanurate
thermal insulation with core formed by using HCFCs as blowing agents to
comply with FS-HH-1972/2 Class 1 PS1-25 lb, ASTM C 1289, classified by
facer type as follows:
SINGLE-PLY CSPE MEMBRANE ROOFING, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07533 - 9
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA RB96079
b. HPG Roofing Systems.
C. Sarnafil, Inc. 4
2. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation:
a. Apache Products Co.
b. GAF Materials Corp.
C. NRG Barriers, Inc.
d. Sarnafil, Inc.
3. Periite Board Insulation:
a. GAF Materials Corp.
b. Schuller Roofing Systems.
2.3 PVC SHEET
A. PVC Sheet: Uniform, flexible sheet formed from polyvinyl chloride with
plasticizers and modifiers, complying with ASTM D 4434, of the following
type, grade, thickness, and exposed face color:
1. Type: Type II, Grade 1, fiber-reinforced sheet.
2. Thickness: 60 mils (1.5 mm) , nominal.
3. Exposed Face Color: Gray.
4 . Physical Properties: Provide reinforced PVC sheets with the
following properties as determined per ASTM test method indicated:
a. Color: standard.
b. Overall thickness mm (inches) : D751, 1.80 (0.072) .
C. Tensile strength, psi: D638, 1600 psi,
d. Elongation at break, %: D638, 270%, MD, 270% CMD.
e. Seam strength, % of tensile strength: D638, 85%.
f. Retention of properties after heat aging: D3045.
1) Tensile strength, % of original: D638, 93%.
2) Elongation, % of original: D638, 93%.
g. Tear resistance, (l bf. ) : D1004, 14.
h. Low temperature, (-40 deg. F) : D2136, pass.
i. Accelerated weathering test (Xenon) : D25655, 10,000 hours.
j . Cracking (7X mag.) : none.
k. Discoloration (observed) : negligible.
1. Crazing (7x mag. ) : none.
M. Linear dimension, change %: D1204, 0.0%.
n. Weight change after immersion in water, max.%: D570, 2.5%.
5. Traffic membrane: Manufacturer's textured membrane, suitable for
traffic surface.
2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system
manufacturer for intended use and compatible with membrane roofing
material.
1. Furnish liquid-type auxiliary materials that meet the Commonwealth
of Massachusetts VOC limits.
B. Fiberglass-Faced Gypsum Roof Board, 5t8 inch thick.
1. Products: "Dens-Deck", Georgia Pacific.
SINGLE-PLY CSPE MEMBRANE ROOFING, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07533 - 8
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NQRTHAMPTON, MA RS #96079
conditions without consulting the Membrane Manufacturer for precautionary
steps;
1. The roof assembly permits interior air to pressurize the membrane
underside at a rate of 2.6 lbs/sf or greater (equivalent to a 1/2—
inch water rise. )
2. Any exterior wall has 10% or more of the surface area comprised of
opening doors or windows.
3. The wall/deck intersection permits air-entry into the wall flashing
area.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. General- Warranty: The warranties specified in this Article shall not
deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other
provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run
concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under
requirements of the Contract Documents
B. Warranty Period: 15 years for labor and material from dates of
Substantial Completion. Accepted warranty program - Sarnafil Services
15 Year Roof Management Warranty.
C. Standard Roofing Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit a written warranty,
without monetary limitation, signed by roofing system manufacturer
agreeing to promptly repair leaks resulting from defects in materials or
workmanship for the following warranty period:
1. Warranty Period: 15 years.
D. Special Project Warranty: Submit roofing Installer's warranty, covering
Work of this Section, including membrane roofing, sheet flashing, roof
insulation, and fasteners for the following warranty period:
1. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion.
2. In the event any work related to roofing, flashing, or metal work is
found to be defective or otherwise not in accordance with the
Contract Documents within two years of Substantial Completion, the
roofing contractor shall remove and replace at no cost to the Owner.
3. The Contractor's warranty obligation shall run directly to the
Owner, and a copy shall be sent to the roofing Manufacturer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Performance: Provide roofing materials identified to be of generic type
indicated and tested to show compliance with required performances.
B. Compatibility: Provide products recommended by manufacturers to be fully
compatible with indicated substrates. Provide separation materials as
required to eliminate contact between incompatible materials.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
by one of the following:
1. PVC Sheet:
a. GenFlex Roofing Systems; GenCorp Polymer Products.
SINGLE-PLY CSPE MEMBRANE ROOFING, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07533 - 7
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB X96079
D. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean,
dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by
roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid materials from direct
sunlight.
1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be
applied within its stated shelf life.
E. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from
deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store
in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written
instructions for handling, storing, and protecting_ during installation.
F. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to
avoid permanent deflection of deck.
1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. General: The Owner will occupy portions of the building in the areas of
reroofing. Conduct selective demolition work in a manner that will
minimize the need for disruption of the Owner's normal operations.
Provide a minimum of 72 hours advance notice to Architect of reroofing
activities that will affect the Owner's normal operations.
B. Weather Limitations: Proceed with roofing work only when existing and
forecasted weather conditions permit roofing to be installed according
to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements.
C. Substrate Conditions: -Do not begin roofing installation until substrates
have been inspected and are determined to be in satisfactory condition.
D. Install uninterrupted waterstops at the end of each day's work;
completely remove them before proceeding with the next day's work.
1. Do not use waterstops that emit dangerous or unsafe fumes.
2. Do not permit waterstops to remain in contact with the finished roof
as the installation progresses.
3. Remove contaminated membrane and replace at no additional cost to
the Owner.
E. Utilize extreme caution not to permit incompatible materials to remain
in contact with roof membrane.
1. Incompatible materials are asphalt, coal tar, heavy oils and roofing
cements. Also creosote and preservative materials are incompatible.
2. Consult the Membrane Manufacturer regarding compatibility,
precautions and recommendations.
F. Conduct fastener pullout tests in accordance with industry standards to
verify condition of the deck/substrate and to confirm expected pullout
values.
G. Coordinate the operation of vents and air intakes and the use of spaces
requiring ventilation with the Owner.
1. Temporarily seal all rooftop vents or air intakes. Temporarily turn
off and seal all motorized vents or air intakes in the immediate
area where adhesives are being used to eliminate odors from entering
the building.
H. Do not install mechanically attached membrane under the following
SINGLE-PLY CSPE MSMHRANS ROOFING, FLASHING AND $REST METAL 07533 6
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
5. Inspect roof installation on a daily basis, prepare punchlist for
• corrective action by the Installer on a daily basis.
6. Provide a written daily reports to the Contractor, with copies to
the Architect and Owner's Representative.
F. The Contractor is responsible to pay the manufacturer for all costs
including expenses for the Technical Field Representative.
G. - No deviations from the contract specification or the -approved shop
drawings may be made without prior written approval by the Owner, the
Owner's representative, and the Manufacturer.
H. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide roofing materials with the
fire-test-response characteristics indicated as determined by testing
identical products per test method indicated below by UL, FM, or another
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable
testing and inspecting agency.
1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class A; ASTM E 108, for application
and slopes indicated.
I. Preinstallation Conference: Before installing roofing system, conduct
conference at Project site to comply with requirements of Division 1
Section "Project Meetings. " Notify participants at least 5 working days
before conference.
1. Meet with Owner; Architect; roofing Installer; roofing system
manufacturer's representative; deck Installer; and installers whose
work interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers of
roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.
2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation,
including manufacturer's written instructions.
3. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with
requirements, including flatness and fastening.
4 . Review loading limitations of deck during and after roofing.
5. Review flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof
penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction
that will affect roofing.
6. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance,
certif-icates, and inspection and testing, if applicable.
7. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during
and after installation.
8. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing
installation.
9. Document proceedings, including corrective measures or actions
required, and furnish copy of record to each participant.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with
seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name
and type, date of manufacture, and directions for storing and mixing with
other components.
B. Store membrane rolls lying down on pallets, and fully protected form the
weather with clean canvas tarpaulins.
1. Unvented polyethylene tarpaulins are not acceptable.
C. Store adhesives at room temperature above 40 degrees, F.
SINGLE-PLY CSPE MEMBRANE ROOFING, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07533 - 5
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA RB #96079
I. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in the maintenance
manuals specified in Division 1.
J. Warranty: Sample copy of standard roofing system manufacturer's warranty
stating obligations, remedies, limitations, and exclusions of warranty.
K. Inspection Report: Copy of roofing system manufacturer's inspection
report of completed roofing installation.
L. Certification that materials comply with the Commonwealth of
Massachusetts VOC limitations.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Certification: obtain written certification from manufacturer
of roofing system certifying that Installer is approved by manufacturer
to install specified roofing system. Provide copy of certification for
Architect prior to awarding roofing work. Such certification shall have
been issued by the manufacturer no less than l year prior to the date of
the Contractor's Bid Proposal.
B. The Contractor shall be doing business under the same name a minimum of
five years prior to January 1, 1998.
1. The Contractor shall have applied specified roofing system on ten
(10) or more projects which have been completed for at least two (2)
years. (Furnish names of projects) . "Projects named shall be
written fifty (50) miles radius of this project.
C. Installer's Field Supervision: Maintain a full-time supervisor/foreman
who is on job site during times that roofing work is in progress and who
is experienced in installing roofing systems similar to type and scope
required for this Project. The supervisor/foreman shall be certified by
the manufacturer as an approved applicator of the roofing system.
D. The Contractor that receives award of this project shall be the
Contractor who installs the roof. The roof work shall not be
_subcontracted without prior approval of the Owner Architect and
manufacturer.
E. Arrange with roofing membrane Manufacturer to have the services of a
full-time Technical Field Representative to visit the site to observe the
total roof application, and provide the following services:
1. Monitor quality control over the total roof operations, including,
but not limited to tear-off, wood installation, roofing, metal work,
flashing and all other Manufacturer supplied ' roofing system
components and other related products that are called for in the
assembly of the roofing system.
2. Monitor that all work is in compliance with the Contract Documents,
and the roofing system warranty.
3. Monitor that the roofing Contractor's applicators have been through
the Membrane Manufacturers' training program.
4. Monitor the quality of the hot air welded seams by taking a minimum
of three cross seam cuts measuring 2 inches by 6 inches each day
that membrane is installed.
a. Technical Field Representative shall include samples with
weekly reports.
b. Patch test cuts with same material at no additional cost to the
Owner.
SINGLE-PLY CSPE MEMBRANE ROOFING, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07533 - 4
.Fr
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
roofing system and that are listed in FM's "Approval Guide" for Class 1
or noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with
FM markings,
1. Roofing system shall comply with the following:
a. Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class. lA-90.
D. Roofing System Design: Provide a single-ply roofing system that complies
with roofing system manufacturer's written design instructions and with
the following:
1. SPRI's "Wind Design Guide for Adhered Roofing Systems.
a. Exposure Category: Exposure A.
b. System Design: System 1.
1. 6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product. Data: For each type of roofing product specified. Include data
substantiating that materials comply with requirements.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections, and details of the following:
1. Base flashings, counterflashings, and membrane terminations.
2. Tapered insulation, including slopes.
3. Expansion joints.
4 . Gravel stops
C. Samples for Verification: Of the following products:
1. 12-by-12-inch (300-by-300-mm) square of sheet roofing, of color
specified, including T-shaped side and end lap seam.
2. 12-by-12-inch (300-by-300-mm) square of roof insulation.
3. 12-by-12-inch (300-by-300-mm) square of walkway pads.
4. 12'-inch (300-mm) length of metal termination bars.
5. 6 insulation fasteners of each type, length, and finish.
D. Installer Certificates: Signed by roofing system manufacturer certifying
that Installer is approved, authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to
install specified roofing system.
E. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying
that the roofing system complies with requirements specified in the
"Performance Requirements" Article. Upon request, submit evidence of
meeting requirements.
F. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality
Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience.
Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses,
names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information
specified.
G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of tests performed by
manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified independent testing agency,
indicate compliance of components of roofing system with requirements
based on comprehensive testing of current product compositions.
H. Research/Evaluation Reports: Evidence of roofing system's compliance
with building code in effect for Project, from a model code organization
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
SINGLE-PLY CSPE MEMBRANE ROOFING, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07533 - 3
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RZI ATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA S #96079
underlying roofing materials, designated or required to be removed.
2. The removal of all existing built-in metal flashing in preparation
for the installation of new metal flashing as -detailed on the
drawings.
3. The preparation of existing roof decks to receive new roofing and
flashing herein specified.
4 . Adhered sheet roofing.
5. Installation of new roof insulation, crickets and fiber cants.
6. Installation of new walkway pads.
7. Installation of access ladders furnished by others.
8. Membrane base flashing throughout.
9. Pitch pockets where required.
10. Flashing for new and existing roof drains, vent piping and all roof
penetrations.
11. Installation of perimeter metal gravel stops and fasciae, flashings
and counterflashings.
12. New wood blocking and plywood sheathing as indicated on the
drawings,
13. Resetting of all curb-mounted mechanical equipment to receive new
base flashing.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 05320, "Metal Roof Deck" for steel roof deck.
2. Section 05500, "Metal Fabrications" for furnishing roof access
ladders installed by this Section.
3. Section 07901, "Joint Sealants."
4 . Division 15 Sections for installation of roof drains and related
piping.
5. Division 16 Sections for removal and reconnection of electrical
powered roof top mechanical equipment.
C. Related Sections for product specifications, furnished and installed by
the Roofing Filed Sub-Bid, include the following:
1. Section 02083, "Roof Asbestos Removal for removal of asbestos
containing roof material.
2. Section 06105, Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs,
blocking, and other related items.
3. Section 07721, "Roof Accessories."
4 . Section 07820, "Metal Framed Skylights."
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1079 for definition of terms
related to roofing work not otherwise defined in this Section.
1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Install sheet membrane roofing and base flashing that are
watertight; will not permit the passage of liquid water; and will
withstand wind loads, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather
without failure.
B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible
with one another under conditions of service and application required,
as demonstrated by roofing system manufacturer based on testing and field
experience.
C. FM Listing: Provide sheet membrane, base fleshings, and component
materials that meet requirements of FM 4450 and FM 4470 as part of a
SINGLB-PLY CSPE MSMSRANX ROOFING, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07533 - 2
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NOLTHAMPTON, MA RB #96079
SECTION 07533- SINGLE-PLY CSPE XMRANE ROOFING, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 TIME, MANNER AND REQUIREMENTS FOR FILING SUB-BIDS
A. Sub-Bids shall be submitted in accordance with the provisions of General
Laws, Chapter 149, Section 44A to 44I, inclusive, as amended.
B. - Sub-Bids for work under this Section shall be received by the Awarding
Authority at the School Department, 212 Main Street, Northampton, MA
01060, until 2:00 p.m. local time on April 22, 1999, at which time all
filed Sub-Bids shall be opened, read aloud, and duly recorded.
C. Sub-Bids shall be submitted on forms identical to those contained in
Bidding Requirements: Bid Form for Sub-Bidder. The Bid Forms attached
hereto are for information only and shall not be detached, filled in, or
executed. All Sub-Bids shall be submitted on the FORM FOR SUB-BID
furnished by the Awarding Authority as required by Section 44G of Chapter
149 of the General Laws, as amended. Sub-Bids Forms shall be completely
filled in and all Sub-Bids which are incomplete, conditional, obscure,
or which contain any additions not called for will be rejected.
D. Sub-Bids filed with the Awarding Authority shall be accompanied by a Bid
Deposit in the form of a certified check or a treasurer's or cashier's
check issued,by a responsible bank or trust company, payable to the City
of Northampton. A bid bond shall be:
1-. On a form satisfactory to the Awarding Authority.
2. With a surety company qualified to do business in the Commonwealth
and satisfactory to the Awarding Authority.
3. Conditioned upon the faithful performance by the principal of the
agreements contained in the Bid. The amount of such bid deposit
shall be five percent (5%) of the value of the Bid.
E. Sub-Bids for work under this Section shall be for the complete work
required as specified and as shown on the drawings.
F. Sub-Bidders are directed to the Instructions to Bidders, and to the
requirements that all bidders visit the site to determine the scope of
work required under this Section.
G. Sub-Bidders must comply with all provisions of Division 1, General
Requirements, in the same manner as the General Contractor.
H. Work to be done under this Filed Sub-Bid is included in the Contract
Documents as listed in LOD-1 through LOD-5 (List of Drawings) .
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction," 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this work. Note also all Addenda.
1.3 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. The removal and disposal of all existing roofing materials and
SINGLE-PLY CSPE MEMBRANE ROOFING, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07533 - 1
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB#96079
Procedure for Disposal: Waste material shall be promptly placed
in 6-mil polyethylene bags as it is generated. Contractor shall
count or measure the volume of filled containers leaving the work
area and maintain a written record. Bags shall be lowered from
the roof and placed in the transport vehicle or Dumpster. Bags
shall not be thrown or otherwise roughly handled.
The Contractor is responsible for determining and complying with
current waste handling, transportation, and disposal regulations
for the work site and for waste disposal landfills. The
Contractor shall comply fully with regulations and United States
Department of Transportation (DOT) and EPA requirements, DHS, DEP,
and local regulations.
The Contractor shall document actual disposal of the waste at the
designated landfill by completing a written Disposal Certificate,
signed by the landfill operator, and forwarding the original to
the Architect. Approval of Contractor payment requests shall be
denied until receipt of Disposal Certificates.
Disposal of waste asbestos material by burial under at least six
inches of daily compacted cover of non-asbestos materials and by
final cover of at least two feet of compacted earth at an
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) or State approved sanitary
landfill off Governmental property.
If rental equipment is used for asbestos work, documentation shall
be submitted showing rental company was informed of intended use
of equipment.
END OF SECTION 02083
ROOF ASBESTOS REMOVAL 02083-11
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL AUDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON.MA KB#%079
Where perimeter flashing is to be removed, place plastic sheeting
on the ground to catch fallen debris. Cut non-asbestos containing 1
built-up roof a minimum of two feet from the edge.
Where curbs, rising walls, exhaust fans, chimney, and expansion
joint are removed, cut the non-asbestos containing roofing
materials a minimum of one foot from the edge where flashing
merges with the built-up roof.
Material shall be removed wet with no visible emissions as per the
National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAPs)
and 453 CMR 7.00 Massachusetts Air Pollution Control Regulations.
Following gross removal of asbestos containing materials the
immediate area shall be vacuumed and cleaned up. Ensure that no
asbestos containing roofing materials are remaining within the
regulated work area or on the ground around the building.
Waste, including but not limited to, asbestos containing material,
suits, polyethylene, and rinse water shall be doubled bagged in 6
mil polyethylene bags and properly labeled.
Monitoring, Inspection, and Testing: Perform area air monitoring
outside the work area. Samples shall be analyzed utilizing Phase
Contrast Microscopy, NIOSH Method 7400.
The Contractor is responsible for managing monitoring, inspection,
and testing required by the OSHA Regulation 29 CFR 1926.1101 and
for continuous monitoring of subsystems and procedures affecting
the safety of the Contractor's employees. Safety of the
Contractor's employees and providing safe conditions inside the
work area for persons entering is the exclusive responsibility of
the Contractor.
The analytical laboratory that shall be used by the Contractor to
analyze the samples shall have a proficient rating in the
NIOSH/AIHA PAT Program for Asbestos Analysis via PCM.
Final Inspection: Final inspection will include the entire work
area, personnel decontamination area, plastic sheeting, seals,
over ventilation openings, doorways, windows, and other openings.
If debris, residue on surfaces, dust, or other matter is detected,
final cleaning shall be repeated. Dust samples shall be collected
and analyzed at the discretion of the Consultant to confirm visual
findings.
Clean up and Disposal: Essential parts of asbestos dust control
are housekeeping and clean up procedures. Maintain surfaces of he
asbestos-control area free of accumulations of asbestos fibers.
Give meticulous attention to restricting the spread of dust and
debris; keep waste from being disturbed over the general area. Do
not blow down space with compressed air.
When asbestos removal is completed, asbestos debris removed from
the work site, and final clean up is complete, certify the area as
safe before signs are removed
ROOF ASBESTOS REMOVAL 62093.10
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON,MA KB#96019
~ Tools: Only HEPA filter equipped exhaust and vacuum equipment
attached to power equipment (saws, drills, ) shall be used to cut
non-friable asbestos containing material.
Vacuums: Only HEPA filter equipped vacuums shall be used to clean
up ACM debris. Vacuums shall conform to ANSI Z9.2.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXECUTION:
A. Work Procedure: Perform asbestos-related work in accordance with
29 CFR 1926.1101 and 453 CMR 6.00 and as specified. Eating,
smoking, or drinking shall not be permitted in the asbestos-
control area. Personnel of other trades not engaged in the
removal or demolition of asbestos shall not be exposed at any time
to airborne concentrations of asbestos unless personnel-protection
provisions are complied with by trade personnel.
Shut down the building heating, ventilation, and air conditioning
system if passing through forced air.
Vents and other openings on the roof must be sealed with two
layers of 6-mil polyethylene sheeting prior to starting work
within the regulated areas.
Removal areas are considered regulated areas and must be separated
from non-regulated areas by caution tape or rope.
Personnel inside regulated areas must wear at a minimum, negative
pressure respirators and disposable suits.
Masking and Sealing: Seal openings and vents in areas where
release of asbestos fibers is possible. Establish an asbestos
control area with the use of caution tape or rope barriers in
order to prevent the entrance of non-protected employees into the
work area.
Removal of Asbestos Containing Roofing Materials: Sufficiently
wet ,asbestos material with a fine spray of amended water during
removal, cutting, or other handling so as to reduce emission of
airborne fibers. Remove material and immediately place in plastic
disposal bags.
Designated asbestos containing materials shall be removed
utilizing manual tools; HEPA vacuum equipped power tools, and wet
methods. Power tools, grinders, or other machines which may
produce dust during removal of asbestos containing roofing
materials are not allowed.
Work area shall be secure from entrance by untrained or
unauthorized persons throughout the work. Post warning signs and
erect temporary barricades.
ROOF ASBESTOS REMOVAL 02083-9
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB#96079
Persons entering and exiting the work area shall follow the entry
and exit procedures required by the applicable regulations and
specifications. Process equipment and material exiting the work
area through the decontamination area and thoroughly clean each
piece of equipment.
Equipment area of the decontamination area shall provide a place
to store work equipment, reusable footwear and warm clothing.
Eye protection: Provide goggles to personnel engaged in asbestos
operations when use of a full-face respirator is not required.
Caution Signs and Labels: Provide caution signs at approaches to
asbestos-control areas containing concentrations of airborne
asbestos fibers. Locate signs at a distance that personnel may
read the signs and take the necessary protective steps required
before entering the area. Provide labels and affix them to
asbestos materials, scrap, waste, debris, and products
contaminated with asbestos.
Signs shall be vertical format conforming to 29 CFR 1926.1101
(k) (6) , minimum 20 by 14 inches displaying the following legend
in the lower panel
Legend Notation
Danger 1 inch Sans Serif
Gothic or Block
Asbestos 1 inch Sans Serif
Gothic or Block
Cancer and Lung Disease Hazard IN inch Sans Serif
Gothic or Block
Authorized Personnel Only ;i inch Gothic
Respirators and Protective Clothing 4 inch Gothic
Required in This Area
Spacing between lines shall be at least equal to height of upper of any
two lines.
CONTAINS ASBESTOS FIBERS
AVOID CREATING DUST
CANCER AND LUNG DISEASE HAZARD
And:
RQ HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCE,
SOLIDS, NOS,
ORM-E, NA 9188
(ASBESTOS)
Provide other labeling as required under the Department of
Transportation regulations HM-181. In addition, bags shall be
labeled with the generators' name and address.
ROOF ASBESTOS REMOVAL 02M-8
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON,MA KB#96079
Copies of NESHAPs and other notifications shall be submitted to
the Architect and to the Owner for the facility's records in the
same time frame that notification is given to EPA, State and
local authorities.
Permits: Along with the notification to the Massachusetts
Department of Environmental Protection, a fee exempt decal and
the prescribed transmittal form (available from the Department)
must be forwarded to the following address:
Commonwealth of Massachusetts Asbestos Program
Post Office Box 120087
Boston, MA 02112-0087
D. Safety Compliance: In addition to detailed requirements of the
specifications, comply with laws, ordinances, rules, and
regulations of Federal, State, regional, and local authorities
regarding hauling, storing, transporting, and disposing of
asbestos waste materials. Comply with the applicable
requirements of the current issue of 29 CFR 1926. 1101 and 40 CFR
61. Submit matters of interpretation of standards to the
specification and referenced documents vary, the most stringent
requirements shall apply
E. Respirator Program: Establish a respirator program as required
by ANSI Z88.2 and 29 CFR 1910.134
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS:
A. The following products shall be utilized on this site:
Respirators: Select respirators approved by the Department of
Labor, or the National Institute for Occupational Safety and
Health (NIOSH) , Department of Health and Human Services.
Respirators for Handling Asbestos: Provide personnel exposed
engaged in the removal and demolition of asbestos material with
negative-pressure respiration at a minimum.
Protective Clothing: Provide personnel exposed to airborne
concentrations of asbestos fibers with a fire-retardant
disposable protective whole body clothing, head coverings,
gloves, and foot coverings. Provide disposable plastic or rubber
gloves to protect hands. Cloth gloves may be worn inside the
plastic rubber gloves for comfort but shall not be used alone.
Make sleeves secure at wrists and make foot coverings secure at
ankles by use of tape.
Decontamination Area: Provide work area with combined personnel
and equipment decontamination area. Ensure that the
decontamination area is the only means of ingress and egress for
the work area, and that the equipment, bagged waste material, and
other material exit the work area only through the
decontamination area. See OSHA Regulation 29 CFR 1926.1101,
Appendix F.
ROOF ASBESTOS REMOVAL 02083-7
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDMNS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON,MA KB#%999
employment in such occupation. Specifically identify X-ray films
of asbestos workers as to the consulting radiologist and mark
medical record jackets with the word "ASBESTOS."
Medical Records: Maintain complete and accurate records of
employee' s medical examinations for a period of 30 years after
termination of employment and make records of the required
medical examinations available for inspection and copying to the
Assistant Secretary of Labor for Occupational Safety and Health,
the Director of the National Institute for Occupational Safety
and Health (NIOSH) , authorized representatives of either, and an
employees physician upon the request of the employee or former
employee.
1.7 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
A. Training: Within three months prior assignment to asbestos work,
instruct employee with regard to the hazards of asbestos, safety
and health precautions, and the use of requirements for
protective clothing and equipment including respirators. Fully
cover engineering and other hazard-control techniques and
procedures.
B. Permits and Notifications: Contractor shall send written
notification as required by United States EPA National Emission
Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAP) Asbestos
Regulations (40 CFR 61, Final Rule) to the regional asbestos
NESHAP contact at least ten days prior to the beginning work on
asbestos-containing material. Send notification to the following
address:
Asbestos NESHAP Contact
Air Management
United States Environmental Protection Agency
John F. Kennedy Federal Building
Boston, MA 02202
617-223-4872
C. At least ten days prior to the start of abatement, send
notification to the following in accordance with Commonwealth of
Massachusetts Department of Environmental Protection Division of
Air Quality Regulation 310 CMR 7.00, 7.09, and 7.15:
Asbestos Control Technical Services
Department of Labor and Workforce Development
Division of Industrial Safety
1000 Cambridge Street, Room 1101
Boston, MA 02202
At least ten days prior to the start of abatement, send
notification to the following in accordance with the City of
Northampton Ordinance:
Health Department
Town Hall
Northampton, MA
ROOF ASBESTOS REMOVAL 02083-6
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON,MA KB#96079
area which is representative of the airborne concentration
of asbestos which may reach the breathing zone.
Non Friable Asbestos-containing Material (NF-ACM)
Material that contains more than one percent asbestos by
weight but cannot be crumbled, pulverized or reduced to
powder by hand pressure when dry. Non-friable asbestos
materials can release asbestos fibers when power tools such
as grinders, drills, and saws are used during removal and
handling during disposal.
PCM: Abbreviation for Phase Contrast Microscopy. Phase
contrast microscopy utilizes a light microscope for the
purpose of counting fibers, reference National Institute
for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) 7400 Method.
Personal Monitoring: Sampling of asbestos fiber
concentrations within the breathing zone of an employee by
the employer.
Time Weighted Average (TWA) : The TWA is an eight-hour
time-weighted average airborne concentration of fibers,
longer than 5 micrometers per cubic centimeter of air.
Three samples are required to establish the eight-hour
weight average.
Title of Materials: Materials resulting from asbestos-
removal work except as specified otherwise, shall become
property of the Contractor and shall be disposed of as
specified herein.
Protection of Existing Work to Remain: Perform demolition
work without damage or contamination of adjacent work.
Work that is damaged or contaminated shall be restored to
original condition.
Wastes: Wastes defined as asbestos-containing or
potentially contaminated materials or items. Asbestos
wastes may include building materials or items. Asbestos
wastes may include building materials, insulation,
disposable clothing, protective equipment, plastic sheeting
and tape, exhaust systems or vacuum filters, contractor
equipment, or other materials which have been potentially
contaminated with asbestos and have not been fully cleaned
inside the work area by vacuuming followed by thorough
washing.
1.6 MEDICAL REQUIREMENT: 29 CFR 1926.1101:
A. Before exposure to airborne asbestos fibers, provide workers and
other employees with a comprehensive medical examination as
required by 29 CFR 1926.1101. Examination is not required if
adequate records show the employee has been examined as required
by 29 CFR 1926.1101 requirements within the past year. The same
medical examination shall be given on an annual basis to
employees engaged in an occupation involving asbestos fibers and
within 30 calendar days before or after the termination of
ROOF ASBESTOS REMOVAL 02083-5
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KBOW9
Institute for monitoring of airborne concentrations of
asbestos fibers along with certification that persons
counting Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) Proficiency
Analytical Testing (PAT) Program.
Landfill: Written evidence that landfill is approved by
USEPA, state, or local regulatory agencies approve for
asbestos disposal.
Training: Certificates signed by employee that the
employee has received training in the proper handling of
materials that contain asbestos; understands the health
implications and risks involved including illnesses
possible from exposure to airborne asbestos fibers;
understands the use and limits of respiratory equipment to
be used; and understands the results of monitoring of
airborne quantities of asbestos as related to health and
respiratory equipment.
Monitoring Results: Fiber counting shall be completed and
results reviewed with an industrial hygienist within 16
hours. Industrial hygienist shall notify the Contractor
immediately of any exposures to asbestos fibers in excess
of the acceptable limits.
Amended Water: Water containing a wetting agent or
surfactant.
Asbestos Control Area: Area where asbestos-removal
operations are performed which is isolated by physical
boundaries to prevent the spread of asbestos dust, fibers,
or debris.
Asbestos Fibers: Refers to asbestos- fibers having an
aspect ratio of 3:1 and longer than 5 micrometers
Competent Person: Supervisor or other contractor-
authorized person who is trained in the 'provisions of the
United States, EPA National Emission Standard for Hazardous
Air pollutants, (NESHAPs) regulations and the means of
complying with the regulations. No Regulated Asbestos-
Containing Materials (RACM) shall be stripped, removed, or
otherwise handled or disturbed at a facility covered under
regulation.
Friable Asbestos Material: Material that contains more
than one percent asbestos by weight and can be crumbled,
pulverized, or reduced to power by hand pressure when dry.
HEPA Filter Equipment: High-efficiency particulate
absolute (HEPA) filtered vacuuming equipment with a filter
system capable of collecting and retaining ,asbestos fibers.
Filters shall be of 99.97 percent efficiency for retaining
fibers of 0.3 microns or larger.
Monitoring: Sampling of asbestos fiber concentrations
within asbestos-control area and outside asbestos-control
ROOF ASBESTOS REMOVAL 41583-4
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB#%079
Asbestos
40 CFR 61 Asbestos NESHAPs Revision, Final
Rule
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Publications:
Z9.2-79 Fundamentals Governing the Design
and Operation of Local Exhaust
Systems
Z88.2-80 Practices for Respiratory
Protection
Commonwealth of Massachusetts Regulations:
310 CMR 7.15 State Regulations on Asbestos
453 CMR 6.00 Massachusetts State Department of
Labor and Industries
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Before work begins on the first day that asbestos material is
handled, the Contractor shall be able to submit evidence of the
following credentials of the workers handling the asbestos
containing materials:
Evidence of fit test within previous one year period
Statement dated within previous twelve-month period signed
by a physician indicating the worker is cleared to wear a
respirator.
Certificate of training in asbestos handling by an
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) certified, and
Massachusetts licensed trainer
Current Massachusetts asbestos supervisor and worker
licenses.
Workers who cannot present satisfactory credentials shall not be
allowed to work with asbestos containing materials.
Before work begins on the first day and every day thereafter that
work occurs, the contractor shall provide an acceptable
decontamination area and an acceptable Dumpster.
B. The following items shall be available prior to commencing work
involving asbestos materials:
Certificate of Compliance: Manufacturers' certification
that vacuums, ventilation equipment, and other equipment
required to contain airborne asbestos fibers conform to
ANSI Z9.2.
Testing Laboratory: Name, address, and telephone number of
testing laboratory selected the samples have been judged
proficient by successful participation in the National
ROOF ASBESTOS REMOVAL 02083-3
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON,MA X079
the Contractor and/or Subcontractors who perform this work. Note
also all addenda. '
1.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Examine all related drawings and all other sections of the
specifications for requirements affecting the work of this
Section whether or not such work is specifically mentioned in
this Section.
1.4 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Asbestos roof demolition shall apply only to demolition of
asbestos containing materials. Based on completed testing, non-
friable asbestos is contained in the flashing and patching
materials. The flashing felts occur at the following locations
as indicated on Drawings RR1 and RR2:
Perimeter edge at gravel stop
Rising walls
Pipe penetrations
All curbing
The Contractor shall furnish supervision, labor, materials,
staging, tools, appliances, equipment, and other resources and
shall perform operations in connection with the removal, bagging,
and disposal of non-friable asbestos-containing materials. Work
shall be done in strict accordance with the technical provisions,
terms, and conditions of the contract.
Work includes removal, handling, and disposal of non-friable
materials containing asbestos fibers which are encountered during
removal and demolition operations, and incidental procedures and
equipment required to protect workers and occupants of the
building or area from contact with airborne asbestos fibers.
Under normal conditions, materials would not be considered
hazardous; however, if not properly handled, materials could
release airborne concentrations of asbestos fibers during
demolition and removal and therefore shall be handled in
accordance with the removal and disposal procedures specified
Asbestos-control area for the removal shall be considered the
project area.
B. Applicable Publications: Publications listed below form a part
of the specifications to the extent referenced. Publications are
referred to in the text by basic designation'only.
Code of Federal Regulation (CFR) Publications:
29 CFR 1910.1001 Asbestos
29 CFR 1910.1200 Hazard Communication
29 CFR 1910.134 Respiratory Protection
29 CFR 1910 145 Specifications for Accident
Prevention Signs and Tags
29 CFR 1926.1101 Asbestos Construction Standard
40 CFR 61, Sub-part A General Provisions
40 CFR 61, Sub-part M National Emission Standard for
ROOF ASBESTOS REMOVAL 02093-2
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB#%079
SECTION 02083 ROOF ASBESTOS REMOVAL
PART 1 - General
1.1 TIME, MANNER AND REQUIREMENTS FOR FILING SUB-BIDS
A. Sub-Bids shall be submitted in accordance with the
provisions of General Laws, Chapter 149, Section_ 44A; to
44I, inclusive, as amended.
B. Sub-Bids for work under this Section shall be received by
the Awarding Authority at the School Department, 212 Main
Street, Northampton, MA 01060, until 2:00 p.m. local time
on April 22, 1999, at which time all filed Sub-Bids shall
be opened, read aloud, and duly recorded.
C. Sub-Bids shall be submitted on forms identical to those
contained in Bidding Requirements: Bid Form for Sub-
Bidder. The Bid Forms attached hereto are for information
only and shall not be detached, filled in, or executed.
All Sub-Bids shall be submitted on the FORM FOR SUB-BID
furnished by the Awarding Authority as required by Section
44G of Chapter 149 of the General Laws, as amended. Sub
Bids Forms shall be completely filled in and all Sub-Bids
which are incomplete, conditional, obscure, or which
contain any additions not called for will be rejected.
D. Sub-Bids filed with the Awarding Authority shall be
accompanied by a Bid Deposit in the form of a certified
check or a treasurer's or cashier's check issued by a
responsible bank or trust company, payable to the City of
Northampton. A bid bond shall be:
1. On a form satisfactory to the Awarding Authority.
2. With a surety company qualified to do business in the
Commonwealth and satisfactory to the Awarding
Authority.
3. Conditioned upon the faithful performance by the
principal of the agreements contained in the Bid.
The amount of such bid deposit shall be five percent
(5%) of the value of the Bid.
E. Sub-Bids for work under this Section shall be for the complete
work required as specified and as shown on the drawings.
F. Sub-Bidders are directed to the Instructions to Bidders, and
to the requirements that all bidders visit the site to
determine the scope of work required under this Section.
G. Sub-Bidders must comply with all provisions of Division 1,
General Requirements, in the same manner as the General
Contractor.
H. Work to be done under this Filed Sub-Bid is included in the
Contract Documents as listed in LOD-1 through LOD-5 (List of
Drawings) .
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Documents A201, The General
Conditions of the Contract for Construction, "14th Edition, 1987,
the Supplementary General conditions and Division 1, General
Requirements, are part of this Section and shall be binding on
ROOF ASBESTOS REMOVAL 02083-1
H. The undersigned offers the following information as evidence of the Contractor's qualifications to perform the
work as bid upon according to all the requirements of the plans and specifications:
1. Have been in business under present business name for years.
`2. Ever failed to complete any work awarded?
3. List one or more recent buildings with names of the General Contractor and.Architect on which you
served as a subcontractor for work of similar character as required for the above named building:
BUILDING TYPE ARCHITECT GENERAL AMOUNT OF
CONTRACTOR CONTRACT
4. Bank Reference:
I. The undersigned hereby certifies that he is able to furnish labor that can work in harmony with all other
elements of labor employed or to be employed on the work and that he will comply fully with all laws and
regulations applicable to awards of subcontracts subject to Section 44 F. The undersigned further certifies
under penalties of perjury that this sub-bid is in all respects bona fide,fair and made without collusion or fraud
with any other person. As used in this subsection,the work"person" shall mean any natural person joint
venture,partnership,corporation or other business or legal entity.
The undersigned further certifies under penalties of perjury that the said undersigned is not presently debarred
from doing public construction work in the Commonwealth under the provisions of section twenty-nine of
chapter twenty-nine,or any other applicable debarment provisions of any other chapter of the General Laws
or any rule or regulation promulgated thereunder.
Date:
(Name of Sub-Bidder)
BY:
(Signature&Title of Person Signing Bid)
(Business Address)
(City,State and Zip)
(Telephone No.)
FORM FOR FILED SUB-BID PAGE-3
This sub-bid
[ ]May only be used by the following general bidders:
(To exclude general bidders,insert"X"in one box only and fill in blank following that box. Do not answer
C if no general bidders are excluded).
D. The undersigned agrees that,if selected as a sub-bidder,he will,within five days,Saturdays,Sundays and legal
holidays excluded,after presentation of a subcontract by the general bidder selected as the general contractor,
execute with such general bidder a subcontract in accordance with the terms of this sub-bid,and contingent
upon the execution of the general contract,and,if requested to do so in the general bid by such generalbidder,
who shall pay for the premiums thereof, furnish a performance and payment bond;of a surety company
qualified to do business under the laws of the commonwealth and satisfactory to the awarding authority,in the
full sum of the subcontract price.
E. The names of all persons,firms and corporations furnishing to the undersigned labor or labor and materials
for the class or classes or part thereof of work for which the provisions of the section of the specifications for
this subtrade require a listing in this paragraph,including the undersigned if customarily furnished by persons
on his own payroll and in the absence of a contrary provision in the specification the name of each such class
of work or part thereto and the bid price for such class of work or part thereof are:
NAME CLASS OF WORK BID PRICE
$
$
$
$
(Do not give bid price for any class or part.thereof by undersigned)
F. The undersigned agrees that the above list of bids to the undersigned represents bona fide bids based on the
hereinbefore described plans,specifications and addenda,and that,if the undersigned is awarded the Contract,
they will be used for the work indicated at the amounts stated,if satisfactory to the awarding authority.
G. The undersigned further agrees to be bound to the General Contractor by the terms of the hereinbefore
described plans, specifications(including all general conditions stated therein)and addenda,and to assume
toward him all the obligations and responsibilities that the Contractor,by those documents,assumes toward
the Owner.
FORM FOR FILED SUB-BID PAGE-2
Additions and Renovations
to the
Northampton IHigh School
Northampton,Massachusetts
Form for Filed Sub-Bid Roofing,Flashing&Sheetmetal
NAME OF BIDDER
To all General Bidders Except those Excluded
A. The undersigned proposes to furnish all labor and materials required for completing,in accordance with the
hereinafter described plans,specifications and addenda,all the work specified for the filed sub-bid titled:
including Section No(s).:
of the Specifications and in any plans specified in such section,prepared by Kaestle Boos Associates,Inc.,416
Slater Road, New Britain, CT 06050-2590, for the Additions and Renovations for the Northampton High
School,Northampton,Massachusetts for the contract sum of:
Dollars($
For Alternate No. 1: Add S. Subtract$
For Alternate No.2: Add$ Subtract$
For Alternate No.3: Add$ Subtract$
For Alternate No.4: Add$ Subtract$
For Alternate No. 5: Add$ Subtract$
For Alternate No.6: Add$ Subtract$
For Alternate No.7: Add$ Subtract$
For Alternate No. 8: Add$ Subtract$
B. This sub-bid includes Addenda numbered
C. This sub-bid
[ ]May be used by an general bidder except:
FORM FOR FILED SUB-BID PAGE-1
Addition and Renovation
Northampton High School
Northampton,MA
KWXTLE BOOS April 7, 1999 s
also-'gES,4. Addendum No. 9
ARCHITECTS
Paragraph 1.3
Subparagraph A
Sub-subparagraph 1
Delete in its entirety.
Changes to Drawings
R0.02 Information Sheet and Drawing List
Add the following,in sequence,to the List of Drawings:
A10.06 Roof Details V
A10.07 Roof Plan Traffic Pads Layout
A10.00 Overall Roof Demolition Plan
All information contained on this drawing,with the exception of the two shaded areas,is superceded by information
on Drawing A 10.01 Overall Roof Plan reissued in this Addendum.
Delete notes referring to the shaded areas and replace with the following:
Remove existing roofing materials and flashing prior to structure demolition by General Contractor.
Remove the following drawings. Replace with Drawings,attached:
A10.01 Overall Roof Plan
A10.02 Roof Details I
A10.03 Roof Details II
A 10.04 Roof Details III
*10.05 Roof Details IV
Add the following new Drawings,attached:
A10.06 Roof Details V
A10.07 Roof Plan Traffic Pad Layout
Page-2
Addition and Renovation
Northampton High School
Northampton,MA
KMSTLE WM April 7, 1999
"wE""O. Addendum No. 9
ARCHITECTS
For clarification purposes,a copy of Addendum Nos. 6,7 and 8 are attached. Sub-bidders for Roofing,Flashing
and Sheet Metal should Acknowledge receipt of all Addenda,numbered 1-9.
Changes to Addendum No.5
Division 7—Thermal and Moisture Protection
Section 07533—Single-Ply CSPE Membrane Roofing, beet Metal.
Delete changes made in Addendum No.5.All revision �1 a on�7 3 are inchRe in.
Changes to Specifications
Table of Contents APR 9 IQgq
Under Division 2,add the following Section: o s
"02083-Roof Asbestos Removal" DEPT OF$li iDi�PECTIONS
List of Drawings _ {\
Add the following in sequence:
A10.06 Roof Details V
A10.07 Roof Plan Traffic Pads Layout
Form for Filed Sub Bid
Do not use any previously issued copies.The final version is included herein.
SR21ementary Instructions to Bidders
Paragraph 4.1.9
Add the following to Sub-Bid Number 4,Sections included in Sub-Bid:
Section 02083--Roof Asbestos Removal
Division 2—Site Work
The following Section is hereby attached:
Section 02083,"Roof Asbestos Removal"
Division 7-Thermal and Moisture Protection
Section 07533 Single-Ply CSPE Membrane Roofing,Flashing&Sheet Metal
Delete in its entirety. Replace with Section 07533,"Single-Ply CSPE Membrane Roofing,Flashing&Sheet Metal"
attached.
Section 07721—Roof Accessories
Delete in its entirety. Replace with Section 07721,"Roof Accessories"attached.
Section 07820—Metal Framed Skylights
Paragraph 1.1
Subparagraph B
Delete in its entirety. Replace with the following:
B. Sub-Bids for work under this Section shall be received by the Awarding Authority at the School
Department, 212 Main Street,Northampton,MA 01060,until 2:00 p.m.local time on April 22,
1999,at which time all filed Sub-Bids shall be opened,read aloud,and duly recorded.
Page-1
r
H. The undersigned offers the following information as evidence of the Contractor's qualifications to perform the
work as bid upon according to all the requirements of the plans and specifications:
1. Have been in business under present business name for years.
2. Ever failed to complete any work awarded?
3. List one or more recent buildings with names of the General Contractor and Architect on which you
served as a subcontractor for work of similar character as required for the above named building:
BUILDING TYPE ARCHITECT GENERAL AMOUNT OF
CONTRACTOR CONTRACT
4. Bank Reference:
I. The undersigned hereby certifies that he is able to furnish labor that can work in harmony with all other
elements of labor employed or to be employed on the work and that he will comply fully with all laws and
regulations applicable to awards of subcontracts subject to Section 44 F. The undersigned further certifies
under penalties of perjury that this sub-bid is in all respects bona fide,fair and made without collusion or fraud
with kii9t person:-,M used"in this subsection, the work"person'shall mean any natural person
iher joint
venture,jV.Wersbip,porporation or other business or Iegal entity,
The undersigned further certifies under penalties of perjury that the said undersigned is not presently debarred
from doing public construction work in the Commonwealth under the provisions of section twenty-nine of
chapter twenty-nine,or any other applicable debarment provisions of any other chapter of the General Laws
or any rule or regulation promulgated thereunder.
Date:
(Name of Sub-Bidder)
BY:
(Signature&Title of Person Signing Bid)
(Business Address)
(City,State and Zip)
(Telephone No.)
FORM FOR FELED SUB-BID PAGE-5
ALLOWANCES "°
Included in the Proposal Base Bid amount are the following Allowances:
Allowance Ouanti
1. Removal and Disposal of asbestos-containing 2000 L.F.
pipe/fitting insulation under full containment
in addition to that already indicated.
Section 02080
2. Selective Demolition of ceiling and/or wall plaster 500 S.F.
to access possible asbestos containing materials
Section 02080
D. The undersigned agrees that,if selected as a sub-bidder,he will,within five days,Saturdays,Sundays and legal
holidays excluded,after presentation of a subcontract by the general bidder selected as the general contractor,
execute with such general bidder a subcontract in accordance with the terms of this sub-bid,and contingent
upon the execution of the general contract,and,if requested to do so in the general bid by such general bidder,
who shall pay for the premiums thereof, furnish a performance and payment bond of a surety company
qualified to do business under the laws of the commonwealth and satisfactory to the awarding authority,in the
full sum of the subcontract price.
E. The names of all persons,firms and corporations famishing to the undersigned labor or labor and materials
for the class or classes or part thereof of work for which the provisions of the section of the specifications for
this subtrade require a listing in this paragraph,including the undersigned if customarily furnished by persons
on his own payroll and in the absence of a contrary provision in the specification the name of each such class
of work or part thereto and the bid price for such class of work or part thereof are:
NAME CLASS OF WORK BID PRICE
$
$
$
$
$
(Do not give bid price for any class or part thereof by undersigned)
F. The undersigned agrees that the above list of bids to the undersigned represents bona fide bids based on the
hereinbefore described plans,specifications and addenda,and that,if the undersigned is awarded the Contract,
they will be used for the work indicated at the amounts stated,if satisfactory to the awarding authority.
G. The undersigned further agrees to be bound to the General Contractor by the terms of the hereinbefore
described plans,specifications(including all general conditions stated therein)and addenda,and to assume
toward him all the obligations and responsibilities that the Contractor,by those documents,assumes toward
the Owner.
FORM FOR FILED SUB-BID PAGE-4
1f
12. Removal&Disposal of Fire Doors $ /Each
13. Removal&Disposal of Built-up Roofing Tars
&Felts $ /S.F.
14. Removal&Disposal of Curbing/Penetrations
Tars and Felts $ /S.F.
15. Removal&Disposal of Glue Daubs assoc.W/
cork/chalkboards $ /S.F.
16. Removal&Disposal of Stucco/Patch Plaster
Materials $ /S.F.
17. Removal&Disposal of Radiator Liners/
Insulating Boards $ /S.F.
18. Removal&Disposal of Flex Gasket Connectors $�_ _/S.F.
19. Removal&Disposal of High Density Stage
Light Units $ /Each
20. Credit for the removal and disposal of the firebrick
associated with the three(3)Dillon BoilerOncinerator,
as non-asbestos containing material $( )/Lump Sum
21. Credit for the removal and disposal of the firebrick
associated with the one Frank Prox Boiler/Incinerator,
as non-asbestos containing material $( )/Lump Sum
22. Selective Demolition of ceiling and/or wall
plaster to access possible asbestos-containing
materials $ /S.F.
23. Removal&Disposal of window caulking $ /L.F.
LEAD ABATEMENT UNIT PRICES-Section 02481:
1. Removal&Disposal of Lead-Based Stripping
for demolition activities $ /S.F.
2. Transportation&Removal of Hazardous
Materials $ /40 C.Y.Dumpster
i
PCB ABATEMENT UNIT PRICES-Section 02082:
1. Removal&Disposal of PCB/DEPH Ballasts $ /Each
FORM FOR FILED SUB-BID PAGE-3
This sub-bid
[ ]May only be used by the following general bidders:
(To exclude general bidders,insert"X"in one box only and fill in blank following that box. Do not answer
C if no general bidders are excluded).
UNIT PRICES
The amount shown are net changes to the Contract for additional work and include the Contract`s and any
Subcontractor's amount for overhead and profit. For deleted work,the net credit to the Contract shall be 10%
less.
All work is to be accomplished in accordance with applicable sections of the Specifications.
C.Y.=cubic yard S.F.=square foot V.F.=vertical foot
S.Y.=square yard L.F.=linear foot EA.=each
All items marked with an asterisk(*)shall include the completion of the excavation,formation and compaction
of the subgrade and the disposal of surplus or unsuitable material in accordance with the Plans and
Specifications or as directed by the Architect. All rock excavations marked with two asterisks (**) shall
include additional fill material required to replace excavated rock as well as hauling and disposal of unsuitable
material and hauling,placement and compaction of new material.
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT UNIT PRICES:
Section 02080
DESCRIPTION UNIT PRICE
1. Removal&Disposal of Pipe/Fitting Insul.,0-6" $ /L.F.
2. Removal&Disposal of Pipe/Fitting Insul.,7-12" $ /L.F.
3. Removal&Disposal of Pipe/Fitting Insul.,>12" $ /L.F.
4. Removal&Disposal of Transite Pipe $ /L.F.
5. Removal&Disposal of Floor Tile&Mastic $ /S.F.
6. Removal&Disposal of Floor Tile only $ /S.F:
7. Removal&Disposal of Linoleum $ /S.F
8. Removal&Disposal of Flooring Felts
(including wood floor demo) $ /S.F.
9. Removal&Disposal of Flooring Felts Mastic
Adhesives $ /S.F.
10. Removal&Disposal of Spray On Insulation&
associated Porous Surfaces $ /S.F,
11. Removal&Disposal of Spray On Insulation
on Non-Porous Surfaces $ /S.F.
FORM FOR FILED SUB-BID PAGE'-2
Additions and Renovations
to the
Northampton high School
Northampton,Massachusetts
Form for Filed Sub-Bid-Hazardous Materials Abatement
NAME OF BIDDER:
To all General Bidders Except those Excluded
A. The undersigned proposes to furnish all labor and materials required for completing,in accordance with the
hereinafter described plans,specifications and addenda,all the work specified for the filed sub-bid titled:
including SectionNo(s).:
of the Specifications and in any plans specified in such section,prepared by Kaestle Boos Associates,Inc.,416
Slater Road,New Britain, CT 06050-2590,for the Additions and Renovations for the Northampton High
School,Northampton,Massachusetts for the contract sum of:
Dollars
For Alternate No. 1: Add$ Subtract$
For Alternate No.2: Add$ ; Subtract
For Alternate No.3: Add$ Subtract$
For Alternate No.4: Add$ ; Subtract$
For Alternate No.5: Add$ Subtract$
For Alternate No.6: Add$ Subtract$
For Alternate No.7: Add$ Subtract$
For Alternate No.8: Add$ Subtract$
B. This sub-bid includes Addenda numbered
C. This sub-bid
[ ]May be used by an general bidder except:
FORM FOR FILED SUB-BED PAGE-1
moo'_ Addition and Renovation
ri n High School
KAESTLE BOOS ..March 3, 1999
ASSOC fESJW. Addendum No. 7
ARCHITECTS
Changes to Project Manual&Specifications:
Form for General Bid(previously issued under Addendum No.5)
Unit Prices
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT UNIT PRICES
Section 02080
Unit Price Nos. 1-22 are not required to be filled in
LEAD ABATEMENT UNIT PRICES
Section 02081
Unit Price Nos. -1-2 are not required to be filled in-
PCB ABATEMENT UNIT PRICES
Section 02082
Unit Price No. 1 is not required to be filled in
Allowances
Delete Allowance No.9 in its entirety(General Contractor's only this Allowance is still to be carried by Hazardous
Materials Abatement Filed Sub Bidders and remains in Section 01021)
These Unit Prices and Allowance will be carried by the Hazardous Materials`Abatement Filed Sub Bid.
Page-1
Addition and Renovhtion � �
Northampton High School 1 ;
Northampton,MA 2 2
KAMTLE BOOS March 19, 1999 C
A8s ' TES,� Addendum No. 8 DEPT Of tlita' G INSPECTIONa
ARCHITECTS r . :1 ARA41C&
For clarification purposes,a copy of Addendum No.7 is attached(previously issued only to General Contractors)..
Bidders for Hazardous Materials Abatement should acknowledge receipt of all Addenda,numbered 1-8.
Changes to Project Manual&Specifications:
Form for Filed Sub Bid'
Do not use any previously issued copies.The final version is included herein.
Division 2—Site Work
Section 02080—Asbestos Abatement
Original paragraph 1.2
Add the following subparagraph
D. All removal is to be performed under full containment. No exceptions and/or waivers will be
accepted.
Original paragraph 1.3
Subparagraph A
Paragraph beginning with"The project involves..."
Insert the following after the words"...lab tops and sinks, ...
glue daubs associated with lab tops and sinks....
Section 02081--Lead Paint Abatement
Original paragraph 1.2
Subparagraph.B
Sub-subparagraph 4 '>
Paragraph beginning with"Abatement shall be performed, ... and associated items:
Delete in its entirety and replace with the following:
The Hazardous Materials Abatement Contractor shall perform spot removal and disposal of lead-coated
materials as necessary and as directed by the Environmental Consultant. This shall include metal or steel
components designated to be cut or torched by all contractors. Lead paint removal and disposal is to be
performed on a unit price basis.
Section 02082-PCB/AEHPIMercury Abatement
Original paragraph 1.2
Subparagraph A
Paragraph beginning with"Please Note: ..."
Delete in its entirety and replace with the following:
The Hazardous Materials Abatement Contractor is to remove and dispose of the PCB/DEPH containing ballast
only,on a unit price basis.The Hazardous Materials Abatement Contractor is also required to remove and
dispose of all mercury containing bulbs prior to dismantling the light fixture for ballast viewing.
There are approximately 4,900 mercury containing bulbs and 62 mercury containing thermostats to be
removed. These are estimated quantities. It is the responsibility of the Hazardous Materials Abatement
Contractor to field verify estimated quantities.
Page-I
r
P
Addition and Renovation
Northampton High School
Northampton, MA
KMSMC BOOS March 19, 1999
A58111-ATE"m- Addendum No. $
0.RCHITECTS
For clarification purposes,a copy of Addendum No.7 is attached(previously issued only to General Contractors).
Bidders for Hazardous Materials Abatement should acknowledge receipt of all Addenda,numbered 1-8.
Changes to Project Manual&Specifications:
Form for Filed Sub Bid
Do not use any previously issued copies.The final version is included herein.
Division 2—Site Work
Section 02080-Asbestos Abatement
Original paragraph 1.2
Add the following subparagraph:
D. All removal is to be performed under full containment. No exceptions and/or waivers will be
accepted.
Original paragraph 1.3
Subparagraph A
Paragraph beginning with"The project involves.._"
Insert the following after the words"...lab tops and sinks, ..."
"...,glue daubs associated with lab tops and sinks,..."
Section 02081—Lead Paint Abatement
Original paragraph 1.2
Subparagraph B
Sub-subparagraph 4
Paragraph beginning with"Abatement shall be performed, ..."and associated items:
Delete in its entirety and replace with the following.
The Hazardous Materials Abatement Contractor shall perform spot removal and disposal of lead-coated
materials as necessary and as directed by the Environmental Consultant. This shall include metal or steel
components designated to be cut or torched by all contractors. Lead paint removal and disposal is to be
performed on a unit price basis.
Section 02082—PCB/DBHP/Mercury Abatement
Original paragraph 1.2
Subparagraph A
Paragraph beginning with"Please Note: ..."
Delete in its entirety and replace with the following:
The Hazardous Materials Abatement Contractor is to remove and dispose of the PCB/DEPH containing ballast
only, on a unit price basis. The Hazardous Materials Abatement Contractor is also required to remove and
dispose of all mercury containing bulbs prior to dismantling the light fixture for ballast viewing.
There are approximately 4,900 mercury containing bulbs and 62 mercury containing thermostats to be
removed. These are estimated quantities. It is the responsibility of the Hazardous Materials Abatement
Contractor to field verify estimated quantities.
Page-I
Addition and Renovation
Northampton High School
Northampton,MA
KVME Boos March 3, 1999
Asks. Addendum No. 7
KAc T�CTS
Changes to Project Manual&Specifications:
Form for General Bid(previously issued under Addendum No.5)
Unit Prices
ASBESTOS ABATEMENT UNIT PRICES
Section 02080
Unit Price Nos. 1-22 are not required to be filled in
LEAD ABATEMENT UNIT PRICES
Section 02081
Unit Price Nos. 1-2 are not required to be filled in
PCB ABATEMENT UNIT PRICES
Section 02082
Unit Price No. 1 is not required to be filled in
Allowances
Delete Allowance No.9 in its entirety(General Contractor's only- this Allowance is still to be carried by Hazardous
Materials Abatement Filed Sub Bidders and remains in Section 01021)
These Unit Prices and Allowance will be carried by the Hazardous Materials Abatement Filed Sub Bid.
Page-1
Addition and Renovation
Northampton High School
Northampton,MA
March 1, 1999
Assocuvrsavc.
RRCHlTEGTS Addendum No. 6
Changes to Project Manual&Specifications:
The filed sub-bids for Hazardous Materials Abatement are rejected.
For bidding purposes,General Contractors shall post$342,000.00 for the work included under Subparagraph 15 of the
Supplementary Instructions to Bidders(refer to Addendum No.2),Hazardous Materials Abatement,and as listed on
the Form for General Bid. All General Contractor costs and coordinating services attributable to this sub-bid shall be
included in the General Contract bid. Upon completion of bidding Hazardous Materials Abatement work,the successful
bidder will be assigned to the General Contractor. The difference between the actual bid price and the$342,000.00
amount carried for this work will be adjusted via Change Order to the General Contract.
Sealed Sub-Bids(two originals)for the trade listed above,on forms furnished by the Awarding Authority,will be
received by the Awarding Authority at the School Department,212 Main Street,Northampton,MA until 2:00 p.m.
local time on Thursday,March 25, 1999;they will immediately be publicly read aloud in Council Chambers.
All Plan Holders who intend to rebid this Filed Sub Bid are required to retain their sets of
specifications and drawings,including all previously issued Addenda.
Page-1
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
B. Operating Tests: Load each elevator to its rated capacity and operate
continuously for 30 minutes over its full travel distance, stopping at
each level and proceeding immediately to the next. Record temperature
rise of pump motor (except submerged pumps) during 30-minute test
period. Record failures of elevator to perform as required.
C. Advise the Owner' s Representative, Owner, Architect, and inspection
department of governing agencies in advance of dates and times tests are
to be performed on elevators.
3 .3 PROTECTION
P0 A. At time of Substantial Completion of elevator work (or portion thereof) ,
provide suitable protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or such
other methods or procedures to protect elevator work from damage or
deterioration. Maintain protective measures throughout remainder of
construction period.
B. Provide similar protective measures for elevator units that will be
placed in temporary service, including inspection and maintenance
service during period of temporary service.
3 .4 DEMONSTRATION
00
A. Instruct Owner' s personnel in proper use, operations, and daily
maintenance of elevators. Review emergency provisions, including
OW emergency access and procedures to be followed at time of failure in
operation and other building emergencies. Train Owner' s personnel in
normal procedures to be followed in checking for sources of operational
failures or malfunctions. Confer with Owner on requirements for a
W complete elevator maintenance program.
B. Make a final check of each elevator operation with Owner's personnel
present and just prior to date of Substantial Completion. Determine
that control systems and operating devices are functioning properly.
END OF SECTION 14240
40 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240 - 13
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON. MA KB #96079
w
3 .1 INSTALLATION OF ELEVATOR SYSTEM
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations
for work required during installation. r,n
B. Excavation for Jack: Drill excavation in the elevator pit to
accommodate installation of plunger-cylinder unit; comply with
applicable requirements of Division 2 "Excavation" sections. '
1. Install casings with waterproof seals at pit floor and with
waterproof, high-pressure seal at bottom of casings. wA
2 . Provide a second (inner) casing with welded waterproof,
high-pressure seal at bottom and set inside outer (initial) casing.
C. Install plunger-cylinder units plumb and accurately centered for
elevator car position and travel; anchor securely in place.
D. Welded Construction: Provide welded connections for installation of ..
elevator work where bolted connections are not required for subsequent
removal or for normal operation, adjustment, inspection, maintenance,
and replacement of worn parts. Comply with AWS standards for
workmanship and for qualifications of welding operators.
E. Coordination: Coordinate elevator work with work of other trades for
proper time and sequence to avoid construction delays. Use benchmarks,
lines, and levels designated by Contractor to ensure dimensional
coordination of the work.
F. Sound Isolation: Mount rotating and vibrating elevator equipment and
components on vibration-absorption mounts, designed to effectively
prevent transmission of vibrations to structure and thereby to eliminate
sources of structure-borne noise from elevator system.
G. Install piping without routing underground, where possible. Where not
possible, cover underground piping with permanent protective wrapping
before backfilling. .�
H. Lubricate operating parts of systems, including ropes, if any, as
recommended by manufacturers.
I. Alignment: Coordinate installation of hoistway entrances with
installation of elevator guide rails for accurate alignment of entrances
with cars. Where possible, delay installation of sills and frames until �.
car is operable in shaft. Reduce clearances to minimum, safe, workable
dimension at each landing.
J. Leveling Tolerance: 1/2 inch, up or down, regardless of load and
direction of travel.
K. Set sills flush with finished floor surface at landings. Coordinate
with other trades to facilitate and ensure proper grouting of sills.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
.s�
A. Acceptance Testing: Upon nominal completion of each elevator
installation, and before permitting use of elevator (either temporary
or permanent) , perform acceptance tests as required and recommended by
Code and by governing regulations or agencies.
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240 - 12
see
go
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
10. Car Enclosure: Designer Series.
11. Car Dimension: Clear inside dimensions: 5 ' -8" Wide, 4' -3
1/2" deep, 8' -0" high. (7' -4" under
suspended ceiling) .
12 . Type of Car and
Hoistway Doors: 3 ' -0" wide x 7' -0" high, two speed left or
right hand, as indicated on the drawings.
13 . Additional
Features: Two in-car direction lanterns, double
stroke gong, ventilation blower,
certificate frame, telephone cabinet with
telephone.
Emergency Medical Service Features in
accordance with 524 BOARD OF ELEVATOR
REGULATIONS paragraphs 17.40-1 through
17.40-5.
B. General: Furnish and install one elevator in new addition, "Marquis"
Model, Dover Elevator Corporation, or similar by other approved
manufacturer. Equip the elevator with the following features:
1. Type of Machine: Hydraulic (holed) , Passenger type
2. Load Capacity: 2500 pounds.
3 . Car Speed: 100 feet per minute.
4. Rise: total 16' -811, over 3 floors, at levels as
follows:
a. Lower level to main level: 11' -011 .
b. Main level to main level: 9' -811 .
5 . Number of Stops: 3
6. Number of Hoistway
Openings: Two at front of hoistway, one at rear.
7. Power Supply: 480 Volts, 3 phase, 3 wire, 60 Hz, 25 HP,
WYE-Delta reduced voltage starting.
8. Control Power Supply: 120 Volts, 1 Phase, 60 Hz.
9. Lighting
Power Supply: 120 Volts, 1 Phase, 60 Hz.
10. Car Enclosure: Designer Series.
11. Car Dimension: Clear inside dimensions: 5' -8" Wide, 4' -3
1/2" deep, 8 ' -0" high. (7' -4" under
suspended ceiling) .
12. Type of Car and
Hoistway Doors: 3 ' -0" wide x 7' -0" high, two speed left or
right hand, as indicated on the drawings.
13 . Additional
Features: Two in-car direction lanterns, double
PP stroke gong, ventilation blower,
certificate frame, telephone cabinet with
telephone.
Emergency Medical Service Features in
accordance with 524 BOARD OF ELEVATOR
REGULATIONS paragraphs 17.40-1 through
17.40-5.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
® HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240 - 11
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
doors shall begin to close in a manner conforming to ANSI/UFAS
standards.
2.7 PASSENGER HOISTWAY ENTRANCES alai
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard, pre-engineered, hollow metal
type, sliding, door-and-frame hoistway entrances complete with track
systems, hardware, safeties, sills, toe and sight guards, and
accessories. Match car enclosure doors for size, number of door panels,
and door panel movement. Provide frame-section size and profile to
coordinate with hoistway wall construction as indicated. �.
B. Materials and Fabrication: Provide selections indicated that comply
with manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following:
1. Enameled Frames: Formed steel with manufacturer's standard baked
synthetic enamel finish, colors as selected by Architect.
2 . Primed Steel Panels: Flush hollow-metal construction, fabricated ,tee
from ASTM A 366 cold-rolled steel, 24 gauge commercial quality,
Class 1, matte finish, stretcher leveled. Provide with
factory-applied, rust-inhibitive enamel prime coat finish.
3 . Aluminum Sills: Extruded aluminum, with grooved surface, 1/4-inch
thickness, mill finish.
C. Accessories: Provide 4" high floor markings on the hoistway side of the
hoistway entrances. Provide raised jambs marking plates, conforming
with ASME/ANSI A117.1 and UFAS Codes, applied to both jambs of each
hoistway entrance.
so
2.8 ELEVATOR DESCRIPTIONS
A. General: Furnish and install one elevator in existing building, w
"Fleetwood" Model, Dover Elevator Corporation, or similar by other
approved manufacturer. Equip the elevator with the following features:
1. Type of Machine: Hydraulic (holed) , Passenger type +
2 . Load Capacity: 2100 pounds.
3 . Car Speed: 100 feet per minute.
4 . Rise: total 37' -1011, over 5 floors, at levels as
follows:
a. Lower level to main level:
11-0" +/- .
b. Main level to second level:
12 ' -5 5/8" +/- .
C. Second level to third level:
12 ' -4 3/8" +/- .
d. Third level to art room level:
e�
5 . Number of Stops: 5
6. Number of Hoistway
Openings: Four at front of hoistway, one at rear.
7. Power Supply: 480 Volts, 3 phase, 3 wire, 60 Hz, 25 HP,
WYE-Delta reduced voltage starting.
8 . Control Power Supply: 120 Volts, 1 Phase, 60 Hz.
9. Lighting
Power Supply: 120 Volts, 1 Phase, 60 Hz.
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240 - 10
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
a. Enameled Steel Panels: Flush hollow-metal construction,
fabricated from ASTM A 366 cold-rolled steel, commercial
quality, Class 1, matte finish, stretcher leveled. Provide
with factory-applied baked-on enamel finish; colors as
selected by Architect.
W b. Stainless Steel: AISI Type 302/304 with No. 4 satin finish.
C. Aluminum Sills: Cast or extruded aluminum, with grooved
surface, 1/4-inch thickness, mill finish.
d. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure type complying with NEMA LD3,
Type GP-50 (0.050-inch nominal thickness) ; color, texture, and
pattern as selected by Architect from standard products
available in the industry.
e. Fabricate car door frame integrally with front wall of car.
f. Fabricate car with recesses and cutouts for signal equipment.
g. Luminous Ceiling: Fluorescent light fixtures and open
egg-crate plastic, of acrylic or other permanent rigid plastic
complying with flammability requirements.
h. Rubber Tile Floor Covering: by Section 09661 "Resilient Tile
Flooring, Wall Base, and Accessories" .
i. Fabricate car top with emergency exit and electric alarm
contact.
j . Provide manufacturer' s standard protective panels fabricated
from fire retardant quilted canvas duck.
B. Door Operation: Provide power door controller mounted on top of
elevator car for automatic operation of door initiated at car arrival
at landing:
1. Door opening and closing times shall conform to ASME/ANSI A117.1.
2 . Provide positive interlock to hoistway entrances preventing
operation of the elevator when all doors are closed. Interlock
shall maintain doors in closed position while elevator is away from
landing.
2 .6 PERSONAL PROTECTIVE DEVICES
A. Handrails: Provide manufacturer's standard stainless steel handrails,
either continuous or segmented, on side walls and back wall.
B. Door Edge Protective Device: Provide retractable edge shoe on leading
edges of elevator entrance doors that causes doors to stop and reopen
upon contacting an obstruction in entrance.
C. Photo-Eye Detection Device: Provide electronic photo-eye device with
timed cutout, projecting dual light beams across car entrance at 5-inch
and 29-inch heights, that when interrupted will cause closing doors to
stop and reopen. Provide keyed switch in car operating panel or toggle
switch in service cabinet for disconnecting photo-eye protective device.
D. Proximity-Type Detection Device: Provide electronic proximity-type door
reversal device with zone of detection that moves with doors. Presence
of a person or object within zone of detection shall cause closing doors
to stop and reopen.
E. Nudging Feature: After car doors are prevented from closing for a
predetermined adjustable time period, through activation of detection
device or door edge protective device, a loud buzzer shall sound and
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240 - 9
moll I
ON
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON. MA KB #96079
direction; 1-button station where only one direction of travel am
is available and indicate which direction that is. Provide
unit with flat faceplate designed for flush-mounting on wall
with body of unit recessed in wall. on
8. Hall Lanterns: Provide units with illuminated "up" and "down"
signal arrows, but provide single arrow where only one direction
is possible. Provide units projecting from faceplate for ease of 4W
angular viewing, except provide flush units where a location in
hoistway entrance frame is indicated. Match materials, finishes,
and mounting method of hall push-button stations. so
a. At manufacturer's option, hall lantern signals may be placed
either above or beside the hoistway entrance or in both jambs
of entrance frame for each elevator. Mount at minimum of "'
6' -0" above finished floor.
b. In conjunction with each hall lantern device, provide an
audible signal to indicate that a car is arriving in response
to a hall call and to indicate direction of car travel.
Signal shall sound once for up direction of travel and twice
for down direction.
1) At manufacturer's option, audible signal may be placed on
each car.
.w
9. Hall Position Indicator: Provide illuminated-signal type or
digital-display type, located above the hoistway entrance at each
level. Match materials, finishes, and mounting method of hall
push-button stations.
a. At manufacturer's option, hall lantern signals may be
integrated with hall position indicators.
e
10. Telephone: Provide accessible telephone handset, rough-in, and
wiring within the travelling cable for telephone hand set in the
car, contained in flush-mounted cabinet and complete with .�
identification and instructions for use. Provide fireman's
telephone jack connected to same in main lobby vestibule.
11. Alarm System: Provide emergency alarm bell properly located within
building and audible outside hoistways, equipped to sound sus
automatically in response to emergency stops and in response to
"Alarm" button on each car control station.
12. Pit Switch: Provide emergency stop switch located in the pit
accessible from the pit access door.
2 .5 PASSENGER ELEVATOR CAR ENCLOSURES
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-engineered car enclosures
of the selections indicated. Include ventilation, lighting, ceiling
finish, wall finish, access doors, doors, power door operators, sill
(threshold) , trim, and accessories. Provide horizontal sliding doors
of manufacturer's standard flush panel type, with operation and number
of panels as indicated. Provide manufacturer's standard protective edge
trim system for door and wall panels. Wo
1. Materials and Fabrication: Provide selections as indicated for
each car enclosure surface; provide manufacturer's standards, but
not less than the following:
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240 - 8
40
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
2 .4 SIGNAL EQUIPMENT
A. General: Provide signal equipment for each elevator or group of
elevators to comply with requirements indicated below.
1. Provide illuminated hall-call and car-call buttons that light up
when activated and remain lighted until call or other function has
been fulfilled; fabricate of acrylic or other permanent translucent
plastic.
2 . Except for buttons and illuminated signal elements, fabricate
signal equipment with exposed surfaces of stainless steel with
manufacturer's standard directional polish or satin finish.
3 . Car Control Stations: Provide microprocessor-based car control
station in each car with flush-mounted metal faceplates containing
call button for each landing served and other buttons, switches,
and controls required for specified car operation and control.
Mount at height complying with ASME/ANSI A117.1. If not otherwise
an indicated, mount in return panel adjacent to car door. Provide
operating device symbols as required by Code. Mark other buttons
and switches with manufacturer' s standard identification for
required use or function.
a. Provide car control station at front entrances of the
passenger elevator; equip with required keyed control
switches.
b. Furnish all buttons and controls with raised markings in
conformance with Code requirements.
C. Utility Outlet: Provide tamper resistant type, 20 amp rated,
NEMA 5-2aR configuration outlet in the car operating panel,
fed by car lighting cable.
4 . Car Position Indicator: For passenger elevator cars, provide
either illuminated-signal type or digital-display type, located
near top of each car or in car control station. Include
direction-of-next-travel signal if not provided in car control
station.
a. In addition to visual indicator, provide audible signal to
go indicate to passengers that car is either stopping at or
passing each of the floors served.
5. Emergency Car Lighting: Provide power unit with 12 volt sealed,
go rechargeable battery and totally static circuits illuminating the
elevator car and providing current to the alarm bell, complying
with ASME/ANSI 117.1.
00 6. Inspection Operation Controls: Provide controls on top of the car
continuing continuous pressure up and down buttons, emergency stop
button, and toggle switch.
a. The toggle switch activates the inspection operation controls,
and deactivates the door operator, car and hall buttons.
b. Provide enabling keyswitch in the car operating panel to
activate the Inspection Operating Controls.
7. Hall Push-Button Station: Provide hall push-button station at each
landing for each elevator.
a. Provide 2-button station where passengers can travel either
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240 - 7
an
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
WX
H. Piping: Provide size, type, and weight piping recommended by
manufacturer, and provide isolation couplings to prevent sound/vibration
transmissions from power unit.
an
I. Inserts: Furnish required concrete and masonry inserts and similar
anchorage devices for the installation of guide rails, machinery, and
other components of elevator work where installation of devices is
indicated as work of another specification section. ..
J. Car Frame and Platform: Manufacturer's standard welded steel units.
no
2.3 CONTROL SYSTEMS
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard control system for each
elevator as required to provide automatic operation of the type ■'"
indicated and defined in the Code as "Operations. "
B. Single Elevator Control - Passenger: Provide solid-state "Selective an
Collective Automatic Operation, " as defined in ASME/ANSI A117.1.
C. Hydraulic Control System: Provide compact design system suitable for
operation under the required pressure, mounted in the storage tank. as
Equip the system with a manifold type control valve with up, down, and
check valve sections. Solenoid valves will direct the main valve;
controlling up and down starting, transition from full speed to ON
levelling speed, up and down stops, pressure relief, and manual
lowering. The main valve sections will control down speed, and up and
down levelling.
w
1. All functions in the system will be fully adjustable to meet
contact conditions.
2 . Preadjust all control systems at the factory. aw
3 . The manual lowering feature shall permit lowering the elevator at
slow speed for adjusting, or in the event of power failure.
4 . Provide three phase overload device, protecting the motor. Provide
a reverse phase relay on the controller. so
5. Provide car stall protective circuit which will stop the motor and
pump, return the car to its lowest landing in the event that the
car, while travelling up, does not reach its designated landing
within a predetermined time interval . This circuit shall permit a
normal exit from the car, but prevent further operation of the
elevator until correction of the problem.
w
a. The circuit shall return elevator to the first floor if it
stalls above that landing.
6. Provide connection from the smoke detection loop circuit to the
controller.
D. Auxiliary Operations/Controls: In addition to primary control system .w
features, provide the following controls or operational features for
passenger elevators, except where otherwise indicated:
1. Automatic 2-way leveling device, capable of bringing the car to a
stop with 1/4" of the landing level, regardless of load, or
direction of travel, and capable of maintaining the leveling zone
irrespective of hoistway door operation.
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240 - 6
.w
4
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA
KB #96079
1. Dover Elevator Corp.
2 . Otis Elevator Corp.
3 . Schindler Elevator Corp.
ON
2 .2 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
A. General Requirement: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-engineered
elevator systems that will comply with or fulfill the requirements of
elevator description in this Section or, at manufacturer's option,
provide custom-manufactured elevator systems that will fulfill
requirements. Where components are not otherwise indicated, provide
standard components published by manufacturer as included in standard
pre-engineered elevator systems and as required for a complete system.
B. Hydraulic Machines and Elevator Equipment: Provide manufacturer's
standard single-acting under-the-car hydraulic plunger-cylinder unit for
each elevator, with electric pump-tank-control system equipment in
gas machine room as indicated.
C. Cylinder Well Casing: Provide and install a waterproof steel well
casing, equipped with inside and outisde water stop rings to contain the
cylinder, seal the joint between plunger and casing, and to provide
waterproof seal between the casing and the pit.
1. This Contractor is responsible for installing the cylinder in
either earth or rock. Refer to boring data elsewhere in the
Contract Documents.
D. Cylinder: Provide cylinder constructed of steel pipe of sufficient
thickness and suitable for the operating, pressure described by Code.
1. Equip cylinder with a cylinder head and drip ring, internal guide
ring, and self adjusting packing.
2 . Protect the cylinder with two coats of "Roskote Mastic",
interspaced with a spiral wrapping of "Royston glass-wrap"
fiberglass and a final outside wrap of heavy kraft paper.
E. Plunger: Provide plunger constructed of steel tubing or pipe of proper
diameter, machined true and smooth, polished finish.
1. Equip plunger with an electrically welded stop ring, preventing the
plunger from leaving the cylinder.
F. Pumping Unit:
1. Provide an integral unit designed for elevator use, consisting of
an electric displacement screw type pump with screened suction
inlet, and a polyphase squirrel cage induction, reduced voltage
starting type motor.
G. Oil Storage Tank: Provide a steel constructed oil storage tank with
removable cover and removable oil dip stick, equipped with reinforced
isolation mount on the tank bottom, to receive the pump and submergible
motor.
1. Tank configuration: Mount the control valve in the discharge line
above the oil level, with easy access from the top of the tank.
2 . Provide a sufficient supply of oil for proper operation.
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240 - 5
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTFLAMpmpN MA KB 496079
Contractor, Installer, and Manufacturer, agreeing to replace, repair,
or restore defective materials and workmanship of elevator work during
warranty period. This warranty shall be in addition to, and not a
limitation of, other rights the Owner may have against the Contractor
under the Contract Documents.
1. "Defective" is hereby defined to include, but not by way of
limitation, operation or control system failures, performances 40
below required minimums, excessive wear, unusual deterioration or
aging of materials or finishes, unsafe conditions, the need for
excessive maintenance, abnormal noise or vibration, and similar
unusual, unexpected, and unsatisfactory conditions.
2. Warranty period is 12 months starting on date of Substantial
Completion.
B. Warranties: Provide coincidental product warranties where available for
major components of elevator work. Submit with maintenance manuals.
1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Initial Maintenance Service: Provide full maintenance service by
skilled, competent employees of the elevator Installer for period of 12 on
months following Date of Substantial Completion. Include monthly
preventive maintenance performed during normal working hours. Include
repair or replacement of worn or defective parts or components and an
lubricating, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper elevator
operation in conformance with specified requirements. Include
24-hours-per-day, 7-days-per-week emergency callback service. Exclude
only repair or replacement due to misuse, abuse, accidents, or neglect so
caused by persons other than Installer's personnel.
B. Continuing Maintenance Service: Upon request from Owner, Installer we
shall provide a continuing maintenance proposal to Owner, in the form
of a standard yearly (or other period) maintenance agreement, starting
on date construction contract maintenance requirements are concluded.
State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period ■w
and for future renewal options.
C. Solid State Diagnostic Tools:
1. The elevator control equipment for all elevators will contain
diagnostic capabilities required for the ease of complete
maintenance of all aspects of the control, dispatch systems and
solid state motor drive units. The diagnostic system shall e an
integral part of the controller and provide user friendly
interaction between the serviceman and the controls. All such
systems shall be free from secret codes and decaying circuits that so
must be periodically reprogrammed by the manufacturer. Systems
that require hookup of external devices for troubleshooting are not
acceptable.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS *
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
of one of the following:
w�
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240 - 4
w
04
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
40
materials and 10-inch to 12-inch lengths of running trim members.
F. Maintenance Manuals: At the completion of the work and before final
acceptance of the elevator installation, the elevator contractor shall
provide the following items listed. These items shall become the
Owner's property.
1. Wiring Diagrams: Three sets of "as installed" straight line wiring
diagrams showing the electrical connections of all equipment and
all modifications to control circuits. One set of straight line
► wiring diagrams shall be reproducible. Include identification and
location of all apparatus or equipment.
2 . Parts Catalog: Three sets of complete parts catalogs listing all
replaceable parts including manufacturer' s identifying numbers and
ordering instructions.
3 . Printed instructions: Three sets of neatly bound instructions
explaining all operating features.
4 . Complete software documentation for all installed equipment.
5. The elevator installation shall be a design that can be
maintainable by any licensed elevator maintenance company employing
0" journeymen mechanics, without the need to purchase or lease
additional diagnostic devices, special tools, or instructions from
the original equipment manufacturer.
as Provide on site capability to diagnose faults to the level of
individual circuit boards and individual discreet components for
the solid state controller.
If the equipment for fault diagnosis is not completely detachable
within the controller, but requires a separate, detachable device,
that device shall be furnished to the Awarding Authority as part
00, of this installation. Such device shall become property of the
Awarding Authority.
G. Certificates and Permits: Provide Owner with copies of all
inspection/acceptance certificates and operating permits as required by
governing authorities to allow normal, unrestricted use of elevators.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage the elevator manufacturer or an
installer approved by the elevator manufacturer and who has completed
elevator installations similar in material, design, and extent to that
indicated for Project which have resulted in installations with a record
of successful in-service performance.
B. Regulatory Requirements: In addition to local governing regulations,
comply with applicable requirements of ASME/ANSI A117.1, Safety Code for
Elevators and Escalators, and Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards
(hereafter referred to as the "Code") , and the Massachusetts
Architectural Access Board.
so C. The elevator contractor shall furnish all licenses and permits and shall
arrange for and make all inspections and tests required thereby.
1.7 WARRANTY
MR A. Special Project Warranty: Provide special project warranty, signed by
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240 - 3
WWI
on
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON. MA KB #96079
w�
1. Passenger Type Holed Elevators.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that
relate to this Section:
1. Construction of a legal hoistway and pit, suitable machine room is
specified in other Sections. w
2 . Setting of sleeves, inserts, and anchoring devices in concrete is
specified in Section 03300, "Cast-in-Place Concrete" .
3 . Setting of sleeves, inserts, and anchoring devices in masonry is
specified in Section 04200, "Unit Masonry" .
4. Subsills and structural framing of hoistway entrances are specified
in Section 05500 "Metal Fabrications. "
5. Field painting of hoistway entrances is specified in Section 09900,
"Painting. "
6. Ventilation of hoistway and machine room is specified in Division
15. w
7. Electrical service to each elevator, including fused disconnect
switch to the hoistway and machine room, is specified in Division
16 sections.
8. All hoisting required for the completion of this Work.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
�w
A. Hydraulic elevators are hereby defined to include systems in which cars
are hoisted either directly or indirectly by action of a hydraulic
plunger and cylinder (jack) ; with other components of the work including
fluid storage tank, pump, piping, valves, car enclosures, hoistway
entrances, control systems, signal equipment, guide rails, electrical
wiring, roping, buffers, and devices for operating, dispatching, safety,
security, leveling, alarm, maintenance, and similar required 1111e
performances and capabilities.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
am
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract
and Division 1 Specifications Sections.
B. Product Data for each principal component or product of each elevator, 40
including certified test reports on required testing. Indicate
capacities, sizes, performance and operating characteristics, features
of control system, finishes, and similar information. Indicate any no
variations from specified requirements.
C. Shop Drawings including dimensioned drawings showing plans, elevations,
sections and large-scale details indicating service at each landing,
coordination with building structure and relationships with other
construction, and details of car enclosures and hoistway entrances.
Include elevatoring diagrams to indicate elevator service to each level ..
and include excavation requirements for jack.
D. Wiring diagram detailing wiring for power, signal and control systems
differentiating clearly between manufacturer-installed wiring and
field-installed wiring. Indicate maximum and average power demands.
E. Samples of exposed finishes of car enclosures, hoistway entrances, and
signal equipment. Provide 6-inch- to 8-inch-square samples of sheet
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240 - 2
40
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHA14PT N MA KB #96079
SECTION 14240 - HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 TIME, MANNER AND REQUIREMENTS FOR FILING SUB-BIDS
A. Sub-Bids shall be submitted in accordance with the provisions of General
Laws, Chapter 149, Section 44A to 44I, inclusive, as amended.
B. Sub-Bids for work under this Section shall be received at the Council
Chambers at Town Hall, 210 Main Street, Northampton, MA 01060, until
2:00 p.m. local time on February 9, 1999, at which time all filed Sub-
Bids shall be opened, read aloud, and duly recorded.
C. Sub-Bids shall be submitted on forms identical to those contained in
Bidding Requirements: Bid Form for Sub-Bidder. The Bid Forms attached
hereto are for information only and shall not be detached, filled in,
or executed. All Sub-Bids shall be submitted on the FORM FOR SUB-BID
furnished by the Awarding Authority as required by Section 44G of
Chapter 149 of the General Laws, as amended. Sub-Bids Forms shall be
completely filled in and all Sub-Bids which are incomplete, conditional,
obscure, or which contain any additions not called for will be rejected.
D. Sub-Bids filed with the Awarding Authority shall be accompanied by a Bid
so Deposit in the form of a certified check or a treasurer' s or cashier' s
check issued by a responsible bank or trust company, payable to the City
of Northampton. A bid bond shall be:
1. On a form satisfactory to the Awarding Authority.
2 . With a surety company qualified to do business in the Commonwealth
and satisfactory to the Awarding Authority.
3 . Conditioned upon the faithful performance by the principal of the
agreements contained in the Bid. The amount of such bid deposit
shall be five percent (5%) of the value of the Bid.
E. Sub-Bids for work under this Section shall be for the complete work
required as specified and as shown on the drawings.
w F. Sub-Bidders are directed to the Instructions to Bidders, and to the
requirements that all bidders visit the site to determine the scope of
work required under this Section.
G. Sub-Bidders must comply with all provisions of Division 1, General
Requirements, in the same manner as the General Contractor.
H. Work to be done under this Filed Sub-Bid is included in the Contract
Documents as listed in LOD-1 through LOD-5 (List of Drawings) .
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
!w
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
40 General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this work. Note also all Addenda.
1.3 SUMMARY
as
A. This Section includes the following hydraulic elevators:
go HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS 14240 - 1
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #9607
■w
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .1 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, drawings, diagrams, templates,
instructions, and directions for assembling and installing portable
bleacher seating systems. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project
site.
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
MW
A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting
required for installing permanent grandstand seating systems. Set
grandstand seating systems accurately in location, alignment, and IN
elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack;
and measured from established lines and levels.
B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. on
Do not weld, cut, or abrade the surfaces of exterior units that have
been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are intended for bolted
or screwed field connections.
am
3 .3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with plans, approved shop drawings; manufacturer's ®+
written instructions and recommendations for installation, as applicable
to project conditions and supporting substrates. Erect permanent
grandstand seating systems securely, with provisions for thermal and
structural movement.
B. Installation shall be performed directly by the Manufacturer or by a
factory certified Installer.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Touch-up Painting: Cleaning and touch-up painting of field welds,
bolted connections, and abraded areas of the shop paint on miscellaneous
metal is specified in Section 09900 "Painting. "
B. For galvanized surfaces, clean bolted connections, and abraded areas,
and apply galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
C. Clean all surfaces after erection in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
D. Remove and properly dispose of all packaging and construction debris.
END OF SECTION 13125
no
Aw
am
PERMANENT GRANDSTAND SEATING SYSTEM 13125-8
■w
4"
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
1. Provide decking attachment without the use of friction clip
hardware, not exposed, and installed into a system such that all
seat, deck and aisle member attachment may be inspected from the
top side of the grandstand deck.
2 . Provide tamperproof hardware at all seatboard locations.
3 . Provide internal splice sleeves penetrating a minimum of 6" into
each end of the adjoining extrusions at all perpendicular seams in
load bearing deck members to maintain alignment of decking members
during expansion/contraction.
a. All seams shall occur at steel supports.
2.3 REINFORCED CONCRETE
PW A. Concrete foundations and slabs-on-grade is provided by Section 03300,
"Cast-in-Place Concrete" .
2.4 MODULAR PRESSBOX
A. Fabricate permanent grandstand seating systems to accept modular
pressbox, specified in Section 13050, "Modular Pressbox.
2 .5 FINISHES, GENERAL
!! A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative
to applying and designing finishes.
B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
2 .6 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
u� A. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous metal surfaces
to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface
preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of
on
installed metal fabrications:
1. Exteriors (SSPC Zone 1B) : SSPC-SP-A6 "Commercial Blast Cleaning. "
40 B. Prime Coat: Zinc rich coating, applied to a dry film thickness of 2.5
to 3 .5 mils.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
on "Interzinc 308611 , Courtaulds, Inc.
C. Finish Coat: Acrylic modified aliphatic polyurethane, 1.5 to 2 .0 dry
film thickness.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
"Interthane 990HS11, Courtaulds, Inc.
D. Powder Coat System: Thermoplastic polyester resin complying with
Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers Association specification AAMA
603 .8-92 "Voluntary Performance Requirements and Test Procedures of
Pigmented Organic Coatings on Extruded Aluminum."
PERMANENT GRANDSTAND SEATING SYSTEM 13125-7
Ift
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
2 . Front of Grandstand: 2 rails with chain link fence, 42" high. go
3. Side of Grandstand: 2 rails with chain link fence, 54" high.
G. Extrusions: 6063-T6 extruded aluminum with a fluted surface and a min. M
wall thickness indicated.
1. Seats: .080" thickness extrusion with fluted surface, 2.750" actual
height, 12" actual width; powder coat finish. w
2. Decking: Maintenance free, corrosion-resistant-coated, .078" wall
thickness, fabricated of sufficient rigidity and reinforcing to
eliminate oil-canning; with fluted tread surface and integral ,o
continuous interlocking connections, so that there are no gaps in
the longitudinal joints, or in the riser plate connection; 204R1
anodized finish.
3 . Risers: .078" thickness, fabricated with a matching interlocking
connection to the front of the decking, of sufficient height to lap
the back tread extrusion, powder coat finish.
4. Treads : Fabricated with nose, back and flat extruded sections, wa
placed side-by-side and shop-welded with continuous longitudinal
seams, assembled with a 1 percent slope to the front for water
drainage; in lengths from 15 ' to 37' -611, with factory installed end
caps; with concealed mounting clips and hot-dipped galvanized so
bolts.
a. The use of through bolting of the deck will not be permitted. so
5. Ramps and Ramp Platform Frames: Fabricated from mill finish 9" x
1.40" channel, with 3" x 1.40" vertical channel columns.
6. Ramps and Ramp Platform Treads: Fabricated from mill finish .078" Ift
thickness extrusion with fluted surface and 1.75" actual vertical
height; designed to mate with interlocking longitudinal joints.
7. Stairs and Stair Platform Frames: Fabricated from A36 steel 00
channel.
8. Stairs and Stair Platforms: Fabricated from mill finish .078"
thickness extrusion with fluted surface and 1.75" actual vertical
height; designed to mate with interlocking longitudinal joints. me
9. Intermediate aisle steps: Full span between main steel supports,
attached to main steel supports, running in the same direction as
the seatboard; providing a minimum 12" clear level access to the r
vertical aisle stairs, dividing them in half for uniform exit and
entrance.
a. The use of intermediate aisle steps that create a tripping wr
hazard will not be permitted.
10. Exposed extrusion end caps:
w
a. Seatboard end caps: Injection molded high density polyethylene
covering all four edges of the plan.
b. Seatboard, walkway, footboard, and aisle board end caps: One up
piece mill finish aluminum channel, riveted to the underside
of the plank.
C. Handrail posts: Cast aluminum top caps.
w
H. Hardware: Provide hot-dipped galvanized steel hardware for field
installation.
w.
PERMANENT GRANDSTAND SEATING SYSTEM 13125-6
ON
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTIIAMPmON MA KB #96079
A. General: Provide permanent grandstand seating system designed in
accordance with the following Codes and Standards:
40 1. 780 CMR: The Massachusetts State Building Code, Sixth Edition.
2 . NFPA 102 "Assembly Seating, Tents and Membrane Structures."
3 . 521 CMR: Architectural Access Board.
4. AISC Manual of Steel Construction, Allowable Stress Design, Ninth
Edition.
5. Specifications for Aluminum Structures by the Aluminum Association
For America.
go 6. Federal Specification LP-390C, Type 1, Class M, Grade 2, Category
3 .
B. Understructure: Provide understructure of open bay design, permitting
the construction of a building underneath, without the use of individual
stringer supports cross-braced as indicated.
C. Structural Steel:
a. Detailing, fabrication, and erection: AISC Specification, 9th
Edition, 1990.
b. Structural steel:ASTM A36, with Perma Coat protection.
C. All bolts V" diameter and smaller:ASTM A307 and ASTM A325
otherwise.
d. Threaded rod:ASTM A36.
e. Welds: AWS D1.1 latest edition.
f. Electrodes: E70XX.
g. Columns, Support Beams, and Stringers: Wide flange shapes.
D. Powder Coated Structural Steel:
go a. Clean all ferrous metal components of all mill scale and
corrosion prior to treatment.
b. Treat material in a chemical, clean and rinse prior to
coating.
so C. Powder: Dry thermoplastic polyester resin.
d. Powder Coat System: Tested in accordance with ASTM B-117.
e. Galvanized or weathering steel is not permitted.
am f. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard
color chart.
E. Guardrail Systems: Provide guardrails fabricated from anodized extruded
on aluminum extruded, 6061-T6 alloy, anodized to clear 204R1.
1. Provide guardrail system of interlocking design with positive
through bolt fastening, including top rail designed to fully cover
the rail support posts for a totally snag-free area and eliminate
the potential of sharp edge contact with the spectators.
2 . Guardrails: Extruded aluminum pipe, 1%11 maximum o.d.
t 3 . Guardrail Supports: Extruded aluminum channel, 3" x 1.40" x .1888" .
4. Infill Area of Guardrail System: Chain link fence, 2" mesh, 6
gauge vinyl-coated fabric.
F. Provide guardrail systems in the following locations and heights:
1. Rear of Grandstand: 2 rails with chain link fence, 54" high.
4
PERMANENT GRANDSTAND SEATING SYSTEM 13125-5
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
Contractor' s Bid Proposal.
G. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1
"Structural Welding Code--Steel, " AWS D1.2 "Structural Welding
Code--Aluminum, " and AWS D1.3 "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel. "
1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS
qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if
pertinent, has undergone recertification.
H. Submit evidence of product liability Certificate of Insurance for life
of the product.
I. Warranty: Product shall be guaranteed for one year against defective
materials and workmanship. The coating system shall be guaranteed for wo
a ten (10) year period against defective materials and workmanship.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING go
A. Delivery and Storage: Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect
against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces.
Stack materials, provide for air circulation within and around stacks ■*
and under temporary coverings including polyethylene and similar
materials.
so
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Check actual locations of other construction to
which permanent grandstand seating systems must fit by accurate field
measurements before fabrication. Show recorded measurements on final
shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction
progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work,
guarantee dimensions and proceed with fabricating products without
field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual w.
dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions. Allow for trimming
and fitting at no additional cost to the Owner.
B. Code Compliance: Approval Drawings shall be based upon the criteria so
indicated herein. Achieving compliance to the Codes indicated is
mandatory and is the manufacturer's responsibility.
a*
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
w®
A. Subject to compliance with the Plans and Specifications herein provide
permanent grandstand seating systems by one of the following:
w
1. Dant-Clayton Corporation of Louisville, .KY
2 . Sturdisteel Company of Waco, TX
3 . E&D Speciality Stands, Inc. of North Collins, NY
do
2.2 MATERIALS
■R
PERMANENT GRANDSTAND SEATING SYSTEM 13125-4
w�
op
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
ON
E. welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply
with requirements specified under the "Quality Assurance" Article.
F. Submit Mill Certificate Test Reports and shipping documents for all
structural steel, high strength bolts, weld materials and extruded
w� aluminum shapes.
G. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality
Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience.
Include a list of completed projects with project name, addresses, names
of architects and owners, and other information specified.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing portable
bleacher seating systems similar to those indicated for this Project
with a record of successful in-service performance, and with sufficient
production capacity to produce required units without delaying the Work.
Review of the manufacturer' s qualifications shall be based upon the
ps following criteria:
1. 10 years minimum experience in the design, fabrication and erection
of permanent grandstand seating systems.
2 . A list of similar projects completed within the last three (3)
years (minimum of 15 projects) . Provide references and telephone
numbers for each. The Owner shall have the right to visit any one
of the listed projects. Out of state travel costs shall be borne
by the bidder.
3 . Compatibility and equality of the proposed alternate manufacturer's
system with the Construction Drawings and this Specification.
B. Evaluation of compatibility and equivalence shall be at the sole
discretion of the Owner.
C. Engineer Qualifications: Professional engineer legally authorized to
practice in the State of Massachusetts and experienced in providing
engineering services of the kind indicated for permanent grandstand
seating systems similar to this Project in material, design, and extent,
and that have a record of successful in-service performance.
D. Coating System Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in
coating system application with a minimum of 10 years experience.
E. Installer Qualifications: Arrange for installation of permanent
grandstand seating systems by a firm that can demonstrate successful
experience in installing permanent grandstand seating items similar in
type and quality to those required for this Project.
F. Installer Certification: Obtain written certification from manufacturer
of permanent grandstand seating systems certifying that Installer is
approved by manufacturer to install specified grandstand system, and
supervised by personnel trained by the Manufacturer in proper
application of the product. Provide copy of certification for Architect
prior to awarding this work. Such certification shall have been issued
by the manufacturer no less than 5 years prior to the date of the
PERMANENT GRANDSTAND SEATING SYSTEM 13125-3
am
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
no
2 . Infill Area of Guardrail Systems: Capable of withstanding a
horizontal concentrated load of 200 lbf (890 N) applied to one sq.
ft. (0.09 sq. m) at any point in the system including panels,
intermediate rails, fencing, or other elements composing the infill s*
area.
a. Above load need not be assumed to act concurrently with loads
on top rails of railing systems in determining stress on
guard.
B. Seating Systems: Capable of withstanding the following: w
1. Dead Loads: Actual Weight of Components and Accessories.
2. Live Loads: 100 PSF on gross structural members, limited to a
maximum deflection of L/240, and the following:
a. 175 PLF on seatboards.
b. 175 PLF on footboards. .w
3. Seismic Loads: Per Section 1612 .0 of the Massachusetts State
Building Code, 780 CMR, Sixth Edition.
4. Wind Load: 30 PSF on projected vertical surface. Uplift per NFPA so
102, Section 4-2 .5.4 .
5. Sway: 24 PLF parallel to seatboards and footboards and 10 PLF
perpendicular to seatboards. so
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions go
of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for footboards, seatboards, and paint products. N.
C. Shop drawings detailing fabrication and erection of each permanent
grandstand seating systems indicated. Include seating plan indicating
aisles, walkways, seating sections, ramps, platforms, and exits. Show as
anchorage and accessory items. Show front, rear and end elevations and
sections through various grandstand components. Provide details and
schedules for the fabrication and assembly of all structural components. so
Include details of all cuts, connections, chamber, welds and other
pertinent data. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for
installation under other Sections.
as
1. All structural detailing shall follow the standard practice as set
forth in RISC "Detailing for Steel Construction."
D. Submit samples of the following grandstand components: g°
1. Seatboard.
2 . Footboard. o,
3 . Riserboard.
4 . Handrail support post and cap.
5 . 2" x 2" chain link fence.
6. Deck attachment support member. so
7 . Deck members with internal splice/expansion sleeve.
8. Seat mounting bracket.
sr
PERMANENT GRANDSTAND SEATING SYSTEM 13125-2
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #9 6 0 7 9
SECTION 13125 - PERMANENT GRANDSTAND SEATING SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this work. Note also all Addenda.
B. The following are minimum requirements and shall govern except that all
Federal, Local and/or State Codes and Ordinances shall govern when their
requirements are in excess hereof.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes exterior, elevated permanent grandstand.
B. Providing all Engineering Design, materials, fabrication, freight,
installation, supervision, and other miscellaneous items required for
the grandstand structure in accordance with these Specifications and
Contract Drawings.
C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that
relate to this Section:
1. Section 01030 "Alternates" for bidding requirements.
2 . Division 2 Sections for site preparation.
3 . Section 03300, "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for foundation design,
installation of concrete and reinforcing.
4 . Section 13050 "Modular Pressbox" for pressbox and related work.
5. Division 16 Sections for electrical connections.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Engineer, fabricate, and install permanent
grandstand seating systems to withstand the following structural loads
without exceeding the allowable design working stress of the materials
involved, including anchors and connections. Apply each load to produce
the maximum stress in each of the respective components of each metal
fabrication.
1. Top Rail of Guardrail Systems: Capable of withstanding the
following loads applied as indicated:
a. Concentrated load of 300 lbf applied at any point and in any
direction.
b. Uniform load of 50 lbf per linear foot (730 N/m) applied
horizontally and concurrently with uniform load of 100 lbf per
linear foot (1460 N/m) applied non-concurrently or vertically
downward.
C. Concentrated and uniform loads above need not be assumed to
act concurrently.
PERMANENT GRANDSTAND SEATING SYSTEM 13125-1
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
3. Lighting: Manufacturer's standardsurface-mounted fluorescent
fixtures.
4. Provide 4KW electric wall heater, including thermostat and blower.
J. Scorer's Table: 18" wide, 3/4" thickness, plastic laminate faced, self
edged, including supports spaced at 48" on center.
PART 3 - EXECUTION ON
3 .1 PREPARATION
w
A. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, drawings, diagrams, templates,
instructions, and directions for assembling and installing modular
pressbox. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site.
wr
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting w
required for installing modular pressbox. Set modular pressbox
accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and
surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from
established lines and levels.
3 .3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with plans, approved shop drawings; manufacturer's
written instructions and recommendations for installation, as applicable
to project conditions and supporting substrates. Erect portable
bleacher seating systems securely, with provisions for thermal and
structural movement.
B. Installation shall be performed directly by the Manufacturer or by a
factory certified Installer.
3 .4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
wie
A. Clean all surfaces after erection in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
B. Remove and properly dispose of all packaging and construction debris.
END OF SECTION 13050
■w
!IR
WM
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #9 6 0 7 9
2. Bottom Plate: Single 2" x 411 .
3 . Top Plate: Double 2" x 411 .
4. Interior Wall Finish: Pre-finished woodgrain paneling, 1/4"
thickness.
5. Insulation: Fiberglass batt insulation, R-11, with kraft faced
vapor barrier.
6. Sheathing: 1/2" CDX.
7. Siding: Double 6" vertical vinyl siding, .046" thickness, white.
Include top, bottom trim and soffit.
0" E. Roof System:
1. Rafters: 2" x 811, spaced at 16" on center.
2 . Decking: 3/4" DFPA STURD-I-Floor plywood, 24/0, with 7/16" OSB.
3 . Roof Membrane: EPDM, 60 mil thickness, fully adhered.
4 . Insulation: Fiberglass batt insulation, R-19, with kraft faced
vapor barrier.
5. Ceiling Panel: Manufacturer' s standard, 1/2" thickness ceiling
panels, with aluminum fascia and ventilated soffit.
6. Film Platform: Provide manufacturer's standard roof walk surface,
consisting of spike proof carpeting designed for outdoor use.
a. Include roof access hatch and folding aluminum access ladder.
F. Guardrail Systems: Provide guardrails fabricated from anodized extruded
aluminum, 6061-T6 alloy, anodized to clear 204R1.
1. Guardrail Supports: 3" x 1.438" x .188" channel, attached to fascia
with minimum 2 galvanized lag bolts per support.
2 . Handrails: Extruded aluminum pipe of 6061-T6 alloy, 1 i�" maximum
o.d.
3 . Infill Area of Guardrail System: Chain link fence, 2" mesh, 9
gauge galvanized fabric.
G. Doors: 36" x 80" x 1-3/8" insulated steel doors, with prefabricated wood
frame, consisting of jambs, head and casing trim.
1. Include 16" square vision lites, glazed with 1/8" thickness
P" tempered clear glass.
2 . Include aluminum threshold and keyed locksets.
H. Windows: Manufacturer' s standard extruded aluminum horizontal sliders,
00 AAMA rating HSR35.
1. Include manufacturer' s standard insulating glass and screens.
2 . Provide number of windows indicated.
I. Electrical: Provide 100 amp capacity distribution panel, 120/240v, 60Hz,
ip service.
u
1. Branch wiring: EMT conduit, per NEC.
2 . Devices: 125v/15amp specification grade duplex receptacles, spaced
at 9' intervals. Include plug strips above scorer' s table.
a. Provide 3 additional conduit for communications wiring.
MODULAR PRESSBOX 13050-5
an
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
,e
guarantee dimensions and proceed with fabricating products without
field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual
dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions. Allow for trimming
and fitting at no additional cost to the Owner. OR
B. Code Compliance: Approval Drawings shall be based upon the criteria
indicated herein. Achieving compliance to the Codes indicated is go
mandatory and is the manufacturer's responsibility.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
no
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the Plans and Specifications herein provide
modular pressbox by one of the following:
1. Dant-Clayton Corporation of Louisville, KY
2 . Sturdisteel Company of Waco, TX s,s
3 . E&D Speciality Stands, Inc. of North Collins, NY
2.2 MATERIALS
so
A. General: Provide modular pressbox designed in accordance with the
following Codes and Standards:
so
1. 780 CMR: The Massachusetts State Building Code, Sixth Edition.
2 . NFPA 102 "Assembly Seating, Tents and Membrane Structures."
3. 521 CMR: Architectural Access Board.
4 . AISC Manual of Steel Construction, Allowable Stress Design, Ninth no
Edition.
5. Specifications for Aluminum Structures by the Aluminum Association
For America. ON
6. Section 06105, "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for standards of dimension
lumber, panel products and fasteners incorporated into the work of
this Section.
sw
B. Size: Provide modular pressbox with overall size of 8' x 301 , including
entrance platform at each end.
C. Floor System: Fabricate floor system from dimension lumber, boards and w
panel products, conforming to the following requirements:
1. Bottom Board: Pressure treated plywood, 1/2" thickness, painted no
black, include vents spaced 4 ' -0" on center.
2 . Insulation: Fiberglass batt insulation, R-19, with kraft faced
vapor barrier.
3 . Joists: 2" x 6 11, spaced at 16" on center. Include double perimeter
rim joists.
4 . Decking: 3/4" DFPA STURD-I-Floor plywood, 24/0.
S . Floor Covering: "Excelon #51830 Vinyl Floor Tile", Armstrong. s
6. Base: Vinyl cove base.
D. Wall Systems:
go
1. Framing: 2" x 411, spaced at 16" on center. Fabricate wall heights
at 7 ' -10" front; 8 ' -0" rear.
MODULAR PRESSBOX 13050-4
40
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
WX
1. 10 years minimum experience in the design, fabrication and erection
of modular pressbox construction.
2 . A list of similar projects completed within the last three (3)
' years (minimum of 15 projects) . Provide references and telephone
numbers for each. The Owner shall have the right to visit any one
of the listed projects. Out of state travel costs shall be borne
by the bidder.
3 . Compatibility and equality of the proposed alternate manufacturer's
system with the Construction Drawings and this Specification.
B. Evaluation of compatibility and equivalence shall be at the sole
discretion of the Owner.
C. Installer Qualifications: Arrange for installation of modular pressbox
construction by a firm that can demonstrate successful experience in
installing modular pressbox construction similar in type and quality
to those required for this Project.
w
D. Installer Certification: Obtain written certification from manufacturer
of modular pressbox certifying that Installer is approved by
manufacturer to install specified modular pressbox, and supervised by
personnel trained by the Manufacturer in proper application of the
product. Provide copy of certification for Architect prior to awarding
this work. Such certification shall have been issued by the
we manufacturer no less than 5 years prior to the date of the Contractor's
Bid Proposal.
E. Engineer Qualifications: Professional engineer legally authorized to
practice in the State of Massachusetts and experienced in providing
engineering services of the kind indicated for modular pressbox
construction similar to this Project in material, design, and extent,
and that have a record of successful in-service performance.
F. Submit evidence of product liability Certificate of Insurance for life
of the product.
G. Warranty: Product shall be guaranteed for one year against defective
materials and workmanship.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery and Storage: Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect
against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces.
Stack materials, provide for air circulation within and around stacks
and under temporary coverings including polyethylene and similar
materials.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
ON A. Field Measurements: Check actual locations of other construction to
which modular pressbox construction must fit by accurate field
measurements before fabrication. Show recorded measurements on final
OR shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction
progress to avoid delaying the Work.
1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work,
so
MODULAR PRESSBOX 13050-3
I"
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON. MA KB #96079
horizontal concentrated load of 200 lbf (890 N) applied to one sq. on
ft. (0.09 sq. m) at any point in the system including panels,
intermediate rails, balusters, or other elements composing the
infill area. 04
a. Above load need not be assumed to act concurrently with loads
on top rails of railing systems in determining stress on
guard. No
B. Pressbox Construction: Capable of withstanding the following:
1. Dead Loads: Actual Weight of Components and Accessories.
2 . Live Loads:
a. 100 PSF floor load.
b. 100 PSF roof load (filming platform) .
3 . Seismic Loads: Per Section 1612 .0 of the Massachusetts State
Building Code, 780 CMR, Sixth Edition.
4. Wind Load: 30 PSF. Uplift per NFPA 102, Section 4-2.5.4.
1.4 SUBMITTALS g'
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions
of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. ON
B. Product data for manufactured components and paint products.
C. Shop drawings detailing fabrication and erection of each modular .M
pressbox indicated. Include plans indicating construction materials and
components. Show anchorage and accessory items. Show front, rear and
end elevations and sections through various pressbox components. Provide
details and schedules for the fabrication and assembly of all structural
components. Include details of all cuts, connections, chamber, welds
and other pertinent data. Provide templates for anchors and bolts
specified for installation under other Sections.
D. Submit samples of the following components:
1. Exterior siding. aw
2. Windows.
E. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality No
Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience.
Include a list of completed projects with project name, addresses, names
of architects and owners, and other information specified.
OR
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing modular wo
pressbox construction similar to those indicated for this Project with
a record of successful in-service performance, and with sufficient
production capacity to produce required units without delaying the Work.
Review of the manufacturer's qualifications shall be based upon the
following criteria:
MODULAR PRESSBOX 13050-2
w
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
SECTION 13050 - MODULAR PRESSBOX
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this work. Note also all Addenda.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes exterior, modular pressbox, erected on permanent
grandstand seating systems.
B. Providing all engineering design, materials, fabrication, freight,
installation, supervision, and other miscellaneous items required for
the modular pressbox structure in accordance with these Specifications
and Contract Drawings.
C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that
relate to this Section:
1. Section 01030, "Alternates" for bidding requirements that relate
to this section.
2 . Section 06105, "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for standards of dimension
lumber, panel products and fasteners incorporated into the work of
this Section.
3 . Section 13125, "Permanent Grandstand Seating System" for
grandstands and related work.
4 . Division 16 sections for electrical connections to modular pressbox
construction.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Engineer, fabricate, and install modular
"a pressbox to withstand the following structural loads without exceeding
the allowable design working stress of the materials involved, including
anchors and connections. Apply each load to produce the maximum stress
in each of the respective components of each metal fabrication.
1. Top Rail of Guardrail Systems: Capable of withstanding the
following loads applied as indicated:
a. Concentrated load of 300 lbf applied at any point and in any
direction.
b. Uniform load of 50 lbf per linear foot (730 N/m) applied
horizontally and concurrently with uniform load of 100 lbf per
linear foot (1460 N/m) applied non-concurrently or vertically
downward.
C. Concentrated and uniform loads above need not be assumed to
act concurrently.
2 . Infill Area of Guardrail Systems: Capable of withstanding a
MODULAR PRESSBOX 13050-1
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
3.2 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING
A. Upon completion of installation, including work of other trades,
lubricate, test, and adjust each telescoping bleacher unit to operate +!+
easily and in compliance with manufacturer's specifications.
B. Clean installed bleacher units on exposed and semiexposed surfaces.
Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.
3 .3 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable
to manufacturer and Installer, that ensures that telescoping bleachers
are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 12760
go
ro
ow
w
As
no
eM
ro
TELESCOPING BLEACHERS 12760 - 8
40
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
2 .6 GALVANIZED STEEL SHEET FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces of dirt, grease, and other
contaminants followed by a conversion coating of type suited to organic
coating applied over it. Clean welds, mechanical connections, and
abraded areas; then apply galvanizing repair paint specified below to
comply with ASTM A 780.
1. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc-dust-content paint for
regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint-20.
B. Baked Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreatment, apply
manufacturer's standard 2-coat baked enamel finish consisting of prime
coat and thermosetting topcoat.
2.7 STEEL FINISHES
OR A. Surface Preparation: Solvent-clean surfaces in compliance with SSPC-SP
1 to remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair
paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel
in compliance with SSPC-SP 5 (White Metal Blast Cleaning) or SSPC-SP 8
(Pickling) .
B. Baked Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreatment, apply
manufacturer's standard 2-coat baked enamel finish consisting of prime
coat and thermosetting topcoat to exposed and concealed metal surfaces
including understructure, except where other types of finishes are
indicated.
2 .8 WOOD FINISHES
A. Wood and Transparent Finish: Prepare surfaces by machine sanding,
supplemented by hand sanding where required, followed by application of
sealer coats and transparent top coats of type, in number, and by
process standard with manufacturer. Apply to wood surfaces except where
otherwise indicated.
B. Plywood: Manufacturer's wear-resistant vinyl finish in standard color.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .1 INSTALLATION
A. Install telescoping bleacher units to comply with manufacturer's
instructions and final shop drawings. Provide accessories indicated and
anchors, fasteners, inserts, and other items required for installation
of units and permanent attachment of units to adjoining construction.
B. Furnish instructions in both operation and maintenance to the Owner by
NO the telescoping bleacher manufacturer or authorized representative.
C. Facilitate and assist with coiled wiring to be installed by others to
junction boxes under the first row of seats at the Scorers Table.
D. Permanently install grommets where directed by architect for ease of
connecting to jacks/plugs, etc. for Scoreboard Control Cable, power, PA
system, data and telephone at Scorers Table.
TELESCOPING BLEACHERS 12760 - 7
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
row and rear wall of adjoining construction. 00
3. Aisle railings and guardrails of removable type, fabricated from
aluminum tubing or extrusions.
4. End railings which do not require removal when storing bleacher. no
5. Scorer's Table 8' long by 15" wide, of removable type for
attachment to mounting sockets provided as part of bleacher unit.
6. Provide first tier handicapped recoverable truncation sections
complying with the requirements of the Americans with Disabilities 'm
Act (ADA) , indicated.
a. Furnish removable railing sections fabricated from aluminum
tubing and/or extruded shapes. am
b. Sections to be designed for assembly by one person.
7. Provide an integral automatic electro-mechanical propulsion system
to open and close telescoping bleachers. ""
a. Include manufacturer's standard power track unit, consisting
of speed units fitted with induction motors to provide an „r
average operating speed of 38 fpm or less; equipped with 6"
diameter by 4" wide wheels coated with 1/2" thick molded
polyurethane; installed under the first row.
b. Furnish wall mounted keyed operating switch. W
C. Include all wiring are limit switches with the seating bank
for propulsion system.
d. Motors: Provide manufacturer's motor assemblies, 1/2 HP, 1725
RPM, 115v, 60 hz, 11 amp full load, 20-40 amp depending on the
number of motors.
e. Limit Switches: Include manufacturer's combination of
contactors and limit switches so that the system is not
energized except during keyed operation.
1) Straight wired electric systems are not allowed.
8. Detachable Front Steps: Provide manufacturer's detachable front
steps located at each vertical aisle, equipped with non-slip tread
surfaces for non-skid 3" diameter rubber feet. ws
9. Provide plastic grommets for connection of power, score board
control, data, PA system and telephone wiring at Scorers Table.
w
10. Provide two sets of nylon cable guides attached to the under-side
of each row behind scorer' s table location for installation of
above mentioned wiring. „LL
2.4 METAL FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative W
to application and designations of finishes.
2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Finish designations prefixed by "AA" conform to the system established
by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.
B. Class I Clear-Anodized Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: as
fabricated, nonspecular; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic
Coating: Class I Architectural, clear film thicker than 0.7 mil)
complying with AAMA 607.1.
TELESCOPING BLEACHERS 12760 - 6
No
on
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
No B. Bench Seats and Upper Risers: Fabricate from the following materials to
form unitized interlocking seats with uniform heights per bleacher unit
of 18 inches in length and 12 inches wide.
on
1. Material: Polyethylene plastic, contoured to form individual seats,
with recesses for number plates.
me 2 . Provide matching end caps for each row designed, with indent for
row letters.
3 . Provide two contrasting colors to form pattern as indicated.
C. Lower Risers and Foot Rests: Provide recessed lower riser and fully
closed footrest construction. Fabricate riser from steel sheet with
baked enamel, vinyl cladding, or galvanized finish as standard with
manufacturer. Fabricate footrest from plywood as standard with
manufacturer.
D. Understructure: Fabricate understructure from structural steel members
of size, spacing, and form required to support design loads with
cantilevered bench seat supports to produce toe space uninterrupted by
vertical bracing.
E. Support Column Wheels : Provide manufacturer's standard wheel assembly
under each support column. Include wheels of size, number, and design
required to support bleacher units and to achieve smooth operation
without damage to flooring surface, but not than 4 per column or less
than 3-1/2 inches in diameter and 1 inch wide.
1. Provide wheels with treads that will not mar or damage gymnasium
flooring in any way.
F. Aisles: Fabricate bleacher units with the following aisle configuration,
at locations and of widths indicated:
! ! 1. Footrest Level Configuration: Interrupt bench seats to provide
aisle walking surfaces at footrest level.
a. Provide manufacturer's standard metal nosing for aisles with
wood walking surfaces.
G. Row Spacing: Fabricate units with a row spacing of 24 inches unless
am otherwise indicated.
H. Row Rise: Fabricate units with row rise of 9-5/8 inches.
op I. Type of Bleacher Units: Provide assemblies of the following type
fabricated in lengths and number of rows and seats indicated.
OW 1. Wall-Attached Type: Construct units to provide for permanent
attachment of rear of understructure to wall/floor construction.
10 J. Accessories: Provide the following accessories of manufacturer's
standard design and construction at locations indicated or required.
1. End panels covering exposed ends of bleacher units in closed
00 position.
2 . Rear fillers including supports for closing openings between top
!1
TELESCOPING BLEACHERS 12760 - 5
no
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #9607
the following: ow
1. Hussey Seating Co. (North Berwick, Maine) , 'Comfort Curve'
Telescopic Gymnasium Seating System. ass
2 . Interkal Inc. (Kalamazoo, Michigan) , 'Universal' Telescopic
Seating System.
3 . Kodiak Industries Limited (Winnipeg, Manitoba) , 112400 Series" r
Telescopic Bleachers.
2.2 MATERIALS
wee
A. Lumber: Softwood, kiln dried, surfaced 4 sides, 1-inch nominal
thickness, complying with the following requirements.
1. Lumber Species and Grade: Southern Pine complying with SPIB '
"Grading Rules" for C and Better finish grade.
2. Lumber Form: At manufacturer's option, provide either solid lumber
complying with PS 20 or glued-up lumber that is either edge and end w
glued, end glued only, or finger joined as required to produce size
needed for bleacher components and to comply with SPIB "Glued
Lumber Standards for Southern Pine. "
B. Plywood: Softwood plywood panels, 5/8-inch nominal thickness, 5-ply
construction with grade designation APA A-C Exterior, with solid
crossbands, Group 1 veneer species for all plies, and exterior glue, APA
grade trademarked, complying with ANSI/VOL. PROD. STD. PS-1.
C. Structural Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36, except where
higher strength steel is indicated or standard with manufacturer.
D. Uncoated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 366, commercial quality, cold-rolled sheet,
stretcher leveled.
Im
E. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 526, G60 coating designation,
phosphatized, stretcher leveled.
F. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 501, hot-formed.
G. Aluminum Tubing: ASTM B 429, 6063-T6, Schedule 40.
H. Polyethylene Plastic: ASTM D 1248, Type III, Class B; molded,
color-pigmented, textured, impact-resistant, structural formulation; in
color indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect
from manufacturer's standard colors.
I. Fasteners: Vibration proof, of size and material standard with
manufacturer.
2 .3 CONSTRUCTION
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard telescopic bleacher system
fabricated to comply with requirements indicated. Smoothly round
corners, edges, and exposed fasteners, if any, to eliminate snagging and
pinching hazards. Form exposed sheet metal with flat, flush surfaces,
true to line and level, and without cracking and grain separation.
Perform welding by operators and processes complying with AWS
requirements.
on
TELESCOPING BLEACHERS 12760 - 4
on
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTO MA KB #96079
F. Samples for verification purposes of the following items, prepared on
samples of size indicated below and of same thickness and material as
indicated for final unit of Work:
1. Molded Plastic Seats: One end cap in both colors indicated.
G. Maintenance data for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manual
specified in Division 1 including detailed instructions indicating
proper means for operating and maintaining each type of bleacher unit
and accessory required.
H. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality
Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience.
Include list of completed projects with project names, addresses, names
of Architects and Owners, and other information specified.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. NFPA Standards: Comply with requirements of NFPA 101 "Life Safety Code",
NFPA 102 "Standard for Assembly Seating, Tents, and Membrane
Structures, " and specifically with Chapter 5, "Folding and Telescopic
Seating, " and Connecticut Code, except where more stringent requirements
are indicated or imposed by authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer to perform
unit of work of this section who has specialized in the installation of
types of telescoping bleachers similar to that required for this project
and who is acceptable to, or certified by, manufacturer of telescoping
bleachers.
C. Engineer Qualifications: Professional engineer licensed to practice in
the State of Connecticut and experienced in providing engineering
services of the kind indicated that have resulted in the successful
installation of telescoping bleachers similar in material, design, and
extent to those indicated for this Project.
D. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS
D1.1 "Structural Welding Code - Steel" and D1.3 "Structural Welding Code
- Sheet Steel. "
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Check actual dimensions of construction affecting
telescoping bleachers by accurate field measurements before fabrication;
show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate
fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work.
1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work,
guarantee dimensions and proceed with fabrication of telescoping
r bleachers without field measurements. Coordinate wall and floor
construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to
guaranteed dimensions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 .1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of
TELESCOPING BLEACHERS 12760 - 3
..
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
1) 200 lbs. concentrated load applied at any point and in am
any direction along top rail.
2) 50 lbs. per linear foot acting outward at top rail and a ,R
simultaneous load of 100 lbs. per foot applied vertically
downward.
3) 25 lbs. per foot acting outward at mid-rail.
4) 200 lbs. concentrated horizontal load on a 1 foot square
area of infill.
B. Operation: Provide telescoping bleacher units and portable telescoping
bleacher units incorporating manufacturer's standard telescoping system
of seating and under structure members that permit opening and closing w
with respect to adjacent rows, that allow any or all rows to be locked
open for use, and that close with vertical faces of upper skirts in same
vertical plane. r
1. Tractive Electric Operation: Provide manufacturer's standard
operation of bleacher units by means of a series of electric
motor-driven units mounted under first rows of bleacher units that on
apply tractive force to floor. Use units with nonmarking rubber
rollers or tracks that will not mar or damage type of floor over
which bleacher units move. Control units remotely, by key-operated we
switch in wall-mounted control station, as standard with
manufacturer for wall attached units .
a. Coordinate wiring requirements and current characteristics of 4.r
motors and control stations with building electrical system.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract
and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of telescoping bleacher and accessory
indicated.
C. Shop drawings indicating layout of telescoping bleacher units go
coordinated with field measurements and including seat heights, row
spacing and rise, aisle widths and locations, overall dimensions in
closed and open position, connections and relationship to adjoining
work, accessories, types of materials, and finishes.
1. Where installed products are indicated to comply with certain
design loadings, include structural computations, material
properties, and other information needed for structural analysis
that has been signed and sealed by a qualified professional
engineer responsible for their preparation.
D. Wiring diagrams from manufacturer for electrically operated units.
E. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's color
charts consisting of actual units or sections of units showing full
range of colors and textures available for each exposed material
involving such selections.
TELESCOPING BLEACHERS 12760 - 2
ww
s
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #9 6 07 9
SECTION 12760 - TELESCOPING BLEACHERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
IN A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this work. Note also all Addenda.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Wall-attached telescoping bleacher units.
B. The following sections contain requirements related to this Section:
1. Electrical wiring and connections for electrically operated
telescoping bleachers forming part of the building system are
specified in a Division 16 section.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A.. Telescoping bleachers are operable systems of multiple-tiered benches
on interconnected, folding supports that permit closing, without
requiring dismantlement, into a nested relationship for purposes of
storing or moving.
1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Design, engineer, fabricate, and install
telescoping bleachers to withstand the following structural loads
without exceeding the allowable design working stresses of the materials
involved, including anchors and connections. Apply each load to produce
the maximum stress in each respective component of each bleacher unit.
1. Design loads specified in NFPA 101, 102, Chapter 5,and
Massachusetts Building Code - Sixth Edition.
a. Design live load on all footboard and seat members: 120 lbs.
per linear foot.
b. Uniformly distributed live load of not less than 100 lbs. per
square foot of gross horizontal projection.
C. Seats: Designed to resist a horizontal swinging force of 24
lbs. per linear foot, in a direction parallel to the length of
the seats, and of 10 lbs. per lineal foot in a direction per
perpendicular to the length of the seats.
d. Telescoping bleachers: Designed to withstand applicable
seismic design criteria.
e. Railings, posts and sockets: Designed to withstand the
following forces applied separately:
TELESCOPING BLEACHERS 12760 - 1
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #9607
properties as they affect anchors and fasteners, and location of 40
junction boxes.
B. Notify Construction Manager and do not proceed until unsatisfactory W*
conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Follow manufacturer's printed instructions for installation.
B. Reproduce the seating plan on the floor. Check all dimensions against
the plan; make necessary adjustments in the layout for all
discrepancies.
1. Do not deviate from the layout without receiving prior written
approval from the Architect.
C. Standards: Anchored with not less than two lead shield expansion bolts
per standard.
1. Attach floor mounted chairs with maximum 1/4" x 2" long lead shield
expansion bolts.
D. Install chairs using manufacturer's recommended hardware and fasteners.
Chairs in curved rows shall be installed at smooth radius.
E. Verify moving components operate smoothly and quietly.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust self-rising seat mechanisms to ensure seats in each row are
aligned when in upright position.
w
B. Repair minor abrasions and imperfections in painted finishes with a
coating that matches the factory-applied finish.
C. Replace upholstery fabric damaged during installation.
END OF SECTION 12710 "
w
no
FIXED AUDIENCE SEATING 12710 - 8
40
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
molded into the plastic to add strength and shall be located to prevent
formation of dirt catching crevices.
ON E. Tablet Arm: 11/16" thick Tablet Arm constructed of 1/16" high pressure
laminate over 5/8" 5-ply hardwood core decorator lacquer edge over
filled and sanded surface 1-1/411, 11 gauge steel tube supported by 5/8"
om diameter pivot hinge and 12 gauge steel channel solid hardwood arm
rests.
1. Tablet Size: 16-3/4" x 13-7/811.
F. Pedestal Frame: 11 gauge 1-1/2 x 2" rectangular steel tube vertical
support column with 5" x 7-3/4" 14 gauge steel formed foot welded to
u� column.
1. Provide baked enamel finish on steel laminate that meets or exceeds
NEMA standards.
2 .8 ACCESSORIES
MR A. Aisle Lights: Manufacturer's standard UL-approved 24V aisle lighting
fixtures, prewired to install in concealed aisle standards at every
other row.
ON 1. Include flex-steel conduit connector at the base of each standard;
18 wiring extension beyond the base of the standard; low voltage
transformer; utilizing box; socket and 10 watt lamp.
go B. Number and Letter Plates: Manufacturer' s standard anodized aluminum
plates with black etched characters for seat location identification
system. Fit number plates into vandal-resistant recess at seat front
am and adhere with permanent adhesive and without the use of fasteners.
Attach matching row identification letter plates at rear of each aisle
arm rest.
2 .9 FERROUS METAL FINISHES
A. General: NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for applying and designating
am finishes.
B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces of dirt, grease, and other
contaminants followed by a conversion coating of type suited to organic
No coating applied over it.
C. Power Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning, provide a fire-stage
pretreatment, then apply manufacturer's standard bonderization
electrostatically applied powder coat finish.
1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's
W standard choices for color and gloss.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for
compliance with requirements for construction tolerances, material
FIXED AUDIENCE SEATING 12710 - 7
as
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON. MA KB #96079
enclose the edges of the inner upholstery panel at the top and
sides, not less than 26" in length, extending below the seat
level to protect the seat cushion. Provide seat backs in a
minimum of two sizes to achieve the four available chair
sizes.
b. Polyfoam Padding Thickness: 1-1/4 inch.
C. Back Wings: Fabricated with provisions for pitch in the
following angles: "*
1) 16 degrees
2) 20 degrees
3) 24 degrees ws
D. Arm Rests: At each aisle and between chairs, designed for concealed
mounting to standards, and as follows:
1. Wood: Solid hardwood lumber construction with rounded edges. we
2. Provide one security screw per armrest.
3 . Furnish not less than 1% of aisle seats with folding armrests on
the aisle side, conspicuously identified at each seat location.
2 .7 Dramatic Arts Seats
A. Seat: Semi Upholstered one piece copolymer plastic shell (#9)
1. Seats: One-piece molded polypropylene plastic foundation, with
etched surface texture, the face of the shell uninterrupted by
exposed fasteners and the rear of the steel plain without ribs and LO
irregularities.
2 . Shell measurements: 17-1/411 width across the hip, 15-1/2" width
across the top of the back and the front of the seat, and 15"
overall height.
3 . Securely lock the molded plastic to supporting steel framework
welded to the chair foundation.
4 . Padded Upholstered Seat and Back Panels: Securely bolted through
the shell, compound curved, 5-ply, 5/16" hardwood veneer plywood,
with the selected fabric tailored over 3/4" polyurethane foam and
stapled around the perimeter, attached with tamper-proof bolts into
threaded inserts imbedded in the upholstery panel.
B. Fabric: Maharam Fabrics, Pattern: Destiny, #404101, Color: Admiral, with
a Scotchgard finish which has passed NFPA 701. Fabric content to be 32% w
polyolefin, 68% Nylon, acrylic backed.
C. Polypropylene: Injection molded high-impact polypropylene, molded with
reinforcing ribs as necessary for strength on underside of shell. so
Provide for attachment of chair to steel mounting bracket with
self-threading, rustproof screws. Weld mounting bracket to steel
standard.
D. Chair Frame: Two 3/4" square 16 gauge steel tubes beneath the seat and
extending up both sides of the back allowing the molded plastic to
function as primary support for the occupant, engaging pockets molded g*
into the plastic shell and locking firmly in place, secured by two
tamperproof fasteners at the underside of the shell. The vertical steel
tubes providing support for the back shall work in concert with flanges
we
FIXED AUDIENCE SEATING 12710 - 6
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
B. Center Standard: Pedestal design, fabricated with a 14 gauge ( .0747)
steel, 1" x 3" rectangular column; a one-piece 14 gauge ( .0747)
dovetail, welded to the top of the column, for attachment of the
armrest, and a 14 gauge ( .0747) steel plate wing, welded to the column
for attachment of the back. Provide an 11 gauge steel welded bracket
on the side of the standard for attachment of the seat.
C. End Panels: Provide manufacturer's end panels in the configuration
shown, securely attached to aisle standards, and surfaced as follows:
1. Hardwood - in finish selected by Architect, to match arm rests.
2 .6 AUDITORIUM UPHOLSTERED CHAIRS
go A. Seats: Provide seats designed with a contoured foundation which
supports the ischial area with firm padding and the popliteal area with
soft padding, constructed as follows:
1. One-part seat assembly consisting of molded variable-density single
contour polyurethane foam padding of thickness, including plywood,
w indicated below; laminated to 7/16" thick, 5-ply contour molded
inner plywood supporting panel; upholstered on all surfaces with
fabric covers, free of creases, stretch lines, or wrinkles, stapled
to the bottom of the plywood panel.
2 . Bottom Cover: One piece, injection-molded linear polyethylene seat
bottom cover, removable for maintenance, contoured to a shape
compatible with the chair design totally enclosing the seat-lifting
mechanism and the seat construction.
3 . Support Structure: 12 gauge ( .10511) flanged steel support arms,
supporting 2 self-compensating, independent 5/8" diameter steel
hinge rods, equipped with self-lubricating nylon shoulder bushings.
B. Auditorium Seat Hinges: Self-lubricating, compensating type, with
noiseless self-rising seat mechanism passing ASTM F 851 and operating
as indicated below and positive internal stops cushioned with rubber or
neoprene.
W 1. Spring-operated, capable of achieving a full-fold position when
occupied and to raise unoccupied seat automatically to uniform 3/4
fold, by use of dual 13 gauge extension springs, dampened at both
uplift and down-stop positions.
! " 2 . Support Structure: 12 gauge ( .10511) flanged steel support arms,
supporting 2 self-compensating, independent 5/8" diameter steel
hinge rods, equipped with self-lubricating nylon shoulder bushings.
C. Auditorium Seating Upholstered Backs: Construct as follows:
1. Unipanel construction with molded polyurethane foam inner padding
e�• glued to inside face of curved hardwood plywood panel and outside
face encapsulated with slab polyurethane foam; covered on all
surfaces with fabric covers, free of creases, stretch lines, or
wrinkles; stapled to the back of the plywood panel with no exposed
screws above the arm rests. Overall panel thickness as follows:
a. Rear Surface Treatment: Injection molded high impact
no resistant plastic with textured outer surface formed to
FIXED AUDIENCE SEATING 12710 - 5
0M
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
2. Exterior Plys: Class 1.
F. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A 208.2, 55 lb. density.
am
G. Fabric: Provide the following:
1. Maharam Fabrics, Pattern: Destiny, #404101, Color:Admiral, with a
Scotchgard finish which has passed NFPA 701. Fabric content to be
32% polyolefin, 68% Nylon, acrylic backed.
H. Injection Molded Plastic: One-piece high-impact, linear polyethylene
with built-in ultraviolet light inhibitors to retard fading. Plastic
shall have a burn rate of 1" per minute when tested in accordance with
ASTM D635 or the Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 302. �w
1. Color: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard color
range.
2 .3 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. Fabricate chair backs of seating rows located immediately in front of go
cross aisles on sloped and tiered floors so that back heights are not
less than the dimension indicated below, measured from walking surface
of cross aisle immediately behind seating:
w
1. 32 inches, subject to chair back pitch.
2 .4 MOUNTING
A. Floor Mounting: Provide floor mounts fabricated from a formed 14 ga.
( .0747) 8" x 2-3/4" steel foot welded to the bottom of the rectangular
column. This weldment to be 360 degrees around the column and concealed
on the inside. Standards shall conform to floor slope while maintaining
seat and back in the same angular relationship to standards throughout.
ris
B. Removable Floor Mounts: Provide self-supporting, moveable chair bases
with glides, in removable seating locations shown on the drawings.
Bases shall be of steel securely welded to the horizontal base member.
Removable seating shall be provided in units of one, two or three.
1. Securely weld supports to horizontal base plates.
+tee
C. Riser Mounting: Provide a steel attaching plate welded to the bottom
of the rectangular column. The standard shall be fabricated to extend
back to the face of the riser, at an appropriate angle to provide proper
seat and back height and angle, and attach directly to the face of the
riser. Standards shall maintain uniform seat heights above floor.
2 .5 AUDITORIUM SEAT - METAL STANDARDS
e�
A. Aisle Standard: Pedestal design, fabricated with a 14 gauge ( .0747)
steel, 1" x 3" rectangular column; a formed 16 gauge (.0598) steel panel
welded to the column to accept hardwood end panel, and a 14 gauge w
( .0747) dovetail welded to the top of the column for attachment of the
armrest. Provide an 11 gauge steel welded bracket on the inside of the
standard for attachment of the seat.
�o
FIXED AUDIENCE SEATING 12710 - 4
on
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
OR
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Do not install seating until space is
enclosed and weatherproof, wet-work in space is complete and nominally
dry, installation of finishes including painting is complete, and other
units of work above the ceiling are complete. Do not install seating
until ambient temperature and humidity conditions are continuously
maintained at final occupancy values.
B. Field Measurements: Check seating layout by field measurements before
Pw fabrication; show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate
fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid a delay in the
Work.
OR 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Extra Materials: Furnished from same production run as materials
am installed. Package materials with protective covering and identify with
labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner.
1. Seat and Back Fabric Covers: Furnish a quantity of full-size units
equal to 1 percent of the amount installed for each seat size.
2 . Molded plastic seat backs: Furnish a quantity of full-size units
equal to 1 percent of the amount installed for each seat size.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 .1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by the following:
1. Auditorium Seats: "Citation Model 4586 with Ergonomic Seat", by
Irwin Seating Co.
2. Dramatic Arts Seats: "Pedestal Seating #871, with Folding Tablet
Arm Chair", by Irwin Seating Co.
2 .2 MATERIALS
A. Gray Iron Castings: ASTM A 48, Class 25 (25,000 psi) , free of bow holes
and hot checks with parting lines, ground smooth.
P" B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36.
C. Electrolytic Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 591, commercial and
drawing quality, Coating Class C, chemically treated for baked-enamel
finish and not less than 0.0396 inch thick.
D. Exposed Hardwood Lumber: One of the following, selected for freedom
from visible defects, as standard with manufacturer:
1. Red oak.
E. Concealed Plywood: Hot press laminated hardwood plywood complying with
ANSI/HPMA HP as standard with manufacturer.
1. Interior Plys: Class 3 or better.
FIXED AUDIENCE SEATING 12710 - 3
M
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON. MA KB #96079
E. Maintenance data for seating to include in the "Operating and
Maintenance Manual" specified in Division 1.
1. Methods for maintaining upholstery fabric.
2 . Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be
detrimental to finishes and performance.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who is
certified in writing by the seating manufacturer as qualified to install w�
manufacturer's seating.
B. Design Performance: Provide seating certified to have passed a 300,000
cycle oscillation test in accordance with ASTM. F851 for self-rising �**
seat mechanisms; and capable of withstanding 600 lb. static loads,
laterally distributed 3" from the leading edge of the seat.
C. Fire-Performance Characteristics of Upholstered Seating: Provide am
seating that complies with the following:
1. Test Method: California Technical Bulletin 133 . ran
D. Fire-Performance Characteristics of Seat Padding: Provide seating that
complies with the following:
1. Test Method: California Technical Bulletin 117.
E. Single-Source Responsibilities: Obtain each type of seating, including red
accessories and mounting components, from one source of a single
manufacturer.
F. Seating Layout: Design and install seating indicated with end standards no
aligning to the greatest extent possible, with backs and seats varied
in width, optimizing sightlines. Comply with (ADA) and the Uniform
Federal Accessibility Standards (UFAS) . ,
G. Field-Constructed Mockups: Before installing seating, prepare mockups
for each form of installation and finish required to verify selections
made under sample submittals. Approved mockups will set quality
standards for installation and aesthetic effect. Comply with the
following requirements:
1. Locate mockups on site in location indicated as directed by the
Construction Manager.
2. Retain and maintain mockups during construction in undisturbed
condition as a standard for judging completed Work. am
a. When directed, demolish and remove mockups from Project site.
b. Approved mockups in an undisturbed condition at the time of ON
Substantial Completion may become a part of the completed
Work.
H. Coordination of Work: Coordinate installing electrical wiring with ON
seating layout to ensure that floor junction boxes for aisle lights are
located inboard of aisle light standards with no exposed conduit.
ow
FIXED AUDIENCE SEATING 12710 - 2
go
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, 14A KB #96079
SECTION 12710 - FIXED AUDIENCE SEATING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this Work. Note also all Addenda.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Partially upholstered chairs with a self-rising seat mechanism.
2 . One piece molded chairs with upholstered padded seat and back and
folding tablet arm.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that
relate to this Section:
1. Electrical connections for aisle lighting are included in Division
16.
2 . Section 09800 "Special Coatings" for painting of of Auditorium and
Dramatic Arts floors.
3 . Section 09661 "Resilient Tile flooring, Wall Base, and Accessories
for preparation and patching of Auditorium and Dramatic Arts
! "
floors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the
Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of product specified. Include installation
methods for each type of substrate.
C. Shop drawings showing seating layout, seat-numbering scheme, all chair
sizes, aisle widths and back-to-back dimensions to meet applicable
Codes.
D. Samples for verification purposes of each exposed material from which
seating units and accessories are composed, in each color, finish,
pattern, and texture indicated. Include samples of the following:
1. One Seat Unit: Full size with finishes and accessories specified.
2 . Upholstery Fabric: Full-width sample, not less than 36 inches
long, with specified treatments applied. Show completion pattern
repeat. Mar, top and right side.
3 . wood Materials and Finishes: Manufacturer' s standard size unit,
not less than 3 inches square.
4. Molded Plastic: Manufacturer's standard size unit, not less than
3 inches square.
5. Number and Letter Plates: Manufacturer's standard with sample
letter and number marked.
6. Exposed Fasteners: Each type specified.
FIXED AUDIENCE SEATING 12710 - 1
w.
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
w
s
awe
use
�w
w
a
FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES 12690 - 4
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
OR 1. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221, alloy 6063-T5. Coat surface of
frame that will contact cementitious material with zinc chromate
paint or manufacturer' s standard protective coating.
2 . Provide edge members in single lengths or, where frame dimensions
exceed maximum available lengths, provide minimum number of pieces
possible, with hairline joints equally spaced and with pieces
spliced together by means of straight connecting pins.
C. Loop Filament Matting: Needlepunch ribbed, loop filament polypropylene
Iw► material with built-in chemical agents to reduce fungus and mildew.
Provide color as selected by Architect.
1. Thickness: 1/2 inch.
2 . Provide composite rubber sheet backing.
3 . Flexible Surface-Type Applications: Where indicated for surface
application in a new or existing recessed frame, provide
No manufacturer's color matching, minimum 2 inch wide vinyl edge strip
bonded to each end of mat material or backing sheet.
2 .3 FABRICATION
A. Shop-fabricate units of floor mat work to greatest extent possible in
sizes as indicated. Where not indicated otherwise, provide single unit
for each mat installation, but do not exceed manufacturer's maximum size
recommendation for units intended for removal and cleaning. Where
joints in mats are necessary, space symmetrically and away from normal
traffic lanes. Miter corner joints in framing elements with hairline
joints or provide prefabricated corner units without joints. Where
possible, verify sizes by field measurement before shop fabrication.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .1 INSTALLATION
A. Install recessed frames and mats complying with manufacturer's
instructions. Set mat tops at height recommended by manufacturer for
most effective cleaning action; coordinate top of mat surfaces with
go bottom of doors that swing across mats to provide clearance between door
and mat.
1. Where frame is embedded in grout, install necessary shims, spacers,
and anchorages for proper location and secure attachment.
3 .2 PROTECTION
4"
A. After completing frame installation and concrete work, provide temporary
filler of plywood or fiberboard in recesses, and cover frames with
plywood protective flooring. Maintain protection until construction
0" traffic has ended and Project is near time of Substantial Completion.
B. Defer installation of floor mats until time of Substantial Completion
for Project.
END OF SECTION 12690
FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES 12690 - 3
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
cleaning and maintaining floor mats.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Check actual blocked-out openings in floors by am
accurate field measurements before fabricating frames and mats; show
recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication
schedule with construction progress to avoid a delay of the Work. •x
1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work,
guarantee opening dimensions and proceed with fabrication without
field measurements. Coordinate floor construction to ensure that an
actual opening dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain floor mats and frames from one
source of a single manufacturer.
1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Provide oversized recesses in concrete work to receive frames. Defer .s
frame installation until building enclosure is complete and related
interior finish work is in progress.
1. Install frames integrally with principal placing of concrete floor
system. Locate, align, and level frame members accurately. Recess
in-fill concrete where required for placement of concrete topping.
2 . Install mat frames integrally with principal pour of concrete floor MR
system. Locate, align, and level frame members accurately, but
recess in-fill concrete by at least 1 inch for placement of
concrete topping promptly after principal pour has hardened.
�w
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS am
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following:
am
1. Surface-type Loop Filament Matting:
a. Durable Mat Mfg. Company.
b. Pawling Corp.
C. V&B Carpet
2 .2 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide colors, patterns, and profiles of materials, including
metals and metal finishes indicated or specified. Where not indicated,
provide colors, patterns, and profiles selected by Architect from
manufacturer's standards.
B. Recessed Mat Frames: Size and style to fit floor mat type matching
approved sample, for permanent recessed installation in floor, complete
with corner pins or reinforcing and installation anchorages.
No
FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES 12690 - 2
OR
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
M1
SECTION 12690 - FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
04
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this work. Note also all Addenda.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Frames to be set in concrete floors to receive surface type floor
on mats.
2 . Surface type floor mats of the following type:
a. Loop filament matting.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that
relate to this Section:
1. Section 03300 "Cast-In-Place Concrete" for concrete work, including
forming, placing, and finishing concrete floor slabs and grouting
frames into recess.
C. Products furnished but not installed under this Section include frames
for floor mats to be set in concrete floor slabs.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the
Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of floor mat and frame specified, including
manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions, details of
construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components,
profiles, and finishes.
C. Shop drawings showing layout and types of floor mat and frames,
full-scale sections of typical installations, details of patterns or
designs, anchors, and accessories.
1. Coordinate shop drawing submittal with concrete work shop drawings
showing oversized recess for deferred installation of frames.
s� D. Samples for verification purposes in form of 12-inch-square assembled
section of floor mat and frame members with selected tread surface
showing each type of metal finish and color of exposed floor mat,
frames, and accessories required. Where finishes involve normal color
and texture variations, include sample sets showing the full range of
variations expected.
E. Maintenance data in the form of manufacturer's printed instructions for
FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES 12690 - 1
04
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #9 6 0 7 9
13 . Bottom rail shall be of .031" thick Tomized steel.
END OF SECTION 12511
4n
go
go
pw
I�AR
HORIZONTAL LOWER BLINDS 12511 - 5
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
3 . Tilt Operation: Manual with wand.
4. Position of Tilter Control: Left side unless otherwise
indicated.
5. Tilt: Full.
6. Cord Lock Operation: Cord lock, locks pull cord to stop blind
at any position in ascending or descending travel.
7. Position: Right unless otherwise indicated.
8. Cord Equalizers: Self-aligning to maintain horizontal blind all
position.
9. Mounting: Outside mounts on all windows.
10. Color: To be determined by Architect/Interior Designer using 40
manufacturer's full range of colors.
11. Manufacturer's Name: Levolor or approved equal by Interior
Designer/Architect.
12 . Product Name: Riviera 1" Dust Guard Blind. no
13 . Color: To be determined by Interior Designer/Architect prior
to order placement.
14. Finish: Pearlized.
OR
B. Detailed Specifications:
1. Riviera 1" with dust guard (25mm) blind manufactured by so
Levelor Corporation.
2 . Forever Never Worry Warranty - Lifetime Warranty.
C. Materials:
+w
1. Headrail shall be of .025" thick Tomized steel, "U" shaped, 1"
high x 9/16" wide. All hardware shall be enclosed in the so
metal headrail.
2. Guardian Tilter mechanism shall be of a .042" thick Tomized
steel housing with a self-lubricating nylon, automatically
disengaging worm and gear mechanism to eliminate overdrive.
3 . Tilt Rod shall be transparent and U-shaped with a circular
radius of approximately .125" designed to achieve minimum
torsional deflection.
4. Cord Lock shall be of .042" thick Tomized steel and shall be
crash proof.
5. Tassel on cord to be break away type.
6. Drum and Cradle shall be provided for each ladder. ""
a. Drums shall be of .031" thick Tomized steel.
b. Cradles shall be of .042" thick Tomized steel. 40
7. Installation Brackets shall be of at least .048" thick Tomized
steel with a rivet-hinged safety locking front cover to permit
removal of headrail without lateral movement.
8. Ladders (slat supports) : Distance between slats shall not
exceed 19.6 mm (nominally 15.7 slats per vertical foot) .
9. Nominal slat thickness .0085" .
10. Dustguard coating, a patent pending process which disrupts the
natural static attraction of airborne dust particles, reducing
dust build-up on the slat from 50 - 70 percent.
11. Bottom rail shall be of .031" thick tomized steel.
12. Slats shall be of 5000 series magnesium aluminum alloy only,
not to include reprocessed metals. Slats shall be nominally
1" wide and .0075"+/- .0003" thick (prior to coating) ; after
coating, the thickness of the slats shall be nominally .0085" . 'm
HORIZONTAL LOWER BLINDS 12511 - 4
OR
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
C. Unit Sizes: Obtain units fabricated in sizes to fill window and other
openings as follows, measured at 74 deg F (23 deg C) :
1. Blind Units Installed Outside Jambs: Full width and length, with
terminations between blinds of end-to-end installations at
centerlines of mullion or other defined vertical separations
between openings.
D. Installation Fasteners: Not less than two fasteners per bracket,
fabricated from metal noncorrosive to blind hardware and adjoining
construction and to support blind units under conditions of normal
use.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine openings where horizontal louver blinds will be installed prior
to beginning installation. Verify that critical dimensions are correct
and surface conditions acceptable.
1. Complete all finishing operations, including painting, before
beginning installation.
B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected.
3 .2 INSTALLATION
A. Install blinds level, plumb, and located so exterior slat edges in any
position are not closer than 1 inch to interior face of glass lites,
gaps between slat ends and jambs do not exceed 1/4 inch plus or minus
1/8 inch, and bottom rail in fully lowered position is within i4 inch of
bottom of window or other opening.
3 .3 CLEANING
A. After completing the installation, clean blind surfaces according to the
manufacturer's instructions.
B. Remove surplus materials, packaging, rubbish and debris resulting from
the installation. Leave areas where installation occurred neat, clean,
! and ready for use.
3 .4 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner
acceptable to manufacturer and installer that ensure that
horizontal louver blinds are without damage or deterioration at the
time of Substantial Completion.
3 .5 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLIND PRODUCT DATA SHEET
A. Product Specifications:
1. Slat Description: Unperforated slat complying with the
following requirements:
2 . Nominal Slat Width: 1 inch (mini blinds) .
HORIZONTAL LOWER BLINDS 12511 - 3
ON
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
B. Surface Burning Characteristics: Provide blinds identical to those •!
tested for the following fire performance characteristics as determined
by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction. me
1. Test Method: NFPA 701, Small Scale Vertical Burn Test.
C. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain horizontal louver blinds from one on
source of a single manufacturer.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
an
A. Field Measurements: Check openings by field measurements before
fabrication. Show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate
fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay in the no
Work.
1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work,
guarantee opening dimensions and proceed with fabrication of blinds
without field measurements. Coordinate wall and ceiling so
construction to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond
to guaranteed dimensions.
B. Space Enclosure and Environmental Limitations: Do not install horizontal
louver blinds until space is enclosed and weatherproof, wet-work in
space is completed and nominally dry, work above ceilings is complete,
and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are and will be
continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final
occupancy.
.w
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed,
are packaged with protective covering for storage, and are identified
with labels clearly describing contents.
1. Horizontal Louver Blinds: Before installation begins, furnish ..w
quantity of full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount of each
size installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the product �w
specified in each Horizontal Louver Blind Product Data Sheet at the end
of this Section.
2 .2 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION
A. Product Standard and Description: American Window Covering
Manufacturers Association (AWCMA) Document 1029. Each horizontal louver
blind unit consists of slats, rails, cord lock, tilting mechanism,
tapes, and installation hardware complying with referenced product
standard and requirements indicated on each Horizontal Louver Blind .�
Product Data Sheet at the end of this Section.
B. Lifting and Tilting Mechanisms: Noncorrosive, self-lubricating
materials. +�►
HORIZONTAL LOWER BLINDS 12511 - 2
r�
40
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
*TOR'r'IiphiPTOhT bip
KB #96079
SECTION 12511 - HORIZONTAL LOWER BLINDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this work. Note also all Addenda.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes horizontal louver blinds to be installed on all
exterior windows - unless otherwise noted, and any interior windows
noted.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that
related to this Section:
1. Section 06105 "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood blocking and
grounds for mounting.
2 . Section 08525 "Aluminum Architectural Windows" for windows with
horizontal louver blinds mounted on window frames.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
+0
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract
and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of horizontal louver blind specified.
Include printed data on physical characteristics.
me C. Shop drawings showing location and extent of blinds. Show installation
details at and relationship to adjoining work. Include elevations
indicating blind units. Indicate location of blind controls.
D. Samples for initial selection purposes in manufacturer's standard sizes
showing full range of colors available for each type of blind indicated.
e-0 E. Samples for Verification Purposes: One 12-inch-long slat for each color
slat required.
F. Maintenance data to include in Operating and Maintenance Manual
specified in Division 1 include the following:
1. Methods for maintaining horizontal louver blinds and finishes.
2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be
detrimental to finishes and performance.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has
specialized in installing horizontal louver blinds similar to those
required for this Project.
HORIZONTAL LOWER BLINDS 12511 - 1
40
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
OR 2 . Filters: Provide filters fabricated from Andreae filter media,
consisting of non-combustible paper formed into double accordion
folds with staggered holes.
sm
3 . Exhaust Fan: Provide 17-1/2" diameter exhaust fan, equipped with
double mounting rings.
4 . Motor: Provide explosion-proof 1/3 HP 115/230 VAC, 60 Hz, 1 phase
motor.
5. Light Fixture: Provide manufacturer's 14-1/4" diameter explosion-
proof angle type incandescent light fixture.
a. Include explosion proof light switch.
6. Draft Gauge: Provide manufacturer's standard draft gauge for
indicating when the filter media is dirty.
C. Products: Subject to conformance with requirements, provide the
following:
" 1. Spray Booth: 11BB-4 Leg type spray booth" , DeVilbiss.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .1 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT
A. Install equipment in accordance with approved location drawings and
! ' manufacturer's installation recommendations. Turn screws to a flat
seat; do not drive. Adjust moving parts to operate freely and smoothly
without binding.
3 .2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Repair or remove and replace defective work as directed upon completion
of installation.
B. Clean factory surfaces, touch up as required, and remove or refinish
damaged or soiled areas to match original factory finish, as acceptable
to Architect.
END OF SECTION 12348
OR
MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT 12348 - 3
.st
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
of any other acceptable manufacturer's product or procedures which AN
may be equivalent, but are given for purpose of establishing
standard of design and quality for materials, construction, and
workmanship. No
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver miscellaneous equipment only after wet operations in building '®
are completed.
B. Store equipment in a ventilated place, protected from the weather, with on
relative humidity of 50 percent or less at 70 deg F (22 deg C) .
C. Protect finished surfaces from soiling and damage during handling and
installation. Keep covered with polyethylene film or other protective "•'
covering.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
w
2 .1 EQUIPMENT
A. Flameproof Safety Storage Cabinets: Provide protective fireproof
storage cabinets for each type specified.
1. Cabinets : NFPA Code 30, OSHA and Factory Mutual tested and w
approved, fabricated from 18 gauge steel, double wall, all welded,
leak proof construction with 1-1/2" air space, two coat, baked
enamel finish. Equipped with double doors, two 2" vents in
cabinet sides, each with flash arresters. Static ground
connections inside and out.
a. Equip corrosive-resistant cabinets with corrosive resistant
of eth lene trays and corrosive-resistant
P Y Y Y paint finish.
2 . Doors: Steel double wall construction, matching construction of
cabinets, with continuous piano hinges, 3-point spark proof as
lock/latch assembly, key locks.
3 . Shelves: Galvanized 18 gauge steel shelves on adjustable shelf
supports, surface mounted. •
4 . Manufacturers: Subject to conformance with requirements, provide
fireproof safety storage cabinets by the following: 4"
a. Flammable Storage Metal Base Cabinet: "Model 6779A Flammable
Storage Metal Base Cabinet", 24 gallon capacity, standard 2
door, Campbell-Rhea, Division of Mohon International, Inc. , 40
Paris, TN.
b. Acid Storage Cabinet: "Model 6947A Acid Storage Case",
Campbell-Rhea, Division of Mohon International, Inc. , Paris,
TN.
B. Spray Booth: Provide floor mounted leg-type Andreae Filter Spray Booth.
1. Cabinets: Fabricated from 18 gauge steel panels with exterior
flanges.
MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT 12348 - 2
40
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTQN, MA KB 496079
MW SECTION 12348 - MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
40
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
40
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this Work. Note also all Addenda.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following miscellaneous equipment and
accessories:
1. Flameproof Safety Storage Cabinets.
2 . Paint Spray Booth.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that
relate to this Section:
1. Plumbing and Mechanical connections for miscellaneous equipment are
specified in Division 15.
2 . Electrical services, connections and motor controls are specified
in Division 16.
OR 1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract
rw and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of miscellaneous equipment specified,
including installation instructions.
ON 1. Include independent laboratory certification that applied finish
complies with specified chemical and physical resistance
requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
go A. Single Source Responsibility: Provide miscellaneous equipment,
manufactured or furnished by same miscellaneous equipment company for
single responsibility.
as B. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide electrical components required as part
of miscellaneous equipment that are listed and labeled by UL and comply
with applicable NEMA standards.
go C. Catalog Standards: Manufacturer's catalog numbers may be shown on
drawings for convenience in identifying certain miscellaneous equipment.
Unless modified by notation on drawings or otherwise specified, catalog
description for indicated number constitutes requirements for each such
unit.
no 1. The use of catalog numbers and specific requirements set forth in
drawings and specifications are not intended to preclude the use
MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT 12348 - 1
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB 496079
A. Underside Installation: Use manufacturer's recommended adjustable
support system for table-type and cabinet-type installations.
B. Set top edge of sink unit in manufacturer's recommended
chemical-resistant sealing compound and firmly secure to produce a tight
and fully leakproof joint. Adjust sink and securely support to prevent
movement.
3 .4 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES
A. Install accessories in accordance with approved location drawings and
manufacturer' s installation recommendations. Turn screws to a flat
seat; do not drive. Adjust moving parts to operate freely and smoothly
without binding.
3 .5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Repair or remove and replace defective work as directed upon completion
of installation.
B. Clean factory- and shop-finished surfaces, touch up as required, and
remove or refinish damaged or soiled areas to match original factory
finish, as acceptable to Architect.
C. Protection: Provide 6-mil plastic or other suitable water-resistant
covering over countertop surfaces. Tape to underside of countertop at
minimum of 4 feet on center. Advise Contractor of procedures and
precautions for subsequent protection of installed laboratory casework
ON and fittings from damage by work of other trades.
END OF SECTION 12345
!Ak
go
12345-13
LABORATORY CASEWORK
so
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
flush, tight, and uniform. Align similar adjoining doors and au
drawers to a tolerance of 1/16 inch.
C. Wall Cabinets: Securely fasten to solid supporting material and not to Ak
plaster, lath, or wallboard. Anchor, adjust, and align wall cabinets
as specified for base cabinets.
1. Reinforcement of stud walls to support wall-mounted cabinets will No
be accomplished during wall erection by trade involved; however,
indicating accurate location and sizing of reinforcement is
responsibility of laboratory casework Installer. a«
D. Install hardware uniformly and precisely after final finishing is
complete. Set hinges snug and flat in mortises unless otherwise
indicated. Turn screws to flat seat. Adjust and align hardware so that go
moving parts operate freely and contact points meet accurately. Allow
for final field adjustment after installation.
wo
E. Adjust casework and hardware so that doors and drawers operate smoothly
without warp or bind. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by
manufacturer.
ON
3.2 INSTALLATION OF TOPS
A. Field Jointing: Where practicable, make in same manner as factory ,
jointing using dowels, splines, adhesives, and fasteners recommended by
manufacturer. Locate field joints as shown on accepted shop drawings,
factory-prepared so there is no jobsite processing of top and edge
surfaces.
B. Fastening to cabinets: Secure tops to cabinets with epoxy cement,
applied at each corner and along perimeter edges of not more than 48
inches on center.
C. Abut top and edge surfaces in one true plane, with internal supports
placed to prevent any deflection. Provide flush hairline joints in top +�+�►
units using clamping devices. At material joints, use manufacturer's
recommended adhesives and holding devices to provide joint widths not
more than 1/16 inch wide at any location, completely filled and flush
with abutting edges.
1. Where necessary to penetrate tops with fasteners, countersink heads
approximately 1/8 inch and plug hole flush with material equal in .�
chemical resistance, color, hardness, and texture to top surface.
D. Provide holes and cutouts as required for mechanical and electrical
service fittings.
aw
E. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove any surface scratches, clean and
polish entire surface. .w.
F. Provide scribe moldings for closures at junctures of top, curb, and
splash with walls as recommended by manufacturer for materials involved.
Use chemical-resistant, permanently elastic sealing compound where
recommended by manufacturer.
3 .3 INSTALLATION OF SINKS
am
LABORATORY CASEWORK 12345-12
as,
4"
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
No
1. Stainless steel, Type 302, satin finish, with formed beveled edges.
D. Cover Plate Identification: Identify cover plates at receptacles,
r0, switches, terminal posts and other locations as indicated. Provide
1/4-inch-high letters unless otherwise indicated.
1. In addition, identify the following devices whether indicated on
Drawings or not.
a. AC receptacles, other than standard 125 volt duplex, grounding
type. Indicate voltage and phase.
2 . On stainless steel, either etch directly on plate or apply
laminated plastic nameplates. Fill etched letters on cover plates
with black enamel. Etch laminated plastic strips to provide white
lettering on black background and securely fasten to cover plate
with noncorrosive fasteners or epoxy adhesive.
E. Switches: Furnish single pole, double pole, or 3-way switches, as
required, rated 120-277 volts AC, and in amperage capacities to suit
units served. Furnish in color to match receptacles.
2.11 ELECTRICAL FITTING SCHEDULE
A. Receptacles: Furnish receptacles for AC circuits that are identified
by UL marking "Hospital Grade" and comply with the following:
1. R-1 - Receptacle, duplex, single gang, single face 2 outlets for
panel mounting. Stainless steel face plate. 3-wire polarized
grounding type, 20 amperes, 125 volt.
2 . R-2 - Receptacle, double gang duplex, single face 4-outlets, for
panel mounting. Stainless steel face plates. 3-wire polarized
grounding type, 20 amperes, 125 volt.
3 . R-3 - Receptacle, duplex, single gang, double face 2 outlets on one
side and data phone on opposite side (category 5) . For deck
mounting on tables 3-wire polarized grounding type, 20 amperes, 125
volt.
4 . R-4 - Single data (category 5) .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CASEWORK INSTALLATION
$a A. Install plumb, level, true and aligned with no distortions. Shim as
required, using concealed shims. Where laboratory casework abuts other
finished work, scribe and apply filler strips for accurate fit with
fasteners concealed where practicable.
B. Base Cabinets: Set cabinets straight, plumb, and level. Adjust
sub-tops within 1/16 inch of a single plane. Fasten each individual
OR cabinet to floor at toe space with fasteners spaced 24 inches on center.
Bolt continuous cabinets together. Secure individual cabinets with not
less than 2 fasteners into floor where they do not adjoin other
cabinets.
1. Where required, assemble units into one integral unit with joints
ON LABORATORY CASEWORK 12345-11
a*
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #9607
plastic fitted with cold or hot water index. Entire fixture shall ow
have a beige color, baked plastic coating resistant to cleaning
abrasion and reagent fumes. Provide hose connector and aerator
with each fixture. One standard tapered plug type cock shall be +*
included, finished like fixture and be fitted with gas index
buttons with each fixture. Fixture shall be fitted with a
rectangular, semi-resiliant neoprene gasket and serviced from below
w
with tail-pieces through the mounting surface, secured with lock-
nuts.
2 . WG-2 - Vandalgard Unicast Fixture by Sheldon - Combination water o
and gas fixture shall have the main body cast in one piece of 5A-
ASTM-30 brass. Tubing shall not be a part of its structure. Body
shall be carefully machined using standard valve seat, composition
washer, operating screwthreads and stem for cold water. Operating am
handle shall be of delrin plastic fitted with cold water index.
Entire fixture shall have a beige color, baked plastic coating
resistant to cleaning abrasion and reagent fumes. A removable, we
serrated hose connector and an anti-splash outlet shall be
included. Two standard tapered-plug type cocks shall be included,
finished like fixture and to be fitted with gas index buttons.
Fixture shall be fitted with a rectangular, semi-resiliant neoprene "
gasket and serviced from below with tail-pieces through the
mounting surface, secured with lock-nuts.
3. W-1 - Vandalgard Unicast Fixture - shall have the main body cast
in one piece of 5A-ASTM-30 brass. Tubing shall not be a part of
its structure. Body shall be carefully machined using standard
valve seat, composition washer, operating screwthreads and stem for
cold or hot water. Operating handle shall be of delrin plastic
fitted with cold or hot water index. Entire fixture shall have a
beige color, baked plastic coating resistant to cleaning abrasion am
and reagent fumes. A removable, serrated hose connector and an
anti-splash outlet shall be included. Fixture shall be fitted with
a rectangular, semi-resiliant neoprene gasket and serviced from
below with tail-pieces through the mounting surface, secured with
lock-nuts.
2.10 ELECTRICAL SERVICE FITTINGS
ww
A. Service Fittings: Provide units complete with metal housing or box;
necessary receptacles, terminals, switches, pilot lights, and device
plates; and fittings and gaskets required for mounting on casework. All
fittings UL labeled. Provide ground-fault circuit interrupters (GFCI)
for all fittings when located within 61 - 0" of units containing water
supplies, sinks or faucets.
Oft
1. Provide service fittings at all stations.
2 . Service fittings are indicated by symbols, with design type of each
fitting indicated by letters and numbers.
B. Recessed-Type Fittings: Galvanized steel outlet box, size as required,
complete with cover plate and receptacles or other devices as indicated.
C. Cover Plates: Provide stainless steel cover plates for AC outlets and
devices, and laminated plastic plates for DC or combination AC/DC
outlets and devices.
�s.
LABORATORY CASEWORK 12345-10
4W
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
Im forged brass, ground and lapped, held in place under constant spring
pressure.
00 E. Handles: Provide 4-arm forged brass handles for valves, stops, faucets,
remote controls, and cocks, except for ground-key cocks, steam valves,
and micro-adjustable needle cocks.
1. For equipment designed for accessibility by the handicapped,
provide paddle-type lever handles manufactured of same materials.
2 . For micro-adjustable needle cocks, provide knurled brass safety
handle.
F. Needle Valves: Provide units with renewable self-centering floating
cones and renewable seats of stainless steel or monel metal.
00
G. Water Valves and Faucets: Provide units with renewable barrel locked
in valve body. Barrel shall contain all wearing parts, with renewable
discs.
H. Remote Control Valves: Although straight-through type are indicated,
use angle valves wherever required.
I. Hand of Fittings: Furnish right-hand fittings except where "L" is
indicated on drawing symbol identification.
J. Vacuum Breakers: Provide vacuum breakers on all water fittings (hot and
cold) .
2 . 9 MECHANICAL SERVICE FITTINGS SCHEDULE
A. Ground-Key Outlets: Use for Air (A) , Gas (G) , Vacuum (V) service as
go noted on Drawings and as follows. Numbers are for drawing symbols
followed by unit description. Turrets are made to mount with shank
connections with threaded 3/8" tapered I.P. both ends and 3/8" straight
I. P. for lock nut. Provide equipped with brass lock nut and heavy
washer.
1. G-1 Single gas cock unit for deck mounting, with serrated outlet.
2 . G-2 Double gas cock unit for deck mounting with outlets 90 degrees
apart, for deck mounting, with serrated outlet.
3 . G-2A Double gas cock unit for deck mounting with outlets 180
degrees apart for deck mounting with serrated outlet.
40 4 . G-3 Triple gas cock unit with deck mounting outlets at 90 degrees
from each other for deck mounting, with serrated outlet.
5. G-4 Quadruple cock unit with outlets at 90 degrees from each other
410 for deck mounting with serrated outlet.
6. A-1 Single air cock unit for deck mounting, with serrated outlet.
B. Hot and Cold Water Outlets: Hot and cold water (HCW) as noted on
tit Drawings and as follows. Numbers are for drawing symbols, followed by
unit description.
1. WG-1 One pair of Vandalgard Unicast Fixture by Sheldon -
Combination water and single gas cock fixture shall have the main
body cast in one piece of 5A-ASTM-30 brass. Tubing shall not be
a part of its structure. Body shall be carefully machined using
NO standard valve seat, composition washer, operating screwthreads and
stem for cold or hot water. operating handle shall be of delrin
12345-9
Mo LABORATORY CASEWORK
oft
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
1. Board shall have integrally constructed bottom drip edge designed
to project over countertop backsplash.
2. Provide 20w" x 30 11h with 32 plastic pegs permanently set into peg
board. .o
B. Soil Cart: Fully enclosed hardwood exterior with metal lined, water
tight interior, metal lined hardwood top with heavy duty hinges and
swivel casters. 16 11w x 16 111 x 23 1/2"h in quantities as indicated on IM
drawings.
C. Safety Glass Monitor: Manufacturer's standard reinforced steel cabinet
with double locked doors mounted on full piano hinges, baked enamel
finish, with sufficient compartments to hold 36 pairs of safety glasses
and 8 pairs of goggles. Cabinet shall be equipped with ultraviolet lamp
controlled by twin safety switches and timer, 3-wire cord and plug. 41""
Provide 36 pair of safety glasses and 8 goggles are to be included in
each cabinet.
�w
D. Upright Rod Assembly and Metal Crossbar: Stainless steel. Four
vertical rods and two horizontal cross bar, 3/8-inch diameter and 36
inches long, unless otherwise shown; four flush-socket receptacles and
four crossbar clamps. Taper ends of vertical rods to fit flush plates;
all other rod ends rounded.
E. Laboratory Utility Tables: Provide 24 11w x 60"l x 30 11h wood frame utility
table with cast epoxy resin top. Conform to requirements for materials,
construction and finish as specified for tops, sinks and wood laboratory
casework.
w
1. Provide "Model No.4171011, Sheldon / Division General Equipment
Manufacturers.
2.8 MECHANICAL SERVICE FITTINGS rw
A. Service Fittings: Provide units complete with washers, locknuts,
unions, nipples and other accessories for positive mounting to 04
supporting laboratory units. Include wall and deck flanges,
escutcheons, handle extension rods, remote valves, and similar items
required. Fabricate units to withstand test pressure of 100 psig.
B. Material and Finish: Fabricate service fittings from cast or forged red
brass containing a minimum of 85 percent copper. Provide exposed
surfaces, including fittings, escutcheons, and trim, with a polished am
chrome-plated finish.
C. Service Outlets Identification: Provide colored plastic index discs
with embossed identification letters at each service fitting handle or o®"
knob. Secure discs to fitting handles to be tamperproof. Color code
discs as follows:
Letter 40
Service Color Code Color
Air Orange Air Black
Gas Dark blue Gas White
Hot water Red HW White g'
Vacuum Yellow Vac Black
Cold water Dark green CW White
D. Ground-Key-Type
y-Type Hose Cocks: Tapered core and lever handle of one-piece
LABORATORY CASEWORK 12345-8
sk
ON
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTrAMPTON, MA KB 496079
NO aqua regia, butyl alcohol, ethyl alcohol, formaldehyde, methyl
alcohol, kerosene, silver nitrate, xylene.
00 4 . Workmanship: Cast surfaces very smooth, with factory cutouts for
sinks and drip grooves. Fabricate plain butt-type joints assembled
with epoxy adhesive and prefitted, concealed metal spline.
2 .6 SINKS, TROUGHS
A. Sizes: As indicated or manufacturer's closest stock size of equal or
greater volume, if acceptable to Architect.
B. Outlets: 2-1/2-inch diameter, 6-inch minimum length, fabricated of cast
epoxy resin, or stainless steel, or as otherwise acceptable to
Architect.
C. Overflows: For each sink, except cup sinks, provide overflow of
standard beehive or open top design and with separate strainer. Height
2 inches less than sink depth. Provide in same material as sink.
D. Cast Epoxy Resin Sinks: Nonspecular black, molded in one piece with
surfaces smooth, corners coved and bottom sloped to outlet. Minimum
physical properties and chemical resistance as specified for cast epoxy
resin tops; %-inch minimum thickness.
1. Provide sinks as indicated on the drawings by symbols with the
description as follows:
00 a. S-1 - Epoxy resin sink with inside dimensions 17 11W x 8"L
x 8" D.
b. S-2 - Epoxy resin sink with inside dimension 14 11W x 24"L
00 x 12" D, with a center divider and one drain in each
compartment.
C. S-3 - Epoxy resin sink with inside dimensions 14 11W x 24"L
x 12" D.
as d. S-4 - Epoxy resin sink with inside dimension 14 11W x 17"L
x 5" D.
e. S-5 - Epoxy resin sink with inside dimension 14 11W x 24"L
4W x 5" D.
2 . Sink depth measured from top of counter to bottom of sink shall
conform to Massachusetts Code at stations designated for use by the
handicapped (HC) .
E. Install sink units with integral rim or sink ring, set in mastic or
sealant to form a positive seal with top. Apply approximately
OR 1/8-inch-thick, heat-resistant underseal to undersink surfaces for
condensation prevention and sound-deadening.
F. Conform to requirements for materials as specified for tops or sinks.
2 .7 ACCESSORIES
OR A. Peg Boards: Single-faced unit as indicated on drawings, manufacturer's
standard design fabricated from cast epoxy resin. Conform to
requirements for materials and construction as specified for tops or
sinks.
12345-7
ON LABORATORY CASEWORK
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORmKnrrtvmpN ZTp, KB #96079
e�
cabinets and walls and ceilings, of same material and finish as
cabinets.
I. Drawer and Cabinet Locks: Disc tumbler type, 8 disc tumbler and dead
bolt, round cylinder only exposed, brass with chrome plated finish.
1. Provide locks for all drawers and cabinet doors with 2 keys each.
2 . Keys shall be subject to masterkeying.
J. Sliding Door Hardware Sets: Manufacturer's standard, to suit type and
size of sliding door units. a
K. Cabinet Base Molding: Extruded vinyl or rubber, black, 4 inches high.
Provide on exposed sides and fronts of floor-mounted cabinets.
ww
1. Provide metal corner guards at all outside base corners.
L. Leg Shoes: Extruded rubber, black, coved-bottom type. ws
M. Adjustable Shelf Supports: Nickel plated wrought steel,
mortise-mounted.
a�
2.5 TOPS, SINKS, AND ACCESSORIES
A. Tops, Box Curbs, Splash Rim: Provide smooth, clean exposed tops and 00
edges in uniform plane free of defects. Make exposed edges and corners
uniformly rounded.
B. Top Thickness: 1-inch thickness, with tolerance not exceeding plus or ask
minus 1/32 inch. Provide front and end overhang of 1 inch over base
cabinets, formed with continuous drip groove on under surface � inch
from edge. wo
C. Cast Epoxy Resin: Factory-molded tops of modified epoxy resin
formulation, uniform mixture throughout full thickness. Provide in
smooth, nonspecular finish of color indicated. M*
1. Color: Black.
2 . Physical Properties: Comply with the following minimum so
requirements:
Flexural strength: 18,000 - 20, 000 psi.
Compressive strength: 38,000 psi. so
Hardness (Rockwell M) : 114.
Water absorption (24 hrs) : 0.02 percent (maximum) .
Heat distortion point: 350 deg F (176 deg C) .
Thermal shock resistance: Highly resistant.
3 . Chemical Resistance: Spot test with the following reagents in
standard laboratory concentrations, in contact with finished top w
for 24 hours; top shall be entirely unaffected or show only slight
dulling of finish:
a. Glacial acetic acid, nitric acid, sulfuric acid, ammonium
hydroxide, sodium hydroxide, amyl acetate, benzene, ethyl
acetate, ethyl ether, hydrogen peroxide, methyl ethyl ketone,
phenol, trichloroethylene, zinc chloride, hydrochloric acid, an
phosphoric acid, chromic acid, calcium hypochlorite, acetone,
LABORATORY CASEWORK 12345-6
uo
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #9 6 0 7 9
OR 1. Sealer coat.
2 . Stain to match color selected.
3 . Mineral filler for open-grained wood.
4. Multiple coats of highly chemical-resistant finish, heat-dried and
sanded between each coat to produce a smooth, satin luster free of
imperfections.
D. Semiexposed Portions: Apply sealer coat, colored to match exposed
portions, and follow with heavy application of clear, water-repellant
finish coat to provide a smooth, washable surface.
E. Concealed Portions: One heavy coat of water-repellant finish.
00 2 .4 CASEWORK HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A. Hardware, General: Provide manufacturer's standard satin finish,
commercial quality, heavy-duty hardware complying with requirements
!w indicated for each type.
B. Hinges: Institutional 5-knuckle hinges, US26D finish. Provide one pair
for doors less than 4 feet high and 1-1/2 pair for doors over 4 feet
high. Provide offset hinges for full 180 degree door swing.
1. Physical properties: capable of supporting a 150 lb. load applied
12" from hinge center with door open 90 degrees.
C. Pulls: Solid metal for drawers and swing doors, mounted with 2 screws
fastened from back. For sliding doors, provide recessed flush pulls.
ON Provide 2 pulls for drawers over 24 inches wide.
D. Door Catches: Nylon-roller spring catch or dual self-aligning,
on permanent magnet catch, or brass elbow catch with siled compressing
spring. Provide 2 catches on doors over 4 feet high.
E. Drawer Guides: Provide nylon-tired, ball-bearing rollers with epoxy
0-4 coated metal guide channels and integral stops to eliminate accidental
removal of drawer. Provide guides designed to provide self-closing of
drawer and to prevent rebounding action when drawers are closed.
00
1. Physical properties: capable of supporting a 75 lb. load
perpendicular at 18" extended length.
F. Drawer Stops: Designed to permit easy removal, and yet prevent
inadvertent drawer removal. Provide on all drawers, located on the
inside.
G. Label Holders: Provide where indicated, size to receive standard label
cards approximately 1-inch by 2-inch nominal size, finished to match
other exposed hardware.
1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Knape and Vogt
#704ANO.
OR a. Provide label holders at each sink with the wording "Non-
potable water" .
b. Provide one label holder per cabinet.
H. Filler Strips: Provide where required for closing space between
LABORATORY CASEWORK 12345-5
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
A. General: Provide laboratory casework with a factory-applied finish that
is capable of withstanding the tests specified in this article with no
permanent change in gloss, color, film hardness, adhesion, or film
protection.
B. Acids: Not less than 10 drops (0.50 cc) of the following reagents
applied to finish surface, covered with watch glass, convex side down,
for 60 minutes, then washed and dried. "a,
1. Hydrochloric acid (all concentrations) , sulfuric acid (50 percent) ,
nitric acid (30 percent) , phosphoric acid (75 percent) , acetic acid ew
(all concentrations) .
C. Solvent: Not less than 10 drops (0.5 cc) of the following reagents
applied to finish surface, covered with watch glass, convex side up, for "'
60 minutes, then washed and dried.
1. Ethyl alcohol, butyl alcohol, methyl alcohol, toluene, acetone, Aw
benzene, carbon tetrachloride, formaldehyde (37 percent) , gasoline,
ethyl acetate, ethyl ether, methyl ethyl ketone, naphtha, kerosene,
xylene, glycerin, furfural.
aw
D. Bases and Salts: Not less than 5 drops (0.25 cc) of the following
reagents applied to finish surface, covered with watch glass, convex
side up, for 60 minutes, then washed and dried. aw
1. Sodium hydroxide (all concentrations) , ammonium hydroxide (all
concentrations) , potassium hydroxide (all concentrations) ,
saturated zinc chloride, saturated sodium chloride, saturated *+
sodium sulphide, saturated sodium carbonate, poultice of "Tide"
laundry detergent and water.
E. Moisture Resistance: No visible effect when finish surface exposed to w'
the following:
1. Hot water at a temperature of 190 deg F (91 deg C) to 205 deg F (96 oft
deg C) , trickled down surface at 45-degree angle for 5 minutes.
2 . Constant Moisture using a 2-inch by 3-inch by 1-inch cellulose
sponge, soaked with water, in contact with surface for 100 hours.
W*
F. Cold Crack: No effect when subjected to 10 cycles of temperature change
from 20 deg F (14 deg C) for 60 minutes to 125 deg F (52 deg C) for 60
minutes.
w�
G. Adhesion and Flexibility: No peeling or cracking or exposure of metal
when metal is bent 180 degrees over a %-inch-diameter mandrel.
sw
2.3 FINISH FOR WOOD LABORATORY CASEWORK
A. General: Provide exposed portions of wood laboratory casework with a
clear factory finish that complies with chemical and physical resistance w"r
requirements specified.
B. Preparation: Sand exposed and semiexposed components, using machine and
hand methods. Machine marks, cross-sanding, tool marks, or other *a"
surface blemishes are not acceptable.
C. Exposed Portions: Carefully sand finishes after each surface treatment.
an
Apply finishes as follows:
LABORATORY CASEWORK 12345-4
00
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
requirements specified in this article.
B. Definitions: The following definitions apply to wood laboratory
casework units:
1. Exposed portions of casework include surfaces visible when doors
and drawers are closed. Bottoms of cases more than 4 ' -0" above
floor shall be considered as exposed. Visible members in open
cases or behind glass doors also shall be considered as exposed
portions.
2 . Semiexposed portions of casework includes those members behind
opaque doors, such as shelves, divisions, interior faces of ends,
case back, drawer sides, backs and bottoms, and back face of doors.
Tops of cases 6' -6" or more above floor shall be considered
semiexposed.
3 . Concealed portions of casework include sleepers, web frames, dust
panels, and other surfaces not usually visible after installation.
C. Exposed Materials: Do not use exposed faces of lighter-than-average
color joined with exposed faces of darker-than-average color. Do not
use two adjacent faces which are noticeably dissimilar in grain, figure,
and natural character markings.
1. Solid Lumber: Clear, dry, premium-grade red oak, free from defects
and selected for compatible grain and color.
2 . Plywood Face Veneer: Same species as exposed solid lumber, clear,
selected for grain and color compatible with exposed solid lumber,
no defects. Provide solid crossbandings without voids. Edgeband
exposed edges with minimum 1/8-inch-thick, solid wood edging of
same species as face veneer.
w D. Semiexposed Materials : Comply with the following:
1. Solid Lumber: Dry, sound, selected to eliminate appearance
defects. Plain sawn red oak or any species of hardwood or similar
color and grain to exposed portions.
2 . Plywood: Hardwood, ANSI/HPMA HP, Good Grade (1) or softwood, PS-1,
Group 1, A-A, INT of species to match color and grain of exposed
an members.
E. Concealed Members: Comply with the following:
40 1. Solid Lumber or Plywood: Any species, with no defects affecting
strength or utility.
2 . Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, minimum 40 lb./cu. ft. density, Grade
40 1-M-2 or better.
3 . Hardboard: ANSI/AHA A135.4, Class 1, tempered.
F. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide wood
laboratory casework products by one of the following:
1. "Instalab", Kewaunee Scientific Equipment Corp.
taw 2 . "Series 120011, Sheldon/Div. General Equipment Mfrs.
3. "Series 5011, Taylor/Div. American Desk.
4 . Case Systems, Inc.
W 2 .2 CHEMICAL AND PHYSICAL RESISTANCE OF LABORATORY CASEWORK FINISHES
LABORATORY CASEWORK 12345-3
0 moll
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
ew
E. Product test reports from and based on tests performed by a qualified
independent testing laboratory evidencing compliance of laboratory
casework finishes with requirements specified for chemical and physical
resistance. an
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single Source Responsibility: Provide laboratory casework with tops, �w
sinks, and service fittings, manufactured or furnished by same
laboratory furniture company for single responsibility.
B. Catalog Standards: Manufacturer's catalog numbers may be shown on
drawings for convenience in identifying certain laboratory cabinet work.
Unless modified by notation on drawings or otherwise specified, catalog
description for indicated number constitutes requirements for each such so
cabinet.
1. The use of catalog numbers and specific requirements set forth in
drawings and specifications are not intended to preclude the use
of any other acceptable manufacturer's product or procedures which
may be equivalent, but are given for purpose of establishing
standard of design and quality for materials, construction, and
workmanship.
2 . The approval of other listed manufacturers' products does not
relieve the Contractor from compliance with the detailed
requirements of this Section.
C. Testing Laboratory Qualifications: To qualify for acceptance, an
independent testing laboratory must demonstrate to Architect's
satisfaction, based on evaluation of laboratory-submitted criteria
conforming to ASTM E 699, that it has the experience and capability to
conduct satisfactorily the testing indicated.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver laboratory casework only after wet operations in building are
completed.
r
B. Store completed laboratory casework in a ventilated place, protected
from the weather, with relative humidity of 50 percent or less at 70 deg
F (22 deg C) .
an
C. Protect finished surfaces from soiling and damage during handling and
installation. Keep covered with polyethylene film or other protective
covering.
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish complete touch-up kit for each type and color of laboratory „w
casework provided. Kit to include touch-up paint and other materials
necessary to perform permanent spot repairs to damaged casework finish.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WOOD LABORATORY CASEWORK
A. General: Provide wood laboratory casework that complies with
LABORATORY CASEWORK 12345-2
sk
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
SECTION 12345 - LABORATORY CASEWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
ON, who performs this work. Note also all Addenda.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes laboratory casework units, complete with
laboratory countertops, integral sinks, accessories, and mechanical and
electrical service fittings mounted on countertop.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that
relate to this Section:
1. Installation of wood blocking is specified in Section 06105
"Miscellaneous Carpentry. "
2 . Supply and installation of service fittings are specified in this
OR Section, including internal piping and wiring, up to designated
point of supply connection, as indicated on Drawings. Supply
connections are specified in Divisions 15 and 16 Sections.
ON 1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract
and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of laboratory furniture unit specified.
1. Include independent laboratory certification that applied finish
complies with specified chemical and physical resistance
requirements.
C. Shop drawings for laboratory casework and fittings showing plan layout,
elevations, ends, cross-sections, service run spaces, location and type
of service fittings, together with associated service supply connection
required.
1. Include details and location of anchorages and fitting to floors,
walls, and base, including required blocking or back-blocking.
2 . Include layout of units with relation to surrounding walls, doors,
windows, and other building components.
3 . Coordinate shop drawings with other work involved.
4 . Include manufacturer's recommendations for blocking and securing
of laboratory casework units and fittings.
D. Samples for verification purposes of each type of specified finish,
including top material. Provide in minimum 6-inch by 6-inch sizes.
Samples will be reviewed by Architect for color, texture, and pattern
only. Compliance with other specified requirements is exclusive
On responsibility of Contractor.
LABORATORY CASEWORK 12345-1
ow
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
3.1 INSTALLATION on
A. General: Install fume hoods plumb, level, aligned, rigid, and securely
anchored to building and adjacent laboratory casework, in proper
location, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved
shop (layout) drawings. Install closures neatly. Securely attach
access panels, but provide for easy removal and secure reattachment.
rr�
B. Coordinate sequence of work with mechanical and electrical trades and
with related work such as laboratory casework specified in Division 12.
rw
3 .2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field Test: Field test each unit after completion of installation to
verify proper operation of hoods. Test(s) shall be performed by a fully •o
qualified individual utilizing air flow meters in accordance with
ASHRAE/ANSI 110. Dry ice and/or smoke tests shall also be required, at
no cost to the Owner, if necessary, to demonstrate proper performance aie
of each hood as installed at the job site.
3.3 ADJUST AND CLEAN
w
A. Moving Parts: Carefully check and adjust moving parts to insure smooth,
near-silent, and accurate sash operation with one hand and with uniform
contact of rubber bumpers; ensure counter-balances operate without j..
interference.
B. Clean surfaces, including both sides of glass.
C. Damaged Work: Repair equal to new undamaged work, or replace with new
units, as acceptable to Architect.
END OF SECTION 11610 w
Brim
wmr
LABORATORY FUME HOODS 11610 - 8
01
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMP'T'ON MA KB #9 6 0 7 9
M. Exhaust Duct Collars: Provide factory installed, corrosion resistant,
epoxy coated steel exhaust duct dollars, in sizes and shapes which best
suit the face velocity requirements and the building conditions.
Coordinate with the Architectural and Mechanical drawings for these
determinations.
N. Air Supply Duct Collars: Provide factory installed dust collars in
sizes and shapes which best suit the building conditions. Coordinate
with the Architectural and Mechanical drawings for these determinations.
Preinstall the air supply duct collars to a pressurized air control box
which contains horizontal and adjustable vertical louvers.
1. Include a removable sheet metal cap on the air supply ducts.
O. Service Fixtures: Include a flush mounted 3" x 6" (minimum) cast epoxy
resin cup sink, a remote controlled cold water gooseneck faucet, with
a serrated tip hose connection extending over the cup sink, and a remote
controlled gas valve. Locate all service fixtures and their remote
controls on either the right or the left hand side of the hood, as
determined by the Architectural drawings, and as confirmed on the shop
drawings. Fabricate portions of the service fixtures exposed to the
interior of the hood from corrosion-resistant coated brass.
P. Electrical Fixtures: Include a junction box located on top of the hood,
and GFI duplex outlets located on each side face of the hood.
1. Provide fixtures with a factory installed and prewired audible and
visual alarm system, including a 110 decibel rated horn and a
warning light, designed to detect low face velocity. Include a
manual override control switch for the horn located in the same
place on the front face of each hood.
so
2 .5 ASSEMBLY
A. Ship hoods completely assembled, including all service fixtures and
in accessories pre-installed, all working surface floors pre-installed,
and all electrical fixtures pre-installed and pre-wired. Provide
manufacturer' s disassembly instructions for installation through
40 doorways.
2 .5 RELATED EQUIPMENT
`'0 A. Include factory installed single phase, 120 volt, manual motor starter
switches in each hood, with indicating lights on the face of each hood.
Include one switch for the exhaust blower. Provide a blank cover plate
4" on the auxiliary air supply blower switch location (not used) . Prewire
the exhaust blower switch to a junction box provided on top of each
hood. "
2 .6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Demonstrate fume hood performance before shipment by testing according
to ASHRAE 110. Provide testing facility, instruments, equipment, and
materials needed for tests.
on PART 3 - EXECUTION
LABORATORY FUME HOODS 11610 - 7
A*
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
E. Exposed Interior Surfaces: Fiberglass reinforced polyester for exposed am
interior surfaces. Use stainless steel for exposed metal. Provide
interior fasteners fabricated from highly corrosion resistant
nylon/Teflon. no
F. Working Surface: Provide a working surface (counter) of 1-1/4" thick,
recessed cast epoxy dished to contain spills, fully watertight and
shipped preassembled to the fume hood superstructure.
G. Interior Baffles and Dampers: Properly designed interior exhaust
baffles providing an opening at the top and bottom of the hood along a„
with adjustable dampers. These dampers shall allow adjusted flow of air
through hood to compensate for type of gas, apparatus, or heat source
used. The lower baffle shall include a fixed center slot. The unit
shall be fabricated such that it allows for easily cleaning behind the am
baffles, of same material as the hood lining.
H. Plenum Chamber: Where plenum chamber is provided, have adequate volume so
for hood dimensions, extending full width of hoods to equalize incoming
air flow, of same material as hood lining. Provide corrosion-resistant,
steel duct stub of proper dimension for connection to exhaust duct
assembly. 'm�
I. By-Pass Grilles: When air is required to be taken from room other than
through hood sash opening, provide suitable by-pass grilles having the Am
required free opening but concealing plenum behind.
J. Sash: Equip hoods with operable sash(es) , capable of vertically opening
to permit an unobstructed face opening. During fume hood operation, the 010
sash shall manually close to allow a balanced amount of auxiliary air
into the hood around the window perimeter. Fabricate sash with
four-sided frame of minimum 0.0516-inch-thick (18-gage) stainless steel .w
with corners welded and ground smooth.
1. Glaze with safety glass, set into chemical-resistant rubber glazing
channels and held in place by removable, stainless steel top. Im
2 . Counterbalance vertical sliding sash with sash weight and cable
system. Provide stainless steel or monel metal cable, ball-bearing
sheaves, plastic glides in stainless steel guides, and stainless ow
steel lift handles. Provide rubber bumpers at top and bottom of
each sash unit.
K. Lights: Equip fume hoods with a two-tube, rapid-start vapor tight, am
fluorescent light fixtures of longest practicable length. Shield light
fitting from hood interior by 1/4-inch-thick safety glass or
1/8-inch-thick tempered-glass panel, sealed airtight into hood body with
chemical-resistant rubber channels. Set units so that fluorescent tubes o"
are easily replaceable from outside hood. Provide only fittings which
carry UL label.
00
1. Equip fixtures complete with rapid-start fluorescent tubes.
Prewire fixtures to a front-mounted switch.
L. Closure Panels: Metal, as applicable to match adjoining surfaces. wo
Provide as required to close openings between fume hood base cabinet and
superstructure and adjacent building wall or ceiling construction.
Field verify panel dimensions. No
LABORATORY FUME HOODS 11610 - 6
go
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
glass, permanently laminated to clear polyvinyl butyryl interlayer.
2 .3 BY-PASS, SPLAYED-FACE, CONSTANT-VOLUME FUME HOOD
A. Equip fume hoods with compensating by-pass above sash which functions
automatically as sash is closed to limit increase in air velocity and
ON to maintain relatively constant exhaust air volume through hood,
regardless of sash position. Provide unit designed to operate with air
velocity of 100 lineal fpm through open face.
B. Splay or radius top and sides of face opening to provide an aerodynamic
(airfoil) section to ensure smooth, even flow of air into hood.
C. Provide air foil vane at bottom to match configuration of side sections.
Mount foil with 1-inch open space between foil and bottom front edge of
hood superstructure to prevent backflow of air and to direct positive
flow of air across work surface. Extend airfoil under sash line, so
that sash closes on top of foil.
D. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the
following:
1. "Pass-thru" Demonstration Type: "Model 554C325E" , 60" wide x 32"
deep x 96" high, with sash interlock 90L16200 and two 30" wide wood
hinged double door base cabinets, suitable for in-wall
installation, by Fisher Hamilton, Inc. , Two Rivers. WI
10 2 . Workstation Type (HC) : "HOPEC IV", 48" wide x 32-1/4" deep x 84"
high, with four-leg wood table base for HC accessibility, by Fisher
Hamilton, Inc. , Two Rivers. WI
or an equivalent hoods manufactured by one of the following:
3 . Sheldon Laboratory Systems, Inc.
4 . Kewaunee Scientific Corp.
2 .4 HOOD SUPERSTRUCTURE CONSTRUCTION
A. General: Design hoods to be highly fume resistant, to collect, retain
and dispose of hazardous fumes with complete safety, minimum purging of
an air from room supply, and minimum turbulence within hood chamber.
B. Framework: Heavy-gage steel members, reinforced, braced and assembled
40 to insure strength and rigidity.
C. Body Construction: Fabricate exterior of minimum 0.0516-inch-thick
(18-gage) , cold-rolled steel with component parts screwed together to
OR allow removal of end panels, front-end fascia pieces, top fascia and
airfoil strips. Apply manufacturer' s standard acid- and alkali-
corrosion resistant, two part, baked-on epoxy finish to interior and
exterior surface of component parts prior to final assembly.
D. Ends: Double-wall end panels without projecting corner posts or other
obstructions to interfere with smooth, even flow of air. Close area
so between double walls for housing sash counter-balance weights, utility
lines, and remote-control valves, as required.
LABORATORY FUME HOODS 11610 - 5
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
1. Physical Properties: Comply with the following minimum
requirements:
a. Flexural strength: 15, 000 psi. +
b. Compressive strength: 30, 000 psi.
C. Hardness (Rockwell M) : 100.
d. Water absorption (24 hours) : 0.02 percent (maximum) . ew
e. Heat distortion point: 350 deg F.
f. Thermal-shock resistance: Highly resistant.
2 . Flame Spread: 25 or less per ASTM E 84. wa
3 . Chemical Resistance: Epoxy-resin material has the following
ratings when tested with indicated reagents according to NEMA LD 3,
test procedure 3 .9.5: aw
a. Acetone: Moderate effect.
b. Acetic acid (98 percent) : No effect.
C. Hydrochloric acid (37 percent) : No effect.
d. Nitric acid (70 percent) : No effect.
e. Phosphoric acid (85 percent) : No effect.
f. Sulfuric acid (33 percent) : No effect.
g. Benzene: No effect. `
h. Butyl alcohol: No effect.
i. Carbon tetrachloride: No effect.
j . Ethyl acetate: No effect. as
k. Ethyl ether: No effect.
1. Formaldehyde: No effect.
M. Phenol (85 percent) : No effect .
n. Xylene: No effect. °m
o. Ammonium hydroxide (28 percent) : No effect.
p. Sodium hydroxide (50 percent) : Moderate effect.
q. Zinc chloride: No effect. No
2 .2 CONSTRUCTION
A. Exterior Metal: Heavy gauge, zinc-coated paint 10k steel, finished in WK
an alkali and acid corrosion-resistant two part baked-on epoxy finish.
Provide in color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard
range of available colors. ow
1. Fabricate exterior panels to allow easy disassembly of major
sections of the hood for entrance through existing or new doorways.
Coordinate the dimensions of these openings in the field. Fasten am
all exterior panels with corrosion resistant nylon/Teflon or
stainless steel fasteners.
2 . Wherever service fixtures are provided, furnish the exteriors with mix,
removable access panels for plumbing and wiring connections.
B. Interior: Minimum interior depth of 24" clear and a minimum height of
48" from the working surface to the interior of the ceiling, constructed eel
of fireproof and stain resistant construction materials.
1. Provide interior lining, exhaust baffles, and exhaust baffle
dampers fabricated from fiberglass reinforced polyester.
2 . Stainless Steel: AISI Type 302/304 with No. 4 finish wherever
exposed metal.
3 . Laminated Safety Glass: Two sheets of clear float glass, complying
with ASTM C 1036 requirements for Type I, Class I, Quality q3
LABORATORY FUME HOODS 11610 - 4
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON. MA KB #96079
B. Fume hood shall be designed to minimize static pressure and loss with
adequate slot area and rectangular exhaust collar configuration. Maximum
static pressure loss readings shall not exceed the maximum with sash in
the full open position:
Face Velocity Measured S.P.L. (w.g. )
100 F.P.M. .30 inches
C. Noise Criteria: Test data of octave band analysis verifying hood is
capable of a 50 NC value when connected to a 50 NC HVAC source. Reading
taken 3 ' in front of open sash at 100 fpm. face velocity.
9!
D. Safety Glass : Products complying with ANSI Z97.1 and testing
requirements of 16 CFR, Part 1201 for Category II materials.
1. Subject to compliance with requirements, permanently mark safety
glass with certification label of SGCC or another certification
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
E. Average illumination of work area: Minimum 80 footcandles.
1.6 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Coordinate delivery of fume hoods with delivery of other laboratory
casework, equipment and components.
B. Protect finished surfaces from soiling and damage during handling and
installation. Keep covered with polyethylene film or other protective
covering.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of fume hoods with laboratory casework, fume
hood exhaust duct work, plumbing and electrical work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Steel Sheet: Commercial-quality, cold-rolled, carbon-steel sheet,
complying with ASTM A 366; matte finish; suitable for exposed
applications; and stretcher leveled or roller leveled to
stretcher-leveled flatness.
B. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 302 or 304, stretcher leveled,
4, No. 4 finish.
1. For perchloric acid fume hood linings and countertops, use
Type 316L instead of Type 302 or 304 .
C. Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Polyester: Polyester laminate complying with
ASTM D 4357, with a chemical-resistant gel coat on the exposed face, and
having a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to
ASTM E 84.
D. Epoxy: Factory-molded, modified, epoxy-resin formulation, uniform
a�w mixture throughout, full thickness with smooth, nonspecular finish.
LABORATORY FUME HOODS 11610 - 3
no
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
2 . Include layout of units with relation to surrounding walls, doors, IN
windows, lighting and air-conditioning fixtures, connections of
hood-to-hood exhaust system, location of access doors, cut-off
valves, junction boxes.
3 . Coordinate shop drawings with other trades whose work affects
installation or performance of fume hood.
4 . Provide roughing-in drawings for mechanical and electrical
services.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide laboratory fume hoods manufactured
or furnished by laboratory equipment supplier for single responsibility.
B. Catalog Standards: Manufacturer's catalog numbers may be indicated on
drawings for convenience in identifying certain fume hoods. Unless
modified by notation on drawings or otherwise specified, manufacturer's
current catalog description for indicated number, together with
indicated or specified options or accessories, constitutes requirements
for each such unit.
1. Use of catalog numbers and specific requirements indicated on +��*
drawings and in specification are not intended to preclude use of
equivalent products by other listed acceptable manufacturers, but
are given for purpose of establishing a minimum standard of design
and quality for materials, construction, workmanship, capacity, and so
performance of each fume hood.
2 . The approval of other listed manufacturers' products does not
relieve the Contractor from compliance with the detailed ,m
requirements of this Section.
C. Source Quality Control: Architect reserves right to require manufacturer
to demonstrate hood performance prior to shipment to prove compliance No
with contract requirements. Test hoods, testing facility, necessary
instrumentation, apparatus, and equipment shall be supplied by
manufacturer at no cost to Owner. Test hoods to verify performance to
requirements, using smoke and air-flow meters in accordance with
ASHRAE/ANSI 110.
D. Fume Hood Standard: Provide fume hoods complying with the requirements r
of SEF A 1.1, "Laboratory Fume Hoods - Recommended Practices."
■W
1.5 Design Requirements
A. General Performance: Design fume hoods so that, when connected to
exhaust system that provides proper exhaust volume under normal !
laboratory conditions, fume hoods will operate in a safe, efficient
manner, within acceptable tolerances for face velocities specified.
Dead-air pockets and reverse-air currents will not be permitted along
surface of hood interiors.
1. Negative variations of face velocity shall not exceed 20% of the
average face velocity
2. Maximum variation in exhaust CFM, static pressure and average face
velocity as a result of baffle adjustment shall not exceed 5% for
any baffle position.
LABORATORY FUME HOODS 11610 - 2
on
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
SECTION 11610 - LABORATORY FUME HOODS
PART 1 - GENERAL
4"
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this work. Note also all Addenda.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Bench-top laboratory fume hoods.
wo 2 . Fume hood base cabinets.
3 . Fume hood ductwork connections.
4 . Cup sinks in fume hoods.
S . Component fittings, fixtures and accessories.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that
relate to this Section:
1. Division 15 Sections for connecting fume hoods to duct work.
2 . Division 15 and 16 Sections for installing service fittings in fume
hoods and for connecting service utilities at indicated points.
3 . Fume hood vent connections, exhaust fans and ductwork (from hood
duct collar to hood exhaust system) are specified in a Division 15
Section.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract
and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Manufacturer's data for each type of fume hood.
C. Samples of the following fume hood component parts. Samples will be
reviewed by Architect for color, texture, and pattern only.
1. Submit one full-size sample of finished fume hood unit complete
with hardware, service fittings, and accessories.
2 . Acceptable sample units will be used for comparison inspections at
40 Project. Unless otherwise directed, acceptable sample units may
be incorporated in Work. Notify Architect of their exact
locations. If not incorporated in Work, retain acceptable sample
units in building until substantial completion of Work; remove from
premises when directed by Owner's Representative.
D. Shop drawings for fume hoods, showing plan layout, elevations, ends,
cross-sections, service run-spaces, location and type of fixtures and
service fittings, together with indication of associated service supply
connections required.
ON 1. Include details and location of anchorages and fitting to floors,
walls, and base.
LABORATORY FUME HOODS 11610 - 1
go
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's instructions. Wn
3 .2 ORIENTATION
■d
A. Instruction orientation shall be provided by local and/or factory
representatives for all equipment furnished under this section.
END OF SECTION 11500 " 0
am
laM
so
ART ROOM KILN 11500-2
ap
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
SECTION 11500 - ART ROOM KILN
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
0M A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
R who performs this work. Note also all Addenda.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This section includes a labor, materials, equipment and appliances
required to furnish and install the kiln(s) in the Art Room, where
indicated on drawings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for kiln indicating compliance with requirements, including
installation instructions. Provide complete operating and maintenance
instructions.
1.4 WARRANTIES
A. Each kiln shall be furnished with the standard factory guarantee
(minimum 2 years) . Start of the warranty period shall be the first day
of school after completion of the building.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide:
"Model KM1227-3", 208 volt, single phase electric kiln with KilnMaster
controller that includes: power switch, smooth touch pad, digital
readout showing prompts, messages, and temperature, alarm setting, and
delay firing options.
00 Skutt Ceramic Products, Inc. , Portland, OR,
Telephone (503) 231-7726.
1. Capacity: Provide the following minimum value:
a. Total Volume: 10-0 cubic feet.
2 . Optional Accessories: Provide the following additional features:
a a. 8 half shelves
b. Skutt Envirovent
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Kiln shall be completely installed and adjusted and left in
satisfactory condition, ready for operation. Installation shall be in
ART ROOM KILN 11500-1
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
C. Install gymnasium equipment in position and relationship to adjoining
construction as indicated, securely anchored to supporting structure,
and in manner that produces plumb and straight vertical edges and plumb
and flat backboard surface.
1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved
shop drawings.
2 . Test electrically and manually operated units to verify that
gymnasium equipment is in optimum functioning condition.
D. Floor Sleeves: Furnish to General Contractor for installation by other
trades.
E. Wall Safety Padding: Secure to masonry wall with 1/2" diameter toggle
bolts.
1. Neatly drill bolt holes, and patch with mortar. up
2. Form inside corners by overlapping panels.
3 . Form outside corners by cutting a v-groove in the back of the
panel.
4. Form cutouts for all wall-mounted devices, accessories and
equipment by cutting back of panel, in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions. Furnish additional fabric to cover
all exposed foam padding and wall.
3 .2 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Protect gymnasium equipment after installation from damage during
construction. If despite such protection damage occurs, remove and
replace damaged components or entire unit as required to provide units
in their original, undamaged condition.
1. Provide temporary covering of gymnasium equipment until time of
Substantial Completion. Use type of covering approved by gymnasium
equipment manufacturer that will effectively protect gymnasium
equipment from abrasion, breakage, or other damage.
B. Clean gymnasium equipment immediately prior to date scheduled for
inspection intended to establish date of Substantial Completion. Use
methods and cleaning materials recommended by gymnasium equipment
manufacturer, taking care not to scratch or damage surfaces in any way.
END OF SECTION 11491
io
so
GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT 11491-10
no
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
D. Judge' s Platform: Include one judge' s platform capable of attachment
to main court volleyball standards.
!I 1. Include manufacturer's protective padding.
E. Floor Sleeves for Volleyball standards: Furnish manufacturer's floor
sleeves fabricated from 3-3/4" O.D. steel tubing, extending 9" into
floor slab; equipped with chrome plated cover plate and 8" O.D. x 1/2"
thick recessed aluminum collar, and cork gasket. Include swivel
retainer pin and removal key.
1. Subject to conformance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
a. "Model 870 Floor Sleeve", Porter.
b. Senoh.
C. Schelde.
2 . 4 PHYSICAL EDUCATION EQUIPMENT
A. Tumbling Mats: Provide twenty (20) manufacturer' s tumbling mats,
consisting of 1-1/4" thick ethafoam filler, flame-retardant, 14 oz. ,
non-tear vinyl laminated nylon fabric, mildew and rot resistant,
fortified with an infection-combating fungicide, forming 4 ' -0" x 6' -0"
panels.
1. Subject to conformance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
a. "Model 5054-612 Tumbling Mat" , Porter.
B. Flat Mat Truck: Provide manufacturer's mat truck, measuring 4 ' -0" x
6' -011, fabricated from heavy wall 2" x 3" rectangular steel tubing,
welded to form a unitized frame, with spreader tubes at 24" centers.
1. Include four 5" diameter non-marking swivel casters, and molded
gray rubber pads attached to the two front corners of the truck.
2 . Finish the assembly in manufacturer's blue enamel.
F. Subject to conformance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. "Model 158-460 Flat Mat Truck", Porter.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install gymnasium at locations indicated on plans and in
compliance with gymnasium equipment manufacturer's instructions.
B. Inspection: Examine work in place on which installation of gymnasium
is in any way dependent to ensure that conditions are satisfactory for
installation. Notify Architect and do not proceed until correct
conditions are present.
1. Absence of such notification will be construed as acceptance of
O work in place.
GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT 11491-9
so
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
falling while making height adjustment; and finished with a plastic foot
to prevent floor damage.
1. Telescoping range: 6' -1" to 71 -11-5/811 . Ans
2 . Include manufacturer's 4" diameter pulley at the upper end of
upright.
3 . Equip standards with a heavy duty power winch, and self-locking
rachet mechanism, including 1-3/4" wide high tensile strength nylon
strap and metal snap hook, and removable handle.
4 . Equip standards with a heavy duty power winch, and self-locking
rachet mechanism, including 1-3/4" wide high tensile strength nylon
strap and metal snap hook, and removable handle.
5. Subject to conformance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
a. "Model 991 Power-Line Volleyball System", Porter. tiw
b. SENOH.
C. Schelde.
B. Practice Court Volleyball System (typical for two courts) : Provide
manufacturer's volleyball standards, fabricated from 3-1/2" O.D. high
strength 6063T6 aluminum alloy, with internal reinforcing rib; equipped
with sliding collar T-handle mechanism to lock uprights at preset
heights of 6' -111, 71 -4-1/211, and 71 -11-5/811, as well as infinite height
adjustments.
1. Equip standards with a heavy duty power winch, and self-locking me
rachet mechanism, including 1-3/4" wide high tensile strength nylon
strap and metal snap hook, and removable handle.
2. Furnish manufacturer's standard protective pads for practice court AID
volleyball standards.
3 . Furnish manufacturer's transport system for practice court
volleyball standards.
4. Subject to conformance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
a. "Model 941 Competition Volleyball System", Porter.
b. Senoh.
C. Schelde.
C. Nets: Provide three (3) high quality volleyball nets, 32 ' long x 39"
high, net fabricated from 4" square, heavy duty #36 Black Nylon Mesh,
with a 2" wide vinyl coated polyester hem double stitched around entire
perimeter of net.
1. Furnish top hem with a 42 ' -6" long, 1/8" diameter, 2000 lb. minimum
backing strength, nylon coated galvanized aircraft cable, and
looped ends formed by heavy swag fittings. 44
2. Furnish net with 6" end hems with 1/2" diameter fiberglass dowel
and 1" wide white polypropylene webbing type tension straps and
special quick adjustment tension clips, three at each end. rr
3. Furnish bottom hem with 1/4" diameter braided white nylon rope.
4. Include manufacturers's standard net antennas and boundary markers.
S. Subject to conformance with requirements, provide one of the
following: ON
1. "Model 2295 Volleyball Net", Porter.
2. Senoh.
C. Schelde.
go
GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT 11491-8
I"
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
B. Subject to conformance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. "Model 90348-326 Wall Wainscot" ,Porter.
2 . Similar by BPI.
3 . Similar by ADP.
2 .6 WALK - DRAW DIVIDING CURTAIN
A. Provide one (1) manufacturer's manually operated walk-draw dividing
curtains, in size as shown on the drawings, consisting of lower and
upper sections formed into a single continuous curtain.
1. Equip curtain with 3/4" swivel snap at each end and vinyl nylon
strap with swivel snap.
' 2 . Include wall mounted screw eyes.
3 . Include pair of wall mounted, velcro faced, vinyl nylon strap tie-
backs at storage position.
B. Lower Section: Heavy vinyl coated polyester, weighing 18 oz. per square
yard, meeting flame retardant standards of UL-214, California State Fire
Chief and NFPA-701; double needle locked stitched seams on all hems and
pockets; 8 feet high.
C. Upper Section: Open polyester type grid weave, electronically welded,
PVC coated, 45 to 50% open area, weighing 6 oz. per square yard, meeting
flame retardant standards of UL-214 and NFPA-701.
1. Fabricate top of upper section with a 2-3/4" wide solid hem with
3/8" I.D. metal spur grommets spaced at 12" centers.
D. Curtain Track: Manufacturer's 16 gage formed steel with metal dust
enclosure.
1. Track Hangers: Manufacturer's heavy duty high tensile ductile iron
cast clamps to suit building locations and divider locations.
2 . Provide hangars as required to complete installation.
E. Carriers: Provide manufacturer's master carriers located at each end
of the curtain; and intermediate carriers spaced at 12" centers of the
following types:
1. Master carriers: 4 wheel ball bearing, swivel type.
2. Intermediate carriers: 1" diameter dual nylon rollers.
3 . Include manufacturer's electrically welded and plated #4 twist line
coil chain and S-hooks for attachment to grommets so that bottom
hem hangs 3" from the floor.
F. Subject to compliance with requirements; provide the following:
1. "Model 90640-100 Walk-Draw Gymnasium Divider Curtain", Porter.
2 . "Similar Model", AAI
2 .7 VOLLEYBALL STANDARDS AND FLOOR SLEEVES
A. Main Court Volleyball System (center court) : Provide manufacturer's
telescoping type posts, both sections, fabricated from 3-1/2" diameter
Type 6063TG aluminum extrusion; that does not extend above the top of
the net; counterbalanced to eliminate the possibility of accidentally
GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT 11491-7
am
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
AM
1. Include manufacturer's lifetime warranty against glass breakage.
2 . Mount backboard to manufacturer's backboard frame, fabricated from
heavy wall rectangular steel tubing, fully welded construction.
3 . Include manufacturer's vertical center strut assembly, mounted am
behind the backboard to transmit undue loading directly through the
glass to the rear frame.
B. Include manufacturer's 2" thick, 6 lb/pcf density foam Safety Padding AWO
for edge of backboards.
C. Subject to conformance with requirements, provide one of the following: AW
1. Backboards for Backstops:
a. "Model 204 Power Strut", Porter.
b. "Model No. GB1sb", BPI.
C. "Similar Model", ADP.
2 .4 GOALS
A. Spring Mounted Goals: Provide six (6) manufacturer's goals designed to
absorb shock loads, due to slam dunking or hanging on the rim, by
incorporating a positive lock, pressure release mechanism, capable of
automatic release and pivot downward when a force of 230 lbs. is applied
on the top of the rim at the most distant point from the backstop. 4..
1. Factory preset release mechanism to comply with latest NCAA
recommendation for rebound elasticity to insure 35 to 50 energy
range of total impact energy. Pressure release adjustment is
accomplished without removing the mechanism cover.
B. Rims fabricated from 5/8" diameter cold drawn alloy steel formed to an
18" inside diameter ring, positioned 6" from the frame of backboard of
heavy formed steel, hinged type housing with removable cover; and
rigidly braced by die cut steel braces.
1. Fabricate rim with tube tie net attachment not requiring any tying.
2. Provide goals with official oven cured epoxy orange finish.
3 . Install spring mounted goals at all backstops.
4. Include mounting hardware, and anti-whip net.
2 .5 WALL SAFETY PADDING
A. Provide manufacturer's wall safety padding, consisting of 2" thick 6
lb./pcf. density bonded foam filler, flame-retardant, 14 oz. , non-tear
vinyl laminated nylon fabric, mildew and rot resistant, fortified with
an infection combating fungicide, folded and adhesively applied to a
3/8" thick plywood backing board, forming 2 ' -0" wide x 6' -0" high
panels.
1. Provide a 1" wide nailing margin at the top and bottom of each
panel.
2. Provide California State Fire Chief's approval of fabric for flame
and smoke spread rating compliance.
GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT 11491-6
1^
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
permitting precise plumbing of assembly during installation and to
automatically lock unit into playing position without the use of
any auxiliary equipment.
1. Include rear brace assembly fabricated from 1-7/8" O.D. heavy
wall structural steel pipe, with zinc plated internal
telescoping tube arrangement for raising backstop into
overhead storage position; and adjustable collar to plumb face
of backboard.
2 . Include backstop support fabricated from 3-1/2" O.D. heavy
!» wall structural steel pipe, with heavy duty formed steel
fittings for attachment to building structure.
C. Include additional superstructure support bridging for
installations where spaces between structural members
exceeds 14 ' -0 11 .
3 . Provide manufacturer's safety strap backstop motion-sensitive
safety lock, incorporating a fully automatic reset without the use
of auxiliary equipment, to automatically lock a backstop in
position at any time during the raising or lowering cycle, or
storage.
1. Include manufacturer's hoist cable retractor reel to
automatically retract the hoist cable and the safety strap
00 from the area of play when the backstop is in the lowered
position.
4 . Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
d. "Model 11, Porter.
e. "Similar Model", BPI
f. "Similar Model", ADP.
D. Provide manufacturer's electric worm gear type winch capable of holding
gymnasium equipment in any position, with 1/4" diameter galvanized
aircraft cable, 7, 000 lb. ultimate breaking strength. Winch to be
mounted on manufacturer's support assembly at ceiling.
Am
5. Provide main court and cross court winch motors rated at 3/4 HP, 9 amp
capacitor type, 60 Hz, 115 Volt single phase, including thermal overload
protection.
0'+
F. Include flush installation key switch controls for each pair of motors.
7. Include mechanically interconnected limit switch assembly, integrally
mounted in the motor housing.
2.3 BACKBOARDS
A. Backboards for all Backstops: Provide six (6) manufacturer's
rectangular glass backboards, 72" x 4211, fabricated from '/z" thick
tempered glass with etched markings, mounted in manufacturer's steel
frame with gray powder coat finish.
GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT 11491-5
on
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
1. Porter Athletic Equipment Company (Porter) ,Broadview, IL. w
2 . Architectural Design Products (ADP) , Salt Lake City, UT.
3 . Basketball Products Institutional, Inc. (BPI) , Everett, WA.
2.2 BASKETBALL BACKSTOPS
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard units consisting of frame,
backstop, goal with net, electric winch, cable, and other components as
required for a complete installation, and complying with the descriptive
requirements below.
1. Finish all gymnasium equipment structural components with 1 coat
of manufacturer's standard flat black enamel paint, for finish
painting by Section 09900.
.w�
B. Main Court Retractable Backstops: Provide two (2) manufacturer's
ceiling suspended, side-fold and rear-braced backstops with fully-welded
vertical front drop frame assembly, consisting of 6-5/8" O.D. center �w
mast, 1-7/8" O.D. rear diagonal brace and 3-1/2" O.D. top horizontal
mast hinge spreader fabricated from heavy wall structural steel pipe.
C. Include manufacturer's direct goal mount system directly through bank
into center mast, conforming to NCAA and NHSA regulations.
1. Provide manufacturer's adjustable offset suspension system, „
permitting precise plumbing of assembly during installation and to
automatically lock unit into playing position without the use of
any auxiliary equipment.
1. Include side brace assembly fabricated from 1-7/8" O.D. heavy
wall structural steel pipe, with adjustable folding knee joint
for raising backstop into overhead storage position.
2 . Include backstop support fabricated from 3-1/2" O.D. heavy
wall structural steel pipe, with heavy duty formed steel
fittings for attachment to building structure.
3 . Include additional superstructure support bridging for
installations where spaces between structural members
exceeds 14 ' -011 .
3 . Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
w
a. "Model 95511, Porter.
b. "Similar model"', BPI
C. "Similar model", ADP.
on
C. Cross Court Retractable Backstops: Provide four (4) manufacturer's
ceiling suspended, rear-fold and side-braced backstops, with fully-
welded vertical front drop frame assembly, consisting of 6-5/8" O.D. +' !
center mast and 2-3/8" O.D. diagonal sway braces, fabricated from heavy
wall structural steel pipe, including top horizontal mast hinge spreader
fabricated from 4" structural steel channel.
w
1. Include manufacturer's direct goal mount system directly through
bank into center mast, conforming to NCAA and NHSA regulations.
�.w
2 . Provide manufacturer's adjustable offset suspension system,
GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT 11491-4
I
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
W
1. The use of catalog numbers and specific requirements set forth in
drawings and specifications are not intended to preclude the use
of any other listed manufacturers' product or procedures which may
00 be equivalent, but are given for purpose of establishing standard
of design and quality for materials, construction, and workmanship.
2 . The approval of other listed manufacturers' products does not
relieve the Contractor from compliance with the detailed
go
requirements of this Section.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver gymnasium equipment until building is enclosed, other
construction within spaces where backstops will be installed is
substantially complete, and installation of backstops is ready to take
place.
B. Protect gymnasium equipment from damage during delivery, handling,
storage, and installation.
C. Store gymnasium equipments in manufacturer's protective packages in a
position that complies with gymnasium equipment manufacturer' s
directions. Keep units in manufacturer's protective packages until time
of installation.
00 D. Protect surfaces of gymnasium equipment from damage due to abrasion,
dust, and other conditions.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Coordination: Coordinate accessory locations, installation, and
sequencing with other work to avoid interference with and ensure proper
installation, operation, adjustment, cleaning, and servicing of
gymnasium equipment.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by gymnasium equipment
manufacturer, agreeing to replace any equipment that develops defects
in material or workmanship within warranty period.
1. Include the manufacturer's lifetime warranty against breakage of
any backboards.
2 . Include the manufacturer's 20 year goal warranty.
3 . Include the manufacturer's 10 year volleyball standards warranty
and three year hardware warranty.
B. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may
have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in
addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the
Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
gymnasium equipments by one of the following:
GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT 11491-3
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
following:
1. Plan of gymnasium at 1/8" scale.
2 . Locations of all gymnasium equipment.
3 . Location of wiring connections.
4 . Anchorage details at 3/4" scale.
5. Accessories.
6. Indicate each item being furnished, including materials,
quantities, exact locations, connections and fasteners.
E. Manufacturer's Certificates of Insurance.
F. Submit the following Quality Control Submittals:
1. Affidavit, signed by the Company Field Advisor and notarized,
certifying that the equipment meets the Contract requirements and
is operating properly.
2 . Name, business address, and telephone number of Company Field
Advisor, secured for the required services. Include certified
statement from the manufacturer listing the qualifications of the
Company Field Advisor.
G. Operation and Maintenance Data: Deliver two copies to the Architect.
Include all installed equipment, name, address and telephone number of
the nearest fully-equipped service organization.
r,t
H. Manufacturer's Certificate of Flame Resistance for wall safety padding,
batting/golf cage netting, and dividing curtain netting.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Gymnasium Equipment: Provide gymnasium equipment from a nationally
recognized manufacturer with at least five `
g years successful experience
in the manufacturer of each product specified.
B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has
specialized in the installation of gymnasium equipments and other
gymnasium equipment with at least three years successful experience in
the installation of each product specified.
C. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish gymnasium equipment manufacturers '
standard inserts and anchoring devices that must be built into cast-in-
place concrete, masonry or structural steel. Coordinate delivery with
other work to avoid delay.
D. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of gymnasium equipment
required from a single manufacturer as a complete unit, including
necessary mounting hardware and accessories.
E. Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of gymnasium
equipment with other construction supported by, or penetrating through,
structural steel, and masonry walls, including light fixtures, HVAC
equipment, fire-suppression system, and partitions.
F. Catalog Standards: Manufacturer's catalog numbers may be shown on
drawings for convenience in identifying certain work. Unless modified
by notation on drawings or otherwise specified, catalog description for
indicated number constitutes requirements for each item. �*
GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT 11491-2
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
SECTION 11491 - GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this work. Note also all Addenda.
1.2 SUMMARY
IMF A. This Section includes the following:
1. Electrically operated basketball backstops.
!w 2 . Basketball backboards and goals.
3 . Dividing Curtains.
4 . Wall Safety Padding.
5. Manually operated gym dividing curtains
6. Floor sleeves, standards and accessories for Volleyball
7. Chinning bars and climbing ropes.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that
relate to this Section:
1. Section 03310 "Structural Concrete" , for installation of inserts
furnished by this section.
2 . Section 04200 "Unit Masonry", for construction of masonry walls to
receive wall attachments installed under this section..
3 . Section 05120 "Structural Steel", for attachment of winches,
conduits, supports, etc.
4 . Section 09900 "Painting", for painting of backstop support
structure.
00 5 . Section 11482 "Scoreboards", for control units to drive Game/Shot
Clocks.
6. Division 16 Sections for electrical wiring, connections, and
06 installation of remote operator control switches for electrically
operated backstops.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Provide gymnasium equipment and outdoor athletic equipment conforming
to the latest edition of rules and regulations of the National
Federation of State High School Association (NFSHSA) and the
Mr Massachusetts Interscholastic Athletic Conference (MIAC) .
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract
and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of gymnasium equipment specified.
C. Wiring diagram for electrically operated units.
D. Shop drawings showing layout and types of gymnasium equipment. Show the
GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT 11491-1
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
with safety chain and mounting brackets.
I. Subject to conformance with requirements, provide scoreboards and
accessories as manufactured by one of the following:
1. Scoreboard:
a. "Fair Play Model BB-6620" with D-612 timer set, mounting
brackets and MP69 control unit by Hampden Engineering
Corporation.
b. "Model 2450" with "Model S60" shot clock set, SBSK brackets
and MPC-4 control unit Nevco Scoreboard Company.
C. "Model BB1713SV" with shot clock set, mounting brackets and
2000 series control unit by Daktronics Scoreboards
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install scoreboards at locations indicated in compliance with
scoreboard manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install scoreboards in position and relationship to adjoining
construction as indicated, securely anchored to supporting substrate,
and in manner that produces plumb and straight vertical edges and plumb
and flat viewing surface.
1. Test electrically operated units to verify that scoreboard,
W controls, lamps, timers and other operating components are in
optimum functioning condition.
C. Install remote operator control jacks and flexible coiling cable.
3 .2 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Protect scoreboards after installation from damage during construction.
If despite such protection damage occurs, remove and replace damaged
components or entire unit as required to provide units in their
original, undamaged condition.
1. Provide temporary covering of scoreboards until time of Substantial
Completion. Use type of covering approved by scoreboard
manufacturer that will effectively protect scoreboard from
abrasion, breakage, or other damage.
B. Clean scoreboard immediately prior to date scheduled for inspection
intended to establish date of Substantial Completion. Use methods and
cleaning materials recommended by scoreboard manufacturer, taking care
not to scratch or damage surfaces in any way.
END OF SECTION 11482
SCOREBOARDS 11482-5
w..
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA B # 6079
b. Provide system capable of displaying "time out" and "time of war
day" in place of game time.
C. Time of day display capability when control unit is *�!
disconnected.
6. Team Scores: Provide electric display capability of two team
scores, set to any number 0-199 by means of additive or direct
mode.
C. Multipurpose Lower Scoreboard Section: Capable of operation by separate eye
keyboard overlays on the control unit for basketball, volleyball and
wrestling.
1. For basketball, provide the following display features:
a. Team Fouls: 0-99 display
b. Player Uniform Number: 0-99 display
C. Player Personal Fouls: 0-9 display
d. Shot Clock
e. Goal Light
2. For volleyball, provide the following display features:
a. Number of games won
b. Number game being played
C. Team Serving
.w
D. Horn: Provide manufacturer's standard horn, mounted in scoreboard case,
capable of sounding automatically at 0:00 for two seconds, or by manual
operation.
E. Captions: Provide back lighted plastic graphics, gold letters on navy ..
blue background for each scoreboard in the following configurations:
1. "Home, Guests, Fouls, Player, Won, Game", 6" high letters.
2. "Period", 6" high, non-illuminated letters.
3 . 111,2,3,411, 4" high numerals.
4 . "Bonus (B) , Possession (arrows) ", 3" high.
F. Control Cable: Provide two sets of manufacturer's standard 2-wire, w.
coaxial type, 10 ft. length, with all connectors.
G. Remote Operator Control Jacks: Provide surface mounted junction box and
jacks for installation on underside of bleacher near scorer's table and
wall outlets as indicated. Include flexible, coiling cable to connect
bleacher-mounted junction box(es) to wall-mounted junction box(es) .
H. Shields : Provide two sets of manufacturer's Lexan shields, complete
SCOREBOARDS 11482-4
w
W
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA
KB #96079
1. Provide one(1) set of shot clocks (and mounting brackets) displaying
seconds to be mounted on main court backstops, compatible with
scoreboards and control system,
�w
B. Electrically Operated Indoor Scoreboards: Provide two (2) Units
fabricated for wall installation, and complying with the following
PW requirements:
1. Scoreboard Case: Heavy duty minimum 16 gauge aluminum sheet, baked
enamel finish, and furnished with brackets and all hardware for
wall mounting. Scoreboard to have a visible surface area of
approximately forty-eight square feet (6' x 81 ) .
a. Color: Navy Blue with Gold lettering
2 . Control Center: Provide two (2) manufacturer's standard
microprocessor board control units, 120 volts, 10 watts, 60 Hz,
grounded, cased high impact grey plastic, with travelling LCD
display, lithium cell battery backup, self-test mode, power on-off
switch, alternate time switch internal beeper to acknowledge entry,
multiple scoreboard control capability.
a. Include remote hand-held time switch, and 25 feet of cable
with connectors.
b. Include keyboard overlays for basketball, volleyball, and
wrestling use.
C. Include time of day display, Time out timer with warning,
interval horn, upcount auto stop/horn, and 1/10th second
display during last minute.
d. Include control center carrying case, manufactured to accept
control center module.
e. Control center must be compatable with and capable of
coordinating scoreboard game time and shot clock display with
time clock and shot clock mounted on basketball backstops.
f. Control system must be capable of running both scoreboards in
synchronized mode or individually with one controller for each
scoreboard (with backstop-mounted shot clock disconnected) .
3 . Provide manufacturer's standard lamp intensity dimmer feature,
capable of activation from operator and control center keyboard.
4. Illumination Banks: Provide Manufacturer's standard 4 x 7 lamp
matrix in individual aluminum reflectors, 7 watt, 120 volt lamps.
Provide lamps in manufacturer's standard colors to differentiate
time, score, fouls, and individual fouls.
5. Timing: Provide manufacturer's standard and timing system and
displays, bi-directional, up and down count, direct set capability
of any number minutes and seconds for 0 :00 to 99:59.
a. Provide system capable of displaying 1/10th seconds during the
final minute of the period.
11482-3
SCOREBOARDS
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
walls, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression
system, and partitions. Coordinate exact location and type of electrical
power feeds required for installation.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver scoreboards until building is enclosed, other
construction within spaces where scoreboards will be installed is
substantially complete, and installation of scoreboards is ready to take
place.
B. Protect scoreboards from damage during delivery, handling, storage, and
installation.
C. Store scoreboards in manufacturer's protective packages in a position ..�
that complies with scoreboard manufacturer's directions. Keep units in
manufacturer's protective packages until time of installation.
D. Protect surfaces of rear scoreboards from damage due to abrasion, dust, wo
and other conditions.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS aw
A. Coordination: Coordinate accessory locations, installation, and
sequencing with other work to avoid interference with and ensure proper
w
installation, operation, adjustment, cleaning, and servicing of
scoreboards.
1.7 WARRANTY ,
A. Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by scoreboard
manufacturer, agreeing to replace any equipment that develops defects
in material or workmanship within warranty period.
B. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
C. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may
have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in
addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the
Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. an
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SCOREBOARDS, GENERAL no
A. Provide manufacturer's standard units consisting of case, control units,
control cable, timers, lamp banks, signals, mounting accessories and
other components as required for a complete installation, and complying
with descriptive requirements below.
2 .2 INDOOR SCOREBOARDS
on
A. Provide two (2) units remotely operated, individually or in unison, from
either of two (2) signal control stations for scoreboard, displaying er
minutes, seconds, 1/10th seconds, team scores, period, bonus, jumpball
"next possession", and changeable captions for basketball / volleyball
/ wrestling on multi-purpose lower section, utilizing low voltage 100%
solid state 2-wire cable, quartz crystal controlled multiplex system.
SCOREBOARDS 11482-2
w
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB 40-,A70
SECTION 11482 - SCOREBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this work. Note also all Addenda.
1.2 SUMMARY
PP A. This Section includes the following:
1. Electrically operated indoor scoreboards.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that
relate to this Section:
1. Section 04200, "Unit Masonry" for masonry wall construction,
building in of sleeves, conduits, supports, etc.
2 . Section 12760 "Telescoping Bleachers" for location of remote
operator control switch jacks.
3 . Division 16 Sections for electrical wiring, connections, and
installation of remote operator control switches for electrically
operated scoreboards.
- 1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract
and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of scoreboard specified.
C. Wiring diagram for electrically operated units.
ws D. Shop drawings showing layout and types of scoreboards. Show the
following:
1. Location of scoreboard centerline.
ow 2. Location of wiring connections.
3 . Anchorage details.
4 . Accessories.
go
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish accessory manufacturers' standard
RM inserts and anchoring devices that must be set in concrete or built into
masonry. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.
B. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of scoreboard required
from a single manufacturer as a complete unit, including necessary
mounting hardware, controls and accessories.
C. Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of scoreboards
with other construction supported by, or penetrating through, masonry
SCOREBOARDS 11482-1
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
*rOR'i'IipkiP'r'ON MA
RE #96079
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install scoreboards at locations indicated in compliance with
scoreboard manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install scoreboards in position and relationship to adjoining
construction as indicated, securely anchored to supporting substrate,
and in manner that produces plumb and straight vertical edges and plumb
we and flat viewing surface.
1. Test electrically operated units to verify that scoreboard,
controls, lamps, timers and other operating components are in
optimum functioning condition.
C. Install remote operator control jacks and coiling cable.
3 .2 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Protect scoreboards after installation from damage during construction.
If despite such protection damage occurs, remove and replace damaged
components or entire unit as required to provide units in their
original, undamaged condition.
1. Provide temporary covering of scoreboards until time of Substantial
Completion. Use type of covering approved by scoreboard
manufacturer that will effectively protect scoreboard from
abrasion, breakage, or other damage.
B. Clean scoreboard immediately prior to date scheduled for inspection
intended to establish date of Substantial Completion. Use methods and
cleaning materials recommended by scoreboard manufacturer, taking care
not to scratch or damage surfaces in any way.
END OF SECTION 11482
11482-5
SCOREBOARDS
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
C. Multipurpose Lower Scoreboard Section: Capable of operation by separate "
keyboard overlays on the control unit for basketball, volleyball and
wrestling.
1. For basketball, provide the following display features:
a. Team Fouls: 0-99 display
b. Player Uniform Number: 0-99 display
C. Player Personal Fouls: 0-9 display w
d. Shot Clock
e. Goal Light ••
2. For volleyball, provide the following display features:
w
a. Number of games won
b. Number game being played
C. Team Serving
D. Horn: Provide manufacturer's standard horn, mounted in scoreboard case,
capable of sounding automatically at 0:00 for two seconds, or by manual
operation.
E. Captions: Provide back lighted plastic graphics, gold letters on navy iw
blue background for each scoreboard in the following configurations:
1. "Home, Guests, Fouls, Player, Won, Game", 6" high letters.
2 . "Period", 6" high, non-illuminated letters.
3 . 111,2,3,411, 4" high numerals. ,
4. "Bonus (B) , Possession (arrows) ", 3" high.
F. Control Cable: Provide two sets of manufacturer's standard 2-wire,
coaxial type, 10 ft. length, with all connectors.
G.Remote Operator Control Jacks: Provide surface mounted junction box and
jacks for installation on underside of bleacher near scorer's table and
wall outlets as indicated. Include flexible, coiling cable to connect
bleacher-mounted junction box(es) to wall-mounted junction box(es) .
H. Shields: Provide two sets of manufacturer's Lexan shields, complete
with safety chain and mounting brackets.
I. Subject to conformance with requirements, provide scoreboard and
accessories as manufactured by one of the following:
1. Scoreboard: so
a. "Fair Play" by Hampden Engineering Corporation.
b. Nevco Scoreboard Company.
C. Daktronics Scoreboards
SCOREBOARDS 11482-4
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB 409n-70
B. Electrically Operated Indoor Scoreboards: Units fabricated for wall
installation, and complying with the following requirements:
1. Scoreboard Case: Heavy duty minimum 16 gauge aluminum sheet, baked
enamel finish, and furnished with brackets and all hardware for
wall mounting.
a. Color: Navy Blue with Gold lettering
2 . Control Center: Provide two (2) manufacturer's standard
microprocessor board control unit, 120 volts, 10 watts, 60 Hz,
grounded, cased high impact grey plastic, with travelling LCD
display, lithium cell battery backup, self-test mode, power on-off
switch, alternate time switch internal beeper to acknowledge entry,
multiple scoreboard control capability.
a. Include remote hand-held time switch, and 25 feet of cable
with connectors.
b. Include keyboard overlays for basketball, volleyball, and
wrestling use.
C. Include time of day display, Time out timer with warning,
interval horn, upcount auto stop/horn, and 1/10th second
display during last minute.
d. Include control center carrying case, manufactured to accept
control center module.
e. Control center must be compatable with and capable of
coordinating scoreboard game time and shot clock display with
time clock and shot clock mounted on portable backstops and
supplied under Section 11491 "Gymnasium Equipment" .
3 . Provide manufacturer's standard dimmer feature, capable of
activation from operator and control center keyboard.
4. Illumination Banks: Provide Manufacturer's standard LED light
system good for 100, 000 hours. Provide LED' s in manufacturer's
standard colors to differentiate time, score, fouls, and individual
fouls.
5. Timing: Provide manufacturer's standard and timing system and
displays, bi-directional, up and down count, direct set capability
of any number minutes and seconds for 0:00 to 99:59.
a. Provide system capable of displaying 1/10th seconds during the
final minute of the period.
b. Provide system capable of displaying "time out" and "time of
day" in place of game time.
C. Time of day display capability when control unit is
disconnected.
6. Team Scores: Provide electric display capability of two team
scores, set to any number 0-199 by means of additive or direct
mode.
SCOREBOARDS 11482-3
w
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
walls, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression
system, and partitions. Coordinate exact location and type of electrical
power feeds required for installation.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver scoreboards until building is enclosed, other
construction within spaces where scoreboards will be installed is
substantially complete, and installation of scoreboards is ready to take
place.
B. Protect scoreboards from damage during delivery, handling, storage, and
installation.
C. Store scoreboards in manufacturer's protective packages in a position
that complies with scoreboard manufacturer's directions. Keep units in
manufacturer's protective packages until time of installation.
D. Protect surfaces of rear scoreboards from damage due to abrasion, dust,
and other conditions.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS w
A. Coordination: Coordinate accessory locations, installation, and
sequencing with other work to avoid interference with and ensure proper
installation operation, adjustment cleanin g, and servicing of "
scoreboards.
1.7 WARRANTY w
A. Warranty: . Submit a written warranty executed by scoreboard
manufacturer, agreeing to replace any equipment that develops defects
in material or workmanship within warranty period.
B. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
so
C. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may
have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in
addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the
Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. am
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 .1 SCOREBOARDS, GENERAL OR
A. Provide manufacturer's standard units consisting of case, control units,
control cable, timers, lamp banks, signals, mounting accessories and
other components as required for a complete installation, and complying
with descriptive requirements below.
2.2 INDOOR SCOREBOARDS we
A. Provide two (2) units remotely operated, individually or in unison, from
either of two (2) signal control stations for scoreboard, displaying wn
minutes, seconds, 1/10th seconds, team scores, period, bonus, jumpball
"next possession", and changeable captions for basketball / volleyball
/ wrestling on multi-purpose lower section, utilizing low voltage 100%
solid state 2-wire cable, quartz crystal controlled multiplex system.
SCOREBOARDS 11482-2
w
on
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
pa
SECTION 11482 - SCOREBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1lM
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this work. Note also all Addenda.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Electrically operated indoor scoreboards.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that
relate to this Section:
1. Section 04200, "Unit Masonry" for masonry wall construction,
building in of sleeves, conduits, supports, etc.
2. Section 16100, "Electrical" for electrical wiring, connections, and
t installation of remote operator control switches for electrically
operated scoreboards.
3 . Section 12760 "Telescoping Bleachers" for location of remote
operator control switch jacks.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract
and Division 1 Specification Sections.
OR
B. Product data for each type of scoreboard specified.
C. Wiring diagram for electrically operated units.
D. Shop drawings showing layout and types of scoreboards. Show the
following:
1. Location of scoreboard centerline.
OR 2 . Location of wiring connections.
3 . Anchorage details.
4. Accessories.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish accessory manufacturers' standard
on inserts and anchoring devices that must be set in concrete or built into
masonry. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.
B. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of scoreboard required
from a single manufacturer as a complete unit, including necessary
mounting hardware, controls and accessories.
C. Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of scoreboards
with other construction supported by, or penetrating through, masonry
11482-1
SCOREBOARDS
ON
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTIAMPTON, MA
KB #96079
ON
a. Per day ice cube production capacity: 25 lbs.
b. Ice cube storage capacity 25 lbs.
2 . Optional Accessories: Provide ice cube maker with the following
additional features:
a. Door lock.
3 . Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Model BI-95", U-
Line Corporation.
2 .11 EXHAUST HOOD
A. Non-Vented Range Hood: Provide 30-inch wide hood, with variable speed
fan and two cooktop lights. Non-vented exhaust option included.
1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. "Model JV356V" , by General Electric.
ON 2 .12 FINISHES
A. General: Provide the manufacturer' s standard porcelain enamel finish.
op
PART 3 - EXECUTION
40 3 .1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer' s instructions and recommendations.
B. Built-In Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinets or
countertops with concealed fasteners. Verify that clearances are
adequate for proper functioning and rough openings are completely
concealed.
C. Utilities: Refer to Divisions 15 and 16 for plumbing and electrical
requirements.
3 .2 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Testing: Test each item of residential equipment to verify proper
operation. Make necessary adjustments.
B. Accessories: Verify that accessory items required have been furnished
and installed.
C. Cleaning: Remove packing material from residential equipment items and
leave units in clean condition, ready for operation.
END OF SECTION 11452
go RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11452-7
■.
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON. MA #9607
4. Control Type: Solid State electronic, press-to-start type. Am
5. Finish: Provide Stainless Steel door finish and lower access
panel.
6. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the
following:
a. "Model 677111, Campbellrhea Mohon International, Inc.
2 .7 CLOTHES WASHERS
A. Clothes Washers: Provide freestanding, automatic, front loading clothes
washer, operable at water pressures from 30 to 120 psi. Provide ww
multi-vane agitator with minimum 200 deg arc sweep. Include automatic
bleach and fabric dispensers, self-cleaning lint filter, and unbalanced
load compensator. Provide minimum 5-foot inlet hose and 4-foot drain
hose lengths. Provide washer with self-leveling rear legs.
1. Tub: Provide perforated porcelain enamel tub with not less than
2 .3 cu. ft. capacity. ,"
2 . Controls: Provide clothes washer controls for adjustable, metered
water fill levels, wash/rinse water temperatures, and
variable-speed cycle/fabric selectors.
3 . Options: Provide clothes washers with the following optional ws
accessories:
a. Bleach and fabric softener dispensers.
b. Spin cycle safety switch.
C. Decorative top for free standing installation.
4 . Motor: Provide minimum 1/3 hp, permanently lubricated,
single-speed, reversible motor with built-in thermal overload
protector.
5. Finish: Porcelain enamel finish on washer top and lid. Baked
enamel finish on washer front and sides.
B. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
1. "Model FWT 445GC11, by Frigidaire.
2 .8 CLOTHES DRYERS
A. Electric Clothes Dryer: Provide freestanding, front-loading clothes
dryer. 120/240V service with 5,600-watt heat input, 16-1b minimum
capacity; timed cycle selection, fabrics selector, cycle-end signal, and w
safety starting control; removable lint filter.
1. Finish: Porcelain enamel on steel.
w
B. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
1. "Model FSE/FSG 747GC", by Frigidaire. am
2.10 ICE CUBE MAKER
A. Ice Cube Maker: Provide a freestanding, one-door model ice cube maker, no
and removable plastic cube storage bin.
1. Capacity: Provide the following minimum values, measured according an
to ANSI/ARAM HRF-1 and certified by ARAM:
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11452-6
w
w
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
each compartment and a switch for condensation-control heating
element at the freezer opening.
!M 4. Storage Features: Provide the following standard storage features:
a. Four adjustable spill proof glass interior cabinet shelves.
b. Meat compartment.
C. vegetable crisper.
d. Butter conditioning compartment.
e. Factory installed ice maker.
f. Third door shelf.
B. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
1. "Model TBX2IJTBWW", General Electric Company.
2 .6 DISHWASHERS
A. Built-In Dishwasher: Provide under-the-counter automatic dishwasher
sized to replace 24-inch base cabinet. Dishwasher shall be operable at
water pressures from 15 to 120 psi and shall not require more than 12.0
gallons of water for normal wash cycle. Provide two wash levels.
Include full-extension, vinyl-coated upper and lower dish racks and
removable silverware basket. Provide sound-absorbing exterior
insulation blanket around tub and back to reduce noise. Include soft
food disposer and self-cleaning food filter system.
1. Tub and Door Liner: Provide dishwasher with polypropylene
interior.
a. Detergent Dispenser: Provide sealed detergent dispenser and
automatic rinsing-aid dispenser in the door liner.
2 . Wash Cycles: Provide dishwasher unit with normal wash, light
(low-energy) wash, and rinse-and-hold wash cycles.
3 . Dry Cycles: Provide dishwasher unit with hot-air dry and
energy-saving, heat-off, drying cycles.
4 . Control Type: Solid-state electronic, press-to-start type.
5. Finish: Provide black glass door front and lower access panel.
6. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
a. "Model GSD530XWW11, General Electric Company.
B. Laboratory Glassware Dishwasher: Provide under-the-counter automatic
dishwasher sized to replace 24 inch base cabinet. Dishwasher shall be
operable at pressures from 20 to 120 psi. Include full-extension vinyl-
coated heavy steel upper and lower racks and two removable flask
inserts. Provide sound absorbing exterior insulation blanket to reduce
pw noise. Include high powered steam scrubbing system and distilled water
pump for special rinse cycle.
1. Tub and Door Liner: Provide dishwasher with stainless steel
interior.
2 . Wash Cycles: Provide dishwasher unit of five programs with 25
cycles, plus ability to select own cycle combinations.
pu 3 . Washing temperatures: Provide three; 125° F for plasticware, 145° F
for normal washing and 175° F for heavy duty stain cleaning.
OR RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11452-5
M
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
and solid state electronic touch-type.
1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. "Model JEM25WV11, General Electric Company.
B. Under Cabinet Microwave Oven: Provide 900 watts, 1.3 cubic feet oven
capacity, 10 power levels, automatic defrost, two speed high-capacity
exhaust fan and solid state electronic controls.
1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: so
a. "Model JVM1340WW & JX81A", General Electric Company.
2.4 REFRIGERATOR �w
A. Under-Counter Refrigerators: Provide freestanding, automatic defrost,
one-door model refrigerators, with three tempered glass shelves, and ,®
reversible door with shelves.
1. Capacity: Provide the following minimum values, measured according
to ANSI/ARAM HRF-1 and certified by AHAM: 4"
a. Total volume: 6.0 cu. ft.
b. Total Volume: 3 .5 cu. ft.
we
2 . Subject to compliance with project requirements, provide one of the
following:
No
a. "Model 29R11, U-Line Corp.
C. Explosive Proof Under-Counter Refrigerator: Provide freestanding unit ON
with two removable rust proof shelves and two ice trays.
1. Capacity: Provide the following minimum values:
oft
a. Refrigerator: 5.3 cu.ft.
b. Freezer: .73 cu.ft.
2 . Subject to compliance with requirements provide the following: so,
a. "Model 6772-B", Campbellrhea Mohon International, Inc.
no
2.5 REFRIGERATOR/FREEZERS
A. Top-Mount Freezer-Type Refrigerator/Freezer: Provide freestanding,
frost-free, two-door, top-mount freezer model refrigerator/freezer on R"
adjustable rollers, and reversible doors with door shelves.
1. Capacity: Provide the following minimum values, measured according
to ANSI/ARAM HRF-1 and certified by AHAM:
a. Total volume: 20.6 cu. ft.
so
2 . Energy Consumption: Measured and certified at not more than 3 .0
kWh/day under average conditions.
3 . Temperature Controls: Include separate temperature controls for
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11452-4
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
*TART AR TO T MA
KB #96079
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
appliances by manufactured by one of the following:
1. Hobart Corporation.
2 . General Electric Company.
3 . Hotpoint.
# 4 . Magic Chef.
5. Miele.
6. U-Line Corporation.
7. White-Westinghouse.
2 .2 DROP-IN ELECTRIC RANGES
A. Built-In Electric Range: Provide 30-inch-wide, drop-in-type, electric
range with four-burner cooktop, self-cleaning oven, and combination
surface burner and oven control panel mounted at the front of the
cooking surface above the oven door.
1. Cooktop Deck: Provide hinged, tilt-up, recessed cooktop with four
surface burners.
a. Cooktop Surface: Porcelain enamel.
b. Burner Type: Provide two 8-inch (2100 watts maximum) and two
6-inch (1500 watts maximum) plug-in coil burner elements.
40
1) Burner Trim: Provide each burner with a removable one
piece chrome drip bowls.
2 . Oven: Provide oven with a 2500-watt bake element, a 3400-watt
broil element, and an interior oven light. Include porcelain
enamel interior; four rack levels; two removable, tilt-proof,
chrome-plated, self-locking racks; a two-piece porcelain enamel
broiler pan; and a counterbalanced removable oven door with a towel
bar handle.
a. Oven Type: Self-cleaning.
b. Oven Door Type: White glass with observation window.
C. Auto Oven Shut-off.
so
3 . Trim: Provide the manufacturer's optional, trim kit, including the
following:
ON a. Vertical side trim.
b. Rear Filler Strip.
B. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. "Model JDP39WWWW11, General Electric Company.
2.3 MICROWAVE OVENS
A. Countertop Microwave Oven: Provide 800 watts, 0 .8 cu. ft. oven
capacity, 10 power levels, automatic defrost, two timed cooking cycles
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11452-3
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
1. Refrigerators/Freezers: Total volume and shelf area ratings
certified according to ANSI/AHAM.
D. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain appliances from a single supplier.
1. Provide products from the same manufacturer for each type of
appliance required.
2. To the greatest extent possible, provide appliances by a single an
manufacturer for entire Project.
E. Design Criteria: The drawings indicate sizes, profiles, and dimensional .w
requirements of residential appliances and are based on the specific
types and models indicated. Appliances by other manufacturers may be
considered, provided deviations in dimensions and profiles are minor and
do not change the design concept as judged by the Architect. The burden �*!
of proof of equality is on the proposer.
1.5 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Deliver appliances to the Project site in the manufacturer's undamaged
protective packaging.
B. Delay delivery of appliances until utility rough-in is complete and
construction in the spaces to receive appliances is substantially
complete and ready for installation.
wee
1.6 WARRANTIES
A. Warranty: Submit written warranties executed by the manufacturer of XX
each appliance specified agreeing to repair or replace units or
components that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified
warranty period.
,on
1. Electric Range: 4-year limited warranty on surface burner
elements.
2. Microwave Oven: 9 - year limited warranty of defects in the w■
magnetron tube.
3 . Dishwasher: 5-year warranty on the dishwasher motor and pump and
10-year warranty against rust on stainless steel components.
4. Refrigerator, Refrigerator/Freezer and Freezer: 5-year warranty
on the sealed refrigeration system.
5. Clothes Washer: 1-year warranty on the clothes washer and 5-year
warranty on the washer motor.
6. Clothes Dryer: 1 year warranty.
B. Warranties specified above shall not deprive the Owner of other rights
the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and
will be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by
the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
w
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11452-2
w!►
0
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA ICE #96079
g
SECTION 11452 - RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
00
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this work. Note also all Addenda.
1.2 SUMMARY
on A. This Section includes the following types of residential appliances:
1. Cooking equipment, including ranges, ovens, microwave ovens and
exhaust hoods.
2 . Dishwashers.
3 . Refrigerators.
0" 4. Refrigerators/Freezers.
5. Clothes washers and Dryers.
6. Ice Cube Makers.
try B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that
relate to this Section:
1. Food service equipment is specified in Division 11 Section 11400
OR "Food Service Equipment. "
2 . Plumbing and Mechanical connections for appliances are specified
in Division 15.
3 . Electrical services and connections for appliances are specified
in Division 16.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
4"
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract
and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each appliance type required indicating compliance with
requirements, including installation instructions. Provide complete
operating and maintenance instructions for each appliance.
C. Schedule: Submit schedule of appliances, using the same room
designations as shown on drawings.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Energy Ratings: Provide residential appliances that carry labels
indicating energy cost analysis (estimated annual operating costs) and
efficiency information as required by Federal Trade Commission.
B. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide electrical components required as part
of residential appliances that are listed and labeled by UL and comply
with applicable NEMA standards.
C. AHAM Standards: Provide appliances that conform to the following
standards of the Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers:
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 11452-1
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS RBA #96079
(c) Top of unit to be constructed of 14 gauge stainless steel. Front and ends
of table shall be turned up 3" and rolled 180 degrees. All interior
corners shall be welded, ground smooth and polished. Back of table to be
turned up 10" returned 1-1/2" toward wall and 1/2" in channel shape to
form backsplash.
(d) Unit to be furnished with reinforcements, gussets, legs, adjustable
flanged feet bolted to floor, and flat shelving under right hand
drainboardS all constructed in accordance with details hereinbefore set
forth and as shown on plans.
(e) Unit shall be fitted with a full length overshelf constructed the same as
overshelf specified for item No. 5.
ITEM NO. 18 - SPARE NO.
ITEM NO. 19 - SPARE NO.
A YTEM NO. 20 - ONE (1) SERVING TABLE WITH DRAWER
(a) Unit to measure length as shown on plans x 30" wide x 36" high to working
surface.
(b) Top of unit to be constructed of #14 gauge stainless steel having all
edges finished in a 1/2" high marine type edge turned down 2" and 1/2" in
channel shape with resulting corners rounded.
(c) In addition, unit to be furnished with reinforcements, gussets, legs,
adjustable bullet feet, flat undershelving, and one (1) tool drawer.
ON (d) Leading edge of table to rest on low portion as shown on plans. The
Kitchen Equipment Contractor shall "shim" and secure this edge of table as
required.
(e) Unit to be constructed as herein specified set forth and as shown on
plans.
ITEM NO. 21 - ONE (1) CASH REGISTER (N.I.K.E.C.)
(a) Units IS not in Kitchen Equipment Contract.
ITEM NO. 22 - 1/LOT STOREROOM SHELVING SECTIONS
(a) Assembly to be "L" shaped as shown x 18" wide x 72" high overall.
(b) Units shall be fitted with four (4) polymer shelves with encased steel
channel beams. Units to have minimum weight load of 800 pounds.
(c) Units also to be provided with six (6) 74" high injection molded polyster
thermoplastic resin posts with glass reinforcements.
(d) Units to be open style mat made with mineral reinforced polypropylene.
(e) Units to be Model No. 2448GX as manufactured by "Intermetro Industries
Corporation" or approved equal.
ITEM NO. 23 - SPARE NO.
ITEM NO. 24 - SPARE NO.
ITEM NO. 25 - SPARE NO.
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-63
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS w
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS RBA #96079
am
ITEM NO 13 - ONE (1) COFFEE BREWER
(a) Unit to be automatic coffee brewer with five (5) separately controlled .s
warmers.
(b) Unit to be of all stainless steel construction and shall be furnished
with five (5) "easy pour" black decanters and one (1) case of 1,000 .w
filters.
(c) Unit to be Model No. RT as manufactured by "Bunn" or approved equal.
ITEM NO 14 - ONE (1) FOUR SLICE TOASTER
(a) Unit to measure approximately 11" wide x 13" deep x 9-1/21, high.
(b) Exterior of unit to be constructed of stainless steel.
(c) Unit to have control panel divided into two modules. The control panel
to consist of a timer control knob to regulate the degree of darkness,
and reset button.
(d) Unit to be Model No. TP120 as manufactured by "Toastmaster" or approved
equal as manufactured by "Savory" or "Toastwell" .
ITEM NO. 15 - ONE (1) SLICER STAND
(a) Unit to measure approximately 26" long x 30" deep x 34" high.
(b) Top to be constructed of 18 gauge stainless steel turned down 2" on all
sides and 1/211 in channel shape. Top to be reinforced with 12 gauge
stainless steel channels.
(c) Legs to be constructed of stainless steel tubing. Legs to include slides
for three (3) 18" x 26" sheet pans.
(d) Unit to have heavy duty 5" diameter, swivel casters all with brakes. r"
(e) Unit to be supplied with circular bumpers and shall be Model No. 705 as
manufactured by "Servolift Eastern" or approved equal as manufactured by
"Caddy" . No
ITEM NO. 16 - ONE (1) SLICING MACHINE
(a) Unit to be standard finish, operable at two (2) speeds and two (2) so
strokes.
(b) Slicer to be automatic type, complete with fence, skewer and vegetable
chute attachments. no
(c) Unit to be Model No. 1712E as manufactured by "Hobart" or approved equal.
ITEM NO. 17 - ONE (1) POT WASHING ASSEMBLY WITH OVERSHELF 40
(a) Unit to be of length as shown on plans x 30" wide x 34" high to
drainboards surface.
(b) Unit to be comprised of three (3) compartment sink sections with
compartments measuring 27" x 27" x 16" deep, and drainboards as shown.
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-62
w
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS KBA #96079
(p) Furnish a wet chemical type fire protection system, Ansul R-102, Pyrochem
or Rangeguard, including means for automatic and manual activation, along
with means for simultaneous automatic shutting down of protected cooking
00 equipment upon activation of said system. All exposed piping to be
stainless steel or chrome-plated. Fusible link detection system to be
built into ventilator by ventilator manufacturer.
(q) Shunt trip breaker and/or contactors furnished and installed by Electrical
Contractor.
(r) Copies of approvals and testing laboratory data, if required, to be
furnished by ventilator manufacturer.
(s) As part of the installation of the ventilators, a Factory Engineer shall
be on site, to coordinate all efforts. A Sales Representative will not be
acceptable.
(t) Ventilator to be Model No. SH-N-PA-I-96 as manufactured by
"Caddy Air Systems" or approved equal as manufactured by "Avtec" .
ITEM NO. 9 - ONE (1) POT FILL FAUCET
(a) Unit to be mounted where shown on plans, with a 60" minimum stainless
40 steel flexible hose and chrome plated manual control valve assembly,
mounted in location as shown on plans.
(b) Hose to be Model No. B-102 B (gooseneck) with Model No. B-113 base faucet
and Model No. B-0166 bracket as manufactured by "T & S Brass and Bronze
Works" or approved equal as manufactured by "Chicago Faucets" or "Fisher
Faucets" .
40 ITEM NO. 10 - ONE (1) COOK'S TABLE W/ SINK & DRAWER (ADA)
(a) Unit to measure 91 - 6" long x 30" wide x 36" high to working surface.
(b) Top to be constructed having all edges finished in a 1/2" high marine type
edge, turned down 2" and returned 1/2" in channel shape with corners
rounded.
(c) Top to be fitted where shown on plan with one (1) 20" x 20" x 6" deep
integral sink and one (1) tool drawer.
(d) Balance of unit to be fitted with reinforcements, gussets, legs and feet,
and cross-rails at rear and ends only.
(f) Entire assembly to be constructed as herinbefore set-forth.
ITEM NO. 11 - ONE (1) MICROWAVE OVEN (EXISTING)
(a) Unit IS existing and shall be relocated to position shown on plans.
ITEM NO. 12 - ONE (1) WORK TABLE WITH DRAWER
(a) Unit to measure length as shown on plans x 30" wide x 36" high to working
surface.
(b) Unit to be of the same General Construction as herein specified for Item
No. 10 except that no sink is required.
(c) In addition, unit to be furnished with reinforcements, gussets, legs,
adjustable bullet feet, flat undershelving, and one (1) tool drawer.
(d) Unit to be constructed as herein specified set forth and as shown on
plans.
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-61
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS rw
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS RBA #96079
ns
(j) Ventilator to be listed by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. , "Grease
Extractors for Exhaust Ducts", U.L. 710; tested by the National Bureau of
Standards, Washington DC; in compliance with all recommendations of the
National Fire Protection Association's standards for kitchen cooking "ft
equipment ventilators; approved by the National Sanitation Foundation;
listed by the International Conference of Building Officials; approved by
Building Officials and Code Administrators/ International, Inc. ; and in
accordance with all local codes. so
(k) Ventilator to operate as designed, utilizing exhaust air volumes as shown
on plans. Static pressure drop at the hood exhaust duct collars not to
exceed 1.60" W.G. aw
(1) Ventilator shall be equipped with a supply air plenum, duct collars, 165
degree fusible link type fire dampers and full length perforated face
panels for discharging tempered supply air into room space. Supply air on
volume not to exceed 80% of hood exhaust. Discharge velocity of supply
air not to exceed 250 FPM at the discharge point of the ventilator.
Exhaust duct outlet shall be located on the rear vertical wall of the an
Ventilator. Exact location and wall thickness must be verified by the
Kitchen Equipment Contractor in cooperation with the HVAC Contractor.
(m) Ventilator to be standard equipped with two (2) 48" long double tube 80 i
watt vaporproof recessed fluorescent type light fixtures. Light fixtures
to be factory pre-wired to a single connection point.
(n) Ventilator to be standard equipped with components for automatic push no
button cleaning and shall utilize 140 degree to 180 degree Fahrenheit, hot
water including automatic electric pump detergent injection during the
entire cleaning cycle.
(o) Control cabinet shall be furnished with ventilator. Control cabinet to 'I'
house electrical and plumbing components for operation of the ventilators.
The cabinet to be constructed of 18 gauge stainless steel, #4 finish, with
welded corners and hinged doors to the plumbing and electrical
compartments. The electrical cabinet to be water tight to protect against
direct hose spray. To include a solid state command center for
controlling operation of the exhaust fan, wash cycle and internal fire
protection system. The control shall include "Fan On", "Wash On", and
"Fire" indicator lights and an audio alarm for fire condition. It shall
also include voltage free contacts for supply and exhaust fans for
interfacing with building management system or other control circuits, and
voltage free contacts for the fire cycle for interconnecting to the
building fire alarm system or monitoring system. Plumbing components to .�
consist of shut-off valve, pressure/temperature gauge, solenoid valves,
detergent pump, detergent tank and built-in reduced pressure (RP)
principle device backflow preventor. To facilitate required testing of
the "RP" device the bottom of the compartment to be a catch basin and no
shall have a 1" drain for connection to the building drain system. All
components to be pre-wired and pre-plumbed for field hook-up by applicable
trades. Control cabinet to be U.L. Listed.
Ob
The control to include a 24 hour 7 day solid state LCD programmable time
clock for total automatic operation in addition to manual operation.
Programmed operations to include starting and stopping the exhaust fan and
starting the wash cycle automatically at any desired time. The timeclock ,0
to include battery backup to hold the clock and the memory for programmed
functions.
w.
Aw
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-60
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS KBA #96079
(d) Each oven section to be provided with removable eleven (11) position rack
guides with five (5) nickel plated heavy duty racks. Each oven section to
have doors with windows, interior oven lights and auxiliary fan switch for
rapid cool down with doors open. Doors to open a full 180 degrees. Oven
fan motor to shut off when doors are opened.
(e) Unit to have side mounted control panel.
(f) Unit to be NSF approved and U.L. design certified.
(g) Unit to be Model No. EC044D as manufactured by "Vulcan" or approved
equal as manufactured by "Hobart" or "Garland".
ITEM NO. 8 - ONE (1) VENTILATOR WITH WASH AND FIRE SYSTEMS
(a) Ventilator to be of be size, make and model as specified below and as
portrayed on the drawings.
(b) Ventilator to measure 12 ' -0" long x 5' -0" wide.
(c) Ventilator to be of high velocity, centrifugal grease extracting type with
air inlet parallel to the cooking equipment being ventilated. Ventilator
to contain three full-length horizontal baffles for centrifugal grease
extraction. Grease extraction efficiency shall be 95% when operated ad
design specifications and be documented as such by an independent testing
laboratory. Grease extraction shall be accomplished without the use of
filters, cartridges or constant running water.
(d) Ventilator to operate at air quantities as shown on plans. Fire damper to
be thermostatically activated. Upon activation at 280° Fahrenheit, the
damper shall close in the direction of airflow. Fire damper control box
to be equipped with a microswitch. Microswitch to be wired to the
magnetic exhaust fan starter. Upon damper closure, microswitch to cause
exhaust fan shut-down. Damper to be manually re-settable via a damper
control arm attached to the damper control box. Fusible link type
activation shall not be employed.
(e) Activation of the fire damper shall turn off the exhaust fan and turn on
the internal water spray.
(f) Ventilator to be constructed of all stainless steel, 18 gauge, type 304,
#4 finish, all welded, grease and water tight. No sheet metal, except as
described above, shall be utilized in ventilator construction. No
ventilator controls shall be more than seven feet (7' -011) from floor
level. Width of grease extraction chamber of ventilator shall not exceed
six inches (611) .
(g) Centrifugal grease extraction to be accomplished without the use of
filters, cartridges, moving parts, removable parts, or constant running
water. All baffles to be permanently fixed in place within the grease
extraction chamber so as to be non-removable.
(h) Ventilator shall be equipped with full-length non-gasketed hinged access
doors located on the front of the ventilator and be supplied with hand
latches to lock into the closed position. There shall be no removable
screws and/or panels in order to gain access to the ventilator interior,
ps for inspection, cleaning service, or any other purpose.
(i) Ventilator shall have a main grease collecting gutter at the bottom of the
grease extraction chamber and shall be sloped to drain. Drain shall have
ter■ pre-flush piping extending into drain from the main hot water supply
within the grease extraction chamber.
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-59
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS KBA #96079
w
ITEM NO 5 - ONE (1) PREPARATION TABLE WITH SINKS AND OVERSHELF
(a) Unit to measure to "L" shaped of lengths as shown on plans x 27" wide x
34" high to working surface.
(b) Top to be constructed of #14 gauge stainless steel having front and ends
finished in a 1/2" high "V" edges, turned down 2" and returned 1/2" in
channel shape with resulting corners rounded. Rear at walls shall be
turned up 10" and returned 1-1/2" with ends welded closed.
(c) Unit to be furnished with two (2) sink compartments measuring, one (1) .es
measuring 24" x 24" x 1411" deep and one (1) measuring 24" x 24" x 6-1/2"
deep. (ADA requirement.)
(d) Overshelf shall be constructed of #16 gauge stainless steel turned down 2"
at front and ends and returned 1/2" in channel shape. Rear at walls to be
turned up 211 .
(e) Overshelf shall be fitted with fully enclosed gussets and 1-1/2" stainless
steel tubular posts secured to table top framework, and #12 gauge
stainless steel cantilever brackets.
(f) In addition, this unit shall be furnished with reinforcements, gussets,
legs, crossrails, and adjustable flanged feet secured to floor. NOTE:
Crossrails to be located at sides and rear of table, fabricated to meet
A.D.A requirements.
ITEM NO. 6 - ONE (1) SIX BURNER GRIDDLE RANGE WITH OVENS
(a) Unit to measure approximately 60" wide x 38-1/4" deep x 36" high to
working surface, including 6" high stainless steel legs and feet.
(b) Unit to be a heavy duty electrically operated range with standard oven
base.
(c) Top of unit to have six (6) burners and 24" griddle with ovens below. aw
(d) Unit to have standard oven base with porcelain on steel oven lining. Oven
to be thermostatically controlled.
(e) Unit to be furnished in standard finish with two (2) oven racks, and a
single deck high shelf.
(f) Unit to be NSF approved and U.L. design certified
(g) Unit to be Model No. E60FL as manufactured by "Vulcan" or approved
equal as manufactured by "Hobart" or "Garland" .
ITEM NO. 7 - ONE (1) DOUBLE DECK CONVECTION OVEN
(a) Unit to measure approximately 38" wide x 30" deep x 65" high overall
including 6" high stainless steel legs with adjustable bullet feet.
(b) Unit to be a heavy duty electric fired double deck convection
oven.
(c) Unit to be furnished in standard exterior finish.
ew
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-58
ww
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS RBA #96079
!1
PART 2.02 - ALTERNATE NO.6 - FOOD LAB
ON
ITEM NO. 1 - TWO (2) HAND SINKS
(a) Units shall measure approximately 18" long x 20" deep x 34" high to
working surface and shall be wall mounted in location as shown on plans.
(b) Tops to be constructed of 16 gauge stainless steel with backsplash and non
drip marine edges with integral coved corner sink bowl creased toward 1
1/2" waste outlet. Units to have front apron with integral brackets which
encloses the sink bowl on three (3) sides. Apron to be fabricated of 14
gauge stainless steel with rear flange for securely fastening unit to
wall. In addition, a 2" strip shall be furnished for mounting top of
backsplash to wall.
(c) Units shall be furnished with stainless steel towel dispenser secured
to backsplash and to accommodate 300 9-1/2" x 9-1/2" paper towels,
stainless steel liquid soap dispenser mounted to top with one pint
capacity globe below, and rigid gooseneck faucet with wrist action
handles.
(d) Hand sinks to be Model No. WS as manufactured by "IMC Teddy" or approved
equal.
ITEM NO. 2 - ONE (1) REACH-IN REFRIGERATOR
(a) Unit to measure approximately 58" long x 32" deep x 34" high over top
mounted compressor and housing. Exterior of unit to be stainless steel at
front, side and door.
(b) Unit to be mounted on 6" high stainless steel legs with adjustable
stainless steel bullet feet.
(c) Door to be fitted with "keyed alike" cylinder locks.
(d) Unit to be furnished with digital temperature monitoring system,
condensate evaporator, and enclosed compressor housing.
ON (e) Interior to be fitted with full complement of stainless steel wire
shelves.
(f) Unit to be Model No. RHT-2-32WUT as manufactured by "Traulsen" or approved
equal.
ITEM NO. 3 - ONE (1) REACH-IN FREEZER
(a) Unit to be of the same general construction as herein before specified for
Item No. 2, except that this unit shall be a freezer, Model No. RLT-2-
32WUT as manufactured by "Traulsen" or approved equal.
ITEM NO. 4 - SPARE NO.
40
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-57
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS1
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS RBA #96079
(b) Table to be of the same general construction as herein specified for Item
No. 74. In addition, a flat stainless steel undershelf shall be furnished
where space allows.
w►
(c) All rollers to be snap-in, self locking design. Roller to be
approximately 4" on centers.
(d) Rollers to be approximately 1.9" O.D. with non-corrosive ball bearings and
stainless steel hexagonal shaft. Rollers to be approximately 22" in
length.
(e) Unit to be constructed of 14 gauge stainless steel angle frame, with 14 *W
gauge stainless steel 1-5/8" legs with appropriate gussets and bracing.
Top of unit to have 10" backsplash and 2" rolled front edge.
A 2" x 1/4" stainless steel bar stock shall be welded to table where racks an
turn to insure smooth and continuous movement on rollers.
(f) Bed of roller section to be depressed approximately 3" with entire bottom
pitched to a stainless steel 1-1/2" drain located near Dishwashing ■o
Machine, Item No. 77, with flexible hose to floor sink, provided by
manufacturer.
(g) Roller section to be Model No. TYPE-D-RA-29-PMOD as manufactured by "Caddy *s►
Corp. " or approved equal.
ITEM NO. 82 - TWO (2) BOOSTER HEATERS
(a) Each unit to measure approximately 24" wide x 20" high x 18" deep.
(b) Units to have a castone lined tank and stainless steel body and base, low
water cut-off and temperature/pressure relief valve.
(c) Units to be rated at 36.0 KW and to provide a 70 degree rise in water
temperature. Unit to be interpiped to Dishwashing Machine, Item No. 77 in
field.
(d) Units to be supplied with any necessary piping or attachments to
interconnect to Dishwashing Machine, Item. 77.
oft
(e) Units shall be operable at 480V/3 Phase (phasing to be balanced) .
(f) Each unit to be Model No. C-36 as manufactured by "Hatco" or approved
equal.
ITEM NO. 83 - ONE (1) HOSE REEL ASSEMBLY
(a) Unit to be the same as hereinbefore specified for Item No. 3.
ITEM NO. 84 - ONE (1) HAND SINK
(a) Unit to be the same as hereinbefore specified for Item No. 19.
w�
ITEM NO. 85 - THREE (3) STOREROOM FLOOR RACKS (MOBILE)
(a) Units to be the same as hereinbefore specified for Item No. 4.
ITEM NO 86 - ONE (1) ACCESS OPENING & DOORS (N.I.K.E.C.)
(a) Unit is not in Kitchen Equipment Contract.
us
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-56
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS KBA #96079
11�
(g) Unit to have one (1) stainless steel roller conveyor chain with rack
interlocking stainless steel lugs. Provide a series of molded free
spinning rollers to be used in conjunction with stainless steel roller
conveyor chain. Conveyor to accommodate all standard 20" racks. Unit to
have conveyor drive system that includes large speed reducing gear unit
with cut gears operating in oil bath and frictionless, trouble free clutch
40 system, spring loaded and automatically re-engaging.
(h) Provide prewash with three (3) power arms above, wash with three (3) power
wash arms above and three (3) power wash arms below. Wash arms to be high
pressure action. Prewash and wash spray assemblies are removable with
tools. Provide three (3) rinse nozzles below and three (3) nozzles above.
Rack actuated lever to automatically operate the final rinse only when
racks are present.
(i) Provide a functional skimmer with cleanout cap to automatically skim water
surface. Provide drain valve in wash tank that is externally controlled.
Overflow and drain assembly to be removable without use of tools.
(j) Provide unit with the following standard equipment: top mounted stainless
steel motor control with overload protection, NEMA 12 enclosure, door
safety switch, low voltage (24V) control circuit, thermometers, vacuum
breakers, one (1) plate rack, three (3) cup and bowl rack, one (1) silver
rack and clean out brush.
(k) Provide unit with 15.0 KW heater to be housed in inconel sheath and
!i controlled by a remote mounted thermostat used with solid state
temperature controller. Heater to be protected by an electric low water
power cut-off controller.
(1) In addition, unit to also be furnished with end cowls with vent and
adjustable damper controls, automatic tank fills, stainless steel front
enclosure panel, rack limit switch and energy saver.
(m) Unit to be operable at 480V/3 Phase electric and be prewired for single
point of connection.
(n) Unit to be Model No. CRS 86 as manufactured by "Hobart" or approved equal.
ITEM NO. 78 - ONE (1) DETERGENT METER (N.I.K.E.C.)
(a) Unit is not in Kitchen Equipment Contract.
go ITEM NO. 79 - ONE (1) RINSE INJECTOR (N.I.K.E.C.)
(a) Unit is not in Kitchen Equipment Contract.
ITEM NO. 80 - TWO (2) VENT COWLS
(a) Each unit to measure length x width x height as required to extend from
the dishmachine vent collars to approximately 3" above finished ceiling.
(b) Ducts to be of all welded construction, of #18 gauge stainless steel.
(c) Each duct to be fitted with stainless steel "Butterfly" dampers.
ITEM NO. 81 - ONE (1) CLEAN DISHTABLE WITH ROLLER SECTION
(a) Unit to be size and shape as shown on plan x 30" wide x 34" high to
working surface.
FOOD SERVICE EQUIP14ENT 11400-55
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS wu
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS KBA #96079
ww
(r) Soiled tray conveyor to be Model No. SD-S8C10-RW-26.5-E-SB-ATL and soiled
dishtable with trough to be custom fabricated, both as manufactured by
"Servolift Eastern" or approved equal. ww
ITEM NO 75 - ONE (1) WASTE DISPOSER
(a) Unit to be the same as hereinbefore specified for Item No. 46, with the .,
following exception;
(b) Cone supplied shall be altered to accept drain trough in a watertight and
sanitary manner. ,f,
ITEM NO 76 - ONE (1) OVERSHELF
(a) Unit to measure length as shown on plans x 18" wide x 54" above finished no
floor.
(b) Unit shall be constructed of 16 gauge stainless steel turned down 2" at
front and ends and 1/2" in channel shape. Unit shall be turned up 2" raw s
at rear and ends.
(c) Unit to be mounted on stainless steel cantilever brackets secured to fully
enclosed gussets and stainless steel tubular posts secured to table tops ,u
as shown on plans.
ITEM NO 77 - ONE (1) DISHMACHINE WITH SIDE LOADER
(a) Unit to be automatic conveyor rack type, single tank dishwasher with ~"
recirculating prewash, recirculating wash and fresh water final rinse.
Designed for left to right-hand conveyor travel.
(b) Hood to be 16 gauge type 304 #18-8 stainless steel. Hood unit to be of
all welded seamless construction. Inspection doors to be die formed
riding in wide interior mounted all welded channels. Tank to be
constructed of 16 gauge type 304 #18-8 stainless steel. Base frame and
legs to be stainless steel. All internal castings to be non-corrosive
Ni412 nonferrous nickel alloy, or 304 stainless steel. Conveyor chain,
track, scrap screen, brackets, wash arms and spacer panel shall be
provided with unit in stainless steel.
aw
(c) Unit to have a capacity of 240 racks per hour at a conveyor speed of 7.0
plus feet per minute.
(d) Provide unit with centrifugal type "packless" ball bearings pump, �**
construction includes ceramic type seal, stainless steel parts mounted
with balanced impeller on a precision ground stainless steel shaft. All
working parts to be mounted as an assembly and removable as a unit without
disturbing pump housing.
(e) Prewash tank to have a capacity of 8.0 gallons, wash tank to have a
capacity of 18.0 gallons to overflow level.
(f) Provide two (2) 2 horsepower, one (1) 1 horsepower and one (1) 1/6
horsepower motors with unit. Motors to be standard NEMA frame, squirrel-
cage induction run type, 60 cycle, 1725 RPM, internally fan cooled with
ball bearing construction. ,tee
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-54
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS RBA #96079
00
(i) Slider pan to be fabricated from #14 gauge, type #304 stainless steel
having #4 finish with integral landing shelf at tray load area. Tail
frame to include a removable #14 gauge stainless steel cover over belt
40 opening. Conveyor pan to be 17-1/4" inside width, having 10" high sides
ending in a 45 degree return for 2-1/4" and 3/4" flanged down edge at top
of splash.
op (j) A soiled scrapping table with liquid scrapping trough and 24" x 24" x 14"
sink with pre-rinse faucet, Model No. B-123 and wall bracket Model No.
B-109 as manufactured by "T & S Brass and Bronze Works" or approved equal
as manufactured by "Chicago Faucets" or "Fisher Faucets" . Table to be
provided as an integral part of the conveyor slider pan. The waste
scrapping trough shall slope to the waste disposer, Item No. 75, the table
with trough to be fabricated from #14 gauge, type #304 stainless steel
having #4 finish with all coved corners vertically and horizontally. In
Ps addition, to be provided as part of trough; six (6) rinse gusher heads,
NOTE: Plumbing Contractor to interpipe to gusher heads. Pre-rinse sink
to be fitted with stainless steel angle guides to support and locate
M dishracks, and two section #16 gauge stainless steel perforated removable
strainer baskets.
(k) Supports to be fabricated from 1-5/8" diameter #16 gauge stainless steel
tubing with cylindrical gussets attached to boxed channel, #14 gauge
stainless steel frame and stainless steel adjustable flanged feet with
holes for anchoring to floor. Cross rails to be located 10" above
finished floor. Box frame to include brackets for belt return track.
(1) In location where dish table passes through deposit window opening, top
surface shall be raised up 1" at a 45 degree angle to level of window sill
(35" AFF) , extend across width of wall opening and then turned down 1" and
returned 1/2" in channel shape. At two (2) extreme ends of opening
surface to be turned up 3" raw and extended to meet flush against
backsplash to table. All seams shall be fully welded, ground smooth and
polished. Sides of opening shall be sealed in a sanitary and approved
manner to wall opening.
(m) Control panel to be mounted at rear of drive frame. Inside the panel
there is motor starter with overload and undervoltage protection, control
relay, wash solenoid, control circuit fuse and terminal strips. All wires
are numbered for trouble shooting and all interconnects of limit switches,
etc. to be through flexible, sealtite conduit. Internal wiring and
plumbing to be furnished by manufacturer ready for final connection.
(n) Vari-speed control to be mounted where shown on plans by manufacturer.
Unit to be supplied as part conveyor and to be ready for final connection.
Interconnecting conduit from vari control to control box at conveyor by
manufacturer.
(o) Drive and tail sprockets and shafting to be of stainless steel. Bearings
to be commercial sealed for life so they cannot be over-lubricated which
destroys the bearing seals. Maintenance manuals, including internal
wiring diagrams to be furnished at completion of installation.
(p) Drive opening fitted with sensor bar for operator safety. Unit must be
restarted if tripped to prevent injury per U.L. requirements.
ps
(q) Furnish an access panel per drawing at tail end of conveyor with key lock
fabricated from #16 gauge, type #304 stainless steel.
am
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-53
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS KBA #96079
ws
(d) Base of each unit shall be cabinet type, with all four sides enclosed with
plastic laminate finish on 3/4" marine plywood, with matching interiors of
liner grade laminate. Provide locking, hinged doors, and interior with
bottom and adjustable intermediate shelf. "
(e) Mount unit on 6" stainless steel adjustable bullet feet.
(f) Provide a full length x 12" stainless steel, three (3) inverted "vee" type *"
tray slide, mounted on #12 gauge fixed brackets, mounted at 34" AFF.
(g) Units to be Model No. 500-MOD-CONDI as manufactured by "Servolift/Eastern"
or approved equal.
ITEM NO. 73 - ONE (1) SOILED TRAY DROP-OFF WINDOW (N.I.K.E.C.)
(a) Unit is not in Kitchen Equipment Contract.
ITEM NO. 74 - ONE (1) SOILED DISHTABLE WITH CONVEYOR & PRE-RINSE SINK
(a) Unit to of size and shape as shown on plans and to carry U.L. listed
label.
(b) Unit to have 3/4 HP variable speed D.C. 90 Volt motor, operating on 120V-1
Phase with dynamic brake and solid state variable speed drive board.
(c) Unit to handle 14" x 18" rectangular trays at variable speeds, controlled
by the Operator.
(d) Belt to consist of single strand 10" wide Lexan slats snapped onto 3/4"
pitch stainless steel roller chain (6300 PSI) feature easy replacement of
slats without dismantling of chain. Slats to be of the non-overlapping
type for ease of complete cleaning the belt wash system. Belt to be �s
removable from turns and straight ways without tools for thorough daily
cleaning.
(e) Drive frame to be fabricated from #12 gauge channel, type #304 stainless
steel having #4 finish with #12 gauge channel top rails. Provide
stainless steel bottom channel rails all fully welded to keep belt from
pulsating. The drive frame to house the wash tank with spray nozzles.
Drive frame and enclosure to have stainless steel adjustable flanged feet
with holes for anchoring to floor. Drive to be furnished with two (2) "
hinges or removable access doors on one side and one removable panel on
other side, all with magnetic catches. Belt wash system to be hard piped
internally and include hot and cold water shut off valves, line strainers,
check valves, pressure regulator and gauge with pressure relief valve and '"
solenoid valve. Door and panel limit switches not required since all
moving parts in drive housing are furnished with guards in the event
panels are removed.
ON
(f) Stainless steel half round, half hard wear strips to be furnished on the
top run to keep the belt from contacting the stainless steel conveyor
pans. Wear strips to be furnished on the return track to insure quiet
operation without wear. Entire top slider pan to be fully welded with w
closed trough to prevent build up of debris in lower catch pans.
(g) Drip pan to be fabricated from #18 gauge, type #304 stainless steel #4
finish pitched to drive frame and to have intermittent 1-1/2" diameter MW
drains as required by length.
(h) Apron to be fabricated from #18 gauge, type #304 stainless steel,
removable and made in lengths not to exceed 4 ' -011 . A,
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-52
0A NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS KBA #96079
(2) Two (2) CCR PT-2100/SET Student Ex.Term.
*Intel 804486-DX-4/100 CPU
*32 Bit VESA Local Bus
*imb, 32Bit VESA SVGA Video Ram
*128K Cache Memory
*4mb SIMM's Memory Module
*640mb Hard Disk
*1.44mb Floppy Disk
*2 Serial & 1 Parallel Ports
APA *Ethernet 10 Base "T" Network Card
*70 Key Keyboard with built-in UPC barcode reader
*9" SVGA Color Monitor (with bottom cable exit)
*Cash Drawer with till and lock
*Dimensions: 17-1/2" wide x 21" deep x 12-3/4" high.
(3) One (1) US Robotics 28.800 Ext. Modem.
(4) One (1) Eight Port 10 Base "T" Network Hub.
(5) Network Connector Cables (quantity to be reviewed) .
(6) 400 VAT UPS Power Supply/Voltage Reg (quantity to be reviewed) .
(7) One (1) Point of Sale Server Application.
(8) Two (2) Point of Sale Client Applications.
(9) One (1) Lantastic V7.0 (10 User Network) .
(10) One (1) Blast Professional Communications.
(11) Three (3) days installation and training (24 hours) .
(h) NOTE: All cabling is to be furnished and installed by the Electrical
!! Contractor. A home run from each of the two (2) stations to hub located
in the Food Service Planning office. Cable specifications to be Beldon
category five #1583A.
(i) System shall be furnished and installed by "CCR Data Systems, Inc. " of
South Easton, Massachusetts.
ITEM NO. 70 - SPARE NO.
ITEM NO. 71 - SPARE NO.
ITEM NO. 72 - ONE (1) CONDIMENT COUNTER WITH PAN SECTIONS
(a) Unit shall measure 11' -3" long x 24" wide (36" over tray slide) x 36" high
and shall be constructed the same as hereinbefore specified for Item No.
57.
(b) Unit to be comprised of eight (8) 12" x 20" x 4" deep stainless steel
cafeteria style pans. Mounted in counter in location as shown on plans.
40 (c) Top of units shall be constructed of #16 gauge stainless steel, cut out
for Condiment Pan Sections. Cut out for pans shall be provided with an
integral stainless steel liner pan.
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-51
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS No
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS KBA #96079
(d) Hardware Requirements: System hardware must meet all industry standards
for PC based Open architecture Point of Sale Platforms. Hardware
requirements shall be provided with the following additional features;
(1) Intel 80486-DX/100 CPU or higher.
(2) IBM compatible components. ..A
(3) Green PC compliance.
(4) Cable enclosure, hiding all cable connections.
(5) Unified, configuration for all peripherals (cash drawer, printer,
keyboard, monitor and customer display) .
(e) Software Requirements: System software must be a current release of a
Database Application that meets Federal and State guidelines for public
school Food Service Program and provides the following additional
features;
(1) System-wide Student Database at each school location.
(2) Two-way Communications from Food Service offices to each school
location.
(3) Remote File Management and Remote Monitoring.
(4) Auto-discriminate Bar-code Scanning of Student ID Cards.
(5) Multiple look-up method for students access, for example (Student
ID#, Student Name, Student Phone Number) .
(6) Inventory Control for Bulk and unit Inventory. (option)
(7) Purchasing and Receiving Modules. (option)
(f) Installation: The system Supplier shall furnish the following
accessories;
(1) Hardware integration.
(2) Software installation and conditioning. aw
(3) Delivery and installation of hardware at each location.
(4) Training of all system users.
(5) One day of on-site support for each location.
(g) Entire assembly/system shall be comprised of the following;
(1) One (1) CCR TP-700/ISP Mgnt. Workstation.
*Intel 804486-DX-4/100 CPU w
*32 Bit VESA Local Bus
*lmb, 32Bit VESA Video Memory
*128K Cache Memory
*4mb SIMM's Memory Module
*640mb Hard Disk
*1.44mb Floppy Disk
*2 Serial & 1 Parallel Ports
*Ethernet 10 Base "T" Network Card
*101 Key Keytronics PC Keyboard
*9" VGA Monochrome Display
*Dimensions: 11-1/2" wide x 11-1/2" deep x 3-1/2" high.
w
wee
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-50
A
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS RBA #96079
(e) Structure and plastic laminate panels shall be extended full length of the
extended tray slides, with plastic laminate exterior finish, and stainless
steel interior panels in seating area. The seating shall be provided with
two (2) locking cash drawers with dividers and warning bell. In addition,
each drawer shall be accompanied by an adjacent 120 Volt convenience
outlet, mounted on the fascia adjacent to the drawer fronts. Each seating
position shall be provided with a tubular foot rest.
(f) Unit to be Model No. 500-6MOD-CASH as manufactured by "Servolift/Eastern"
or approved equal.
ITEM NO. 67 - ONE (1) BUILT-IN ICE CREAM DISPENSER
(a) Unit to measure 42" long (including compressor) x 28" wide.
(b) Unit to be constructed of heavy gauge steel, all welded with #18 gauge
galvanized steel exterior, interior liner to be #22 gauge stainless steel,
all welded to be watertight and a 1/2" drain.
(c) Cabinet to be self-leveling dispensers with #16 gauge stainless steel
frame, all welded and #14 gauge stainless steel pan carrier all welded.
(d) Unit to be self-contained with a 1/4 HP hermatically sealed condenser
Ma operable at 120V-1 Phase.
(e) In addition, unit to be supplied with removable stainless steel "plug"
type covers with vinyl gasket and left handles, stainless steel adapter
collar, tubular locking device.
(f) Unit to be Model No. F20-BI-C as manufactured by "Servolift/Eastern" or
approved equal.
ITEM NO. 68 - TWO (2) CUTLERY DISPENSERS
(a) Each unit to be approximately 11" wide x 20" deep x 8" high pitching
upward to 12" high.
PW (b) Units to be constructed of 18 gauge stainless steel all welded sides and
ends fully enclosed, bottom edges to be flanged.
OR (c) The top of units to be canted to accommodate nylon cylinders.
(d) Each unit to be Model No. A-8 (MOD) as manufactured by "Servolift/Eastern"
or approved equal.
ON (f) Each unit to be supplied with sixteen (16) nylon cylinders.
ITEM NO 69 - TWO (2) CASH REGISTERS/ P.O.S. SYSTEMS
! (a) The following system shall include all requirements for equipment shown on
plans as Items No. 69.
(b) This system shall be furnished and installed to completely interface with
A the Owner's computer based "Point of Sales" .
(c) Entire assembly/system shall be furnished and installed by one (1) vendor.
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-49
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS KBA #96079
(c) The refrigeration system shall be self-contained, thermostatically
controlled. Defrost shall be automatic and uses hot return gas to melt
ice off the evaporator coil. An electric condensate evaporator shall also
be provided.
(d) Provide each unit the following accessories;
ow
(1) Plastic laminate exterior.
(2) Under shelf lighting.
(3) Stainless steel tray slide.
(4) Lockable lift off plexiglas night cover. a ,
(e) Each cabinet shall have three (3) adjustable shelves, as well as stainless
steel fixed bottom shelf.
(f) Each unit shall be provided with plastic laminate exterior as chosen, and ..
further provided with a solid, stainless steel tray slide with three (3)
"inverted vee" runners.
(g) Units shall be operable at 120/208V-60-1 Phase, 1 HP, 18.1A, NEMA #L14-30P w
plug.
(h) Units to be Model No. RMDC-72H as manufactured by "Servolift/Eastern" or
approved equal.
ITEM NO. 64 - TWO (2) MILK/JUICE DISPENSERS
(a) Each unit to measure approximately 58-3/8" wide x 31-1/211 deep x 39-1/2" No
high overall, including 4" diameter swivel style casters, all with brakes.
(b) Units to be dual access with construction of stainless steel on exterior
and interior finishes. Units to also have stainless steel doors, lids and +►
hinges. Doors and lids of unit to be provided with bumpers and gasket
strips around openings. Provide units with cylinder locks, swivel casters
all with brakes, foamed in place polyurethane insulation, digital
thermometer, heavy duty wire racks and reinforced base cabinet. Provide
units with a 1/3 HP refrigeration system and cord with plug. Units to be
operable at 120V-1 Phase.
(c) Units to be Model No. ST58N as manufactured by "Beverage Air" or approved
equal.
ITEM NO. 65 - SPARE NO.
ITEM NO. 66 - ONE (1) CASHIER COUNTER so
(a) Unit to measure length as shown on plans x 71 -0" overall the extended tray
slides x 36" high (34" to tray slide) , mounted on 6" stainless steel legs
with adjustable stainless steel bullet feet.
(b) Counter shall consist of an all welded aluminum frame, topped with a #16
gauge stainless steel top, and enclosed with full width plastic laminate
panels on wood as constructed in general accordance with counters
hereinbefore specified for Item No. 57 and as follows;
(c) Unit shall include one (1) built-in, self-contained, mechanically
refrigerated ice cream dispenser, Item No. 67. so
(d) Full length x 1211, stainless steel, dual service tray slides of "inverted
vee" type shall be provided, mounted on #12 gauge stainless steel fixed
brackets.
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-48
WX
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS RBA #96079
(g) Protector shall be provided with a shielded fluorescent light mounted
below the top shelf. Light to be controlled by means of a switch on the
compressor housing.
(h) Upright supports shall be positioned on counter top and held in place by
means of blind fasteners.
IUAI
(i) Mounted on counter front, at 34" AFF, a full length x 1211, #14 gauge
stainless steel fold tray slide, with three (3) "inverted vee" full length
runners.
(j) Mount on counter on 5" diameter, plate type all swivel casters, with poly
wheels, all with brakes.
so (k) Provide top with bullet type latching devices to ensure that tops join to
form a uniform, unitized surface. In addition, unit shall be provided
with an 8" stainless steel work shelf x length shown on plans. Work shelf
shall be provided with removable cutting board for cleaning.
(1) Unit shall be operable at 120V-60-1 Phase, 1/2 HP, NEMA #5-20P plug.
(m) Unit to be Model No. 502-4RAF-PF/FW-2PE/FW-STV-DCMOD-L-FL as manufactured
by "Servolift/Eastern" or approved equal.
(n) Shop drawings must be submitted for approval prior to fabrication.
ITEM NO. 59 - FIVE (5) STOREROOM SHELVING SECTIONS (MOBILE)
(a) Units to be the same as hereinbefore specified for Item No. 13.
ITEM NO. 60 - SPARE NO.
1�1
ITEM NO. 61 - SPARE NO.
ITEM NO. 62 - FOUR (4) TRAY DISPENSERS (MOBILE)
(a) Each unit to measure approximately 25-3/8" long x 21-1/2" wide x 34" high
Base frame structure and all outer body panels, including top to be of
stainless steel construction. Unit to be fully enclosed, self-leveling
type.
(b) Units to be fitted with 5" diameter swivel style casters, polyurethane,
all with brakes, 1" diameter stainless steel tubular handle, full
perimeter bumpers and hinged cleanout panel in base.
(c) Units to be designed to store and dispense Owner's 14" x 18" trays.
(d) NOTE: Kitchen Equipment Contractor to obtain samples of Owner's trays to
verify dispenser size before fabrication.
(e) Each unit to be Model No. AT-ST-1418-Y-PH-D (MOD) as manufactured by
"Servolift/Eastern" or approved equal.
ITEM NO. 63 - TWO (2) REFRIGERATED DISPLAY MERCHANDISERS (MOBILE)
(a) Each unit to measure 72" long x 41" wide x 73" high, open type
pa refrigerated merchandising cabinets, constructed as follows;
(b) Each unit shall be cooled by a precisely controlled air flow, to maintain
38°-40° degrees within the cabinet when fully open and accessible for
service.
on
FOOD SERVICE EQUIP14ENT 11400-47
wr
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS KBA #96079
aw
(h) Food protector shall be provided with shielded fluorescent and infra-red
(heat lamp) lights mounted below serving shelf. Each shall be controlled
by its own switch, mounted on the control panel.
(i) Mounted on each counter front, at 34" AFF, a full length x 1211, #14 gauge
stainless steel fixed tray slide, with three (3) "inverted vee" full
length runners.
�w
(j) Units shall be provided with a full length x 8" stainless steel work
shelf, mounted on folding stainless steel brackets at 36" AFF.
(k) Mount each counter on 5" diameter, all swivel, plate type casters with MOO,
polyurethane tires, all with brakes.
(1) Provide tops with bullet type latching devices to ensure that tops join to
form a uniform, unitized surface. ••
(m) Electrical: Each well shall be operable at 208 Volt, 900 watt; light to
be 120 Volt, 40 A; heat lamp to be 120 Volt 800 watt. Provide 120/208
Volt, 4 wire, 1 Phase, 23.6 AMP, HUBBELL #2711, 30A plug. ew
(n) Units to be Model No. 501-4-PF/FW-2PE/FW-STV-FPMOD-WS-L-FL-HL-Y as
manufactured by "Servolift/Eastern" or approved equal.
(o) Shop drawings must be submitted for approval prior to fabrication.
ITEM NO 58 - ONE (1) COLD FOOD COUNTER WITH BREATH GUARD (MOBILE)
(a) Unit shall be a self contained cold pan counter, measuring 68-1/2" long x
29 1/2" wide x 36" high (52" OA food protector) , and as constructed as
follows;
(b) Top of unit shall be #16 gauge stainless steel, turned down 2" on all
sides with all corners welded, ground and polished.
(c) Frame of unit shall be constructed of "U" shaped 1" x 3" x 1/8" thick,
fluted, extruded aluminum tubing, with welded cross members for extra
rigidity. The top of the frame includes a fully welded extruded aluminum
perimeter angles for support of the top.
(d) The stainless steel top shall be cut out for and fitted with an 6-1/2"
deep
polyurethane insulated, watertight, mechanically refrigerated, stainless
steel cold pan with bottom pitched to a 1/2" stainless steel drain with
shut-off valve. The cold pan shall be separated from the top by means of
a full perimeter plastic breaker strip. The cold pan shall be of the
"five cold wall" type, wherein the bottom as well as the four side walls
are provided with refrigerant coils to provide maximum protection for
displayed foods. ow
(e) Front and sides of unit shall be provided with "full width" plastic
laminate panels, with Owner's chosen laminate applied to full width, 3/4"
thick marine plywood, with panel backs laminated with complimentary liner
grade laminate. The effect of these panels shall be that when the
counters are latched together, the front panels shall meet in a minimal
seam. Rear aprons and compressor housing are to be stainless steel. Side
panels shall be provided with 12" x 1211, centrally located (exact position
to be determined) finished opening to allow passage of electrical cord.
(f) Unit shall be surmounted by type "SP" single service, self-service
protectors, with 10" x full length stainless steel top shelf, in i" square
stainless steel uprights, and breath guards constructed of safety glass +►
bound in stainless steel channels.
we
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-46
04
ot NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS RBA #96079
(b) Each unit base shall be constructed of aluminum with "x" braces. Aluminum
center post with plastic coated corner posts and divider. Capacity of
each unit shall be 180 plates measuring 11-1/2" x 13" .
(c) Units shall be supplied with four (4) casters, all with brakes, vinyl dust
cover, and perimeter bumpers.
(d) Each unit to be Model No. 501-13-180 as manufactured by "Gres-Cor" or
approved equal.
ITEM N0. 57 - THREE (3) 4 WELL HOT FOOD COUNTERS (MOBILE)
(a) Each unit shall be a self-contained hot well counter, measuring 68" long x
29-1/2" wide x 36" high (51-1/2" Food Protector (OA) ) , and constructed as
follows;
(b) Top of each unit shall be #16 gauge stainless steel, turned down 2" on all
sides with all corners welded, ground and polished. Tops shall be
provided with a modified recessed top which enables 18" x 26" sheet pans
to be accommodated in addition to standard steam table pans.
(c) Frames shall be constructed of "U" shaped 1" x 3" x 1/8" thick, fluted,
ON extruded aluminum tubing, with welded cross members for extra rigidity.
The tops of each frame shall include a fully welded extruded aluminum
perimeter angles for support of the top.
ow (d) Hot food wells shall be one-piece, die stamped stainless steel, bottom
mount type, "wet or dry type", sized for 12" x 20" x 6" food pans. The
top shall be turned down into the wells with a sanitary raised bead around
the full perimeter of each well. Each hot well shall be heated by means
,ft of a 900 watt heating system and shall be furnished with an adjustable
thermostatic control with "off" position and neon pilot light. All wells
shall be wired to a permanently mounted cord and plug, which shall exit
beneath the bottom of each unit at the side adjacent to the stub wall, to
provide for easy plug-in to the wall outlets, through the opening
described under "end panels" . Units shall be U.L. listed, openings for
cord and plug access to measure 12" x 12" .
(e) Each well shall be provided with a drain and individual valve, connected
by means of a common manifold. There shall be a valve at the end of the
manifold. Provide a stainless steel shelf, mounted beneath each counter,
in proximity to the end of the manifold (valve end) which will support a
40 five (5) gallon pail. This pail will be used to receive the contents of
the wells when they are used "wet" .
(f) Exterior finish of each unit, front and sides shall be provided with "full
width" plastic laminate panels, with Owner's chosen laminate applied to
full width, 3/4" thick marine plywood, with panel backs laminated with
complimentary liner grade laminate. The effect of these panels shall be
that when the counters are latched together, the front panels shall meet
in a minimum seam. Rear aprons are to be stainless steel. End panels
adjacent to walls are to be provided with a central (precise location to
be determined) 12" x 12" finished cut out to enable passage of power cord
through to wall outlet.
(g) Each counter to be surmounted by a 15-1/2" high, food protector with
serving shelf. Upright supports shall be 1" square stainless steel
tubing, positioned on counter top and held in place by means of blind
ON fasteners. Front and end sneeze guards shall be of safety glass bound in
stainless steel channel.
am
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-45
ON
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS 00
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS RBA #96079
ITEM NO 54 - TWO (2) BACKCOUNTERS WITH WORK & HAND SINKS
(a) Each unit to be of length as shown on plans x 30" wide x 36" high to *�*
working surface.
(b) Top of each unit to be fitted with one (1) 20" x 20" x 10" deep work sink
and one (1) 10" x 10" x 5" deep hand sink, both fitted with appropriate
faucets. Sinks to be in location as shown on plans. In location of Hand
Sink, provide unit with stainless steel towel dispenser, secured to
backsplash, to accommodate 300 9-1/2" x 9-1/2" paper towels and a
stainless steel liquid soap dispenser mounted to top with one pint OVA,
capacity globe below, the same as specified for Item No. 19.
(c) Top of each unit to be constructed of 14 gauge stainless steel turned down
2" and 1/2" in channel shape at front and ends. so
(d) An integral fully welded intersecting side splash shall be furnished
between hand sink and work sink. Splash to be 10" high by width of
backsplash with all edges being rounded for safety.
(e) Rear of each unit to be turned up 10" and returned 2" towards wall and
1/2" in channel shape with ends welded closed.
(f) Top to rest on fully enclosed base cabinets with hinged and sliding doors, '
and bottom and intermediate shelves where space allows.
(g) Entire assembly to rest on two (2) front 6" high adjustable bullet feet
and a 3" x 3" x 3/16" angle "stringer" fastened to wall, and as detailed
on drawings.
(h) Entire assembly to be constructed as hereinbefore set forth and as shown
on plans.
ITEM NO 55 - ONE (1) COLD TRANSPORT CABINET (MOBILE)
(a) Unit to measure approximately 27-1/2" wide x 33-1/2" deep x 69-3/4" high. .�
(b) Unit to be insulated with moisture-proof thermoplastic and constructed of
Hi-Tensile aluminum and door provided with neoprene gasket. Interior of
unit to have universal angles, spaced on 4-1/2" centers and adjustable on .�
1-1/2" centers. Unit to be mounted on 5" diameter swivel casters all
provided with brakes.
(c) Unit to have 1/3 HP, 7.7 AMPS at 120V/1 Phase refrigeration system which
includes blower, compressor and evaporator all housed in an enclosed,
insulated box. The entire refrigeration system to be removable.
(d) Controls to be located on front panel to and include air temperature
thermostat, on-off switch, pilot light and temperature control. Furnish
unit with 6' -0" heavy duty power cord set with plug. Provide thermometer
mounted on cabinet door with dial outside for unit.
(e) Unit to be Model No. SPD-3624-5 as manufactured by "Servolift/Eastern" or
approved equal.
ITEM NO 56 - FIVE (5) DISH CADDIES (MOBILE)
(a) Each unit to measure approximately 27" wide x 27" deep x 3211 high overall,
including 5" diameter swivel style casters.
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-44
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS RBA #96079
M!M
ITEM NO. 48 - FOUR (4) POT AND PAN RACKS (MOBILE)
(a) Units to be the same as hereinbefore specified for Item No. 4.
ITEM NO. 49 - SPARE NO
go ITEM NO 50 - SPARE NO
ITEM NO. 51 - SPARE NO
ITEM NO. 52 - TWO (2) HOT TRANSPORT CABINETS (MOBILE)
(a) Each unit to measure approximately 27-1/2" wide x 33-1/2" deep x 69-3/4"
high.
(b) Each unit to be insulated with moisture-proof thermoplastic .and
constructed of Hi-Tensile aluminum and door provided with neoprene gasket.
Interior of each unit to have universal angles, spaced on 4-1/2" centers
! and adjustable on 1-1/2" centers. Each unit to be mounted on 5" diameter
swivel style casters all provided with brakes.
(c) Each unit to have heating unit consisting of a formed tubular element,
blower motor, electric hand set timer, on/off switch, dial graduating in 1
hour intervals. Power requirements for each unit to be 2.0 KW, 16.6 AMPS
total, operable at 120V/1 Phase.
00 (d) Controls to be located on front panel to and include air temperature
thermostat, on/off switch, pilot light and temperature control. Furnish
each unit with 6' -0" heavy duty power cord set with plug. Provide
thermometer mounted on cabinet door with dial outside of each unit.
ift
(e) Each unit to be Model No. 190OPHI-73U as manufactured by
"Servolift/Eastern" or approved equal.
so ITEM NO. 53 - TWO (2) MICROWAVE OVENS
(a) Each unit to measure 25-5/8" wide x 22-7/8" deep x 18-9/16" high.
40 (b) Interior and exterior of each unit to be constructed of stainless steel.
Units to have door to open downward with no latch buttons or catches.
Doors to have see through window. Interior of cavity to be lighted.
Units to have air filter to be easily removable.
(c) Controls of each unit to be located across top of oven. Controls to allow
for both programmed, automatic, and manual operation. Units to have eight
memory pads to allow for sixteen different cooking programs. Units also
to have dial timer to allow for manual operation up to 60 minutes.
Multiple portion touch pad modifies programs to compensate for
simultaneous multiple portion cooking. Cooking time to be displayed on
L.E.D. digital display.
4' (d) Units to have 1.6 KW cooking power at 208V/1 Phase, 17.0 AMPS and shall be
provided with cord and plug.
(e) Units to be Model No. HM-1600 as manufactured by "Hobart" or approved
equal.
an
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-43
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS KBA #96079
am
ITEM NO. 44 - SPARE NO.
ITEM NO. 45 - ONE (1) POT WASHING ASSEMBLY ,ft
(a) Unit to be of length as shown on plans x 30" wide x 34" high to
drainboards surface.
an
(b) Unit to be comprised of three (3) compartment sink sections with
compartments measuring 27" x 27" x 16" deep, and drainboards as shown.
(c) Top of unit to be constructed of 14 gauge stainless steel. Front and ends Am
of table shall be turned up 3" and rolled 180 degrees. All interior
corners shall be welded, ground smooth and polished. Back of table to be
turned up 10" returned 1-1/2" toward wall and 1/21, in channel shape to
form backsplash. ..
(d) Unit to be furnished with reinforcements, gussets, legs, adjustable
flanged feet bolted to floor, and flat shelving under drainboards all
constructed in accordance with details hereinbefore set forth and as shown Wo
on plans. Unit to be secured to floor.
ITEM NO. 46 - ONE (1) WASTE DISPOSER
(a) Unit shall be equipped with heavy aluminum grind and discharge housings.
Motor for unit shall have permanently lubricated ball bearings and be 5
HP. Unit to have continuous duty rating and inherent overload protection
in motor.
(b) Disposer fastens to a 7" I.D. throat opening. A vinyl isolating ring to
be provided to eliminate metal-to-metal contact at mounting.
(c) Disposer to have stationery shredder ring of ni-hard, 2-1/21" high #4
machine ground primary action breaker bars. Unit to have breaker blade,
mounted at center. Two hardened stainless steel cutter blocks to be
replaceable and 9" diameter flywheel to also be furnished with unit.
w�
(d) A motor shaft seal to provide water seal protection of unit shall be
provided. Drain connector to be removable outlet flange tapped for 3"
pipe connection.
(e) Provided with unit shall be Group B accessories, which includes a vinyl
silver-saver splash guard ring, 18" I.D. stainless steel cone, vacuum
breaker, and fixed direction water inlet for sink.
(f) Also provided with unit shall be Electrical Control Group 3, which shall
include magnetic contactors, push button start/stop, automatic reversing,
low water pressure cut-off, time delay for water after shut-off, line
disconnect, solenoid valve and NEMA 12 enclosure. Unit to be operable at �w
480V-3 Phase.
(g) Unit shall be furnished in standard finish and to be Model No. FD-500-B-3
as manufactured by "Hobart" or approved equal. ,,
ITEM NO. 47 - TWO (2) HOSE REEL ASSEMBLIES
(a) Units to be the same as hereinbefore specified for Item No. 3. „w
(b) Note: One (1) unit to be mounted on Utility Distribution System, Item No.
37.
- - ww
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-42
�wr
OR NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS KBA #96079
(d) Unit to have standard oven base with porcelain on steel oven lining. Oven
to have 50,000 BTU/HR burner. Burner to be "Flame Retention" principle
design. Oven door to be spring balanced, mounted in self lubricating
bearings. Oven to be thermostatically controlled, adjustable from 150°F to
500°F. Oven to be provided with automatic oven light. Oven interior to be
26" wide x 28" deep x 14" high.
(e) Unit to be provided with automatic pilot lighting with g g wgas shut off device
in case of pilot outage. Unit to be furnished in standard finish.
Provide unit with rear gas connection, two (2) oven racks, and a single
deck high shelf with backguard flue riser.
(f) Unit to be NSF approved and AGA design certified. Provide unit with
required connections to be interconnected to utility distribution system,
Item No. 37. In addition, furnish unit equipped to received restraining
devices specified under Utility Distribution System, Item No. 37.
(g) Unit to be Model No. GH56 as manufactured by "Vulcan" or approved equal.
ITEM NO. 42 - FOUR (4) DOUBLE DECK CONVECTION OVENS (MOBILE)
(a) Each unit to measure 39-7/8" wide x 36" deep x 79-3/4" high overall
including 6" high stainless steel legs with adjustable bullet feet.
(b) Each unit to be a heavy duty natural gas heated double deck convection
oven. Each unit to be rated at 140,000 BTU/HR.
!fir (c) Each unit to have a polished stainless steel front. Sides and top to be
finished with heat resistant paint. Oven side linings, door linings and
fan cover to be porcelain on steel. Oven sides, back and doors to be
insulated with 211 glass fiber, top to have 4" of insulation.
(d) Each unit to have oven sections heated by two (2) burners, each oven
section to be provided with removable eleven (11) position rack guides
with five (5) nickel plated heavy duty racks. Each oven section to have
� doors with windows, interior oven lights and auxiliary fan switch for
rapid cool down with doors open. Doors to open a full 180 degrees. Oven
fan motor to shut off when doors are opened. Each unit to have two (2)
3/4 HP, 208V/1 Phase blower motors, with built-in thermal protection.
(e) Each unit to have side mounted control panel. Each oven section to have
an adjustable thermostat from 200° F to 500° F. Each oven section to have
a 5 hour timer with a continuous sounding buzzer.
(f) Each unit to be NSF approved and AGA design certified. Provide units with
required connections to be interconnected to Utility Distribution System,
Item No. 38. In addition, furnish unit equipped to receive restraining
devices specified under Utility Distribution System, Item No. 38.
(g) Each unit to be Model No. SG22 as manufactures by "Vulcan" or approved
equal.
ITEM NO. 43 - ONE (1) POT FILL FAUCET
(a) Unit to be the same as hereinbefore specified for Item No. 30.
(b) Unit to be provided with required connections to be interconnected to
Utility Distribution System, Item No. 37. In addition, furnish unit
equipped to receive restraining devices specified under Utility
Distribution System, Item No. 37.
ow
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-41
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS KBA #96079
(1) Six (6) 12" x 20" x 1" deep perforated.
(2) Six (6) 12" x 20" x 1" deep solid.
(3) Four (4) 12" x 20" x 4" deep perforated.
(4) Two (2) 12" x 20" x 4" deep solid.
(5) Six (6) 12" x 20" x 2-1/2" deep perforated.
(6) Three (3) 12" x 20" x 2-1/2" deep solid.
wee
(g) Steamer to be provided with a 15 PSI kettle connection, and shall have
factory connected steam supply to adjacent forty (40) gallon tilting
kettle, as shown on plans.
w
(h) Kettle to measure 36" wide x 33" deep x 40" high overall including 6" high
stainless steel legs with adjustable bullet feet.
(i) Kettle to be a forty (40) gallon tilting steam jacketed kettle. Kettle to
be constructed of stainless steel, mounted in an enclosed cabinet base.
Unit to be provided with steam control and hot and cold water fill faucet
to be mounted on stainless steel counter top. Unit to be equipped with 1-
1/2" sanitary draw off. Swing drain for draw off with removable strainer.
Unit to also have a one piece stainless steel counter balanced cover.
(j) Cabinet base of kettle to be of modular design with reinforced die-formed
stainless steel marine edged counter top, stainless steel sides and hinged
doors with magnetic latches and be polished stainless steel.
(k) Kettle to tilt nearly upright to allow complete emptying of contents under
positive control and be provided with a pan support, removable without ,s
tools, which will lock pan in horizontal positions not more than 2" from
kettle lip throughout tilting operation. Pan support to hold one (1) 12"
x 20" pan.
(1) Kettle to operate by direct steam at 5 to 35 PSI. Steam to be derived
from adjacent convection steamer, as shown on plans. Unit to be factory
connected to convection steamer.
we
(m) Units to be supplied with hot and cold water faucet with swing spout.
(n) Units to be NSF approved, AGA design certified and ASME code constructed
Provide units with required connections to be interconnected to Utility
Distribution System, Item No. 37. In addition, furnish unit equipped to
receive restraining devices specified under Utility Distribution System,
Item No. 37.
(o) Steamer to be Model No. VSX-24G and Kettle unit to be Model No. VDMT40,
both as manufactured by "Vulcan" or approved equal.
(p) Units to be factory connected and shipped as one (1) unit. w
ITEM NO 41 - ONE (1) SIX BURNER RANGE WITH OVEN BASE (MOBILE)
(a) Unit to measure approximately 34" wide x 38-1/4" deep x 36" high to
working surface, including 5" high swivel casters, all with brakes..
(b) Unit to be a heavy duty natural gas heated range with standard oven base.
Unit to be rated at 170,000 BTU.
+ems
(c) Top of unit to have six (6) 20,000 BTU/HR burners with oven below. Each
burner to be "Flame Retention" principle design. Each burner to be
controlled by individual infinite gas valves. Each burner to have its own
stainless steel pilot burners.
so
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-40
w
00 NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS RBA #96079
(o) As part of the installation of the Utility Distribution System a
factory engineer shall be on site, to coordinate all efforts. A sales
representative will not be acceptable.
(p) The Utility Distribution System to be Model No. CA-IM-EG-019 as
manufactured by "Caddy" or approved equal.
ITEM NO. 39 - ONE (1) TROUGH WITH GRATING
(a) Unit to measure length as shown on plans x 21" wide x 6" deep and shall be
constructed of fully welded 14 gauge stainless steel.
(b) All interior corners to be coved; bottom to be pitched to and fitted with
two (2) stainless steel waste cups with removable stainless steel
perforated basket to accommodate 3" waste pipe.
(c) Top perimeter frame shall be shaped to support, in a flush manner, a
removable, sectional grating.
AIA (d) Grating to be constructed of a series of 1" x 3/16" thick stainless steel
cross bars spaced approximately 111 O.C. Bars to be welded to three (3)
longitudinal 1/2" diameter stainless steel rods. Gratings shall be
furnished in sections not more than 1' -0" long.
(e) Trough and gratings to be anti-splash Model No. ASFT as manufactured by
"IMC Teddy" or approved equal.
ITEM NO. 40 - TWO (2) STEAMER & KETTLE BATTERIES (FIXED)
(a) Each unit to be comprised of one (1) convection steamer and one (1) 40
gallon tilting kettle.
(a) Steamer unit to measure 24" wide x 33" deep x 60" high overall including
6" high stainless steel legs with adjustable bullet feet.
(b) Steamer to be a natural gas heated convection steamer. Unit to be rated
at 200, 000 BTU/HR.
(c) steamer to be mounted on enclosed cabinet base with lift off stainless
steel removable panels and hinged front doors. Cabinet base to enclose
the self contained gas operated steam generator.
(d) Steamer to be constructed of satin finish stainless steel, type 304, with
a one piece all welded stainless steel cooking chamber. Doors of unit to
have a removable inner liner of stainless steel and a positive lock and
seal mechanism with spring release. Unit to be provided with removable
stainless steel pan supports and a stainless steel drip trough connected
to drain to collect condensate when door is opened.
(e) Steamer to have a front control housing constructed of stainless steel.
The controls shall include a master on/off control switch, cooking light,
60 minute dial timer with ready light and buzzer. Steam flow shall
automatically be stopped when compartment door is opened during cooking
cycle.
(f) Steamer to have stainless steel removable pan slides. Pan capacity per
compartment in 12" x 20" solid or perforated pans to be either six (6) 1"
deep, three (3) 2 1/2" deep or two (2) 4" deep. Unit to be furnished with
the following stainless steel pans:
W
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-39
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS RBA #96079
6. Inspect for, and tighten any loose connections caused by shipping.
7. Connect load side of optional magnetic starter(s) in vertical
chase to exhaust and supply fan motor(s) .
8. Connect ventilator light switch(es) in vertical chase to junction
box(es) on ventilator.
w.
9. Provide field service entrance knockouts as required.
10. Provide proper service feeds and necessary overcurrent protection
devices in accordance with applicable codes. ,.
11. All cords with plugs are limited by code in most areas to 6' -0"
maximum in length. Where this is exceeded the electrician must
extend the feeds to accommodate this condition.
(m) PLUMBING CONTRACTOR
1. Install Utility Distribution System flexible drain line(s) from ■s
ventilator to floor sinks.
2. Connect all incoming service piping to vertical chase as shown on
Utility Distribution System manufacturer's shop drawings.
3. Connect all plumbing field joints in Utility Distribution System.
4. Connect all flexible hose assemblies to food service equipment,
and to Utility Distribution System.
5. Inspect for, and tighten any loose plumbing connections caused by
shipping.
6. Provide all necessary fittings and reducers required to operate
equipment serviced by Utility Distribution System.
7. All hoses are limited by code in most areas to 6' -0" maximum
length. Where this is exceeded the plumber must extend the feeds
to accommodate this condition.
8. Plumbing material required to connect from the cooking equipment
to the Utility Distribution System hoses shall be furnished and
installed by the plumbing contractor. The Utility Distribution
System manufacturer is not responsible for this expense. Va
9. Pressure check all plumbing lines after all of the Utility
Distribution System field joints have been made up. The Utility
Distribution System manufacturer is not responsible for this
check out or any incurred expenses.
(n) CODE COMPLIANCE: The Utility Distribution System shall be U.L. listed
under the category "Commercial Appliance Outlet Center" and
manufactured in accordance with the National Electrical Code (NEC) ,
National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) , National Fire
Protection Association (NFPA) pamphlet number 96 and 54, Uniform
Plumbing Code (UPC) , American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) ,
National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) , and Occupational Safety and ■w
Health Administration (OSHA) using only U.L. listed, Bureau of Mines
rated, AGA certified and CGA certified components.
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-38
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS RBA #96079
Plastic covered stainless steel flexible gas hoses to be NSF, NFPA and
AGA certified, to be provided by the Utility Distribution System
manufacturer, manufactured by (Dormont Mfg. ) only. Each gas hose to
include one safety restrainer cable to be interconnected from the
Utility Distribution System supplied 1-5/8" OD restrainer pipe
spanning between end risers to the appliance. All plumbing manifold
connections will be clearly labeled and color coded for
identification.
Also included are the main quarter-turn manual shut-off valve(s) (one)
located in (each) vertical end riser prior to the solenoid valve(s) .
*0 The plumbing contractor is to furnish and tie the utilities in at this
point. Each field joint shall have unions for easy reassembly by the
plumbing contractor.
(k) FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT CONTRACTOR
1. Verify make, model, and utility requirements for all equipment
listed on schedule, also submit cut sheets.
2. Indicate field joint location(s) , if required, to accommodate for
building entrance and installation area.
3 . Verify all rough-in requirements of Utility Distribution System.
4. All Utility Distribution System manufacturer's drawings must be
submitted to local electric and plumbing agencies for approval
prior to fabrication.
5. The dimensions shown, unless corrected, shall be deemed correct
upon receipt of approval drawing(s) .
6. Assemble and set Utility Distribution System.
7. Remove and replace all access panels and enclosures so field
splices and connections can be made by other trades.
8. Connect gas operated food service equipment with equipment
restraining devices as provided with the Utility Distribution
System and adjust for hose length so restrainers operate
effectively.
(1) ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR
P' 1. Install electrical services to Utility Distribution System
terminal blocks or connecting lugs as indicated on manufacturer's
shop drawings.
2. Connect all electrical field joints (which includes reconnecting
quick disconnect snap plug-in connectors for control wiring and
bolt in busbar splices supplied with Utility Distribution System,
when applicable) .
3. Connect from fire extinguishing systems micro-switch or relay to
Utility Distribution System terminal strip.
00 4. Reconnect main feed wire sealtight and enclosed wires from main
circuit breaker to raceway busbars following wiring color code.
5. Connect all electrical assemblies to food service equipment
0% junction boxes, and to Utility Distribution System.
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-37
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS KBA #96079
All circuit breakers are to be Square D brand, thermal magnetic style,
with 10,000 A/C ampere inrush capacity.
All point-of-use circuit breakers to be plug-on style (or equivalent)
and be located under a splash proof hinged access door along the top
of the horizontal raceway to protect them from the kitchen
environment.
a.e
Each circuit breaker is to connect directly to busbars without wire.
Each circuit breaker assembly will include, as needed, an easily
relocated 12 inch mounting plate having required opening for circuit
breaker (requiring no hand power tools) , pilot light (main riser) ,
push to test button and ground fault interrupter. Every breaker
mounting plate will cover the breaker with a spring-hinged
weatherproof protected cover. The point-of-use circuit breakers to be
mounted horizontally to the respective busbar assembly. All branch
circuit breakers to be sized according to equipment load and to be
clearly labeled to identify volts, phase, amps, and connection number
(per Utility Distribution System equipment schedule) . A corresponding
status light to be located in the main riser door for each circuit
breaker.
Directly below at the bottom of the horizontal raceway receptacle
connection plates to be located which are individually grounded to the
system main frame. Each connection plate to be interchangeable and
to be furnished with a moisture resistant cover and grounding type
receptacle having a specific NEMA polarized configuration.
Field joints at risers and raceways to be provided with quick
disconnect snap plug-ins for easy reconnection of control wiring.
Cord/plug sets with strain relief devices to be furnished for all
appliances with exception of appliances equipped with cord/plug sets
as standard equipment. Appliances requiring more than 50 AMPS to be
fitted with conduit connection furnished by the Utility Distribution
System manufacturer unless otherwise noted.
NOTE: Ground fault interruption for personnel protection (4 to 6 �*
milliamperes) to be provided for single and two pole breakers only.
120/1/60 up to 30 AMPS and 120-208/1/60 up to 60 AMPS.
(i) FIRE PROTECTION: Connection points for the surface fire protection to
be provided for fire/fuel shut-down of the gas and/or electrical
system as required by NFPA No. 96 needing 4 wires from the terminal
strip supplied in the Utility Distribution System main riser by the
electrical contractor to the fire extinguishing system micro
switch/terminals. The main riser will contain the manual reset
components required by the NFPA No. 96 for the resetting of the gas
valve(s) .
a�a
(j) GAS SYSTEM: A single black iron gas manifold to be provided, factory
installed with pre-wired electrical gas valve at vertical end riser.
Unions will be provided at each field joint. Internal connections to
the manifold to be made of welded or threaded standard pipe fittings.
Each hose connection to include a quarter-turn ball valve at each
outlet. The quick disconnect gas connector assemblies consist of one
way disconnect couplings with fusible link, shut-off valve, type 304
stainless steel hose and braid connector with flexible plastic blue
coating of sufficient length to attach properly to the device, gas
hose swivel fitting and all necessary related fittings. All
assemblies are to be constructed with welded fittings on both ends
(welded ends are unacceptable) .
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-36
00 NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS RBA #96079
(c) CONSTRUCTION: The Utility Distribution System to be constructed entirely
of stainless steel type 304 number 4 finish not less than 16 gauge. This
includes the vertical riser(s) , peaked top, end caps, horizontal raceway,
hinged panels and removable panels. Unexposed items such as the main
electrical panel and the inside raceway section to also be fabricated from
16 gauge stainless steel. The insulating and supporting materials for the
plumbing and electrical components are the only exception to this.
The main electrical panel, electrical raceway, and all electrical
distribution components to be isolated from the plumbing chamber, and
plumbing raceway in accordance with national electrical codes. All
hardware for utility interconnects for multiple section raceways and
risers to be provided by manufacturer for reassembly by field contractors.
(d) The main riser to enclose the main circuit breaker with shunt trip coil
for fire/fuel shut-off. The main riser to also enclose all switches,
relays, wiring troughs, solenoid valve(s) and terminal blocks necessary
for fire/fuel shut down of the equipment and to be factory wired in
accordance with national electrical codes. The main riser to feed the
hood lights and the horizontal raceway busbars where internal power
connections are distributed through individual plug-on circuit breakers to
the various items to be controlled. The risers access door to be mounted
on a full-length stainless steel hinge and to be secured with stainless
steel truss head machine screws. The emergency kill switch, gas valve
reset button (where applicable) , hood light switch, convenience outlet and
equipment status lights to be clearly engraved on plastic laminated
labeling which is mounted to the front of the access door which shall be
recessed to protect all electrical components from damage. Both the main
circuit breaker and the hood light switch are to have a spring-hinged
weatherproof protected cover with gasket. This allows easy access to
reset the main breaker or turn on/off hood lights from the front of the
IN access door. Access to the plumbing inlets to be by way of side lift out
panels and to be secured with stainless steel truss head machine screws.
(e) The secondary riser will be similar to the main riser except there is no
electrical panel, electrical components, and hinged access door. There is
a convenience outlet mounted in a weatherproof box. Access to the
plumbing inlets will be by way of side lift out panels and shall be
secured with stainless steel truss head machine screws.
(f) The horizontal raceway to be constructed to provide three (3) compartments
to separate the utilities. The top compartment to enclose the electrical
utilities and be hinged to provide access and moisture protection. The
side compartment to enclose the plumbing utilities and be accessible
through removable panels. The bottom compartment to enclose the
electrical receptacles and to be accessible by hinged covers.
1{ (g) The Utility Distribution System to be completely pre-wired and pre-plumbed
to final connection points as shown on plans.
(h) The electrical busbar system to be sized and installed as per the
National Electrical Code and color coded and pre-wired for easy
interconnection. Electrical busbars to be 100% copper and completely
insulated. Busbars are to be pre-drilled and pre-tapped at factory to
allow for maximum number of connections to allow for future expansion
or field relocation of equipment. Busbars to have balanced loads and
phases and shall carry the full capacity of load for the entire length
of the system. Busbars are to be mounted horizontally.
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-35
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS KBA #96079
4. Connect all flexible hose assemblies to food service equipment, and
to Utility Distribution System.
5. Inspect for, and tighten any loose plumbing connections caused by
shipping.
6. Provide all necessary fittings and reducers required to operate
equipment serviced by Utility Distribution System.
7. All hoses are limited by code in most areas to 6' -0" maximum length
Where this is exceeded the plumber must extend the feeds to
accommodate this condition.
8. Plumbing material required to connect from the cooking equipment to .w
the Utility Distribution System hoses shall be furnished and
installed by the plumbing contractor. The Utility Distribution
System manufacturer is not responsible for this expense.
9. Pressure check all plumbing lines after all of the Utility
Distribution System field joints have been made up. The Utility
Distribution System manufacturer is not responsible for this check
out or any incurred expenses.
ww
(o) CODE COMPLIANCE: The Utility Distribution System shall be U.L. listed
under the category "Commercial Appliance Outlet Center" and manufactured
in accordance with the National Electrical Code (NEC) , National Electrical
Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) , National Fire Protection Association !
(NFPA) pamphlet number 96 and 54, Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC) , American
Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) , National Sanitation Foundation
(NSF) , and Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) using only
U.L. listed, Bureau of Mines rated, AGA certified and CGA certified so
components.
(p) As part of the installation of the Utility Distribution System a factory
engineer shall be on site, to coordinate all efforts. A sales „X
representative will not be acceptable.
(q) The Utility Distribution System to be Model No. CA-IM-EGW-019 as
manufactured by "Caddy" or approved equal.
ITEM NO. 38 - ONE (1) UTILITY DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
(a) GENERAL: Provide stainless steel, self-contained Utility Distribution System
of size and shape as shown on the plans. The system shall be completely pre-
wired and pre-piped to a single connection point for electrical, gas, cold
water and hot water, as required by the food service equipment specified. All
plumbing and electrical services shall include a minimum of 25% over-capacity
for future changes in food equipment.
(b) ISLAND STYLE: The Utility Distribution System to be 18' -10" long by 12" wide
by 3 ' -2" high having 10" peaked cap on the horizontal raceway. The Utility
Distribution System to be supplied with two (2) 61 -5-3/4" high vertical
riser/base combination and to consist of sections not exceeding 16' -0" long
with two (2) adjustable tubular supports for each 16 foot increment. System
to be mounted 2' -3" above finished floor to the underside of the horizontal
raceway. +**
.w
.ter
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-34
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS KBA #96079
4. All Utility Distribution System manufacturer's drawings must be
submitted to local electric and plumbing agencies for approval prior
to fabrication.
5. The dimensions shown, unless corrected, shall be deemed correct upon
receipt of approval drawing(s) .
6. Assemble and set Utility Distribution System.
7. Remove and replace all access panels and enclosures so field splices
and connections can be made by other trades.
B. Connect gas operated food service equipment with equipment
restraining devices as provided with the Utility Distribution System
and adjust for hose length so restrainers operate effectively.
(m) ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR
11lIlI 1. Install electrical services to Utility Distribution System terminal
blocks or connecting lugs as indicated on manufacturer's shop
drawings.
+ Rr 2. Connect all electrical field joints (which includes reconnecting
quick disconnect snap plug-in connectors for control wiring and bolt
in busbar splices supplied with Utility Distribution System, when
applicable) .
3. Connect from fire extinguishing systems micro-switch or relay to
Utility Distribution System terminal strip.
4. Reconnect main feed wire sealtight and enclosed wires from main
circuit breaker to raceway busbars following wiring color code.
5. Connect all electrical assemblies to food service equipment junction
boxes, and to Utility Distribution System.
6. Inspect for, and tighten any loose connections caused by shipping.
7. Connect load side of optional magnetic starter(s) in vertical chase
to exhaust and supply fan motor(s) .
8. Connect ventilator light switch(es) in vertical chase to junction
box(es) on ventilator.
9. Provide field service entrance knockouts as required.
10. Provide proper service feeds and necessary overcurrent protection
devices in accordance with applicable codes.
11. All cords with plugs are limited by code in most areas to 6' -0"
maximum in length. Where this is exceeded the electrician must
extend the feeds to accommodate this condition.
(n) PLUMBING CONTRACTOR
" 1. Install Utility Distribution System flexible drain line(s) from
ventilator to floor sinks.
2. Connect all incoming service piping to vertical chase as shown on
Utility Distribution System manufacturer's shop drawings.
3 . Connect all plumbing field joints in Utility Distribution System.
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-33
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS 0'
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS RBA #96079
A*
(i) FIRE PROTECTION: Connection points for the surface fire protection to be
provided for fire/fuel shut-down of the gas and/or electrical system as
required by NFPA No. 96 needing 4 wires from the terminal strip supplied
in the Utility Distribution System main riser by the electrical contractor *�+
to the fire extinguishing system micro switch/terminals. The main riser
will contain the manual reset components required by the NFPA No. 96 for
the resetting of the gas valve(s) .
(j) Cold and hot water supply lines to be hard drawn type "L" copper insulated
with 3/8" thick cellular foam insulation throughout. Also included is the
main quarter-turn manual shut-off valve in one vertical end riser, where
the plumbing contractor is to tie the utilities in at. Each hose Oft
connection to be provided with a quarter-turn ball valve at each outlet.
The quick disconnect water connector assemblies consist of two way quick
disconnect couplings with shut-off valve, type 304 stainless steel hose
and braid connector with plastic (orange for hot and green for cold) an
coating of sufficient length to attach properly to the device and all
necessary related fittings. All assemblies are to constructed with welded
fittings on both ends (welded ends are unacceptable) . Plastic coated
stainless steel flexible water hoses shall be provided by the Utility 04
Distribution System Manufacturer, and manufactured by (Dormont Mfg.) . A
pressure/temperature gauge combination with a shock arrestor shall be
located at the cold and hot water supply inlets and installed in the
respective end riser by the Utility Distribution System manufacturer. All ,
plumbing manifolds will be clearly labeled and color coded for
identification. Each field joint shall have unions for easy reassembly by
the plumbing contractor.
(k) GAS SYSTEM: A single black iron gas manifold to be provided, factory
installed with pre-wired electrical gas valve at vertical end riser.
Unions will be provided at each field joint. Internal connections to the
manifold to be made of welded or threaded standard pipe fittings. Each
hose connection to include a quarter-turn ball valve at each outlet. The
quick disconnect gas connector assemblies consist of one way disconnect
couplings with fusible link, shut-off valve, type 304 stainless steel hose
and braid connector with flexible plastic blue coating of sufficient
length to attach properly to the device, gas hose swivel fitting and all
necessary related fittings. All assemblies are to be constructed with
welded fittings on both ends (welded ends are unacceptable) .
Plastic covered stainless steel flexible gas hoses to be NSF, NFPA and AGA
certified, to be provided by the Utility Distribution System manufacturer,
manufactured by (Dormont Mfg.) only. Each gas hose to include one safety
restrainer cable to be interconnected from the Utility Distribution System
supplied 1-5/8" OD restrainer pipe spanning between end risers to the as
appliance. All plumbing manifold connections will be clearly labeled and
color coded for identification.
Also included are the main quarter-turn manual shut-off valve(s) (one) 00'
located in (each) vertical end riser prior to the solenoid valve(s) . The
plumbing contractor is to furnish and tie the utilities in at this point.
Each field joint shall have unions for easy reassembly by the plumbing
contractor.
(1) FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT CONTRACTOR
1. Verify make, model, and utility requirements for all equipment listed
on schedule, also submit cut sheets.
2. Indicate field joint location(s) , if required, to accommodate for
building entrance and installation area. w
3. Verify all rough-in requirements of Utility Distribution System.
AW
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-32
w,
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS KBA #96079
(f) The horizontal raceway to be constructed to provide three (3) compartments
to separate the utilities. The top compartment to enclose the electrical
utilities and be hinged to provide access and moisture protection. The
side compartment to enclose the plumbing utilities and be accessible
through removable panels. The bottom compartment to enclose the
electrical receptacles and to be accessible by hinged covers.
(g) The Utility Distribution System to be completely pre-wired and pre-plumbed
to final connection points as shown on plans.
(h) The electrical busbar system to be sized and installed as per the National
Electrical Code and color coded and pre-wired for easy interconnection.
Electrical busbars to be 100% copper and completely insulated. Busbars
so are to be pre-drilled and pre-tapped at factory to allow for maximum
number of connections to allow for future expansion or field relocation of
equipment. Busbars to have balanced loads and phases and shall carry the
full capacity of load for the entire length of the system. Busbars are to
be mounted horizontally.
All circuit breakers are to be Square D brand, thermal magnetic style,
with 10, 000 A/C ampere inrush capacity.
All point-of-use circuit breakers to be plug-on style (or equivalent) and
be located under a splash proof hinged access door along the top of the
horizontal raceway to protect them from the kitchen environment.
Each circuit breaker is to connect directly to busbars without wire. Each
circuit breaker assembly will include, as needed, an easily relocated 12
inch mounting plate having required opening for circuit breaker (requiring
no hand power tools) , pilot light (main riser) , push to test button and
ground fault interrupter. Every breaker mounting plate will cover the
breaker with a spring-hinged weatherproof protected cover. The point-of-
use circuit breakers to be mounted horizontally to the respective busbar
assembly. All branch circuit breakers to be sized according to equipment
load and to be clearly labeled to identify volts, phase, amps, and
connection number (per Utility Distribution System equipment schedule) . A
corresponding status light to be located in the main riser door for each
circuit breaker.
Directly below at the bottom of the horizontal raceway receptacle
connection plates to be located which are individually grounded to the
system main frame. Each connection plate to be interchangeable and to be
furnished with a moisture resistant cover and grounding type receptacle
having a specific NEMA polarized configuration.
Field joints at risers and raceways to be provided with quick disconnect
snap plug-ins for easy reconnection of control wiring. Cord/plug sets
with strain relief devices to be furnished for all appliances with
exception of appliances equipped with cord/plug sets as standard
equipment. Appliances requiring more than 50 AMPS to be fitted with
conduit connection furnished by the Utility Distribution System
manufacturer unless otherwise noted.
NOTE: Ground fault interruption for personnel protection (4 to 6
milliamperes) to be provided for single and two pole breakers only.
120/1/60 up to 30 AMPS and 120-208/1/60 up to 60 AMPS.
40
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-31
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS ift
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS KBA #96079
eee
ITEM NO. 37 - ONE (1) UTILITY DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
(a) GENERAL: Provide stainless steel, self-contained Utility Distribution .�o.
System of size and shape as shown on the plans. The system shall be
completely pre-wired and pre-piped to a single connection point for
electrical, gas, cold water and hot water, as required by the food service
equipment specified. All plumbing and electrical services shall include a
minimum of 25% over-capacity for future changes in food equipment.
(b) ISLAND STYLE: The Utility Distribution System to be 18' -10" long by 12"
wide by 3 ' -2" high having 10" peaked cap on the horizontal raceway. The
Utility Distribution System to be supplied with two (2) 61 -5-3/4" high
vertical riser/base combination and to consist of sections not exceeding
16' -0" long with two (2) adjustable tubular supports for each 16 foot
increment. System to be mounted 21-3" above finished floor to the ow
underside of the horizontal raceway.
(c) CONSTRUCTION: The Utility Distribution System to be constructed entirely
of stainless steel type 304 number 4 finish not less than 16 gauge. This .w
includes the vertical riser(s) , peaked top, end caps, horizontal raceway,
hinged panels and removable panels. Unexposed items such as the main
electrical panel and the inside raceway section to also be fabricated from
16 gauge stainless steel. The insulating and supporting materials for the
plumbing and electrical components are the only exception to this.
The main electrical panel, electrical raceway, and all electrical
distribution components to be isolated from the plumbing chamber, and
plumbing raceway in accordance with national electrical codes. All
hardware for utility interconnects for multiple section raceways and
risers to be provided by manufacturer for reassembly by field contractors.
(d) The main riser to enclose the main circuit breaker with shunt trip coil
for fire/fuel shut-off. The main riser to also enclose all switches,
relays, wiring troughs, solenoid valve(s) and terminal blocks necessary
for fire/fuel shut down of the equipment and to be factory wired in
accordance with national electrical codes. The main riser to feed the
hood lights and the horizontal raceway busbars where internal power
connections are distributed through individual plug-on circuit breakers to
the various items to be controlled. The risers access door to be mounted
on a full-length stainless steel hinge and to be secured with stainless
steel truss head machine screws. The emergency kill switch, gas valve
reset button (where applicable) , hood light switch, convenience outlet and
equipment status lights to be clearly engraved on plastic laminated
labeling which is mounted to the front of the access door which shall be 00
recessed to protect all electrical components from damage. Both the main
circuit breaker and the hood light switch are to have a spring-hinged
weatherproof protected cover with gasket. This allows easy access to
reset the main breaker or turn on/off hood lights from the front of the 40
access door. Access to the plumbing inlets to be by way of side lift out
panels and to be secured with stainless steel truss head machine screws.
(e) The secondary riser will be similar to the main riser except there is no
electrical panel, electrical components, and hinged access door. There is
a convenience outlet mounted in a weatherproof box. Access to the
plumbing inlets will be by way of side lift out panels and shall be
secured with stainless steel truss head machine screws. 04
M"
rse
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-30
No NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS RBA #96079
Ab
(m) Ventilator to be standard equipped with eight (8) 48" long double tube 80
watt vaporproof recessed fluorescent type light fixtures. Light fixtures
to be factory pre-wired to a single connection point.
(n) Ventilator to be standard equipped with components for automatic push
button cleaning and shall utilize 140 degree to 180 degree Fahrenheit, hot
water including automatic electric pump detergent injection during the
00 entire cleaning cycle.
(o) Control cabinet shall be furnished with ventilator. Control cabinet to
house electrical and plumbing components for operation of the ventilators.
The cabinet to be constructed of 18 gauge stainless steel, #4 finish, with
welded corners and hinged doors to the plumbing and electrical
compartments. The electrical cabinet to be water tight to protect against
direct hose spray. To include a solid state command center for
controlling operation of the exhaust fan, wash cycle and internal fire
protection system. The control shall include "Fan On", "Wash On", and
"Fire" indicator lights and an audio alarm for fire condition. It shall
also include voltage free contacts for supply and exhaust fans for
interfacing with building management system or other control circuits, and
voltage free contacts for the fire cycle for interconnecting to the
building fire alarm system or monitoring system. Plumbing components to
consist of shut-off valve, pressure/temperature gauge, solenoid valves,
detergent pump, detergent tank and built-in reduced pressure (RP)
principle device backflow preventor. To facilitate required testing of
the "RP" device the bottom of the compartment to be a catch basin and
shall have a 1" drain for connection to the building drain system. All
components to be pre-wired and pre-plumbed for field hook-up by applicable
trades. Control cabinet to be U.L. Listed.
The control to include a 24 hour 7 day solid state LCD programmable time
clock for total automatic operation in addition to manual operation.
*A Programmed operations to include starting and stopping the exhaust fan and
starting the wash cycle automatically at any desired time. The time clock
to include battery backup to hold the clock and the memory for programmed
functions.
(p) Furnish a wet chemical type fire protection system, Ansul R-102-3,
Pyrochemor Rangeguard, including means for automatic and manual
activation, along with means for simultaneous automatic shutting down of
protected cooking equipment upon activation of said system. All exposed
piping to be stainless steel or chrome-plated. Fusible link detection
system to be built into ventilator by ventilator manufacturer.
(q) Gas valve (mechanical or electric) serving cooking equipment furnished and
installed by Plumbing Contractor. Shunt trip breaker and/or contactors
furnished and installed by Electrical Contractor.
(r) Copies of approvals and testing laboratory data, if required, to be
furnished by ventilator manufacturer.
(s) As part of the installation of the ventilators, a Factory Engineer shall
be on site, to coordinate all efforts. A Sales Representative will not be
acceptable.
(t) Ventilator to be Model No. SH-W-PA-I-84, control panel to be Model No. CPE
S/2-1.25-RP-TC both as manufactured by "Caddy Air Systems" or approved
equal.
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-29
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS an
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS RBA #96079
No
(c) Ventilator to be of high velocity, centrifugal grease extracting type with
air inlet parallel to the cooking equipment being ventilated. Ventilator
to contain three full-length horizontal baffles for centrifugal grease so
extraction. Grease extraction efficiency shall be 95% when operated ad
design specifications and be documented as such by an independent testing
laboratory. Grease extraction shall be accomplished without the use of
filters, cartridges or constant running water.
fto
(d) Ventilator to operate at air quantities as shown on plans. Fire damper to
be thermostatically activated. Upon activation at 280° Fahrenheit, the
damper shall close in the direction of airflow. Fire damper control box
to be equipped with a microswitch. Microswitch to be wired to the
magnetic exhaust fan starter. Upon damper closure, microswitch to cause
exhaust fan shut-down. Damper to be manually re-settable via a damper
control arm attached to the damper control box. Fusible link type
activation shall not be employed. +w+.
(e) Activation of the fire damper shall turn off the exhaust fan and turn on
the internal water spray.
No
(f) Ventilator to be constructed of all stainless steel, 18 gauge, type 304,
#4 finish, all welded, grease and water tight. No sheet metal, except as
described above, shall be utilized in ventilator construction. No
ventilator controls shall be more than seven feet (7' -011) from floor ""
level. Width of grease extraction chamber of ventilator shall not exceed
six inches (611) .
(g) Centrifugal grease extraction to be accomplished without the use of
filters, cartridges, moving parts, removable parts, or constant running
water. All baffles to be permanently fixed in place within the grease
extraction chamber so as to be non-removable.
(h) Ventilator shall be equipped with full-length non-gasketed hinged access
doors located on the front of the ventilator and be supplied with hand
latches to lock into the closed position. There shall be no removable
screws and/or panels in order to gain access to the ventilator interior,
for inspection, cleaning service, or any other purpose.
(i) Ventilator shall have a main grease collecting gutter at the bottom of the
grease extraction chamber and shall be sloped to drain. Drain shall have
pre-flush piping extending into drain from the main hot water supply
within the grease extraction chamber.
(j) Ventilator to be listed by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. , "Grease too
Extractors for Exhaust Ducts", U.L. 710; tested by the National Bureau of
Standards, Washington DC; in compliance with all recommendations of the
National Fire Protection Association's standards for kitchen cooking
equipment ventilators; approved by the National Sanitation Foundation; .�
listed by the International Conference of Building Officials; approved by
Building Officials and Code Administrators/ International, Inc. ; and in
accordance with all local codes.
(k) Ventilator to operate as designed, utilizing exhaust air volumes as shown
on plans. Ventilator to be designed to exhaust a minimum of 300 CFM per
lineal foot of hood. Static pressure drop at the hood exhaust duct
collars not to exceed 1.70" W.G.
(1) Ventilator shall be equipped with a supply air plenum, duct collars, 165
degree fusible link type fire dampers and full length perforated face
panels for discharging tempered supply air into room space. Supply air
volume not to exceed 80% of hood exhaust. Discharge velocity of supply
air not to exceed 250 FPM at the discharge point of the ventilator.
w
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-28
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS RBA #96079
ITEM NO. 30 - ONE (1) POT FILL FAUCET
(a) Unit to be comprised of a stainless steel bracket, mounted where shown on
plans, with a 60" minimum stainless steel flexible hose and chrome plated
manual control valve assembly, mounted in location as shown on plans.
00 (b) In addition, unit to be supplied with wall bracket and support bracket.
(c) Hose and faucet to be Model No. B-102 B (gooseneck) as manufactured by "T
& S Brass and Bronze Works" or as approved equal.
10
ITEM NO. 31 - SPARE NO.
ITEM NO. 32 - SPARE NO.
N111
ITEM NO. 33 - FOUR (4) COOK'S TABLES WITH SINKS
(a) Each unit to measure length as shown on plans x 30" wide x 36" high to
working surface.
(b) Top of each unit to be constructed of 14 gauge stainless steel, turned
down 2" on all sides and 1/2" in channel shape with resulting corners
rounded.
(c) Top of each unit to be fitted with one (1) 20" x 20" x 10" deep sink bowl,
in location as shown on plans.
(d) Units to be fitted with reinforcements, gussets, legs, adjustable flanged
feet bolted to floor, flat undershelving and one (1) tool drawer with
cutting board below where space allows.
(e) Entire assembly to be constructed as hereinbefore set forth and as shown
on plans.
ITEM NO. 34 - ONE (1) UTENSIL RACK
(a) Unit to measure approximately 6' -0" long x 24" wide and set 6' -6" above
finished floor, location as shown on plan.
(b) Unit to be constructed entirely of 2" x 1/4" thick stainless steel flat
bar and shall be comprised of circular shaped upper bar and a single lower
bar.
(c) Upper and lower bars to be fitted with sliding stainless steel double
prong pot hooks spaced approximately 6" on center.
(d) Unit to be of all welded construction and to be supported by ceiling slab
OR or structure above by means of 2" x 1/4" flat stainless steel bar hangers
braced against sway. Entire unit shall be constructed in accordance with
details hereinbefore set forth and as shown on plans.
ITEM NO. 35 - SPARE NO.
ITEM NO 36 - ONE (1) VENTILATOR W/ WASH & FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM
(a) Ventilator to be of be size, make and model as specified below and as
portrayed on the drawings.
(b) Ventilator battery to measure 19' -0" long x 17' -0" wide x 2' -6" high,
consisting of four (4) 9' -6" long x 7' -0" wide x 2 ' -6" high sections,
(17' -0" width includes filler section) .
40
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-27
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS an
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS RBA #96079
ITEM NO 27 - ONE (1) TROUGH WITH GRATING
(a) Unit to measure approximately 2 ' -8" long x 21" wide x 6" deep and shall be
constructed of fully welded 14 gauge stainless steel.
(b) All interior corners to be coved; bottom to be pitched to and fitted with
one (1) stainless steel waste cup with removable stainless steel
perforated basket to accommodate 3" waste pipe.
(c) Top perimeter frame shall be shaped to support, in a flush manner, a
removable, sectional grating.
(d) Grating to be constructed of a series of 1" x 3/16" thick stainless steel
cross bars spaced approximately 1" O.C. Bars to be welded to three (3)
longitudinal 1/2" diameter stainless steel rods. Gratings shall be
furnished in sections not more than 1' -0" long.
(e) Trough and gratings to be anti-splash Model No. ASFT as manufactured by
"IMC Teddy" or approved equal.
ITEM NO 28 - ONE (1) 60 QUART MIXING MACHINE
(a) Mixer to be furnished in standard finish and to be provided with the
following attachments:
(1) No. 12 hub.
(2) 60 and 30 quart stainless steel bowls.
(3) 60 and 30 quart "B" flat beaters.
(4) 60 and 30 quart "D" wire loop whips.
(5) 60 and 30 quart "C" wing whips.
(6) 60 and 30 quart bowl dollies.
(b) Unit to have a 2 HP motor operable at 480V-3 Phase.
(c) Unit to be fitted with front mounted controls for handicap accessibility.
(d) Unit to be Model No. H-600 as manufactured by "Hobart" or approved equal.
ITEM NO 29 - ONE (1) MIXER PARTS RACK
(a) Rack to be constructed of 2" x 1/4" stainless steel band measuring
approximately 24" in diameter. Circular rack to be joined at center hub
by means of 2" x 1/4" stainless steel band spokes.
(b) Hubs at center to be comprised of stainless steel gusset, slip fit over a
1-5/8" O.D. stainless steel tubular hanger.
(c) Hangers to be secured to structure or slab above. At finished ceiling
surface, a stainless steel escutcheon plate to be furnished.
(d) Fitted to outer surface of circular rack, there shall be double stainless
steel hooks set approximately 6" O.C. , welded in place. Entire unit shall 04
be constructed in accordance with details hereinbefore set forth and as
shown on plans.
w
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-26
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS RBA #96079
�s1
(c) Legs to be constructed of stainless steel tubing. Legs to include slides
for three (3) 18" x 26" sheet pans.
(d) Unit to have heavy duty 5" diameter, swivel casters all with brakes.
(e) In addition, unit to be supplied with circular bumpers, Model No. ACC-38.
(f) Unit to be Model No. T-243-A as manufactured by "Caddy" or approved equal.
ITEM NO. 24 - ONE (1) SLICING MACHINE
(a) Unit to be standard finish, operable at two (2) speeds and two (2)
strokes.
(b) Slicer to be automatic type, complete with fence, skewer and vegetable
chute attachments.
(c) Unit to be Model No. 1712E as manufactured by "Hobart" or approved equal.
ITEM NO. 25 - TWO (2) UTILITY RACKS (MOBILE)
(a) Each unit to measure approximately 25-3/8" wide x 26-11/16" deep x 69-3/4"
high, including 5" diameter heavy duty swivel casters, all with brakes.
(b) Units to be constructed of aluminum, uprights to be 2" x 1" x .125" thick
extruded aluminum channels. Top support channels to be constructed of 2
3/8" x 1" x .188" channels. Entire unit to be heli-arc welded.
(c) Tray slides to measure 1-1/2" x 6" wide and to be formed from .125" thick
aluminum. Top, middle and bottom tray slides to be heli-arc welded to
I* uprights. The remaining slides to be spaced at 4-3/4" and adjustable at
1-1/2" increment.
(d) In addition, unit to be provided with perimeter bumpers.
(e) Units to be Model No. 207-UA-13 as manufactured by "Gres-Cor" or approved
equal.
ITEM NO. 26 - THREE (3) WORK TABLES WITH DRAWERS & OVERSHELF
(a) Each unit to measure length as shown on plans x 30" wide x 36" high to
working surface.
(b) To of unit to be constructed of 14
Top gauge stainless steel having ends
turned down 2" and 1/2" in channel shape with resulting corners rounded.
(c) In addition, units to be furnished with reinforcements, gussets, legs,
adjustable bullet feet, flat undershelving, and one (1) tool drawer with
cutting board below.
(d) Two (2) units to have above table top and for full length of same, a
single overshelf shall be furnished, constructed and mounted as shown on
drawings.
(e) Unit to be constructed as herein set forth and as shown on drawings.
(f) One (1) unit to be furnished with 10" high backsplash constructed as
hereinbefore specified and shown on drawings. Unit to be coordinated to
match Item No. 20 for width of backsplash.
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-25
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS RBA #96079
(e) In addition, each unit to be furnished with reinforcements, gussets, legs,
adjustable flanged feet bolted to floor, and crossrails.
(f) Units to be constructed as herein set forth and as shown on drawings.
ITEM NO. 21 - TWO (2) WASTE DISPOSERS
(a) Each unit shall be equipped with heavy aluminum grind and discharge "
housings. Motor for each unit shall have permanently lubricated ball
bearings and be 1-1/2 HP. Units to have continuous duty rating and
inherent overload protection in motor.
(b) Each disposer fastens to a 7" I.D. throat opening. A vinyl isolating ring
to be provided to eliminate metal-to-metal contact at mounting.
(c) Disposers to have stationery shredder ring of ni-hard, 2-1/2" high #4 40
machine ground primary action breaker bars. Unit to have breaker blade,
mounted at center. Two hardened stainless steel cutter blocks to be
replaceable and 9" diameter flywheel to also be furnished with unit.
(d) A motor shaft seal to provide water seal protection of unit shall be
provided. Drain connector to be removable outlet flange tapped for 2"
pipe connection.
(e) Provided with each unit shall be Group D accessories, which includes a
vinyl silver-saver splash guard ring, 7" I.D. stainless steel weld-in
adapter for sink, vacuum breaker, and fixed direction water inlet for
sink. cl
(f) Also provided with each unit shall be Electrical Control Group 3, which
shall include magnetic contactors, push button start/stop, automatic
reversing, low water pressure cut-off, time delay for water after shut
off, line disconnect, solenoid valve and NEMA 12 enclosure. Unit to be
operable at 208V-3 Phase.
(g) Each unit shall be furnished in standard finish and to be Model No.
FD2-150-D-3 operable at 280V/60/3 Phase as manufactured by "Hobart" or
approved equal.
ITEM NO. 22 - ONE (1) FOOD CUTTER
(a) Unit to be a 14" cutter with stainless steel bowl and aluminum knife
guard.
(b) Cutter to be furnished with No. 12 attachment hub with french fry cutter "
and 9" vegetable slicer.
(c) Unit to be furnished with security key operated locking device.
(d) Unit to be powered at 208V/1 Phase, 1 HP with 3 ' -0" cord and plug.
(e) Unit to be Model No. 84145 as manufactured by "Hobart" or approved equal.
ITEM NO. 23 - ONE (1) SLICER STAND (MOBILE)
(a) Unit to measure approximately 26" long x 30" deep x 30" high.
ow
(b) Top to be constructed of 18 gauge stainless steel turned down 2" on all
sides and 1/2" in channel shape. Top to be reinforced with 12 gauge
stainless steel channels.
40
M"
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-24
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS RBA #96079
(e) Units to be Model No. 2448GX or 2436GX as manufactured by "Intermetro
Industries Corporation" or approved equal.
ITEM NO. 14 - SIX (6) REFRIGERATOR FLOOR RACKS (MOBILE)
(a) Units to be the same as hereinbefore specified for Item No. 4.
ITEM NO. 15 - SPARE NO.
ITEM NO. 16 - SPARE NO.
M*
ITEM NO. 17 - TWELVE (12) STOREROOM SHELVING SECTIONS (MOBILE)
(a) Units to be the same as hereinbefore specified for Item No. 13.
ITEM NO. 18 - FOUR (4) STOREROOM FLOOR RACKS (MOBILE)
(a) Units to be the same as hereinbefore specified for Item No. 4.
ITEM NO. 19 - THREE (3) HAND SINKS
(a) Each unit shall measure approximately 18" long x 20" deep x 34" high to
working surface and shall be wall mounted in location as shown on plans.
(b) Top to be constructed of 16 gauge stainless steel with backsplash and non
drip marine edges. Integral coved corner sink bowl creased toward 1-1/2"
waste outlet. Units to have front apron with integral brackets which
encloses the sink bowl on three (3) sides. Apron to be fabricated of 14
gauge stainless steel with rear flange for securely fastening unit to
wall. In addition, a 2" strip shall be furnished for mounting top of
backsplash to wall.
(c) Each unit shall be furnished with stainless steel towel dispenser secured
to backsplash and to accommodate 300 9-1/2" x 9-1/2" paper towels, a
stainless steel liquid soap dispenser mounted to top with one pint
capacity globe below, and rigid gooseneck faucet with wrist action
handles.
(d) Hand sinks to be Model No. WS as manufactured by "IMC Teddy" or approved
equal.
ITEM NO. 20 - TWO (2) PREPARATION TABLES WITH SINKS
(a) Each unit to measure length as shown on plans x 30" wide x 36" high to
working surface.
(b) Top of each unit to be constructed of 14 gauge stainless steel having 1/2"
high "V" edge's at front and ends turned down 2" and 1/2" in channel shape
with resulting corners rounded. Rear of each unit to be turned up 1011,
returned 2" and 1/2" in channel shape with ends welded closed.
(c) One (1) unit to be furnished with two (2) sink compartments measuring 24"
x 24" x 14" deep. Unit to be provided with one (1) faucet assembly as
manufactured by T & S Brass & Bronze Works. Backsplash to run entire
length of unit.
(d) One (1) unit to be furnished with two (2) sink compartments measuring 24"
x 24" x 6" deep. Unit to be provided with one (1) faucet assembly with
wrist blades. Unit to meet A.D.A. requirements. Crossrails to be located
at sides and rear only. Backsplash shall measure lengths of sink section
only. Unit to be set in location as shown on plans.
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-23
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS No
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS RBA #96079
Am
(g) TESTING: After installation and before charging, evacuate all piping
systems to a vacuum, at ASHRA Standards and hold 24 hours. After
evacuation, charge system with nitrogen and maintain pressure of 150%
working pressure for 6 hours. Cap off, install pressure gauge and hold `"
for 24 hours minimum. Re-evacuate, hold for 6 hours, charge and make
electronic detector test on all joints. Each test to be verified in
writing by the Kitchen Equipment Contractor.
(h) WORK BY OTHERS: Final wiring of connections, conduit and/or pull boxes,
provided under applicable electrical and plumbing contracts.
(i) WARRANTY AND SERVICE: Included herein to be the compressor manufacturer's *
full five (5) year extended warranty on all refrigeration equipment
components. Further included to be a full one (1) year warranty for all
parts and ninety (90) days labor on the entire refrigeration package from
the day of final acceptance of the installation as previously specified.
Freon and driers are considered as parts. All defective or replaced parts
(other than freon) must be returned to the factory for replacement.
Nuisance calls such as switch's being shut off, lack of maintenance or
missetting of temperature controls at evaporators, are not covered under +*
labor warranty.
(j) Refrigeration package to be Model No. WBLI-AC-H-3-0-3 as manufactured by
"Omni-Temp, or approved equal. Refrigeration package to house
refrigeration components as follows;
REFRIGERATION SCHEDULE
COMP'R SUC'N REFRIG. SUC. FIX.
FIX MODEL PWR LO'D COL TEMP TEMP
FIXTURE MBTU CAPACITY RLA LRA PH LINE MODE F. F.
Walk-In 11.1 LAHA-032E-TAC 12.8 112.0 208 R404
Freezer 12.5 3 ELC 122 Verify -20 -10
Walk-In 9.8 KAGA-0150-TAC 5.6 35.5 208 With R-404
Refrigerator +25 +35
10.6 3 Job RLC 107
Walk-In 9.8 KAGA-0150-TAC 5.6 35.5 208 R-404
Refrigerator 10.6 3 Site RLC 107 +25 +35 Aw
Condenser F3.h 208 Req'ts
Fans
Rack Model No: WBLI-AC-H-3-0-3 .w
Rack Size: 72" long x 40" wide x 34" high
Weight: 920 lbs.
Voltage: 208V/3 Phase/60 cycle
ITEM NO. 13 - FIFTEEN (15) REFRIGERATOR SHELVING SECTIONS (MOBILE)
(a) Units to measure 48" long and 36" long x 24" wide x 72" high overall.
(b) Units shall be fitted with four (4) polymer shelves with incased steel
channel beams. Units to have minimum weight load of 800 pounds.
(c) Units also to be provided with four (4) 74" high injection molded polyster
thermoplastic resin posts with glass reinforcement, and four (4) casters,
all with brakes.
(d) Units to be open style mat made of mineral reinforced polypropylene.
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-22
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS KBA #96079
(b) AIR COOLED SYSTEM: Air flow through the rack will pass 100% of the
condenser air over all the compressors. No partial air flow or
evaporative cooled air systems to be ACCEPTED. Condenser to be a master
circuited type with 3/8" rifled tubes and lanced finned type, maximum four
(4) row thick core. All copper finned condensers for installation near
ocean. A cold weather package will have the following components:
Temperature initiated fan cycling and fan speed controller, crankcase
heaters and head master valves on each compressor. Heated cabinet for
receivers used if ambient temperature is extreme.
wt (c) COMPRESSORS: All compressors, both medium and low temperature, will
utilize R-404 as the primary refrigerant. R-22 and R-502 refrigerant
compressors will not be used. Compressors and refrigeration piping will
be installed in such. a manner as to eliminate noise and vibration
SAM eliminators in refrigeration lines, as needed. Each compressor to have a
- high-low automatic reset pressure control. All compressors over 5 HP to
have an oil failure pressure control. Each compressor to have all
necessary breakers, wiring and controls for proper operation. Each
W compressor to have a liquid line drier and sight glass properly sized for
the compressor. Time clocks mounted and pre-wired at rack system unless
noted on manufacturers shop drawings. Capillary tubes on all controls to
be tightly wrapped and protected with silicone in a manner to eliminate
excessive vibration and contact with other metals.
(d) OIL SEPARATORS: Oil separators used on all low temperature compressors
above 3 HP and where factory recommends their usage. Where oil separators
are used, the return lines are connected to the top of the crankcase above
the oil level. All oil return lines provided with shut-off of the
packless stem type.
(e) EVAPORATORS: Units to be direct expansion type of such size and design as
to effect required temperatures, humidity and to suit the application
intended. Furnished and installed in accordance with the specifications.
Evaporators used will be all "Underwriters Laboratory Listed" . Defrosting
of all coils below 34 shall be electric defrost type. Supplied from
factory with an expansion valve, solenoid valve and thermostat pre-wired
and pre-piped under nitrogen pressure to meet the refrigerant listed on
the schedule. All base case coils must be "U.L. Listed" with expansion
valve, solenoid valve and thermostat pre-piped and pre-wired. If not pre
wired by the factory, the supplying contractor will be back charged for
all field costs.
IN (f) PIPING INSULATION: All field piping installed as per ASHRA Standards and
the sizing of the piping shall meet proper velocities as per ASHRA
Standards. Insulation will be foam type 25/50 smoke and fire type.
Medium temperature will use minimum 1/2" thick wall and low temperature
will use minimum 3/4" thick wall. All field piping installed with plastic
bushing where ever steel to copper tubing comes together on any type of
hangars.
Include all labor, material, equipment, tools, refrigerant, oil and other
required accessories for the complete installation of the systems as shown
and specified. Interconnection of all accessories accomplished for ease
of servicing. Particular attention given to oil return, refrigerant
pressure drops and neatness. Placement of all exposed pipes approved
prior to installation with General Contractor. Spacing of piping in
accordance with ASHRA Standards and not exceeding 8'-011 . Furnish
manufacturer's dimensional and schematic drawings, piping and wiring
diagrams. After installation, furnish "as built" diagram of refrigeration
piping systems. This entire assembly must be installed by a Licensed
Refrigeration Contractor, pre-approved by factory, as a sub-contract to
this section of work.
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-21
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS KBA #96079
The foam insulation to be tested in accordance with ASTM Standard C-177 to
evaluate the insulation performance of the material.
Certification of the above performance specification must be provided by
the indicated independent testing laboratory or by any other independent
agency recognized by the major building code agencies: UBC, BOCA or the
SBBC.
(s) HOUSEKEEPING AND SAFETY PROCEDURE: Each door panel to have a metal
housekeeping and safety release procedure placard and to be attached to
the metal skin of the door leaf. This placard must be in a highly visible
location.
(t) INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS: A complete set of instructions 04
covering both the maintenance and the installation of the unit shall be
provided.
(u) As a part of this unit, there shall be furnished one (1) refrigeration .r
rack herein specified for Item No. 12.
(v) Unit to be manufactured by "W.A. Brown & Sons, Inc. ", Salisbury, North
Carolina, or approved equal.
ITEM NO. 11 - THREE (3) DRAIN TROUGHS WITH GRATINGS
(a) Troughs to be located outside the Walk-in Refrigerators and Freezer, Item ,
No. 's 8, 9 and 10, set into floor depression in location as shown on plans.
(b) Units to measure 36" long x 6" wide x 4" deep, and shall be constructed of
fully welded 14 gauge stainless steel. All interior corners of trough to ,
be coved. Bottoms to be pitched to and fitted with one (1) waste cup with
removable stainless steel perforated basket to accommodate a 3" waste pipe
connected by Plumbing Contractor.
(c) Top perimeter of troughs shall be shaped to support, in a flush manner, a
removable stainless steel subway grating.
(d) Troughs to be set into place by the Kitchen equipment Contractor
approximately 3" clear of the walk-in box structure without interfering
with any part of structure or the operation of the walk-in doors.
(e) Troughs to be Model No. FWR-36 as manufactured by "IMC Teddy" or approved
equal as manufactured by "Servolift/Eastern" or "Hudson".
ITEM NO. 12 - ONE (1) COMPRESSOR RACK
(a) RACK SYSTEM: The system to be a "U.L. Listed" package refrigeration
system for outdoor installation. Unit to be pre-wired and pre-piped for
single point connection. All electrical and refrigeration tubing must
come up inside the system directly, no external roof penetrations shall be
permitted. System must utilize full air flow across compressors. All
removable doors to have inset stainless steel or die stamped handles.
Unit to have a flush mounted internal electrical panel. Rack to be
constructed of 16 gauge (or heavier) formed sheet metal parts, no angle
iron or channel iron frames shall be used. Housing to be 450 baked enamel we
stucco type (non-smooth finish) . Housing to be constructed to prevent any
vibration noises.
ws
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-20
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, 14ASSACHUSETTS KBA #96079
(k) ALARMS: All walk-ins to have "recessed" Model TAI-200 series Temperature
Alarms with adjustable, tamper-resistant high/low set point limits,
automatic alarm reset, voltage alarm output and both audible and visual
alarms. Alarms to be wired to locations as directed by the Architect.
The Kitchen Equipment Contractor shall verify these locations before
proceeding with shop drawings.
(1) N.S.F. APPROVAL: Construction to be of a design approved by the National
Sanitation Foundation and shall carry the N.S.F. Label of Approval mounted
on each door section.
(m) U.L. ELECTRIC APPROVAL: All door sections to be wired electrically in
such a manner and design so as to be approved by Underwriters Laboratories
and each door section shall carry the U.L. Listing Mark.
(n) U.L. 25 FLAME SPREAD CLASSIFIED**: Each individual panel to have a flame
spread rating of 25 or less, and have a smoke development of 400 or less.
Each section to have affixed to it a label stating the above ratings.
(Class 1 composite panel. ) Approval of core rated material only, does not
constitute a finished product and therefore does not satisfy the
requirements of the various state and local building codes.
** This rating is not intended to reflect hazards presented by this or any
other material under actual fire conditions. (See U.L. Classified
Buildings Materials Index. )
(o) TOXICITY: All individual panels shall meet or exceed New York City and
New York State Toxicity requirements as established by their standards and
carry New York City MEA Number as required.
(p) TEN (10) YEAR PANEL WARRANTY: The manufacturer shall warrant that all
sections to be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal
use and service and to be obligated to repair or replace F.O.B. Salisbury,
North Carolina, any section which proves to be defective within the period
of ten years from the date of original shipment. This warranty shall not
include labor or freight.
(q) CEILING PANEL SUPPORT SYSTEMS: When the dimensions of an insulated room
are such that a single span top panel is not applicable, it must be
supported using an interior or exterior beam or must be supported by all
thread rods (not furnished by manufacturer) attached to the building
superstructure. Regardless of which method is used, all beams and "C"
�s channels shall be aluminum. Wood and steel structures which cause added
maintenance requirements shall not be acceptable.
(r) OTHER PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS: The urethane foam core of the panels to
be certified by Underwriters Laboratories as having flame spread of 25 or
lower and smoke generation of 450 or lower when tested in accordance with
U.L. standard 723 (ASTM Standard E-84) .
The foam core of the panels to be tested in accordance with ASTM Standard
d-1929 to determine the self-ignition temperature.
These panels to be listed by Factory Mutual as having been tested in
accordance with the Factory Mutual Full Scale Corner Test. Procedure
4880.
Panels to be tested in accordance with ASTM Standards E-72, E-455 and E
564 for determination of the structural characteristics of the panel
R system.
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-19
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS RBA #96079
Each door leaf shall consist of a heavy 4" wide, .250" thick, thermally
fused and polished PVC perimeter into which the interior and exterior
metal skins are secured and shall create a thermal break between metal I"
facings. In addition, the PVC frame shall include a "RIBBED" channel
around the inside perimeter into which the magnetic gasket shall mate and
be firmly held. Each door leaf must also include interior 14 gauge
stainless steel "C" channels across the entire face of the door at hinge
and latch stress points. Two (2) additional "C" channels are to be
"foamed-in-place" behind the interior face to accept protector plates when
required and to increase strength and rigidity. Interior steel plates for
securing additional hardware (i.e. , foot treadles, door closers, etc. )
shall be standard part of the door construction. Securing hardware into
wood blocks will not be accepted.
All doors and door sections to have diamond plate protection 36" high on
both interior and exterior.
The door sections to have a frame which is made of a pultruded FRP
(Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic) material that provides both strength and
durability. This FRP frame shall have a channel molded into it which will
accept the anti-sweat heater and allow easy replacement of the heater.
Each door shall have a single auto-condensate heater and to be concealed
behind the stainless steel edge of the door jamb on all sides to prevent
condensation and frost formation. This heater to be easily accessible for
replacement or service. No heater shall be required around the perimeter
of the door leaf.
At each door section no threshold will be required.
Electrical Contractor to furnish and install at freezer door section,
electric floor heat conduit.
(h) DOOR HARDWARE: The door hinges to be cam-lift design and to be heavy duty
chrome plated with steel pins and nylon bushings. Hinges to have a
minimum 9" strap and all doors to have three (3) hinges.
The door latch to be constructed of similar materials and finish as the
door hinge. The latch to be designed to open the door easily. The inside
safety release features to comply with OSHA standards. All doors to have *P
deadbolt locks and panic alarms. All doors to be lockable and "keyed
alike" .
(i) GASKETS FOR WALK-IN DOORS: A vinyl gasket with a magnetic core of 00
triangular type construction shall mate with the top edge and along both
sides of the door. The magnetic force of the gasket shall be ample enough
to keep the door in a closed position and form a tight seal. The bottom
edge of the door shall contain a flexible double wiper gasket of black, go
FDA approved, 50 urometer, EPDM extrusion.
(j) FLUORESCENT LIGHTS: Each walk-in section to be provided with fluorescent
light fixtures with gasketed enclosures to be totally dust and moisture go
resistant. Enclosures to be comprised of a fiberglass upper body and an
acrylic crepe pattern diffuser. The diffuser to be held in place by
celcon plastic retaining latches to insure a tight seal. Fixtures to be
U.L. Listed for wet and damp locations. Each walk-in section to have 4 '
0" long double tube fixtures of quantity as shown on plans. All fixtures
to be surface mounted to ceilings of walk-ins.
r
wm
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-18
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS KBA #96079
(d) PANEL LOCKING DEVICES: Cam-action locking devices to be accurately and
precisely positioned in the panels to assure a positive joint. Where wall
panels are joined together, there shall be a minimum of three (3) locking
devices. These locking devices shall consist of a cam-action rotating
locking arm in the tongue edge. This locking arm shall engage a steel rod
which is firmly anchored in the groove edge. The action will draw all
tongue and groove joints firmly and tightly together. Each section of the
locking device shall have sufficient surface to assure permanent and rigid
anchoring. The locking device to be bonded in the urethane foam without
need of additional anchorage arrangements. Both the locking arm and the
steel rod to be housed in steel pockets and "foamed-in-place" . The steel
pockets to have a flange on each side to give additional rigidity.
All locking of sections to be performed from the interior by means of a
w hex wrench which is furnished with unit. The wrench holes to be recessed
and covered with a stainless steel plug buttons. The plug buttons to be
flush with the metal skin of the panel. Surface mounted steel or plastic
buttons will not be accepted.
'o'
(e) INSULATION: Insulation to be rigid urethane "foamed-in-place" . The
thermal conductivity factor (K) shall not exceed 0.118 BTU per hour, per
square foot, per degree Fahrenheit, per inch. Overall, coefficient of
heat transfer (U-factor) shall not be more than .029 for 4" walls. The
R-Factor shall have a value of 34. WITH WRITTEN CERTIFICATION FROM
MANUFACTURER CONFIRMING SAME LESSER R-VALUES ARE UNACCEPTABLE.
Insulation to have 97% closed cell structure and average in-place density
of 2.3 lbs. per cubic foot.
The insulation must retain dimensional stability in an operating
temperature of -40 degrees Fahrenheit (-40° C) to 250 degrees Fahrenheit
to dry heat (121.2° C) .
(f) FLOOR INSULATION: Install 4" slab urethane in all walk-in units, one ply
of asphalt felt base paper or one ply of 6 mil thickness polyethylene
sheets shall be placed under insulation and extended up interior sides.
All joints shall be sealed. Setting bed and finished floor by General
Contractor.
(g) WALK-IN DOORS: Manufacturer's standard door to be flush mounted. Both
door section and door leaf to be of similar construction as wall panels.
All doors to be 36" wide x 78" high. All doors shall be cut as required
by floor construction.
Door to have a heavy duty 14 gauge stainless steel "C" channel of "ADDISON
POWER H BRACE" style construction to be "foamed-in-place" around the
entire door opening to secure hardware and prevent racking and warping.
This steel structure, when used in conjunction with the door jamb, form a
PP rigid frame that eliminates thermal transfer from the exterior to the
interior of the panel thus reducing the requirement for additional anti
condensate heaters.
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-17
M 11
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS AN
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS KBA #96079
wA
(1) Casters: Shall be 6" diameter, extra heavy duty, plate type casters, two
(2) rigid, two (2) swivel, securely bolted to integrally welded, #12 gauge
stainless steel box type frame members beneath cart. Casters shall have
polyurethane tires and shall have "zerk" type grease fittings on both 40
swivel and axle.
(m) Carts shall be Model No. 500-1MOD as manufactured by "Servolift Eastern"
or approved equal. d"
ITEM NO. 8 - ONE (1) WALK-IN FREEZER
ITEM NO. 9 - ONE (1) WALK-IN REFRIGERATOR se
ITEM NO. 10 - ONE (1) WALK-IN REFRIGERATOR
(a) GENERAL: Walk-ins to be constructed with modular panels to facilitate ow
assembly. The prefabricated, sectionally constructed panels to be metal
clad. Units to be size and shape as shown on plans x 81 -5-1/2" high
overall.
(b) PREFABRICATED PANEL CONSTRUCTION: The panels to consist of interior and r
exterior metal skins precisely formed with steel dies and roll-form
equipment and thoroughly checked with gauges for uniformity and accuracy.
The insulation to be "foamed-in-place" rigid urethane and when completely
heat cured, shall bind to the metal skins and form a rigid four (4) inch
thick insulated panel. The urethane insulation must also adhere to the
cam-action locking devices. All panels to have 100% "foamed-in-place"
urethane insulation and have no internal wood, metal or high density
urethane structural membranes. To insure that all joints are air tight
and vapor proof, all panel edges must have a "foamed-in-place" double
tongue and groove edge on all sides which are of the same density as the
rest of the panel. A flexible vinyl gasket which is also "foamed-in
place" shall extend around the interior and exterior perimeter of each
male edge. This gasket shall not be glued or stapled. Gaskets to be
resistant to damage from oil, grease, water, detergents and sunlight, and
must be NSF approved and to be flame retardant.
The use of Refrigerant R-12 as a blowing agent is specifically prohibited
ALL PANELS TO BE TOTALLY CFC FREE AND WRITTEN CERTIFICATION FROM WALK-IN
MANUFACTURER TO BE PROVIDED CONFIRMING SAME.
Wall panels to be made in 11-1/211, 23" and 46" widths.
Door panels to be in either 4611, 57-1/2" or 69" wide panel.
Corner panels to measure either 11-1/2" x 11-1/211, 11-1/2" x 23-1/2", or
23-1/2" x 23-1/211 . The corners to be a precise 90 degree angle to assure
maximum strength and perfect alignment.
Walk-in's to be supplied with an extruded PVC insulated floor screed. The
screed shall match the double tongue and groove design of the wall panels
and must cam lock securely. Corners of screed to be mitered and thermally
fused and polished. Screeds to be anchored to the building floor without
the use of exposed fasteners. �w
All panels must be interchangeable for fast and easy installation.
(c) FINISH:
(1) Complete exterior and interior to be .040 Stucco Aluminum.
(2) Diamond plate panels to be furnished for all exposed exterior,
approximately 36" high.
- •fly
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-16
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS KBA #96079
ITEM NO. 5 - SPARE NO.
ITEM NO. 6 - SPARE NO.
ITEM NO. 7 - TWO (2) CATERING CARTS (MOBILE)
(a) Each unit to measure approximately 44" long x 29" deep x 38" high.
(b) Units shall be stainless steel, mobile catering carts, constructed as
follows;
e (c) Interior and exterior of each cart shall be of all stainless steel
construction, with front and sides covered in a plastic laminate finish as
chosen by Owner.
(d) Tops shall be of #14 gauge stainless steel, turned down 2" on all sides,
with corners welded ground and polished. Tops shall be surmounted on
three (3) sides (front and ends) with a 2" high stainless steel rail,
constructed of 3/8" diameter stainless steel rod with 3/8" stainless steel
rod uprights at each corner and one (1) intermediate upright on ends, two
(2) intermediate uprights on front. Rails shall be securely welded to the
top of each unit.
(e) Body of each unit shall consist of the following specific areas:
(f) Push Handle: a 1" diameter, stainless steel tubular push handle shall be
provided in a fully welded recessed stainless steel compartment, measuring
wow, approximately 201, wide x 6" high x 3" deep.
(g) Open Storage Compartment: Provide a utility storage area, fully
constructed of stainless steel, and measuring approximately 12" wide x 6"
high x 12" deep.
(h) Drawer: Provide a locking drawer, all stainless steel construction,
approximately 18" x 18" x 6" high, on full suspension, stainless steel rod
slides. Drawer shall be provided with a keyed lock.
(i) Ambient Compartment: Provide an ambient compartment, with #18 gauge
stainless steel interior, with removable, adjustable #14 gauge stainless
steel angle slides. Slides to measure 1-1/2" x 1-1/211, and shall be
adjustable on 3" centers, and constructed to accommodate 18" x 26" sheet
pans. Compartment is to be provided with an infitting, double pan,
insulated stainless steel door, with #12 gauge stainless steel leaf hinges
and spring loaded stainless steel paddle type latch.
(j) Insulated Compartment: Provide a polyurethane insulated storage
compartment for milk crates, with full stainless steel interior. Provide
a set of #14 gauge stainless steel angle slides mounted within 3" of the
top of the compartment, to accommodate one (1) 13" x 18" x 1-1/2" thick
eutectic plate. Compartment shall be sized to accommodate two (2) 13" x
13" x 13" milk crates. Bottom of compartment shall be pitched to a center
drain. Drain to be provided with a valve with a "remote" handle, to
facilitate operating the drain for cleaning. Compartment to be provided
with an infitting, double pan, insulated stainless steel door, with #12
gauge stainless steel leaf hinges and spring loaded stainless steel paddle
type latch.
(k) Bumper: Entire unit to be encircled by a 111, non-marking vinyl wrap
around bumper.
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-15
W
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS RBA #96079
w
PART 2 - SCHEDULE OF EQUIPMENT
*w
2.01 MAIN KITCHEN / SERVERY
ITEM NO. 1 - ONE (1) CLOTHES WASHER & DRYER (N.I.K.E.C.)
(a) Unit is not in Kitchen Equipment Contract.
ITEM NO. 2 - ONE (1) CAN WASHER & JANITOR'S SINK
(a) Unit to measure approximately 46" long x 28" wide x 31" high and shall be
comprised of two (2) sink compartments, spray assembly faucet, stainless
steel flexible hose with spray head and brush.
(b) Unit to be constructed of 16 gauge stainless steel having interior and
exterior corners rounded.
(c) Spray wash assembly to be activated by double foot pedal valves.
(d) Unit to be mounted on stainless steel tubular legs with adjustable
stainless steel bullet feet.
ww
(e) Unit to be Model No. DL-20-1 as manufactured by "IMC Teddy" or approved
equal.
ITEM NO. 3 - ONE (1) HOSE REEL ASSEMBLY '
(a) Unit to measure approximately 9" wide x 15-5/8" deep x 14-1/4" high
overall and shall be wall mounted where shown on plans.
eye
(b) Unit to have a 35' -0" long 3/4" diameter hose and shall withstand
temperatures up to 212 degrees Fahrenheit and shall retract into housing
on a spring loaded reel.
ss
(c) Unit to be constructed of carbon steel and to have an easy to clean chrome
exterior housing.
(d) Assembly to be furnished with chrome plated spray valve and shall be
equipped with a temperature control valve and shut-off valve. Unit shall
also be furnished with a pressure type vacuum breaker.
(e) Unit to be Model No. B1433 as manufactured by "T & S Brass and Bronze �w
Works" or approved equal.
ITEM NO. 4 - TWO (2) FLOOR RACKS (MOBILE)
(a) Units to measure 48" long x 24" wide x 12" high overall.
(b) Units shall be fitted with one (1) polymer shelf with incased steel
channel beams. Units to have minimum weight load of 1300 pounds.
(c) Units also to be provided with four (4) 12" high pultrusions posts made of
continuous glass fibers and thermoset resin composite. Exterior surfaces
to be hi-impact thermoplastic resin. Units also to have four (4) casters, ,
all with brakes.
(d) Units to be open style mat made of mineral reinforced polypropylene.
,Aw
("e) Units to be Model No. HP55GX as manufactured by "Intermetro Industries
Corporation" or approved equal.
FOOD SERVICE EQUIP14ENT 11400-14
sw
a
Al NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS KBA #96079
1.15 CLEANING, RESTORING FINISHES
A. After completion of installation and completion of other major work in
food service areas, remove protective coverings, if any, and clean food
service equipment internally and externally. Restore exposed and semi-
exposed finishes to remove abrasions and other damages; polish exposed
metal surfaces, and touch up painted surfaces. Replace work which
cannot be successfully restored.
1.16 TESTING, START-UP AND INSTRUCTIONS
PW A. General: Delay the start-up of food service equipment until service
lines have been tested, balanced and adjusted for pressure, voltage and
similar considerations and until water and steam lines have been
cleaned and treated for sanitation. _
B. Test each item of operational equipment to demonstrate that it is
operating properly and that controls and safety devices are
functioning. Repair or replace equipment which is found to be
defective in its operation including units which are below capacity or
operating with excessive noise or vibration.
C. Perform tests of all equipment in the presence of the authorized
representative of the Architect and/or Owner. All defects disclosed by
the tests shall be eliminated to the approval of the Architect for
approval showing the schedule of testing, date and results.
w D. Provide necessary technicians, materials and equipment required to
conduct these tests. A statement shall be furnished to the Architect
for approval showing the schedule of testing, date and results.
E. Provision shall be made for properly trained personnel to demonstrate
on to the Owner's operators the operation of all equipment including
refrigeration systems. All demonstrations shall be completed within
three (3) consecutive working days.
F. Final Cleaning: After testing and start-up, clean and sanitize the
food service equipment and leave in a condition ready for use in food
service.
G. Equipment described herein shall be provided with service for a period
of one year after final acceptance of the building. This service shall
include adjustment of all equipment. It shall also include repair or
replacement of electrical and mechanical parts of the equipment
whenever this is required during maintenance periods, and only genuine
standard parts produced by the manufacturer of the equipment shall be
used. This warranty shall include all parts and labor for this one
year period. Renewals and repairs, as necessary, due to ordinary wear
and tear shall be performed by competent personnel under the
manufacturer's supervision. Emergency service shall be available at
all times.
P-0 H. Kitchen Equipment Contractor to verify with the Owner, the delivery and
condition of all accessories for each item to which they apply.
I. Kitchen Equipment Contractor to verify the delivery of all Owner's
operating manuals and warranties.
J. Kitchen Equipment Contractor to provide a listing of names, addresses,
and telephone numbers of factory authorized service agents for all
items of equipment. In addition, a clear and concise statement must
accompany this list as to proper procedure in requesting warranty work
to be performed.
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-13
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS w
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS KBA #96079
an
1.13 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION
A. Rough-In Work: The Installer of food service equipment must examine am
the rough-in mechanical and electrical services by others, and the
installation of floors, walls, columns and ceilings by others, and the
conditions under which the work is to be done: and must verify the
dimensions of the services before fabricating the work. Notify the
General Contractor in writing of unsatisfactory locations and
dimensions of other work, and of unsatisfactory conditions for the
proper installation of food service equipment. Do not proceed with the w
fabrication and installation until unsatisfactory dimensions and
conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Architect.
1.14 INSTALLATION
■w
A. Standards:
1. Water Connections: Install water connections and outlets at each
item of equipment, with air gaps, vacuum breakers and similar .i.
provisions to comply with governing regulations, but not less than
compliance with ANSI Standards A.40.4 and A.40.6.
2. Electrical work: Assemble electrical components of equipment in
accordance with applicable "Standards of Installation" by the
National Electrical Contractors Association.
3. Service Lines and Equipment Connections: Refer to Division 15 for
piping connections and piping systems. Refer to Division 16 for
electrical work including equipment connections.
B. Jointing and Anchoring: Set each item of non-mobile and non-portable
equipment securely in place, leveled and adjusted to correct height.
Anchor to supporting substrate where indicated and where required for
sustained operation and use without shifting or dislocation. Conceal
anchorages wherever possible. Adjust counter tops of other work
surfaces to a level tolerance of 1/16" (maximum offset and plus-or-
minus on dimension and maximum variation of 2 ' -0" run from level or
indicated slope) .
1. Complete field assembly joints in the field (joints which cannot
be completed in the shop) by welding.
2. Treat enclosed spaces (inaccessible after equipment installation) �w
by covering horizontal surfaces with powdered borax at a rate of 4
oz. per square foot.
3. Install closure plates and strips where required with joints
coordinated with units of equipment.
4. Install sealants and gaskets around all penetrations to make
joints air-tight, water-proof, vermin-proof and sanitary for
cleaning purposes. In general, make sealed joints not less than
1/8" wide and stuff with backer rods to shape sealant bead
properly at 1/4" depth. Shape exposed surfaces of sealant
slightly concave with edges flush with faces of materials at
joint. At internal corner joints, apply sealant or gaskets to
form a sanitary cove, of not
less than 3/8" joint width; metal closure strips for wider joints,
with sealant application on each side of strip. Anchor gaskets
mechanically or with adhesives to prevent displacement.
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-12
PO NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS RBA #96079
S. Shop Painting: Clean and prepare metal to be painted, remove rust and
dirt. Apply treatment to zinc coated surfaces which have not been mill
phosphatized. Coat welded and abraded areas of zinc coated surfaces
with galvanize repair paint. Apply 1.5 mill (dry film thickness) metal
primer coating, followed by 2, 1.0 mill (dry film thickness) metal
enamel finish coatings.
1. Bake primer and finish coatings in accordance with paint
manufacturer's instructions for a baked enamel finish.
1.9 PLASTIC LAMINATE CASEWORK
A. General: Fabricate plastic laminate casework (P1-CsWk) in the types
and styles indicated with hardware and accessories. Provide exposed
and semi-exposed surfaces and edges (self-edged) with plastic laminate
covering on particle board cores. Provide painted plywood or hardboard
for concealing panels.
1. Provide adjustable standards for positioning and support of
shelves.
2 . Provide seamless rigid molded plastic drawer bodies or drawer
RM liner inserts, white except as otherwise indicated.
3 . Comply with applicable standards of the Architectural Woodwork
Institute for not less than "Custom Grade" casework.
4. Comply with applicable standards of the Woodwork Institute of
California for "Custom Grade" casework.
!M1 1.11 REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT
A. General: Provide condensing units and evaporators for refrigerated
equipment as shown on drawings. Selection of condensing units and
evaporators shall be based on A.S.H.R.A.E. standards. All systems
shall be supplied with complete controls for a working system. Where
applicable, each system shall consist of new condensing unit on a
structural steel base, with the following accessories: motor starter
or contactors, inherent protection, dual pressure controls, sight
glass, with liquid moisture indicator, molecular sieve dryer, suction
line vibration eliminators, king valves, liquid and suction line
charging valves, expansion valve, properly sized receivers for complete
pump down of system thermostats and solenoid valves, heat
interchangers.
1. All systems shall be properly charged with refrigerant type R-404
as recommended by A.S.H.R.A.E.
2. Selection of equipment shall be based on ambient air conditions at
condensing unit location. The evaporator coil shall be properly
sized based on product load, BTU rating and rating of condensing
unit at ambient conditions.
1.12 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND FABRICATION
A. Nameplates: Wherever possible, locate nameplates and labels on
manufactured items in accessible position, but not within customer's
normal view. Do not apply nameplates or labels on custom fabricated
work, except as required for compliance with governing regulations,
insurance requirements or operator performance.
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-11
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS KBA #96079
w
2. Mount legs as follows: Units mounted on legs that are 14" or
longer shall be provided with underbracing. Legs in such cases
are to be provided with not less than 12 gauge stainless steel
enclosed gussets, extending downward. Gussets shall be welded
continuously around entire perimeter.
M. Feet shall be stainless steel bullet type, having an integral threaded
shaft with a minimum adjustment of approximately 211 . Feet shall be
manufactured by "Component Hardware", "Standard Keil" or approved
equal.
N. Undershelving: Flat undershelving shall be turned down on all sides
approximately 1-1/2" and under 1/2" to form a channel shape.
Undershelves shall be reinforced with underbracing as specified.
Shelves shall be notched to fit the contour of legs. Shelves shall be
welded to legs, crevice free.
0. Wall Shelves and Overshelves: Wall shelves to have all exposed edges
turned down in channel shape 1-1/2" x 1/211 . Edges at walls to be
flanged upward 2" raw. Resulting corners to be rounded, fully welded,
ground and polished. Shelves to be mounted on 12 gauge stainless steel
cantilever type brackets.
P. Drawers and Drawer Bodies: Drawers shall be of the telescoping self-
closing slide type with completely enclosed 16 gauge stainless steel
housing. Provide drawers with 20" x 20" x 5" deep inside liner,
removable without untracking, gray in color, smooth finish, all thermo
plastic construction with all vertical and horizontal corners on a
radius with the top edges flanged out to set into a 16 gauge stainless
steel track and housing combination. The housing combination shall
operate on 16 gauge stainless steel housing with the extension slide
having a limit stop and 1-5/16" ball bearing rollers operating on a 16
gauge stainless steel outside locking track. w
1. Fronts shall be double pan with full grip handles and key locks as
specified. Fronts shall be double wall type construction with an
approved sound deadener.
2. Mounted under all 5" deep drawers, furnish one (1) only removable
hard rubber cutting board. Cutting board shall be approximately
20" x 20" x 3/4" thick and shall be mounted so as not to interfere .■
with normal operation of drawer when board is in place. Board to
be mounted on 2" channel shaped stainless steel guides. Cutting
board to bear NSF seal.
Q. Closed Base: Where casework is indicated to be located on raised floor
base, prepare casework for support without legs, and for anchorage and
sealant application, as required for a completely enclosed and
concealed base. w
R. Exhaust Hood Fabrication: Comply with NFPA No. 96 including Appendix A
and as detailed under specification.
1. Grease Removal: Provide type indicated (removable filters if not
otherwise indicated) with drip-channel gutters, drain and
collection basins.
2. Light Fixtures: Fluorescent fixtures outside the hood with sealed .es
safety lenses flush with inside of hood; stainless steel exposed
conduit for wiring.
3 . Fire Extinguishing System: Wet chemical complying with NFPA No.
12 and as detailed under specific item.
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-10
M"
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS KBA #96079
1. All corners of drainboards shall be rounded on the inside of a
radius of 1" where rolled rim meets front edge. The bottom of
each sink compartment shall be creased to a sufficient pitch
toward waste outlet. Openings for hot and cold faucets shall be
cut into backsplash as required. All sinks shall be 14" deep,
unless otherwise indicated on drawings.
H. Sinks set into work counters or table tops shall be constructed of the
same gauge and materials as specified for counter tops as follows:
1. Top perimeter of each sink to be integrally welded to edge of
opening in table or counter top. Table or counter top to be die-
punched to receive faucets.
2. Sinks shall have vertical and horizontal corners rounded on a 1"
radius with bottoms pitched to a 1-1/2" or 2" waste outlet,
depending which is indicated on drawings. Sinks shall be finished
the same as table or counter tops.
3. Water inlets shall be located in all instances above the positive
water level to prevent syphoning of liquids into the water
systems.
4. Construct dishtables the same as previously specified for sinks
and drainboards unless otherwise indicated on drawings.
I. Table Tops: Edges shall be rounded and free from burrs and any excess
material left. Top edge shall be channel shaped and shall be turned
down 2" and returned 1/211 . Where tables are placed against building
walls, they shall be turned up in back approximately 1011, returned 2"
toward wall and 1/2" down in channel shape with all exposed ends welded
closed. Corners shall be rounded. Top shall be reinforced with
underbracing as specified, spaced not more than 30" on center. Tables
6' -0" and longer shall have a 1-1/2" x 1/8" stainless steel angle
framework reinforcing outside edge with cross channels every 30" or
less.
J. Underbracing: Provide underbracing for tables, drainboards and
dishtable tops and shall be 1" x 4" x 1" channels of 14 gauge stainless
steel. Bracing shall be welded to the underside of fixtures in a
manner suitable to seal out vermin and also to create a noise deadened
top surface. All channels shall extend the full length and depth of
fixtures and shall be positioned that no dimension exceeds 30" in any
direction.
K. Base Cabinet Casework: Unless otherwise indicated, provide either box-
type face framing or open channel type (complying with NSF requirements
in either case) . Cabinet work to be framed with fully boxed and welded
1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1-1/8" galvanized iron angles. Felt strips or equal
sound absorbent material to be placed between framework and tops.
L. Legs and cross bracing: Construct legs of not less than 1-5/811 OD by
16 gauge stainless steel tubing. Legs shall be in no case spaced more
than 6' -0" on centers.
1. Legs cross bracing where required shall be constructed of not less
than 1" OD by 16 gauge stainless steel tubing. All cross bracing
shall run horizontal and level between all legs approximately 10"
above the floor, unless specified. All joints shall be
completely welded around the entire perimeter.
as
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-9
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS wa
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS KBA #96079
2. Exposed surfaces shall be free from bolts, screws and rivet heads.
Wherever threads of bolts and screws occur on the inside or
underside of fixtures and are either visible or might come in
contact with hands or wiping cloths, such bolts and screws shall
be capped with suitable lockwasher and chrome-plated brass or
bronze acorn nut. Wherever bolts and screws are welded to the
underside of trim and tops, their spacing and intent of rivets,
bolts and screws shall be such to insure proper fastening and
prevent bulging of the materials fastened.
3. Reinforce work surfaces 30" o.c. both ways with galvanized or
stainless concealed structural members. Reinforce edges which are
not self-reinforced by formed edges.
4. Sound deaden underside of metal work surfaces, including sinks and
similar units with a coating of sound deadening materials, Hold
coating back 3" from sanitary edges which are open for cleaning.
D. Structural Framing: Except as otherwise indicated, provide framing of
minimum 1" pipe size round pipe or tube members, with mitered and
welded joints and gusset plates, ground smooth. Provide 14 gauge
stainless steel tube for exposed framing and galvanized steel pipe for
concealed framing in areas exposed to customer view; in non-customer
areas, provide either stainless steel tube or enamel finished steel
pipe for exposed framing, and either galvanized or enamel finished
steel pipe for concealed framing (where permitted by NSF standards and
at fabricator's option) .
JIM
E. Enclosures, General: Provide enclosures, including panels, housing and
skirts for service lines and mechanical and electrical devices, and
secondary enclosures for equipment items, where indicated and where
required for compliance with governing regulations and NSF standards.
Otherwise, fabricate each item to be as open as possible for ease of
cleaning.
1. Where equipment is exposed to patron view, provide enclosure of
service lines, operating components and mechanical and electrical
devices.
F. Enclosures, General: Provide enclosures, including panels, housings
and skirts for service lines, operating components and mechanical and
electrical devices associated with the food service equipment, except
as specifically indicated to be "open".
tae
G. Sinks and Drainboards: Weld joints, front and ends, unless otherwise
indicated on drawings, shall be extended 311, measured at sink edge and
rolled 180 degrees on a 1-1/2" diameter. Raised rolled rim at front
and ends of the drainboard shall be level with sink rolled rim and
continuous therewith, and shall not follow with pitch of drainboard.
Drainboards shall be pitched 1/8" per 11 - 0" towards sink compartments.
Sinks and drainboards adjacent to walls or adjoining equipment shall .w
have 10" high backsplash, level and continuous, not following the pitch
of drainboards. Wherever drainboards are 24" or less, they may be
supported on 1" diameter to sink gussets, welded around entire
perimeter. Where drainboards exceed 24" in length, legs shall be
rounded to a radius of approximately 1", with all intersections meeting
in the spherical sections. All sinks having two or more compartments
shall have double dividing partitions with fully rounded corners, both
vertical and horizontal.
a�
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-8
w
40 NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS KBA #96079
4 . Provide removable panels for access to mechanical and electrical
service connections which are concealed behind or within food
service equipment, but only where access is not possible and not
indicated through other work.
B. Metal and Gauges: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate exposed
metal work of stainless steel and fabricate the following components
from the gauge of metal indicated and other components from not less
than 20 gauge metal:
1. Table Tops: 14 gauge.
2. Counter Tops: 14 gauge.
3. Shelves: 16 gauge.
4. Drawer Fronts: 16 gauge (double pan type) .
5. Hinged Doors: 18 gauge (double pan type) .
6. Single Pan Louvered Doors: 16 gauge.
7. Enclosed Base Cabinet: 18 gauge.
8. Enclosed wall Cabinet: 18 gauge.
9. Sinks and Drainboards: 14 gauge.
10. Sink Compartment Covers: 16 gauge.
11. Exhaust Hoods: 18 gauge.
12. Pan Type Insets and Trays: 16 gauge.
13 . Removable Covers, Panels: 18 gauge.
14. Skirts and Enclosure Panels: 18 gauge.
15. Closure and Trim Strips Over 4" Wide: 18 gauge.
16. Hardware Reinforcements: 12 gauge.
17. Gusset Plates: 10 gauge.
ON
C. Work Surface Fabrication: Fabricate metal work surfaces by forming and
welding rods matching sheet metal, grinding and polishing. Where
necessary for disassembly, provide water-proof gasketed draw-type
on joints with concealed bolting.
1. All joints in tops of fixtures, tables, drainboards, overshelving,
sinks and other equipment shall be welded. Tops of fixtures shall
be fabricated in the factory with welded joints to reduce field
joints to a minimum. All field joints shall be welded and exposed
welds ground smooth and polished to match factory finish.
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-7
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS KBA #96079
5. P-Traps: Include removable chrome plated P-traps where drains are
indicated for direct connection to drainage system.
D. Electrical Materials: Provide standard materials, devices and
components as recommended by the manufacturer/fabricator, selected and
installed in accordance with NEMA standards and recommendations, and as
required for safe and efficient use and operation of the food service
equipment, without objectionable noise, vibration and sanitation
problems.
1. Controls and Signals: Provide recognized commercial grade „
signals, "on-off" push buttons or switches, and other speed and
temperature controls as required for operation of each item,
complete with pilot lights and permanent signs and graphics to
assist the user of each item. Provide stainless steel cover
plates at controls and signals.
2. Connections: Equip each item requiring electrical power with
either a terminal box for permanent connection or cord and plug
for interruptable connection as indicated. Provide standard
grounded type plugs, matching outlets (specified in Division 16) ,
light gray plug and cord.
3. Motors: Totally enclosed type, except drip-proof type where not '
exposed to a dust or moisture condition; ball bearings except
sleeve bearings on small timing motors; windings impregnated to
resist moisture; horsepower and duty cycle ratings as required for
the service indicated.
4. Power Characteristics: Refer to Division 16 specifications for
project power characteristics. Also refer to individual equipment
requirements for loads and ratings.
1.8 FABRICATION OF METAL WORK
A. General Fabrication Requirements: Remove burrs from sheared edges of
metal work, ease the corners and smooth to eliminate cutting hazard.
Bend sheets of metal at not less than the minimum radius required to
avoid grain separation in the metal. Maintain flat, smooth surfaces
without damage to finish.
1. Reinforce metal at locations of hardware, anchorages and accessory
attachments. Wherever metal is less than 14 gauge or required
mortized application, conceal reinforcements to the greatest w.
extent possible. Weld in place on concealed faces.
2. Where fasteners are permitted, provide philips head, flat or oval
head machine screws. Cap threads with acorn nuts unless fully w�
concealed in unaccessible construction; and provide nuts and
lockwashers unless metal for tapping is at least 12 gauge. Match
fastener head finish with finish of metal fastened.
3. Where components of fabricated metal work are indicated to be
galvanized and involve welding or machining of metal heavier than
16 gauge, complete the fabrication and provide hot dip galvanizing
of each component after fabrication, to the greatest extent
possible (depending upon available dip-tank sizes) . Comply with
ASTM A 123.
MW
�w►
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-6
w�
w NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS KSA #96079
40
5. Sound Deadening (SndDdn) : Heavy bodies resinous coating, filled
with granulated cork or other resilient material, compounded for
ON permanent, non-flaking adhesion to metal in 1/8" thick coating.
1.7 FABRICATED PRODUCTS
on A. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard, not less than BHMA Std. 201 type 2
(Institutional) , satin finish stainless steel or dull chrome finish on
brass, bronze or steel. All hardware to be manufactured by "Component
"s Hardware", "Standard Keil" or approved equal.
1. Cabinet Catches: Heavy duty with adjustable spring loaded ball
tension, except as otherwise indicated.
ON 2. Drawer Slides: Ball bearing type, side mounting self-closing.
3 . Hinges: Secured to doors and cabinet bodies so as to eliminate
exposed bolt and screw heads.
4. Handles: Shall be brass chrome plated full grip handles.
5. Locks: Drawer and hinged door locks to be cylinder type. Locks
to be satin chrome finish, and all locks to be keyed alike.
B. Casters: Type and size indicated, or if not indicated, as recommended
by caster manufacturer for the type and weight of equipment supported;
but not less than 4" diameter with 15/16" tread width, with sealed
self-lubricating ball bearings, cadmium-plated steel disc wheels and
solid light gray synthetic rubber tires. Provide stainless steel horns
and accessories. Unless otherwise indicated, equip each item with
swivel type casters and two (2) fixed casters, and provide foot brakes
on all casters.
1. Caster Bumpers: Unless equipment item is equipped with another
form of all around protective bumpers, provide circular rotating
bumper above each caster, 5" diameter tire of light gray synthetic
rubber (hollow or closed cell) on cadmium plated disc.
am C. Plumbing Fittings, Trim and Accessories: Where exposed or semi-
exposed, provide bright chrome plated brass or polished stainless steel
units. Provide copper or brass where not exposed. All plumbing
fittings to be manufactured by "T & S Brass and Bronze Works", "Fisher
wo Faucets" or "Chicago Faucets" .
1. Water Outlets: At sinks and at other locations where water is
supplied (by manual, automatic or remote control) , provide
commercial quality faucets, dispensers or fill devices of the type
and size indicated and as required to operate as indicated.
2. Faucets: Deck and/or splash type faucets shall be furnished and
installed wherever applicable and as specified.
3 . Vacuum Breakers: Provide with food service equipment where
required by governing regulations including locations where water
go outlets are equipped with hose attachment. To be specified and
furnished where required under Division 15.
4. Waste Fittings: Except as otherwise indicated, furnish and
install 2" chrome plated remote lever waste valve and strainer
basket and include connected overflow on sinks. Integrate unit
for direct connections with waste grinder where indicated.
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-5
go
oil
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS w
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS RBA #96079
mom
6. Galvanized finish (Glv) : ASTM A 123 hot-dipped zinc coating,
applied after fabrication.
7. Aluminum: ASTM B209/B221 sheet, plate and extrusions (as
indicated) ; alloy, temper and finish as determined by
manufacturer/fabricator, except 0.40 mill natural anodized finish
on exposed work unless another finish is indicated. w
B. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD1, general purpose high pressure type, 0.062"
thick except 0.050" for post forming, smooth (non-textured) color to be
selected at a later date by Architect. Comply with NSF No. 35 where
applicable.
C. Hardwood Work Surfaces: Laminated edge-grained hard maple (acer
saccharum) , NHLA First Grade with knots, holes and other blemishes �+►
culled-out, kiln dried at eight percent or less moisture, water-proof
glue, machine sanded and finished with NSF approved oil sealer.
D. Insulation:
1. Cooled Component Insulation: Rigid, closed cell polyurethane
foam, either heat aged slab stock for adhesive lamination with
face sheets, or foamed-in-place using Freon 11 as an expanding nw
agent; k-value of 0.15, not less than 1.7 pounds per cubic foot
density.
2 . Heated Component Insulation: Rigid board, semi-rigid blanket or an
adhesively applied blanket of glass fiber or other mineral fiber
insulation, certified by manufacturer to withstand long-term
exposure to heat (temperature rating of each insulated equipment
item) without deterioration; k-value of not more than 0.30;
density of not less than 1.5 pounds per cubic foot density.
E. Joint Materials:
1. Sealants (Snt) : One part or two part; polyurethane or silicone
based, liquid elastomeric sealant, FS-TT-S-00227 or FS-TT-S-99230
non-solvent release type, mildew resistant, Shore A hardness of 30
except 45 if subject to traffic. Backer rod to be polyethylene so
rod stock, larger than joint width.
2. Gaskets (Gkt) : Solid or hollow (but not cellular) neoprene or
polyvinyl chloride; light gray, minimum of 40 Shore A hardness, go
self-adhesive or prepared for either adhesive application or
mechanical anchorage.
F. Paint and Coatings: Provide the types of painting and coating
materials which, after drying or curing, are suitable for use in am
conjunction with food service and which are durable, non-toxic, non-
dusting, non-flaking, mildew-resistant and comply with governing
regulations for food service.
00
1. Galvanized Repair Paint: MIL-P-21035.
2. Pretreatment: SSPC-PT2 or PT3 or FS-TT-C490.
no
3. Primer Coating for Metal: FS-TT-P-86, type suitable for baking
where indicated.
4. Enamel for Metal: Synthetic type, FS-TT-P-491, type suitable for so
baking where indicated.
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-4
w�
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS RBA #96079
B. Shop Drawings, Food Service Equipment: Submit shop drawings showing
layouts, elevations, sections and details of custom fabricated work
(work not shown by manufacturer's standard product data sheets) . Show
layouts, rough-in plans at 1/4" scale and elevations at 1/2" scale,
sections at 1-1/2" scale and details at 3" scale, including all
requirements for existing equipment. Submittals shall include
dimensioned layouts of all depression requirements, concrete pads,
connected HVAC units and all other food service related architectural
requirements. Furnish one (1) sepia transparency and six (6) blue or
black line prints for all drawings submitted for approval.
C. Samples, Food Service Equipment: Submit three (3) samples of each
exposed finish on shop fabricated and field fabricated food service
equipment. Submit 12" squares of sheet materials and 24" lengths of
linear materials. Samples will be reviewed by the Architect for color,
pattern and texture only. Compliance with other requirements is the
exclusive responsibility of the Contractor. Samples shall be submitted
with shop drawings and shall be actual size of equipment. Samples
shall include:
1. Leg assembly, with gusset foot and crossrail.
2. Corner of table top.
3. Drawer assembly.
4. Section of doors.
5. Handles, hardware, and locking devices.
OR
1.5 PRODUCT HANDLING
A. Protect metal finishes from damage during shipping, storage, handling,
installation and construction of other work in the same spaces. Wrap
and crate each item of equipment as needed for protection from damage.
B. Cover exposed stainless steel surfaces with self-adhesive protective
fm paper, of a type recommended by the metal manufacturer, and do not
remove until work is installed and ready for cleaning and start-up.
1.6 MATERIALS
im
A. Metals:
1. Stainless steel (s/s) : AISI type 302/304, hardest workable
temper, No. 4 directional polish.
2 . Galvanized steel sheet (Glv) : ASTM A 526, except ASTM A 527 for
extensive forming; ASTM A 525, G90 zinc coating, chemical
4w treatment. Where painted finish is indicated, provide mill
phosphatized treatment in lieu of chemical treatment.
3. Steel sheet: ASTM A 569 hot-rolled carbon steel.
4. Galvanized steel pipe: ASTM A 53 or ASTM A 120, welded or
seamless, schedule 40, galvanized.
5. Steel structural members: Hot rolled or cold formed, carbon steel
unless stainless steel is indicated.
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-3
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS RBA #96079
7. Tables, chairs, cash registers, cashier's stools, pots, pans,
dishes, glassware, trays and silverware are not included in
contract.
.A
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Standard General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with the
following standards as applicable to the manufacture, fabrication and
installation of the work of this section.
1. NSF Standards: Comply with National Sanitation Foundation
standards and criteria, and provide NSF "Seal of Approval" on each
manufactured item and on major items of custom-fabricated work.
2. U.L. Standards: For electrical components and assemblies, provide
either U.L. labeled products or where no labeling service is
available, "recognized markings" to indicate listing in the U.L.
Recognized Component Index.
3 . NFPA Standards: Comply with NFPA No. 96 for exhaust systems. op
4. National Electrical Code: Comply with NFPA Volume 5 for
electrical wiring and devices included with food service
equipment. !,
B. Manufactured Products, Fabricate to the extent available, provide
standard or custom manufactured products to comply with the
requirements, otherwise shop fabricate the work to the greatest extent an
possible in shops which are skilled and experienced with a minimum of
five (5) years experience in the production of food service equipment.
1. Provide each manufactured item as a complete unit manufactured by an
one manufacturer, including hardware, accessories, mounting and
installation components.
2. Alternatives or substitutions to items specified herein will be go
considered only if submitted for approval ten (10) days prior to
the bid opening date.
3. The cost of any changes arising from acceptable alternatives or
substitutions will be the total responsibility of the Kitchen
Equipment Contractor. This includes the cost for general
construction, plumbing, electrical, HVAC, etc.
1.4 SUBMITTALS �!
A. Manufacturer's Data, Food Service Equipment: Submit copies of the
manufacturer's or shop fabricator's product information and
installation instructions for each item of food service equipment. For
operating equipment include data on performance and operating
characteristics, power/fuel consumption, rough-in dimensions and sizes,
drainage requirements, and similar information. Provide maintenance
manuals, operating instructions, spare parts lists, precaution against MW
hazards, manufacturer's warranties, and similar information.
Distribute one additional copy of installation and start-up
instructions to the Installer. Mark each data sheet or brochure with
the applicable project equipment item number(s) . Furnish six (6) w
neatly bound copies of all "buy-out" or standard items of manufacture
for approval. Provide lead sheets for each catalog sheet for notes,
stamps, titles, etc. Lead sheets shall indicate Item No. , quantity
> description, accessories and special conditions if any. ■o
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-2
sw
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MASSACHUSETTS KBA #96079
SECTION 11400 - FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. AIA Document A201/CMa, "The General Conditions of the Contract for
Construction, Construction Management Edition, " 1992 Edition, The
American Institute of Architects, Articles 1 through 14 are bound
herein and are hereby made a part of the Specifications and shall apply
to Contractors and all Subcontractors.
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. The extent of food service equipment is shown on the drawings and by
t schedules and equipment lists associated with either the drawings of
this section.
B. The types of food service facilities required for this project include
to the following:
1. Food Storage and Handling Areas.
an 2 . Kitchen and Food Preparation Areas.
3 . Combined Preparation and Serving Areas.
4. Warewashing.
5. Alternate No. 6 Food Lab
C. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Refer to Division 15 and Division 16
sections, respectively, for mechanical and electrical services and
connections for individual items of food service equipment.
D Interrelated work not included in this section:
1. Final plumbing connections (refer to other sections) .
2. Final electrical connections (refer to other sections) .
3. Electrical service and connections to kitchen equipment overload
protection requirements, wiring between starters and motors and
also between control devices and starters, when starters and
on controls are not integral with equipment (refer to other sections)
4 . Plumbing work and connections, including fittings which are not an
integral part of equipment, floor drains, water and waste lines to
+ refrigeration compressors including their connections and
miscellaneous plumbing work, except as otherwise specified in this
section (refer to other sections) .
a. All exposed chrome piping required to be furnished and
installed by Plumbing Division.
5. Concrete, masonry and miscellaneous metals, except as otherwise
specified in this section. Refer to Sections 03300 "Cast-in-Place
Concrete", 04200 "Unit Masonry", 05500 "Metal Fabrications" and
kitchen equipment drawings.
6. Stainless steel corner guards attached to building structure
(refer to other sections) .
On
FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 11400-1
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
go 3 .4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Start-Up Services: Provide the services of a factory-authorized service
representative of the manufacturer to provide start-up service and to
demonstrate and train the Owner's maintenance personnel.
1. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
2 . Train the Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules
related to start-up and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and
preventive maintenance.
3 . Review data in Operating and Maintenance Manuals. Refer to
Division 1 Section "Project Closeout. "
4 . Schedule training with the Owner, through the Owner' s
Representative, with at least 7 day' s advanced notice.
END OF SECTION 11160
!A4
00
ON
so
go
40
IIl�
11160 - 5
LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT
OR
M
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
lip. Normal operation is resumed by a manual reset button or an
by pulling out the STOP button.
C. Hydraulic Lip Operation: Provide electric-powered hydraulic
raising and hydraulic lowering of the lip, controlled
independently of raising and lowering of the ramp.
E. Rated Capacity: Provide edge-of-dock levelers capable of supporting a
gross moving load of 20, 000 lb without permanent deflection or
distortion, as determined by actual tests complying with the
requirements of ANSI MH14.1 for rated capacity of fixed dockboards.
F. Construction: Fabricate the dock leveler frame from structural and
formed steel shapes and the platform, including the hinged lip, from
non-skid steel plate. Fabricate the entire assembly to withstand
deformation during both operating and stored phases of service. Chamfer
lip edge to minimize obstructing wheels of material-handling vehicles.
Include two dock bumpers attached to the frame.
G. Finish and Color: Provide the manufacturer's standard baked enamel
finish over steel surfaces that have been cleaned and pretreated to
obtain optimum paint bond. Paint toe guards yellow to comply with ANSI
Z53 .1, and paint the remainder of the surfaces in the manufacturer's Mn
standard color.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
ON
3 .1 PREPARATION
A. General: Coordinate installation of loading dock equipment indicated am
to be attached to or recessed into concrete or masonry, and furnish
anchoring devices with templates, diagrams, and instructions for their
installation.
go
1. Coordinate delivery of anchoring devices to Project site to avoid
delaying progress.
ON
3 .2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's detailed instructions for
installing loading dock equipment. to
B. Edge-of-Dock Levelers: Coordinate location of anchor bolts for dock
levelers to ensure that leveler is in proper relationship to the loading a"
platform. Attach leveler securely to the loading platform construction
according to the manufacturer's directions.
3 .3 ADJUST AND CLEAN
w
A. Make necessary adjustments for safe, efficient operation of loading dock
equipment.
B. After installation, restore marred, abraded surfaces to the original on
condition.
LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT 11160 - 4
�r
4W
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
00
a. "Model HEOD 7220, " The McGuire Co. , Inc.
b. "Model No. CEOD-H1572, " Poweramp Systems, Inc.
ON
2.2 EDGE-OF-DOCK LEVELERS
A. General: Provide edge-of-dock levelers of the type, function,
operation, capacity, size and construction indicated, complete with
controls, safety devices and accessories required.
B. Type: Provide surface mounted, hinged-lip type dock levelers designed
for permanent installation on face of the loading platform at the
location indicated.
C. Function: Dock levelers shall compensate for differences in height
between the truck bed and the loading platform in the following manner:
1. Vertical Travel: Minimum working range shall be 5 inches above and
5 inches below the adjoining platform level for dock leveler ramps.
2. Lip Operation: Provide the manufacturer's standard mechanism that
automatically extends and supports the hinged lip on the ramp edge
with the lip resting on the truck bed over the dock leveler's
working range, allows the lip to yield under impact of the incoming
truck, and automatically retracts the lip when the truck departs.
a. Length of Lip Extension: Not less than 12 inches in front of
the dock bumpers.
3 . Automatic Ramp Return: Provide automatic return of the unloaded
ramp, from raised or lowered positions to stored position, level
4—W with the platform, as the truck departs, or prior to truck
departure by push button.
D. Operation: Provide the manufacturer's standard operating system as
so follows:
1. Hydraulic Operating System: Provide electric hydraulic raising and
00 hydraulic lowering of the ramp, controlled from a remotely located
push-button station. Equip the leveler with a packaged unit
including a unitized, totally enclosed, nonventilated electric
motor, 460V, 3 phase, 60 cycle, pump, manifold reservoir, and valve
OR assembly of proper size, type, and operation for the capacity of
the leveler indicated. Provide a hydraulic velocity fuse connected
to the main hydraulic cylinder to limit the loaded ramp's free fall
to not over 3 inches.
a. Electrical Requirements: Coordinate wiring requirements and
current characteristics with the building electrical system.
b. Remote Control Station: Provide a multiple-button control
station with an UP button of the constant-pressure type, and
an emergency STOP button of the momentary-contact type.
Holding the UP button depressed causes the ramp to raise;
ON releasing the UP button allows the ramp to lower at a
controlled rate. Depressing the STOP button causes all ramp
movement to stop regardless of the position of the ramp or
LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT 11160 - 3
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS �0
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
representative.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who is an
authorized representative of the loading dock equipment manufacturer for
both installation and maintenance of the type of equipment required for
this Project. .w
1. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than 2 hours normal travel time
from the Installer's place of business to the Project site.
wu
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing
loading dock equipment similar to that indicated for this Project and
that has a record of successful in-service performance. ww
C. Dock Leveler Standard: Comply with applicable requirements of ASME/ANSI
MH14.1 for construction and operation of dock levelers and dockboards.
No
D. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain each loading dock equipment
component, including dock levelers, as a complete unit produced by a
single manufacturer, including necessary accessories, fittings and w"
anchorages.
E. Design Criteria: The drawings indicate sizes, profiles, and dimensional
requirements of the various items of loading dock equipment and are
based on the specific types and models indicated. Similar equipment by
other manufacturers may be considered, provided deviations in dimensions
and profiles are minor and do not change the design concept as judged
by the Architect. The burden of proof of equality is on the proposer. '
1.5 WARRANTIES
waa
A. Dock Leveler Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the
manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace loading dock equipment
components that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified
warranty period. Failures include but are not limited to:
1. Structural failures, including excessive deck surface deflection.
2 . Hydraulic systems, including hydraulic seals and cylinders.
B. Warranty Period: Two years from the date of Substantial Completion.
C. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may
have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in
addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the
Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 .1 MANUFACTURERS am
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products of one of the following: s
1. Manufacturers of Edge-of-Dock Levelers:
so
LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT 11160 - 2
no
M
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB 496079
No SECTION 11160 - LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
an
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this work. Note also all Addenda.
1.2 SUMMARY
OR A. This Section includes the following types of loading dock equipment:
1. Edge-of-Dock levelers.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that
relate to this Section:
1. Concrete work for edge-of-dock levelers is specified in Division
3 .
2 . Electrical wiring and connections for loading dock equipment are
specified in Division 16.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract
and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of loading dock equipment specified,
including details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of
individual components, profiles, and finishes.
1. Include rated capacities of each edge-of-dock leveler models
required.
C. Shop drawings detailing fabrication and installation of loading dock
equipment. Include plans, elevations, and large-scale details showing
layout and types of equipment required. Show anchorages and accessory
items.
1. Provide location template drawings for items supported or anchored
ON to permanent construction.
2 . Furnish roughing-in drawings for electrical service well in advance
of concrete work.
D. Material test reports from a qualified independent testing agency
indicating compliance of dock levelers with requirements of ANSI MH 14.1
for determining rated capacity indicated.
E. Maintenance data for loading dock equipment to include in Operating and
Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1. Include name, address, and
telephone number of the manufacturer's nearest authorized service
LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT 11160 - 1
X11
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA B #96079
a. Da-Tex; Da-Cite Screen Co. , Inc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .1 INSTALLATION
±�w
A. General : Install projection screens at locations indicated to comply
with screen manufacturer's written instructions.
MM
B. Install front-projection screens with screen cases in position and
relationship to adjoining construction indicated. Securely anchor to
supporting substrate in a manner that produces a smoothly operating
screen with vertical edges plumb and viewing surface flat when screen is ON
lowered.
1 . Test manually operated units to verify that screen operating me
components are in optimum functioning condition.
C. Install coated rear-projection screens with optically coated surfaces
oriented as follows: ear
1. Place optically coated surface toward projector.
2 . Place optically coated surface toward audience. s,
D. Install rear-projection screens with plastic substrates, in frames
specified in other Sections, to comply with screen manufacturer's written
instructions. Do not abrade screen surfaces; handle screens carefully
during installation using procedures and tools recommended by screen
manufacturer. Clamp units only at top edge and allow for expansion and
contraction of plastic glazing material by providing frame with adequate
bite and edge clearances.
3 .2 PROTECTING AND CLEANING 40
A. Protect projection screens after installation from damage during
construction. If damage occurs despite such protection, remove and
replace damaged components or entire unit as required to provide units w
in their original, undamaged condition.
1. Provide temporary covering of rear-projection screens until time of wr
Substantial Completion. Use type of covering approved by screen
manufacturer that will effectively protect screen from abrasion,
breakage, or other damage.
am
B. Clean rear-projection screens on both faces immediately before date
scheduled for inspection intended to establish date of Substantial
Completion. Use methods and cleaning materials recommended by screen .w
manufacturer, taking care not to scratch or damage optical coatings or
screen substrates.
am
END OF SECTION 11132
ww
PROJECTION SCREENS 11132 - 6
on
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
3 . Manually Operated Front-Projection Screens:
a. Series 200; Bretford Manufacturing, Inc.
b. Model B; Da-Lite Screen Co. , Inc.
C. Luma; Draper Shade & Screen Co. , Inc.
4. Electrically Operated Screens with Automatic Ceiling Closure,
End-Mounted Motor:
a. Executive Electrol; Da-Lite Screen Co. , Inc.
OR b. Ambassador; Draper Shade & Screen Co. , Inc.
2 .2 REAR-PROJECTION SCREENS
A. Screen Substrate: Optically clear substrate complying with the following
requirements:
1. Neutral Grey, transluscent vinyl screen in the following nominal
thickness:
" a. Thickness: llmm.
B. Optical Coating: Durable, washable emulsive formulation deposited on one
side of substrate, designed and applied to bond firmly and continuously
to glass and plastic substrates with the following gain characteristics:
1. Peak gain of 2.0 to 2 .7, and half-gain angle of at least 20 degrees.
C. Protective Coating: Provide formulation designed by screen manufacturer
as a permanent topcoat over optical coatings to protect against normal
OM abrasion before, during, and after installation.
D. Size of Viewing Surface: 12' x 121 .
40 E. Factory Frames: Screen manufacturer's standard frames of profile
indicated, fabricated to sizes required to fit screens from aluminum
extrusions complying with ASTM B 221 for 6063-T5 alloy and temper.
1. Class I, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A42/A44 (Mechanical Finish:
nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte;
Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, integrally colored or
t�s electrolytically deposited color coating 0.018 mm or thicker)
complying with AAMA 606.1 or AAMA 608.1.
a. Color: Dark bronze.
F. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
G. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
1. Rear-Projection Screens, Peak Gain 2.0 to 2 .7 :
po
PROJECTION SCREENS 11132 - 5
so
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON. MA Wn &are 9
as
120-V, ac power supply.
a. Provide key-operated switch. am
3 . End-Mounted Motor: Instant-reversing, gear-drive motor of size and
capacity recommended by screen manufacturer with permanently
lubricated ball bearings, automatic thermal-overload protection, so
preset limit switches to automatically stop screen in up and down
positions, and positive-stop action to prevent coasting. Locate
motor in its own compartment as follows: 40
a. On right end of screen, unless otherwise indicated.
4 . Screen Mounting: Top edge securely anchored to rigid metal roller on
and bottom edge formed into a pocket holding a 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-)
diameter, metal rod with ends of rod protected by plastic caps.
a. Roller for end-mounted motor supported by self-aligning ON
bearings in brackets.
D. Electrically Operated Screens with Automatic Ceiling Closure: Units so
designed and fabricated for recessed installation in ceiling with bottom
of case composed of 2 panels fully enclosing screen, motor, and wiring;
1 panel hinged and designed to open and close automatically when screen am
is lowered and fully raised, and the other panel removable or openable
for access to interior of case; and complying with the following
requirements:
OR
1. Screen Case with End-Mounted Motor: Wood or
medium-density-fiberboard sides and top with metal-lined motor
compartment and aluminum or medium-density-fiberboard bottom panels,
factory primed and constructed as follows:
E. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
F. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following: ow
1. Matte-White Viewing Surfaces:
a. Matte White; Bretford Manufacturing, Inc. ww
b. Da-Mat; Da-Lite Screen Co. , Inc.
C. Matte White; Da-Lite Screen Co. , Inc.
d. Fiberglass Matte White; Draper Shade & Screen Co. , Inc. "
e. M1300; Draper Shade & Screen Co. , Inc.
f. Panamax Seamless Matte White; Draper Shade & Screen Co. , Inc.
ww
2. Reflective Viewing Surfaces, Peak Gain 2.5 to 3.2:
a. Silver Suede; Bretford Manufacturing, Inc.
b. Super Wonder-Lite; Da-Lite Screen Co. , Inc. .w
C. M2500; Draper Shade & Screen Co. , Inc.
d. Crystal Matte 250; Stewart Filmscreen Corp.
weR
PROJECTION SCREENS 11132 - 4
on
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB 096079
go
a. Peak gain of 2.5 to 3 .2, and half-gain angle of at least 20
degrees.
40 b. Location(s) : Little Theatre, Modular Tech. and Computer Rooms.
3 . Material: Vinyl-coated glass-fiber fabric.
4. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide projection-screen
fabrics identical to materials that have been tested for flame
resistance according to both small- and large-scale tests of
NFPA 701.
5. Seamless Construction: Provide screens in sizes indicated without
seams.
6. Edge Treatment: Black masking borders.
7. Provide extra drop length of dimension indicated to comply with the
following requirements for fabric color and location of drop length:
a. Color: Black.
b. Location: At top of screen.
C. Locations: Typical Classrooms - no drop.
Little Theatre - 2' -0" drop.
8. Size of Viewing Surface: As indicated.
B. Manually Operated Screens: Provide manufacturer's standard
spring-roller-operated units designed and fabricated for wall or ceiling
installation and consisting of case, screen, mounting accessories, and
other components necessary for a complete installation.
1. Screen Case: Fabricated in 1 piece from steel sheet not less than
0 .0299 inch, with flat back design and vinyl covering or
baked-enamel finish. Provide end caps with integral roller brackets
and universal mounting brackets, finished to match end caps, for
+0 wall or ceiling mounting.
a. Locations: Typical Classroom - 70" x 70" , Computer Rooms
Incl. General Computer Rooms, Math Computer, and Graphics
OR Computer Room.) - 70" x 70".
2 . Screen Mounting: Top edge securely anchored to a 3-inch diameter,
w rigid steel spring roller; bottom edge formed into a pocket holding
a tubular metal slat, with ends of slat protected by plastic caps,
and saddle and pull attached to slat by screws.
C. Electrically Operated Screens, General: Provide manufacturer's standard
UL-labeled units consisting of case, screen, motor, controls, mounting
accessories, and other components necessary for a complete installation.
Remotely control operation of each screen to comply with the following:
1. Locations: Little Theatre - 8' x 8'
Modular Tech. - 70" x 70"
40
2. Single-Station Control: 3-position control switch with metal device
box and cover plate for flush wall mounting and for connection to
OW
PROJECTION SCREENS 11132 - 3
ON
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA RB #9607g
w
4 . Connections to suspension systems for pendant- and recess-mounted
screens.
5 . Anchorage details.
6. Details of juncture of exposed surfaces with adjacent finishes.
7 . Frame details.
8 . Accessories.
9. Wiring Diagrams: For electrically operated units.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain projection screens through one source from
a single manufacturer. Obtain each screen as a complete unit, including
necessary mounting hardware and accessories.
w
B. Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of projection
screens with other construction supported by, or penetrating through,
ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression wr
system, and partitions.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING M'
A. Do not deliver projection screens until building is enclosed, other
construction within spaces where screens will be installed is no
substantially complete, and installation of screens is ready to begin.
B. Store rear-projection screens as recommended in manufacturer's written
instructions and in manufacturer's protective packages until time of
installation.
C. Protect surfaces of rear-projection screens from damage due to abrasion, 1e,
dust, and other conditions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FRONT-PROJECTION SCREENS
we
A. Material and Viewing Surface of Front-Projection Screens: Provide
screens manufactured from mildew- and flame-resistant fabric of type
indicated for each type of screen specified and complying with the +e
following requirements:
1. Matte-white viewing surface with gain characteristics complying with
FS GG-S-00172D(1) for Type A screen surface. oft
a. Locations: Typical classrooms.
b. In addition to those identified on the drawings, provide thirty No
(30) additional screens to be located with the owner at the
time of delivery.
2. Reflective viewing surface, matte silver, silver lenticular, aw
pearlescent, or high-gain matte neutral, with the following gain
characteristics:
se
PROJECTION SCREENS 11132 - 2
e�
11
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA RE #96079
SECTION 11132 - PROJECTION SCREENS
PART 1 - GENERAL
#1111
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction", 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
11r who performs this work. Note also all Addenda.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
±1111 1. Front-projection screens.
2 . Rear-projection screens - portable for Dramatic Arts.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood backing for recessed
screen installation.
2 . Division 6 Section "Interior Architectural woodwork" for wood trim
for recessed screen installation.
3 . Division 16 Sections for electrical wiring, connections, and
installation of remote-control switches for electrically operated
IN projection screens.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Gain: Ratio of light reflected from or refracted by screen material to
that reflected perpendicularly from a magnesium carbonate surface as
determined per FS GG-S-00172D(1) .
B. Half-Gain Angle: The angle, measured from the axis of the screen
surface, to the most central position on perpendicular plane through the
horizontal centerline of the screen where the gain is half of the peak
gain.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of screen specified.
B. Shop Drawings: Show layout and types of projection screens. Include the
following:
1. Location of screen centerline relative to ends of screen case.
2. Location of wiring connections.
3 . Location of seams in viewing surfaces.
1a
PROJECTION SCREENS 11132 - 1
iI11R
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA R #9607g
3.6 CURTAIN SCHEDULE
a
A. Provide stage curtains according to the following schedule:
.w
Quantity Description Height Width Fabric Approx. Location from
Proscenium Plaster Line
=0' -0"
1 Valance 1' -6" 16' Velour -12"
1 Main 10' 16' Velour -3"
Traveler
2 Borders 10' 51 Atlas- Varies - see plan
Oxford
1 Rear 121 26' Atlas- Varies - see plan
Traveler Oxford
wr
.w
END OF SECTION 11062
w
uw
w
war
STAGE CURTAINS 11062 - 6 �„
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON. MA RB 096079
No
C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
1. Rig-I-Flex Model No. 142, Automatic Devices Company.
2. Atlas Silk Model No. 301, H & H Specialties, Inc.
3 . Model No. 142, J.R. Clancy, Inc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Furnish layouts for inserts, clips, or other supports.
3 .2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
" A. Install materials according to manufacturer's printed instructions and
recommendations.
3.3 BATTEN INSTALLATION
A. Install battens by suspending at proper heights with 3/16" steel proof
coil chains spaced at not more than 10 feet o.c.
B. Secure chains either directly to structures or to inserts, eye-screws,
or other devices that are secure and appropriate to substrate, and that
ON will not deteriorate or fail with age or elevated temperatures.
3.4 TRACK INSTALLATION
to A. Batten-Hung Tracks: Install track by suspending from pipe batten with
manufacturer's special pipe clamps at recommended spacing.
1. Heavy-Duty Track: Do not exceed 6 feet between supports.
2 . Walk-Along Tracks: Do no exceed 4 feet between supports.
B. Install track for center-parting curtains with not less than a 2-foot
w overlap of track sections at center, supported by special lap clamps.
3 .5 CURTAIN INSTALLATION
A. Track-Hung: Secure curtains to track carriers with track manufacturer's
special heavy-duty S hooks.
B. Batten Hung: Secure curtains to pipe battens with minimum 5/8-inch-wide
by 36-inch-long braided soft cotton tie lines.
10
STAGE CURTAINS 11062 - 5
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA RB #96079
�w
with separate interior heavy canvas chain pockets equipped with No.
8 cadmium-plated jack chain. Stitch chain pockets so chain rides
2" above bottom edge of curtain. Sew open ends of hems closed. '
B. Battens: Fabricate battens from steel pipe with a minimum number of
joints. As necessary for required lengths, connect pipe with a drive
fit pipe sleeve not less than 18 inches long, and secure with four flush
rivets, plug welds, or another equally secure method. Shop-paint
completed pipe battens with good quality black paint with 1-inch-wide
yellow stripe at the center of each batten.
2 .5 STRAIGHT CURTAIN TRACK FABRICATION
s
A. Steel Tracks, General: Fabricate of not less than 0.075-inch (14-gage)
nominal thickness galvanized roll-formed steel, with continuous bottom
slot, and with each half of track in one continuous piece.
00
1. Provide curtain carriers for track spaced at 12 inches o.c.
B. Heavy-Duty Track: Equip track with heavy-duty live-end double pulley
and heavy-duty dead-end single pulley, with 5-inch cast-iron or nylon
wheels on ball bearings, enclosed in steel housings. Provide curtain
carriers of molded nylon with a pair of neoprene- or nylon-tired
ball-bearing wheels riveted parallel to body. Equip carriers with
neoprene or rubber bumper, heavy-duty swivel eye, and trim chain for
attaching curtain snap or S hook. Provide end stops for track and
adjustable floor block designed to maintain proper tension on 3/8-inch
stretch-resistant operating line of braided polypropylene or fiber-glass
center cord.
C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the ""
following:
1. Silent Steel Model No. 282, Automatic Devices Company. Am
2. Tru-Roll Model No. 1000, Grosh Scenic Studios, Inc.
3 . Atlas Silk Model No. 400, H & H Specialties, Inc.
2.6 CURVED CURTAIN TRACK FABRICATION so
A. General: Fabricate curved curtain tracks for walk-along operation
without cord or pulleys, designed for rigid attachment to pipe battens. an
1. Shop-fabricate curved portions of track according to approved shop
drawings.
ow,
B. Aluminum Track: Fabricate track of nominal 0.125 inch (11 gage) (3.0
mm) thick extruded aluminum in I-beam configuration with intermediate
flange. Provide curtain carriers constructed of two nylon wheels am
fastened parallel to zinc-plated steel body by steel rivets, with rubber
or neoprene bumpers. Equip carriers with heavy-duty swivel eye for
attaching curtain snap or S hook.
nw
aw
STAGE CURTAINS 11062 - 4
40
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMDTQjy* KA KB #96079
04
C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
1. "Nassau Chevron", Frankel Associates, Inc.
2. "Atlas Oxford", Valley Forge Fabrics, Inc.
3 . "Atlas Oxford", Melfabco, Inca
2 .3 METAL
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Grade A, black, standard weight (Schedule 40) ,
1-1/2-inch nominal diameter, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Zinc-coated carbon steel sheet of commercial
quality, complying with ASTM A 526, G60 zinc coating; 0.075-inch
(14-gage) minimum nominal thickness.
C. Supports, Clamps, and Anchors: Sheet steel in manufacturer's standard
gages, galvanized after fabrication according to ASTM A 153, Class B.
D. Support Chain: ASTM A 413, 1/4-inch size, not less than 0.276-inch
material diameter.
E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units.
2 .4 CURTAIN FABRICATION
A. General: Provide not less than 60 percent additional fullness for
curtains, unless otherwise indicated. Provide vertical seams unless
otherwise indicated. Do not use fabric cuts less than half width.
!! Fabricate velour curtains with the nap down.
1. Vertical Hems: Provide vertical hems not less than 3 inches wide,
with a 1-inch tuck, double stitched and machine-sewn with no
selvage material visible from front of curtain. Sew open ends of
hems closed.
2 . Leading Edge Turnbacks: Provide turnbacks formed by folding 24
inches of face fabric back with a 1-inch tuck and secured by sewing
the top hem and grommeting through both layers of fabric.
3 . Top Hems: Reinforce top hems by double-stitching 3-1/2-inch-wide,
heavy jute webbing to top edge with minimum 1 inch of face fabric
turned under.
4 . Pleats: Provide fullness in curtains by sewing additional material
into 6-inch double-stitched box pleats spaced at 12 inches O.C.
+! along top hem reinforcing. Provide not less than No. 2 brass
grommets, centered on box pleats, for tie lines or S hooks.
a. Arrange vertical seams so that they do not fall on faces of
pleats.
b. For velour curtains provide not less than No. 3 grommets.
C. For black curtains provide grommets with a black anodic
finish.
5. Bottom Hems: For curtains that do not hang to the floor, provide
hems not less than 4 inches deep with 3/4-inch weight tape. For
floor-length curtains, provide hems not less than 6 inches deep
STAGE CURTAINS 11062 - 3
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
go
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Check actual stage curtain openings by accurate so
field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on
final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction
progress to avoid delaying Work.
1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work,
guarantee opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating stage
curtains without field measurements. Coordinate stage construction
to ensure that actual opening dimensions correspond to guaranteed
dimensions.
on
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FRONT-SETTING FABRIC
am
A. Woven Cotton Velour: Napped fabric of 100 percent cotton; 54-inch
minimum width; not less than 40 backing ends per inch, 40 pile ends per
inch, and 32 picks per inch; 640 pile tufts per square inch; and other
characteristics as follows:
1. Heavy Weight: Fabric weighing not less than 25 oz. per linear yard
before flame proofing, with pile height of approximately 135 mils.
B. Colors: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated, provide
colors complying with the following requirements:
1. For woven cotton velour, provide colors as follows:
a. Provide Architect's selections from manufacturer's full range so
of standard colors.
C. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following ON
velour fabric:
1. Memorable, KM Fabrics, Inc.
2. Symphony, Dazian, Inc. so
3 . Wilson, Melfabco, Inc.
2 .2 REAR SETTING FABRIC
go
A. Cotton Repp: Plain-woven heavy weight fabric of 100 percent cotton with
raised, rounded chevron ribs running from selvage to selvage; 48-inch
minimum width. sk
B. Colors: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated, provide
colors complying with the following requirements:
so
1. Provide Architect's selections from manufacturer's full range of
standard colors.
STAGE CURTAINS 11062 - 2
am
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON KA KB #96079
go
SECTION 11062 - STAGE CURTAINS
!1 PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this work. Note also all Addenda.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following types of stage curtains:
1. Front-setting curtains including valance and front curtain.
2 . Rear setting curtains including borders and rear curtain.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract
and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data, installation instructions, and general recommendations,
including data substantiating that materials comply with requirements.
C. Shop drawings including plans, elevations, and detail sections of
typical rigging elements. Show anchors, hardware, operating equipment,
and other components not included in manufacturer's standard product
00 data.
1. Show mechanical and electrical work, and coordinate this
installation with these elements.
w
D. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of fabric manufacturer's
standard color card, together with a 12-inch-square physical sample (any
color) for each fabric required.
E. Product certificates signed by stage curtain fabricator certifying that
the products comply with specified requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fabricator/Installer Qualifications: Firm with at least five (5) years
experience in producing stage curtains similar to those indicated for
this Project that have a record of successful in-service performance,
and with sufficient production capacity to produce required units
on without causing a delay in the Work.
B. Fire-Performance Characteristics: Provide stage curtains that are
certified to be flame resistant according to requirements of NFPA 701
and Massachusetts State Building Code. Permanently attach label to each
curtain indicating whether curtain is permanently and inherently flame
resistant, or whether it will require retreatment after dry cleaning.
STAGE CURTAINS 11062 - 1
AK
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA RB #96079
am
B. Clean and polish all exposed surfaces strictly according to
manufacturer's recommendations after removing temporary labels and
protective coatings. w
END OF SECTION 10800
iwe
wo
0"
so
so
w
ma
No
w
w
so
Am
an
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800-8 ,o
N
40
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
either a printed, waterproof label or a stamped nameplate, indicating
manufacturer's name and product model number.
A� B. Surface-Mounted Toilet Accessories, General: Except where otherwise
indicated, fabricate units with tight welded seams and joints, exposed
edges rolled. Hang doors or access panels with continuous stainless
steel piano hinge. Provide concealed anchorage wherever possible.
on
C. Framed Mirror Units, General: Fabricate frames for glass mirror units
to accommodate wood, felt, plastic, or other glass edge protection
material. Provide mirror backing and support system that will permit
rigid, tamperproof glass installation and prevent moisture accumulation,
as follows:
so 1. Provide galvanized-steel backing sheet, not less than 0.034 inch
(22 gage) and full mirror size, with nonabsorptive filler material.
Corrugated cardboard is not an acceptable filler material.
D. Mirror Unit Hangers: Provide system for mounting mirror units that will
permit rigid, tamperproof, and theft proof installation, as follows:
1. Heavy-duty wall brackets of galvanized steel, equipped with
concealed locking devices requiring a special tool to remove.
E. Keys: Provide universal keys for access to toilet accessory units
requiring internal access for servicing, resupply, etc. Provide minimum
of six keys to Owner's representative.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .1 INSTALLATION
A. Install toilet accessory units according to manufacturers' instructions,
using fasteners appropriate to substrate as recommended by unit
manufacturer. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in
locations and at heights indicated.
1. Reinforcement of stud walls to support wall-mounted cabinets will
be accomplished during wall erection by trade involved; however,
indicating accurate location and sizing of reinforcement is
responsibility of toilet and bath accessories installer.
B. Secure mirrors to walls in concealed, tamperproof manner with special
hangers, toggle bolts, or screws. Set units plumb, level, and square
at locations indicated, according to manufacturer's instructions for
type of substrate involved.
C. Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbs,
complying with ASTM F 446.
D. Install all products in accordance with all applicable Barrier-Free
Washroom Guidelines including those of the Architectural Access Board
3 .2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust toilet accessories for proper operation and verify that
mechanisms function smoothly. Replace damaged or defective items.
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800-7
wm
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON. MA n A... g
1. Shelf: Fabricate from minimum 18 gauge stainless steel, satin- 40
finish, in sizes indicated, 3/4-inch rolled channel-formed edges
on all sides of shelf; minimum 16 gauge stainless steel satin-
finish mounting brackets welded to underside of shelf. Ak
2. Subject to conformance with requirements, provide the following:
a. "Model B-298 x 7211, Bobrick.
0. Mirror Units so
1. Stainless Steel Framed Mirror Units : Fabricate frame with angle
shapes not less than 0.05 inch (18 gage) , with square corners 4W
mitered, welded, and ground smooth. Provide in No. 4 satin
polished finish.
2. Subject to conformance with requirements, provide stainless steel
framed mirror units manufactured by Bobrick: go
a. "Model B-2908-2436"
b. "Model B-2908-2460" ow
C. "Model B-2908-3048"
d. "Model B-2908-4848"
e. "Model B-2908-7236"
f. "Model B-2908-3654"
g. "Model B-2908-3628"
2.4 WARM AIR DRYERS
fee
A. Hair Dryer
1. Warm-Air Hair Dryer: Recess-mounted, touch button activation, 14;
gauge steel, with manufacturers standard 1/8" thick gray iron
casting, white-painted cover. Provide 80 second timed power cut
off switch.
2 . Equip dryer with 1/10 hp, 6200 rpm, 115 volt, 20 amp, 2300 watts,
60 Hz, single phase, resilient mounted motor, with automatic
thermal overload switch, and sealed, self-lubricating ball bearing
drive shaft. 4,
3 . Equip with centrifugal fan to deliver 150 cfm, minimum.
4 . Subject to conformance with requirements, provide "Model B-781"
Bobrick.
40
2.5 INFANT CARE PRODUCTS
A. Diaper Changing Station go
1. Wall-mounted unit: Capable of withstanding a static load of 250 lbs
in the open position, fabricated from high-density 0'
9 y polyethylene,
with pneumatically operated fold- down concave shaped, padded
changing and safety strap. Include compartment for sanitary liner
storage. NO
2 . Subject to conformance, provide "Model B-221011 . Bobrick
2.6 FABRICATION
A. General: Only a maximum 1-1/2-inch-diameter, unobtrusive stamped
manufacturer logo, as approved by Architect, is permitted on exposed
face of toilet or bath accessory units. On either interior surface not
.0
exposed to view or back surface, provide additional identification by
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800-6
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
Bobrick.
H. Shower Curtain Rod
1. Extra-Heavy-Duty: 1-1/4-inch o.d. , 0.05-inch (18-gage) stainless
steel, satin finish; furnish with 3-inch o.d. , minimum 0.04-inch
Aw (20-gage) stainless steel flanges with satin finish, designed for
exposed fasteners.
2. Subject to conformance with requirements, for all locations provide
"Model B-604711, Bobrick.
I. Shower Curtain
40 1. Antibacterial Type: 42-inch-wide by 72-inch-high, 10-ounce,
nylon-reinforced, antibacterial vinyl fabric with hemmed edges.
Fabric to be flameproof, stain-resistant and self-deodorizing, with
stainless steel grommets at minimum 6 inches o.c. through top hem.
+o Color selection by Architect.
2. Subject to conformance with requirements, for generic shower stalls
provide two "Model 204-211, Bobrick. And, for HC shower stalls
provide "Model 204-311, Bobrick.
J. Shower Curtain Hooks
1. Shower Curtain Hooks: Chrome-plated or stainless steel, spring
wire curtain hooks with snap fasteners, sized to accommodate
specified curtain rod size. Provide one hook per curtain grommet.
2 . Subject to conformance, provide "Model 204-111, Bobrick.
K. Soap Dish for Showers
1. Provide a recessed Heavy Duty Soap Dish and Bar for all shower
stalls fabricated from stainless steel matte polished finish with
mounting clamp as required.
2 . Subject to conformance, provide "Model B-439011, Bobrick
L. Folding Seat for HC Shower Stalls
No 1. Heavy Duty Hinged Seat: Provide a folding, self locking, shower
seat fabricated from stainless steel
2 . Configuration: "L" shaped, nominal 33" wide by 22" projection from
wall.
3 . Seat Material: 1 1/2" thick, closed-cell foam padding mounted on
1/2" thick plywood. Covered in white, water resistant, reinforced
vinyl fabric.
4. Subject to conformance, provide "Model B-518 (left-hand) or B-517
(right-hand) ", Bobrick
M. Robe Hook - (RH)
1. Single-Prong Single Robe Hook: Heavy-duty satin finished
stainless steel single-prong robe hook; rectangular wall bracket
with backplate for concealed mounting.
2 . Subject to conformance with requirements, for ALL shower stalls
provide "Model B-671711, Bobrick.
■w N. Shelf
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800-5
oil
WX
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NOBT�iAMPTON, MA RS #96079
without special adapters.
3 . Subject to conformance with requirements, provide "Model 13-2621211,
Bobrick.
Aft
C. Toilet Tissue Dispensers - (TPD)
1. Surface Mounted Roll-in-reserve Dispenser: Fabricate of 18 and 22
gauge, satin-finished stainless steel with concealed sized to
store and dispense 5-inch-diameter core tissue rolls, with reserve
roll placed in service by automatic release. Hinge front of unit
with pivot hinge and secure with tumbler lockset. *�*
2 . Subject to conformance with requirements, provide "Model B-288811,
Bobrick.
D. Grab Bars - (GB)
we
1. Stainless Steel Type: Provide grab bars with wall thickness not
less than 0.05 inch (18 gage) and as follows: am
a. Mounting: Concealed, manufacturer's standard flanges and
anchorages.
b. Clearance: 1-1/2-inch clearance between wall surface and 40
inside face of bar.
C. Gripping Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard nonslip texture.
d. Heavy-Duty Size: Outside diameter of 1-1/2 inches.
2. Subject to conformance with requirements, provide "Model B- w
6806.99x4211, Bobrick at toilet stalls and "Models B-6856.99 or B-
6846.99", Bobrick at HC Shower stalls.
E. Sanitary Napkin Vendors - (SNV) oft
1. Surface Mounted: Fabricate cabinet of satin-finished stainless
steel, not less than 0.034" (22 gage) thick, all welded an
construction. Provide door of seamless stainless steel, minimum
0.05 inch (18 gage) thick, with returned edges and equipped with
tumbler lockset. Provide identification reading "Napkins" and
"Tampons" at coin slots; brand name advertising is not allowed. so
Capacity not less than 31 napkins and 22 tampons.
2 . Operation: Double coin mechanisms for fifty-cent operation.
3 . Subject to conformance with requirements, provide "Model B-2800x211, so
Bobrick.
F. Sanitary Napkin Disposal Units - (SND)
w
1. Surface Mounted: Fabricate of 22 gauge satin-finished stainless
steel, all welded construction, tightly self-closing top cover and
locking door panel with continuous, stainless steel piano hinge, AW
and bullet catch and removable plastic receptacle.
2 . Subject to conformance with requirements, provide "Model B-25411,
Bobrick.
Wo
G. Soap Dispensers - (SD)
1. Liquid Soap Dispenser, Surface Mounted Type: Minimum 1-liter
cacapacity, ""�
p y, satin-finished stainless steel container. Provide with
hinged, vandal-resistant, filler top.
2 . Equip unit with corrosion-resistant valve for dispensing soap in
liquid form. m ,
3. Subject to conformance with requirements, provide "Model B-211211,
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800-4 oft
4W
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON. MA RB #96079
b. Sloan Valve Co.
C. World Dryer
3. Infant-Care Products
a. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
b. American Infant Care Products, Inc.
C. General Accessory Manufacturing Co. (GAMCO)
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Stainless Steel: AISI Type 302/304, with polished No. 4 finish,
0.034-inch (22-gage) minimum thickness.
B. Brass: Leaded and unleaded, flat products, ASTM B 19; rods, shapes,
forgoing, and flat products with finished edges, ASTM B 16; Castings,
ASTM B 30.
C. Sheet Steel: Cold-rolled, commercial quality ASTM A 366, 0.04-inch
(20-gage) minimum. Surface preparation and metal pretreatment as
required for applied finish.
as
D. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 527, G60.
0M E. Chromium Plating: Nickel and chromium electro-deposited on base metal,
ASTM B 456, Type SC 2 .
F. Baked Enamel Finish: Factory-applied, gloss white, baked acrylic enamel
ON coating.
G. Mirror Glass: Nominal 6.0-mm (0.23-inch) thick, conforming to ASTM C
we 1036, Tempered Type I, Class 1, Quality q2, with silver electro-plated
copper coating, and protective organic coating.
H. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153, hot-dip galvanized after
so fabrication.
I. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as
on accessory unit, or of galvanized steel where concealed.
2 .3 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
go A. Paper Towel Dispensers - (PTD) , Toilet Rooms.
1. Surface Mounted Towel Dispensers: Fabricate of 22 gauge satin-
finish stainless steel, all welded construction, with piano hinged
front equipped with tumbler lockset.
2 . Capacity: Not less than 400 C-fold or 525 multifold paper towels
without special adapters.
w 3 . Subject to conformance with requirements, provide "Model B-262",
Bobrick.
B. Paper Towel Dispensers - (PTD) Casework locations.
1. Surface Mounted Towel Dispensers: Fabricate of 22 gauge satin-
finish stainless steel, all welded construction, with piano hinged
front equipped with tumbler lockset.
2 . Capacity: Not less than 200 C-fold or 275 multifold paper towels
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800-3
ow
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
40
B. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide products of same manufacturer for
each type of accessory unit and for units exposed to view in same areas,
unless otherwise acceptable to Architect.
C. Catalog Standards: Manufacturer's catalog numbers may be indicated for
convenience in identifying certain work. Unless modified by notation
on drawings or otherwise specified, catalog description for indicated .w
number constitutes requirements for each item.
1. The use of catalog numbers and specific requirements set forth in
drawings and specifications are not intended to preclude the use
of other listed manufacturer's product or procedures which may be
equivalent, but are given for purpose of establishing standard of
design and quality for materials, construction, and workmanship. „&
2 . The approval of other listed manufacturers' products does not
relieve the Contractor from compliance with the detailed
requirements of this Section.
oft
D. Barrier-Free Compliance: Furnish products which comply with all
applicable Barrier-Free Washroom Guidelines. In particular ADA, UFAS,
ANSI and AAB regulations and guidelines. wr
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Coordination: Coordinate accessory locations, installation, and
sequencing with other work to avoid interference with and ensure proper
installation, operation, adjustment, cleaning, and servicing of toilet
accessory items.
sw
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by mirror manufacturer, !
agreeing to replace any mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage
defects within warranty period.
B. Warrant Period: 15
Warranty years from date of Substantial Completion.
C. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may
have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in .w
addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the
Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS .w
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide toilet
accessories by one of the following:
1. Toilet and Bath Accessories: �r
a. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
b. McKinney / Parker Washroom Accessories Corp.
wr
C. General Accessory Manufacturing Co. (GAMCO)
2 . Warm-Air Dryers:
nw
a. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800-2
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
SECTION 10800 - TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
00 A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
40 who performs this Work. Note also all Addenda.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Toilet and bath accessories
2 . Warm-air dryers
3 . Infant-care products
B. Related Sections: the following sections contain requirements that
related to this Section:
1. Section 06105, "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for installation of wood
blocking.
2 . Section 09300, "Tile" for ceramic tile accessories.
3 . Section 10155, "Toilet and Shower Compartments" for toilet
compartments and related accessories.
4. Division 15 Sections for under lavatory guards, handicapped
accessible shower modules and accessories.
5. Division 16 Sections for power and wiring of electrical
ON accessories.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
ON A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specifications Sections.
as B. Product data for each toilet accessory item specified, including
construction details relative to materials, dimensions, gauges,
profiles, mounting method, specified options, and finishes.
C. Schedule indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations
(by room) for each toilet accessory item to be provided for project.
D. Setting drawings where cutouts are required in other work, including
templates, substrate preparation instructions, and directions for
preparing cutouts and installing anchorage devices.
E. Maintenance instructions including replaceable parts and service
recommendations.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Inserts and Anchorages: Furnish accessory manufacturers' standard
inserts and anchoring devices that must be set in concrete or built into
masonry. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800-1
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
1. Within each area, independent testing agency shall randomly select
an operable panel partition installation and test according to ASTM
E 336 for complying NIC. The NIC rating shall be calculated
according to ASTM E 413.
B. Repair or replace operable panel partitions within areas where test
results indicate partitions do not comply with requirements and retest
new partitions.
3 .5 ADJUSTING
A. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts; adjust to ensure smooth, easy
operation.
OW
B. Pass Doors: Adjust to operate smoothly and easily, without binding or
warping. Check and readjust operating hardware. Confirm that latches
and locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding.
3 .6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Clean soiled surfaces, metal surfaces, work surfaces, on completing
installation of operable panel partitions, to remove dust, fingerprints,
adhesives, and other foreign materials according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable
to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure operable panel partitions are
without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
C. Replace panels that cannot be cleaned and repaired, in a manner approved
by Architect, before time of Substantial Completion.
3 .7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Start-up Services: Provide the services of a factory-authorized service
representative to provide start-up service and to demonstrate and train
Owner's representative.
1. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
2 . Train Owner's representative on procedures and schedules related
to start-up and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and
preventative maintenance.
3 . Review data in the "Operating and Maintenance Manual. "
END OF SECTION 10651
lA1►
OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS 10651 - 7
am
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
so
complying with CFFA-W-101-B, Type II and indicated
fire-test-response characteristics; laminated to natural cork
tackboard.
2. Size: Three panels wide by 48" high. an
3 . Trim: Aluminum slip-on or snap-on trim with no visible screws or
exposed joints; miter corners to a neat, hairline joint.
4. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of am
colors.
5. Subject to conformance with above, provide the following:
a. Modular Technology 0519: Both sides of partition. so
b. Small Classroom 1512 and Small Classroom 1513 : Both sides of
partition.
C. Cafeteria 0120 and Faculty Dining 0121 (individual panel) : sr
Faculty Dining side of partition.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
am
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine flooring, structural support, and opening for compliance with so
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance of operable panel partitions.
B. Notify Owner's Representative and Architect and do not proceed with go
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION OF STRUCTURAL STEEL
am
A. Provide open holes in structural steel for attachment of operable panel,
hangers, etc.
00
1. Drill holes for bolts 1116" larger than the nominal diameter of the
bolts. Burning to enlarge unfair holes is not permitted. Ream
holes that must be enlarged. Install bolts snugly and draw up
tight with full grip. +o
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install operable panel partitions and accessories complying with ASTM w
E 557 after other finishing operations including painting, have been
completed.
B. Install operable panel partitions that conform to Drawings and approved
shop drawings and in strict compliance with manufacturer's written
installation instructions.
C. Match operable panel partitions for color and pattern by installing
partitions from cartons in same sequence as manufactured and packaged,
if so numbered. Broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed panels are not +*�
acceptable.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Extent and Testing Methodology: Arrange for testing the completed
operable panel partition installation in successive stages in areas of
extent described below. Partitions are to be properly adjusted and .r
fitted to ensure compliance with NIC requirements.
OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS 10651 - 6 Wo
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON. MA KB #96079
40
J. Suspension Tracks: Formed Steel, it gauge ( .304 cm) with overhead
supports of .38" (10)diameter adjustable steel hanger rods designed for
size and type of operable panel partition assembly indicated. Track
deflection independent of structural support system shall be no more
than 0.10 inch between bracket supports.
1. Include manufacturer's steel brackets to support track at running
surface.
K. Panel Finish Materials: Manufacturer's standard mildew-resistant vinyl,
ON complying with CFFA-W-101-A for Type II material, weighing not less than
15 oz. per lineal yard, Class A rated.
L. Vertical Seals: Deep nesting, interlocking steel astragals mounted on
each edge of panel with continuous vinyl acoustical seal.
M. Horizontal Top Seals: Continuous-contact extruded vinyl bulb shape seal
ON with pairs of non-contacting vinyl fingers exerting consistent pressure
on track when extended.
N. Horizontal Bottom Seals: Retractable seal exerting positive pressure
downward ensuring horizontal and vertical sealing and resisting panel
movement.
1. Automatic operable seals providing nominal (111) operating clearance
with an operating range at plus or minus 1/8" and shall
automatically drop as panels are positioned.
to O. Final Closure: Positive lever activated adjustable mechanical closure
expanding from trailing panel edge to create a positive acoustical seal.
1. Jamb hinged closure.
a. Fixed jamb at lead end.
b. Adjustable hinged jamb at stack end.
C. Provide jambs finished to match panels.
2 .3 ACCESSORIES
A. Pass Doors: Fabricated to comply with recommendations of ANSI A117.1.
and the Architectural Access Board. Swinging door built into and
matching panel finish and thickness, complete with frames and operating
hardware. Hinges finished to match other exposed hardware.
1. Single Pass Door: 36 by 80 inches with the following:
a. Door Seals: Mechanically operated floor seal on panels
containing pass doors.
!""
b. Panic hardware.
C. Concealed door closer.
d. Lock: Key-operated lock cylinder, operable from both sides of
door. Refer to Section 08710 "Door Hardware" for cylinder and
keying.
B. Work Surfaces:
1. Surface: Self-healing, tackable, vinyl-coated fabric wall covering,
ow OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS 10651 - 5
ow
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA RB #96079
wie
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following:
1. Advanced Equipment Corp.
2 . Modernfold, Inc.
3 . Panelfold, Inc.
4. Hufcor Inc.
2.2 OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS
A. Panel Locations:
w
1. Modular Technology 0519
2 . Small Classroom 1512 and Small Classroom 1513
3 . Cafeteria 0120 and Faculty Dining 0121 (individual panel)
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
1. "Alpha Series 3MC25111, Advanced Equipment Corp.
2. "Acousti-Seal 930, 932, #17 Track System", Modernfold, Inc.
3 . "Model 820, Type 7/8 Head", Panelfold, Inc.
4 . "Spectrum 6550, 6650, Type 36 Track", Hufcor Inc.
C. Panel Configuration: Operable panels as follows:
1. Manually operated, paired panels. No triple groups of panels.
2 . Manually operated, individual panels.
D. Panel Construction: Top reinforcing as required to support suspension
components and as follows:
1. Steel Frame: Steel face sheets welded directly to steel frames.
a. Face Sheets for Steel Frame: Tension-leveled 21 gage steel
welded to frame.
b. Steel Channel Frame: Not less than 16 gage, 14 gage top
member.
C. Panel skins which are adhesive laminated to frame or otherwise
not welded to frame will not be acceptable.
E. Panel Thickness: 3 inches.
F. Panel Weight: 8-12 psf.
G. sound Transmission Class (STC) : 51 (50 STC minimum) .
H. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard, finished to match exposed hardware
on partition.
1. Provide full butt type hinges, mounted to reinforced frame.
2. Provide hinges to match panel finish.
I. Carriers: Four ball-bearing wheel, all steel tired trolley system as
required for type, size, and weight of partition for ease of operation. MW
OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS 10651 - 4 oft
4M
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
� #9607Q
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: To qualify for acceptance, an
independent testing agency must demonstrate to the Architect's
ON satisfaction, based on an evaluation of agency-submitted criteria
conforming to ASTM E 699, that it has the experience and capability to
satisfactorily conduct the testing indicated without delaying progress
of the Work.
D. Surface Burning Characteristics: Provide panel finish face with the
following surface burning characteristics as determined by testing
identical products per ASTM E 84, by UL or other testing and inspecting
agencies acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Flame Spread: 25 or less.
2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
No
A. Protect operable p panel partitions from damage during delivery, handling,
storage, and installation.
on B. Store operable panel partitions in manufacturer's protective packages
only on edge, blocked off ground. Keep units in manufacturer's
protective packages until time of installation, inside well-ventilated
area protected from weather, moisture, humidity, soiling and excessive
temperature.
C. Protect surfaces of operable panel partitions from damage due to
abrasion, dust, and other conditions.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Coordination: Coordinate accessory locations, installation, and
sequencing with other work to avoid interference with and ensure proper
installation, operation, adjustment, cleaning, and servicing of operable
panel partitions.
1.8 WARRANTY
!w A. Operable Panel Partition Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed
by the partition manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace window
units that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified
!o warranty period. Failures include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, acoustical
performance, or pass doors.
2. Faulty operation of panels and hardware.
3 . Deterioration of metals, finishes, and other materials beyond
normal use for the specified installation.
B. Warranty Period: 1 year after the date of Substantial Completion.
C. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights or remedies
that the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents
and is in addition to and runs concurrent with other warranties made by
the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS 10651 - 3
as
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA RB #96079
Aw
partition and accessory specified.
C. Shop drawings showing location and extent of operable panel partitions. am
Include plans, elevations, large-scale details of anchorages, and
accessory items. Indicate unit conditions at openings, location and
installation requirements for hardware, direction of travel, and dynamic
loading on building structure. ON
D. Template drawings prepared by manufacturer showing location of items
supported or anchored by permanent construction. so
E. Samples for initial selection purposes in the form of manufacturer's
color charts showing a full range of colors, textures, and patterns
available for each type panel finish face indicated. wet
1. Include similar samples of material for panel edges and accessories
involving color selection.
F. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of operable panel
partitions certifying that their products comply with specified
requirements. ..
G. Maintenance data to include in the "Operating and Maintenance Manual"
specified in Division 1 for the following:
.s
1. Precautions for cleaning panel finish face materials and methods
that could be detrimental to finishes and performance.
2. Instructions for restretching sagging or distorted finish face. „m
3 . Electric Operating devices.
H. Acoustical test reports from and based on tests performed by a qualified
independent testing agency certifying that the product and materials so
furnished comply with specified requirements.
I. Catalog Standards: Manufacturer's catalog numbers may be shown on so
drawings for convenience in identifying certain work. Unless modified
by notation on drawings or otherwise specified, catalog description for
indicated number constitutes requirements for each item.
on
1. The use of catalog numbers and specific requirements set forth in
drawings and specifications are not intended to preclude the use
of any other listed manufacturers' product or procedures which may so
be equivalent, but are given for purpose of establishing standard
of design and quality for materials, construction, and workmanship.
2. The approval of other listed manufacturers' products does not ow
relieve the Contractor from compliance with the detailed
requirements of this Section.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain Operable Panel Partitions from the
same manufacturer as fire-rated partition.
B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who is
certified in writing by the operable panel partition manufacturer as
qualified to install the manufacturer's partition systems.
OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS 10651 - 2 ss
an
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON. MA RB #9607
SECTION 10651 - OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this Work. Note also all Addenda.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Manually operated, paired panel partition.
2 . Manually operated, individual
y p panel partition.
3 . Preparation of structure to receive operable panel partitions
support systems.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that
relate to this Section:
1. Steel support framing is specified in Section 05120 "Structural
Steel" .
2. Section 08710 "Door Hardware" for pass door lock cylinder and
keying.
3 . Metal framing for attachment of trim is specified in Section 09255
"Gypsum Board Assemblies" .
no 1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Acoustical Performance: Provide operable panel partitions tested by a
qualified independent testing agency for the following acoustic
properties according to following test method:
1. Sound Transmission Requirements: Operable panel partition assembly
�w tested in a full-scale opening (14 feet by 9 feet) for laboratory
sound transmission loss performance according to ASTM E 90,
determined by ASTM E 413 and rated for an STC plus or minus 1 as
follows:
a. Sound Transmission Class (STC) : As listed for each partition.
A B. Noise Reduction Requirements: Operable Panel Partition assembly tested
by a qualified independent agency for compliance with ASTM C423 and
rated for NRC as follows:
1. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC) : As listed for each partition.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the
Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data on physical characteristics, durability, and
surface-burning characteristics for each type of operable panel
OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS 10651 - 1
wA
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA RB #96079
b. Interior of cabinet.
2.7 FIRE BLANKETS 4W
A. General: Provide fire blankets of manufacturer's standard size, but not
less than 62" x 8411, fabricated from 100% reprocessed wood, treated for
fire resistance in conformance with Federal Specification #CS-191-53. so
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine walls and partitions for thickness and framing for cabinets to
verify cabinet depth and mounting prior to cabinet installation. '
B. Notify Architect and do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected. mar
3 .2 INSTALLATION
A. Follow manufacturer's printed instructions for installation. "'
B. Install in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not
indicated, at heights to comply with applicable regulations of governing
authorities.
1. Prepare recesses in walls for cabinets as required by type and size
of cabinet and style of trim and to comply with manufacturer's *0
instructions.
2. Fasten mounting brackets and cabinets to structure, square and
plumb. W,
C. Inspect fire extinguishers upon placing into service. Recharge or
replace fire extinguishers not fully charged.
D. Comply with tagging requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
END OF SECTION 10522
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES 10522 - 4
wu
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHn�r_vTrnr, MA
R #96070
1. Enameled Steel: Manufacturer's standard finish, hollow steel door
construction with tubular stiles and rails.
2. Door Glazing: Fully tempered 6 mm. float glass complying with
ASTM C 1048, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, Kind FT, Class as
follows:
1-0 a. Class 1 (clear) .
F. Extinguisher and Extinguisher Fire Blanket Cabinets: Identify fire
extinguisher and fire blanket in cabinet with "FIRE EXTINGUISHER or FIRE
IN EXTINGUISHER AND FIRE BLANKET" lettering applied to door. Provide
lettering to comply with authorities having jurisdiction for letter
style, color, size, spacing, and location.
1. Application Process: Silk screen or sealed vinyl applique.
2. Door Style: Vertical Duo Panel.
r G. Bracket Mounted Fire Extinguishers: Identify bracket-mounted
extinguishers with "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to
wall surface. Use letter size, style, and location as selected by
Architect.
1. Application Process: Silkscreen or sealed vinyl applique.
H. Door Hardware: Provide manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware
of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style
indicated. Provide either lever handle with cam-action latch, or
exposed or concealed door pull and friction latch. Provide concealed
or continuous-type hinge permitting door to open 180 deg.
2 .5 FINISHES FOR CABINETS, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative
to applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying
temporary strippable protective covering prior to shipping.
2.6 STEEL CABINET FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation: Solvent-clean surfaces complying with SSPS-SP 1
to remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair
00 paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated
steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5 (white metal blast cleaning) or SSPC-SP
8 (pickling) .
B. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and
pretreatment, apply
manufacturer's standard two-coat baked-enamel finish consisting of prime
coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with paint manufacturer's
instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film
thickness of 2.0 mils.
1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's
standard choices for color and gloss. Paint the following:
a. Exterior of cabinet.
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES 10522 - 3
,.t
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079 awe
1. J.L. Industries.
2 . Larsen's Manufacturing Co.
3 . Potter-Roemer, Inc.
2.2 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
.w
A. General: Provide fire extinguishers for each cabinet and other
locations indicated, in colors and finishes selected by Architect from
manufacturer's standard, that comply with Underwriters' Laboratories.
B. Multipurpose Dry Chemical Type: UL-rated 4-A:60-B:C, 10-1b nominal
capacity, in enameled steel container.
2.3 MOUNTING BRACKETS
A. Brackets: Designed to prevent accidentally dislodging extinguisher, of
sizes required for type and capacity of extinguisher indicated, in so
plated finish.
1. Provide brackets for extinguishers not located in cabinets.
no
2 .4 CABINETS
A. Construction: Manufacturer's standard box, with trim, frame, door, and go
hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated.
Weld joints and grind smooth. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.
1. Provide U.L. or Warnock-Hersey certified fire rated box (tub) am
construction, where installed in rated wall construction.
B. Cabinet Type: Suitable for containing the following: aw
1. Fire extinguisher.
2. Fire extinguisher and fire blanket.
C. Cabinet Mounting: Suitable for the following mounting conditions:
1. Recessed: Cabinet box (tub) fully recessed in walls of sufficient
depth to suit style of trim indicated.
2. Surface Mounted: Cabinet box fully exposed and mounted directly
on wall.
D. Trim Style: Fabricate trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded,
and ground smooth.
1. Exposed Trim: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame A`
overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and
wall return at outer edge (backbend) .
a. Rolled-edge trim with 1-1/4-inch backbend depth.
b. Trim Metal: Of same metal and finish as door.
E. Door Material and Construction: Manufacturer's standard door
construction, of material indicated, coordinated with cabinet types and
trim styles selected.
per
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES 10522 - 2
oft
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
R # 6079
SECTION 10522 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1. 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this work. Note also all Addenda.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Fire extinguishers.
w 2. Fire blankets.
3. Fire extinguisher cabinets.
4. Fire extinguishers and blanket cabinets.
VW 5. Fire extinguisher mounting brackets.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the
Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for cabinets include rough-in dimensions, details showing
mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding
construction, door hardware, cabinet type and materials, trim style,
door construction, panel style, and materials.
C. Samples for initial selection purposes in the form of manufacturer's
color charts consisting of actual units or sections of units showing
full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of
cabinet finish indicated or exposed to view.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain extinguishers and cabinets from
one source from a single manufacturer.
!X B. Coordination: verify that cabinets are sized to accommodate type and
capacity of extinguishers indicated and provided by Owner under separate
Contract.
C. UL-Listed Products: Fire extinguishers shall be UL listed with UL
listing mark for type, rating, and classification of extinguisher.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 .1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following:
Wo
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES 10522 - 1
on
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
so
b. Interior of cabinet.
2.7 FIRE BLANKETS
oft
A. General: Provide fire blankets of manufacturer's standard size, but not
less than 62" x 8411, fabricated from 100% reprocessed wood, treated for
fire resistance in conformance with Federal Specification #CS-191-53.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine walls and partitions for thickness and framing for cabinets to
verify cabinet depth and mounting prior to cabinet installation.
B. Notify Architect and do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Follow manufacturer's printed instructions for installation. w
B. Install in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not
indicated, at heights to comply with applicable regulations of governing
authorities.
1 . Prepare recesses in walls for cabinets as required by type and size
of cabinet and style of trim and to comply with manufacturer's
wies
instructions.
2 . Fasten mounting brackets and cabinets to structure, square and
plumb.
C. Inspect fire extinguishers upon placing into service. Recharge or
replace fire extinguishers not fully charged.
D. Comply with tagging requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
END OF SECTION 10522 ww
.uR
ss
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES 10522 - 4
on
4
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA
RS #96079
1. Enameled Steel: Manufacturer's standard finish, hollow steel door
construction with tubular stiles and rails.
2. Door Glazing: Fully tempered 6 mm. float glass complying with
ASTM C 1048, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, Kind FT, Class as
follows:
a. Class 1 (clear) .
F. Extinguisher and Extinguisher Fire Blanket Cabinets: Identify fire
extinguisher and fire blanket in cabinet with "FIRE EXTINGUISHER or FIRE
EXTINGUISHER AND FIRE BLANKET" lettering applied to door. Provide
lettering to comply with authorities having jurisdiction for letter
style, color, size, spacing, and location.
1. Application Process: Silk screen or sealed vinyl applique.
2 . Door Style: Vertical Duo Panel.
G. Bracket Mounted Fire Extinguishers: Identify bracket-mounted
extinguishers with "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to
wall surface. Use letter size, style, and location as selected by
1A
Architect.
1. Application Process: Silkscreen or sealed vinyl applique.
H. Door Hardware: Provide manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware
of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style
indicated. Provide either lever handle with cam-action latch, or
exposed or concealed door pull and friction latch. Provide concealed
or continuous-type hinge permitting door to open 180 deg.
2.5 FINISHES FOR CABINETS, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative
to applying and designating finishes.
AM
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying
temporary strippable protective covering prior to shipping.
2.6 STEEL CABINET FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation: Solvent-clean surfaces complying with SSPS-SP 1
to remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair
paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated
steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5 (white metal blast cleaning) or SSPC-SP
8 (pickling) .
B. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreatment, apply
manufacturer's standard two-coat baked-enamel finish consisting of prime
coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with paint manufacturer's
instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film
thickness of 2.0 mils.
1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's
standard choices for color and gloss. Paint the following:
a. Exterior of cabinet.
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES 10522 - 3
oft
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
am
1. J.L. Industries.
2 . Larsen's Manufacturing Co.
3 . Potter-Roemer, Inc. Am
2.2 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. General: Provide fire extinguishers for each cabinet and other on
locations indicated, in colors and finishes selected by Architect from
manufacturer's standard, that comply with Underwriters' Laboratories.
B. Multipurpose Dry Chemical Type: UL-rated 4-A:60-B:C, 10-1b nominal
capacity, in enameled steel container.
2.3 MOUNTING BRACKETS
A. Brackets: Designed to prevent accidentally dislodging extinguisher, of
sizes required for type and capacity of extinguisher indicated, in
plated finish.
1 . Provide brackets for extinguishers not located in cabinets.
2.4 CABINETS
A. Construction: Manufacturer's standard box, with trim, frame, door, and .R
hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated.
Weld joints and grind smooth. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.
1. Provide U.L. or Warnock-Hersey certified fire rated box (tub) au
construction, where installed in rated wall construction.
B. Cabinet Type: Suitable for containing the following: AP
1. Fire extinguisher.
2 . Fire extinguisher and fire blanket.
ws
C. Cabinet Mounting: Suitable for the following mounting conditions:
1. Recessed: Cabinet box (tub) fully recessed in walls of sufficient
depth to suit style of trim indicated. me
2 . Surface Mounted: Cabinet box fully exposed and mounted directly
on wall.
D. Trim Style: Fabricate trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded,
and ground smooth.
1. Exposed Trim: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame
overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and
wall return at outer edge (backbend) .
a. Rolled-edge trim with 1-1/4-inch backbend depth.
b. Trim Metal: Of same metal and finish as door.
E. Door Material and Construction: Manufacturer's standard door w►
construction, of material indicated, coordinated with cabinet types and
trim styles selected.
ww
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES 10522 - 2
ON
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
SECTION 10522 - FIRE EXTINGIIISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this work. Note also all Addenda.
1.2 SUMMARY
NO A. This Section includes the following:
1. Fire extinguishers.
2 . Fire blankets.
3 . Fire extinguisher cabinets.
4 . Fire extinguishers and blanket cabinets.
5 . Fire extinguisher mounting brackets.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
so A. General : Submit the following according to the Conditions of the
Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for cabinets include rough-in dimensions, details showing
mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding
construction, door hardware, cabinet type and materials, trim style,
door construction, panel style, and materials.
C. Samples for initial selection purposes in the form of manufacturer's
color charts consisting of actual units or sections of units showing
full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of
cabinet finish indicated or exposed to view.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain extinguishers and cabinets from
one source from a single manufacturer.
B. Coordination: verify that cabinets are sized to accommodate type and
capacity of extinguishers indicated and provided by Owner under separate
Contract.
C. UL-Listed Products: Fire extinguishers shall be UL listed with UL
listing mark for type, rating, and classification of extinguisher.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 .1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following:
raw
FIRE EXTINGIIISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES 10522 - 1
■w
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
oft
lockers. No exposed fasteners will be permitted.
G. Anchor locker benches to floors. Uniformly space pedestals not more than
72 inches apart, and securely fasten to bench top and anchor to floor.
3.2 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION
A. Adjust doors and latches to operate easily without binding. Verify that
integral locking devices are operating properly.
B. Clean interior and exposed exterior surfaces and polish nonferrous metal
surfaces.
C. Protect lockers and benches from damage, abuse, dust, dirt, stain, or
paint. Do not permit locker use during construction.
D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace locker units or benches that cannot
be restored to factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and
procedures recommended or furnished by locker manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 10505
w
ww
METAL LOCKERS 10505 — 8
ob
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
000 NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative
to applying and designating finishes.
40
B. Finish all steel surfaces and accessories, except prefinished
stainless-steel and chrome-plated surfaces.
C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying
strippable, temporary protective covering prior to shipment.
D. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or
adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within % of the range of
approved samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not
acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable
if they are within the range of approved samples and they are assembled
or installed to minimize contrast.
2.11 STEEL SHEET FINISHES
A. Surface Preparation: Solvent-clean surfaces complying with SSPC-SP 1
to remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair
paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel
complying with SSPC-SP 5 (White Metal Blast Cleaning) or SSPC-SP 8
(Pickling) , and phosphatide surfaces.
B. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply
manufacturer's standard baked-enamel finish consisting of a
thermosetting topcoat. Comply with paint manufacturer's instructions
for application and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of
1.1 mils (0.028 mm) on doors, frames, and 0.7 mil (0.018 mm) elsewhere.
1. Color and Gloss: Custom color to match #62 Midnight Blue, Lyon
Metal Products.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .1 INSTALLATION
A. Install metal lockers complete with accessories according to
manufacturer's recommendations. Install plumb, level, rigid, and flush.
B. Connect together lockers with standard fasteners according to
manufacturer's recommendations, with no exposed fasteners on face frames
or end panels.
C. Anchor lockers to floors and walls at intervals recommended by
manufacturer but no greater than 36 inches. Install anchors through
back-up reinforcing plates where necessary to avoid metal distortion,
using concealed fasteners.
D. Install recess trim to lockers at sidewalls using concealed fasteners.
Provide hairline joints and concealed splice plates.
low
E. Install sloping top units to lockers using concealed fasteners. Provide
hairline joints and concealed splice plates.
F. Install finished end panels to conceal exposed ends of nonrecessed
METAL LOCKERS 10505 - 7
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA 8B #9607g
mm) high. Number lockers in sequence indicated. Attach plates to each
locker door, near top, centered, with at least 2 fasteners of same
finish as number plate.
C. Continuously Sloping Tops: Where indicated on drawings, for wardrobe and
athletic lockers, provide manufacturer's standard continuously sloped
top, not less than 0.0359-inch (0.91-mm) steel sheet. Provide closures
at ends and sloped corner fillers.
D. Recess Trim: Manufacturer's standard 18 gage minimum steel sheet trim
with concealed fastening clips. **
E. Filler Panels:18 gage minimum steel sheet, factory fabricated.
F. Finished End Panels: Manufacturer's standard 14 gage minimum steel
sheet end-finishing panels to conceal exposed ends of nonrecessed
lockers.
1. Provide one-piece panels for double-row (back-to-back) locker ends.
2 .8 LOCKER BENCHES 4"
A. Bench Tops: Provide manufacturer's standard one-piece units, of the
following material, minimum 9-1/2 inches by 1-1/4 inches thick, with
rounded corners and edges: *a
1. Laminated maple with one coat of clear sealer on all surfaces, and
one coat of clear lacquer on top and sides.
B. Pedestals: Provide manufacturer's standard pedestal supports, with
predrilled fastener holes, complete with fasteners and anchors, and as
follows:
1. Type: Tubular steel, minimum 1-1/2" diameter, threaded on both
ends, with standard pipe flange at top and bell-shaped cast base;
baked-enamel finish; floor anchored with concealed fasteners. w
2 . Color: Match locker units.
C. Furnish a minimum of two pedestals for each bench, with pedestal spacing w
not more than 72 inches o.c.
2.9 FABRICATION
00
A. Unit Principle: Fabricate each locker with an individual door and
frame, individual top, bottom, back, and shelves, and common
intermediate uprights separating compartments
B. Fabricate lockers square, rigid, and without warp, with metal faces flat
and free of dents or distortion. Make exposed metal edges free of sharp
edges and burrs, and safe to touch. Weld frame members together to form
a rigid, 1-piece structure.
1. Form locker body panels, doors, shelves and accessories from
1-piece steel sheet unless otherwise indicated.
2.10 FINISHES, GENERAL
.wr
METAL LOCKERS 10505 - 6
00
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON A RB #96079
2.5 ATHLETIC LOCKERS
A. Body: Form tops and bottoms of 16 gage minimum steel sheet.
1. Form backs of 18 gage minimum galvanized steel sheet.
2. Form sides, end panels, and intermediate partitions of 0.070-inch
minimum expanded metal welded to 12 gage minimum steel angle or 16
gage minimum galvanized steel channel frame.
B. Frames: Form welded frames of 16 gage minimum steel sheet channels or
12 gage minimum steel angles.
1. Cross Frames: Form intermediate channel cross frames for double-
or multiple-tier lockers of 16 gage minimum steel sheet.
C. Door: 0.070-inch (1.7-mm) expanded metal welded to 0.1046-inch (2.6-mm)
minimum steel angle frame with manufacturer's standard steel sheet lock
? ' panel welded to each side of door.
1. Reinforcing: Brace inner face of 24-inch- (610-mm-) wide,
expanded-mesh, single-tier doors.
D. Hinges: Heavy-duty, 0.050-inch-thick minimum steel, full-loop,
5-knuckle, tight pin, 2 inches high minimum. Weld to inside of frame
r and secure to door with not less than 2 factory-installed fasteners that
are completely concealed and tamperproof when door is closed.
1. Provide at least 3 hinges for each door 42 inches and higher, and
at least 2 hinges for each door less than 42 inches high.
E. Recessed Handle and Latch: Manufacturer' s 20 gauge stainless steel
housing to form recess for latch lifter and locking devices; non-
protruding latch lifter containing strike and automatic, prelocking pry
resistant latch mechanism, having provisions for padlock.
2 .6 LOCKS
A. Fabricate Wardrobe (Corridor) lockers with the following locking
devices:
1. Built-in Combination Lock: Key-controlled 3-number dialing
combination lock with combination change made automatically with
on a control key. Provide bolt operation as follows:
a. Bolt Operation: Automatically locking deadbolt.
2.7 LOCKER ACCESSORIES
A. Equipment: Furnish each locker with the following items, unless
otherwise shown:
1. Single-,and Double-Tier Units: 1 double-prong ceiling hook, and
not fewer than 2 single-prong wall hooks.
B. Number Plates: Manufacturer's standard etched, embossed, or stamped,
nonferrous-metal number plates with numerals not less than 3/8 inch (9
METAL LOCKERS 10505 - 5
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KE #96079
housing to form recess for latch lifter and locking devices; non
protruding latch lifter containing strike and automatic, prelocking, pry
resistant latch mechanism with latching action as follows:
1. Provide minimum three-point latching for each door more than 42
inches; minimum two-point latching for each door 42 inches high or
less.
2. Provide manufacturer's latch construction for sound-deadening
consisting of polyethylene or nylon glides.
2.4 WARDROBE LOCKERS tom+
A. Body: Form backs, tops, bottoms, sides, and intermediate partitions of
flanged 0.0239-inch (0.61-mm) minimum steel sheet.
too
1. Form exposed ends of nonrecessed lockers of 0.0598-inch (1.5-mm)
minimum steel sheet.
so
B. Frames: Form channel frames of 0.0598-inch (1.5-mm) minimum steel
sheet. Form continuous integral strike on vertical frame members or
weld 0.0897-inch (2.3-mm) minimum latch hooks to latch strike frame.
1. Cross Frames: Form intermediate channel cross frames to double-
or triple-tier lockers of 0.0598-inch (1.5-mm) minimum steel sheet.
2. Frame Vents: Fabricate vertical face frames with vents. WA
C. Shelf: Form 0.0239-inch (0.61-mm) minimum steel sheet hat shelf in
single-tier units.
D. Door: One-piece steel sheet, flanged at all edges, constructed to
prevent springing when opening or closing. Fabricate to swing 180
degrees.
1. Thickness: 16 gage minimum.
E. Reinforcing: Brace or reinforce inner face of doors over 15 inches (381
mm) wide.
F. Louvered Vents: Stamped, louvered vents in door face, as follows:
1. Single-Tier Lockers: No fewer than 6 louver openings top and
bottom.
G. Hinges : Steel, full-loop, 5-knuckle tight pin, 2 inches (51 mm) high
minimum. Weld to inside of frame and secure to door with not fewer than
2 factory-installed fasteners that are completely concealed and
tamperproof when door is closed.
1. Provide at least 3 hinges for each door over 42 inches high; at
least 2 hinges for each door 42 inches high or less.
H. Projecting Handle and Latch: Positive automatic, prelocking, pry-
resistant latch and pull with rubber silencers; chromium-plated, heavy-
duty, vandal proof lift-up handle, containing strike and eye for ""k
padlock.
At
METAL LOCKERS 10505 - 4
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA RB #96079
mik 3 . Double-tier Athletic Lockers (12 x 18 x 60, 18 x 24 x 60, 24 x 24
x 60) :
40 a. "Team Mate Ventilated Locker", Interior / Medart.
b. "Invincible II Locker" , Penco Products, Inc.
C. "Heavy Duty Ventilated Locker", Republic Storage Systems
Company, Inc.
to
2 .2 MATERIALS
A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 366 (A 366M) , commercial-quality,
stretcher-leveled, cold-rolled carbon steel sheet, stretcher leveled,
free of buckling, scale, and surface imperfections.
B. Expanded Metal: ASTM F 1267, 0.070-inch- thick minimum, 3/4-inch mesh,
flattened carbon steel with at least 70 percent open area.
C. Fasteners: Zinc- or nickel-plated steel; slotless-type exposed bolt
heads; self-locking nuts or lock washers for nuts on moving parts.
D. Equipment: Manufacturer's standard plated steel hooks or coat rods.
2.3 WARDROBE LOCKERS (CORRIDORS)
A. Body: Form backs, tops, bottoms, sides, and intermediate partitions of
flanged 24 gage minimum steel sheet.
1. Form exposed ends of nonrecessed lockers of 16 gage minimum steel
sheet.
B. Frames: Form channel frames of 16 gage minimum steel sheet or 12 gage
pe angles. Form continuous integral strike on vertical frame members or
weld continuous flange.
C. Shelf: Form 16 gage minimum steel sheet hat shelf in single-tier units.
D. Door: One-piece steel sheet, flanged at all edges, constructed to
prevent springing when opening or closing. Fabricate to swing 180
degrees.
1. Thickness: 14 gage minimum.
1 E. Reinforcing: Brace or reinforce inner face of doors.
F. Concealed Vents: Provide slotted perforations in top and bottom
horizontal return flanges of doors.
G. Hinges: Steel, full-loop, 5- knuckle tight pin, 2 inches high minimum.
Weld to inside of frame and secure to door with not fewer than 2
factory-installed fasteners that are completely concealed and
tamperproof when door is closed.
1. Provide at least 3 hinges for each door over 42 inches high; at
fa least 2 hinges for each door 42 inches high or less.
H. Recessed Handle and Latch: Manufacturer's 20 gage stainless steel
10505 - 3
METAL LOCKERS
wo
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
E. Maintenance Instructions: Instructions for cleaning lockers and for
adjusting, repairing, and replacing locker doors and latching
mechanisms. W
1.4 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Section 03300
"Cast-in-Place Concrete. "
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of locker units and
accessories from one manufacturer.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver lockers until spaces to receive them are clean, dry, and
ready for locker installation.
B. Protect lockers from damage during delivery, handling, storage, and
installation.
C. Deliver master keys, control keys, and combination control charts to
r�s
Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
by one of the following:
1. Interior/Medart.
2 . Republic Storage Systems Co. , Inc. .
3 . Penco Products, Inc. .
4. DeBourgh Manufacturing Co.
5. Lyon Metal Products, Inc.
6. Art Metal Products
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
products specified for each type of locker listed:
1. Single-tier Wardrobe Lockers (Corridor Lockers, 12 x 12 x 60) :
a. "Delta Vandalsafe II" w/flange vent, Interior/Medart
b. "Guardian Plus" locker w/14ga.door, Penco Products, Inc.
C. "Heavy Duty Corridor" locker, Republic Storage Systems
Company, Inc. ,sue,
2. Single-tier Wardrobe Lockers (Personnel Lockers, 12 x 12 x 60) :
a. "Quiet Corridor Standard" , Interior/Medart. 400
b. "Standard" lockers, Republic Storage Systems, Inc.
C. "Vanguard" lockers, Penco Products.
r�s
METAL LOCKERS 10505 - 2
No NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA B #96079
Aw SECTION 10505 - METAL LOCKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
r the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this work. Note also all Addenda.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Wardrobe lockers, including the following:
a. Single-tier.
2 . Athletic lockers, including the following:
a. Single-tier.
b. Double-tier gym.
3 . Locker Room benches.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that
relate to this Section:
I. Section 03300 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete base.
2 . Section 04200 "Unit Masonry" for masonry base.
3. Section 06105 "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood furring and
grounds.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions
of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's printed data including materials,
accessories, construction, finishes, assembly, and installation
instructions for lockers and benches.
C. Shop Drawings: Layout and dimensions of metal lockers and benches.
Indicate relationship to adjoining surfaces. Show locker elevations and
details, fillers, trim, base, sloping tops, and accessories. Include
locker numbering sequence. Indicate installation and anchorage
t requirements.
D. Samples for Verification: For the following products, in manufacturer's
standard sizes, showing the full range of color, texture, and pattern
variations expected. Prepare Samples from the same material to be used
for the Work.
I-Lockers.
2 .Locker benches.
METAL LOCKERS 10505 - 1
4f
ALL MMENAra+e,ATM60.
one o No WA"ro toa 4 itom 0°
FEVIS 6
DUE w� aana
cxa eeR a n+s e. m m goo s
Pero
5
AnamOU AM REPUOM 120M
To M
I
i
NORTHAMPT
ALL VISITORS HI6 "°O1-
MUST `
REPORT TO
THE
MAIN OFFICE
BRAIU,l;
KAESTLE BOOS
ASSOCIATMINC.
8"MW. I ARCHITECTS
12" MAX. .. �.... .... ..
DRAWN sr: MANNA
DATE:
S
STANDARD INFORMATIONAL SIGN PROCALEEC: A5 NOTED TNU,: 16MI
SIGN
LAYOUT
DRAWING
DRAWING ND.:
10425-18
eaaxHnv►es�6F ww°°�rned
eea e�eers rva r iooaz
REVISIONS
ate wM= amm m
Ln
I
_
AOMnM AND NDOOVAUCM
To Im
(L
)-:
AREA OF
NORmAMPT
_ H16H SCHOOL.
_
REFUGE
.............
BRAUZ
i
to
KAESTLE BOOS
A�gAIE�INC. -
;ARCHITECTS_
oFAnN BY: t.AIRA
-;— DATE:
SCALE: A5 NOTE
N i PF"CT M.: 96079
TOILET
=-T-
SIGN
LAYOUT
L BRAS DRAWING
STANDARD H.C. SIGNS WAVING NO.:
10425-17
a..:,_.,
�u.�eeRe►wrn►e.suroo�.
eRarK.Horse,.w wwa,nros
see asst a rroa r ieovs
� �vrsraa
an w�c poi
oee�eeit a n» Rw Mw
i
i
~ I AMM AM NW00V^n0P=
vo M
GYMNASIUM
NORT"AMPT
H16H SCHOOL
sus am sr.
BRA LZ 'N'.
STANDARD DIRECTIONAL SIGNS
KAESTLE BOOS
�' j `ARCHITECTS._,
in Sr
iWA
_ Ir MLY140M/1e�IiM�ltf1Yr'
CAFETERIA DRAWN BY: LALRA
_ DATE:
`dam- SCALE- A5 NO=
sT
MECT w.: 96079
ZmAUZ SIGN
LAYOUT
DRAWING
STANDARD SIGNS DRAVINGNO.:
10425-16
� AN.AlORC1NTiD1A 6TMl01.
d!RlRAI,NO'tL6 AI�VM1L T1lD!
fUL MtCT6 ROp 1 RDOS
E:
FEVIS06
ah ma osonia
i
PICUM 5.Ift a ** Fm w
t
i
tl1
1 AM
To im
V
NORTHAMPT
H16H SCHOOL
�„ sM am
P4cmrni^mpTcft MAW
WOMENS
h. -
L
KAESTLE BOOS
AS'SOC ATE%INC.
`ARCHITECTS
DMVN BY: LAURA
DATE:
' aao.ECr M. 96014
MENS
SIGN
LAYOUT
BRA�u,E DRAWING
STANDARD H.C. SIGNS DMIMNO.:
10425-15
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORT RB #9 6 0 7 9
04
3424 A WALL 1
3425 B WALL 1
3426 313 WALL 1
3427 FACULTY OFFICE WALL
3428 MEN (WITH H.C. SYMBOL) WALL 1
3429 WOMEN (WITH H.C. SYMBOL) WALL 1
3430 FACULTY OFFICE WALL 1
3431 CONFERENCE ROOM WALL 1
3432 STORAGE WALL 1
12 EXIT
(WITH STAIR SYMBOL) WALL 2
12 AREA OF REFUGE
(WITH H.C. SYMBOL) WALL 2
13 EXIT
(WITH STAIR SYMBOL) WALL 2
13 AREA OF REFUGE
(WITH H.C. SYMBOL) WALL 2
14 EXIT
(WITH STAIR SYMBOL) WALL 5
41 EXIT
(WITH STAIR SYMBOL) WALL 4
41 AREA OF REFUGE
(WITH H.C. SYMBOL) WALL 2 tiw
42 EXIT
(WITH STAIR SYMBOL) WALL 4
42 AREA OF REFUGE
(WITH H.C. SYMBOL) WALL 2
42 LEVEL B EXIT THIS LEVEL SOUTH WALL AT DOOR 42A 1
(FOUR LINE SIGN)
42 LEVEL 1 EXIT AT LEVEL B SOUTH WALL AT DOOR 42C 1 w�
(FIVE LINE SIGN)
42 LEVEL 2 EXIT AT LEVEL B SOUTH WALL AT DOOR 42D 1
(FIVE LINE SIGN)
LEVEL 3 EXIT AT LEVEL B NORTH WALL AT DOOR 42E 1 `
(FIVE LINE SIGN)
43 EXIT
(WITH STAIR SYMBOL) WALL 3 y�
43 AREA OF REFUGE
(WITH H.C. SYMBOL) WALL 2
44 EXIT
(WITH STAIR SYMBOL) WALL 3
51 EXIT
(WITH STAIR SYMBOL) WALL 3
51 AREA OF REFUGE
(WITH H.C. SYMBOL) WALL 2
43 ENTRANCE -> WALL AT DOOR 43A 1
(WITH H.C. SYMBOL)
44 <- ENTRANCE WALL AT DOOR 44A 1
(WITH H.C. SYMBOL)
ELEVATOR ELEVATOR WALL 1
(WITH H.C. SYMBOL)
END OF SECTION 10425
SIGNS 10425 - 14
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON. MA RB #96079
2511 BIOLOGY WALL 1
2 512 BIOLOGY WALL, 1
2513 215 WALL 1
2514 GENERAL SCIENCE WALL 1
2515 PREP ROOM WALL 2
2516 PHYSICS WALL 2
2517 STORAGE WALL 1
2518 STORAGE WALL 1
2519 SCIENCE OFFICE WALL 1
2520 SCIENCE OFFICE WALL 1
RIB'
THIRD LEVEL AREA B
3201 ART 1 WALL 1
ART 3 WALL 1
3202 NO SIGN REQUIRED
3203 ART 2 WALL 1
!� ART 3 WALL 1
3204 ART 1 WALL 1
3205 NO SIGN REQUIRED
3206 OFFICE GLASS 2
3207 STORAGE WALL 2
3208 STORAGE WALL 1
3209 KILN WALL 1
All 3210 ART 2 WALL 1
3211 ART 3 WALL 2
3212 NO SIGN REQUIRED
3213 AREA OF REFUGE
(WITH H.C. SYMBOL) WALL 1
3214 ELECTRIC WALL 1
3 215 LAVATORY WALL 1
low 3216 NO SIGN REQUIRED
3217 COMMUNICATIONS WALL 1
THIRD LEVEL AREA D
3401 NO SIGN REQUIRED
3402 NO SIGN REQUIRED
3403 NO SIGN REQUIRED
3404 NO SIGN REQUIRED
3405 NO SIGN REQUIRED
3406 301 WALL 1
3407 303 WALL 1
3408 305 WALL 1
3409 306 WALL 1
3410 302 WALL 1
3411 304 WALL 1
3412 BOY'S (WITH H.C. SYMBOL) WALL 1
3413 CUSTODIAN WALL 1
! 3414 307 WALL 1
3415 COMPUTER LAB 308 WALL 1
3416 309 WALL 1
3417 STORAGE WALL 1
3418 TESTING WALL 1
3419 310 WALL 1
3420 311 WALL, 1
3421 CUSTODIAN WALL 1
3422 GIRLS' (WITH H.C. SYMBOL) WALL 1
3423 312 WALL
OF SIGNS 10425 — 13
10
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
44
SECOND LEVEL AREA B
2201 BALCONY WALL 2 o
2202 CONTROL ROOM WALL 1
2203 BALCONY LOBBY WALL 1
2204 STORAGE WALL 1
2205 STORAGE WALL 1
2206 BALCONY WALL 1
2207 STORAGE WALL 1
2208 STORAGE WALL 1
2209 STORAGE WALL 1
SECOND LEVEL AREA D
2401 NO SIGN REQUIRED
2402 NO SIGN REQUIRED
2403 NO SIGN REQUIRED
2404 NO SIGN REQUIRED
2405 FACULTY LAVATORY
(WITH H.C. SYMBOL) WALL 1
2406 201 WALL 1
2407 203 WALL 1
2408 205 WALL 1
2409 207 WALL 1
2410 I.P.S. 202 WALL 1 '"
2411 204 WALL 1
2412 206 WALL 1
2413 STORAGE WALL 1
2414 BOYS' (WITH H.C. SYMBOL) WALL 1
2415 CUSTODIAN WALL 1
2416 208 WALL 1
2417 COMPUTER LAB 209 WALL 1
2418 ELECTRIC WALL 1
2419 210 WALL 1
2420 211 WALL 1 w
2421 212 WALL 1
2422 CUSTODIAN WALL 1
2423 GIRLS' (WITH H.C. SYMBOL) WALL 1
2424 213 WALL 1
2425 LAVATORY (WITH H.C. SYMBOL) WALL 1
2426 COMPUTER LAB 214 WALL 1
2427 FACULTY OFFICE WALL 1
2428 MEN (WITH H.C. SYMBOL) WALL 1
2429 WOMEN (WITH H.C. SYMBOL) WALL 1
2430 FACULTY OFFICE WALL 1
2431 CONFERENCE ROOM WALL 1 wr
SECOND LEVEL AREA E
2501 NO SIGN REQUIRED wM
2502 NO SIGN REQUIRED
2503 CHEMISTRY WALL 2
2504 PREP ROOM WALL 2
2505 CHEMISTRY WAL 2
2506 BIOLOGY WALL 1
2507 GREENHOUSE WALL 1
2508 PREP ROOM WALL 2
2509 STORAGE WALL 1
2510 ELECTRIC WALL 1
SIGNS 10425 - 12
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA RE #96079
1440 WOMEN (WITH H.C. SYMBOL) WALL 1
1441 FACULTY OFFICE WALL 1
1442 CONFERENCE ROOM WALL 1
1443 NO SIGN REQUIRED
1444 NO SIGN REQUIRED
1445 WORKROOM WALL 2
1446 GUIDANCE GLASS 1
1447 OFFICE A WALL 1
1448 OFFICE B WALL 1
1449 OFFICE C WALL 1
1450 OFFICE D WALL 1
ws 1451 CONFERENCE ROOM WALL 2
1452 NO SIGN REQUIRED
1453 NO SIGN REQUIRED
1454 SCHOOL STORE GLASS 1
1455 NO SIGN REQUIRED
1456 NO SIGN REQUIRED
1457 NO SIGN REQUIRED
w� 1458 ADJUSTMENT COUNSELOR GLASS 1
1459 WOMEN (WITH H.C. SYMBOL) WALL 1
1460 MEN (WITH H.C. SYMBOL) WALL 1
1461 GUIDANCE OFFICE WALL 2
1462 NO SIGN REQUIRED
1463 NO SIGN REQUIRED
1464 LAVATORY (WITH H.C. SYMBOL) WALL 1
1465 OFFICE WALL 1
MAIN LEVEL AREA E
1501 NO SIGN REQUIRED
1502 NO SIGN REQUIRED
1503 GUIDANCE OFFICE WALL 1
1504 NO SIGN REQUIRED
1505 110 WALL 1
1506 111 WALL 1
1507 112 WALL 1
1508 113 WALL 1
1509 114 WALL 1
1510 NO SIGN REQUIRED
1511 NO SIGN REQUIRED
1512 115 WALL 1
1513 116 WALL 1
1514 117 WALL 1
wo 1515 118 WALL 1
1516 119 WALL 1
1517 SPECIAL ED 120 WALL 1
1518 TIME OUT WALL 1
1519 SPECIAL ED WORKROOM WALL 2
1520 CUSTODIAN WALL 1
1521 SPECIAL ED.
ADJUSTMENT COUNSELOR WALL 1
1522 SPECIAL ED.
CONFERENCE ROOM WALL 1
1523 121 WALL 1
1524 122 WALL 1
1525 ELECTRIC WALL 1
1526 CUSTODIAN WALL 1
1527 STORAGE WALL 1
SIGNS 10425 — 11
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA
KB #96071
MAIN LEVEL AREA C
1301 NO SIGN REQUIRED ww
1302 MEDIA CENTER WALL 1
1303 HEAD END GLASS 1
1304 LISTENING VIEWING GLASS 1
1305 MEDIA CENTER CLASSROOM GLASS
MEDIA CENTER CLASSROOM WALL 1
1306 A.V. STORAGE WALL 1
1307 PROFESSIONAL COLLECTION WALL 1
1308 WORKROOM GLASS
1 aw
1309 OFFICE GLASS 1
1310 GIRLS' DRESSING ROOM WALL 1
1311 BOYS' DRESSING ROOM WALL 1 ""
MAIN LEVEL AREA D
1401 NO SIGN REQUIRED
1402 AUDITORIUM -> WALL 1
GYMNASIUM -> WALL 1
1403 NO SIGN REQUIRED
1404 NO SIGN REQUIRED
1405 ALL VISITORS MUST SIGN IN
AT MAIN OFFICE WALL 1
s.
1406 FACULTY LAV.
(WITH H.C. SYMBOL) WALL 1
1407 103 WALL 1
1408 104 WALL 1
1409 105 WALL 1
1410 HEALTH COORDINATOR WALL 1
1411 LAVATORY WALL 1
1412 STORAGE WALL 1
1413 COMMUNICATION WALL 1
1414 CONFERENCE ROOM WALL 1
1415 NO SIGN REQUIRED WALL 1
1416 STAGE WALL 1
1417 NO SIGN REQUIRED
1418 DRAMATIC ARTS WALL 1
1419 BOYS' (WITH H.C. SYMBOL) WALL 1
1420 CUSTODIAN WALL 1
1421 106 WALL 1
1422 COMPUTER LAB 107 WALL 1
w
1423 ELECTRICAL WALL 1
1424 OFFICE GLASS 1
1425 ADMINISTRATION GLASS 1
1426 NO SIGN REQUIRED
1427 ASSISTANT PRINCIPAL GLASS 1
1428 PRINCIPAL GLASS 1
1429 WORKROOM WALL 1
1430 LAVATORY
WALL 1
1431 CONFERENCE ROOM WALL 2
1432 CUSTODIAN WALL 1
1433 GIRLS' (WITH H.C. SYMBOL) WALL 1 +
1434 STORAGE WALL 1
1435 LIFE SKILLS 108 WALL 1
1436 STORAGE WALL 1
1437 109
WALL 1
1438 FACULTY OFFICE WALL 1
1439 MEN (WITH H.C. SYMBOL) WALL 1
SIGNS 10425 - 10
No
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
go
0526 STORAGE WALL 1
MAIN LEVEL AREA A
1101 NO SIGN REQUIRED
1102 NO SIGN REQUIRED
! 1103 VISITING TEAM ROOM WALL 2
1104 NO SIGN REQUIRED
1105 GYMNASIUM WALL 2
1106 STORAGE WALL 1
1107 MEN (WITH H.C. SYMBOL) WALL 1
1108 WOMEN (WITH H.C. SYMBOL) WALL 1
1109 NO SIGN REQUIRED
1110 NURSE GLASS 1
1111 NO SIGN REQUIRED
1112 OFFICE GLASS 1
1113 EXAM ROOM 1 GLASS 1
1114 EXAM ROOM 2 WALL 1
1115 STORAGE WALL 1
1116 LAVATORY (WITH H.C. SYMBOL) WALL 1
qp 1117 LAVATORY (WITH H.C. SYMBOL) WALL 1
1118 ELECTRIC WALL 1
1119 ELECTRIC WALL 1
1120 CUSTODIAN WALL 1
go
MAIN LEVEL AREA B
1201 <- AUDITORIUM WALL 1
1202 NO SIGN REQUIRED
1203 NO SIGN REQUIRED
1204 ALL VISITORS MUST SIGN
IN AT MAIN OFFICE WALL 1
1205 ALL VISITORS MUST SIGN
IN AT MAIN OFFICE WALL 1
1206 STAGE WALL 1
1207 ELECTRIC WALL 1
1208 STAGE WALL 1
1209 DIMMING WALL 1
1210 AUDITORIUM (WITH H.C. SYMBOL) WALL 4
AUDITORIUM WALL 2
1211 MUSIC WALL 1
1212 BAND WALL 2
1213 OFFICE WALL 1
1214 ENSEMBLE WALL 2
1215 PRACTICE A WALL 1
! 1216 PRACTICE B WALL 1
1217 PRACTICE C WALL 1
1218 <- AUDITORIUM WALL 1
<- MAIN OFFICE WALL 1
1219 NO SIGN REQUIRED
1220 STORAGE WALL 1
1221 MEN (WITH H.C. SYMBOL) WALL 1
1222 NO SIGN REQUIRED
1223 WOMEN (WITH H.C. SYMBOL) WALL 1
1224 ATHLETIC DIRECTOR WALL 1
1225 STORAGE WALL 1
1226 RECORDS WALL 1
1227 CUSTODIAN WALL 1
1228 UNIFORM STORAGE WALL 1
!m SIGNS 10425 - 9
so
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA RS #96079
0313 BOYS' LOCKER ROOM WALL 1
0314 BOYS' LOCKER ROOM WALL 1
0315 P.E. OFFICE GLASS 1
0316 LOCKER ROOM WALL 1 w
0317 MEN (WITH H.C. SYMBOL) WALL 1
0318 SHOWERS WALL 1
0319 BOYS' (WITH H.C. SYMBOL) WALL 1 w
0320 TRAINER GLASS 1
0321 STORAGE WALL 1
0322 CUSTODIAN WALL 1
0323 BOYS' TEAM ROOM A WALL 1
TEAM ROOM `A' WALL 1
0324 NO SIGN REQUIRED
0325 TEAM ROOM B WALL 1
0326 FITNESS CENTER WALL 1
LOWER LEVEL AREA D
0401 <- TECHNOLOGY WALL 1
0402 NO SIGN REQUIRED
0403 NO SIGN REQUIRED we
0404 GIRLS' (WIT H.C. SYMBOL) WALL 1
0405 BOYS' (WITH H.C. SYMBOL) WALL 1
0406 CUSTODIAN WALL 1
0407 CUSTODIAN LOUNGE WALL 1
0408 NO SIGN REQUIRED
0409 STORAGE WALL 1
0410 STORAGE WALL 1
0411 STORAGE WALL 1
0412 STORAGE WALL 1
0413 NO SIGN REQUIRED
LOWER LEVEL AREA E
0501 NO SIGN REQUIRED
0502 NO SIGN REQUIRED
0503 CULINARY ARTS WALL 1
0504 ARTS AND CRAFTS WALL 1
0505 EARLY CHILDHOOD WALL 1 ■w
0506 LAVATORY (WITH H.C. SYMBOL) WALL 1
0507 PROJECT LAB WALL 2
0508 LAVATORY (WITH H.C. SYMBOL) WALL 1
0509 TECHNOLOGY OFFICE WALL 1
0510 CONTROL ROOM WALL 1
0511 T.V. / VIDEO LAB WALL 2
0512 AUDIO A WALL 1
0513 AUDIO B WALL 1
0514 EDITING WALL 1
0515 MECHANICAL WALL 1
0516 GRAPHICS WALL 1
0517 ELECTRICAL WALL 1
0518 ELECTRONIC WORKROOM WALL 3
0519 MODULAR TECHNOLOGY WALL 2 A
0520 FINISH ROOM WALL 1
0521 STORAGE WALL 1
0522 ELECTRIC WALL 1
0523 GENERATOR WALL 1
0524 OBSERVATION WALL 1
0525 NO SIGN REQUIRED
SIGNS 10425 - 8 ,
go
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
on 0109 WOMEN (WITH H.C. SYMBOL) WALL 1
0110 MECHANICAL WALL 1
0111 AEROBICS WALL 1
ow 0112 STORAGE WALL 1
0113 CAFETERIA WALL 1
0114 STORAGE WALL 1
0115 KITCHEN WALL 2
0116 STORAGE WALL 1
0117 NO SIGN REQUIRED
0118 DISHWASHING WALL 1
0119 STORAGE WALL 1
0120 NO SIGN REQUIRED
0121 NO SIGN REQUIRED
0122 STORAGE WALL 1
0123 CAFETERIA WALL 1
0124 RECEIVING WALL 1
0125 OFFICE WALL 1
0126 RECYCLE WALL 1
0127 CAN WASH WALL 1
0128 CUSTODIAN WALL 1
0129 OFFICE GLASS 1
0130 WOMEN (WITH H.C. SYMBOL) WALL 1
0131 LOCKERS WALL 1
0132 MEN (WITH H.C. SYMBOL) WALL 1
0133 COMMUNICATIONS WALL 1
0134 TICKETS WALL 1
LOWER LEVEL AREA B
0201 NO SIGN REQUIRED
0202 LOCKER ROOMS -> WALL 1
0203 STORAGE WALL 1
0204 STORAGE WALL 2
0205 ELECTRICAL WALL 1
0206 NO SIGN REQUIRED
0207 STORAGE WALL 1
0208 MECHANICAL WALL 1
0209 NO SIGN REQUIRED
0210 STORAGE WALL 1
0211 STORAGE WALL 1
0212 MECHANICAL WALL 1
LOWER LEVEL AREA C
0301 NO SIGN REQUIRED
0302 FITNESS CENTER -> WALL 1
GIRLS' LOCKER ROOM -> WALL 1
0303 FITNESS CENTER GLASS 1
GIRLS' LOCKER ROOM GLASS 1
0304 GIRLS' LOCKER ROOM WALL 1
0305 GIRLS' LOCKER ROOM WALL 1
0306 P.E. OFFICE GLASS 1
0307 LOCKER ROOM WALL 1
"! 0308 WOMEN (WITH H.C. SYMBOL) WALL 1
0309 SHOWERS WALL 1
0310 GIRLS' (WITH H.C. SYMBOL) WALL 1
0311 GIRLS' TEAM ROOM A WALL 1
TEAM ROOM A WALL 1
0312 NO SIGN REQUIRED
SIGNS 10425 - 7
�A
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
■s
B. Wall Mounted Panel Signs: Attach panel signs to wall surfaces using the
methods indicated below: an
1. Mechanical Fastener Mounting: Use manufacturer's standard
countersunk tamperproof fasteners, colored to match sign
background. Secure fasteners through drilled holes in sign.
a. Provide 4 fasteners per 6" x 6" signs, 6 fasteners per 3" x
12" and 6" x 12" signs.
2 . Vinyl-Tape Mounting: Use double-sided foam tape to mount signs
glass only.
�w
a. Provide blank plate without screw holes for each sign that is
to be attached to glass. Install blank plate on opposite side
of glass so vinyl tape does not show. w
3 . Mounting Location and Height: Install signs on the wall adjacent
to the latch side of the door. Where there is no wall space to the
latch side of the door, including at double leaf doors, install
signs at the nearest adjacent wall. Mounting height shall be 60"
(1525 mm) above the finish floor to the centerline of the sign.
Mounting location for such signage shall be so that a person may
approach within 3" (76 mm) of signage without encountering
protruding objects or standing within the swing of a door. Consult
Architect prior to installation.
C. Cast Metal Plaques: Mount plaques using the standard method recommended
by the manufacturer for the type of wall surface indicated.
1. Face Mounting: Mount plaques using exposed fasteners with rosettes
attached through the face of the plaque into the wall surface.
a. Provide expansion sleeves for masonry installations.
3 .2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. At completion of the installation, clean soiled sign surfaces in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Protect units from
damage until acceptance by the Owner.
3.3 SIGNAGE SCHEDULE
ROOM REFERENCE SIGN TEXT LOCATION QUANTITY
NUMBER w�
LOWER LEVEL AREA A
0101 NO SIGN REQUIRED
0102 NO SIGN REQUIRED
0103 NO SIGN REQUIRED
0104 ALL VISITORS MUST SIGN aw
IN AT THE MAIN OFFICE WALL 1
0105 ALL VISITORS MUST SIGN
IN AT THE MAIN OFFICE WALL 1
0106 STORAGE WALL 1 no
0107 ELECTRICAL WALL 1
0108 MEN (WITH H.C. SYMBOL) WALL 1
SIGNS 10425 - 6 !
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
by the Architect.
7. Quantity: Provide one plaque mounted in the Lobby in a location
directed by the Architect.
a. Include logo as provided by the Architect.
2 .5 FINISHES
A. Colors and Surface Textures: For exposed sign material that requires
selection of materials with integral or applied colors, surface textures
or other characteristics related to appearance, provide color matches
indicated, or if not indicated, as selected by the Architect.
B. Metal Finishes : Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for finish
designations and applications recommendations.
C. Aluminum Finishes: Finish designations prefixed by "AA" conform to the
system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum
finishes.
1. Class II Clear Anodized Fine Satin Lettering Finish: AA-M31C21A31
(Mechanical Finish: Fine satin directional textured; Chemical
Finish: Fine matte etched finish; Anodic Coating: Class II
Architectural, clear film thicker than 0.4 mil) .
2 . Baked Enamel Background Finish: AA-M4xC12C42R1x (Mechanical
Finish: Manufacturer's standard, other nondirectional textured;
Chemical Finish: Chemical conversion coating, acid
chromate-fluoride-phosphate pretreatment; Organic Coating: as
specified below) . Apply baked enamel in compliance with paint
manufacturer's specifications for cleaning, conversion coating, and
painting.
a. Organic Coating: Thermosetting modified acrylic enamel
primer/topcoat system complying with AAMA 603.8 except with a
minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils, medium gloss.
1) Color: As selected by the Architect from the
manufacturer's full line of colors.
A
D. Bronze Finishes: Finish designations prefixed by "CDA" conform to the
system established by the Copper Development Association for designating
finishes.
1. Natural Satin Finish: CDA-M3106x (Mechanical Finish: Fine satin
directional textured; Clear Organic Coating: Manufacturer's
standard air-dry clear organic coating as specified below. )
a. Clear Organic Coating: Manufacturer's standard clear coating.
}M PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Locate sign units and accessories where indicated, using
mounting methods of the type described and in compliance with the
manufacturer's instructions.
1. Install signs level, plumb, and at the height indicated, with sign
surfaces free from distortion or other defects in appearance.
SIGNS 10425 - 5
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
remain flat under installed conditions within a tolerance of plus
or minus 1116 inch measured diagonally.
B. Unframed Panel Signs: Fabricate signs with edges mechanically and
smoothly finished to conform with the following requirements:
1. Edge Condition: Square cut. aw
2. Corner Condition: Radius corners.
3 . Typical Size: 3" x length required (12" average - one or two lines
of text, 12 characters average - See Sign Layout Drawings)
4 . Handicapped Accessible Toilet Room Signs: 6" x length required (6"
average) , including wheelchair pictogram symbol, and room name in
the text below.
5. Handicapped Accessible Exit Route Signs: 6" x 611, including
international pictogram.
6. Assistive Listening Signs: Size as required, including
international pictogram symbol for hearing loss conforming to ADA
Guidelines. ,we
7. "NO EXIT" sign to have the word "NO" in letters 2 in. (5 cm) high
with stroke width of 3/8" (1 cm) and the word EXIT below the word
8. Do not put screw holes in signs that are to be mounted to glass.
9. All directional signs to be the same length when located/stacked w
at the same location.
C. Graphic Content and Style: Provide signs that comply with format and w
wording determined by the Architect, and conforming to the following
characteristics:
1. Letters and Numerals: 5/8" high Helvetica Medium, with a width-to-
height ratio of 3 :3.5, and a stroke-width to height ratio of 1:5.
2 . Braille: Grade 2.
3 . Pictograms: Accompanied by the equivalent verbal description which
is to be placed directly below the pictogram.
D. Raised Copy: Raised copy / characters from matte-finish magnesium -
aluminum sheet. Produce precisely formed characters with square cut
edges.
1. Panel Material: matte-finished magnesium - aluminum sheet. ..�
2 . Raised Copy Thickness: Not less than 1/32 inch.
2 .4 CAST METAL PLAQUES
A. Plaques: Castings shall be free from pits, scale, sand holes, or other
defects. Comply with requirements specified for metal, border style,
background texture, and finish and with requirements shown for w
thickness, size, shape, and copy. Hand-tool and buff borders and raised
copy to produce the manufacturer's standard satin polished finish.
Refer to "Finish" article for other finish requirements.
.m
1. Metal: Bronze.
2. Border Style: Single Line, Bevel Edge.
3 . Background Texture: Manufacturers standard leatherette finish.
4 . Background Finish: Provide light oxide stain finish to comply with so
the requirement specified for bronze finishes, except provide
background texture specified above in lieu of mechanical finish
indicated. so
5. Size: 24" x 36".
6. Graphic Content and Style: Furnish wording and format as provided
SIGNS 10425 - 4
40
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA
� KB #g�n�a
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2. 1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products of one of the following:
1. Manufacturers of Panel Signs:
00
a. Signs, Letters, Nameplates, Inc.
b. Braille - Tac.
C. Southwell.
d. Andco.
e. ASI Sign Systems, Inc.
an 2 . Manufacturers of Dimensional Letters and Numbers:
a. A.R.K. Ramos Manufacturing Company.
b. ASI Sign Systems, Inc.
ON C. Gemini, Inc.
3 . Manufacturers of Cast Plaques:
a. Best Manufacturing Co.
b. The Southwell Company.
C. Matthews International Corporation
2 .2 MATERIALS
A. Magnesium - Aluminum Sheet: Provide magnesium - aluminum sheet of alloy
and temper recommended by the metal producer or finisher for the type
of use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and
durability properties specified in ASTM B 209 for 5005-H15, with less
than 1% zinc as required by the EPA.
B. Aluminum Castings: Provide aluminum castings of alloy and temper
on recommended by the sign manufacturer for the casting process used and
for the use and finish indicated.
C. Fasteners: Use concealed fasteners fabricated from metals that are not
on corrosive to the sign material and mounting surface.
D. Bronze Castings: Provide bronze castings, copper alloy UNS C83600,
ON complying with the requirements of ASTM B 584.
E. Anchors and Inserts: Use nonferrous metal or hot-dipped galvanized
anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required
iw for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion bolt
devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to
be set into concrete or masonry work.
2 .3 PANEL SIGNS
A. Panel Signs: Comply with requirements indicated for materials,
thicknesses, finishes, colors, designs, shapes, sizes, and details of
construction.
1. Produce smooth, even, level sign panel surfaces, constructed to
SIGNS
10425 - 3
04
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
40
a. Magnesium - Aluminum: Samples of each finish type and color,
not less than 4-inch squares of sheet or plate, showing the
full range of colors available.
b. Dimensional Letters: Provide full-size representative samples so
of each dimensional letter type required, showing letter
style, color, and material finish and method of attachment.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Code Compliance: Provide panel signs in conformance with the Uniform
Federal Accessibility Standards, Section 4 .30, ANSI A117.1, and
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) , sections 4.28.2, -.3, - .5.
B. Single-Source Responsibility: For each separate type of sign required,
obtain signs from one source from a single manufacturer.
C. Design Criteria: The Contract Documents indicate size, profiles, and
dimensional requirements of signs and are based on the specific type and
model indicated. Signs by other manufacturers may be considered
provided that deviations in dimensions and profiles are minor and do not
change the design concept as judged by the Architect. The burden of
proof of equality is on the proposer.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
so
A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of
shop drawings and fabrication to ensure proper fitting. Show recorded
measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule ON
with construction progress to avoid delay.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
w
A. Catalog Standards: Manufacturer's catalog numbers may be shown on
drawings for convenience in identifying certain signage work. Unless
modified by notation on drawings or otherwise specified, catalog am
description for indicated number constitutes requirements quirements for each such
sign.
1. The use of catalog numbers and specific requirements set forth in w
drawings and specifications are not intended to preclude the use
of any other acceptable manufacturer's product or procedures which
may be equivalent, but are given for purpose of establishing
standard of design and quality for materials, construction, and w
workmanship.
so
MR
an
SIGNS 10425 - 2
on
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB 096079
on
SECTION 10425 - SIGNS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this Work. Note also all Addenda.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following types of signs:
1. Panel signs.
2 . Cast Metal Plaques.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that
relate to this section:
1. Section 01500, "Temporary Facilities" for temporary project
identification signs.
2 . Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for labels, tags,
and nameplates for mechanical equipment.
3 . Division 16 Section "Electrical Identification" for labels, tags,
and nameplates for electrical equipment.
4 . Division 16 Section "Emergency Lighting" for illuminated exit
signs.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the
w Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data: Include manufacturer's construction details relative to
materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes
RM for each type of sign required.
C. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings for fabrication and erection of
w signs. Include plans, elevations, and large-scale sections of typical
members and other components. Show anchors, grounds, reinforcement,
accessories, layout, and installation details.
40 1. Provide message list for each sign required, including large-scale
details of wording and layout of lettering.
2 . For signs supported by or anchored to permanent construction,
P0 provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for
installation of anchor bolts and other anchors to be installed as
a unit of Work in other Sections.
3 . Furnish full-size rubbings for metal plaques.
D. Samples: Provide the following samples of each sign component for
initial selection of color, pattern and surface texture as required and
for verification of compliance with requirements indicated.
1. Samples for initial selection of color, pattern, and texture:
OR SIGNS 10425 - 1
.o
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON. MA RB #96079
40
designations and application recommendations.
B. Finish designations prefixed by "AA" conform to system established by
the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. no
C. Baked Enamel Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with
inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: chemical conversion coating, so
acid chromate-fluoride-phosphate pretreatment; Organic Coating: as
specified below) . Apply baked enamel in compliance with paint
manufacturer's specifications for cleaning, conversion coating, and
painting. No
1. Organic Coating: Thermosetting modified acrylic enamel
primer/topcoat system complying with AAMA 603.8 except with minimum
dry film thickness of 1.5 mils, medium gloss. NO
2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard
colors.
in
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
no
A. Install units plumb and level, in locations and with mountings shown.
Securely attach to the supporting structure with concealed fasteners,
in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions.
3 .2 CLEANING
A. At completion of the installation, clean surfaces in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed poster cases from damage until acceptance by the
Owner.
END OF SECTION 10410
wis
w�
so
OR
w
DISPLAY CASES 10410-4
ew
0M
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
on
C. Fabric Faced Tackboard: Provide manufacturer's standard fabric
laminated to 1/4-inch-thick cork sheet. Provide fabric with a flame
so spread rating of 25 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
Provide color and texture as selected from the manufacturer's standards.
1. Backing: Factory-laminated cork face sheet to 1/4-inch-thick
on hardboard backing.
2 .3 POSTER CASES
on A. Nonilluminated Poster Cases: Provide the manufacturer's surface
mounted, non-illuminated poster case. The assembly shall consist of
perimeter frame and back, an insert panel, backboard, and sliding glass
w doors.
1. Perimeter Frame and Cover Design: Provide extruded aluminum
perimeter frame of the profile indicated. Provide sliding glass
doors glazed with 1/4-inch-thick tempered, with exposed edges
seamed to eliminate cutting hazard.
a. Operating Hardware: Provide extruded aluminum top and bottom
track, extruded aluminum bottom shoes, nylon rollers, rubber
top guides, rubber bumpers, grooved finger pulls, and
adjustable lock.
2 . Bulletin Board Insert Panels: Provide tackboard fabric-covered
insert panels of the material indicated.
2 .4 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners: Provide screws, bolts, and other exposed fastening devices
of the same material as the items being fastened. Fasteners for
applications on the exterior and exposed to the weather may be hot-dip
galvanized, stainless steel, or aluminum. Provide types, gages, and
lengths to suit installation conditions. Use theft-proof fasteners
where exposed top view.
B. Hardware: Provide poster cases with the following hardware:
1. Lock: Furnish each cover with the manufacturer's standard lock;
key all locks alike. Furnish 2 keys per lock.
2 .5 FABRICATION
A. General: Provide poster cases to requirements indicated including
ens dimensions, design, and thickness and finish of materials. Use metals
and shapes of thickness, with reinforcing, if needed, to produce
flatness, free of "oil canning, " and to impart strength for size,
design, and application indicated.
1. Fabricate perimeter and cover frames with reinforced corners,
mitered to a hairline fit, with no exposed fasteners.
2 . Hardware for Covers: Equip covers with the manufacturer's standard
hardware of the type indicated.
2.6 FINISHES
A. General: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for finish
DISPLAY CASES 10410-3
INN 01 1 1
an
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
■o
of colors available.
E. Certificates: In lieu of laboratory test reports, when permitted by the awe
Architect, submit the manufacturer's certification that fabric-faced
cork tackboard materials furnished comply with requirements specified
for flame spread ratings.
MW
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who is an OR
authorized representative of the poster case manufacturer for
installation and maintenance of the manufacturer's products.
B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide fabric-faced tackboards with ■o
surface burning characteristics indicated below, as determined by
testing assembled materials composed of facings and backings identical
to those required in this section, in accordance with ASTM E 84, by a
testing organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. a*
1. Flame Spread: 25 or less.
2 . Smoke Developed: 10 or less. .e
C. Design Criteria: The drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional
requirements of poster cases and are based on the specific type and
model indicated. Other poster cases other manufacturers may be
considered provided that deviations in dimensions and profiles are minor
and do not change the design concept as judged by the Architect. The
burden of proof of equality is on the proposer.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of
shop drawings and fabrication to ensure proper fitting. Show recorded
measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule
with construction progress to avoid delay.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 .1 MANUFACTURERS *w
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products of one of the following:
1. Manufacturers of Poster Cases:
a. "Poster Case Series", Model C, Poblocki & Sons. M"
b. "Sliding Glass Door", The Tablet & Ticket Company
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Extrusions: Provide manufacturer's standard extruded aluminum
sections with not less than the strength and durability properties
specified in ASTM B 221 for 6063-T5 alloy. as
B. Tempered Glass: Provide clear, tempered safety glass complying with the
requirements of ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Class 1 -
transparent.
DISPLAY CASES 10410-2
on
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA RE #96079
SECTION 10410 - DISPLAY CASES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this work. Note also all Addenda.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following types of Display Cases:
1. Poster cases.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that
relate to this section:
1. Section 06105 "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood blocking and
grounds.
2. Section 10425 "Signs" for specialty signs.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the
Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data: Include manufacturer's construction details relative to
Rr materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes.
Include manufacturer's data substantiating that tackboard materials
comply with requirements indicated.
C. Shop Drawings: Provide dimensioned elevations for each type of poster
cases required; include large-scale sections of typical members and
other components. Show anchors, grounds, reinforcement and layout, and
indicate finishes.
1. Include setting drawings, templates, and directions for
installation of anchor bolts and other anchorages to be installed
as a unit of Work in other Sections.
D. Samples: Provide the following samples of each exposed material, for
initial selection of colors, patterns, and textures, as required, and
for verification of compliance with requirements indicated.
1. Samples for initial selection of color, pattern, and texture:
a. Fabric-faced Cork Tackboards: Manufacturer's color charts
consisting of actual sections of fabric, showing the full
range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each
type of fabric-faced cork tackboard indicated.
b. Aluminum Trim and Accessories: Samples of each finish type
po and color, on 6-inch-long sections of extrusions and not less
than 4-inch squares of sheet or plate, showing the full range
DISPLAY CASES 10410-1
no
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
installation, on completion of work and leave installation areas in neat,
clean condition.
END OF SECTION 10265
oft
w
e�
WALL PROTECTION SYSTEMS 10265 - 6
4W
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON. MA KB #96079
C. Appearance of Finished work: Variations in appearance of abutting or
adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range
of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not
acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable
if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or
installed to minimize contrast.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions in which impact-resistant wall protection
system components and impact-resistant wall covering materials will be
installed.
1. Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing
impact-resistant wall protection system components.
B. Impact-Resistant Wall Covering Materials: Wall surfaces to receive
impact-resistant wall covering materials shall be dry and free from dirt,
4W grease, loose paint, and scale.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3 .2 PREPARATION
A. General : Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris,
and loose particles.
3 .3 INSTALLATION
A. Install impact-resistant wall protection system components level, plumb,
and true to line without distortions.
1. Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other
defects that might be visible in the finished Work.
on B. Install aluminum retainers, mounting brackets, and other accessories
according to the manufacturer's written instructions.
on 1. Where splices occur in horizontal runs of more than 20 feet (6.1 m) ,
splice aluminum retainers and plastic covers at different locations
along the run.
3 .4 CLEANING
A. General: Immediately on completion of installation, clean plastic covers
and accessories using a standard ammonia-based household cleaning agent.
Clean metal components according to the manufacturer's written
instructions.
ON B. Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended by the
manufacturer.
C. Remove surplus materials, rubbish, and debris, resulting from
P0
WALL PROTECTION SYSTEMS 10265 - 5
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
plastic sheet; thickness as indicated; with a minimum impact resistance
of 25.4 ft-lbf/in. (1356 J/m) of width when tested according to
ASTM D 256, Test Method A. w
1. Color and Texture: Color to be selected by architect / Stipple
texture.
C. Fasteners: Provide aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless-steel, or other
noncorrosive metal screws, bolts, and other fasteners compatible with
aluminum components, hardware, anchors, and other items being fastened.
Use theftproof fasteners where exposed to view. `
D. Adhesive: Type recommended by the manufacturer for use with material on
the substrate indicated. �w
2.3 IMPACT-RESISTANT WALL COVERINGS
A. Semirigid Sheet Wall Covering: Semirigid, embossed, fiber-backed, impact- .w
resistant plastic sheets. Sheets shall comply with fire-test-response
characteristics specified and be chemical and stain resistant. Provide
manufacturer's standard; match moldings and trim as required.
1. Sheet Size: 48 by 96 inches (1219 by 2438 mm)
2 . Sheet Thickness: 0.060 inch (1.52 mm) .
3 . Fire Rating: Class B, min.
2.4 FABRICATION
.ss
A. General: Fabricate impact-resistant wall protection systems to comply
with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, details, finish, and
member sizes, including thicknesses of components.
.w
B. Preassemble components in the shop to greatest extent possible to
minimize field assembly. Disassemble only as necessary for shipping and
handling. .w.
C. Fabricate components with tight seams and joints with exposed edges
rolled. Provide surfaces free of wrinkles, chips, dents, uneven
coloration, and other imperfections. Fabricate members and fittings to
produce flush, smooth, and rigid hairline joints.
D. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets,
flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnecting members
to other construction.
E. Provide inserts and other anchoring devices for connecting components to ,w
concrete or masonry. Fabricate anchoring devices to withstand imposed
loads. Coordinate anchoring devices with the supporting structure.
2.5 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying
a strippable, temporary covering before shipping.
w�
WALL PROTECTION SYSTEMS 10265 - 4 si
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install wall surface-protection system
components until the space is enclosed and weatherproof and ambient
temperature within the building is maintained at not less than 70 deg F
(21 deg C) for not less than 72 hours before beginning installation. Do
not install rigid plastic wall surface-protection systems until that
temperature has been attained and is stabilized.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that
match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering
for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
an
1. Impact-Resistant Wall Protection System Units: Full-size units of
maximum length, including vinyl plastic cover and aluminum retainer,
equal to 2 percent of each type, color, and texture of each type of
!! unit installed, but not less than two units.
a. Include accessory components as required. Replacement
VA materials shall be from the same production run as materials
installed. Package replacement materials with protective
covering, identified with appropriate labels.
MR PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 . 1 MANUFACTURERS
40, A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering impact-resistant wall protection system products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
40 the following:
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide impact-
resistant wall protection system products by one of the following:
1. Construction Specialties, Inc.
2 . IPC Door and Wall Protection Systems, Inc.
3 . Koroseal Wall Protection Systems, Inc.
4. NUDO
5. LUSCO
6. STRUCTO
7. KEMLITE
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Extruded Rigid Plastic: Textured, chemical- and stain-resistant, high-
impact-resistant, PVC or acrylic-modified vinyl plastic; thickness as
indicated; with a minimum impact resistance of 25.4 ft-lbf/in. (1356 J/m)
40 of width when tested according to ASTM D 256, Test Method A.
1. Color and Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's
full range for these characteristics.
B. Plastic Sheet Wall Covering Material: Semirigid, textured, chemical- and
stain-resistant, high-impact-resistant, PVC or acrylic-modified vinyl
40
WALL PROTECTION SYSTEMS 10265 - 3
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
aa�
conditions. Include precautions against using cleaning materials
and methods that may be detrimental to vinyl plastic finishes and
performance. w
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed go
installation of impact-resistant wall protection system components
similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this
Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of on
successful in-service performance.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing impact-
resistant wall protection system components similar to those required for go
this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.
C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional an
requirements of impact-resistant wall protection system and are based on
the specific system indicated. Other manufacturers systems with equal
performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1
Section "Substitutions. "
1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by
Architect, except with Architects approval. If modifications are
proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for w
review.
D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide impact-resistant wall ale
protection system components with the following surface-burning
characteristics, as determined by testing materials identical to those
required in this Section per ASTM E 84 by a testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify impact-resistant aaR
wall protection system components with appropriate markings of applicable
testing and inspecting agency.
are
1. Flame Spread: 25 or less.
2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less.
E. Impact Strength: Provide impact-resistant wall protection system ""
components with a minimum impact resistance of 25.4 ft-lbf/in. (1356 J/m)
of width when tested according to ASTM D 256, Test Method A.
w
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
w
A. Store wall surface-protection materials in original undamaged packages
and containers inside a well-ventilated area protected from weather,
moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity. an
1. Maintain room temperature within the storage area at not less than
70 deg F (21 deg C) during the period plastic materials are stored.
Keep sheet material out of direct sunlight to avoid surface go
distortion.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
so
PALL PROTECTION SYSTEMS 10265 — 2 *o
40
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
on
SECTION 10265 - WALL PROTECTION SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
am this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this work. Note also all Addenda.
1.2 SUMMARY
p
A. This Section includes the following:
me 1. Sheet/ panel wall coverings.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking and grounds
for surface-mounted wall guards, corner guards, and handrails.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include physical characteristics, such as durability,
resistance to fading, and flame resistance, for each impact-resistant
wall protection system component indicated.
B. Shop Drawings: Show locations, extent, and installation details of each
impact-resistant wall protection system component. Show methods of
attachment to adjoining construction.
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting
of sections of vinyl plastic material showing the full range of colors
and textures available for each impact-resistant wall protection system
component indicated.
D. Samples for Verification: For the following products, showing the full
range of color and texture variations expected in each impact-resistant
wall protection system component. Prepare Samples from the same material
to be used for the Work.
1. Sheet or Panels: 6-by-6-inch- (150-by-150-mm-) square Samples of
each impact-resistant wall protection system component required.
go
E. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating
compliance of each impact-resistant wall protection system component with
requirements indicated, based on tests performed by testing agency within
the past five years.
F. Maintenance Data: For each impact-resistant wall protection system
component to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.
1. Include recommended methods and frequency for maintaining optimum
an condition of vinyl plastic covers under anticipated traffic and use
OR WALL PROTECTION SYSTEMS 10265 - 1
so
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON. MA KB #96079
No
and secured.
40 D. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and
joint fillers, as indicated.
E. Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding
am operations required for fitting and jointing. Restore finishes so there
is no evidence of corrective work. Return items that cannot be
refinished in the field to the shop, make required alterations, and
am refinish entire unit, or provide new units.
F. Protect nonferrous-metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by
applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces that will be
in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals.
3.3 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTION
so A. Protect louvers and vents from damage of any kind during construction
period including use of temporary protective coverings where needed and
approved by louver manufacturer. Remove protective covering at time of
40 Substantial Completion.
B. Restore louvers and vents damaged during installation and construction
period, so that no evidence remains of correction work. If results of
restoration are unsuccessful, as judged by Architect, remove damaged
units and replace with new units.
1. Clean and touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried
coating that matches color and gloss of, and is compatible with,
factory-applied finish coating.
3 .4 CLEANING
A. Periodically clean exposed surfaces of louvers and vents that are not
protected by temporary covering to remove fingerprints and soil during
construction period. Do not let soil accumulate until final cleaning.
B. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild
" soap or detergent not harmful to finishes. Rinse surfaces thoroughly
and dry.
END OF SECTION 10200
w
LOWERS AND VENTS 10200 - 7
w.
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
wr
1/8-by-1-inch PVC compression gaskets.
2.7 WALL VENTS (BRICK VENTS)
A. Cast-Aluminum Wall Vents: One-piece, cast-aluminum louvers and frames;
with 18-by-14 (1.4-by-1.8-mm) mesh aluminum insect screening on inside
face; incorporating an integral waterstop on inside edge of sill; of AM
load-bearing design and construction.
2.8 FINISHES, GENERAL
nsn
A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative
to applying and designating finishes.
B. Finish louvers after assembly.
2.9 ALUMINUM FINISHES
A. Finish designations prefixed by AA conform to the system established by
the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.
B. High-Performance Organic Coating Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish:
cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid
chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating; Organic Coating: as
specified below) . Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal
surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturer's instructions.
1. Fluoropolymer 2-Coat Coating System: Manufacturer's standard ws
2-coat, thermocured system composed of specially formulated
inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not
less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight;
complying with AAMA 605.2. so
a. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's
full range of choices for color and gloss. nr
PART 3 - EXECUTION
an
3 .1 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and w
directions for installation of anchorages that are to be embedded in
concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to
Project site.
M"
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Locate and place louver units plumb, level, and at indicated alignment
with adjacent work.
B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers
fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make •
a weathertight connection.
C. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located
LOUVERS AND VENTS 10200 - 6
ON
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON. MA KB #96079
A. General: Provide each exterior louver with louver screens complying
with the following requirements:
1. Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Interior face.
2. Screening Type: Bird screening.
B. Secure screens to louver frames with stainless-steel machine screws,
spaced 6 inches (150 mm) maximum from each corner and at 12 inches (300
mm) o.c. between.
ON C. Louver Screen Frames: Fabricate screen frames with mitered corners to
louver sizes indicated and to comply with the following requirements:
� 1. Metal: Same kind and form of metal as indicated for louver frames
to which screens are attached.
a. Reinforce extruded-aluminum screen frames at corners with
an clips.
2 . Finish: Mill finish, unless otherwise indicated.
w 3 . Type: Rewireable frames with a driven spline or insert for
securing screen mesh.
D. Louver Screening for Aluminum Louvers: Fit aluminum louver screen
frames with screening covering louver openings and complying with the
following requirements:
1. Bird Screening: %-inch- (12.7-mm-) square mesh formed with
0.063-inch- (1.60-mm-) diameter aluminum wire.
2 .6 BLANK-OFF PANELS
40
A. General: Fabricate blank-off panels from materials and to sizes
indicated and to comply with the following requirements:
NO 1. Finish: Match finish applied to louver with respect to coating
type, except for color, which shall be as follows:
so a. Color: Black.
2 . Attach blank-off panels to back of louver frames with
stainless-steel sheet-metal screws.
on
B. Insulated, Blank-off Panels: Laminated metal-faced panels consisting
of insulating core surfaced on back and front with metal sheets,
complying with the following requirements:
1. Thickness: 2 inches.
2 . Metal Facing Sheets: Aluminum sheet, 0.032 inch thick.
3 . Insulating Core: Unfaced, rigid, glass-fiberboard insulation
complying with ASTM C 612, Class 1 and 2.
4 . Edge Treatment: Trim perimeter edges of blank-off panels with
an louver manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum-channel frames
0.081 inch thick, with corners mitered and with same finish as
panels.
5. Seal perimeter joints between panel faces and louver frames with
on
LOUVERS AND VENTS 10200 - 5
u
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
joints.
E. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete
assembly. so
F. Provide vertical mullions of type and at spacings indicated but not more
than recommended by manufacturer, or 72 inches (1830 mm) o.c. , whichever
we
is less. At horizontal joints between louver units, provide horizontal
mullions except where continuous vertical assemblies are indicated.
G. Provide sill extensions and loose sills made of same material as louvers w
where indicated or required for drainage to exterior and to prevent
water penetrating to interior.
H. Join frame members to one another and to fixed louver blades as follows, am
unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted
connections between frame members necessary:
so
1. With fillet welds, concealed from view; or mechanical fasteners;
or a combination of these methods; as standard with louver
manufacturer.
so
2.4 FIXED, EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM WALL LOUVERS
A. Louver Construction: Provide fixed-blade louvers with extruded-aluminum s,
frames and blades.
B. Horizontal, Drainable, Fixed-Blade Louvers: Complying with the
following:
1. Louver Depth: 6 inches (152 mm) .
2 . Frame Type: Channel type, unless otherwise indicated.
3 . Frame Thickness: 0.081 inch (2.06 mm) , unless otherwise indicated.
4. Blade Thickness: 0.081 inch (2.06 mm) , unless otherwise indicated.
5. Blade Angle: 45 degrees, unless otherwise indicated.
6. Performance Requirements: As follows, determined by testing units
48 inches (1220 mm) wide by 48 inches (1220 mm) high per AMCA 500:
a. Free Area: Not less than 9.24 sq. ft. (0.858 sq. m) .
b. Static Pressure Loss: Not more than 0.21 inch wg at an
airflow of 1250 fpm free area intake velocity.
C. Water Penetration: Not more than 0.01 oz. per sq. ft. (3 .1
g/sq. m) of free area at an airflow of 1250 fpm (6.35 m/s) on
free area velocity when tested for 15 minutes.
7. AMCA Seal: Mark units with the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.
w
C. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
1. Model No. K6776, Aerolite. so
2. Model No. LE-31, American Warming and Ventilating.
3. Model No. A6097, Construction Specialties, Inc.
4. Model No. ELF6375DX, Ruskin.
w
2.5 LOUVER SCREENS
w
LOUVERS AND VENTS 10200 - 4
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA RB #96079
measurements before fabrication, and show recorded measurements on final
shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction
progress to avoid delaying the Work.
4
1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work,
guarantee opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating louvers
without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that
actual opening dimensions correspond to
guaranteed dimensions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following:
1. The Aerolite Company.
on 2 . American Warming and Ventilating.
3 . Construction Specialties, Inc.
4 . Ruskin Mfg. , Tomkins Industries, Inc.
2 .2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M) , Alloy 6063-T5 or T-52 .
B. Fasteners: Of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal or 300
series stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals
that are corrosive or incompatible with joined materials.
1. Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions.
2 . Use Phillips flat-head screws for exposed fasteners, unless
otherwise indicated.
C. Anchors and Inserts: Of type, size, and material required for type of
loading and installation indicated. Use nonferrous metal or hot-dip
galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere
as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or expansion
bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors.
D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint
12 except containing no asbestos fibers.
on 2 .3 FABRICATION, GENERAL
A. General: Fabricate louvers and vents to comply with requirements
indicated for design, dimensions, materials, joinery, and performance.
B. Assemble louvers in shop to minimize field splicing and assembly.
Disassemble units as necessary for shipping and handling limitations.
w Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
C. Maintain equal louver blade spacing to produce uniform appearance.
ON D. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes
indicated, with allowances made for fabrication and installation
tolerances of louvers, adjoining construction, and perimeter sealant
00
LOUVERS AND VENTS 10200 - 3
4M
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
+w
ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening
of joints, overstressing of components, and other detrimental
effects: ow
a. Temperature Change (Range) : 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F,
material surfaces.
B. Air-Performance, Water-Penetration, and Air-Leakage Ratings: Provide
louvers complying with performance requirements indicated as
demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units of 48 inches wide by
48 inches high. Test units according to AMCA 500.
1. Perform testing on unpainted, cleaned, degreased units.
2. Perform water-penetration testing on louvers without screens. do
1.5 SUBMITTALS
am
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions
of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of product specified. ow
C. Shop drawings of louver units and accessories. Include plans,
elevations, sections, and details showing profiles, angles, and spacing
.e�
of louver blades; unit dimensions related to wall openings and
construction; free areas for each size indicated; profiles of frames at
jambs, heads, and sills; and anchorage details and locations.
D. Samples for initial selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts
showing the full range of colors available for units with
factory-applied color finishes.
E. Product test reports evidencing compliance of units with performance
requirements indicated.
F. Product certificates signed by louver manufacturers certifying that
their products comply with the specified requirements and are licensed
to bear the AMCA seal based on tests made according to AMCA 500 and
complying with the AMCA Certified Ratings Program.
G. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality
Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain louvers and vents from one source Am
and by a single manufacturer where alike in one or more respects
regarding type, design, and factory-applied color finish.
an
B. SMACNA Standard: Comply with SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"
recommendations for fabrication, construction details, and installation
procedures.
so
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Check actual louver openings by accurate field as
LOWERS AND VENTS 10200 - 2
00
40
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #9607
SECTION 10200 - LOUVERS AND VENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
aw the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
40 who performs this work. Note also all Addenda.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Fixed extruded aluminum louvers.
an 2 . Blank-off panels for wall louvers.
3 . Wall vents (brick vents) .
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that
relate to this Section:
1. Section 07901 "Joint Sealants" for sealants installed in perimeter
joints between louver frames and adjoining construction.
2 . Section 00811 "Standard Steel Doors and Frames" for louvers in
hollow-metal doors.
3 . Division 15 Section for ductwork connected to metal wall louvers.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A A. Louver Terminology: Refer to Air Movement and Control Association
(AMCA) 501 for definitions of terms for metal louvers not otherwise
defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
B. Standard Free Area: Free area of a louver 48 inches wide by 48 inches
so high, identical to that provided.
C. Maximum Standard Airflow: Airflow at point of beginning water
penetration through a louver 48 inches wide by 48 inches high, identical
40 to that provided.
D. Drainable-Blade Louver: Louver designed to collect and drain water to
exterior at sill by means of gutters in front edges of blades and
channels in jambs and mullions.
O
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
on A. Structural Performance: Engineer, fabricate, and install exterior metal
wall louvers to withstand the effects of loads and stresses from wind
and normal thermal movement without evidencing permanent deformation of
louver components including blades, frames, and supports; noise or metal
go fatigue caused by louver blade rattle or flutter; or permanent damage
to fasteners and anchors.
I. Wind Load: Uniform pressure (velocity pressure) of 30 lbf per sq.
ft. (960 Pa) , acting inwards or outwards.
2. Thermal Movements: Provide louvers that allow for thermal
movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in
LOUVERS AND VENTS 10200 - 1
on
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
5. Seams: Not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide, double turned and
double stitched.
am
D. Curtain Drop: Beaded chain with aluminum hook.
E. Curtain Tieback: At each termination.
am
F. Operating Wand: Fiberglass baton, not less than 30 inches (762 mm) long.
G. Cubicle Curtain Fabrics: Subject to compliance with requirements, Oft
provide one of the products specified in each cubicle curtain fabric
Product Data sheet at end of this Section.
so
PART 3 - EXECUTION
eft
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine ceilings for suitable conditions where cubicle track is to be
installed. so,
B. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
ON
3 .2 INSTALLATION
A. Install cubicle curtain track level and plumb, according to am
manufacturer's written instructions and original design.
B. Install ceiling-mounted tracks at intervals of not less than 24 inches
(610 mm) . rw
C. Center fastener in track to insure unencumbered carrier operation.
3 .3 CUBICLE CURTAIN FABRIC PRODUCT DATA SHEET
A. Curtain Material: As follows:
1. Manufacturer's Name: ArcCom
2. Pattern: Elements 2, # AC-42030, Meadow
3. Color: To be determined by the Architect.
4 . Fiber Content: 100 percent Visa FR polyester.
5. Width: 54/55".
6. Repeat: V-18", H-27"
7. Source: Arc-Com Fabrics Inc.
a. Source Phone Number: 1-212-1590 / 1-800-223-5466, x-3218
b. Source Contact: Lisa Schreiber (Dec. 1998)
w
B. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors
produced for cubicle curtain fabrics specified.
END OF SECTION 10190
rwe
CUBICLES 10190 - 4
OR
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON. MA KB #96079
1. Curved Track: Factory fabricated, not less than 12-inch- (300-mm-)
radius bends.
2 . Splicing Clamp: Of same material and finish as track.
B. Track Mounting: Ceiling mounted; mechanically fastened directly to
finished ceiling.
C. Track Mounting: Ceiling mounted; mechanically fastened to suspended
40 ceiling grid.
D. Track Accessories: Provide end caps, connectors, end stops, coupling
sleeves, wall brackets, and other accessories as required for secure and
operational installation. Provide a quantity of carriers for 6-inch
(150-mm) spacing the full length of the curtain plus 1 additional
so carrier.
1. Carriers: One-piece nylon glide with chrome-plated steel hook.
2 .3 CUBICLE CURTAINS
so A. Fabric: Provide cubicle curtain fabrics with the following
characteristics:
1. Fabrics are launderable to a temperature of not less than 160 deg F
(71 deg C) .
2 . Fabrics are flame resistant and are identical to those that have
passed NFPA 701 when tested by UL or another testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify
fabrics with appropriate markings of applicable testing and
inspecting agency.
00 B. Curtain Top: Not less than 20-inch- (510-mm-) wide nylon mesh with
1/2-inch- (13-mm-) holes. Overlap seams and double-lock stitch to body
of curtain.
1. Color: White
C. Provide curtains fabricated to comply with the following requirements:
1. Width: Equal to track length from which curtain is hung plus 10
percent, but not less than 12 inches (300 mm) .
ft 2 . Length: Equal to floor-to-ceiling height minus 18 inches (460 mm)
from finished ceiling at top and 12 inches (300 mm) above finished
floor.
3 . Top Hem: Not less than 1 inch (25 mm) and not more than 1-1/2
inches (40 mm) wide, triple thickness, reinforced with integral web,
and double stitched.
OR a. Grommets: 2-piece, rolled-edge, rustproof, nickel-plated brass
and spaced not more than 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.
4. Bottom and Side Hems: Not less than 1 inch (25 mm) wide,
reinforced, triple thickness, and single stitched.
CUBICLES 10190 - 3
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
w
F. Schedule of cubicles using same room designations indicated on Drawings.
G. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of cubicle tracks and
curtains certifying that their products comply with specified
requirements.
�w
H. Maintenance data for cubicle tracks and curtains to include in the
operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 1.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements. Verify
that tracks and curtains may be installed to comply with the original
design and referenced standard.
B. Space Enclosure and Environmental Limitations: Do not install tracks and .ft
curtains until space is enclosed and weatherproof, wet-work in space is
completed and nominally dry, and work above ceilings is complete.
1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below, before construction begins, that
match products installed, are packaged with protective covering for
storage, and are identified with labels clearly describing contents.
1. Curtain Carriers and Track End Caps: Before installation begins,
furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount
installed.
on
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
oft
2 .1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide cubicles *■"
by one of the following:
1. ADC Hospital Equipment. no
2. Creative Healthcare Products, Inc. (Clickeze) .
3 . General Cubicle Co.
4. Imperial Fastener Co.
5. Kirsch Co. oft
6. Nelson: A.R. Nelson Co. , Inc.
7. Pryor Products.
8. Salisbury Industries.
�w
2.2 CUBICLE TRACK ,
A. Track: Anodized, extruded aluminum.
w�
CUBICLES 10190 - 2
oft
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KE #9607
W
SECTION 10190 - CUBICLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction", 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
ww this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this work. Note also all Addenda.
on 1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
on
1. Cubicle curtain tracks and carriers.
2 . Cubicle curtains.
B. Related Section: Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry" contains
requirements for blocking for mounting tracks, curtain tiebacks, wall
brackets, and other items requiring anchorage.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General : Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions
of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data including durability, fade resistance, and
fire-test-response characteristics for each type of curtain fabric
specified.
an C. Shop Drawings showing layout and types of cubicles, size of curtains,
number of carriers, anchorage details, and conditions requiring
accessories. Indicate dimensions taken from field measurements.
ON D. Samples for initial selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts
for each type of curtain fabric indicated.
4i, E. Samples for verification of the following products, showing the full
range of color, texture, and pattern variations expected.
1. Curtain Fabric: 12-inch- (300-mm-) square swatch from dye lot used
for the Work, with specified treatments applied. Show complete
pattern repeat. Mark top and face of material.
2. Mesh Fabric: Manufacturer's standard-size unit, not less than
04 4 inches (100 mm) square.
3 . Cubicle Curtain Track: Manufacturer's standard-size unit, not less
than 4 inches (100 mm) long.
4 . Curtain Carrier: Manufacturer's full-size unit.
OR
CUBICLES 10190 - 1
40
00
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
No
recommended anchoring devices.
B. Floor-Supported Compartments: Set pilaster units with anchorages having 40
not less than 2 inches (50 mm) penetration into structural floor, unless
otherwise recommended by partition manufacturer. Level, plumb, and
tighten installation with devices furnished. Hang doors and adjust so
that tops of doors are level with tops of pilasters when doors are in am
closed position.
C. Floor-and-Ceiling-Anchored Compartments: Secure pilasters to supporting ,ft
construction and level, plumb, and tighten. Hang doors and adjust so
doors are level and aligned with panels when doors are in closed
position.
1. Secure pilasters to supporting structure and level, plumb, and
tighten installation with devices furnished by this Section.
3 .2 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware for proper
operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold open approximately w*
30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on
out-swinging doors (and entrance swing doors) to return to fully closed
position.
B. Clean exposed surfaces of partition systems using materials and methods
recommended by manufacturer, and provide protection as necessary to
prevent damage during remainder of construction period.
END OF SECTION 10155
wA
ww
rye
w�
�s
TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155 - 4 ,k
om
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA #96079
w compartments.
2.3 FABRICATION
40
A. General: Furnish standard doors, panels, and pilasters fabricated for
compartment system. Furnish units with cutouts, drilled holes, and
internal reinforcement to receive partition-mounted hardware,
'ft accessories, and grab bars, as indicated.
B. Door Dimensions: Unless otherwise indicated, furnish 24-inch-wide
Ob in-swinging doors for ordinary toilet stalls and 32-inch-wide (clear
opening) out-swinging doors for stalls equipped for use by handicapped.
C. Floor-Supported Compartments: Furnish galvanized steel anchorage
go devices complete with threaded rods, lock washers, and leveling
adjustment nuts at pilasters to permit structural connection at floor.
Provide shoe at each pilaster to conceal anchorage.
40
D. Floor-and-Ceiling-Anchored Compartments: Provide manufacturer's
standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies complete with leveling
adjustment at tops and bottoms of pilasters. Provide shoes and sleeves
(caps) at pilasters to conceal anchorage.
E. Hardware: Furnish hardware for each compartment to comply with
ANSI A117.1 and U.S. ADA Guidelines for handicapped accessibility and
as follows:
1. Hinges: Surface mounted type, adjustable to hold door open at any
angle up to 90 degrees. Provide gravity type, spring-action cam
type, or concealed torsion rod type to suit manufacturer's
standards.
2 . Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface-mounted latch
unit, designed for handicapped accessibility, with combination
rubber-faced door strike and keeper.
3 . Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard unit, combination hook and
rubber-tipped bumper, sized to prevent door hitting mounted
accessories.
4 . Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit for out-swinging doors.
Provide pulls on both faces of handicapped compartment doors.
2 .4 FINISH
so A. Colors: Colors as selected by the Architect from Manufacturer's full
line of available colors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's recommended procedures and
installation sequence. Install compartment units rigid, straight,
plumb, and level. Provide clearances of not more than % inch between
pilasters and panels, and not more than 1 inch between panels and walls.
Secure panels to walls with not less than two stirrup brackets attached
near top and bottom of panel. Locate wall brackets so that holes for
wall anchorages occur in masonry or tile joints. Secure panels to
pilasters with not less than two stirrup brackets located to align with
stirrup brackets at wall. Secure panels in position with manufacturer's
TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155 - 3
.w
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA RB #96072
w
C. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide materials and accessories
with surface burning characteristics indicated below, per NFPA 255, .w
"Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials", ASTM E 84, by a testing organization acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Flame Spread: 26 - 75.
2. Smoke Developed: 0 - 450 .
ok
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
on
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
by one of the following:
ww
1. Solid Phenolic:
a. Accurate Partitions Corp.
b. Ampco Products, Inc. "m
C. Capitol Partitions, Inc.
d. Columbia Partitions
e. Metpar Corp. .s
f. Misco Partitions
2 .2 MATERIALS
so
A. General: Provide materials which have been selected for surface
flatness and smoothness. Exposed surfaces which exhibit pitting, seam
marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, telegraphing of core w�
material, or other imperfections on finished units are not acceptable.
B. Solid Phenolic Panels: Provide material in thicknesses indicated, with
seamless construction with edges eased. Full color range. w�
1. Doors and Pilasters: Not less that 3/4" thickness.
2 . Panels: Not less than 1/2" thickness.
C. Pilaster Shoes and Caps: ASTM A 167, Type 302/304 stainless steel, not
less than 3 inches high, 0.0396 inch thick (20 gage) , finished to match
hardware. w
D. Brackets: Full height design for attaching panels to walls and
pilasters, extruded anodized aluminum, brite dip finish.
E. Hardware and Accessories: Heavy-duty operating hardware an d accessories
of ASTM 167, Type 302/304 stainless steel, #4 satin finish.
1. Surface mounted, through bolted stainless steel heavy duty hinges.
F. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of
stainless steel, chromium-plated steel, or brass, finished to match
hardware, with theft-resistant-type heads and nuts. For concealed
anchors, use stainless steel.
w
1. Provide structural supporting system for ceiling anchored
TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155 - 2
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA RB #96079
SECTION 10155 - TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this work. Note also all Addenda.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes stock, manufactured toilet compartments.
B. Types of toilet compartments include:
1. Solid Phenolic.
C. Styles of toilet compartments include:
1. Floor anchored, and ceiling braced.
am D. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that
relate to this section:
1. Section 10800 "Toilet and Bath Accessories" for toilet accessories,
such as grab bars.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract
and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for materials, fabrication, and installation including
catalog cuts of anchors, hardware, fastenings, and accessories.
C. Shop drawings for fabrication and erection of toilet compartment
assemblies not fully described by product drawings, templates, and
instructions for installation of anchorage devices built into other
work.
D. Samples of full range of colors for each type of unit required. Submit
6-inch-square samples of each color and finish on same substrate to be
used in work, for color verification after selections have been made.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
on A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of
shop drawings and fabrication, where possible, to ensure proper fitting
of work. However, allow for adjustments where taking of field
measurements before fabrication might delay work.
B. Coordination: Furnish inserts and anchorages which must be built into
other work for installation of toilet compartments and related items.
OR Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.
w TOILET COMPARTMENTS 10155 - 1
Am
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON. MA KB #96079
ON PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Deliver factory-built markerboard, tackboard and exhibit rail units
completely assembled in one piece without joints, wherever possible.
Where dimensions exceed panel size, provide 2 or more pieces of equal
length as acceptable to the Architect. When overall dimensions require
delivery in separate units, prefit components at the factory,
disassemble for delivery, and make final joints at the site. Use
splines at joints to maintain surface alignment.
B. Install units in locations and at mounting heights indicated and in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Keep perimeter lines
! ! straight, plumb, and level. Provide grounds, clips, backing materials,
adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim, and accessories necessary for a
complete installation.
on
1. Finished vertical surfaces shall be flat, free of warp or bends.
C. Coordinate job-site assembled units with grounds, trim, and accessories.
Join parts with a neat, precision fit.
D. Modify and apply porcelain enamel facing sheet to existing chalkboards
where indicated.
1. Provide new backing board as required.
E. Modify and apply new vinyl skin covering to existing tackboards where
indicated.
3 .2 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. verify that accessories required for each unit have been properly
installed and that operating units function properly.
B. Clean units in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Break
in markerboards only as recommended by the manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 10100
VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 10100 - 5
}
on
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORT VA #96079
wo
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Metal Trim and Accessories: Fabricate frames and trim of not less than
0.062-inch-thick aluminum alloy, size and shape as indicated, to suit
type of installation. Provide straight, single-length units wherever
possible; keep joints to a minimum. Miter corners to a neat, hairline
closure.
I. Where the size of boards or other conditions exist that require
support in addition to the normal trim, provide structural supports
or modify the trim as indicated or as selected by the Architect
from the manufacturer's standard structural support accessories to
suit the condition indicated.
2. Field-Applied Trim: Provide the manufacturer's standard snap-on
trim, with no visible screws or exposed joints.
3 . Chalktray: Furnish the manufacturer's continuous hollow,
extrusion-type aluminum chalktray with ribbed section and aluminum
ends, for each chalkboard.
4 . Map Rail: Furnish map rail at the top of each unit, complete with
the following accessories:
a. Display Rail: Provide continuous cork display rail
approximately 1 inch wide, integral with the map rail.
b. End Stops: Provide one end stop at each end of the map rail.
C. Metal Map Hooks: Provide 4 map hooks for each map rail.
d. Flagholder: Provide one flagholder for each room.
2 .5 FABRICATION No
A. Porcelain Enamel Markerboards: Laminate facing sheet and backing sheet
to core material under pressure with manufacturer's recommended .w
flexible, waterproof adhesive.
B. Assembly: Provide factory-assembled markerboard and tackboard units,
except where field-assembled units are required. .ter
1. Make joints only where total length exceeds maximum manufactured
length. Fabricate with the minimum number of joints, balanced
around the center of the board, as acceptable to the Architect. �w
2. Provide the manufacturer's standard vertical joint system between
abutting sections of markerboard.
3. Provide manufacturer's standard mullion trim at joints between
markerboard and tackboard.
no
2.6 FINISHES
A. General: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations a%
relative to application and designations of finishes.
1. Finish designations prefixed by "AA" conform to the system
established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum
finishes.
VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 10100 - 4 w
4
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #9607
!0
a. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc.
b. Greensteel, Inc.
C. Lemco Corporation
2 . Tackboards:
a. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc.
b. Greensteel, Inc.
C. Lemco Corporation
40 2.2 MATERIALS
A. Porcelain Enamel Markerboards: Provide balanced, high-pressure-laminated
P" porcelain enamel markerboards of 3-ply construction consisting of face
sheet, core material, and backing.
1. Markerboard Face Sheet: Provide Manufacturer's standard 24-gauge
steel porcelain enamel, Type 1 stretcher-leveled aluminized steel
face sheet with fused porcelain enamel coating to steel at
approximately 1000 deg F (538 deg C) .
a. Markerboard Cover Coat: Provide the manufacturer's standard
light-colored special writing surface with gloss finish
intended for use with liquid felt-tipped markers and magnetic
aids.
b. Include music staffs in locations indicated.
C. Include 1" x 1" graphs in locations indicated.
2 . Core: Provide the manufacturer's standard 3/8-inch-thick
particleboard core material complying with the requirements of ANSI
A208. 1, Grade 1-M-1.
3 . Backing Sheet: Provide the manufacturer's standard 0.015-inch-thick
aluminum sheet backing.
AI�1
4 . Laminating Adhesive: Provide the manufacturer's standard
moisture-resistant thermoplastic-type adhesive.
on B. Vinyl-Fabric-Faced Tackboards: Provide mildew-resistant, washable,
vinyl fabric complying with FS CCC-W-408, Type II, weighing not less
than 13 ounces per square yard, laminated to 1/4-inch-thick cork sheet.
A Provide fabric that has a flame spread rating of 25 or less when tested
in accordance with ASTM E 84. Provide color and texture as scheduled
or as selected from the manufacturer's standards.
lei► 1. Backing: Make panels rigid by factory laminating cork face sheet
under pressure to 5/16-inch-thick particleboard backing.
2.3 SLIDING UNITS
A. Horizontal Sliding Markerboard Panels: Fabricate panels from
manufacturer's standard components. Provide panels required that
operate smoothly under manual activation without vibration or chatter.
1. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard horizontal sliding hardware
consisting of overhead extruded-aluminum track with nylon ball-
bearing rollers and channel-shaped bottom guides.
a. Aluminum track: Grant #7000, housing is .125" thick.
rll VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 10100 - 3
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
E. Certificates: In lieu of laboratory test reports, when permitted by the
Architect, submit the manufacturer's certification that
vinyl-fabric-faced cork tackboard materials furnished comply with
requirements specified for flame spread ratings.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who is an
authorized representative of the markerboard manufacturer for both
installation and maintenance of the type of visual display boards
required for this Project.
B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide vinyl-fabric-faced tackboards
with surface burning characteristics indicated below, as determined by �w
testing assembled materials composed of facings and backings identical
to those required in this section, in accordance with ASTM E 84, by a
testing organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
ww
1. Flame Spread: 25 or less.
2 . Smoke Developed: 10 or less.
am
C. Design Criteria: The drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional
requirements of visual display boards and are based on the specific type
and model indicated. Other visual display boards having equal
performance characteristics by other manufacturers may be considered wn
provided that deviations in dimensions and profiles are minor and do not
change the design concept or intended performance as judged by the
Architect. The burden of proof of equality is on the proposer.
rrA
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of .wa
shop drawings and fabrication to ensure proper fitting. Show recorded
measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule
with construction progress to avoid delay.
1. Allow for trimming and fitting wherever taking field measurements
before fabrication might delay the Work.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Porcelain Enamel Markerboard Warranty: Furnish the manufacturer's
written warranty, agreeing to replace porcelain enamel markerboards that
do not retain their original writing and erasing qualities, become slick
and shiny, or exhibit crazing, cracking, or flaking, provided the
manufacturer's instructions with regard to handling, installation, «�
protection, and maintenance have been followed.
1. Warranty Period: Lifetime of the building.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
of one of the following:
w
1. Porcelain Enamel Marker Boards & Sliding Marker Boards & Skins:
VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 10100 - 2
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA RB #96079
SECTION 10100 - VISIIAL DISPLAY BOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this work. Note also all Addenda.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following types of visual display boards:
1. Porcelain enamel markerboards (for liquid chalk) .
2 . Vinyl-fabric-faced cork tackboards.
3 . Horizontal sliding markerboards.
4. Addition of new skins and vinyl covering to existing chalkboards
Aw and tackboards (typical of all classrooms) .
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that
relate to this section:
1. Section 06105 - "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood blocking and
grounds.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the
00 Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data: Include manufacturer's data substantiating that tackboard
materials comply with requirements indicated.
C. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings for each type of markerboard and
tackboard required. Include sections of typical trim members and
dimensioned elevations. Show anchors, grounds, reinforcement,
accessories, layout, and installation details.
D. Samples: Provide the following samples of each product for initial
selection of colors, patterns, and textures, as required, and for
verification of compliance with requirements indicated.
► 1. Samples for initial selection of color, pattern, and texture:
a. Porcelain Enamel Markerboard: Manufacturer's color charts
consisting of actual sections of porcelain enamel finish
showing the full range of colors available for each type of
markerboard indicated.
b. Vinyl-fabric-faced Cork Tackboards: Provide samples of
, ► material listed onthe Finish/Color Schedule or manufacturer's
color charts consisting of actual sections of vinyl fabric,
showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns
available for each type of vinyl-fabric-faced cork tackboard
indicated.
so VISIIAL DISPLAY BOARDS 10100 - 1
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
A�1
A. Wood: Provide the following intumescent paint systems over interior wood
+ surfaces:
1. Flat Finish: Two finish coats over a primer.
a. Prime Coat: Primers applied at the spreading rate recommended
by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of
not less than 4 mils.
1) Albi : Primer as approved by Albi.
2) Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217.
on 3) PPG: 6-6 Speedhide Interior Quick-Drying Enamel
Undercoater.
b. First Coat: Flat, intumescent-type, fire-retardant coating
applied at the spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer
to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 4 mils.
1) Albi: Albi-Cote A107A Fire-Retardant Synthetic Coating.
2) Moore: Retardo Latex Fire Retardant Paint #220.
3) PPG: 42-7 Speedhide Interior Fire Retardant Flat Latex.
am C. Second Coat: Flat, intumescent-type, fire-retardant, coating
applied at the spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer
to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 4 mils.
1) Albi: Albi-Cote A107A Fire-Retardant Synthetic Coating.
2) Moore: Retardo Latex Fire Retardant Paint #220.
3) PPG: 42-7 Speedhide Interior Fire Retardant Flat Latex.
END OF SECTION 09967
PO
INTUMESCENT PAINTS 09967 - 9
low
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
wrR
to sample paint materials being used. Samples of material delivered
to the Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified
in the presence of the Contractor. w
2 . The testing agency will perform appropriate tests for the following
characteristics as required by the Owner:
a. Qualitative material analysis. we
b. Absorption.
C. Accelerated weathering.
d. Accelerated yellowness. „M
e. Color retention.
f. Alkali resistance.
g. Abrasion resistance.
h. Mildew resistance. w
i. Apparent reflectivity.
j . Washability.
k. Dry opacity.
1. Recoating.
M. Skinning.
3 . The Owner may direct the Contractor to stop painting if test results
show materials being used do not comply with specified requirements.
The Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint materials from the
Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces previously
painted with rejected materials. If necessary, the Contractor may
be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted
surfaces if, on repainting with the specified materials, the two
coatings are incompatible. +
3 .5 CLEANING
No
A. Clean Up: At the end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags,
and other discarded materials from the Project site.
1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint spattered surfaces.
Remove spattered paint by proper methods. Be careful not to scratch
or otherwise damage adjacent finished surfaces.
up
3 .6 PROTECTION
Am
A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against
damage from painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or
replacing, and repainting as approved by the Architect. Leave the work
in an undamaged condition. 4
B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove
temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work
after completing painting operations.
1. After completing work of other trades, touch up and restore damaged
or defaced surfaces. Comply with PDCA P1.
3.7 INTUMESCENT PAINT SCHEDULE
w�
INTUMESCENT PAINTS 09967 - 8
wm
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON. MA KB #96079
2 . If undercoats or other conditions show through the final coat of
paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish,
color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that edges,
4, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film
thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
3 . Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed or touchup
painted.
4 . Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper
drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it
feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb
06 pressure, and where applying another coat of paint does not cause
the undercoat to loose adhesion.
C. Application Procedures: Apply coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other
applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the material applied. Use
w brush of appropriate size for the surface or item being painted.
2 . Rollers: Use rollers made of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile
sheep's wool as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and
texture required.
OR 3 . Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as
recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture
required.
D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials at not less than
manufacturer's recommended spreading rate for the surface to be coated.
Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended
by the manufacturer to provide surface-burning characteristics specified.
E. Prime Coat: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as
recommended by the manufacturer, to substrates required to be painted
that have not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed
surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas appears in the
first coat.
F. Intumescent Paint: Apply intumescent paint by brush, roller, or spray
as recommended by the coating manufacturer for the type of substrate
involved according to manufacturer's written instructions.
4W
1. where multiple finish coats are required, allow the base or first
coat to dry before applying topcoat according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
G. Completed work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage.
Removed, refinish, or repaint work not complying with specified
requirements.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. The Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at
any time and as often as the Owner deems necessary during the period when
paint is being applied:
1. The Owner will engage the services of an independent testing agency
INTUMESCENT PAINTS 09967 - 7
oft
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
No
loose or powdery paint.
2. Remove oil and grease before mechanical cleaning.
3 . Remove existing water-sensitive coatings completely. Repair cracks Oft
and gouges. Treat previously painted slick or glossy surfaces with
a strong detergent and thoroughly clean or rub with sandpaper to
reduce surface shine and to promote adhesion.
4 . Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and wo
reprime.
5. Wood Surfaces: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign oft
substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as
required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off.
a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots and apply a thin on
coat of manufacturer's recommended knot sealer before applying
the prime coat. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in
finished surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand .s
smooth when dried.
D. Material Preparation: Mix and prepare intumescent paint materials
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying intumescent paint in
a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
2 . Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform
density, and as required during application. Do not stir surface
film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain
material before using. w
3. Thinning: Use only thinners recommended by manufacturer and only
within recommended limits.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. General: Apply intumescent paints to exposed surfaces indicated
according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and
techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.
1. Colors: Selected by Architect from Manufacturer's full range of
colors.
2. Do not apply coatings over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture,
scuffed surfaces, or conditions indicated as unacceptable in
manufacturer's written instructions, or to surfaces that are
otherwise detrimental to forming an acceptable coating.
B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been
cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as
practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface
deterioration.
1. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same
regardless of the application method. Do not apply succeeding coats
until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the
manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even
surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand
between applications.
Diem
INTUMESCENT PAINTS 09967 - 6
40
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON. MA Rg #96079
4
1. Provide water-reducible or solvent-reducible, pigmented intumescent
paint materials; formulated to retard flame spread and intended for
use on interior combustible and noncombustible surfaces.
oft
C. Colors: As selected by the Architect from manufacturer's full range.
on PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with the Applicator present,
under which painting will be performed for compliance with paint
application requirements and conditions affecting coating performance.
1. Proceed with intumescent paint application only after unsatisfactory
so conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are
thoroughly dry.
2 . Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's approval of
surfaces and conditions within a particular area.
B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections of these Specifications in
which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total
intumescent paint system for various substrates. On request, furnish
information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of
compatible primers.
1. Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using coatings
specified over substrates primed by others.
Aw
3 .2 PREPARATION
A. General: Remove hardware, hardware accessories, plates, machined
surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are
not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of
the size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before
surface preparation and painting.
1. After completing painting operations in each space or area,
reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades
go involved.
B. Cleaning: Before applying coatings or other surface treatments, clean
substrates of substances that could impair bond of the intumescent paint
systems.
1. Schedule cleaning and painting application so dust and other
contaminates will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according
to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate
condition and as specified.
1. Surfaces to be coated must be free of oil, grease, dirt, rust, and
INTUMESCENT PAINTS 09967 - 5
1Aw
as
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA RB #96079
well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F.
Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign
materials and residue.
1. Protect intumescent paint materials from freezing. Keep storage
area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take
necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are
protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling,
mixing, and application.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Temperature Conditions: Apply coatings only when the temperature of
surfaces to be coated and surrounding air temperatures are above 50
deg F.
Wa
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
Oft
A. Furnish extra intumescent paint materials from the same production run
as materials applied in quantities described below. Package intumescent
paint materials in unopened, factory-sealed containers for storage, and
identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to the 4+
Owner.
1. Quantity: Furnish the Owner with an additional 5 percent, but not
less than 1 gal. or 1 case, as appropriate, of each material and
color applied.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
of one of the following:
1. Albi Manufacturing Co. , Inc. , (Albi) .
2. Benjamin Moore and Co. (Moore) .
3. PPG Industries; Pittsburgh Paints (PPG) .
2.2 INTUMESCENT PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility: Provide primers, undercoats, and finish-coat
materials that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated
under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by
manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality intumescent paint
materials. Intumescent paint materials not displaying manufacturer's
product identification will not be acceptable.
so
INTUMESCENT PAINTS 09967 - 4
ON
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA RS 48el
a. Wood: Two 12-inch square samples of each color and texture on
hardboard.
D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality
Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience.
Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses,
names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information
specified.
E. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating that
intumescent paint materials comply with requirements indicated, based on
comprehensive testing of current product formulations.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: An experienced applicator who has completed
intumescent painting applications similar in material and extent to that
indicated for the Project and whose work has resulted in application with
a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain primers and undercoat materials for each
intumescent paint system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats.
1. Notify the Architect of problems anticipated using specified coating
systems.
C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide intumescent paint materials
with the following surface-burning characteristics as determined by
testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Flame Spread: 25.
2 . Smoke Developed: 25.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver intumescent paint materials to the Project site in manufacturer's
Ob original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name
and label, and the following information:
1. Product name or title of material.
? ' 2 . Product description (generic classification or binder type) .
3 . UL label, indicating tested fire rating.
4. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
5. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents.
6. Thinning and mixing instructions.
7. Application instructions.
8. Color name and number.
9. VOC content.
10. Handling instructions and precautions.
B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a
INTUMESCENT PAINTS 09967 - 3
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA rn #96079
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS w►e
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of so
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this work. Note also all Addenda.
.w.
1.3 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation and application of intumescent w
paints to scheduled items and surfaces, including prime and finish coats.
B. Related Sections include the following: w
1. Section 07251 "Sprayed-On Fireproofing" for cementitious sprayed-on
fireproofing.
2 . Section 09900 "Painting" for general painting.
1.4 SUBMITTALS of
A. Product Data: For each intumescent paint system indicated. Include
primers.
me
1. Material List: Provide an inclusive list of required intumescent
paint materials. Indicate each material and cross-reference
specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each
material by manufacturer's catalog number and general
classification.
2 . Manufacturer's Information: Provide manufacturer's technical
information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, aft
storing, and applying intumescent paint materials.
3 . Certification: By the manufacturer that products supplied comply
with the Commonwealth of Massachusetts regulations controlling use
of VOCs.
B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the
full range of colors available for each intumescent paint finish
indicated.
C. Samples for Verification: For each color to be applied, with texture to
simulate actual conditions, on representative samples of the actual
substrate.
1. Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including „-,
primers and finish coats. Use representative colors when preparing
Samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and
texture are achieved.
2. Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each 40
finish sample. Label each sample for location and application.
3. Submit Samples on the following substrates for the Architect's
review of color and texture only: 06
INTUMESCENT PAINTS 09967 - 2
as
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON. MA KE #96079
asr
SECTION 09967 - INTUMESCENT PAINTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 TIME, MANNER AND REQUIREMENTS FOR FILING SUB-BIDS
A. Sub-Bids shall be submitted in accordance with the provisions of General
Laws, Chapter 149, Section 44A to 44I, inclusive, as amended.
B. Sub-Bids for work under this Section shall be received at the Council
Chambers at Town Hall, 210 Main Street, Northampton, MA 01060, until 2:00
p.m. local time on February 9, 1999, at which time all filed Sub-Bids
shall be opened, read aloud, and duly recorded.
C. Sub-Bids shall be submitted on forms identical to those contained in
Bidding Requirements: Bid Form for Sub-Bidder. The Bid Forms attached
hereto are for information only and shall not be detached, filled in, or
ON executed. All Sub-Bids shall be submitted on the FORM FOR SUB-BID
furnished by the Awarding Authority as required by Section 44G of Chapter
149 of the General Laws, as amended. Sub-Bids Forms shall be completely
filled in and all Sub-Bids which are incomplete, conditional, obscure,
!! or which contain any additions not called for will be rejected.
D. Sub-Bids filed with the Awarding Authority shall be accompanied by a Bid
Deposit in the form of a certified check or a treasurer's or cashier's
check issued by a responsible bank or trust company, payable to the City
of Northampton. A bid bond shall be:
1. On a form satisfactory to the Awarding Authority.
2 . With a surety company qualified to do business in the Commonwealth
and satisfactory to the Awarding Authority.
3. Conditioned upon the faithful performance by the principal of the
agreements contained in the Bid. The amount of such bid deposit
t shall be five percent (5%) of the value of the Bid.
E. Sub-Bids for work under this Section shall be for the complete work
required as specified and as shown on the drawings.
F. Sub-Bidders are directed to the Instructions to Bidders, and to the
requirements that all bidders visit the site to determine the scope of
work required under this Section.
G. Sub-Bidders must comply with all provisions of Division 1, General
Requirements, in the same manner as the General Contractor.
H. Work to be done under this Filed Sub-Bid is included in the Contract
Documents as listed in LOD-1 through LOD-5 (List of Drawings) .
Ada
INTUMESCENT PAINTS 09967 - 1
ON
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTH_AMPT N MA KB #96079
C. Zolatone: Zolatone System 43 .
C. Gypsum Drywall: One-coat, flat, multicolored coating system over a
primer.
1. Prime Coat: Latex Primer Sealer:
a. Coronado: Toll-O-Fect Primer/Sealer 120/11.
b. Polomyx: Polomyx SPII ECO-Block Waterbased Stain
Blocking Primer.
C. Zolatone: Zo-Cryl Sealer 92 .
2 . Finish Coat: Two-step, flat, multicolored coating.
a. Coronado: Toll-O-Fect Multicolor Wall Coating.
b. Polomyx: Polomyx Multi-color Finish.
C. Zolatone: Zolatone System 43 .
mot
END OF SECTION 09921
MULTICOLORED INTERIOR COATINGS 09921 - 7
j
.w
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #9 6 0 7 9
A. Apply multicolored coatings according to the manufacturer's directions.
Use applicators and techniques best suited for the substrates and
material being applied. When applied by spray method, block filler must Am
be back-rolled.
B. Do not apply coatings over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed
surfaces, or other conditions detrimental to the formation of a coating. am
C. Block Fillers: Application of block fillers is by Section 09900,
"Painting" .
D. Prime Coats: Before applying multicolored coatings, apply a prime coat
as recommended by the manufacturer to substrates required to be coated
that have not received a prime coat by others. Reprime surfaces where
evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas appear.
D. Comply with manufacturer's printed instructions. w►
3 .4 CLEANING
A. Cleanup: At the end of each work day, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish,
and other discarded coating materials from the site.
B. Remove multicolored coatings from adjacent surfaces not intended to be
coated.
3 .5 PROTECTION
so
A. Protect work of other trades, whether to be coated or not, against
damage caused by multicolored coatings.
AW
B. Provide temporary closure to confine spraying operation and to prevent
polluting surrounding environment.
C. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly coated surfaces. Remove
temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work
after completing coating operations.
1W
3 .6 MULTICOLORED INTERIOR COATING SCHEDULE
A. General: Provide the following interior multicolored coating systems
for substrates indicated. ►
B. Concrete Masonry: Flat, multicolored coating system over a block filler
applied by Section 09900 "Painting", and primer. low
1. Prime Coat: Latex Primer Sealer:
a. Coronado: Toll-O-Fect Primer/Sealer 120/11.
b. Polomyx: Polomyx 202 Base Coat.
C. Zolatone: Zo-Cryl Sealer Z-96.
2 . Finish Coat: Two-step, flat, multicolored coating:
a. Coronado: Toll-O-Fect Multicolor Wallcoating.
b. Polomyx: Polomyx Multi-color Finish.
Alp
MULTICOLORED INTERIOR COATINGS 09921 - 6
04
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON. MA KB #96079
00
2 . Gypsum Drywall Primers:
a. Coronado: Toll-O-Fect Primer/Sealer 120/11.
04 b. Polomyx: Polomyx No. 202 Basecoat.
C. Zolatone: Zo-Cryl Sealer 92.
PW 2 .4 MULTICOLORED COATING MATERIALS
A. Multicolored Coatings: Provide the manufacturer's recommended
factory-formulated, multicolored coating materials that are compatible
d� with the substrate and prime coat materials indicated.
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
1. Multicolored Coatings:
a. Coronado: Toll-O-Fect Multicolor Wallcoating.
b. Polomyx: Polomyx Multi-color Finish.
C. Zolatone: Zolatone System 43 .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .1 EXAMINATION
00
A. Examine substrates to receive multicolored coatings and conditions under
which the coatings will be applied to conform to the manufacturer's
application requirements. Notify Construction Manager and do not begin
coating application until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Start of coating application will be construed as the Applicator's
acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area.
3 .2 PREPARATION
A. General Procedures: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates,
machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already
installed that are not to be coated. If such items cannot be removed,
r provide surface-applied protection prior to surface preparation and
coating. After coating operations have been completed in each space or
area, reinstall the items removed using workers skilled in the trades
involved.
to
B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be coated according
to the manufacturer's instructions for each particular substrate
condition, and as specified.
1. Cleaning: Clean surfaces to receive multicolored coatings. Remove
oil and grease prior to cleaning. Schedule cleaning so that dust
and other contaminants from the cleaning operations do not fall on
wet, newly coated surfaces.
2 . Notify the Architect in writing about anticipated problems if the
multicolored coating system is applied over substrates primed by
others.
3 .3 APPLICATION
MULTICOLORED INTERIOR COATINGS 09921 - 5
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB 4;96079
exceeds 85 percent, or at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above
the dew point, or to damp or wet surfaces.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Extra Materials: Furnished from same production run as materials
applied. Package materials with a protective covering and identify with moo
labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner.
1. Multi-Color Interior Coating: Furnish quantity equal to 5 percent
of amount of each color applied.
2 . Equipment: Provide touch-up . it, including 1/2 horsepower
compressor, spray gun with one quart capacity cap, hose and
fittings. 00
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
multicolored coatings manufactured by one of the following: ,k
1. Coronado Paint Company (Coronado) .
2 . Polomyx Industries. (Polomyx) .
3 . Zolatone Process, Inc. (Zolatone) . ■o
2.2 MULTICOLORED COATING MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility: Provide block finish coat materials, and 6ft
related materials that are compatible with one another, the primers and
undercoat materials and the substrates indicated under conditions of
service and application, as demonstrated by the manufacturer based on A
testing and field experience.
B. Material Quality: Provide the best-quality grade of multicolored
coatings. Materials not displaying manufacturer' s identification as a `'"
best-grade product will not be acceptable.
C. Colors: Provide custom color selection made by the Architect: Zolatone „*
#43-29905 for multicolored coating systems.
2.3 PRIMERS
A. Primers: Provide the manufacturer's recommended factory-formulated,
latex-type primers that are compatible with the substrate and finish
coats indicated. ,
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
1. Concrete Masonry Primers:
a. Coronado: Toll-O-Fect Primer/Sealer 120/11.
b. Polomyx: Polomyx No. 206 Basecoat.
C. Zolatone: Zo-Cryl Sealer 92.
MULTICOLORED INTERIOR COATINGS 09921 - 4
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA
KB #96079
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify coatings with
appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1. Flame Spread: 25 or less.
2 . Smoke Developed: 450 or less.
C. Field Samples: The Architect will select one wall surface for each
substrate to represent surfaces and conditions. Apply multicolored
coatings to each surface according to the schedule, or as specified.
Provide full-coat samples on at least 10 sq. ft. of wall surface until
the required color and texture are obtained. Simulate finished lighting
conditions to review the field samples.
1. After finishes are accepted, these surfaces will be used to
evaluate the coating system. Final acceptance of colors will be
from job-applied samples.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver multicolored coating materials to the Project site in the
manufacturer's new, original, unopened packages or containers bearing
the manufacturer's name and label, and the following information:
1. Name or title of material.
2 . Manufacturer's name, stock number, and date of manufacture.
3 . Contents by volume.
4. Thinning instructions, if permitted.
5. Application instructions.
6. Color name and number.
7. Handling instructions and precautions.
B. Store materials not in actual use in tightly closed, covered containers
at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C) in a
well-ventilated area. Keep containers used in storage in a clean
$0 condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
1. Protect coating materials from freezing. Keep the storage area
neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take
necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are
protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling,
mixing, and application.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Establish and maintain environmental
conditions in spaces to receive multicolored coatings that comply with
the manufacturer's recommendations. Provide adequate natural or induced
ventilation, as necessary, for curing and as recommended by the
manufacturer.
00
B. Temperature Conditions: Apply multicolored coatings only when the
temperature of the surface to be coated, the ambient temperature, and
the temperature of the materials to be used are above 50 deg F (10 deg
C) .
C. Weather Conditions: Do not apply coatings when the relative humidity
MULTICOLORED INTERIOR COATINGS 09921 - 3
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
1.3 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Applying multicolored coatings to interior surfaces scheduled.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that
relate to this Section:
1. Epoxy-based coatings are specified in Section 09900 "Painting" .
2 . Surface preparation of masonry substrates to receive multi-colored 4W
coatings are specified in Section 09900 "Painting" .
1.4 SUBMITTALS
w±
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
no
B. Product data for each type of primer and coating specified.
1. Include technical information, basic materials analysis and
instructions for handling, storage, and application. "
2 . List each coating material and cross-reference the specific coating
application. Identify each material by manufacturer' s catalog
number and general classification. Ak
3 . Certification by the elastomeric coating system manufacturer that
the products supplied comply with State of Connecticut regulations
controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs) .
C. Samples for initial color selection in the form of the manufacturer's
color charts.
1. After color selection, the Architect will furnish color chips for
surfaces to be coated.
D. Maintenance data for multicolored interior coating to include in
"Operating and Maintenance Manual" specified in Division 1.
1. Methods for maintaining coating.
w
2 . Precautions for using cleaning materials and methods that could be
detrimental to the finish and performance.
E. Material certificates, in lieu of laboratory test reports, signed by
the manufacturer certifying that multicolored coatings comply with the
requirements specified.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has
completed multicolored coating system applications similar in material
and extent to that indicated for the Project that have resulted in a
construction record of successful in-service performance.
B. Fire-Performance Characteristics: Provide coatings with the following '
surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing identical
products per ASTM E 84 by UL or other testing and inspecting agencies
MULTICOLORED INTERIOR COATINGS 09921 - 2
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
SECTION 09921 - MULTICOLORED INTERIOR COATINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
4"
1.1 TIME, MANNER AND REQUIREMENTS FOR FILING SUB-BIDS
O,, A. Sub-Bids shall be submitted in accordance with the provisions of General
Laws, Chapter 149, Section 44A to 44I, inclusive, as amended.
B. Sub-Bids for work under this Section shall be received at the Council
Chambers at Town Hall, 210 Main Street, Northampton, MA 01060, until
2:00 p.m. local time on February 9, 1999, at which time all filed Sub-
Bids shall be opened, read aloud, and duly recorded.
Mw
C. Sub-Bids shall be submitted on forms identical to those contained in
Bidding Requirements: Bid Form for Sub-Bidder. The Bid Forms attached
hereto are for information only and shall not be detached, filled in,
or executed. All Sub-Bids shall be submitted on the FORM FOR SUB-BID
furnished by the Awarding Authority as required by Section 44G of
Chapter 149 of the General Laws, as amended. Sub-Bids Forms shall be
completely filled in and all Sub-Bids which are incomplete, conditional,
obscure, or which contain any additions not called for will be rejected.
D. Sub-Bids filed with the Awarding Authority shall be accompanied by a Bid
Deposit in the form of a certified check or a treasurer's or cashier's
check issued by a responsible bank or trust company, payable to the City
of Northampton. A bid bond shall be:
1. On a form satisfactory to the Awarding Authority.
2 . With a surety company qualified to do business in the Commonwealth
and satisfactory to the Awarding Authority.
!► 3 . Conditioned upon the faithful performance by the principal of the
agreements contained in the Bid. The amount of such bid deposit
shall be five percent (5%) of the value of the Bid.
" E. Sub-Bids for work under this Section shall be for the complete work
required as specified and as shown on the drawings.
00 F. Sub-Bidders are directed to the Instructions to Bidders, and to the
requirements that all bidders visit the site to determine the scope of
work required under this Section.
G. Sub-Bidders must comply with all provisions of Division 1, General
Requirements, in the same manner as the General Contractor.
H. Work to be done under this Filed Sub-Bid is included in the Contract
Documents as listed in LOD-1 through LOD-5 (List of Drawings)
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this work. Note also all Addenda.
MULTICOLORED INTERIOR COATINGS 09921 - 1
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
W200 Series.
L. Overhead Metal Deck, Bar Joist & Ductwork, where single- color is
indicated:
1. One coat with a total dry film thickness not less than 2 .5 mils.
a. Tnemec: Series 15 Unibond
b. Sherwin Williams: Opti-Bond B50 W100, or Con-Lux Galva-
Lon 89 White.
M. Zinc-Coated Metal and Piping:
1. Full-Gloss Enamel Finish: Two coats over primer with total dry
film thickness not less than 2 .5 mils.
a. Primer: Galvanized metal primer.
1) Tnemec: 37H77 Primer.
2) Moore: Ironclad Galvanized Metal Latex
Primer #155.
3) Sherwin Williams: DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish B66, W1, or
Con-Lux 66 Barrier White or 46
Barrier Green.
b. First and Second Coats: Exterior, gloss, alkyd enamel.
1) Tnemec: 22 Enduratone.
2) Moore: Impervo High-Gloss Enamel #133 .
3) Sherwin Williams: Industrial Enamel B54 Series, or Con-
Lux Enamelite 500 Series.
N. Piping, Base and Covered
1. Semigloss Alkyd Enamel: Two coats.
a. First and Second Coats: Interior, semi gloss, alkyd paint.
1) Tnemec: 23 Enduratone.
2) Sherwin Williams: ProMar 200 Interior Alkyd Semi-Gloss
B34 W200 Series.
END OF SECTION 09900
PAINTING 09900-19
bw
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORT KB #96079
1. Stained Polyurethane Rubbed Finish: Three finish coats over stain.
a. Stain Coat: Oil-type interior wood stain. .f
1) Cabot: Alkyd Stain
2) Glidden: 1600 Woodmaster Oil Stain. ANW
3) Moore: 241 Moore's Interior Wood Finishes Penetrating
Stain.
4) PPG: 77-302 Rez Medium Tint Base.
Ak
b. First Coat: Surface Sealer
1) PPG: 6-10 Sanding Sealer.
2) Sherwin Williams: Woodclassics Fast Dry Sanding Sealer
B26 V43 .
C. Second and Third Coats: Polyurethane
1) PPG: 77-9 Polyurethane
2) Sherwin Williams: Woodclassics Fast Dry Oil Varnish
(satin) A66-300 Series.
J. Natural-Finish Woodwork:
1. Rubbed Polyurethane Finish: Two finish coats over sealer.
a. First Coat: Sanding Sealer.
1) PPG: 6-10 Sanding Sealer.
2) Sherwin Williams: Woodclassics Fast Dry Sanding Sealer
B26 V43.
b. Second and Third Coats: Polyurethane
1) PPG: 77-9 Polyurethane am
2) Sherwin Williams: Woodclassics Fast Dry Oil Varnish
(satin) A66-300 Series.
K. Ferrous Metal:
1. Full-Gloss Enamel Finish: Two coats over primer with total dry
film thickness not less than 2.5 mils.
a. Primer: Synthetic, quick-drying, rust-inhibiting primer.
1) Tnemec: 37H77 Chem Prime.
2) Moore: Ironclad Retardo Rust-Inhibitive
Paint #163.
3) Sherwin Williams: Kem Kromik Universal Primer B50 Z
Series, or Con-Lux Rust Barrier
Primers.
b. First and Second Coats: Exterior, gloss, alkyd enamel. "
1) Tnemec: 23 Enduratone
2) Moore: Impervo High-Gloss Enamel #133 .
3) Sherwin Williams: ProMar 200 Interior Alkyd Gloss B34
PAINTING 09900-18
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
1) Tnemec: 112 Tufcoat
E. Previously glazed concrete masonry units:
1. Glazed Finish: Two finish coats epoxy paint.
a. Sand to degloss.
b. Wash: Tri-Sodium Phosphate.
C. First and Second Coats: Epoxy Paint
1) Tnemec: 112 Tufcoat
F. Gypsum Drywall Systems:
1. Odorless Semigloss Alkyd Enamel Finish: Three coats with total dry
film thickness not less than 2.5 mils.
a. Primer: White, interior, latex-based primer.
1) Moore: Moore's Latex Quick-Dry Prime Seal
#201.
2) Sherwin Williams: ProMar 200 Interior Latex Wall Primer
- W200, or Con-Lux Jet-Plex 495 White.
` b. First and Second Coats: Interior, semigloss, odorless, alkyd
enamel.
1) Tnemec: 23 Enduratone.
2) Moore: Moore's Satin Impervo Enamel ##235.
3) Sherwin Williams: ProMar 200 Interior Alkyd Semi-Gloss
B34 W200 Series, or Con-Lux Satinlite
900 Series.
G. woodwork and Hardboard, New and Previously Painted:
1. Semigloss Enamel Finish: Three coats.
a. Undercoat: Interior enamel undercoat.
1) Glidden: 310 Glidden Wood Undercoater.
2) Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217.
3) PPG: 6-6 Speedhide Quick-Dry Enamel Undercoater.
b. First and Second Coats: Interior, semigloss, odorless, alkyd
enamel.
1) Glidden: 4200 Spread Ultra Semigloss Enamel.
2) Moore: Moore's Satin Impervo Enamel #235.
3) PPG: 27 Line Wallhide Semigloss Enamel.
4) Sherwin Williams: ProMar 200 Interior Alkyd Semi-Gloss
B34 W200 Series, or Con-Lux Satinlite
900 Series.
H. Telephone and Electrical Panel Backboards:
1. One Coat: Gray, suitable for intended application.
I. Stained Woodwork:
PAINTING 09900-17
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
3) Sherwin Williams: Industrial Enamel B54 Series, or Con-
Lux Enamelite 500 Series.
3 .8 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE " !
A. General: Provide the following paint systems for the various
substrates, as indicated.
B. Concrete and Epoxy (other than concrete masonry units) :
1. Semigloss Enamel Finish: Three coats with total dry film thickness "
not less than 3 .5 mils.
a. Primer: Interior, flat, latex-based paint.
1) Tnemec: 51-792 Sealer
2) Sherwin Williams: ProMar 200 Interior Latex Flat B30
W200, or Con-Lux Wall-Plex 400
Series.
b. First and Second Coats: Interior, semigloss, epoxy.
1) Tnemec: Series 111 Tufcoat
2) Sherwin Williams: Con-Lux Epo-Plex 5400 Series.
no
C. Concrete Masonry Units:
1. Semigloss, Epoxy Finish: Two coats over filled surface with total
dry film thickness not less than 8.0 mils, excluding filler coat.
a. Block Filler: High-performance latex block filler.
1) Tnemec: 130-6602 Filler (spray then backroll)
b. First and Second Coats: Interior, semigloss, epoxy.
1) Tnemec: Series 113 Tufcoat
2) Sherwin Williams: Con-Lux Epo-Plex 5400 Series.
.M
D. Previously painted concrete masonry units:
1. Semigloss, Alkyd, Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over washed
surface. so
a. Wash: Tri-Sodium Phosphate
b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss Alkyd Enamel paint.
1) Tnemec: 23 Enduratone
2) Sherwin Williams: ProMar 200 Interior Alkyd Semi-Gloss
B34 W200, or Con-Lux Jet-Plex 495
Primer.
2 . Glazed Finish: One finish coat acrylic epoxy paint over washed 40
surface.
a. Sand.
b. Wash: Tri-Sodium Phosphate dk
C. Finish Coat: Waterbased Acrylic Epoxy Paint
PAINTING 09900-16
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
D. Ferrous Metal: Primer is not required on shop-primed items.
1. Full-Gloss Alkyd Enamel: Two finish coats over primer.
a. Surface Preparation: SSPC-SP3, Power Tool Cleaning.
b. Primer: Synthetic rust-inhibiting primer.
1) Tnemec: 10-1009 Primer
2) Moore: Ironclad Retardo Rust-Inhibitive
Paint #163.
3) Sherwin Williams: Kem Kromik Universal Primer B50Z
Series, or Con-Lux Rust Barrier
Primers.
C. First and Second Coats: Gloss alkyd enamel.
1) Tnemec: 22 Enduratone
2) Moore: Impervo High-Gloss Enamel #133 .
3) Sherwin Williams: Industrial Enamel B54 Series, or Con-
Lux Enamelite 500 Series.
E. Zinc-Coated Metal:
1. High-Gloss Alkyd Enamel: Two finish coats over primer.
a. Lightly Sand.
b. Primer: Galvanized metal primer.
1) Tnemec: 37H77 Chem Prime.
2) Moore: IronClad Galvanized Metal Latex
Primer #155.
3) Sherwin Williams: DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish B66, W1, or
Con-Lux Bond-Plex 66 Barrier White or
46 Barrier Green.
C. First and Second Coats: Gloss alkyd enamel.
1) Tnemec: 23 Enduratone.
2) Moore: Impervo High-Gloss Enamel #133 .
3) Sherwin Williams: Industrial Enamel B54 Series, or Con-
- Lux Enamelite 500 Series.
an
F. Aluminum:
1. High-Gloss Alkyd Enamel: Two finish coats over primer.
a. Lightly Sand.
b. Primer: Alkyd-type primer.
1) Tnemec: 37H77 Chem Prime.
2) Moore: No Primer Required.
3) Sherwin Williams: Galvite H.S. B50 WZ30, or Con-Lux
Galva-Guard 44 Gray Primer.
C. First and Second Coats: Gloss alkyd enamel.
1) Tnemec: 23 Enduratone.
2) Moore: Impervo High-Gloss Enamel #133.
PAINTING 09900-15
no
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
i. Accelerated yellowness.
j . Recoating.
k. Skinning.
1. Color retention. `
M. Alkali and mildew resistance.
3 . If test results show material being used does not comply with
specified requirements, the Contractor may be directed to stop
painting, remove noncomplying paint, pay for testing, repaint
surfaces coated with rejected paint, and remove rejected paint from
previously painted surfaces if, upon repainting with specified **
paint, the two coatings are incompatible.
3 .5 CLEANING ,
A. Cleanup: At the end of each work day, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish,
and other discarded paint materials from the site.
1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered
surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping. Be
careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
3 .6 PROTECTION
A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against wd
damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing,
and repainting, as acceptable to Architect.
B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove
temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work
after completing painting operations.
1. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up
and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.
3 .7 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A. General: Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates
indicated.
B. Structural Steel Coating: Apply to surfaces of new structural steel
exposed to the inside of masonry cavity wall construction.
10
1. Bituminous Paint: One coat.
a. First Coat: ,
1) Karnak: 118 Black Asphaltum.
C. Existing Exposed Concrete: Where indicated.
1. Modified Waterborne Acrylate: Two finish coats.
a. Surface Preparation: Power wash with solution of trisodium
phosphate. Rinse with clean water.
b. First and Second Coats: Matte finish, sand texture over
existing.
1) Tnemec: Series 157 Enviro-Crete.
PAINTING 09900-14
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
8. Accessory items.
41 H. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Conduit and fittings.
2 . Switchgear.
I. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate
to ensure complete coverage with pores filled. Additional applications
as directed by the Architect.
J. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of
material, as recommended by the manufacturer, to material that is
required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime-coated
by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction
spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat
with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.
K. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine
texture. Leave no evidence of rolling such as laps, irregularity in
texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections.
L. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide a smooth,
opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage.
Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness,
or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable.
M. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a
glass-smooth surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of
laps, cloudiness, color irregularity, runs, brush marks, orange peel,
nail holes, or other surface imperfections.
N. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and
coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with
specified requirements.
3 .4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. The Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at
any time and as often as the Owner deems necessary during the period
when paint is being applied:
1. The Owner will engage the services of an independent testing agency
to sample the paint material being used. Samples of material
M delivered to the Project will be taken, identified, sealed, and
certified in the presence of the Contractor.
2 . The testing agency will perform appropriate tests for the following
characteristics as required by the Owner:
a. Quantitative materials analysis.
b. Abrasion resistance.
C. Apparent reflectivity.
d. Flexibility.
e. Washability.
f. Absorption.
!! g. Accelerated weathering.
h. Dry opacity.
PAINTING 09900-13
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
built-in fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned tube
radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend
coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system
integrity and provide desired protection.
6 . Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as
similar exposed surfaces. Before the final installation of
equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or .ale
furniture with prime coat only.
7. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers
or grilles, with a flat, nonspecular black paint.
8. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers
to match exposed surfaces.
9. Finish all doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges same as exposed
faces.
10. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.
11. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop-primed and
touch-up painted.
w
C. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been
cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as
practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface
deterioration.
1. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper
drying. Do not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels
firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure,
and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the
undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. 1W
D. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller,
spray, or other applicators according to the manufacturer's directions.
1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the material applied.
2 . Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's
wool as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and
texture required.
3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as
recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture
required.
E. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials no thinner than the
manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film
thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer.
F. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting mechanical and electrical work
is limited to items exposed in mechanical equipment rooms and in
occupied spaces.
G. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the A
following:
1. Piping, pipe hangers, and supports.
2. Heat exchangers.
3. Tanks.
4. Ductwork.
5. Insulation.
6. Supports.
7. Motors and mechanical equipment.
PAINTING 09900-12
pa
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
Solvent Cleaning.
b. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have
been damaged. Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by
the paint manufacturer, according to the requirements of `SSPC-
SP3, Power Tool Cleaning and touch up with the same primer as
the shop coat.
S. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with
nonpetroleum-based solvents so that the surface is free of oil and
surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet
metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods.
a. Comply with the requirements of SSPC-SP1 for interior
surfaces, and SSPC-SP7, Brush Blast for exterior surfaces.
D. Materials Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare paint materials
according to manufacturer's directions.
!a
1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean
condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
2 . Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform
density; stir as required during application. Do not stir surface
film into material. Remove film and, if necessary, strain material
before using.
3 . Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer and only
within recommended limits.
E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate
identification of each coat where multiple coats of the same material
are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but
provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish
each separate coat.
3 .3 APPLICATION
A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's directions. Use
applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of
material being applied.
B. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces,
or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.
1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the
schedules.
2 . Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used.
�I 3 . The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same
regardless of the application method. Do not apply succeeding
coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the
manufacturer. Sand between applications where sanding is required
to produce a smooth even surface according to the manufacturer's
directions.
4 . Apply additional coats if undercoats, stains, or other conditions
show through final coat of paint until paint film is of uniform
finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure
that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and
exposed fasteners, receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that
of flat surfaces.
5. The term exposed surfaces includes areas visible when permanent or
0* PAINTING 09900-11
wu
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
coatings. Remove oil and grease prior to cleaning. Schedule cleaning
and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process
will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.
C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted in strict
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions for each particular
substrate condition and as specified.
1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and
reprime. Notify Architect in writing about anticipated problems
using the specified finish-coat material with substrates primed by
others.
2 . Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete masonry block,
cement plaster, and mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panel surfaces
to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, w
oils, and release agents. Roughen, as required, to remove glaze.
If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use
mechanical methods of surface preparation.
a. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by the
paint manufacturer.
b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by
performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently
alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn,
correct this condition before application. Do not paint
surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in
manufacturer's printed directions.
C. Clean concrete floors to be painted with a 5 percent solution
of muriatic acid or other etching cleaner. Flush the floor
with clean water to remove acid, neutralize with ammonia,
rinse, allow to dry, and vacuum before painting.
3 . Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances
with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand
surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off.
�n
a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin
coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before
applying primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections do
in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand
smooth when dried.
b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately upon
delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides w
of wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, and paneling.
C. When transparent finish is required, backprime with spar
varnish.
d. Stain and then seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed w
wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or sealer immediately
upon delivery.
4 . Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous metal surfaces that
have not been shop-coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill
scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical
cleaning methods that comply with recommendations of the Steel
Structures Painting Council (SSPC) .
a. Clean surfaces as recommended by the paint system manufacturer
and according to requirements of SSPC specification SSPC-SP 1,
PAINTING 09900-10
PW
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
a. PPG: 6-10 Sanding Sealer.
b. Sherwin Williams: Woodclassics Fast Dry Sanding Sealer B26
V43 .
2 . Oil-Type Interior Wood Stain: Slow-penetrating, oil-type wood
stain.
a. Cabot: Alkyd Stain.
b. Glidden: 1600 Woodmaster Oil Stain.
C. Moore: 241 Moore's Interior Wood Finishes Penetrating
"! Stain.
d. PPG: 77-302 Rez Medium Tint Base.
3. Polyurethane: Satin Finish:
a. PPG: 77-9 Polyurethane Satin Clear
b. Sherwin Williams: Woodclassics Fast Dry Oil Varnish (satin)
A66-300 Series (satin) .
4. Polyurethane: High Gloss
a. PPG: 77-5 Polyurethane Glass Clear
b. Sherwin Williams: Woodclassics Fast Dry Oil Varnish (high
gloss) A66-300 Series (gloss) .
l�II
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions under which painting will be performed
for compliance with paint application requirements. Surfaces receiving
paint must be thoroughly dry before paint is applied.
1. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected.
On 2. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance
of surfaces and conditions within a particular area.
06 B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are
provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various
substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of
finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.
RM
1. Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using the materials
specified over substrates primed by others.
3 .2 PREPARATION
A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined
surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that
are not to be painted, or provide surface-applied protection prior to
surface preparation and painting. Remove these items, if necessary, to
completely paint the items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion
of painting operations in each space or area, have items reinstalled by
workers skilled in the trades involved.
B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the
substrates of substances that could impair the bond of the various
PAINTING 09900-9
.w.
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
ws
Enamelite 500 Series.
4 . Existing Exposed Concrete: Modified Waterborne Acrylate.
ww
a. Tnemec: Series 157 Enviro-Crete.
2 .8 INTERIOR FINISH PAINT MATERIAL
A. Finish Paint: Provide the manufacturer's recommended factory-formulated
finish-coat materials that are compatible with the substrate and
undercoats indicated. ow,
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
so
1. Interior, Semigloss, Odorless Alkyd Enamel: Semigloss, low-odor,
alkyd enamel.
am
a. Tnemec: 23 Enduratone.
b. Moore: Moore's Satin Impervo Enamel #235.
C. Sherwin Williams: ProMar 200 Interior Alkyd Semi-Gloss B34
WZ1101 Series.
2 . Interior, water based acrylic epoxy.
a. Tnemec: Series 113/114, Tufcoat
b. Sherwin Williams: Water Based Catalyzed Epoxy B70-200, or
Con-Lux Epo-Plex 5000/5200 Series.
C. P.P.G. : High Solids Water Based Epoxy.
3 . Interior, waterborne epoxy-amine adduct.
a. Tnemec: Series 287, Enviro-Tred
4 . Interior, one-coat, rust-inhibitive primer/finish for dry overhead
conditions. ww,
a. Tnemec: Series 15 Uni-Bond.
b. Sherwin Williams: Opti-Bond Multi Surface Coating B50 W100, �ww
or Con-Lux Galva-Lon 89 White.
5. Interior, semigloss, odorless alkyd enamel.
ww
a. Moore: Satin Impervo Enamel #235.
b. Sherwin Williams: ProMar 200 Interior Alkyd Semi-Gloss B54
W200 Series, or Con-Lux Satin-Lite 900
Series.
2 .9 MISCELLANEOUS WOOD-FINISHING MATERIALS
ww
A. Wood-Finishing Materials: Provide the manufacturer's recommended
factory-formulated, wood-finishing materials that are compatible with
the substrate and undercoats indicated.
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
NO
1. Varnish-Type Surface Sealer:
PAINTING 09900-8
am
an
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA
KB #96079
b. Moore: No Primer Required.
C. Sherwin Williams: Galvite H.S. B50 WZ30, or Con-Lux Galva-
Guard 44 Gray Primer.
2 .6 UNDERCOAT MATERIALS
A. Undercoat Materials: Provide the manufacturer' s recommended
on
factory-formulated undercoat materials that are compatible with the
substrate and finish coats indicated.
an B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
1. Ferrous Metal Primer:
w�
a. Tnemec: 37H77 Chem Prime.
b. Sherwin Williams: Kem Kromik Universal Primer B50 Z
Series,or Con-Lux Rust Barrier Primers.
2 . Wood undercoat:
a. Glidden: 310 Glidden Wood Undercoater.
b. Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody #217.
C. PPG: 6-6 Speedhide Quick-Dry Enamel Undercoater.
an
2 .7 EXTERIOR FINISH PAINT MATERIAL
A. Finish Paint: Provide the manufacturer's recommended factory-formulated
finish-coat materials that are compatible with the substrate and
undercoats indicated.
an B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
1. Alkyd Gloss Enamel: Weather-resistant, air-drying, high-gloss
on enamel.
a. Moore: Impervo High-Gloss Enamel #133
b. Sherwin Williams: Industrial Enamel B54Z Series, or Con-Lux
A
Enamelite 500 Series.
1) Deep Color: Moore's House Paint #110.
2) Sherwin Williams : SWP House Paint, A2 Series.
2. Ferrous Metal Gloss Alkyd Enamel: Weather-resistant, high-gloss
enamel.
a. Tnemec: 23 Enduratone.
b. Moore: Impervo High-Gloss Enamel #133 .
C. Sherwin Williams: Industrial Enamel B54 Series, or Con-Lux
Enamelite 500 Series.
3 . Galvanized Metal and Aluminum Gloss Alkyd Enamel:
Weather-resistant, high-gloss enamel.
a. Tnemec: 23 Enduratone.
b. Moore: Impervo High-Gloss Enamel #133.
C. Sherwin Williams: Industrial Enamel B54 Series, or Con-Lux
PAINTING 09900-7
mo
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
w
following:
1. Karnak: 118 Black Asphaltum.
dw
2.4 MASONRY BLOCK FILLER
A. Filler Coat Materials: Provide the manufacturer's recommended
factory-formulated, latex-type concrete masonry block fillers that are 1A°
compatible with the finish materials indicated.
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the w�
following:
a. Tnemec: 130-6602 Filler
w
2.5 PRIMERS
A. Primers: Provide the manufacturer's recommended factory-formulated
primers that are compatible with the substrate and finish coats
indicated.
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the "R
following:
1. Concrete and Masonry Primers: Interior, semi-gloss enamel.
a. Tnemec: 51-792 Sealer
b. Sherwin Williams: Preprite 200 Interior Latex Wall Primer
B28W200, or Con-Lux Jet-flex 495 White. *�
2 . Gypsum Drywall Primer: White, interior, latex-based primer.
eAe
a. Moore: Moore's Latex Quick-Dry Prime Seal
#201.
b. Sherwin Williams: ProMar 200 Interior Latex Wall Primer
W200, or Con-Lux Jet-Plex 495 White. +
3 . Gypsum Drywall Epoxy Primer: Water-based acrylic epoxy.
a. Tnemec: 51-792 PVA Sealer
4 . Ferrous Metal Primers: Synthetic, quick-drying, rust-inhibiting
primers. WR
a. Tnemec: 37H77 Chem Prime.
b. Sherwin Williams: Kem Kromik Universal Primer B50 Z Series,
or Con-Lux Rust Barrier Primers.
5 . Galvanized Metal Primers:
a. Tnemec: 37H77 Chem Prime.
b. Sherwin Williams: DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish B66, W1, or Con-
Lux Bond-flex 66 Barrier White or 46
Barrier Green.
6. Aluminum Primers:
a. Tnemec: 37H77 Chem Prime.
PAINTING 09900-6
an
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
1.8 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be
painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 deg F (10 deg
C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C) .
B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to
be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 deg F (7 deg
C) and 95 deg F (35 deg C) .
C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative
humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg
C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
on 1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and
areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature
limits specified by the manufacturer during application and drying
periods.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 .1 MANUFACTURERS AND SYSTEMS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
of one of the following:
1. Tnemec
2 . The Glidden Company (Glidden) .
3 . Benjamin Moore and Co. (Moore) .
4. PPG Industries, Pittsburgh Paints (PPG) .
5 . Karnak Corporation
uw 6. Sherwin Williams Company
2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL
sM A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, finish coat
materials, and related materials that are compatible with one another
and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and
on application, as demonstrated by the manufacturer based on testing and
field experience.
1. Provide total paint system from one manufacturer with no cross
M" coating between primer and finish coats.
B. Material Quality: Provide the manufacturer's best-quality trade sale
am paint material of the various coating types specified. Paint material
containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not
be acceptable.
PM C. Colors: Provide color selections made by the Architect from the
manufacturer's full range of standard colors.
2 .3 STRUCTURAL STEEL COATING
A. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint
12 except containing no asbestos fibers.
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the
PAINTING 09900-5
40
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
so
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who is
thoroughly trained and who has completed painting system applications 40
exactly similar in material and extent to those indicated for the
Project that have resulted in a construction record of successful
in-service performance.
B. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoat paint
produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coats.
�e
C. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide materials that have been
tested according to ASTM E 84 and are listed in the UL "Building
Materials Directory" with the following surface-burning characteristics
when applied over Douglas Fir: go
1. Flame Spread: 25.
2 . Smoke Developed: 25. ,ue
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original, No
unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label,
and the following information:
m
1. Product name or title of material.
2 . Product description (generic classification or binder type) .
3 . Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
4 . Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. am
S . Thinning instructions.
6. Application instructions.
7 . Color name and number. so
B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a
well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg
C) . Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of
foreign materials and residue.
1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove
oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that
workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards
resulting from handling, mixing, and application.
C. Store paint, coatings, reducing agents, and other solvents in original
containers until opened: if not resealable, then must be transferred
to UL approved safety containers. Provide proper ventilation, personal
protection and fire protection for storage and use of same.
D. Comply with requirements set forth by Occupational Safety and Health Act
for storage and use of painting materials and equipment.
1.7 EXTRA STOCK
A. Upon completion of work, provide Owner with at least one gallon of each
type of color of product used.
B. Containers shall be tightly sealed and clearly labeled for so
identification.
PAINTING 09900-4
on
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
wo
d. Motor and fan shafts.
S. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories, Factory
on Mutual or other code-required labels or equipment name,
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.
D. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that
relate to this Section:
1. Section 05120 "Structural Steel" for shop-priming structural steel.
2 . Section 05500 "Metal Fabrications" for shop-priming ferrous metal.
3 . Section 06402 "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for interior
architectural woodwork to be finished by this section.
4. Section 08111 "Standard Steel Doors and Frames" for shop-priming
steel doors and frames.
5. Section 09800 "Special Coatings" for special floor coating applied
to existing concrete floor.
6. Section 09921 "Multicolored Interior Coatings" for multicolored
coatings.
7. Section 09967 "Intumescent Paints" for fire rated intumescent
coatings.
8. Divisions 15 and 16: Painting mechanical and electrical work is
specified in Divisions 15 and 16, respectively.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract
and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each paint system specified, including block fillers
and primers.
1. Provide the manufacturer's technical information including label
analysis and instructions for handling, storage, and application
of each material proposed for use.
2 . List each material and cross-reference the specific coating, finish
system, and application. Identify each material by the
manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.
3 . Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply
with the Commonwealth of Massachusetts regulations controlling use
of volatile organic compounds (VOCs) .
C. Samples for initial color selection in the form of manufacturer's color
charts containing the full range of colors available for each type of
product specified.
1. After color selection, the Architect will furnish color chips for
surfaces to be coated.
D. Samples for Verification Purposes: Provide samples of each color and
material indicated on Color Schedule, with texture to simulate actual
conditions, on representative samples of the actual substrate.
1. Submit samples on the following substrates for the Architect's
review of color and texture only:
ear a. Stained or Natural Wood: Provide two 4-by-8-inch samples of
natural and stained wood finish on actual wood surfaces.
PAINTING 09900-3
no
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #9 6 0 7 9
1.3 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes surface preparation, painting, and finishing of
exposed interior and exterior items and surfaces.
1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this
Section are in addition to shop-priming and surface treatment
sw
specified under other Sections.
B. Paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in
schedules, except where a surface or material is specifically indicated w
not to be painted or is to remain natural. Where an item or surface is
not specifically mentioned, paint the same as similar adjacent materials
or surfaces. If color or finish is not designated, the Architect will
select from standard colors or finishes available.
1. Painting includes field-painting exposed bare and covered pipes and
ducts (including color coding) , hangers, exposed steel and iron w
work, and primed metal surfaces of mechanical and electrical
equipment.
C. Painting is not required on prefinished items, finished metal surfaces, w
concealed surfaces, operating parts, and labels, unless noted otherwise.
1. Prefinished items not to be painted include the following
factory-finished components:
a. Acoustic materials.
b. Prefinished architectural woodwork and casework.
C. Prefinished wood doors.
d. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment.
e. Light fixtures and wiring devices. am
f. Switchgear.
g. Distribution cabinets in closets or equipment rooms.
2 . Concealed surfaces not to be painted include wall or ceiling
surfaces in the following generally inaccessible areas:
a. Foundation spaces.
b. Furred areas.
C. Utility tunnels.
d. Duct shafts.
3 . Finished metal surfaces not to be painted include:
a. Anodized or coated aluminum.
b. Stainless steel.
C. Chromium plate.
d. Copper.
e. Bronze. "■*
f. Brass.
4 . Operating parts not to be painted include moving parts of operating
equipment, such as the following:
a. Valve and damper operators.
b. Linkages. �•
C. Sensing devices.
PAINTING 09900-2
Nw
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
SECTION 09900 - PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 TIME, MANNER AND REQUIREMENTS FOR FILING SUB-BIDS
A. Sub-Bids shall be submitted in accordance with the provisions of General
Laws, Chapter 149, Section 44A to 44I, inclusive, as amended.
B. Sub-Bids for work under this Section shall be received at the Council
Chambers at Town Hall, 210 Main Street, Northampton, MA 01060, until
2:00 p.m. local time on February 9, 1999, at which time all filed Sub-
Bids shall be opened, read aloud, and duly recorded.
C. Sub-Bids shall be submitted on forms identical to those contained in
Bidding Requirements: Bid Form for Sub-Bidder. The Bid Forms attached
hereto are for information only and shall not be detached, filled in,
on or executed. All Sub-Bids shall be submitted on the FORM FOR SUB-BID
furnished by the Awarding Authority as required by Section 44G of
Chapter 149 of the General Laws, as amended. Sub-Bids Forms shall be
w completely filled in and all Sub-Bids which are incomplete, conditional,
obscure, or which contain any additions not called for will be rejected.
D. Sub-Bids filed with the Awarding Authority shall be accompanied by a Bid
on Deposit in the form of a certified check or a treasurer's or cashier's
check issued by a responsible bank or trust company, payable to the City
of Northampton. A bid bond shall be:
pw 1. On a form satisfactory to the Awarding Authority.
2 . With a surety company qualified to do business in the Commonwealth
and satisfactory to the Awarding Authority.
A 3 . Conditioned upon the faithful performance by the principal of the
agreements contained in the Bid. The amount of such bid deposit
shall be five percent (5%) of the value of the Bid.
E. Sub-Bids for work under this Section shall be for the complete work
required as specified and as shown on the drawings.
F. Sub-Bidders are directed to the Instructions to Bidders, and to the
requirements that all bidders visit the site to determine the scope of
work required under this Section.
G. Sub-Bidders must comply with all provisions of Division 1, General
Requirements, in the same manner as the General Contractor.
H. Work to be done under this Filed Sub-Bid is included in the Contract
Documents as listed in LOD-1 through LOD-5 (List of Drawings) .
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
an General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this work. Note also all Addenda.
PAINTING 09900-1
Im
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON. MA KB #96079
an
1. After completing work, clean glass and spattered surfaces. Remove
spattered coatings by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not
scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
3 .6 PROTECTION
A. Protect work of other trades, whether being coated or not, against
damage from coating operation. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing,
replacing, and recoating, as acceptable to the Architect. Leave in an
undamaged condition.
an
1. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly coated finishes. Remove
temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their
go
work after completing coating operations.
2 . At completion of other trades' construction activities, touch up
and restore damaged or defaced coated surfaces.
go END OF SECTION 09880
1
PM
pw
OR
W
4M
PM
po
0"
PROTECTIVE COATINGS FOR CONCRETE 09880 - 7
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
war
required.
D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply each material no thinner than the
manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide total dry film
thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer.
E. Mechanical Applications: Use mechanical methods to apply coating when
permitted by the manufacturer's recommendations and governing "`
regulations.
1. Wherever using spray application, apply each coat to provide the
equivalent hiding of brush-applied coats. Do not double-back with
spray equipment building-up film thickness of two coats in one
pass, unless recommended by the manufacturer.
F. Completed Work: Match approved samples for sheen, texture and coverage.
Remove, refinish, or recoat work not complying with specified
requirements.
3 .4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. The Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at
any time and as often as the Owner deems necessary during coating
operations.
.iw
1. The Owner will engage the services of an independent testing agency
to sample the coating being used. Samples of material delivered
to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified
in the presence of the Contractor.
2 . The testing agency will perform appropriate tests for the following
characteristics as required by the Owner:
a. Quantitative materials analysis.
b. Absorption.
C. Accelerated weathering.
d. Accelerated yellowness. *�
e. Alkali and mildew resistance.
f. Abrasion resistance.
g. Apparent reflectivity. an
h. Washability.
i. Dry Opacity.
j . Recoating.
k. Skinning. ws
3 . If results show materials being used do not comply with
requirements, the Contractor may be directed to stop work and
remove noncomplying materials, pay for testing, recoat surfaces so
coated with rejected materials, or remove rejected materials from
previously coated surfaces if, upon recoating with specified
materials, the two coatings are not compatible. am
3.5 CLEANING
A. Cleanup: At the end of each work day, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags,
and other discarded materials and place in a location where directed by
the Owner's Representative.
PROTECTIVE COATINGS FOR CONCRETE 09880 - 6
ao
,w
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
within recommended limits.
3 .3 APPLICATION
A. General: Apply two coats of special coatings on all surfaces by brush,
roller, spray, squeegee, or other applicators according to the
!o manufacturer's directions. Use brushes best suited for the material
being applied. Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's
wool as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture
required.
1. Do not apply coatings over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture,
scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to forming a durable
as coating film.
2. Provide finish coats compatible with the primers and finish systems
used.
3 . The number of coats and film thickness required is the same
as regardless of the application method. Do not apply succeeding
coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the
manufacturer. Where sanding is required, according to the
NO manufacturer's directions, sand between applications to produce a
smooth, even surface.
4 . When undercoats or other conditions show through the final coat,
apply additional coats until the cured film has a uniform coating
on finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to edges,
corners, crevices, welds, exposed fasteners, and similar surfaces
to ensure that they receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that
of flat surfaces.
ON 5. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent
or built-in fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned tube
radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend
00 coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system
integrity and provide desired protection.
a. Coat surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same
an as similar exposed surfaces.
B. Scheduling Coating: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been
cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for coating as soon as
practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface
deterioration.
1. Allow sufficient drying time between successive coats. Do not
recoat until the coating has dried so it feels firm and does not
deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure and where
applying another coat does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose
adhesion.
C. Application Procedures: Apply coatings by brush, roller, spray, or
on other applicators according to the manufacturer' s directions.
1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the material applied.
2 . Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's
wool as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and
texture required.
3 . Spray Equipment: Use spray equipment with orifice size as
on recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture
PROTECTIVE COATINGS FOR CONCRETE 09880 - 5
ws
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
1. Notify the Owner's Representative of problems anticipated using the ""A1
coatings specified over substrates primed and/or painted by others.
3 .2 PREPARATION wx
A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined
surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already in place that are
not to be coated, or provide surface-applied protection prior to surface am
preparation and coating. Remove these items, if necessary, to
completely coat the items and adjacent surfaces. Following the coating
operations in each space or area, have removed items reinstalled by
workers skilled in the trades involved.
B. Cleaning: Before applying coatings or other surface treatments, clean
the substrates of substances that could impair bond of the various
coatings. Remove oil and grease prior to cleaning. Schedule cleaning
and coating application so dust and other contaminates from the cleaning
process will not fall on wet, newly coated surfaces. ,MW
C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be coated according
to the manufacturer's instructions for each particular substrate
condition and as specified. OR
1. Notify the Architect in writing of problems anticipated when using
the specified finish-coat material with substrates primed by we
others.
2 . Cementitious Surfaces: Prepare concrete, concrete masonry block,
cement plaster, and similar surfaces to receive special coatings.
Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release w
agents. Roughen, as required, to remove glaze. If hardeners or
sealers have been used to improve concrete curing, use mechanical
methods to prepare surface.
an
a. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by the
coating system manufacturer.
b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces to be so
coated by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are
sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish coats to blister and
burn, correct this condition before application. Do not apply
coatings over surfaces where the moisture content exceeds that 'm
permitted in the manufacturer's printed directions.
C. Acid-etch concrete floor surfaces scheduled to receive special
coatings with a 5 percent solution of muriatic acid or other
proprietary cleaner. Flush the floor with clean water to
remove acid, and neutralize with ammonia and rinse; allow to
dry, then vacuum.
�w
D. Material Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare materials according to
the coating manufacturer's directions.
w
1. Maintain containers used in mixing and application of coatings
according to the manufacturer's directions.
2 . Stir materials before applying to produce a mixture of uniform
density; stir as required during application. Do not stir surface MW
film into the material. Remove film and, if necessary, strain the
coating material before using.
3 . Use only the type of thinners approved by the manufacturer and only .wu
PROTECTIVE COATINGS FOR CONCRETE 09880 - 4
40
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
go 1. Allow wet surfaces to dry thoroughly and attain the temperature and
conditions specified before proceeding with or continuing the
coating operation.
'"a 2 . Work may continue during inclement weather only if areas and
surfaces to be coated are enclosed and the temperature within the
area can be maintained within limits specified by the manufacturer
during application and drying periods.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
wu 2 .1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
so products of one of the following:
1. Seal-Krete, Inc.
2 .2 SPECIAL COATING MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, finish coat
material, and related materials that are compatible with one another and
the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application as
demonstrated by the manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
an B. Material Quality: Provide the highest grade of the various coatings as
regularly manufactured by acceptable coating manufacturers. Materials
not displaying manufacturer' s identification as a best-grade product
will not be acceptable.
No
2.3 INTERIOR FINISH-COAT MATERIALS
40 A. Interior Finish-Coat Materials: Provide the manufacturer's recommended
factory-formulated, interior, finish-coat materials.
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the
w following:
1. Seal-Krete, Waterproofing System.
we
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions under which coatings will be applied
for compliance with requirements on applying coatings. Surfaces to
receive coatings must be thoroughly dry before coatings are applied.
1. Notify Owner's Representative and do not proceed with coating
application until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
!! 2. Start of application will be construed as the Applicator's
acceptance of surfaces within that particular area.
®w B. Coordinating Work: Review sections in which other coatings are provided
to ensure compatibility of the total systems for various substrates.
On request, furnish information on the characteristics of specified
finish materials to ensure compatible primers.
PROTECTIVE COATINGS FOR CONCRETE 09880 - 3
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTH_A TON MA KB #96079
successfully completed coating system applications similar in material
and extent to those indicated for the Project.
B. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoat material
produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coats for each type of
coating. Use only thinners recommended by the manufacturer and only
within recommended limits.
C. Field Samples: On floor surfaces and other interior components,
duplicate finishes of selected samples. Provide full-coat finish
samples on at least 10 sq. ft. of surface until the required sheen, .�
color, and texture are obtained; simulate finished lighting conditions
for reviewing in-place work.
1. Final acceptance of colors will be from job-applied samples.
2 . The Architect will select one room, area, or surface to represent
surfaces and conditions for each type of coating and substrate to
be coated. Apply coatings in this room, area, or surface according
to the schedule, or as specified. After finishes are accepted,
this room, area or surface will be used for evaluation of coating
systems of a similar nature.
we.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original, new,
unopened packages, and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label,
and the following information:
1. Name or title of material. no
2 . Product description (generic classification or binder type) .
3 . Manufacturer's name, stock number and date of manufacture.
4 . Contents by volume, for major pigment and vehicle constituents.
S . Thinning instructions. w�
6. Application instructions.
7 . Color name and number.
8 . Handling instructions and precautions. so
B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a
well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature as recommended by
manufacturer. Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, am
free of foreign materials and residue.
1. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste w
daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work
areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from
handling, mixing, and applying the coatings.
.w
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Apply coatings only when the temperature of surfaces to be coated and
surrounding air temperatures are as noted in the manufacturer's
specifications.
B. Do not apply coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when the relative so
humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg
C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
an
PROTECTIVE COATINGS FOR CONCRETE 09880 - 2
04
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA RE #9 6 0 7 9
SECTION 09880 - PROTECTIVE COATINGS FOR CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this work. Note also all Addenda.
1.2 SUMMARY
w
A. This Section includes applying a special coating system to all surfaces
where floor finishes are designated for removal, including areas of
asbestos abatement. This work includes surface preparation, prime
an coats, and topcoats.
B. Types of special coating systems required for the Project include the
following:
1. Special coatings for interior use include the following:
W a. Water-borne Urethane-Acrylic Copolymer Coating.
C. Related Sections : The following Sections contain requirements that
00 relate to this Section:
1. Division 2 Sections for asbestos removal.
2 . General painting is specified in Section 09900 "Painting. "
an
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract
40
and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each coating system specified, including primers.
uw
1. Provide the manufacturer's technical information, including label
analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each
material proposed for use.
go 2. List each material and cross-reference the specific coating, finish
system, and application. Identify each material by the
manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.
3 . Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply
with the Commonwealth of Massachusetts regulations controlling use
of volatile organic compounds (VOCs) .
C. Samples for initial color selection in the form of manufacturer's color
charts, including a clear finish.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has
so
PROTECTIVE COATINGS FOR CONCRETE 09880 - 1
po
40
IPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
RPTON MA KB #96079
1. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly coated finishes. Remove a
temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their
work after completing coating operations.
2. At completion of other trades' construction activities, touch up so
and restore damaged or defaced coated surfaces.
3 .7 INTERIOR SPECIAL COATING SCHEDULE
■w
A. New and previously painted concrete floor surfaces:
1. Water-borne Epoxy-Amine Adduct.
a. Brush Blast or acid etch.
b. Wash.
C. Finish & Sand Coats : Water borne Epoxy Amine Adduct.
1. ) Tnemec, Inc. - #287 Enviro-Tread.
END OF SECTION 09800
Ma
so
M
MM
so
w
SPECIAL COATINGS 09800 - 8
wee
04
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATION
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
no equivalent hiding of brush-applied coats. Do not double-back with
spray equipment building-up film thickness of two coats in one
pass, unless recommended by the manufacturer.
F. Completed Work: Match approved samples for sheen, texture and coverage.
Remove, refinish, or recoat work not complying with specified
requirements.
3 .4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. The Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at
any time and as often as the Owner deems necessary during coating
operations.
1. The Owner will engage the services of an independent testing agency
to sample the coating being used. Samples of material delivered
to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified
+p in the presence of the Contractor.
2. The testing agency will perform appropriate tests for the following
characteristics as required by the Owner:
a. Quantitative materials analysis.
b. Absorption.
C. Accelerated weathering.
an d. Accelerated yellowness.
e. Alkali and mildew resistance.
f. Abrasion resistance.
g. Apparent reflectivity.
h. Washability.
i. Dry Opacity.
j . Recoating.
k. Skinning.
3 . If results show materials being used do not comply with
requirements, the Contractor may be directed to stop work and
remove noncomplying materials, pay for testing, recoat surfaces
coated with rejected materials, or remove rejected materials from
previously coated surfaces if, upon recoating with specified
materials, the two coatings are not compatible.
3 .5 CLEANING
A. Cleanup: At the end of each work day, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags,
and other discarded materials and place in a location where directed by
the Construction Manager.
1. After completing work, clean glass and spattered surfaces. Remove
spattered coatings by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not
scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.
3 .6 PROTECTION
A. Protect work of other trades, whether being coated or not, against
damage from coating operation. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing,
replacing, and recoating, as acceptable to the Architect. Leave in an
undamaged condition.
SPECIAL COATINGS 09800 - 7
M
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON. MA ICE #96079
1. Do not apply coatings over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, Mw
scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to forming a durable
coating film.
2. Provide finish coats compatible with the primers and finish systems aw
used.
3. The number of coats and film thickness required is the same
regardless of the application method. Do not apply succeeding
coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the an
manufacturer. Where sanding is required, according to the
manufacturer's directions, sand between applications to produce a
smooth, even surface.
4 . When undercoats or other conditions show through the final coat,
apply additional coats until the cured film has a uniform coating
finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to edges,
corners, crevices, welds, exposed fasteners, and similar surfaces •""
to ensure that they receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that
of flat surfaces.
5. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent
or built-in fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned tube
radiation, grilles, and similar components are in place. Extend
coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system
integrity and provide desired protection.
a. Coat surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same
as similar exposed surfaces. w
B. Scheduling Coating: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been
cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for coating as soon as
practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface
deterioration.
1. Allow sufficient drying time between successive coats. Do not w
recoat until the coating has dried so it feels firm and does not
deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure and where
applying another coat does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose
adhesion. �.
C. Application Procedures: Apply coatings by brush, roller, spray, or
other applicators according to the manufacturer's directions.
1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the material applied.
2 . Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's
wool as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and w
texture required.
3 . Spray Equipment: Use spray equipment with orifice size as
recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture
required.
D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply each material no thinner than the
manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide total dry film
thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer.
E. Mechanical Applications: Use mechanical methods to apply coating when
permitted by the manufacturer's recommendations and governing 40
regulations.
1. Wherever using spray application, apply each coat to provide the
SPECIAL COATINGS 09800 - 6
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA ICE #9 6 0 7 9
B. Cleaning: Before applying coatings or other surface treatments, clean
the substrates of substances that could impair bond of the various
coatings. Remove oil and grease prior to cleaning. Schedule cleaning
and coating application so dust and other contaminates from the cleaning
process will not fall on wet, newly coated surfaces.
C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be coated according
to the manufacturer's instructions for each particular substrate
condition and as specified.
!! 1. Notify the Architect in writing of problems anticipated when using
the specified finish-coat material with substrates primed by
others.
ON 2. Cementitious Surfaces: Prepare concrete, and similar surfaces to
receive special coatings. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt,
grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen, as required, to remove
glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve concrete
curing, use mechanical methods to prepare surface.
a. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by the
coating system manufacturer.
b. Fill and level all holes in floor.
!!!
C. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces to be
coated by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are
sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish coats to blister and
burn, correct this condition before application. Do not apply
coatings over surfaces where the moisture content exceeds that
permitted in the manufacturer' s printed directions.
d. Acid-etch concrete floor surfaces scheduled to receive special
coatings with a 5 percent solution of muriatic acid or other
proprietary cleaner. Flush the floor with clean water to
remove acid, and neutralize with ammonia and rinse; allow to
dry, then vacuum.
D. Material Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare materials according to
the coating manufacturer' s directions.
1. Maintain containers used in mixing and application of coatings
according to the manufacturer's directions.
2 . Stir materials before applying to produce a mixture of uniform
density; stir as required during application. Do not stir surface
film into the material. Remove film and, if necessary, strain the
coating material before using.
3 . Use only the type of thinners approved by the manufacturer and only
within recommended limits.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. General: Apply two coats of special coatings on all surfaces by brush,
roller, spray, squeegee, or other applicators according to the
manufacturer's directions. Use brushes best suited for the material
being applied. Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high-pile sheep's
wool as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture
required.
SPECIAL COATINGS 09800 - 5
w�
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
1. Tnemec, Inc.
2.2 SPECIAL COATING MATERIALS, GENERAL dW
A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, finish coat
material, and related materials that are compatible with one another and am
the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application as
demonstrated by the manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B. Material Quality: Provide the highest grade of the various coatings as ON
regularly manufactured by acceptable coating manufacturers. Materials
not displaying manufacturer's identification as a best-grade product
will not be acceptable.
C. Colors : Provide color selections made by the Architect from the s'
manufactureres full range of colors.
2.3 EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR FINISH-COAT MATERIALS so
A. Interior Finish-Coat Materials: Provide the manufacturer's recommended
factory-formulated, exterior, finish-coat materials.
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the
following:
w
1. Tnemec, Inc. : Series 287, Enviro-Tread.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions under which coatings will be applied
for compliance with requirements on applying coatings. Surfaces to
receive coatings must be thoroughly dry before coatings are applied.
1. Notify Architect and do not proceed with coating application until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
2 . Start of application will be construed as the Applicator's
acceptance of surfaces within that particular area.
B. Coordinating Work: Review sections in which other coatings are provided
to ensure compatibility of the total systems for various substrates.
On request, furnish information on the characteristics of specified no
finish materials to ensure compatible primers.
1. Notify the Architect of problems anticipated using the coatings
specified over substrates primed and/or painted by others.
3 .2 PREPARATION
A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined
surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already in place that are
not to be coated, or provide surface-applied protection prior to surface
preparation and coating. Remove these items, if necessary, to am
completely coat the items and adjacent surfaces. Following the coating
operations in each space or area, have removed items reinstalled by
workers skilled in the trades involved. w
SPECIAL COATINGS 09800 - 4
■R
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
1. Final acceptance of colors will be from job-applied samples.
2. The Architect will select one room, area, or surface to represent
surfaces and conditions for each type of coating and substrate to
be coated. Apply coatings in this room, area, or surface according
to the schedule, or as specified. After finishes are accepted,
this room, area or surface will be used for evaluation of coating
systems of a similar nature.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original, new,
unopened packages, and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label,
and the following information:
�w
1. Name or title of material.
2. Product description (generic classification or binder type) .
3 . Manufacturer's name, stock number and date of manufacture.
! 4. Contents by volume, for major pigment and vehicle constituents.
5. Thinning instructions.
6. Application instructions.
7. Color name and number.
8. Handling instructions and precautions.
B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a
well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature as recommended by
manufacturer. Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition,
free of foreign materials and residue.
1. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste
daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work
areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from
handling, mixing, and applying the coatings.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Apply coatings only when the temperature of surfaces to be coated and
surrounding air temperatures are as noted in the manufacturer's
specifications.
go B. Do not apply coatings in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when the relative
humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg
C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.
P0
1. Allow wet surfaces to dry thoroughly and attain the temperature and
conditions specified before proceeding with or continuing the
00 coating operation.
2 . Work may continue during inclement weather only if areas and
surfaces to be coated are enclosed and the temperature within the
area can be maintained within limits specified by the manufacturer
OR during application and drying periods.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 .1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products of one of the following:
SPECIAL COATINGS 09800 - 3
so
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
1.3 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes applying a special coating system to all concrete
flooring. This work includes surface preparation, prime coats, and
topcoats.
B. Types of special coating systems required for the Project include the
following: !w
1. Special coatings for interior use include the following:
.wa
a. Water-borne Epoxy-Amine Adduct Coating.
C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that
relate to this Section: !!
1. Section ##03310 "Cast in Place Concrete" for requirements of new
concrete floor slabs and underlayments.
2 . General painting is specified in Section 09900 "Painting. "
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract
and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each coating system specified, including primers. w
1. Provide the manufacturer's technical information, including label
analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each
material proposed for use.
2 . List each material and cross-reference the specific coating, finish
system, and application. Identify each material by the
manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.
3 . Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply
with State of Connecticut regulations controlling use of volatile
organic compounds (VOCs) . sm
C. Samples for initial color selection in the form of manufacturer's color
charts, including a clear finish.
am
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
wm
A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has
successfully completed coating system applications similar in material
and extent to those indicated for the Project.
of
B. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoat material
produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coats for each type of
coating. Use only thinners recommended by the manufacturer and only as
within recommended limits.
C. Field Samples: On floor surfaces and other interior and exterior
components, duplicate finishes of selected samples. Provide full-coat Ab
finish samples on at least 10 sq. ft. of surface until the required
sheen, color, and texture are obtained; simulate finished lighting
conditions for reviewing in-place work. an
SPECIAL COATINGS 09800 - 2
am
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA
KB #96079
SECTION 09800 - SPECIAL COATINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 TIME, MANNER AND REQUIREMENTS FOR FILING SUB-BIDS
A. Sub-Bids shall be submitted in accordance with the provisions of General
Laws, Chapter 149, Section 44A to 44I, inclusive, as amended.
B. Sub-Bids for work under this Section shall be received at the Council
Chambers at Town Hall, 210 Main Street, Northampton, MA 01060, until
2:00 p.m. local time on February 9, 1999, at which time all filed Sub-
Bids shall be opened, read aloud, and duly recorded.
WX C. Sub-Bids shall be submitted on forms identical to those contained in
Bidding Requirements: Bid Form for Sub-Bidder. The Bid Forms attached
hereto are for information only and shall not be detached, filled in,
ON or executed. All Sub-Bids shall be submitted on the FORM FOR SUB-BID
furnished by the Awarding Authority as required by Section 44G of
Chapter 149 of the General Laws, as amended. Sub-Bids Forms shall be
am completely filled in and all Sub-Bids which are incomplete, conditional,
obscure, or which contain any additions not called for will be rejected.
D. Sub-Bids filed with the Awarding Authority shall be accompanied by a Bid
Deposit in the form of a certified check or a treasurer's or cashier's
check issued by a responsible bank or trust company, payable to the City
of Northampton. A bid bond shall be:
1. On a form satisfactory to the Awarding Authority.
2 . With a surety company qualified to do business in the Commonwealth
and satisfactory to the Awarding Authority.
3 . Conditioned upon the faithful performance by the principal of the
agreements contained in the Bid. The amount of such bid deposit
shall be five percent (5%) of the value of the Bid.
E. Sub-Bids for work under this Section shall be for the complete work
required as specified and as shown on the drawings.
F. Sub-Bidders are directed to the Instructions to Bidders, and to the
requirements that all bidders visit the site to determine the scope of
work required under this Section.
No G. Sub-Bidders must comply with all provisions of Division 1, General
Requirements, in the same manner as the General Contractor.
00 H. Work to be done under this Filed Sub-Bid is included in the Contract
Documents as listed in LOD-1 through LOD-5 (List of Drawings) .
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this work. Note also all Addenda.
SPECIAL COATINGS 09800 - 1
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
G. Place resilient accessories so they are butted to adjacent materials of
type indicated and bond to substrates with adhesive. Install reducer
strips at edges of flooring that otherwise would be exposed.
H. Apply resilient accessories according to manufacturer's installation
instructions.
1. Place edge reducing strips tightly butted to adjoining materials.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing
00 prefabricated rubber flooring installation:
1. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly.
B. Protect flooring against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage
from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures
during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods
indicated or recommended by tile manufacturer.
1. Cover tiles with undyed, untreated building paper until inspection
for Substantial Completion.
no 2 . Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over tiles. Place
plywood or hardboard panels over tiles and under objects while they
are being moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without moving
panels.
C. Reclean flooring not more than 4 days prior to dates scheduled for
inspections intended to establish date of Substantial Completion in each
area of Project. Clean tiles using method recommended by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 09770
PREFABRICATED RUBBER SPORT SURFACE 09770 - 5
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
2 .3 RESILIENT ACCESSORIES
A. Accessories
1. Reducer strips:
a. Resilient flooring to Concrete - 3/8 x 1-1/411, rubber.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .1 EXAMINATION
A. General: Examine areas where installation of products specified in this
Section will occur, with Installer present, to verify that substrates
and conditions are satisfactory for installation and comply with
manufacturer's requirements and those specified in this Section.
B. Notify Owner's Representative and do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Start of work implies
acceptance of underlying surfaces as satisfactory for proper
installation of this work.
so
3 .2 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's installation specifications to no
prepare substrates indicated to receive prefabricated rubber flooring.
B. Broom or vacuum clean substrates to be covered by tiles immediately
before tile installation. Following cleaning, examine substrates for
moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's installation directions and other
requirements indicated that are applicable to each type of product
installation included in Project.
B. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls,
discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of
equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths at perimeter
that equal less than one-half of a tile. Install tiles square with room
axis, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in
same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Cut tiles
neatly around all fixtures. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or
deformed tiles.
D. Scribe, cut, and fit tiles to butt tightly to vertical surfaces,
permanent fixtures, built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes,
outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings.
E. Extend tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar
openings.
F. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or
plainly marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as
marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device.
PREFABRICATED RUBBER SPORT SURFACE 09770 - 4
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
TOT MA KB 496079
B. Store flooring materials in dry spaces protected from the weather with
ambient temperatures maintained between 55 deg F (10 deg C) and 90 deg
F (32 deg C) and under 50% relative humidity.
C. Store tiles on flat surfaces.
D. Move products and installation accessories into spaces where they will
be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Do not install products until they are at the same temperature as the
space where they are to be installed.
B. Close spaces to traffic during the installation.
1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
om
A. Install products and accessories after other finishing operations,
including painting, have been completed.
go 1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials matching
products installed as described below, packaged with protective covering
for storage and identified with labels clearly describing contents.
B. Leave 3% extra of each type of material for Owner's use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1. Prefabricated Rubber Flooring:
a. Mondo Sport Division - Sport Impact.
b. Pawling Corp. - Interlock, Hid-n-lock II
C. American Floor Products Co. , Inc. - Coronado 90 (FE-1015)
ter 2 .2 MATERIALS
A. General: Provide colors, patterns, and profiles of materials, including
metals and metal finishes indicated or specified. Where not indicated,
provide colors, patterns, and profiles selected by Architect from
manufacturer's standards.
I go B. Interlocking Tiles: Hidden interlocks are located beneath the tile
surface, textured surface, border and corner tiles must be used to allow
a finished appearance.
1. Thickness: 3/8-inch minimum.
2 . Durability: Highly resistant to Golf spikes, Football cleats,
�rw Circuit Training and Weight Lifting.
PREFABRICATED RUBBER SPORT SURFACE 09770 - 3
.r0.
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #9607
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this work. Note also all Addenda.
1.3 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Prefabricated rubber sport surface.
B. Entrance mats and frames are specified in Section 12690 "Floor Mats and
Frames" .
1.4 SUBMITTALS �r►
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract
and Division 1 Specification Sections. sw
B. Product data for each type of product specified.
1. Certification by tile manufacturer that products supplied for tile �w
installation comply with State of Connecticut regulations
controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOC's) .
C. Samples for initial selection
p purposes in form of manufacturer's color
charts consisting of actual tiles or sections of tiles showing full
range of colors and patterns available.
D. Product certificates, in lieu of laboratory test reports when permitted
by Architect, signed by manufacturer certifying that each product
complies with requirements.
E. Maintenance data for rubber sport surface, to include in Operating and
Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1.
aw
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single-Source Responsibility for Floor Tile: Obtain each type, color,
and pattern of product from a single source with resources to provide am
products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties
without delaying progress of the Work.
B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an Installer experienced in rubber
flooring installations, certified by the manufacturer, with at least 5
years experience installing prefabricated rubber sport surfacing.
a�u
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products and installation accessories to Project site in
original manufacturer's unopened cartons and containers each bearing
names of product and manufacturer, Project identification, and shipping
and handling instructions. wr
PREFABRICATED RUBBER SPORT SURFACE 09770 - 2 s1�
on
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
ow
SECTION 09770 - PREFABRICATED RUBBER SPORT SURFACE
PART 1 - GENERAL
Am
1.1 TIME, MANNER AND REQUIREMENTS FOR FILING SUB-BIDS
PM A. Sub-Bids shall be submitted in accordance with the provisions of General
Laws, Chapter 149, Section 44A to 44I, inclusive, as amended.
B. Sub-Bids for work under this Section shall be received at the Council
Chambers at Town Hall, 210 Main Street, Northampton, MA 01060, until
2:00 p.m. local time on February 9, 1999, at which time all filed Sub-
Bids shall be opened, read aloud, and duly recorded.
C. Sub-Bids shall be submitted on forms identical to those contained in
Bidding Requirements: Bid Form for Sub-Bidder. The Bid Forms attached
hereto are for information only and shall not be detached, filled in,
or executed. All Sub-Bids shall be submitted on the FORM FOR SUB-BID
furnished by the Awarding Authority as required by Section 44G of
Chapter 149 of the General Laws, as amended. Sub-Bids Forms shall be
00 completely filled in and all Sub-Bids which are incomplete, conditional,
obscure, or which contain any additions not called for will be rejected.
D. Sub-Bids filed with the Awarding Authority shall be accompanied by a Bid
t Deposit in the form of a certified check or a treasurer's or cashier's
check issued by a responsible bank or trust company, payable to the City
of Northampton. A bid bond shall be:
1. On a form satisfactory to the Awarding Authority.
2. With a surety company qualified to do business in the Commonwealth
and satisfactory to the Awarding Authority.
3 . Conditioned upon the faithful performance by the principal of the
agreements contained in the Bid. The amount of such bid deposit
shall be five percent (5%) of the value of the Bid.
E. Sub-Bids for work under this Section shall be for the complete work
required as specified and as shown on the drawings.
pa F. Sub-Bidders are directed to the Instructions to Bidders, and to the
requirements that all bidders visit the site to determine the scope of
work required under this Section.
G. Sub-Bidders must comply with all provisions of Division 1, General
Requirements, in the same manner as the General Contractor.
H. Work to be done under this Filed Sub-Bid is included in the Contract
Documents as listed in LOD-1 through LOD-5 (List of Drawings) .
AK
PREFABRICATED RUBBER SPORT SURFACE 09770 - 1
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
flooring manufacturer to produce sample finish indicated and in number
of coats and spreading rates recommended by manufacturer.
3 .3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Core Sampling: At the direction of the Owner and at locations
designated by the Owner, take one core sample per 1000 sq. ft. or
portion of, to verify the thickness and compliance with the physical
property requirements. For each sample that fails, take two additional
samples. Repair damage caused by coring and correct deficiencies found
at no additional cost to Owner.
B. The right is reserved to invoke the following material testing procedure
at any time and any number of times during flooring application.
1. The Owner will engage service of an independent testing agency to
sample materials being used. Samples of material will be taken,
40 identified and sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor.
2. Testing agency will perform tests for any of characteristics
specified, using applicable referenced testing procedures or, if
not referenced, in manufacturer's product data.
C. If test results show installed materials do not comply with specified
requirements, remove noncomplying materials, pay for testing, properly
prepare surfaces that were coated with unacceptable materials, and
reapply flooring materials correctly.
3 .4 CURING, PROTECTION, AND CLEANING
A. Cure resinous flooring materials according to manufacturer's directions,
taking care to prevent contamination during application stages and
before completing curing process. Close application area for a minimum
of 24 hours.
on B. Protect resinous flooring materials from damage and wear during
construction operation. Where temporary covering is required for this
purpose, comply with manufacturer' s recommendations for protective
materials and application method.
po C. Cleaning: Remove temporary covering and clean resinous flooring just
before final inspections. Use cleaning materials and procedures
recommended by resinous flooring manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 09705
11
RESINOUS FLOORING 09705 - 5
w.
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Substrate: Perform preparation and cleaning procedures according to
flooring manufacturer's instructions for particular substrate conditions
involved, and as specified. Provide clean, dry, and neutral substrate
for resinous flooring application.
u
B. Concrete Surfaces: Comply with ASTM C 811 unless otherwise required by
manufacturer's instructions.
C. Concrete Surfaces: Shot-blast with apparatus that roughens the surface, aw
without using water or air to dispense the shot, and recirculates the
shot by vacuum pickup abrading the concrete surface to obtain optimum
bond of epoxy to concrete. Remove sufficient material to provide a ON
sound surface free of laitance, glaze, efflorescence, and incompatible
curing compounds or form release agents. Remove grease, oil, and other
penetrating contaminates. Repair damaged and deteriorated concrete to
acceptable condition. Leave surface free of dust, dirt, laitance, and w
efflorescence.
D. Materials: Mix resin and hardener, add colorant and aggregate when
required, and prepare materials according to resinous flooring system w
manufacturer's instructions.
3 .2 APPLICATION
A. General: Apply each component of resinous flooring system according to
manufacturer's directions to produce a uniform monolithic wearing
surface of thickness indicated.
B. Prime Coat: Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's
recommended spreading rate. Coordinate applying primer with topping mix
to ensure optimum adhesion between resinous flooring materials and
substrate.
C. Trowel-Screeded Epoxy Mortar Flooring: Over freshly applied primer,
trowel apply epoxy mortar mix at 3/16-to-1/4-inch thickness. Hand or
power trowel and grout with epoxy to fill voids. When cured, sand to
remove trowel marks and roughness and apply finish coats to provide
required properties.
D. Cove Base: Apply cove base mix to wall surfaces at locations shown to
form cove base height of 6 inches unless otherwise indicated. Round so
interior and external corners. Follow manufacturer's printed
instructions and details including taping, mixing, priming, troweling,
sanding, and top-coating of cove base. Wk
E. Joints: Where substrate is interrupted by expansion or control joints,
provide joint in resinous flooring to comply with details as recommended
. by resinous flooring manufacturer. AN
1. Apply joint sealant materials to comply with resinous flooring
manufacturer's recommendations.
ak
F. Finish or Sealing Coats: After topping mix has cured sufficiently,
apply low-sheen finish or sealing coats of type recommended by resinous
an
RESINOUS FLOORING 09705 - 4
4M
Aw
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
on
B. Physical Properties: Provide flooring system that meet or exceed the
listed minimum physical property requirements, when tested according to
the referenced standard test method in parentheses.
10
1. Compressive Strength (ASTM C 579) : 10, 000 psi.
2 . Tensile Strength (ASTM D 638) : 1, 160 psi.
40 3 . Flexural Modules of Elasticity (ASTM D 790) : 4, 600 psi.
4. Water Absorption (MIL-D-24613) : Nil.
5. Indentation (MIL-D-3134) : 0.011"
C. Chemical Resistance: Test specimens of the cured resinous flooring are
unaffected when tested according to ASTM C 267 for immersion in the
following reagents for not less than 7 days.
1. Acetic Acid 5 percent
2. Acetone
3 . Ammonium Hydroxide 10 percent
w 4. Benzene
5 . Butyl Alcohol
6. Citric Acid 10 percent
#-0 7. Cola
8. Ethylene Glycol
9. Formaldehyde 10 percent
10. Gasoline
11. Hydrochloric Acid 10 percent and 20 percent
12. Hydrofluoric Acid 40 percent
13 . Lactic Acid 10-50 percent
14. Mineral Spirits
15. Nitric Acid 10 percent
16. Phosphoric Acid 10-80 percent
17. Salad Oil
18. Silver Nitrate 10 percent
19. Sodium Carbonate 2 percent and 20 percent
20. Sodium Chloride 10 percent
21. Sodium Hydroxide 10-60 percent
22 . Syrup
23 . Toluene
24 . Trichlor Ethylene
Pa 25. Urine
26. Xylene
2.3 EPDXY FLOORING
A. Quartz Aggregate Epoxy Flooring: Decorative-type floor surfacing system
consisting of primer; topping including acrylic or epoxy resin, hardener
and ceramic color-coated quartz aggregate; and finish coat. Provide
only factory-packaged materials including aggregate for all components
of floor surfacing system.
2.4 SUPPLEMENTAL MATERIALS
A. Joint Sealant: Type recommended by manufacturer of resinous flooring
system for type of service and joint condition indicated, provided by
Section 07901 "Joint Sealants" .
PART 3 - EXECUTION
RESINOUS FLOORING 09705 - 3
A
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
including underlayment, joint sealant, and repair materials only of type
and from source recommended by manufacturer of primary materials.
C. Field Samples: On floor area selected by the Architect, duplicate
resinous floor finishes of prepared samples. Provide full-thickness
finish samples at least 4-feet square to demonstrate texture, color,
thickness, chemical resistance, cleanability, and other features of the
resinous flooring. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of
in-place field sample.
1. If the initial field sample is unacceptable, make adjustments to
comply with requirements and apply another similar sample until
acceptable.
D. Fire Performance: Where indicated, provide materials and construction
for resinous flooring identical to those whose fire performance has been
determined per MIL-STD-1623, as specified in MIL-D-3134, by a testing
and inspecting organization or by another means acceptable to ,
authorities having jurisdiction.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers with seals
unbroken and bearing manufacturer's labels containing brand name and
directions for storage and mixing with other components.
B. Store materials to comply with manufacturer's directions to prevent
deterioration from moisture, heat, cold, direct sunlight, or other
detrimental effects. aft
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Comply with resinous flooring manufacturer's
directions for maintenance of substrate temperature, moisture,
ventilation, and other conditions required to execute and protect Work.
■w
B. Lighting: Permanent lighting will be in place and working before
installing resinous flooring.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS ow
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
1. Quartz Aggregate Acrylic or Epoxy Flooring:
a. Davercast SQ, Nox-Crete, Inc.
b. R61 CQ, Silikal North America, Inc. .sip
C. Selbatwede 71, Selby Battersby & Co.
2.2 PROPERTIES
A. Colors: As indicated, or if not otherwise indicated, as selected by
Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.
RESINOUS FLOORING 09705 - 2
0M
A*
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA
KB #96079
OR
SECTION 09705 - RESINOUS FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
00
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this work. Note also all Addenda.
1.2 SUMMARY
Am A. This Section includes the following:
1. Quartz aggregate acrylic or epoxy flooring.
on
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements related
to this Section:
1. Section 03300 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for general application,
curing, and finishing concrete.
2 . Section 07901 "Joint Sealants" for joint sealant materials and
installation.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract an
Division 1 Specification Sections.
Pw B. Product data consisting of manufacturer's technical data, installation
instructions, and general recommendations for each resinous flooring
material required.
Or C. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's color
charts showing full range of colors and finishes available.
00 D. Material test reports from qualified independent testing agency
indicating and interpreting test results of the resinous flooring's
reaction to chemicals and other reagents. The results must comply with
requirements indicated.
E. Material certificates, in lieu of agency test reports when permitted by
Architect, signed by manufacturer certifying that each material item
complies with requirements.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
W A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who is
certified in writing by resinous flooring manufacturer as qualified to
install resinous flooring systems specified.
B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain primary resinous flooring
materials, including primers, resins, hardening agents, and finish or
sealing coats, from a single manufacturer. Provide secondary materials
so
RESINOUS FLOORING 09705 - 1
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA
KB #96079
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable
to manufacturer and installer, to ensure carpet is not damaged or
deteriorated at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 09680
w�
A*
am
No
wa
,mss
r
CARPET 09680 - 6
rMI►
40
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
or
B. Patch holes and level to a smooth surface. If previous finish
chemically stripped, reseal concrete. Seal powdery or porous surfaces
with sealer recommended by carpet manufacturer.
00
C. Patch holes and cracks. Sand to level. Remove wax. Seal surface with
sealer recommended by carpet manufacturer.
on
D. Provide trowelable leveling and patching compounds per tile
manufacturer's directions to cover entirp floor surface, filling cracks,
holes, and depressions in substrates.
ON
3 .2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for seam locations and
direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of
pile. At doorways, center seams under door in closed position; do not
place seams perpendicular to door frame, in direction of traffic through
doorway. Do not bridge building expansion joints with continuous
carpet.
B. Extend carpet under removable flanges and furnishings and into alcoves
and closets of each space.
40 C. Provide cutouts where required, and bind cut edges where not concealed
by protective edge guards or overlapping flanges.
D. Install carpet edge guard where edge of carpet is exposed; anchor guards
to substrate.
E. Install with pattern parallel to walls and borders.
F. Install carpet by trimming edges, butting cuts with seaming cement, and
taping and/or sewing seams to provide sufficient strength for stretching
and continued stresses during life of carpet.
G. Fit sections of carpet prior to application of adhesive. Trim edges and
butt cuts with seaming cement.
OR
H. Apply adhesive uniformly to substrate in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions. Butt edges tight to form seams without gaps. Roll entire
area lightly to eliminate air pockets and ensure uniform bond.
so
3 .3 CLEANING
A. Remove adhesive from carpet surface with manufacturer's recommended
cleaning agent.
B. Remove and dispose of debris and unusable scraps. Vacuum with
ps commercial machine with face-beater element. Remove soil. Replace
carpet where soil cannot be removed. Remove protruding face yarn.
C. Vacuum carpet.
3 .4 PROTECTION
CARPET 09680 - 5
go
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
Rw
by weight in normal use.
18) Static: Lifetime of Carpet
19) Edge Ravel: Lifetime of Carpet. Guaranteed not edge ravel
in normal use.
20) Delamination: Lifetime of Carpet Guaranteed no
delamination in normal use (no chair pads required)
21) Tuft Bind: Lifetime of Carpet. Guaranteed 20lbs average
tuft bind, wet or dry, as tested in accordance with ASTM
D-1335-67.
D. Performance Specifications
1) No edge ravel - seam sealer required to guarantee no edge
ravel at edge or seams under normal use for life of
carpet.
2) Secondary Backing Adhesion - guaranteed not to delaminate
for the life of the carpet.
3) Wear Guarantee - no more than 10% face yarn loss for the
life of the carpet. w
4) Guaranteed 201b tuft bind for the life of the carpet
(wet or dry)
5) Impervious to water damage.
6) Stain resistant properties must be permanent/ inherant and so
cannot be removed by commercial cleanings or abrasive
wear.
7) Backing system must be completely free of latex or other on
water soluable materials.
2 .2 ACCESSORIES
A. Carpet Edge Guard: Extruded or molded heavy-duty vinyl or rubber of Aft
size and profile indicated; minimum 2-inch-wide anchorage flange;
manufacturer's standard colors.
B. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified,
Portland-cement-based formulation provided or approved by tile
manufacturer for applications indicated.
ow
1. Levelastic
2 . Gyp-crete
3 . --------- go
C. Seaming Cement: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended
by carpet manufacturer for taping seams and butting cut edges at backing so
to form secure seams and to prevent pile loss at seams.
D. Carpet Adhesive: Water resistant and nonstaining as recommended by
carpet manufacturer to comply with flammability requirements for ' `
installed carpet.
PART 3 - EXECUTION so
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clear away debris and scrape up cementitious deposits from concrete
surfaces to receive carpet; apply sealer to prevent dusting.
w�
CARPET 09680 - 4
40
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMP'T'ON MA KB #96079
soil protection (Branded nylon) . 49% DuPont Antron
Lumena.
3) Dye System: 51% Yarn dyed. 49% Solution dyed.
4) Gauge: 1/10
5) Stitch Count: 10.3/sq. in.
6) Pile Height: .142 in. average.
7) Face Weight: 24 oz/ydz
8) Backing Materials: 106 oz/square yard Thermoplastic
Composite Polymer.
9) Size: 6'
10) Soil/Stain Protection: DuraTech by DuPont
11) Lifetime Antimicrobial: Intersept.
12) Performance Specifications:
a) Combustion Tests:
Radiant Panel (ASTM E- 648) Class I
Smoke Density (ASTM E - 662) - 450
13) Lightfastness: (AATCC 16-E) >- 4.0 Q 60 AFU' s
14) Static: (AATCC - 134) < 3.0 KV
15) Dimensional Stability: (AACHEN Din 54318) <0.10%
16) Warranties: Interface full term 15 year warranty.
C. Carpet Type C-2 - C-4: Lees Commercial Carpets, Workforce, Product
40 Number:DV186 .
1) Product Construction: Tufted Level Loop.
2) Yarn System: DuPont Antron Legacy w/DuraTech soil
protection (Branded nylon) .
3) Dye System: yarn dyed DuraColor by Lees (stain resistant)
4) Gauge: 5/64"
5) Stitch Count: 8.1/sq. in.
6) Yarn Count: 1235/2 : 1245/2
7) Pile Height: .156in. average.
8) Face Weight: 22 oz/ydz
9) Backing Materials:
Primary: Unibond / Woven Polypropylene
Secondary: Woven Polypropylene applied with hot melt
thermoplastic.
10) Total Weight: 76.4oz/yd2
11) Size: 12 '
12) Soil/Stain Protection: DuraTech by DuPont
13) Performance Specifications:
a) Combustion Tests:
Radiant Panel (ASTM E- 648) Class I
Smoke Density (ASTM E - 662) s 450
14) Lightfastness: (AATCC 16-E) z 4 .0 @ 60 AFU's
15) Static: (AATCC - 134) < 3.0 KV
16) Dimensional Stability: (AACHEN Din 54318) <0.10%
Warranties:
17) Wear: Lifetime of Carpet. No more than 10% face yarn loss
CARPET 09680 - 3
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify
carpet with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting
organization.
1. Test Method: DOC FF 1-70.
2 . Rating: Pass.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to project site in original factory wrappings and
containers, labeled with identification of manufacturer, brand name, and .w
lot number.
B. Store materials in original undamaged packages and containers, inside
well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soilage, extreme
temperatures, and humidity. Lay flat, blocked off ground. Maintain
minimum temperature of 68 deg F (20 deg C) at least three days prior to
and during installation in area where materials are stored.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Substrate Conditions: No condensation within 48 hours on underside of so
4-foot by 4-foot polyethylene sheet, fully taped at perimeter to
substrate.
B. Substrate Conditions: pH of 9 or less when substrate wetted with
potable water and phydrion paper applied.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials matching
products installed as described below, packaged with protective covering
for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Carpet: Before installation begins, furnish quantity of full width
for each type of material equal to 5 percent of amount installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS No
A. Manufacturers subject to compliance with requirements of products as
listed below: 00
1. Carpet: Equivalent products from Lee's Carpets, Collins and Aikman
Floor Coverings or Interface Company may be acceptable upon review
and approval of equivalent strike-off samples and specification
data.
B. Carpet Type C-1: Interface Carpets, Boucle Grid, Product Number:
1612907700.
1) Product Construction: Tufted Patterned Loop.
2) Yarn System: 51% DuPont Antron Legacy type 6.6 w/DuraTech
CARPET 09680 - 2
oft
AN
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
SECTION 09680 - CARPET
PART 1 - GENERAL
go
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
No A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
40 who performs this Work. Note also all Addenda.
1.2 SUMMARY
u�t
A. This Section includes carpet, installation, & accessories.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that
relate to this Section:
1. Section 03300 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for sealing of concrete and
moisture requirement.
2 . Section 09300 "Tile" .
3 . Section 09661 "Resilient Tile Flooring Base and Accessories" for
carpet accessories.
4 . Section 09705 "Resinous Flooring" .
5. Section 12690 "Floor Mats and Frames" .
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract
and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of carpet material and installation accessory
required. Submit written data on physical characteristics, durability,
resistance to fading, and flame resistance characteristics.
C. Shop drawings showing layout and seaming diagrams. Indicate pile or
pattern direction and locations and types of edge strips. Indicate
columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and
locations where cutouts are required in carpet. Show installation
details at special conditions.
D. Samples for verification purposes in manufacturer's standard size,
showing full range of color, texture, and pattern variations expected.
Prepare samples from same material to be used for the Work. Submit the
following:
1. 12-inch-square samples of each type of carpet material required.
2 . 12-inch-long samples of each type exposed edge stripping and
accessory item.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
1A
A. Carpet Surface Burning Characteristics: Provide carpet identical to
that tested for the following fire performance characteristics, per test
method indicated below, by UL or other testing and inspecting
CARPET 09680 - 1
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
product acceptable to floor covering manufacturer. '
b. Coordinate selection of floor polish with Owner's maintenance
service.
2 . Cover sheet vinyl floor coverings with undyed, untreated building
paper until inspection for Substantial Completion.
3 . Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over sheet vinyl floor
coverings. Place plywood or hardboard panels over floor coverings
and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll
objects over panels without moving panels.
+ee�.
C. Clean resilient sheet flooring not more than 4 days prior to dates
scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of Substantial
Completion in each area of Project. Clean sheet vinyl floor coverings
by method recommended by manufacturer.
1. Strip protective floor polish that was applied after completing
installation, prior to cleaning. an
2 . Reapply floor polish after cleaning.
END OF SECTION 09666 so
JW
Mee
MIF
.w
reM
Mw
SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS 09666 - 8
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
plainly marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as
marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device.
10 G. Install sheet vinyl floor coverings on covers for telephone and
electrical ducts, and similar items occurring within finished floor
areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of
00 flooring installed on these covers. Tightly adhere edges to perimeter
of floor around covers and to covers.
H. Adhere sheet vinyl floor coverings to flooring substrates by method
approved by floor covering manufacturer.
1. Produce completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising
and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks,
or other surface imperfections.
2 . Comply with floor covering manufacturer's directions including
those for trowel notching, adhesive mixing, and adhesive open and
so working times.
I. Heat-weld seams in sheet vinyl floor coverings where this seaming method
is indicated. Prepare, weld, and finish seams to produce a surface
flush with adjoining sheets.
J. Integral Flash Cove Base: Where indicated, cove sheet vinyl floor
coverings up vertical surfaces to form integral base of height indicated
over cove support strip with top edge butted against and covered by cap
molding.
K. Hand roll sheet vinyl floor coverings in both directions from center out
to embed floor coverings in adhesive and eliminate trapped air. At
walls, door casings, and other locations where access by roller is
IA impractical, press floor coverings firmly in place with flat-bladed
instrument.
3 .4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
40
A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing sheet
vinyl floor coverings:
00
1. Remove visible adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner
recommended by floor covering manufacturers.
2 . Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly.
ON 3 . Do not wash floor until after period recommended by floor covering
manufacturer.
4. Damp-mop floor to remove black marks and soil.
B. Protect flooring against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage
from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures
during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods
so indicated or recommended by floor covering manufacturer.
1. Apply protective floor polish to sheet vinyl floor covering
surfaces that are free from soil, visible adhesive, and surface
blemishes.
a. Use commercially available, metal, cross-linked acrylic
SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS 09666 - 7
I IN 11
4W
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #9607
C. Notify Owner's Representative and do not proceed with installation until go
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3 .2 PREPARATION so
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's installation specifications to
prepare substrates indicated to receive sheet vinyl floor coverings. so
B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds per floor covering
manufacturer's direction to cover entire floor surface, filling cracks,
holes, and depressions in substrates. w
C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that
are incompatible with flooring adhesives and that contain soap, wax,
oil, or silicone, by using a terrazzo or concrete grinder, a drum aw
sander, or a polishing machine equipped with a heavy-duty wire brush.
D. Broom or vacuum clean substrates to be covered by sheet vinyl floor ■o,
coverings immediately before installation. Following cleaning, examine
substrates to determine if there is visually any evidence of moisture,
alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust.
so
E. Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring manufacturer,
prior to application of adhesive. Apply according to manufacturer's
directions.
ao
3 .3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with sheet vinyl floor covering manufacturer's AK
installation instructions and other requirements indicated that are
applicable to each type of floor covering installation included in
Project. no
B. Lay out sheet vinyl floor coverings to comply with the following
requirements:
Ift
1. Maintain uniformity of sheet vinyl floor covering direction.
2 . Arrange for a minimum number of seams and place them in
inconspicuous and low traffic areas, but in no case less than 6 _
inches away from parallel joints in flooring substrates.
3 . Match edges of resilient floor coverings for color shading and
pattern at seams.
4 . Avoid cross seams. ,o
C. Where demountable partitions and other items are indicated for
installing on top of finished floor covering, install floor covering Oft
before these items are installed.
D. Scribe, cut, and fit sheet vinyl floor coverings to butt tightly to
vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture, including 00
cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings.
E. Extend sheet vinyl floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals,
closets, and similar openings. 406
F. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or
so
SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS 09666 - 6
ow
4
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
A. Concrete Slab Primer: Nonstaining type as recommended by flooring
manufacturer.
!! B. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified,
Portland-cement-based formulation provided or approved by tile
manufacturer for applications indicated.
1. Levelastic
2 . Gyp-crete
C. Adhesives (Cements) : Water-resistant, stabilized type as recommended
by manufacturer to suit sheet vinyl floor covering products and
substrate conditions indicated.
D. Seam Sealer: Formulation provided or approved by floor covering
manufacturer for products indicated.
E. Rod for Heat-Welding Seams: Product of floor covering manufacturer in
color complying with the following requirement.
1. Match field color of sheet vinyl floor covering.
2 . As selected by Architect to contrast with field color of sheet
vinyl floor covering.
F. Edge Strips: Height required to protect exposed edge of sheet vinyl
am floor coverings, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running
joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
An
3 .1 EXAMINATION
A. General: Examine areas where installation of sheet vinyl floor
coverings will occur, with Installer present, to verify that substrates
and conditions are satisfactory for installation and comply with floor
covering manufacturer's requirements and those specified in this
Section.
B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710
and the following:
1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers,
on hardeners, and other materials whose presence would interfere with
bonding of adhesive. Determine adhesion and dryness
characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests (including
Calcium Chloride Tests)recommended by tile manufacturer.
a. These tests are to be performed every 2,000 sf and results are
to be submitted to the contractor.
2 . Finishes of subfloors comply with tolerances and other requirements
specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-In-Place Concrete" for slabs
receiving resilient flooring.
3 . Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and
foreign deposits of any kind.
09666 - 5
SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS
Am
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
•MA
A. Install sheet vinyl floor coverings and accessories after other
finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
B. Do not install sheet vinyl floor coverings over concrete slabs until the
slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive as
determined by floor covering manufacturer's recommended bond and
moisture test.
reu
1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials matching �a
products installed as described below, packaged with protective covering
for storage and identified with labels clearly describing contents.
1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for each 500 linear feet or
fraction thereof, in roll form of each different composition,
wearing surface, color, and pattern of sheet vinyl floor covering
installed. so
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
ON
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide sheet vinyl
floor coverings manufactured by the following:
1. "Possibilities", Armstrong.
2.2 SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS
A. Type II Unbacked Sheet Vinyl Floor Coverings: Products complying with
ASTM F 1303, Type II, except for backing requirements, and with the
following requirements:
1. Wearing Surface: smooth or Embossed, Wear layer consisting of
through-grained vinyl granules with color and pattern detail
dispersed uniformly throughout its thickness.
2. Wear Layer: air,
a. 0.050 in. for Armstrong, Possibilities.
3 . Overall Thickness:
a. 0.085 in. for Armstrong, Possibilities.
4. Sheet Width: 6 feet.
5. Seaming Method: Heat Welded.
6. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's
full range of colors and patterns produced for sheet vinyl floor
covering, complying with requirements indicated unless previously
specified on the Finish/Color Schedule and Legend. ' '
2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
w
SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS 09666 - 4
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
Assurance" article.
H. Maintenance data for sheet vinyl floor coverings, to include in the
Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage Installer that is certified by floor
covering manufacturer as competent in the technique for heat-welding
seams.
B. Single-Source Responsibility for Sheet Vinyl Floor Coverings: Obtain
each type, color, and pattern of sheet vinyl floor covering from a
06 single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality
in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the
Work.
4" C. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide sheet vinyl floor coverings
with the following fire performance characteristics as determined by
testing products per ASTM test method indicated below by Underwriters
Laboratories, Inc. (UL) or another testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 watts per sq. cm or more per
ASTM E 648.
2 . Smoke Density: Less than 450 per ASTM E 662 .
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver sheet vinyl floor coverings and installation accessories to
Project site in original manufacturer's unopened cartons and containers,
each bearing names of product and manufacturer, Project identification,
and shipping and handling instructions.
B. Store flooring materials in dry spaces protected from the weather with
ambient temperatures maintained between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 90 deg
F (32 deg C) .
C. Move sheet vinyl floor coverings and installation accessories into
spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of
installation.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain a minimum temperature of 70 deg F (21 deg C) in spaces to
receive sheet vinyl floor coverings for at least 48 hours prior to
installation, during installation, and for not less than 48 hours after
installation. After this period, maintain a temperature of not less
than 55 deg F (13 deg C) .
B. Do not install sheet vinyl floor coverings until they are at the same
temperature as the space where they are to be installed.
C. Close spaces to traffic while installing sheet vinyl floor covering.
1.9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
to
SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS 09666 - 3
40
ww
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #9607
1.3 SUMMARY no
A. The Work in this Section is included in the Resilient Flooring Sub Bid.
om
B. This Section includes the following:
1. Sheet vinyl floor coverings without backing.
2 . Preparation of exisitng floors to receive sheet vinyl flooring. ow
C. Resilient wall base, reducer strips, and other accessories installed
with sheet vinyl floor coverings are specified in Section 09661 00
"Resilient Tile Flooring, Wall Base and Accessories. "
D. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that
relate to this Section: am
1. Section 03300 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for curing compounds,
sealers, hardeners, slab surface tolerances, vapor barrier for
applications below grade.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Type II sheet vinyl floor coverings are those having wear layers with
a minimum binder content of 34 percent.
�r
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract
and Division 1 Specification Sections. +
B. Product data for each type of product specified.
1. Certification by floor covering manufacturer that products supplied
for installation comply with local regulations controlling use of
volatile organic compounds (VOC's) .
�w.
C. Shop drawings showing location of seams and edge strips. Indicate
location of columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in cabinets,
and locations where cutouts are required in flooring.
ww
D. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer' s color
charts consisting of actual sections of sheet vinyl floor coverings
showing full range of colors and patterns available for each different so
product indicated.
E. Samples for verification purposes in form of 6-inch by 9-inch sections
of each different color and pattern of sheet vinyl floor covering ak
product specified, showing full range of variations expected in these
characteristics.
we
F. Product certificates, in lieu of laboratory test reports when permitted
by Architect, signed by manufacturer certifying that each product
complies with requirements.
ow
G. Installer certificates signed by floor covering manufacturer certifying
that Installers comply with requirements specified under "Quality
04
SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS 09666 - 2
w,
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
SECTION 09666 - SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 TIME, MANNER AND REQUIREMENTS FOR FILING SUB-BIDS
A. Sub-Bids shall be submitted in accordance with the provisions of General
Laws, Chapter 149, Section 44A to 44I, inclusive, as amended.
B. Sub-Bids for work under this Section shall be received at the Council
40 Chambers at Town Hall, 210 Main Street, Northampton, MA 01060, until
2:00 p.m. local time on February 9, 1999, at which time all filed Sub-
Bids shall be opened, read aloud, and duly recorded.
C. Sub-Bids shall be submitted on forms identical to those contained in
Bidding Requirements: Bid Form for Sub-Bidder. The Bid Forms attached
hereto are for information only and shall not be detached, filled in,
Aw- or executed. All Sub-Bids shall be submitted on the FORM FOR SUB-BID
furnished by the Awarding Authority as required by Section 44G of
Chapter 149 of the General Laws, as amended. Sub-Bids Forms shall be
completely filled in and all Sub-Bids which are incomplete, conditional,
obscure, or which contain any additions not called for will be rejected.
D. Sub-Bids filed with the Awarding Authority shall be accompanied by a Bid
Deposit in the form of a certified check or a treasurer's or cashier' s
check issued by a responsible bank or trust company, payable to the City
of Northampton. A bid bond shall be:
1. On a form satisfactory to the Awarding Authority.
2. With a surety company qualified to do business in the Commonwealth
and satisfactory to the Awarding Authority.
3 . Conditioned upon the faithful performance by the principal of the
agreements contained in the Bid. The amount of such bid deposit
shall be five percent (5%) of the value of the Bid.
E. Sub-Bids for work under this Section shall be for the complete work
required as specified and as shown on the drawings.
00 F. Sub-Bidders are directed to the Instructions to Bidders, and to the
requirements that all bidders visit the site to determine the scope of
work required under this Section.
ON G. Sub-Bidders must comply with all provisions of Division 1, General
Requirements, in the same manner as the General Contractor.
06 H. Work to be done under this Filed Sub-Bid is included in the Contract
Documents as listed in LOD-1 through LOD-5 (List of Drawings) .
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this Work. Note also all Addenda.
SHEET VINYL FLOOR COVERINGS 09666 - 1
+11R
ON
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MP KB #96079
ON
to act for 15-20 minutes.
4. Scrub floor with a single disc machine and soft nylon brush.
5. Pick up all residue with a wet vacuum. Rinse with clear water and
pick up again.
6. Allow floor to dry thoroughly - 1 to 4 hours.
7. Polish floor with a single disc machine and soft tampico brush.
Do not heel machine.
C. Accessories:
ON 1. Upon completion of all work, clean all base and reducing strips
with an approved cleaning compound. Remove all adhesive from face
of material and buff to a clean dull gloss.
D. Protect flooring against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage
from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures
during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods
indicated or recommended by tile manufacturer.
1. Cover tiles with undyed, untreated building paper until inspection
for Substantial Completion.
2 . Do not move heavy and sharp objects directly over tiles. Place
plywood or hardboard panels over tiles and under objects while they
are being moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without moving
M panels.
E. Reclean flooring not more than 4 days prior to dates scheduled for
inspections intended to establish date of Substantial Completion in each
area of Project. Clean tiles using method recommended by manufacturer.
3.5 ADJUSTMENTS:
A. Inspect work one month after building is occupied by Owner, and correct
defects as follows:
'Wi 1. Tile not seated level - heat and roll.
2. Tiles with breaks or cracks - heat, remove and replace with sound
tile of same thickness and color.
ON 3 . Remove any unevenness under tile which may cause further breaks.
END OF SECTION 09661
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING, WALL BASE, AND ACCESSORIES 09661-9
Eft
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON. MA KB #9607
K. Hand roll tiles where required by the manufacturer.
L. Install landing tile with adhesives recommended by manufacturer. Fit
tiles to cover full surface of landing in a neat and craftsmanlike si.
manner.
M. Apply resilient wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework, and
other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. No
Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable. Tightly adhere
wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in
continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
1. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill
voids along top edge of resilient wall base with manufacturer's
recommended adhesive filler material.
2 . Install inside and exterior corners before installing straight
pieces. No seams allowed within 4 ' of any corner
3 . Form inside corners on job from straight pieces of maximum lengths
possible by cutting an inverted V-shaped notch in toe of wall base
at the point where corner is formed. Shave back of base where
necessary to produce snug fit to substrate.
4 . Form outside corners on job from straight pieces of maximum lengths
possible by shaving back of base at point where bending will occur.
Remove a strip perpendicular to length of base and only deep enough
to produce a snug fit without bends whitening or removal of more
than half the thickness of wall base.
N. Place resilient accessories so they are butted to adjacent materials of
type indicated and bond to substrates with adhesive. Install reducer "
strips at edges of flooring that otherwise would be exposed.
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
vie
A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing vinyl
composition tile installation:
1. Remove visible adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner
recommended by tile manufacturer.
2 . Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly. Do not wash floor for at least wr
five days after installation.
3 . After five days, strip floor using a commercial stripping solution
and single disc floor machine fitted with 3M Green or equal pad.
Strip at machine speed of 170 to 250 rpm. Do not flood floor with we
stripping solution or rinse water.
4. Rinse floor with clear water and allow to dry.
5. Apply 3 coats of high quality metal cross-linked acrylic floor
polish. Allow 30 minutes drying time between coats. Follow
procedures recommended by the polish manufacturer.
6. Do not allow traffic on floor for 24 hours after polishing is ,
completed.
B. Rubber Flooring:
1. Before cleaning the finished floor allow the adhesive to cure for
at least 72 hours.
2 . After 72 hours, totally sweep or vacuum floor. ,
3. Apply Taski "Profi" diluted 12 oz./gal. of water. Allow solution
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING, WALL BASE, AND ACCESSORIES 09661-8
Am
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust.
G. Apply concrete slab primer, if recommended by flooring manufacturer,
prior to applying adhesive. Apply according to manufacturer's
directions.
3 .3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with tile manufacturer's installation directions and
other requirements indicated that are applicable to each type of product
installation included in Project.
B. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls,
discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of
equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths at perimeter
that equal less than one-half of a tile. Install tiles square with room
axis, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in
same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Cut tiles
neatly around all fixtures. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or
deformed tiles.
1. Lay vinyl tiles in basket weave pattern with grain direction
alternating between reversed in adjacent tiles.
2 . Lay tiles in pattern with respect to location of colors, patterns,
and sizes as indicated on Drawings.
3 . Lay rubber tiles with arrows in the same direction.
D. Scribe, cut, and fit tiles to butt tightly to vertical surfaces,
permanent fixtures, built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes,
i outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings.
E. Extend tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar
40 openings.
F. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or
plainly marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as
"u marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device.
G. Install tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, and similar
items occurring within finished floor areas. Maintain overall
W" continuity of color and pattern with pieces of flooring installed on
these covers. Tightly adhere edges to perimeter of floor around covers
and to covers.
H. Adhere tiles to flooring substrates without producing open cracks,
voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive
spreader marks, or other surface imperfections in completed tile
installation.
I. Use full spread of adhesive applied to substrate in compliance with tile
manufacturer's directions including those for trowel notching, adhesive
mixing, and adhesive open and working times.
J. Handle rubber tiles front to front, back to back to prevent top surface
wax from transferring to the back surface.
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING, WALL BASE, AND ACCESSORIES 09661-7
JIM
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
2 . Finishes of subfloors comply with tolerances and other requirements war
specified in Section 03300 "Cast-In-Place Concrete" for slabs
receiving resilient flooring.
3 . Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and
foreign deposits of any kind.
4 . A surface texture equivalent to 80-100 grit sandpaper is required
to insure a good adhesive bond.
a. For rubber tile installations, perform moisture condition test
in each major area, minimum 1 per 2,000 square feet, prior to
installation. Moisture condition shall not exceed 3 pounds e�
per 1, 000 square feet per 24 hour day, in accordance with
Rubber Manufacturers Association Test Method. Do not proceed
with work until results of moisture condition tests are
acceptable. '
5. For Vinyl Composition Floor Tile installations, a subfloor moisture
(rest) content of 5% to a depth of 1" is the maximum allowed.
(Hydrostatic moisture problems are excluded) .
6 . For rubber tile applications on concrete slab on grade or below
grade, verify vapor barrier below slab was installed. If no vapor
barrier was installed, do not proceed with work unless written
acceptance of such conditions is received and submitted.
7. For rubber tile installations, perform adhesive bond test in each
major area, minimum 1 per 2,000 square feet, prior to installation.
Examine after 72 hours to determine whether bond is solid and no
moisture is present. Do not proceed with work until results of
bond test are acceptable.
a. Results are to be submitted to the contractor.
C. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected. Start of work implies acceptance of underlying_ surfaces
as satisfactory for proper installation of this work.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Comply with ASTM-F-710 and manufacturer's installation
specifications to prepare substrates indicated to receive tile.
.�r
B. Patch or level all surfaces in preparation for installing new resilient
floor finishes.
we
C. Provide trowelable leveling and patching compounds per tile
manufacturer's directions to cover entire floor surface, filling cracks,
holes, and depressions in substrates.
D. Use stair tread nose filler per tread manufacturer's directions to fill
nosing substrates not conforming to trend contours.
Will
E. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that
are incompatible with flooring adhesives and that contain soap, wax,
oil, or silicone, by using a terrazzo or concrete grinder, a drum
sander, or a polishing machine equipped with a heavy-duty wire brush or Silk
other mechanical methods as required by the manufacturer.
F. Broom or vacuum clean substrates to be covered by tiles immediately
before tile installation. Following cleaning, examine substrates for
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING, WALL BASE, AND ACCESSORIES 09661-6
40
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA RE #96079
00
S. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. "Norament 825C Stairtread with Round Pastilles", Nora Flooring
Systems.
1) Furnish Landing Treads same color as Landing Tiles.
2.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORIES
A. Accessories
1. Reducer strips:
a. Resilient flooring to Concrete.
b. Resilient Flooring to Carpet.
C. Resilient flooring to sheet vinyl.
2.5 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
0 A. Concrete Slab Primer: Nonstaining type as recommended by flooring
manufacturer.
B. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified,
AIA1 Portland-cement-based formulation provided or approved by tile
manufacturer for applications indicated.
1. Levelastic
2 . Gyp-crete
3 . ---------
C. Adhesives (Cements) : Water-resistant type recommended by tile
i manufacturer to suit resilient floor tile products and substrate
conditions indicated.
1. Epoxy type recommended by rubber floor tile and stair accessory
manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .1 EXAMINATION
A. General: Examine areas where installation of products specified in this
Section will occur, with Installer present, to verify that substrates
and conditions are satisfactory for tile installation and comply with
tile manufacturers requirements and those specified in this Section.
B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710
and the following:
1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers,
hardeners, and other materials whose presence would interfere with
bonding of adhesive. Determine adhesion and dryness
characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests (including
Calcium Chloride Tests)recommended by tile manufacturer.
a. These tests are to be performed every 2,000 sf and results are
to be submitted to the contractor.
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING, WALL BASE, AND ACCESSORIES 09661-5
..
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
00
are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive as determined by tile
manufacturer's recommended bond and moisture test.
1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials matching
products installed as described below, packaged with protective covering
for storage and identified with labels clearly describing contents.
B. Leave 3W extra of each type of material for Owner's use. Leave minimum
of forty (40) full vinyl tiles of each color, one (1) gallon of vinyl !
tile adhesive, six (6) full rubber tiles, one (1) gallon of rubber tile
adhesive with the Owner.
C. All broken boxes of tile at completion of job to become property of go
Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS No
2.1 RESILIENT TILE
A. Molded Pattern Rubber Floor Tile: (Flooring and Landings) comply with
ASTM C501, D-2047 and F 1344 .
1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. "Norament 825C11, Round Pastilles, 1880, Nora Flooring Systems,
Inc.
1) Overall thickness: 4.Omm.
2) Approximate Rubber Content: 48%.
B. Vinyl Composition Floor Tile: Products complying with ASTM F 1066, FS
SS-T-312, Type IV, Composition 1 (nonasbestos formulated) , Class 2
through pattern, 12" x 12" x 1/8" thick.
1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. "Imperial Texture", by Armstrong.
2 .2 RESILIENT WALL BASE
A. Rubber Wall Base: Complying with FS SS-W-40, Type I, �w
1/8" thick, 4" high cove x 120' lengths.
1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
a. Nora Flooring Systems, Inc.
b. Armstrong
C. Johnsonite
2.3 RESILIENT STAIR ACCESSORIES
wMs
A. Rubber Stair Treads and Risers: Products of style suitable for use
indicated and complying with FS RR-T-650, Composition A, one piece
nosing/tread/riser flooring in lengths sized to eliminate unnecessary "r*
seams, and to run full width of stair run.
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING, WALL BASE, AND ACCESSORIES 09661-4 ek
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
0
ASTM test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 watts per sq. cm or more per
ASTM E 648 and NFPA-253 .
2 . Smoke Density: Less than 450 per ASTM E 662 and NFPA-258.
C. Installer Qualifications: Engage an Installer experienced in rubber
flooring installations, certified by the manufacturer, with at least 5
years experience installing rubber tile.
4
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products and installation accessories to Project site in
original manufacturer's unopened cartons and containers each bearing
names of product and manufacturer, Project identification, and shipping
and handling instructions.
B. Store flooring materials in dry spaces protected from the weather with
ambient temperatures maintained between 50 deg F (10 deg C) and 90 deg
F (32 deg C) .
C. Store tiles on flat surfaces.
D. Move products and installation accessories into spaces where they will
be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. All materials and workmanship shall be warranted for a period of twelve
months from date of final acceptance of the building. Defective
workmanship and materials shall be replaced without cost to the Owner.
B. Provide a ten year wear warranty for rubber flooring.
C. Warranties specified above shall not deprive the Owner of other rights
the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and
will be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by
the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain a minimum temperature of 65 deg F in spaces to receive tiles
for at least 48 hours prior to installation, during installation, and
for not less than 48 hours after installation. After this period,
maintain a temperature of not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) .
B. Do not install products until they are at the same temperature as the
space where they are to be installed.
C. Close spaces to traffic during tile installation.
1.9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Install products and accessories after other finishing operations,
including painting, have been completed.
B. Do not install tiles over concrete slabs until the slabs have cured and
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING, WALL BASE, AND ACCESSORIES 09661-3
as
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
1.3 SUMMARY Ift
A. This Section includes the following:
00
1. Resilient tile.
2 . Vinyl composition floor tile.
3. Resilient wall base.
4. Resilient flooring accessories. so
S. Resilient carpet accessories.
6. Preparation of existing substrate to receive resilient tile
flooring. to
7. Preparation of existing Auditorium and Dramatic Arts flooring for
new special floor coating.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that 00
relate to this Section:
1. Section 03300 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for curing compounds,
sealers, hardeners, slab surface tolerances, vapor barrier for
applications below grade.
2 . Section 09680, "Carpet" .
3 . Section 1109800 Special Coatings for painting of Auditorium and
Dramatic Arts Floors.
4 . Section 1109880 Protective Coatings for Concrete.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract
and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of product specified.
1. Certification by tile manufacturer that products supplied for tile
installation comply with State of Connecticut regulations
controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOC's) .
Ow
C. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's color
charts consisting of actual tiles or sections of tiles showing full
range of colors and patterns available for each type of resilient floor
tile indicated. If colors are preselected, only submit colors listed No
on Finish/Color Schedule.
D. Product certificates, in lieu of laboratory test reports when permitted we
by Architect, signed by manufacturer certifying that each product
complies with requirements.
E. Maintenance data for resilient floor tile, to include in Operating and .w.
Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single-Source Responsibility for Floor Tile: Obtain each type, color,
and pattern of product from a single source with resources to provide
products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties
without delaying progress of the Work.
B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide product with the following
fire performance characteristics as determined by testing products per
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING, WALL BASE, AND ACCESSORIES 09661-2
w
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
SECTION 09661 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING, WALL BASE, AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 TIME, MANNER AND REQUIREMENTS FOR FILING SUB-BIDS
00 A. Sub-Bids shall be submitted in accordance with the provisions of General
Laws, Chapter 149, Section 44A to 44I, inclusive, as amended.
B. Sub-Bids for work under this Section shall be received at the Council
0 Chambers at Town Hall, 210 Main Street, Northampton, MA 01060, until
2:00 p.m. local time on February 9, 1999, at which time all filed Sub-
Bids shall be opened, read aloud, and duly recorded.
C. Sub-Bids shall be submitted on forms identical to those contained in
Bidding Requirements: Bid Form for Sub-Bidder. The Bid Forms attached
hereto are for information only and shall not be detached, filled in,
*0 or executed. All Sub-Bids shall be submitted on the FORM FOR SUB-BID
furnished by the Awarding Authority as required by Section 44G of
Chapter 149 of the General Laws, as amended. Sub-Bids Forms shall be
10 completely filled in and all Sub-Bids which are incomplete, conditional,
obscure, or which contain any additions not called for will be rejected.
D. Sub-Bids filed with the Awarding Authority shall be accompanied by a Bid
Deposit in the form of a certified check or a treasurer' s or cashier's
check issued by a responsible bank or trust company, payable to the City
of Northampton. A bid bond shall be:
1. On a form satisfactory to the Awarding Authority.
2 . With a surety company qualified to do business in the Commonwealth
and satisfactory to the Awarding Authority.
3 . Conditioned upon the faithful performance by the principal of the
agreements contained in the Bid. The amount of such bid deposit
shall be five percent (5%) of the value of the Bid.
" E. Sub-Bids for work under this Section shall be for the complete work
required as specified and as shown on the drawings.
40 F. Sub-Bidders are directed to the Instructions to Bidders, and to the
requirements that all bidders visit the site to determine the scope of
work required under this Section.
G. Sub-Bidders must comply with all provisions of Division 1, General
Requirements, in the same manner as the General Contractor.
40 H. Work to be done under this Filed Sub-Bid is included in the Contract
Documents as listed in LOD-1 through LOD-5 (List of Drawings) .
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this work. Note also all Addenda.
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING, WALL BASE, AND ACCESSORIES 09661-1
an
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
END OF SECTION 09563 w
r
wry
r
sew
%J
WOOD ATHLETIC FLOORING 09563 — 6
two
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #9 6 0 7 9
12" o.c. Size joints between flooring strips to allow for intermediate
expansion, in accordance with local humidity conditions.
3 .3 SANDING AND FINISHING:
A. Allow installed flooring to acclimate to ambient conditions for a
minimum period of 10 days before sanding.
B. Machine sand with coarse, medium and fine grades of sandpaper, followed
by disc sanding with 000 sandpaper. Clean with power vacuum, and check
to confirm that entire surface of each piece has been sanded, and that
floor is level and smooth, without ridges or cups. Proceed immediately
with finish.
C. Penetrating Finish: Apply wood sealer (2 coats) in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions, including machine buffing with steel wool,
in-the-wet when recommended by manufacturer. Clean floor after each
,w coat with clean up solvent.
D. High-Build Gym Finish: Apply gym floor finish in accordance with
10 manufacturer' s instructions, including a first coat of penetrating
sealer of type recommended. Apply as many coats as needed to build a
minimum dry film thickness of 3 mils. Follow manufacturer's
recommendations for drying time between coats. Buff between each coat.
41% Retain empty containers for confirmation of film thickness. Prevent
traffic on finished floor for a minimum of 10 days.
46 1. Lines and Markers: Prior to application of last coat of floor
finish, lay out lines, fields and other markings as indicated for
colored enamel application. Mask flooring to provide sharp edges.
Apply gym enamel in 1.0 mil thickness, in colors as indicated, or
as selected by Architect. Where game lines cross, break minor game
line at intersection; do not overlap lines.
E. Wax and buff completed finish before permitting traffic.
F. Install expansion base trim and other cover trim as indicated for
expansion spaces at edges and interruptions of flooring.
3 .4 SANDING AND FINISHING OF EXISTING WOOD FLOORING:
A. Machine sand with coarse, medium and fine grades of sandpaper, followed
by disc sanding with 000 sandpaper. Clean with power vacuum, and check
to confirm that entire surface of each piece has been sanded, and that
floor is level and smooth, without ridges or cups. Proceed immediately
with finish.
B. Penetrating Finish: Apply wood sealer (2 coats) in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions, including machine buffing with steel wool,
in-the-wet when recommended by manufacturer. Clean floor after each
coat with clean up solvent.
40 3 .5 PROTECTION:
A. Protect completed wood flooring during remainder of construction period
with heavy Kraft paper or other suitable covering, so that flooring and
finish will be without damage or deterioration at time of acceptance.
WOOD ATHLETIC FLOORING 09563 - 5
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
�e►
finish designed to minimize "rubber-burning" as recommended by flooring
manufacturer and approved by MFMA.
H. Wall Base: 4" x 311, heavy duty molded, vented rubber cove base with pre-
molded corners.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .1 GENERAL:
A. Comply with flooring manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for
applications indicated, but not less than Maple Flooring Manufacturers
Association standards and Wood & Synthetic Flooring Institute standards.
B. Store wood flooring in room for not less than 14 days prior to
installation for acclimation.
C. Pattern Direction: Lay flooring lengthwise with space to be floored.
D. Tolerances: Level athletic wood flooring system to a tolerance of 1/8"
in 10' -0" .
1. Flooring contractor to check substrate for 1/8" in 10' surface
plane tolerance, and report to General Contractor, in writing, any
discrepancies.
E. Expansion Spaces: Provide space as indicated or required by
instructions and standards, at walls and other obstructions,
interruptions and terminations of flooring. Cover spaces with bases,
trim, saddles, and thresholds.
F. Check for Substrate Dryness: Before proceeding with installation of
athletic wood flooring over concrete substrate, check for dryness. If
not sufficiently dry, as determined by Installer, continue to dry
substrate, or provide extra moisture protection for flooring.
G. Check for Wood Dryness: Flooring shall be installed at a moisture
content of not more than 8%.
H. Treated Wood: When treated wood must be cut for installation, apply a
heavy brush coat of 5% pentachlorophenol after cutting.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install vapor barrier, sealing and lapping joints a minimum of 611 .
B. Install lower layer of plywood sub-floor perpendicular to finish
flooring, spacing all edges 1/4" and offsetting joints 4 ' -011 . Provide
proper expansion voids at perimeter and all vertical obstructions.
Install resilient pads on underside of lower sub-floor at maximum
distance of 12" on center and 6" from all edges. Install solid blocking
under stacked position of bleachers.
C. Install the second layer of plywood sub-floor at a 45 degree angle over
the first layer, spacing all edges 1/4" and offsetting joints 4 ' -011 .
Attach second layer with nails or staples at 12" o.c.
D. Install flooring parallel with main playing court, by power nailing at wo
WOOD ATHLETIC FLOORING 09563 - 4
w�+
w
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
1. Superior Floor Company.
2 . Action Floor Systems, Inc.
3 . Robbins Sports Surfaces.
4. Connor-AGA.
2 .2 WOOD STRIP ATHLETIC FLOORING:
A. Grade, Cut, and Species: Comply with Maple Flooring Manufacturers
Association grading rules for the following:
1. Areas Exposed to View:
a. Grade: No. 2 or better.
2 . Cut: Flat-Grain.
3 . Species: Northern Hard Maple.
' B. Lengths: Comply with Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association grading
rules.
C. Matching: Continuous tongued and grooved and end matched; milled with
special backing groove.
D. Back Channeling: Back channel each piece in accordance with
manufacturer's standards.
E. Thickness: 25/32" .
F. Face Width: 2-1/411 .
G. Seasoning: Kiln dried before milling.
H. Pressure Treatment: After milling, pressure treat flooring in
accordance with AWPA LP2, followed by drying to required moisture
content.
2 .3 ACCESSORY MATERIALS FOR WOOD ATHLETIC FLOORING:
A. Moisture Barrier: 6-mil carbonated polyethylene film.
B. Resilient Pads: Manufacturer's standard 3/4" high conical or
hemispherical rubber ,pads with attachment ears for use with "floating"
athletic floor system.
C. Plywood Subflooring: Two (2) layers of 15/32" CD exterior grade plywood
in 48" x 96" sheets.
D. Nails and Screws: Type and size recommended by manufacturer, but not
less than recommended by MFMA for each application.
E. Preservative: Penetrating type, wood preservative and insect inhibitor,
as recommended by flooring manufacturer.
F. Floor Sealer: Penetrating type, pliable, wood-hardening sealer and
finish; as recommended by flooring manufacturer and approved by Maple
Flooring Manufacturers Association (MFMA) .
ow G. Gym Floor Finish: Epoxy resin or other synthetic resin type gym floor
to WOOD ATHLETIC FLOORING 09563 - 3
w
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA
# 6079
installation instructions for athletic flooring system. Include
certificate attesting to the pressure treating process after milling.
Include instructions for handling, moisture protection, anchorage,
finishing, protection and maintenance. ys,
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating method of construction,
relationships to surrounding construction, perimeter venting, base and
trim details and other information and components not fully dimensioned
or detailed in manufacturers product data. Include layout, colors,
widths and dimensions of game lines and markings.
C. Samples: Submit a 12" x 12" mock-up of floor construction with flooring
finish together with color chips for game line markings.
D. Special Project Warranty: Submit copies of 1-year warranty for finished
wood flooring and associated work, agreeing to repair or replace
flooring which shrinks, warps, cracks or otherwise deteriorates
excessively, or which buckles, delaminates or breaks its anchorage or tea
bond with substrate or fails otherwise to perform as required or as
represented by manufacturer, due to failures of materials and
workmanship and not due to unusual exposure to moisture or other abusive
forces and elements not anticipated for application. Warranty shall be Ah,
signed by Installer and by Contractor, who shall assume responsibility
for obtaining adequate warranties on materials from manufacturers.
E. DIN Certification: Submit copy of DIN Certification of floor system.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
A. Protect wood flooring from excessive moisture in shipment, storage and
handling. Deliver in unopened bundles and store in a dry place, with
adequate air circulation. Do not deliver material to building until
"wet work" such as concrete, masonry, tile, painting,
mechanical, electrical and plaster have been completed, cured e to as
condition of equilibrium, and all gymnasium equipment has been
installed.
B. Moisture Content: At time of delivery to project, limit average
moisture content to 12%; 14% maximum for any piece.
1.6 JOB CONDITIONS:
A. Conditioning: Do not proceed with delivery and installation of wood ow
flooring until after spaces to receive flooring have been enclosed and
are dry and maintained at approximately same humidity condition as
planned for occupancy. Place wood flooring materials in spaces to be
floored 7 days in advance of start of installation. Open
packages
wood flooring which are sealed to permit natural adjustment Of moisture
content. Maintain ambient temperature in range of 65 deg.F (18 deg.C)
to 90 deg.F (32 deg.C) prior, to, during, and after installation of wood it
flooring.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide wood
athletic flooring system by one of the following:
WOOD ATHLETIC FLOORING
09563 - 2
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
SECTION 09563 - WOOD ATHLETIC FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this work. Note also all Addenda.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Resiliently mounted floating floor system.
a. Extent of wood athletic flooring is indicated on drawings.
2 . Sanding and finishing of existing wood floor.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that are
related to this section:
1. Section 03300 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for slab leveling
requirements.
2 . Section 08710, "Door Hardware", for thresholds and related
hardware.
3. Section 11491, "Gymnasium Equipment", for anchors, clips, etc.
recessed into flooring.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Installer Qualifications: Firm specializing in installation of
athletic/gymnasium wood flooring, with not less than 10 years'
successful experience in installation of the types of flooring required.
B. Single Installer Responsibility: Entire wood athletic floor system
shall be installed by a single firm (herein called the Installer) , for
undivided responsibility. Include moisture barrier, resilient pads,
subflooring, flooring, trim, expansion provisions, finish, markings and
M other accessory items as indicated.
C. General Standards: Comply with Maple Flooring Manufacturing Association
(MFMA) standards and recommendations for flooring including grading
rules, and comply with Wood and Synthetic Flooring Institute (WSFI)
standards and recommendations applicable to materials and methods of
installation, except as otherwise indicated.
D. DIN Certification: Flooring system must be certified as complying with
DIN 18032 Part II.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
0% A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's detailed technical product data and
WOOD ATHLETIC FLOORING 09563 - 1
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA ED #96079
A%
I*
.w
tAM
so
WOOD FLOORING 09550-6
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
stapling and set on moisture barrier, stagger end joints. Space
mounts 12" o.c. Provide 5/8" fire treated plywood spacers in
opposite direction, where no rubber mounts occur.
4. Install Wood Sleepers with maximum lengths perpendicular to long
dimension of space without anchorage.
a. Space sleepers at 24 inches o.c. in both direction.
5 . Install 3/4" plywood substrate with the long dimension of the
plywood parallel to the long dimension of the room. Provide 1/4"
spacing between the joints of the plywood.
a. Nail the substrate to the sleepers with fasteners spaced at
12" o.c.
6. Install wood strip flooring by machine nailing to subfloor and
sleepers; nail each strip at each sleeper crossing. Space
fasteners as recommended by manufacturer.
E. Accessories: Baseboard is by Section 09661.
3 .4 SANDING AND FINISHING
A. Schedule floor finishing to be completed just before final inspection,
ob Project acceptance and Substantial Completion.
B. Machine-sand installed, unfinished flooring to remove offsets and
nonlevel conditions, ridges, cups, and sanding machine marks that would
be noticeable after finishing. Use three grades of sandpaper, ending
with 00 grade. Vacuum and tack clean and immediately apply finish. Do
not permit traffic on floor after sanding and until finish is completed.
C. Apply stain to match approved sample.
D. Apply one (1) coat of floor sealer according to manufacturer' s
instructions, including machine buffing with steel wool in-the-wet where
recommended by manufacturer.
E. Apply polyurethane floor finish according to manufacturer's
instructions. Apply as many coats as needed to build a dry film
thickness of at least 3 .0 mils. , but in no case less than three coats.
1. Apply first coat thinned with mineral spirits at a ratio of 1 quart
mineral spirits to one gallon polyurethane.
3 .5 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed unfinished and prefinished wood flooring during
remainder of construction period with heavy kraft paper or other
suitable covering to prevent damage or deterioration. Do not use
plastic sheet or film that could cause condensation.
B. Do not cover site-finished floors with kraft paper, rugs or any other
material until finish reaches full cure, usually 6 or 7 days.
00 END OF SECTION 09550
WOOD FLOORING 09550-5
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #9607
Type I-B, Class 2 .
D. Wood Trim: Provide reducer strips, nosings, saddles, thresholds, and
other wood accessories indicated in or adjacent to wood flooring of same
species, grade, and cut as wood flooring.
E. Wood Sleepers: Standard grade, nominal 2 by 4 inches kiln-dried, A-
southern pine pressure fire-treated.
F. Plywood Subflooring: APA C-D Plugged, exterior glue, 3/4" thick, fire
treated fir or southern pine. AN
G. Rubber Mounts: 2-1/4" x 3" x 5/8" thick hollow rubber pads, with a
durometer hardness of 48 ± 5, sized to provide optimum floor resiliency
for spacing specified by manufacturer. ftl?
PART 3 - EXECUTION
00
3 .1 INSPECTION
A. Examine substrates where wood flooring will be installed and conditions
under which work will be performed. Notify Owner's Representative and
do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected in an acceptable manner.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Where direct application of wood flooring to concrete substrate is
indicated, test for dryness before proceeding with installation. Check
levelness of concrete substrate to ensure not more than 1/4-inch
deviation in any direction when checked with a 10-foot straight edge.
Grind down high spots or fill in low spots to correct improper
conditions.
B. Apply moisture barrier over concrete substrate or subfloor as
recommended by flooring manufacturer. to
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with flooring manufacturer's instructions and Am
recommendations, but not less than that recommended in NOFMA "Hardwood
Flooring Installation Material, " where applicable to type flooring
required.
B. Pattern: Lay flooring lengthwise with space to be floored.
C. Expansion Space: Provide expansion space at walls and other
obstructions and terminations of flooring of not less than 2 inches
unless otherwise indicated on drawings. Fill expansion space with
premolded filler. ow
D. Solid Wood Flooring Installation: Blind-nail flooring to substrate in
according to NOFMA recommendations.
1. Selection of nail type is Installer's option complying with
flooring manufacturer's recommendations.
2. Install moisture barrier with joints lapped minimum 6" and sealed.
3 . Apply rubber mounts to bottom of sleepers in one direction, by
WOOD FLOORING 09550-4
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
1. Wood Strip/Plank Flooring, Solid wood Only:
a. Robbins, Inc.
b. Firebird Industries, Ltd.
C. Memphis Hardwood Flooring Co.
d. Action Floor Systems, Inc.
2. Finishing Materials:
a. Benjamin Moore & Company.
2.2 WOOD STRIP FLOORING
11�1i
A. Solid wood Flooring: Where strip-type solid wood flooring is indicated,
provide the following:
1. Species: Southern yellow pine of the longleaf, shortleaf or
loblolly species.
2. Grade: 2nd and Better Flooring.
3 . Cut: Edge Grain.
a. Comply with Southern Pine Inspection Bureau grading rules for
above species, grade and cut.
b. Provide boards with an average of 20 growth rings per inch.
4. Thickness: 1-1/4" actual.
5. Face Width: 3-1/8 inches.
6. Matching: Continuous tongue and grooved; end matched and grooved.
7 . Lengths: Provide standard random length strips, complying with
applicable grading rules.
8. Seasoning: Manufacture solid wood flooring from kiln-dried lumber.
t 2 .3 FINISHING MATERIALS
A. Stain: Alkyd-based masking type of custom color as selected by
Architect.
1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
a. Stain: "Benwood Interior Stain, 237" Benjamin Moore & Company.
B. Floor Sealer: Vinyl toluene modified alkyd resin, clear.
1. Flame Sealer: "Quick Dry Sanding Sealer, 41311 , Benjamin Moore &
Company.
C. Solvent-based polyurethane complying with environmental and flammability
restrictions, specially compounded for multiple-coat application on wood
floors. Durable, nonyellowing, odorless, and fast drying, flat finish.
2 .4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Moisture Barrier: Polyethylene sheeting conforming to ASTM D 4397, not
less than 6.0 mils thick.
B. Fasteners: As recommended by manufacturer, but not less than that
recommended in NOFMA "Installation Manual."
C. Cork Expansion Strip: Composition cork expansion strip FS HH-C-576,
WOOD FLOORING 09550-3
no
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
A*
manufacturer or source to ensure a match of quality, color, pattern, and
texture.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect wood flooring from exposure to moisture in shipment, storage,
and handling. Deliver in unopened cartons or bundles and store in a dry
place with adequate air circulation. Do not deliver material to
building until concrete, plaster, masonry, ceramic tile, and other wet
work is complete and cured to a condition of equilibrium and temperature
and humidity are maintained at or near occupancy levels. *,
B. Moisture Content: At time of delivery to project, limit average
moisture content to 12%.
04
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Conditioning: Do not install wood flooring until spaces are enclosed 00
and at approximate humidity condition planned for occupancy. Condition
wood for 5 days before start of installation by placing in spaces to
receive flooring and maintaining ambient temperature between 65 deg F
and 75 deg F (18 deg C and 24 deg C) before, during, and after am
installation. Open sealed packages of wood flooring to permit natural
adjustment of moisture content and allow flooring to acclimate to the
room conditions. ..
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by Manufacturer, and
Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace wood flooring that fails in
materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failures
include, but are not limited to:
1. Buckling, warping, squeaking, and loosening.
2. Excessive open joints or cracks.
3. Deterioration of finishes beyond normal wear. we
B. Warranty Period: 3 years from date of Substantial Completion.
C. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may
have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in
addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the
Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIAL
A. Deliver extra material to Owner. Before installation begins, furnish "
not less than 1.0 percent of the quantity of each type wood flooring
installed on the Project, packaged with protective covering for storage
and identified with labels clearly describing contents. Ar
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following:
WOOD FLOORING 09550-2
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
SECTION 09550 - WOOD FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this work. Note also all Addenda.
1.2 SUMMARY
ow A. This Section includes the following:
1. Solid wood strip flooring, including sleepers and subflooring.
�A►
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that
relate to this Section:
1. Section 01030 "Alternates" for bidding requirements.
2. Section 03300 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete substrate
flatness and leveling tolerances, curing, finishing, and vapor
r barrier.
3 . Section 08710 "Door Hardware" , for thresholds and related hardware.
4 . Section 09661 "Resilient Tile Flooring, Wall, Base and
Accessories", for base molding.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data including manufacturer's detailed technical product data
and installation instructions for each type of wood flooring. Include
instructions for handling, storage, installation, dimensions of
individual components, profiles, edge detail, finishing, protection, and
maintenance.
C. Samples consisting of sets of range samples for each type of wood
flooring.
�Il
1. Include unfinished samples of flooring material.
2. Include one 12" x 12" sample of each proposed floor assembly,
finished.
3 . Accessories: Include minimum 6-inch-long samples of each type of
required accessory item such as wood or metal feature strips,
reducer strips, baseboard, trim, molding, and nosings.
D. Shop drawings showing layout and types of wood flooring, including
plans, elevations, sections, details of anchorage and attachments to
other units of Work, and conditions requiring feature strips, reducer
strips, baseboard, trim, molding, nosings, or other accessories.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Quality Control: Obtain flooring of each type from a single
WOOD FLOORING 09550-1
tr
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON XA KB 496079
B. Remove and replace panels which are damaged and are unacceptable to
Architect.
3 .2 CLEANING
A. Clean panels with fabric facing, upon completion of installation, to
remove dust and other foreign materials from the facing, using a dry
brush or a vacuum or both.
B. Clean panels with vinyl facing, upon completion of installation, to
remove dust and other foreign materials from the facing, using warm
water and a clean sponge, wipe dry.
C. Remove surplus materials, rubbish, and debris resulting from acoustical
wall panel installation upon completion of work, and leave areas of
installation in neat, clean condition.
END OF SECTION 09521
ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS 09521 - 5
w
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
factory-applied finish on exposed items in the following color:
1. Match color of facing material.
F. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the
following:
.so
1. Spline-Mounted Acoustical Wall Panels with Glass Fiberboard or Low-
Density Mineral Fiberboard Core:
a. "Soundsoak 8511, Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
b. "Fabri-Tough Wall Panel", Tectum, Inc.
C. "Hardside Acoustical Wall Panels", Kinetics Noise Control.
d. "5600 Architectural Solutions Wall Panels" , Capaul r
Architectural Acoustics.
G. Acoustical Diffuser Panels: Manufacturer's standard diffuser panels
consisting of 0.125 inch thickness, impact resistant cylindrical
sections and faceted sides or ends, fabric wrapped, in two categories:
1. Small Diffusers Type I: Less than 24 sq. ft. in size, with two
faceted ends; fabric wrapped.
2 . Large Diffusers Type II: Equal to or greater than 24 sq. ft. in
size, with two faceted sides; sound absorbing board mounted on the
concave rear surface; fabric wrapped.
H. Acoustical Absorber Panels: Manufacturer's standard absorber panels of
consisting impact resistant polyhedrons; sound absorbing fabric wrapped.
I. Mounting Hardware: Four-corner supports, mounting clips for
interchangeable panels.
1. Include manufacturer's standard wall channel brackets.
J. Fabric: Woven plain weave 100% polyester 2-ply Class A fabric wrapping
entire core and frame assembly, glued to back of frame.
K. Products: Subject to conformance with requirements, provide the
following:
1. "Interactive Acoustical Panel System", Wenger Corp. , Owatonna, MN.
2 . "Lamvin Wall Diffuser Panel", Lamvin, Inc. , San Diego, CA 92121.
(800) 446-6329.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install acoustical wall panels in locations indicated with vertical
surfaces and edges plumb, top edges level, and in alignment with other '
panels, scribed to fit adjoining work accurately at borders and at
penetrations. Comply with panel manufacturer's printed instructions for
installation of panels using type of mounting accessories indicated or, w
if none indicated, as recommended by manufacturer.
1. Cut units to be at least 50 percent of unit width, with facing
material extended over cut edge to match uncut edge. Scribe *■
acoustical wall panels to fit adjacent work. Butt joints tightly.
ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS 09521 - 4
po NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
KB #96079
rI9
06
1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work,
guarantee opening dimensions and proceed with fabrication of
acoustical wall panels without field measurements. Coordinate wall
construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to
guaranteed dimensions.
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described
below matching products installed, packaged with protective covering for
storage and identified with appropriate labels:
1. Acoustical Wall Panels: Furnish quantity of full size units equal
to 2 .0 percent of the amount installed.
2 . Interactive acoustical diffusers and absorbers: Furnish one of
each type and same configuration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 .1 ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS, GENERAL
A. Fabricate panels to sizes and configurations indicated; attach facing
materials to cores to produce installed panels with visible surfaces
fully covered and free from wrinkles, sags, blisters, seams, adhesive
or other foreign matter.
B. Sound Absorption Performance: Provide acoustical wall panels with
minimum noise reduction coefficients (NRC) indicated as determined by
testing per ASTM C 423 for mounting type specified under individual
product requirements.
C. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard material
is indicated, provide acoustical wall panels faced with manufacturer' s
material complying with the following requirements:
1. Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range
of standard colors, textures, and patterns for products of type
indicated.
D. Spline-Mounted Acoustical Wall Panels with Glass Fiber Board Core:
Manufacturer's standard panel construction consisting of facing material
laminated to core of rigid glass fiber or cementitious fiber board with
a nominal density of 25 lbs. per cu. ft. with long edges kerfed and
rabbeted to receive splines; and complying with the following
requirements:
1. Thickness/NRC: Nominal overall panel thickness of 1 inch/NRC of
0.80 - 0.90 for Type A (#4) mounting.
2 . Facing Material: Manufacturer' s standard flame retardant fabric.
3 . Panel Width: Manufacturer's standard.
4. Panel Height: As indicated, fabricated from 9' -0" or 10-0" high
units.
E. Spline-Mounting Accessories: Manufacturer's standard concealed extruded
aluminum or plastic connecting splines designed and fabricated for screw
attachment to walls, with other moldings and trim for interior and
exterior corners as required. Provide panel manufacturer' s standard
09521 - 3
ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less.
C. Single Source Responsibility for Acoustical Wall Panels: Obtain each
type of acoustical wall panel from a single source with resources to we
provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical
properties without delaying the progress of the Work.
D. Interactive Acoustical Wall Diffusers and Absorbers: Provide acoustical
wall diffusers and absorbers capable of meeting the following acoustical
performance requires when tested in accordance with ASTM E 795 and
mounted in accordance with ASTM C423, 0" airspace:
1. Absorption Coefficient: One-Third Octave Band Center Frequency
(Hz) :
ww
Frequency: 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000
a. Wall Absorbers: .12 .96 1.12 1.07 .93 .72 e�
(4 ' x 4 ' )
b. Wall Diffusers: .18 .18 .13 .10 .12 . 16
(4 ' x 4 ' )
C. Wall Diffusers: .34 .27 .14 .11 . 11 .19 we
(4 ' x 8 ' )
d. Ceiling Diffusers: .49 .16 . 10 .04 .03 .05
(4 ' x 4 ' )
2. Sabines/Unit: One-third Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz) :
Frequency: 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 "
a. Wall Panels: .96 7.7 9.0 8.6 7.4 5.7
(4 ' x 4 ' )
w
b. Wall Diffusers: 2.9 2.9 2 .1 1.6 1.9 2.6
(4 ' x 4 ' )
C. Wall Diffusers: 10.8 8.6 4.6 3 .4 3.6 6.1
(4 ' x 8 ' ) ,
d. Ceiling Diffusers: 7.8 2.6 1.5 0.7 0.5 0.8
(4 ' x 4 ' )
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect acoustical wall panels from excessive moisture in shipment,
storage, and handling. Deliver in unopened bundles and store in a dry !
place with adequate air circulation. Do not deliver material to
building until "wet work" such as concrete and plaster have been
completed and cured to a condition of equilibrium.
.w
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Do not begin installation until spaces to receive acoustical wall panels
have been enclosed and maintained at approximately the same humidity and
temperature conditions as planned for occupancy. Maintain temperature
and humidity as recommended by panel manufacturer.
B. Field Measurements: Check actual wall surfaces by accurate field
measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on final
shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction am
progress to avoid delay of Work.
ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS 09521 - 2
w
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
SECTION 09521 - ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this work. Note also all Addenda.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Spline-mounted acoustical wall panels with glass fiberboard or
low-density mineral fiberboard core.
2 . Interactive acoustical wall diffuser and absorber panels with glass
fiberboard core and fabric or plastic surfacing.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract
pa and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of acoustical wall panel specified.
ON C. Samples for initial selection purposes in 12-inch-square units of each
type of acoustical wall panel required and in each color, texture, and
pattern indicated or selected for facing materials. Include
ON representative samples of installation devices and accessories.
D. Product test reports from and based on tests performed by qualified
independent testing laboratory acceptable to authorities having
Jurisdiction, evidencing that acoustical wall panels comply with
requirements specified for fire performance characteristics and sound
absorption performance.
an E. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of acoustical wall panels
certifying that their products comply with specified requirements.
an 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Testing Laboratory Qualifications: To qualify for acceptance, an
P0 independent testing laboratory must demonstrate to Architect's
satisfaction, based on evaluation of laboratory-submitted criteria
conforming to ASTM E 699, that it has the experience and capability to
conduct satisfactorily the testing indicated without delaying the
progress of the Work.
B. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide acoustical wall panels with
ww surface-burning characteristics as indicated below, as determined by
testing assembled materials composed of facings and backings identical
to those required in this Section, per ASTM E 84, by a testing
organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Flame Spread: Class A, 25 or less.
09521 - 1
ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
evidence of damage.
END OF SECTION 09511
on
No
RM
po
po
yaw
in ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511-9
A.
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA rn #96079
B. Arrange acoustical units and orient directionally patterned units in a
manner shown by reflected ceiling plans.
C. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structural members and as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other
objects within ceiling space that are not part of supporting .�
structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where
required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces
by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.
2 . Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling space am
produces hanger spacings that interfere with the location of hangers
at spacings required to support standard suspension system members,
install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of
�w
trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension
members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance
limits established by referenced standards.
3 . Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying, either directly to *�*
structures or to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices that are
secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not
cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion,
or elevated temperatures. go
4 . Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to
structural members.
5 . Space hangers not more than 4 ' -0" o.c. along each member supported .■
directly from hangers, unless otherwise shown, and provide hangers
not more than 8 inches from ends of each member.
D. Install edge moldings of t
g g type indicated at perimeter of acoustical
ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical units.Set
edge in a bead of acoustical caulk before anchoring.Clean excess caulk.
w
1. Miter corners where intersect or install corner caps.
2 . Provide radiused edge moldings at curved surfaces. Do not kerf
angles exposing panel or voids.
rw
E. Install acoustical panels in coordination with suspension system, with
edges concealed by support of suspension members. Scribe and cut panels
to fit accurately at borders and at penetrations.
1. Install hold-down clips in areas indicated and in areas where
required by governing regulations or for fire-resistance ratings;
space as recommended by panel manufacturer, unless otherwise "®
indicated or required.
2 . For tegular or reveal edge panels: Cut and reveal or rabbet edges of
ceiling tiles at all border areas and exposed surfaces.
3 .4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Deflection of and grid components shall not exceed 1/540 of the span. w
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge
moldings, and suspension members. Comply with manufacturer's instructions
for cleaning and touch-up of minor finish damage. Remove and replace work w
that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511-8
PM
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
G. Hold-Down Clips for Non-Fire-Resistance-Rated Ceilings: For interior
ceilings composed of lay-in panels weighing less than 1 lb per sq. ft. ,
and ceiling designated as Type C-1B, and C-2B, provide hold-down clips
spaced 2 ' -0" O.C. on all cross-tees.
2 .5 NON-FIRE-RESISTANCE-RATED DIRECT-HUNG SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Wide-Face Capped Double-Web Steel Suspension System: Main and
cross-runners roll-formed from prepainted or electrolytic zinc-coated
cold-rolled steel sheet, with prefinished 15/16-inch-wide metal caps on
flanges; other characteristics as follows:
1. Structural Classification: Intermediate-Duty system.
■w 2 . End Condition of Cross-Runners: Override or Butt-edge type, as
stated with Manufacturer.
3. Cap Material and Finish: Galvanized steel sheet painted white.
B. Wide-Face, Aluminum-Capped, Double-Web, Hot Dip Galvanized-Steel
Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from hot-dip
galvanized, cold-rolled steel sheet, with prefinished 15/16" wide aluminum
caps on flanges, other characteristics as follows:
1. Structural Classification: Intermediate-Duty system.
2 . Zinc-Coating: ASTM A525, G60.
3 . Finish: Painted White.
2 .6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
ON A. Concealed Acoustical Sealant: Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning,
nonstaining, nonbleeding, gunnable sealant complying with requirement
specified in Section 07901 "Joint Sealers. "
00
PART 3 EXECUTION
3 .1 EXAMINATION
fm
A. Examine substrates and structural framing to which ceiling system attaches
or abuts, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
specified in this and other sections that affect installation and
anchorage of ceiling system. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
an 3 .2 PREPARATION
A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to
balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid use of
less-than-half-width units at borders, and comply with reflected ceiling
plans.
3 .3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install acoustical ceiling systems to comply with installation
standard referenced below, per manufacturer's instructions and CISCA
"Ceiling Systems Handbook. "
1. Standards for Installation of Ceiling Suspension Systems: Comply
! with ASTM C 636 and ASTM E 580 for areas requiring seismic
restraint.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511-7
.A
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #9607
units of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264
classifications as designated by reference to types, patterns, acoustical
ratings, and light reflectances, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400 (plenum mounting in
which face of test specimen is 15-3/4 inches [400 mm] away from the
test surface) per ASTM E 795.
ww
2 . Colors and Patterns: Provide products to match appearance
characteristics indicated under each product type.
2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL
A. Standard for Metal Suspension Systems: Provide manufacturer's standard
metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and w.
finishes indicated that comply with applicable ASTM C 635 requirements.
B. Components: All main beams and cross tees shall be commercial-quality hot wa
dipped galvanized steel coating as per ASTM A 635. Exposed surfaces
chemically cleansed, capping prefinished galvanized steel in baked
polyester paint. Main Beams and Cross Tees are double-web steel
construction with 15/16" type exposed flange design. Light gauge steel '
Cross Tees shall have rotary stitching to improve column strength and
staked-on end detail allowing easy cross tee removal and remounting.
1. Structural Classification: Intermediate duty.
2. Exposed bottom flange shall be continuous with unbroken roll-formed
cap, made from steel, running the length of the member.
a. Main Beam: web height shall be 1-1/2"
b. 4' Cross Tee: Web height shall be 1-3/8"
c. 2' Cross Tee: Web height shall be 1-3/8"
d. End condition of Cross Runners: override
C. Finishes and Colors: Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied
finish for type of system indicated.
wea
D. Attachment Devices: Size for 5 times design load indicated in ASTM C 635,
Table 1, Direct Hung unless otherwise indicated.
E. Wire for Hangers and Ties: Galvanized carbon steel per ASTM A 641, Class
1, soft temper, prestretched.
1. Gage: Provide wire sized so that stress at 3 times hanger design
load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct-Hung) , will be less than yield a
stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch diameter (12
gage) .
F. Edge Moldings and Trim: Metal of manufacturer's standard moldings for
edges and penetrations that fit type of edge detail and suspension system
indicated.
1. For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge
molding that forms reveal of same depth and width as that formed
between edge of panel and flange at exposed suspension member.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511-6
u�
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
A. Ceiling Panel Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,
provide one of the following:
1. Ceiling Type C-1: 24" x 24" Reveal Edge, Armstrong Fine Fissured
HumiGuard Plus with BioBlock #1732 or USG Radar Clima Plus #2225, UL
Classified minimum NRC .55 and min. CAC 35.
go 2 . Ceiling Type C-1B: 24" x 24" Square Edge, Armstrong Armatuff
HumiGuard Plus with BioBlock #861 or USG Rockface Clima Plus #56380,
UL Classified minimum NRC.55 and CAC 35.
RN
2 . Ceiling Type C-lE: 24" x 24" Beveled Edge, Armstrong Ultima
HumiGuard Plus with BioBlock #1911 or USG Mars Clima Plus #86785A,
w UL Classified min. NRC .70 and min. CAC 35.
4. Ceiling Type C-2: 24" x 48" Square Edge, Armstrong Fine Fissured
HumiGuard Plus with BioBlock #1729 or USG Radar Clima Plus #2145, UL
Classified min. NRC .55 and min. CAC 35.
5. Ceiling Type C-2A: 24" x 48" Square Edge, Armstrong Clean Room VL
HumiGuard Plus with BioBlock #870 or USG Metal Face Clima Plus
#56094, UL Classified min. NRC .10 and CAC 40.
6. Ceiling Type C-2B: 24" x 48" Square Edge, Armstrong Armatuff
WN HumiGuard Plus with BioBlock #860 or USG Rockface Clima Plus #56380,
UL Classified min. NRC .55 and CAC 35.
7 . Ceiling Type C-2C: 24" x 48" Square Edge, Armstrong Ceramaguard
HumiGuard Max with BioBlock #602 or USG Ceramic Clima Plus #56645,
UL Classified min. NRC .55 and CAC 40.
!! 8. Ceiling Type C-2D: 24" x 48" Angled Tegular Edge, Armstrong Fine
Fissured Second Look, HumiGuard Plus with BioBlock #1761 or USG
Radar Clima Plus Illusion 2/24 #2842, UL Classified minimum NRC .55
and min. CAC 35.
9. Ceiling Type C-2E: 24" x 48" Square Edge, Armstrong Optima HumiGuard
Plus with BioBlock #3151 or USG Mars Clima Plus High NRC #86204, UL
40 Classified min. NRC .85 and min. CAC 180.
B. Ceiling Grid Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,
OR provide products by one of the following:
1. Suspension System: Ceiling Type C-2C:
so a. Armstrong Prelude XL 15/16" Aluminum Capped (WA)
b. Chicago Metalic Hot Dipped 260-41-H Aluminum Capped
C. USG Donn ZXLA
no 2 . Suspension System: All other Ceiling Types:
a. Armstrong Prelude XL 15/16" Exposed Tee System,
No b. Chicago Metallic Hot Dipped 200-H Series
C. USG Donn ZXA
2 .3 ACOUSTICAL CEILING UNITS, GENERAL
am
A. Standard for Acoustical Ceiling Units: Provide manufacturers' standard
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511-5
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Space Enclosure: Do not install interior acoustical ceilings until
space is enclosed and weatherproof, wet-work in space is completed and .w
nominally dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient conditions
of temperature and humidity will be continuously maintained at values
near those indicated for final occupancy.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described
below that match products installed, are packaged with protective
covering for storage, and are identified with appropriate labels.
1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units
equal to 2 .0 percent of amount installed.
2. Exposed Suspension System Components: Furnish quantity of each
exposed component equal to 2.0 percent of amount installed.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Acoustical Panel System: Submit a written waranty executed by the
manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replacement of acoustical panels
and/or grids that fails within the warranty period. Failures include,
but are not limited to:
1. Acoustical Panels: Sagging or warping
2. Grid System: Rusting and manufacturing defects
B. Warranty period for acoustical panels is ten (10) years from the date
of substantial completion.
C. Warranty period for acoustical grid system is ten (10) years from the go
date of substantial completion.
D. Warranty period for acoustical panels and grid systems supplied by one M
source manufacturer is fifteen (15) years from the date of substantial
completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2 .1 MANUFACTURERS
on
A. Ceiling Panel Products: Subject to compliance with the requirements,
provide products by one of the following;
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. an
2. USG Interiors
3 . Celotex
B. Ceiling Grid Products: Subject to compliance with the requirements, on
provide products by one of the following;
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. ow
2. USG Interiors
3. Chicago Metallic Corp.
2.2 MATERIALES an
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511-4
Am
go
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #9 6 0 7 9
on
sample sets showing full range of variations expected.
a. 6-inch-square samples of each acoustical panel type, pattern,
on and color.
b. Set of 12-inch-long samples of exposed suspension system
members, including moldings, for each color and system type
required.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer
who has successfully completed acoustical ceilings similar in material,
design, and extent to those indicated for Project.
B. Fire-Performance Characteristics: Provide acoustical ceilings that are
identical to those tested for the following fire-performance
characteristics, per ASTM test method indicated below, by UL or other
go testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction. Identify acoustical ceiling components with appropriate
markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization.
fm 1. Surface Burning Characteristics: As follows, tested per ASTM E 84
and complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A products.
40 a. Flame Spread: 25 or less.
b. Smoke Developed: 50 or less.
on C. Single-Source Responsibility for Ceiling Units: Obtain each type of
acoustical ceiling unit from a single source with resources to provide
products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties
without delaying progress of the Work.
D. Single-Source Responsibility for Suspension System: Obtain each type
of suspension system from a single source with resources to provide
products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties
without delaying progress of the Work.
1. Obtain suspension system from same manufacturer that produces
40 acoustical ceiling units.
E. Coordination of Work: Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical
ceiling units and suspension system components with other construction
go that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light
fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system components.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver acoustical ceiling units to project site in original, unopened
packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be
protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface
contamination, and other causes.
B. Before installing acoustical ceiling units, permit them to reach room
temperature and a stabilized moisture content.
C. Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or
40 damaging units in any way.Replace any damaged units.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511-3
no
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB # 6079
1.3 SUMMARY
w
A. This Section includes
1. acoustical panel ceilings units 40
2 . Exposed grid suspension systems.
3. Wire hangars, fasteners, main runners, cross tees, wall angle
moldings, hold down clips and accessories.
an
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that
relate to this section:
ma
1. Section 15300 for sprinkler heads in acoustical ceilings.
2. Section 15500 for grilles, registers, and diffusers in acoustical
ceilings.
3. Section 16100 for lighting fixtures in acoustical ceilings, some
of which may require additional or larger size wire for proper
support.
4. Section 09255 "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for gypsum board soffits. *�*
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ASTM A 366 "Standard Specification for Steel, Carbon Cold-Rolled Sheet, s
Commercial Quality"
B. ASTM A 641 "Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon so
Steel Wire"
C. ASTM C 423 "Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the
Reverberation Room Method" .
D. ASTM C 635 "Standard Specification for Metal Suspension Systems for
Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings" s�
E. ASTM C 636 "Recommended Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling
Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels"
F. ASTM E 84 "Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials"
G. ASTM E 1414 "Standard Test Method for Airborne Sound Attenuation Between am
Rooms Sharing a Common Ceiling Plenum"
H. ASTM E1111 "Standard Test Method for Measuring the Interzone Attenuation
of Ceiling Systems"
I. ASTM E 1264 "Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products"
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract
and Division 1 Specification Sections.
1. Product data for each type of product specified.
2. Samples for verification purposes of each type of exposed finish .s.
required, prepared on samples of size indicated below and of same
thickness and material indicated for final unit of Work. Where
finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511-2
ow
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
ON MA KB #96079
w
SECTION 09511 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 TIME, MANNER AND REQUIREMENTS FOR FILING SUB-BIDS
w A. Sub-Bids shall be submitted in accordance with the provisions of General
Laws, Chapter 149, Section 44A to 44I, inclusive, as amended.
B. Sub-Bids for work under this Section shall be received at the Council
Chambers at Town Hall, 210 Main Street, Northampton, MA 01060, until
2:00 p.m. local time on February 9, 1999, at which time all filed Sub-
Bids shall be opened, read aloud, and duly recorded.
so C. Sub-Bids shall be submitted on forms identical to those contained in
Bidding Requirements: Bid Form for Sub-Bidder. The Bid Forms attached
hereto are for information only and shall not be detached, filled in,
or executed. All Sub-Bids shall be submitted on the FORM FOR SUB-BID
furnished by the Awarding Authority as required by Section 44G of
Chapter 149 of the General Laws, as amended. Sub-Bids Forms shall be
w completely filled in and all Sub-Bids which are incomplete, conditional,
obscure, or which contain any additions not called for will be rejected.
D. Sub-Bids filed with the Awarding Authority shall be accompanied by a Bid
Deposit in the form of a certified check or a treasurer's or cashier' s
check issued by a responsible bank or trust company, payable to the City
of Northampton. A bid bond shall be:
1. On a form satisfactory to the Awarding Authority.
2. With a surety company qualified to do business in the Commonwealth
and satisfactory to the Awarding Authority.
on 3 . Conditioned upon the faithful performance by the principal of the
agreements contained in the Bid. The amount of such bid deposit
shall be five percent (5%) of the value of the Bid.
4w E. Sub-Bids for work under this Section shall be for the complete work
required as specified and as shown on the drawings.
w F. Sub-Bidders are directed to the Instructions to Bidders, and to the
requirements that all bidders visit the site to determine the scope of
work required under this Section.
am G. Sub-Bidders must comply with all provisions of Division 1, General
Requirements, in the same manner as the General Contractor.
w H. Work to be done under this Filed Sub-Bid is included in the Contract
Documents as listed in LOD-1 through LOD-5 (List of Drawings) .
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
on A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
OR General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this work. Note also all Addenda.
ON
on ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09511-1
OR
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB # 6079
UPI
B. Replace damaged stone facing with new units to match approved samples
without evidence of replacement.
C. Clean interior stone facing after setting, and curing is complete. Use
procedures recommended by stone fabricator for types of application.
w 3 .5 PROTECTION
A. Protect stone surfaces, edges, and corners from construction damage.
Use securely fastened untreated wood, plywood, or heavy cardboard to
prevent damage.
B. Before inspection for Substantial Completion, remove protective covering
um and clean surfaces using procedures, products, and materials recommended
by stone producer.
PW END OF SECTION 09451
OW
on
�r
me
INTERIOR STONE FACING 09451 - 5
no
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB # 6079
a. Face Sizes: As indicated on Drawings and final shop drawings. wA
b. Nominal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.
C. Finish exposed faces and edges of stones to comply with requirements so
indicated for finish under each type and application of stone and to
match approved samples and field-constructed mockup.
PART 3 - EXECUTION on
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces to receive stone facing and conditions where stone im
facing will be installed. Review with the Installer present for
compliance with requirements for tolerances and conditions affecting
installation performance. Report in writing conditions not complying go
with requirements. Do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3 .2 PREPARATION
we
A. Advise Installers of adjoining and related work about specific
requirements for placement of inserts, reglets, and similar items that W
will be used by stone facing Installer for anchoring, supporting, and
setting stone units. Furnish Installers of related work with drawings
or templates showing locations of these items.
B. Clean stone surfaces prior to setting to remove soil, stains, and
foreign materials. Clean stones by thoroughly scrubbing stones with
fiber brushes followed by a thorough drenching with clear water. Use
only mild cleaning compounds that contain no caustic or harsh fillers
or abrasives.
3 .3 SETTING STONE, GENERAL "
A. Execute stone facing by skilled mechanics at Project site to set stone
and complete field cutting, if required, as stones are set. .w
1. Use power saws to cut stones. Produce exposed edges that are cut
straight and true.
B. Set stones to comply with requirements indicated on Drawings and final
shop drawings. Install ties, anchors, supports, fasteners, and related
attachments indicated and necessary to secure stone facing in place. we
Shim and adjust to set stones accurately with uniform joints of widths
indicated and with stone edges and faces aligned according to
established lines and construction tolerances.
so
C. Set window stools level in a full bed of water-cleanable epoxy adhesive.
3 .4 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND SEALING
■w
A. Remove stone facing with the following defects:
1. Broken, chipped, stained, or otherwise damaged stones.
2. Defective joints.
3 . Stones and joints not matching approved samples and
field-constructed mockup.
4. Stone facin g not complying p ying with requirements indicated.
INTERIOR STONE FACING 09451 - 4
ww
!0
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 .1 STONE FACING, GENERAL
A. Comply with referenced standards and product requirements indicated and
applicable to each stone type required.
B. Provide matched blocks from a single quarry for each type, variety,
color, and quality of stone required.
1. Extract blocks from a single bed of quarry stratum reserved for
this Project.
2 .2 BLUESTONE
A. Bluestone Dimension Stone Standard: ASTM C 615.
B. Finish of Bluestone Stools: As follows:
1. Polished.
C. Bluestone Color and Grain: Blue-grey with grain of type and from source
indicated.
D. Available Types and Sources: Subject to compliance with requirements,
bluestone that may be incorporated in this Project include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1. Pennsylvania bluestone quarried by Connecticut Stone Supplies,
Milford, CT.
2 .3 STONE ACCESSORIES
A. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Adhesive: ANSI A118 .3 .
B. Cleaner: Provide stone cleaners specifically formulated for stone
types, finishes, and applications indicated as recommended by stone
producer. Do not use cleaning agents containing acid or cleaning
40 compounds and solutions containing caustic or harsh fillers, except
where expressed by written approval from stone producer for stone type
condition.
00 2.4 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate interior stone facing in sizes and shapes required
to comply with requirements indicated, including details on Drawings and
final shop drawings.
1. Bluestone: As recommended by National Building Granite Quarries
Association, Inc. (NBGQA) in "Specifications for Architectural
Granite. "
VA B. Cut stones to produce units of thickness, size, and shape indicated or
required and within fabrication tolerances recommended by applicable
stone association or stone source, for faces, edges, beds, and backs.
1. Sizes: As follows:
INTERIOR STONE FACING 09451 - 3
sm
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in supplying roducts .
P
similar to those indicated for this Project with a record of successful
in-service performance.
■s
B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has
completed interior stone facing installations that are similar in the
material, design, and extent indicated for this Project and that have
performed successfully. w�
C. Single-Source Responsibility for Stone: Obtain each color, grade,
finish, type, and variety of stone from a single source with resources ,
to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical
properties, including capacity to cut and finish material without
delaying the progress of the stone installation.
■e,
D. Single-Source Responsibility for Setting Materials: Obtain adhesives
from one manufacturer and from one source.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.
A. Comply with fabricator's instructions and recommendations for delivery,
storage, and handling requirements. am
B. Deliver materials to Project site in an undamaged condition.
C. Store and handle stone and related materials to prevent deterioration OR
or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion,
breakage, chipping, or cracking.
an
1. Do not use pinch or wrecking bars to move stone units.
2 . Lift stones with wide belt-type slings where possible. Do not use
wire rope or ropes containing tar or other stain-causing on
substances. Use cushion-protected wood rollers and lifting devices
when required to move stone.
3 . Store stones on protected wood skids or pallets, covered with
nonstaining, water-protective membrane. Place skids and stack Mw
stones to distribute weight evenly and to prevent stones from
breaking or cracking.
4 . Cover and protect stones on wood skids or pallets, covered with
nonstaining, water-protective membrane. Allow air to circulate am
around stones.
5 . Store cementitious materials off ground, under cover, and in a dry
location.
6. Store aggregate materials covered and in a dry location. no
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
am
A. Do not set stone when air temperature or material temperature is below
50 deg F.
B. Maintain minimum ambient temperatures of 50 deg F during installation
and for 7 days after completion, unless higher temperatures are required
by fabricator or supplier instructions.
Am
1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Sequence stone facing installation with adjoining and related work to
minimize damage and soiling during construction. ■w
INTERIOR STONE FACING 09451 - 2
a�
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
KB #96079
NORTHAMPTON, 14A
SECTION 09451 - INTERIOR STONE FACING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this work. Note also all Addenda.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes interior stone window stools, related setting
materials, and accessories.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that
relate to this Section:
1. Section 06105 "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for installing wood
blocking.
Assemblies" for installing gypsum board
2 . Section 09255 "Gypsum Board
on metal framing.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Dimension interior stone facing is fabricated from natural stone to
produce nongauged units 3/4 inch thick and thicker and generally no
greater than 2 inches thick.
} 1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the
Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data: As follows:
1. Stone type.
2 . Setting, pointing, and grouting materials.
3 . Sealants.
4 . Cleaning products.
C. Maintenance data to include in the Maintenance Manual specified in
Division 1 Section "Project Closeout. "
D. Samples for each color, grade, finish, type, and variety of stone
consisting of 6-inch-square units. Include a minimum of three units in
each set showing the full range of visual characteristics to be expected
in the completed Work.
E. Shop drawings indicating cut sizes, dimensions, sections, and profiles
of stone units, and arrangement and provisions for jointing, supporting,
anchoring, and attaching stone facing. Show details of connection,
jointing, and reception of related work.
90 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
09451 - 1
40 INTERIOR STONE FACING
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
days after grouting is completed.
D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral
cleaner from tile surfaces. Am
END OF SECTION 09300
so
�s
+BAs
asr
a�
TILE 09300 - 10
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
40
B. Paver Tile and Quarry Tile: Install tile to comply with requirements
indicated below for setting-bed method, TCA installation method related
to types of subfloor construction, and grout types:
ow
1. Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A108.5.
2 . Concrete Subfloor, Interior: TCA F115 (with epoxy grout) .
No 3. Grout: Chemical-resistant epoxy.
C. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds at locations indicated; set
in same type of setting bed as abutting field tile unless otherwise
indicated.
1. Set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar for locations where
w mortar bed would otherwise be exposed above adjacent nontile floor
finish.
3 .5 WALL TILE INSTALLATION METHODS
40
A. Install types of tile designated for wall application to comply with
requirements indicated below for setting-bed methods, TCA installation
go methods related to subsurface wall conditions, and grout types:
1. Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A108.1.
a. Masonry, Interior Showers: TCA221, (bonded) .
b. Bond Coat: Latex-portland cement mortar on cured mortar bed,
ANSI A108.5.
C. Grout: Epoxy.
3 .6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
"a A. Cleaning: Upon completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic
the surfaces so they are free of foreign matter.
1. Remove latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as
on possible.
2 . Unglazed tile may be cleaned with acid solutions only when
permitted by tile and grout manufacturer's printed instructions,
40 but no sooner than 14 days after installation. Protect metal
surfaces, cast iron, and vitreous plumbing fixtures from effects
of acid cleaning. Flush surface with clean water before and after
cleaning.
so
B. Finished Tile Work: Leave finished installation clean and free of
cracked, chipped, broken, unbonded, and otherwise defective tile work.
as C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable
to manufacturer and installer that ensures that tile is without damage
or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
on
1. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply a protective coat of
neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors.
Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy
covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage,
and wear.
2 . Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least 7
we
TILE 09300 - 9
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON. MA KB #96079
an
D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling
of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of
tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned
joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and ak
other penetrations so that plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.
E. Jointing Pattern: Unless otherwise shown, lay tile in grid pattern.
Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are w
same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions
in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting.
Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise shown. as
1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same
width as joints within tile sheets so that extent of each sheet is
not apparent in finished work.
F. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled
joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where a
indicated during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and
tile. Do not saw cut joints after installation of tiles.
1. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete
substrates.
2 . Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements of
Section 07610 "Joint Sealers. " w
G. Grout tile to comply with the requirements of the following installation
standards:
a0
1. For chemical-resistant epoxy grouts, comply with ANSI A108.6.
3.4 FLOOR INSTALLATION METHODS aw
A. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: Install tile to comply with requirements indicated
below for setting bed methods, TCA installation methods related to types
of subfloor construction, and grout types:
1. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A108.5
a. Bond Coat: Latex-portland cement mortar on cured bed, ANSI so
A108.5.
b. Slab-on-Grade Concrete Subfloors, Interior: TCA F112 (bonded)
for pitched and level mortar beds. as
C. Elevated Concrete Subfloors, Interior, Waterproofing Membrane:
TCA F121 for pitched and level mortar beds.
d. Slab-on-Grade Concrete Subfloors, at showers: TCA F121,B414,
for pitched mortar beds.
e. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A108.5.
f. Existing, Elevated and Slab-on-Grade Concrete Subfloors,
Exterior: TCA F102, (bonded) .
g. Grout: Epoxy grout, ANSI A118.3.
2 . Organic Adhesive: ANSI A108.4.
a�
a. Concrete Subfloors, Interior: TCA F115.
b. Grout: Epoxy.
TILE 09300 - 8
a
on
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
40
B. Chemical Resistant Epoxy Floor Grout: ANSI A118.3, color as indicated.
Provide product capable of resisting continuous and intermittent
exposure to temperatures of up to 140 degrees F (60 degrees C) and 212
degrees F (100 degrees C) , respectively, as certified by mortar
manufacturer for intended use.
2.7 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT
A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with requirements of referenced
standards and manufacturers including those for accurate proportioning
of materials, water, or additive content; type of mixing equipment,
selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other
procedures needed to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with
optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and areas where tile will be installed, with
Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile.
1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, and
free from oil or waxy films and curing compounds.
2 . Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames,
electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located
in or behind tile has been completed before installing tile.
B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected.
3 .2 PREPARATION
A. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the ranges
selected during sample submittals, verify that tile has been blended in
factory and packaged accordingly so that tile units taken from one
40 package show the same range in colors as those taken from other packages
and match approved samples. If not factory blended, either return to
manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.
OR 3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. ANSI Tile Installation Standard: Comply with parts of ANSI 108 series
of tile installation standards included under "American National
Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply
to type of setting and grouting materials and methods indicated.
B. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile
Installation"; comply with TCA installation methods indicated.
C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and
fixtures to form a complete covering without interruptions except as
otherwise shown. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and
corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.
TILE 09300 - 7
a"
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON KA KB #96079
2.4 STONE THRESHOLDS
A. General: Provide stone that is uniform in color and finish, fabricated
to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition .
between tile surfaces and adjoining finished floor surfaces.
B. Marble Thresholds: Provide marble thresholds complying with ASTM C 503
requirements for exterior use and for abrasion resistance where exposed 1A°
to foot traffic, a minimum hardness of 10 per ASTM C 241.
1. Provide white, honed marble complying with MIA Group "A" ,
requirements for soundness.
2.5 SETTING MATERIALS
so
A. Portland Cement Mortar Installation Materials: Provide materials
complying with ANSI A108.5 as specified below.
w
1. Cleavage Membrane: Asphalt felt, ASTM D226, Type I (No. 15) , or
polyethylene sheeting ASTM D4397, 4. 0 mils thick.
2 . Reinforcing Wire Fabric: Galvanized welded wire fabric, 2 inches
by 2 inches - WO.3 by WO.3 (16 ASW gage or 0.0625 inch diameter) ; am
comply with ASTM A 185 and ASTM A 82 except for minimum wire size.
B. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.4, composition as follows: sm
1. Prepackaged dry mortar mix composed of portland cement, graded
aggregate, and the following dry polymer additive in the form of
a reemulsifiable powder to which only water is added at job site. �!+
a. Dry Polymer Additive: Manufacturer's standard.
2 . Latex additive (water emulsion) of type described below, serving
as replacement for part or all of gauging water, combined at job
site with prepackaged dry mortar mix supplied or specified by latex
additive manufacturer. .w
a. Latex Type: Manufacturer's standard.
2.6 GROUTING MATERIALS
A. Latex-Portland Cement Wall Grout: ANSI A118.6, color as indicated,
composition as follows: am
1. Prepackaged dry grout mix composed of portland cement, graded
aggregate, and the following dry polymer additive in the form of
a reemulsifiable powder to which only water is added at job site. ''w`
a. Dry Polymer Additive: Polyvinyl acetate or ethylene vinyl
acetate. OR
2 . Latex additive (water emulsion) serving as replacement for part or
all of gauging water, added at job site with dry grout mixture,
with type of latex and dry grout mix as follows: "'"
a. Latex Type: Manufacturer's standard.
■o
TILE 09300 - 6
mo
P0
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
pa
2 .3 TILE PRODUCTS
A. Unglazed Ceramic Mosaic Floor Tile: Provide factory-mounted flat tile
complying with the following requirements:
1. Composition: As indicated.
� 2 . Nominal Facial Dimensions: As indicated.
3 . Nominal Thickness: As indicated.
4. Face: As indicated.
5. Grade/Style: Dal-Tile, Keystones, 2" x 2"
4-M 6. Floor Pattern: See Floor Pattern Detail.
B. Ceramic Mosaic Wall Tile: Provide factory-mounted flat tile complying
with the following requirements:
1. Composition: As indicated.
2. Nominal Facial Dimensions: As indicated.
3 . Nominal Thickness: As indicated.
4. Face: As indicated.
5. Wall Border Pattern: 14" high pattern as shown on pattern detail
drawing.
6. Grade / Style: Dal-Tile, Keystones, 2" x 211 .
C. Unglazed Paver Tile(Porcelain Tile) : Provide flat tile complying with
the following requirements:
1. Composition: Porcelain.
2 . Nominal Facial Dimensions: 16 inches by 16 inches.
3 . Nominal Thickness: 5/16 inch.
4. Face: Pattern of design indicated, with square or cushion edges.
5 . For latex-portland cement mortared and grouted paver tile, precoat
ewr with temporary protective coating.
6. Grade/Style: Crossville Ceramics
a. Field Color: Siena Series Unpolished
b. Accent Color No. 1: Cross Colors Unpolished
C. Accent Color No. 2 : Cross Colors Unpolished
7. Pattern as indicated on floor finish plan.
so D. Trim Units: Provide tile trim units to match characteristics of
adjoining flat tile and to comply with following requirements:
1. Size: As indicated, coordinated with sizes and coursing of
adjoining flat tile where applicable.
2 . Shapes: As follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes:
a. Base for Portland Cement Mortar Installations: Cove Integral.
b. External Corners for Portland Cement Mortar Installations:
Bullnose shape with a radius of at least 3/4 inch unless
otherwise indicated.
C. Base for porcelain tile 6" High x 8" Wide cove base by
Crossville Ceramics Provide all other matching trim shapes as
required for complete installation.
No
TILE 09300 - 5
4W
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
aw
C. United States Ceramic Tile Co.
2 . Glazed Ceramic Mosaic Tile:
wee
a. American Olean Tile Co. , Inc.
b. Dal-Tile Corp.
C. United States Ceramic Tile Co.
3 . Unglazed Paver Tile (Porcelain Tile) :
a. Crossville Ceramics. ■«
b. American Olean Tile Co. , Inc.
C. Granitifiandre.
4. Glazed Paver Tile: w
a. Crossville Ceramics.
b. American Olean Tile Co. , Inc. +
C. Granitifiandre.
5. Chemical Resistant, Water-Cleanable Tile Grouting Epoxy:
a. Mapei Corp.
b. American Olean Tile Co. , Inc.
C. Laticrete International, Inc. so
2 .2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. ANSI Standard for Ceramic Tile: Comply with ANSI A137.1 "American 1w
National Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile" for types,
compositions, and grades of tile indicated.
1. Furnish tile complying with "Standard Grade" requirements unless am
otherwise indicated.
B. ANSI Standard for Tile Installation Materials: Comply with ANSI
standard referenced with products and materials indicated for setting so
and grouting.
C. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products am
are indicated for tile, grout, and other products requiring selection
of colors, surface textures, patterns, and other appearance
characteristics, provide specific products or materials complying with
the following requirements: an
1. Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range
of standard colors, textures, and patterns for products of type
indicated. a
2. Provide tile trim and accessories that match color and finish of
adjoining flat tile unless otherwise noted.
D. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within the
ranges selected during sample submittals, blend tile in factory and
package accordingly so that tile units taken from one package show the
same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match
approved samples.
TILE 09300 - 4
eis
OR
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
on
ingredients of a uniform quality from one manufacturer for each
cementitious and admixture component and from one source or producer for
each aggregate.
C. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has
successfully completed tile installations similar in material, design,
and extent to that indicated for Project.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals
unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirement
of ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages.
B. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water, freezing, foreign
matter, and other causes.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain environmental conditions and protect work during and after
installation to comply with referenced standards and manufacturer's
printed recommendations.
B. Vent temporary heaters to exterior to prevent damage to tile work from
? carbon dioxide buildup.
C. Maintain temperatures at 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more in tiled areas
during installation and for 7 days after completion, unless higher
temperatures are required by referenced installation standard or
manufacturer's instructions.
4� 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials that match
products installed as described below, packaged with protective covering
for storage and identified with labels clearly describing contents.
1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to
3 percent of amount installed, for each type, composition, color,
pattern, and size.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 .1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
!! B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following:
1. Unglazed Ceramic Mosaic Tile:
a. American Olean Tile Co. , Inc.
b. Dal-Tile Corp.
aw
TILE 09300 - 3
.w
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
1.3 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
+ww
1. Unglazed ceramic mosaic tile.
2. Glazed ceramic mosaic tile.
3. Unglazed paver tile (porcelain tile) .
4. Glazed paver tile (porcelain tile) .
5. Stone thresholds.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that
relate to this Section:
1. Section 02070 "Selective Demolition" for removal of existing tile.
2. Section 03300, "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for monolithic slab w
finishes specified for tile substrates.
3 . Section 07901 "Joint Sealers" for sealing of expansion,
contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile surfaces. +
4 . Section 09255 "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for water resistant gypsum
wall board systems.
1.4 SUBMITTALS so
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract
and Division 1 Specification Sections. w®
B. Product data for each type of product specified.
C. Shop drawings indicating tile patterns and locations and widths of ON
expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates
and finished tile surfaces.
1. Locate precisely each joint and crack in tile substrates by
measuring, record measurements on shop drawings, and coordinate
them with tile joint locations, in consultation with Architect.
D. Samples for verification purposes of each item listed below, prepared
on samples of size and construction indicated, products involve color
and texture variations, in sets showing full range of variations so
expected.
1. Each type and composition of tile and for each color and texture
required, at least 12 inches square, mounted on plywood or +
hardboard backing and grouted.
2. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color
required.
3 . Metal dividers in 6-inch lengths. "
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
we
A. Single-Source Responsibility for Tile: Obtain each color, grade,
finish, type, composition, and variety of tile from a single source with
resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and
physical properties without delaying progress of the Work.
B. Single-Source Responsibility for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain
w
TILE 09300 - 2
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON. MA KB #96079
OR
SECTION 09300 - TILE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 TIME, MANNER AND REQUIREMENTS FOR FILING SUB-BIDS
A. Sub-Bids shall be submitted in accordance with the provisions of General
Laws, Chapter 149, Section 44A to 44I, inclusive, as amended.
B. Sub-Bids for work under this Section shall be received at the Council
Chambers at Town Hall, 210 Main Street, Northampton, MA 01060, until
2:00 p.m. local time on February 9, 1999, at which time all filed Sub-
Bids shall be opened, read aloud, and duly recorded.
C. Sub-Bids shall be submitted on forms identical to those contained in
Bidding Requirements: Bid Form for Sub-Bidder. The Bid Forms attached
hereto are for information only and shall not be detached, filled in,
or executed. All Sub-Bids shall be submitted on the FORM FOR SUB-BID
furnished by the Awarding Authority as required by Section 44G of
Chapter 149 of the General Laws, as amended. Sub-Bids Forms shall be
completely filled in and all Sub-Bids which are incomplete, conditional,
obscure, or which contain any additions not called for will be rejected.
D. Sub-Bids filed with the Awarding Authority shall be accompanied by a Bid
Deposit in the form of a certified check or a treasurer's or cashier's
check issued by a responsible bank or trust company, payable to the City
of Northampton. A bid bond shall be:
1. On a form satisfactory to the Awarding Authority.
2 . With a surety company qualified to do business in the Commonwealth
and satisfactory to the Awarding Authority.
r 3 . Conditioned upon the faithful performance by the principal of the
agreements contained in the Bid. The amount of such bid deposit
shall be five percent (5%) of the value of the Bid.
E. Sub-Bids for work under this Section shall be for the complete work
required as specified and as shown on the drawings.
F. Sub-Bidders are directed to the Instructions to Bidders, and to the
requirements that all bidders visit the site to determine the scope of
work required under this Section.
G. Sub-Bidders must comply with all provisions of Division 1, General
Requirements, in the same manner as the General Contractor.
H. Work to be done under this Filed Sub-Bid is included in the Contract
Documents as listed in LOD-1 through LOD-5 (List of Drawings) .
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this work. Note also all Addenda.
00
TILE 09300 - 1
Am
r.
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
rw
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates areas and conditions with Installer present for
compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, installation
tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of
glass-reinforced gypsum units. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory ww
conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION w
A. Install glass-reinforced gypsum units plumb, level, true, and aligned
with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where required for
alignment.
B. Erection Tolerances: As follows:
1. Plane Alignment (Panel to Panel) : 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) .
2. Variation from Plumb: Plus or minus 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) per 10 feet
(3 m) .
3 . Variation from Straightness: Plus or minus 1/4 inch (6.3 mm) per
25 feet (7.6 m) .
4 . Assembly Deflection: Not greater than the length of the assembly
divided by 240.
S. Joint Alignment: Not more than 1/8 inch (3 .2 mm) .
6. Joint Width: Not more than 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) .
C. Predrill fastener holes in ornamentation. Clean fastener holes,
removing dirt and oil.
D. Screw or nail fasteners in place by hand. Do not use pneumatic staple
guns. Countersink flathead screws.
E. Fasteners as required to comply with dimensional tolerances and not less
than 5/16 inch (7.9 mm) from edge and end. +*�
F. Patch fastener holes with bedding compound applied flush with finish
face. Sand patch smooth and level.
G. Attach pieces at joints with adhesive, and band or brace together until
adhesive is cured. Cure adhesive according to ornamentation
manufacturer's printed instructions. +
H. Joint Finishing: Comply with ASTM C 840. Provide smooth and contiguous
surface.
END OF SECTION 09280
so
GLASS-REINFORCED GYPSUM FABRICATIONS 09280 - 4
Oft
on
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
A. Gypsum Material: Provide alpha-based, calcined gypsum produced from
materials complying with ASTM C 22.
B. Glass Fibers: Comply with ASTM D 578 "E" glass type.
C. Glass-Reinforced Gypsum Units: Glass fiber shall be 5 to 6 percent by
4W weight of gypsum and glass mixture. Provide units identical to those
tested for the following performance characteristics, per test method
indicated below, by testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Test Method: ASTM D 256.
a. Impact Resistance: Not less than 8 ft. lb./sq. in. (1.68
J/sq. cm) .
2. Test Method: ASTM C 109.
a. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4000 psi (27.58 MPa) .
b. Modulus of Elasticity: Not less than 2, 100, 000 psi (10 000
MPa) .
3 . Test Method: ASTM D 696.
a. Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion: Not greater than
0.0000075 inch/inch/deg F (0.00000417 m/m/deg C) .
A" 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Embedded or Inserted Hardware: Complying with ASTM A 641, and
integrated into the members without visibility on the finish face.
Ok
B. Fasteners: Self-tapping gypsum wallboard screws.
C. Adhesives: As recommended in manufacturer's printed instructions.
2 .4 FABRICATION
#ft A. Fabricate units as large as possible to minimize joints.
B. Fabricate units with smooth finished surfaces. Repair hollows, voids,
scratches, and finish surface imperfections.
on
C. Dimensional Tolerances of Units: As follows:
1. Factory-Finished Edge Straightness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6
mm) .
2 . Joint Edge: Plus or minus 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) .
3 . Plane Surface Straightness: Plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 .2 mm) .
4. Overall Assembled Length and Width: Plus or minus 1/8 inch (3.2
mm) per 10 feet (3 m) .
5. Chords, Radiuses, and Diameters: Plus or minus 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) .
6. Squareness: Not more than 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) difference between
diagonals in 16 sq. ft. (1.5 sq. m) .
7. Thickness: Plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 .2 mm) .
GLASS-REINFORCED GYPSUM FABRICATIONS 09280 - 3
so
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information so
specified.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE ewe
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has
completed glass-reinforced gypsum installations similar in material, on
design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and with a
construction record of successful in-service performance.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide glass-reinforced gypsum so
units with the following surface-burning characteristics as determined
by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 by UL.
1. Flame Spread: 25 or less.
2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING ,
A. Deliver glass-reinforced gypsum units in factory-wrapped crates,
packaged to keep units dry and free of moisture and dust.
B. Store glass-reinforced gypsum units at Project site to prevent cracking,
distortion, warping, staining, or other physical damage.
C. Comply with manufacturer' s recommendations for storing and handling
units.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements before
fabricating glass-reinforced gypsum units and show recorded measurements
on shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction
progress to avoid delaying the Work.
B. Space Enclosure and Environmental Limitations: Do not install
glass-reinforced gypsum units until space is enclosed and weatherproof,
and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are and will be
continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final Au
occupancy.
1. Acclimatize glass-reinforced gypsum units by removing packaging and
storing in the installation space not less than 48 hours before
installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
wee
2 .1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide as
products by one of the following:
1. Decoform
2. Plastrglas. ""
2 .2 MATERIALS
we
GLASS-REINFORCED GYPSUM FABRICATIONS 09280 - 2
0a
40
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
40
SECTION 09280 - GLASS-REINFORCED GYPSUM FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this work. Note also all Addenda.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes preformed products for interior use, fabricated
in glass-reinforced gypsum.
40 B. Related Sections : The following Sections contain requirements that
relate to this Section:
09 1. Section 05500 "Metal Fabrications" for framing and furring for
items requiring anchorage.
2 . Section 06105 "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for blocking, nailers, and
shims for items requiring anchorage.
1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Fabricate and install glass-reinforced gypsum units to withstand,
without failure or cracking, loads from gravity and structural movement,
including thermally induced movement, and to resist other conditions of
in-service use that the building will experience.
on
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions
40 of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of product specified.
so C. Shop drawings showing thickness, finish, ornamentation, tolerances, and
anchorage details. Indicate attachment methods, imbedded supports,
reinforcement, fabrication, joint treatments, supports and suspension
systems.
D. Samples for verifying glass-reinforced gypsum units. Show the full
range of variations in detail expected.
1. Glass-Reinforced Gypsum Units: 1-foot long section with finished
joint, typical of the units specified.
00
E. Installer certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that Installers
comply with requirements under "Quality Assurance" Article.
OR F. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality
Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience.
Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses,
GLASS-REINFORCED GYPSUM FABRICATIONS 09280 - 1
40
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
heads, and accessories. Touch up and sand between coats and after last
coat as needed to produce a surface free of visual defects and ready for
decoration. Use the following joint compound combination:
1. Embedding and First Coat: Ready-mixed, drying-type, all-purpose
or taping compound.
2 . Fill (Second) Coat: Ready-mixed, drying-type, all-purpose or
topping compound.
3 . Finish (Third) Coat: Ready-mixed, drying-type, all-purpose or
topping compound.
F. Where level 5 gypsum board finish is indicated, apply joint compound
combination specified for level 4 plus a thin, uniform skim coat of
40 joint compound over entire surface. Use joint compound specified for
the finish (third coat) or a product specially formulated for this
purpose and acceptable to gypsum board manufacturer. Produce surfaces
free of tool marks and ridges ready for decoration of type indicated.
G. Where level 1 gypsum board finish is indicated, apply joint compound
specified for embedding coat.
H. Finish fiber reinforced gypsum panel forming base for ceramic tile to
comply with ASTM C 840 and board manufacturer's directions for treatment
of joints behind tile.
3 .13 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Promptly remove any residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner suitable
to Installer, that ensures gypsum board assemblies remain without damage
amt or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
C. Protect gypsum sheathing that will be left exposed to weather for more
than one month as follows:
1. Protect cutouts, corners, and joints in the sheathing by filling
with a flexible sealant or by applying sheathing tape recommended
by sheathing manufacturer at the time sheathing is applied.
END OF SECTION 09255
�r
an
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 17
U
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
w
or semiexposed. Provide edge trim type with face flange formed to
receive joint compound except where other types are indicated.
1. Install LC-bead where gypsum panels are tightly abutted to other
construction and back flange can be attached to framing or
supporting substrate.
2. Install U-bead where indicated.
3 . Install reveal channels where indicated.
D. Install control joints at locations indicated, and where not indicated
according to ASTM C 840, and in locations approved by Architect for
visual effect.
3 .10 INSTALLATION OF ACCESS DOORS
A. Install access doors furnished by Divisions 15 and 16.
3 .11 INSTALLATION OF GYPSUM SHEATHING
A. General: Fasten gypsum sheathing to exterior face of exterior stud wall
framing.
w
B. Install 4-foot by 8-foot or longer sheathing horizontally with long
edges at right angles to studs. Abut ends of boards over centers of
studs and stagger end joints of adjacent boards not less than one stud ++*
spacing, two where possible.
C. Fasten sheathing to studs with 1" long type S12 corrosion resistant
fasteners, spaced 3/8" from ends and 8" o.c.
3.12 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
A. General: Apply joint treatment at gypsum board joints (both
directions) ; flanges of corner bead, edge trim, and control joints;
penetrations; fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required
to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration and levels of gypsum
board finish indicated.
B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged areas using
setting-type joint compound.
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints except those with trim
accessories having concealed face flanges not requiring taping to
prevent cracks from developing in joint treatment at flange edges.
D. Levels of Gypsum Board Finish: Provide the following levels of gypsum
board finish per GA-214.
1. Level 1 for ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where
indicated, unless a higher level of finish is required for so
fire-resistive-rated assemblies and sound-rated assemblies.
2 . Level 4 for gypsum board surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
3 . Level 5 for gypsum board surfaces at soffits and falsework. w
E. For level 4 gypsum board finish, embed tape in joint compound and apply
three separate coats of joint compound over joints, angles, fastener
w
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 16
w
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
sound-flanking paths around or through gypsum board assemblies,
including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.
M. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board
application and finishing standard and manufacturer's recommendations.
3 .8 GYPSUM BOARD APPLICATION METHODS
A. Single-Layer Application: Install gypsum wallboard panels as follows:
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels prior to wall/partition board
application to the greatest extent possible and at right angles to
framing, unless otherwise indicated.
2 . On partitions/walls 10 ' or less in height, apply gypsum panels
vertically (parallel to framing) , unless otherwise indicated, and
provide panel lengths that will minimize end joints.
3 . On partitions/walls greater than 10' in height, apply gypsum panels
horizontally (perpendicular to framing) , unless parallel
application is required for fire-resistive-rated assemblies. Use
maximum-length panels to minimize end joints.
B. Double-Layer Application: Install gypsum backing board for base layers
and gypsum wallboard for face layers.
1. On ceilings, apply base layer prior to applying base layer on
walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Offset
face-layer joints at least 10 inches from parallel base-layer
joints. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members
unless otherwise indicated.
2 . On partitions/walls, apply base layers and face layers vertically
(parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud
or furring member and face layer joints offset at least one stud
or furring member with base layer joints. Stagger joints on
opposite sides of partitions.
C. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: A PP 1 Y gypsum panels to supports as
follows:
1. Fasten with screws.
D. Double-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply base layer of gypsum panels and
face layer to base layer as follows:
No
1. Fasten base layers with screws and face layer with adhesive and
supplementary fasteners.
3 . 9 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. General: For trim accessories with back flanges, fasten to framing with
the same fasteners used to fasten gypsum board. Otherwise, fasten trim
accessories according to accessory manufacturer's directions for type,
length, and spacing of fasteners.
OR
B. Install corner beads at external corners.
C. Install edge trim where edge of gypsum panels would otherwise be exposed
ON
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 15
as
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96022
gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have so
been installed on one side.
C. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of ,
abutting end joints and avoid abutting end joints in the central area
of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not
less than one framing member.
D. Install wall/partition board panels to minimize the number of abutting
end joints or avoid them entirely. Stagger abutting end joints not less
than one framing member in alternate courses of board. At stairwells A,
and other high walls, install panels horizontally with end abutting
joints over studs and staggered.
E. Locate both edge or end joints over supports, except in ceiling
applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking
is provided behind end joints. Position adjoining panels so that
tapered edges abut tapered edges, and field-cut edges abut field-cut 40
edges and ends. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends.
Stagger vertical joints over different studs on opposite sides of
partitions. Avoid joints at corners of framed openings where possible.
.w•
F. Attach gypsum panels to steel studs so that the leading edge or end of
each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges
first. .o
G. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts.
H. Spot grout hollow metal door frames for solid core wood doors, hollow 40�
metal doors, and doors over 32 inches wide. Apply spot grout at each
jamb anchor clip and immediately insert gypsum panels into frames.
"M I. Form control joints and expansion joints at locations indicated and as
detailed, with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels, as well
as supporting framing behind gypsum panels.
J. Cover both faces of steel stud partition framing with gypsum panels in
concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.) , except in chase walls that are
braced internally.
w
1. Except where concealed application is indicated or required for
sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished
with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.
2 . Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.
K. Isolate perimeter of non-load-bearing gypsum board partitions at
structural abutments, except floors, as detailed. Provide
1/4-inch-to-1/2-inch-wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with
U-bead edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints
between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
L. Where STC-rated gypsum board assemblies are indicated, seal construction
at perimeters, behind control and expansion joints, openings, and
penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant including a
bead at both faces of the partitions. Comply with ASTM C 919 and
manufacturer's recommendations for location of edge trim and closing off
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 14
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
so
or, if none indicated, in same manner as required for door openings.
Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above
door heads.
low
3 .6 INSTALLATION OF STEEL FRAMING FOR EXTERIOR WALLS
so A. General: Install metal framing systems in accordance with
manufacturer's printed or written instructions and recommendations.
B. Runner Tracks: Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align
tracks accurately to layout at base and tops of studs. Secure tracks as
recommended by stud manufacturer for type of construction involved,
except do not exceed 24 inches o.c. spacing for nail or power-driven
fasteners or 16 inches o.c. for other types of attachment. Provide
fasteners at corners and ends of tracks.
C. Installation of Wall Studs: Secure studs to top and bottom runner
tracks by either welding or screw fastening at both inside and outside
flanges.
D. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for
nonplumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements.
E. Where stud system abuts structural columns or walls, including masonry
!! walls, anchor ends of stiffeners to supporting structure.
F. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing in metal framing
system wherever walls or partitions are indicated to support fixtures,
equipment, services, casework, heavy trim and furnishings, and similar
work requiring attachment to the wall or partition. Where type of
supplementary support is not otherwise indicated, comply with stud
manufacturer's recommendations and industry standards in each case,
considering weight or loading resulting from item supported.
G. Frame wall openings larger than 2 feet square with double stud at each
jamb of frame except where more than two are either shown or indicated
in manufacturer's instructions. Install runner tracks and jack studs
above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to jamb studs with stud
shoes or by welding, and space jack studs same as full-height studs of
wall. Secure stud system wall opening frame in manner indicated.
H. Frame both sides of expansion and control joints with separate studs;
do not bridge the joint with components of stud system.
I. Erection Tolerances: Bolt or weld wall panels (at both horizontal and
* vertical junctures) to produce flush, even, true-to-line joints.
1. Maximum variation in plane and true position between prefabricated
assemblies should not exceed 1/16 inch.
3 .7 APPLYING AND FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL
A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: Install and finish
gypsum panels to comply with ASTM C 840 and GA-216.
B. Install sound attenuation blankets where indicated prior to installing
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 13
ll�t
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
E. Wire-tie or clip furring members to main runners and to other structural
supports as indicated.
F. Grid Suspension System: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid
suspension system meets vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam
and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall
track.
3 .5 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS
A. Install runners (tracks) at floors, ceilings, and structural walls and w
columns where gypsum board stud assemblies abut other construction.
1. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install
asphalt felt strips between studs and wall.
B. Installation Tolerances: Install each steel framing and furring member
so that fastening surfaces do not vary more than 1/8 inch from the plane
formed by the faces of adjacent framing.
C. Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or
substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are '~
indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Cut studs % inch short
of full height. Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and
frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide aw
support for gypsum board.
1. For STC-rated and fire-resistive-rated partitions requiring
partitions to extend to the underside of floor/roof slabs and decks `o
or other continuous solid structural surfaces to obtain ratings,
install framing around structural and other members extending below
floor/roof slabs and decks, as needed, to support gypsum board No
closures needed to make partitions continuous from floor to
underside of solid structure.
D. Install steel studs and furring in sizes and at spacings indicated but ""
not less than that required by the referenced steel framing installation
standard to comply with maximum deflection and minimum loading
requirements specified: No
1. Single- and Double-Layer Construction: Space studs at 16 inches
O.C.
E. Install steel studs so that flanges point in the same direction and so a+m,
that leading edges or ends of each gypsum board can be attached to open
(unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.
oft
F. Frame door openings to comply with details indicated, with GA-219, and
with applicable published recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer.
Attach vertical studs at jambs with screws either directly to frames or
to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for •
cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.
1. Extend vertical jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach
to underside of floor or roof structure above.
G. Frame openings other than door openings to comply with details indicated
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 12
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
lateral support and avoid axial loading.
D. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with steel framing
or furring members. Independently frame both sides of joints with
framing or furring members as indicated.
3 .4 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS
A. Suspend ceiling hangers from building structural members and as follows:
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or
other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting
structural or ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where
required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal
forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective
means.
2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum
produces hanger spacings that interfere with the location of
hangers required to support standard suspension system members,
install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of
trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension
members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance
limits established by referenced standards.
3 . Secure wire hangers by looping and wire-tying, either directly to
structures or to inserts, eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners
that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that
will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age,
Ift corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
4 . Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure,
including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts,
eyescrews, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and
appropriate for structure as well as for type of hanger involved,
and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due
to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
S. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms.
Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that extend through forms.
6. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.
7. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to
�w structural members.
8 . Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes or
conduit.
B. Sway-brace suspended steel framing with hangers used for support.
C. Install suspended steel framing components in sizes and at spacings
indicated but not less than that required by the referenced steel
4, framing installation standard.
1. Wire Hangers: 0.1620-inch (8-gage) diameter, 4 feet o.c.
2 . Carrying Channels (Main Runners) : 1-1/2 inch, 4 feet o.c.
' 3 . Rigid Furring Channels (Furring Members) : 16 inches o.c.
D. Installation Tolerances: Install steel framing components for suspended
ceilings so that cross-furring members or grid suspension members are
level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet as measured both lengthwise on each
member and transversely between parallel members.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 11
aw
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB 496079
40
3 .1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates to which gypsum board assemblies attach or abut,
installed hollow metal frames, cast-in-anchors, and structural framing m"
with Installer present for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of assemblies
specified in this Section. Do not proceed with installation until as
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3 .2 PREPARATION
No
A. Ceiling Anchorages: Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension
systems with installation of overhead structural assemblies to ensure
that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure
have been installed to receive ceiling hangers that will develop their w
full strength and at spacing required to support ceilings.
1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other •
trades for installation well in advance of time needed for
coordination with other construction.
B. Before sprayed-on fireproofing is applied, attach offset anchor plates Ok
or ceiling runners (tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed-on
fireproofing. Where offset anchor plates are required, provide
continuous units fastened to building structure not more than 24 inches Ift
O.C.
C. After sprayed-on fireproofing has been applied, remove only as much
fireproofing as needed to complete installation of gypsum board �"`
assemblies without reducing thickness of fireproofing below that
required to obtain fire-resistive rating indicated. Protect remaining
fireproofing from damage.
3 .3 INSTALLING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL
A. Steel Framing Installation Standard: Install steel framing to comply
with ASTM C 754 and with ASTM C 840 requirements that apply to framing
installation.
B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in
gypsum board assemblies to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy
trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar
construction. Comply with details indicated and with recommendations as
of gypsum board manufacturer or, if none available, with "Gypsum
Construction Handbook" published by United States Gypsum Co.
w�a
C. Isolate steel framing from building structure at locations indicated to
prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. Comply with
details shown on Drawings.
.wR
1. Where building structure abuts ceiling perimeter or penetrates
ceiling.
2 . Where partition framing and wall furring abut structure except at
floor.
a. Provide slip- or cushioned-type joints as detailed to attain
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 10
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON. MA KB #9607
C. Drying-Type Joint Compounds for Gypsum Board: Factory-packaged
vinyl-based products complying with the following requirements for
formulation and intended use.
1. Ready-Mixed Formulation: Factory-mixed product.
2 . All-purpose compound formulated for both taping and topping
compounds.
2 .9 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT
A. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard
nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic
rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to
reduce transmission of airborne sound.
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
1. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints:
a. BA-98, Pecora Corp.
b. Tremco Acoustical Sealant, Tremco, Inc.
2 .10 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum board construction that
comply with referenced standards and recommendations of gypsum board
manufacturer.
B. Laminating Adhesive: Special adhesive or joint compound recommended for
laminating gypsum panels.
C. Spot Grout: ASTM C 475, setting-type joint compound recommended for
spot grouting hollow metal door frames.
D. Fastening Adhesive for Metal: Special adhesive recommended for
laminating gypsum panels to steel framing.
w E. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 1002 for the following
applications:
1. Fastening gypsum board to steel members less than 0.03 inch thick.
2 . Fastening gypsum board to gypsum board.
F. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening gypsum board
40r to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.
G. Sound Attenuation Blankets: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket insulation
produced by combining mineral fibers of type described below with
thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C 665 for Type I (blankets
without membrane facing) :
1. Mineral-Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
ON
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 9
ON
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
MA KB #9.6.912
tea
3 . Thickness: M inch.
4 . Size: 4 feet by 8 feet, or longer.
5. Type: Type X.
6. Edge and End Configuration: Square. 00
7. Thickness: 5/8 inch.
8. Size: 4 feet by 8 feet.
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
1. Gypsum Sheathing Board with Water-Resistant Core, Regular Type: wA�
a. "Gyprock Gypsum Sheathing, " Domtar Gypsum Co.
b. "G-P Gypsum Sheathing, " Georgia-Pacific Corp. w
C. "Gold Bond Gypsum Sheathing, " Gold Bond Building Products
Div. , National Gypsum Co.
d. "USG Gypsum Sheathing, " United States Gypsum Co.
�w
2.7 TRIM ACCESSORIES
A. Accessories for Interior Installation: Corner beads, edge trim, and
control joints complying with ASTM C 1047 and requirements indicated
below:
1. Material: Formed metal, plastic, or metal combined with paper,
with metal complying with the following requirement:
a. Sheet steel zinc-coated by hot-dip process. ww
2 . Shapes indicated below by reference to Fig. 1 designations in ASTM
C 1047:
a. Cornerbead on outside corners, unless otherwise indicated.
b. LC-bead with both face and back flanges; face flange formed to
receive joint compound. Use LC-beads for edge trim unless
otherwise indicated.
C. U-bead with face and back flanges; face flange formed to be
left without application of joint compound. Use U-bead where
indicated. w�
d. One-piece control joint formed with V-shaped slot, with
removable strip covering slot opening.
e. Preformed channel shapes with face flange forward to receive
joint compound for reveals.
1) Subject to conformance with requirements, provide "Soft
Forms", Pitt Con, Inc.
2.8 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A. General: Provide joint treatment materials complying with ASTM C 475
and the recommendations of both the manufacturers of sheet products and
of joint treatment materials for each application indicated.
B. Joint Tape for Gypsum Board: Paper reinforcing tape, unless otherwise
indicated.
■o
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 8
r�
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #9607
6. Electrodes for Welding: Comply with AWS Code and as recommended
by stud manufacturer.
7. Galvanizing Repair: Where galvanized surfaces are damaged, prepare
surfaces and repair in accordance with procedures specified in ASTM
A 780.
2.5 GYPSUM BOARD PRODUCTS
ift A. General: Provide gypsum board of types indicated in maximum lengths
available to minimize end-to-end butt joints.
1. Thickness: Provide gypsum board in thicknesses indicated or, if
aw not otherwise indicated, in either % inch or 5/8 inch thicknesses
to comply with ASTM C 840 for application system and support
spacing indicated.
No B. Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum ypsum Backing Board for Multi-Layer Applications:
ASTM C 36 and as follows:
few 1. Type: Regular for vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
2 . Type: Type X where required for fire-resistive-rated assemblies.
3 . Edges: Tapered.
4 . Thickness: As indicated.
5. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of
the following products where proprietary gypsum wallboard is
indicated:
a. Gyprock Fireguard C Gypsum Board, Domtar Gypsum.
b. Fire-Shield G, Gold Bond Building Products Div. , National
Gypsum Co.
C. SHEETROCK Brand Gypsum Panels, FIRECODE C Core, United States
Gypsum Co.
C. Fiber Reinforced Gypsum Panel: ASTM C36, E119 and as follows:
1. Type: Regular for vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
2 . Type: Type X where required for fire-resistive-rated assemblies.
few 3 . Edges: Tapered.
4 . Thickness: 5/811 .
5. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the
wN
following:
a. FiberBond Fiber Reinforced Gypsum Wallboard, Louisiana Pacific
Corp.
2 .6 GYPSUM SHEATHING
A. Gypsum Sheathing Board with Water-Resistant Core: Gypsum sheathing
board consisting of noncombustible gypsum core incorporating a
water-resistant material, surfaced on face, back, and long edges with
water-repellent paper; complying with ASTM C 79 and requirements
indicated below:
1. Type: Regular (not Type X) .
on 2 . Edge and End Configuration: Square.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 7
40
MR
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
MW
1) Over 13 ' - 0" Marino 3-5/8 SW20
2) Over 13 .4 ' Detrich STN-20
3) Over 14 ' - 6" Unimast 358 ST20
so
3 . Thickness: 20 gauge, 0.346 inch for 6" and greater depth.
C. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Provide fasteners of type, material, size, Aw
corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to
fasten steel framing and furring members securely to substrates
involved; complying with the recommendations of gypsum board
manufacturers for applications indicated. +0
2.4 STEEL FRAMING FOR EXTERIOR WALLS
w
A. Exterior Framing Screws: #12, hex-washer head, Teks/5, zinc coated.
B. System Components: Manufacturers' standard non-load-bearing steel
studs, 6" deep of type, shape, and gage as indicated. With each type of
metal framing required, provide manufacturer's standard, steel runners
(tracks) , blocking, lintels, clip angles, shoes, reinforcements,
fasteners, and accessories for applications indicated, as needed to
provide a complete metal framing system.
1. Stud selection is dependent upon the unbraced height of stud,
measured from bottom track to top of top track. Maximum allowable
height for each type and gauge of stud is based upon maximum
deflection of L/600 with only bare stud acting to resist, and the
studs spaced at sixteen (16) inch centers. Furnish multiple studs
at the jambs of openings to maintain the same criteria.
2 . Based upon wind load criteria, provide gauge of studs as determined
by requirements set forth in submittals provide:
a. As required by the Massachusetts State Building Code,
utilizing Zone 1, Exposure C.
C. Materials and Finishes:
1. For 16-gage and heavier units, fabricate metal framing components +.w
of structural quality steel sheet with a minimum yield point of
40, 000 psi; ASTM A 446, A 570, or A 611.
2 . For 18-gage and lighter units, fabricate metal framing components
of commercial quality steel sheet with a minimum yield point of a.w
33,000 psi; ASTM A 446, A 570, or A 611.
3 . Provide galvanized finish to metal framing components complying
with ASTM A 525 for minimum G 60 coating. ewe
4 . Provide prime-coated finish with one coat of shop-applied
red-oxide, zinc-chromate, or other similar rust-inhibitive primer.
a. Finish of installation accessories to match that of main
framing components, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Fasteners: Provide nuts, bolts, washers, screws, and other
fasteners with corrosion-resistant plated finish.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 6
wss
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #9607
00
of the following configuration:
1. Double-Leg Configuration: Hat-shaped channel, with 1-1/2-inch-wide
face connected to flanges by double slotted or expanded metal legs
(webs) .
I. Grid Suspension System for Interior Ceilings: ASTM C 645,
manufacturer's standard direct-hung grid suspension system composed of
main beams and cross furring members that interlock to form a modular
supporting network.
2 .3 STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS
A. General : Provide steel framing members complying with the following
requirements:
1. Component Sizes and Spacings: As indicated but not less than that
required to comply with ASTM C 754 under the following maximum
deflection and lateral loading conditions:
a. Maximum Deflection: L/240 at 5 lbf per sq. ft.
2 . Protective Coating: Manufacturers standard corrosion-resistant
coating.
3 . Protective Coating: C40 hot-dip galvanized coating per ASTM A 525
for framing members attached to and within 10 feet of exterior
walls.
B. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645, with flange edges of studs bent
back 90 deg and doubled over to form 3/16-inch-wide minimum lip (return)
and complying with the following requirements for minimum thickness of
ens base (uncoated) metal and for depth:
1. Thickness : 2-1/2" :
Ak a. 25 gauge:
1) Up to 9.8 ' Marino 2-1/2 DW
2) Up to 10.1' Detrich STN-25
!wr 3) Up to 11' - 0" Unimast 212 ST25
b. 20 gauge:
1) Over 9.8' Marino 2-1/2 SW20
2) Over 10.1' Detrich STN-25
3) Over 11' - 0" Unimast 212 ST20
2 . Thickness 3-5/811 :
a. 25 gauge:
1) Up to 13 ' - 0" Marino 3-5/8 DW
2) Up to 13 .4 ' Detrich STN-25
3) Up to 14 ' - 6" Unimast 358 ST25
b. 20 gauge:
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 5
dMR
i
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
b. Georgia-Pacific Corp.
C. Gold Bond Building Products Div. , National Gypsum Co.
d. Louisiana-Pacific Corp.
e. United States Gypsum Co.
2.2 STEEL FRAMING COMPONENTS FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS
A. General: Provide components of sizes indicated but not less than that
required to comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
B. Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable �*
for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant
materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers
of type indicated, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a ,w
load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as
determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified testing
agency.
a�u
C. Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft
temper.
D. Hanger Rods: Mild steel and zinc-coated or protected with
rust-inhibitive paint.
E. Angle-Type Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch wide, •
formed from 0.0635-inch-thick galvanized steel sheet complying with ASTM
A 446 Coating Designation G90, with bolted connections and
5/16-inch-diameter bolts.
F. Channels: Cold-rolled steel, 0.05980-inch-minimum thickness of base
(uncoated) metal and 7/16-inch-wide flanges, and as follows:
..A
1. Carrying Channels: 2 inches deep, 590 lb per 1000 feet, unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Carrying Channels: 1-1/2 inch deep, 475 lb per 1000 feet, unless
otherwise indicated.
3 . Furring Channels: 3/4 inch deep, 300 lb per 1000 feet, unless
otherwise indicated.
4 . Finish: Rust-inhibitive paint, unless otherwise indicated.
5. Finish: G-60 hot-dip galvanized coating per ASTM A 525 for framing
for exterior soffits and where indicated.
G. Steel Studs for Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, with flange edges bent
back 90 deg and doubled over to form 3/16-inch minimum lip (return) ,
minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal and minimum depth as follows:
w►
1. Thickness: 0.0329 inch, unless otherwise indicated.
2 . Protective Coating: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant
coating.
3 . Protective Coating: G40 hot-dip galvanized coating per ASTM A 525 "
for framing for exterior soffits and ceiling suspension members in
areas within 10 feet of exterior walls.
H. Steel Resilient Furring Channels: Manufacturer's standard product
designed to reduce sound transmission, fabricated from steel sheet
complying with ASTM A 525 or ASTM A 568 to form 7/8-inch-deep channel
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 4
wu
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
2 . Soffit and Falsework surfaces indicated to receive nontextured
paint finishes.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing
brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier.
B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected
against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination,
corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Neatly stack gypsum
panels flat to prevent sagging.
C. Handle gypsum board to prevent damage to edges, ends, and surfaces. Do
not bend or otherwise damage metal corner beads and trim.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions, General: Establish and maintain environmental
conditions for applying and finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM
,his C 840 and with gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Room Temperatures: For nonadhesive attachment of gypsum board to
framing, maintain not less than 40 deg F (4 deg C) For adhesive
attachment and finishing of gypsum board, maintain not less than 50 deg
F (10 deg C) for 48 hours prior to application and continuously after
until dry. Do not exceed 95 deg F (35 deg C) when using temporary heat
sources.
C. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces, as required, for drying joint
treatment materials. Avoid drafts during hot dry weather to prevent
finishing materials from drying too rapidly.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
ok
2 .1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following:
1. Steel Framing and Furring:
' a. Marino Industries Corp.
b. Gold Bond Building Products Div. , National Gypsum Co.
C. Unimast Inc.
d. Detrich Industries, Inc.
2. Grid Suspension Assemblies:
a. Chicago Metallic Corp.
b. National Rolling Mills Co.
C. USG Interiors, Inc.
3. Gypsum Board and Related Products:
a. Domtar Gypsum.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 3
Cllr
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
AAM
and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of product specified.
mod.
C. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of gypsum board assembly
components certifying that their products comply with specified
requirements.
D. Shop drawings showing locations, fabrication, and installation of light
gauge metal framing including gauge and spacing of framing, plans,
elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to
structural components and other units.
1. Shop drawings of all conditions of exterior walls (plans and
elevations at 1/4 inch per foot scale and details at 1-1/2 inch per
foot scale) with engineering calculations signed and sealed by a
Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Massachusetts.
2 . Calculations for span capabilities of steel manufacturer submitted Wa
for deflection criteria specified, showing conformance with
requirements.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE wr
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-rated gypsum board
assemblies are indicated, provide materials and construction identical 00
to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by an
independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction.
no
1. Fire Resistance Ratings: As indicated by reference to GA File
Numbers in GA-600 "Fire Resistance Design Manual" or to design
designations in UL "Fire Resistance Directory" .
r.Ar
B. Engineer Qualifications: Professional engineer licensed to practice in
the State of Massachusetts and experienced in providing engineering
services of the kind indicated that have resulted in the successful MW
installation of assemblies similar in material, design, and extent to
those indicated for this Project.
C. Single-Source Responsibility for Steel Framing: Obtain steel framing
members for gypsum board assemblies from a single manufacturer.
D. Single-Source Responsibility for Panel Products: Obtain each type of „ ►
gypsum board and other panel products from a single manufacturer.
E. Single-Source Responsibility for Finishing Materials: Obtain finishing
materials from either the same manufacturer that supplies gypsum board
and other panel products or from a manufacturer acceptable to gypsum
board manufacturer.
F. Field Samples: On actual gypsum board assemblies, prepare field samples
of at least 100 sq. ft. in surface area for the following applications.
Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of in-place unit of
Work.
1. Wall surfaces indicated to receive nontextured paint finishes.
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 2
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
SECTION 09255 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1. 1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this work. Note also all Addenda.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Non-load-bearing steel framing members for gypsum board assemblies.
2 . Gypsum board assemblies attached to steel framing.
3 . Gypsum sheathing for screw-attachment to steel framing.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that
relate to this Section:
1. Section 06105 "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for the following:
a. Wood blocking built into metal stud and gypsum board walls and
partitions.
A , b. Air infiltration barrier.
2 . Section 07251 "Sprayed-On Fireproofing" for fireproofing structural
steel members concealed behind gypsum board assemblies.
11 3 . Section 07841 "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for
firestopping systems and fire-resistive-rated joint sealants.
4 . Section 09300 "Tile" for ceramic tile.
5. Divisions 15 and 16 for access door to be furnished elsewhere and
installed by this Section.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Gypsum Board Construction Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 and GA-505
for definitions of terms related to gypsum board assemblies not defined
in this Section or in other referenced standards.
1.4 ASSEMBLY PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
40 A. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies
indicated to have STC ratings, provide materials and construction
identical to those of assemblies whose STC ratings were determined per
Ob ASTM E 90 and classified per ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent
testing agency.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract
�w
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 - 1
I�R
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
A. Remove temporary covering and other provisions made to minimize
spattering of plaster on other work. Promptly remove plaster from door
frames, windows, and other surfaces not to be plastered. Repair surfaces
stained, marred or otherwise damaged during plastering work. When Ak
plastering work is completed, remove unused materials, containers,
equipment, and plaster debris.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable
to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure plaster work is without damage
or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 09220
�rle
wed
a!
a*
was
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 8
w
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
ON
3 . Control Joints: Install at locations indicated or, if not
indicated, at locations complying with the following criteria and
approved by Architect:
a. Where an expansion or contraction joint occurs in surface of
construction directly behind plaster membrane.
b. Distance between Control Joints: Not to exceed 18 feet (5.4 m)
in either direction or a length-to-width ratio of 2-1/2 to 1.
C. Horizontal Surfaces: Not more than 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m) in
area.
d. Where plaster panel sizes or dimensions change, extend joints
full width or height of plaster membrane.
3 .6 PLASTER APPLICATION
A. Plaster Application Standard: Apply plaster materials, composition, and
mixes to comply with ASTM C 926.
B. Do not use materials that are frozen, caked, lumpy, dirty, or
contaminated by foreign materials.
C. Do not use excessive water in mixing and applying plaster materials.
D. Flat Surface Tolerances: Do not deviate more than plus or minus 1/8 inch
! in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m) from a true plane in finished plaster surfaces,
as measured by a 10-foot (3-m) straightedge placed at any location on
surface.
E. Sequence plaster application with installation and protection of other
work so that neither will be damaged by installation of other.
"a F. Plaster flush with built-in metal items or accessories that act as a
plaster ground, unless otherwise indicated.
G. Corners: Make internal corners and angles square; finish external
corners flush with cornerbeads on interior work.
H. Number of Coats: Apply plaster of composition indicated, to comply with
OR the following requirements:
1. Three Coats: Over the following plaster base:
a. Metal lath.
I. Finish Coats: Apply finish coats to comply with the following
requirements:
1. Float Finish: Apply finish coat to a minimum thickness of 1/8 inch
(3 mm) to completely cover base coat, uniformly floated to a true
even plane with fine-textured finish matching Architect's sample.
J. Moist-cure plaster base and finish coats to comply with ASTM C 926,
including written instructions for time between coats and curing in
"Annex A2 Design Considerations. "
3 .7 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 7
.w
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB 996079
indicated to be supported independently of metal furring and lathing
system.
rew
3 .2 INSTALLATION OF CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
A. Preparation and Coordination: Coordinate installation of ceiling
suspension system with installation of overhead structural systems to
ensure inserts and other structural anchorage provisions have been
installed to receive ceiling hangers in a manner that will develop their
full strength and at spacings required to support ceiling.
.e.
B. Hanger Installation: Attach hangers to structure above ceiling to comply
with ML/SFA 920, "Guide Specifications for Metal Lathing and Furring, "
and with referenced standards.
1. Do not attach hangers to metal deck tabs.
C. Install ceiling suspension system components of sizes and spacings
indicated, but not in smaller sizes or greater spacings than those
required by referenced lathing and furring installation standards.
1. Wire Hangers: Space 0.16-inch- (4-mm-) diameter wire hangers not
over 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c. , parallel with and not over 36 inches
(914 mm) perpendicular to direction of carrying channels, unless
otherwise indicated, and within 6 inches (152 mm) of carrying
channel ends.
2 . Carrying Channels: Space carrying channels not over 36 inches (914
mm) o.c. with 48-inch (1219-mm) o.c. hanger spacing.
3 . Furring Channels to Receive Metal Lath: Space furring channels not
over 16 inches o.c. for rib lath.
3 .3 LATHING
A. Install metal lath for the following applications where plaster base
coats are required. Provide appropriate type, configuration, and weight
of metal lath selected from materials indicated that comply with
referenced ML/SFA specifications and ASTM lathing installation standards.
1. Suspended and furred ceilings using 4-lb/sq. yd. Rib lath.
3.4 PREPARATIONS FOR PLASTERING
A. Clean plaster bases and substrates for direct application of plaster,
removing loose material and substances that may impair the Work.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF PLASTERING ACCESSORIES
A. General: Comply with referenced lathing and furring installation
standards for provision and location of plaster accessories of type
indicated. Miter or cope accessories at corners; install with tight
joints and in alignment. Attach accessories securely to plaster bases
to hold accessories in place and in alignment during plastering. Install
accessories of type indicated at following locations: .�
1. External Corners: Install corner reinforcement at external corners.
2. Terminations of Plaster: Install casing beads, unless otherwise
indicated.
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 6
(0
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
soft, annealed steel wire.
D. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening metal lath to
steel members 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2 .84 mm) thick.
2.7 PLASTER MIXES AND COMPOSITIONS
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926 for base- and finish-coat mixes as
applicable to plaster bases, materials, and other requirements indicated.
B. Base-Coat Mixes and Compositions: Proportion materials for respective
base coats in parts by volume per sum of cementitious materials for
aggregates to comply with the following requirements for each method of
application and plaster base indicated. Adjust mix proportions below
within limits specified to attain workability.
C. Three-Coat Work over Metal Lath: Base-coat proportions as indicated
below:
1. Scratch Coat: 1 part portland cement, 1 part lime, 8 parts
aggregate.
2 . Brown Coat: 1 part portland cement, 1 part lime, 10 parts
aggregate.
D. Factory-Prepared Finish Coats : Add water only; comply with finish coat
manufacturer's written instructions.
2.8 MIXING
A. Mechanically mix cementitious and aggregate materials for plasters to
comply with applicable referenced application standard and with
? recommendations of plaster manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .1 INSTALLATION OF LATH AND FURRING, GENERAL
A. Standards: Comply with ML/SFA 920, "Guide Specifications for Metal
00 Lathing and Furring, " and with requirements of ASTM C 1063 .
B. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing at terminations in
work and for support of fixtures, equipment services, and similar work
to comply with details indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, to
comply with applicable written instructions of lath and furring
manufacturer.
OW
C. Isolation: Where lathing and metal support system abuts building
structure horizontally, sufficiently isolate from structural movement to
prevent transfer of loading from building structure. Install cushion-
type joints to absorb deflections but maintain lateral support.
1. Frame both sides of control joints independently and do not bridge
joints with furring and lathing or accessories.
D. Install additional framing, furring, runners, lath, and beads, as
required to form openings and frames for other work as indicated.
Coordinate support system for proper support of framed work that is not
ow PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 5
11 1 MM
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB_ #96079
coating designation.
2. Zinc-Alloy Components: ASTM B 69, 99 percent pure zinc.
B. Cornerbeads: Small nose cornerbeads fabricated from the following metal, Im
with expanded flanges of large-mesh diamond-metal lath allowing full
plaster encasement.
1. Zinc Alloy: Minimum 0.0207 inch (0.53 mm) thick.
2. Galvanized Steel: Minimum 0.0172 inch (0.44 mm) thick.
3 . Material: Any material above.
rR
C. Casing Beads: Square-edged style, with expanded flanges of the following
material:
1. Zinc Alloy: Minimum 0.0207 inch (0.53 mm) thick.
2 . Galvanized Steel: Minimum 0.0172 inch (0.44 mm) thick.
3 . Material: Any material above.
D. Control Joints: Prefabricated, of material and type indicated below:
1. Zinc Alloy: Minimum 0.0207 inch (0.53 mm) thick.
2 . Galvanized Steel: Minimum 0.0172 inch (0.44 mm) thick.
3 . Material: Any material above.
4. One-Piece Type: Folded pair of nonperforated screeds in M-shaped
configuration, with expanded or perforated flanges. A6
a. Provide removable protective tape on plaster face of control
joints. WM
E. Lath Attachment Devices: Material and type required by ASTM C 1063 for
installations indicated.
aw
2.5 PLASTER MATERIALS
A. Base-Coat Cements: Type as indicated below:
AW
1. Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I.
B. Cement Color: White. No
C. Factory-Prepared Finish Coat: Manufacturer's standard factory-packaged
blend of portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I or III; hydrated lime,
Type S, ASTM C 206 or ASTM C 207; aggregate, ASTM C 897; and compatible No
with base coat and finish texture indicated; in color indicated below:
1. White. 4W
D. Lime: Special hydrated lime for finishing purposes, ASTM C 206, Type S.
E. Sand Aggregate for Base Coats: ASTM C 897 .
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Water for Mixing and Finishing Plaster: Potable. 0k*
B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 932 .
C. Line Wire: 0.0475-inch- (1.2-mm-) diameter, zinc-coated (galvanized) , go
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 4
AIM
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA #96079
d. National Gypsum Co.
e. Pittcon Industries.
f. Unimast, Inc.
g. United States Gypsum Co.
2.2 METAL SUPPORTS FOR SUSPENDED AND FURRED CEILINGS
A. General: Size metal ceiling supports to comply with ASTM C 1063, unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Wire for Hangers and Ties: ASTM A 641 (ASTM A 641M) , Class 1 zinc
coating, soft temper.
C. Rod Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated.
D. Flat Hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive
paint.
E. Channels: Cold-rolled steel, minimum 0.0598-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick base
(uncoated) metal and 7/16-inch- (11.1-mm-) wide flanges, and as follows:
1. Carrying Channels: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) deep, 475 lb/1000 feet (0.7
kg/m) .
2 . Furring Channels : 3/4 inch (19 mm) deep, 300 lb/1000 feet (0.45
} kg/m) •
3 . Finish: ASTM A 653, G60 (ASTM A 653M, Z180) hot-dip galvanized
A coating for framing.
2 .3 LATH
Ow A. Expanded-Metal Lath: Comply with ASTM C 847 for material, type,
configuration, and other characteristics indicated below.
viii 1. Material: Fabricate expanded-metal lath from sheet metal conforming
to the following:
a. Galvanized Steel: Structural-quality, zinc-coated (galvanized)
steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653, G60 (ASTM A 653M, Z180)
minimum coating designation, unless otherwise indicated.
2 . Rib Lath: Comply with the following requirements:
a. Configuration: Rib depth of 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) .
4010 1) Weight: 4 lb/sq. yd. (2.2 kg/sq. m) .
2 .4 ACCESSORIES
A. General: Comply with material provisions of ASTM C 1063 and the
requirements indicated below; coordinate depth of accessories with
thicknesses and number of plaster coats required.
1. Galvanized Steel Components: Fabricated from zinc-coated
(galvanized) steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653M, Z90 minimum
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 3
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
Aft
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements, General: Comply with requirements of
referenced plaster application standards and recommendations of plaster
manufacturer for environmental conditions before, during, and after
plaster application.
B. Cold-Weather Requirements: Provide heat and protection, temporary or
w
permanent, as required to protect each coat of plaster from freezing for
at least 24 hours after application. Distribute heat uniformly to
prevent concentration of heat on plaster near heat sources; provide ,,
deflection or protective screens.
C. Warm-Weather Requirements: Protect plaster against uneven and excessive
evaporation and from strong flows of dry air, both natural and
artificial. Apply and cure plaster as required by climatic and job
conditions to prevent dry out during cure period. Provide suitable
coverings, moist curing, barriers to deflect sunlight and wind, or
combinations of these, as required.
D. Interior Plaster Work: Maintain at least 50 deg F (10 deg C) temperature
in areas to be plastered for at least 48 hours before, during, and after
application.
E. Ventilation: Provide natural or mechanical means of ventilation to
properly dry interior spaces after portland cement plaster has cured.
F. Protect contiguous work from soiling and moisture deterioration caused
by plastering. Provide temporary covering and other provisions necessary
to minimize harmful spattering of plaster on other work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS Ak
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
by one of the following:
1. Metal Framing and Supports: no
a. Dietrich Industries, Inc.
b. Marino-Ware Industries.
C. National Gypsum Co. erg
d. Unimast, Inc.
2. Expanded-Metal Lath:
a. Dietrich Industries, Inc.
b. National Gypsum Co.
C. Unimast, Inc.
d. United States Gypsum Co.
3 . Metal Accessories:
a. Fry Reglet Corporation.
b. Metalex (Keene Products) .
C. MM Systems Corp. !
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 2
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
SECTION 09220 - PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this work. Note also all Addenda.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Metal framing and furring.
2. Metal lath and accessories.
3 . Portland cement plaster.
10 B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that
relate to this Section:
1. Section 07242, "Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems - Class PM"
for synthetic plaster finish systems.
2 . Section 09255, "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for suspended gypsum board
ceilings and suspension systems.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions
40k of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for each product specified.
ok C. Material Certificates: Submit certificate signed by manufacturer for
each kind of plaster aggregate certifying that materials comply with
requirements.
ON
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-resistance-rated portland
cement plaster assemblies are indicated, provide materials and
construction identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance
per ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver cementitious materials to Project site in original packages,
containers, or bundles, labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand
name, and lot number.
B. Store materials inside, under cover, and dry, protected from weather,
direct sunlight, surface contamination, aging, corrosion, and damage from
construction traffic and other causes.
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER 09220 - 1
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
to date scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of
Substantial Completion in each area of project. Wash panels by method
recommended by plastic manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 08951
f�A1
A^
oft
us
so
A^
TRANSLUCENT WALL SYSTEMS 08951-6
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
D. Dissimilar Metals: Separate dissimilar metals with bituminous paint,
or a suitable sealant, or a nonabsorptive plastic or elastomeric tape,
or a gasket between the surfaces. Do not use coatings containing lead.
40
E. Continuity: Maintain accurate relation of planes and angles with
hairline fit of contacting members.
1. Uniformity of Metal Finish: Abutting extruded aluminum members
shall not have an integral color or texture variation greater than
half the range indicated in the sample pair submittal.
F. Fasteners: Conceal fasteners wherever possible.
3 .3 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for
installation.
B. Set units plumb, level, and true to line, without warp or rack of
framing members,or panels. Install components in proper alignment and
relation to established lines and grades indicated. Provide proper
support and anchor securely in place.
C. Construction Tolerances: Install translucent wall panels to comply with
the following tolerances:
1. Variation from Plane: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 12 feet of length
or 1/4 inch in any total length.
2 . Offset from Alignment: The maximum offset from true alignment
between two identical members abutting end to end in line shall not
exceed 1116 inch.
3 . Diagonal Measurements: The maximum difference in diagonal
measurements shall not exceed 1/8 inch.
4 . Offset at Corners: The maximum out-of-plane offset of framing at
corners shall not exceed 1/32 inch.
00
D. Separate aluminum and other corrodible metal surfaces from sources of
corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other
materials.
E. Set sill members and other members in bed of sealant as indicated, or
with joint fillers or gaskets as indicated to provide weathertight
construction. Comply with requirements of Section 07920 for sealants,
fillers, and gaskets.
3 .4 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Protect translucent wall panels from contact with contaminating
substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such
protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with
translucent wall panels, remove immediately by washing method
recommended by translucent wall panels manufacturer.
B. Remove and replace panels that are broken, chipped, cracked, abraded,
or damaged in other ways during construction period, including natural
causes, accidents, and vandalism.
C. Wash translucent wall panels on both faces not more than 4 days prior
TRANSLUCENT WALL SYSTEMS 08951-5
.f
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KR #96079
ASTM C 920 requirements, including those for type, grade, class, '
and uses.
4. Preformed Glazing Tape Standard: Provide glazing tapes of type
indicated that comply with AAMA 800.
5. Colors: Provide color of exposed sealants indicated or, if not
otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's
standard colors.
B. One-Part Nonacid-Curing Silicone Sealant : ASTM C 920: Type S; Grade
NS; Class 25; Uses NT, M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates
indicated, O; and with the additional capability, when tested for
adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, to
withstand the following percentage changes in joint width as measured
at time of application and remain in compliance with other requirements
of ASTM C 920 for Uses indicated:
1. 100 percent movement in extension and 50 percent movement in
compression for a total of 150 percent movement.
M
C. Back Bedding Mastic Tape: Preformed butyl polyisobutylene rubber
without continuous spacer rod as recommended by manufacturers of tape
and plastic glazing manufacturer for application indicated and complying w
with AAMA 800 for products of the following designation:
1. AAMA 804.1.
so
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION am
A. Clean framing members to receive plastic glazing immediately before
glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. Remove
lacquer from metal surfaces where elastomeric sealants are indicated for
use.
3 .2 FABRICATION 41A
A. Factory pre-assemble and seal all panel units. Ship to the project site
in rigid structural units, ready for erection, except for any removable
components. we
B. Prefabrication: Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware
application, and other work to the greatest extent possible before Wa
shipment to the Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary
for shipment and installation.
1. Perform fabrication operations, including cutting, fitting, ++
forming, drilling and grinding of metal work to prevent damage to
exposed finish surfaces. Complete these operations for hardware
prior to application of finishes.
C. Welding: Comply with AWS recommendations. Grind exposed welds smooth
to remove weld spatter and welding oxides. Restore mechanical finish.
oft
1. Welding behind finished surfaces shall be performed in such a
manner as to minimize distortion and discoloration on the finished
surface.
TRANSLUCENT WALL SYSTEMS 08951-4
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL AbDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
4
A. Sizes: Fabricate translucent wall panels to sizes required for openings
indicated. Allow for thermal expansion and contraction of translucent
wall panels without restraint and without withdrawal of edges from
frames, with edge clearances and tolerances complying with
recommendations of panel manufacturer. Provide thicknesses for
applications indicated.
2 .3 TRANSLUCENT WALL PANELS
A. Glass fiber reinforced polymer sheets bonded under controlled heat and
pressure to a mechanically interlocked aluminum grid core, complying
with the following requirements.
1. Thickness: 2 3/4 inches.
2 . Color Stability: Full-thickness color stability of the exterior
face not less than 3 .0 units (Delta E by ASTM D-2244) .
00, 3 . Exterior Face Impact Resistance: 230 ft. - lbs.
4 . Laminate Adhesive: Heat and pressure sensitive resin type,
conforming to ICBO "Acceptance Criteria for Sandwich Panel
Adhesive", 750 psi tensile strength per ASTM C297 after two
exposures to six cycles each of the severe aging conditions
prescribed by ASTM D-1037; and 500 psi range shear strength per
ASTM D-1002 after five exposures.
5. U-factor: 0.14
6. Face Sheet Colors:
a. Exterior: White
b. Interior: White
B. Grid Core: 6005-T5 alloy Aluminum I-shape sections, 7/16" flange
thickness, mechanically interlocked, thermally broken.
C. Perimeter Frame: Manufacturer's standard aluminum clamping system on
head, jambs, sills and vertical closers, corrosion resistant finish per
AAMA 605.2, capable of maintaining continuous clamping pressure on
sealing tapes applied to translucent wall panels, through the use of
stainless steel fasteners.
1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of
colors.
2 .4 ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS AND PREFORMED GLAZING TAPES
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard products of type indicated and
'40 complying with the following requirements:
1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants and tapes of proven
compatibility with other materials with which they will come into
contact, including translucent wall panels products and framing
member substrates, under conditions of installation and service,
as demonstrated by testing and field experience.
0 2. Suitability: Comply with recommendations of sealant and
translucent wall panel manufacturer for selection of glazing
sealants and tapes that have performance characteristics suitable
for applications indicated and conditions at time of installation.
3 . Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide chemically curing,
elastomeric sealant of base polymer indicated that complies with
TRANSLUCENT WALL SYSTEMS 08951-3
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
"Project Closeout. "
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
�w
A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide glass-fiber reinforced
polymer sheets identical to those tested for the following fire
performance characteristics, per ASTM test method indicated below, by
UL or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Interior Flamespread: 20 maximum, when tested on ASTM E84.
2. Smoke density of 50 or less when tested per ASTM E84 .
3. Relative Burning Characteristics: As follows, when tested per ASTM
D 635 :
a. Burning extent of 1 inch or less when tested on translucent
wall panel with the thickness intended for use.
4. Bond Strength: Provide translucent wall system listed by I.C.B.O.
#PFC 1705; SSBCC #9303, MEA 374-85-M and Factory Mutual approved
Class 1.
B. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide materials obtained from one
source for each type of translucent wall panel system product indicated.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for shipping, storing, and
handling of translucent wall panels and for removal of protective "
coverings after installation. Provide care to maintain protective
coverings on sheets and to avoid exposures to abrasive substances,
excessive heat, and other sources of possible deterioration.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with installation using
glazing sealants under the following conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the
limits permitted by glazing sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg
F (4.4 deg C) .
2 . When glazing channel substrates are wet because of rain, frost,
condensation, and other causes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
1. Translucent Wall Panel Systems:
a. Kalwall Corporation, Manchester, New Hampshire.
b. Skywall (Division of Vistawall) .
C. Major Industries.
2.2 GLAZING MATERIALS, GENERAL
TRANSLUCENT WALL SYSTEMS 08951-2
M
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
KB #96074
NORTHAMPTON, 14A
SECTION 08951 - TRANSLUCENT WALL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
1 who performs this work. Note also all Addenda.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Translucent wall glazing in aluminum frames.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Provide manufacturer' s translucent reinforced polymer wall glazing
system that has been produced, fabricated, and installed to withstand
normal temperature changes, wind loading, and impact loading without
failure including loss or breakage of polymer sheets, failure of
sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight, deterioration of
sheet and glazing materials, and other defects in materials and
installation.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract
a1 ► and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each translucent wall panels and framing material
specified.
C. Shop drawings detailing fabrication and installation of translucent wall
system.
D. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's color
charts showing full range of colors and finishes available for each type
of translucent wall panels indicated.
E. Material test reports from qualified independent testing laboratory
indicating and interpreting test results relative to compliance of
translucent wall system materials with requirements indicated.
2 F. Compatibility and adhesion test reports from adhesive manufacturer
indicating that panel materials have been tested for compatibility and
adhesion.
G. Research reports or evaluation reports of the model code organization
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that show translucent wall
system's compliance with building codes in effect for the Commonwealth
of Massachusetts.
H. Maintenance data for translucent wall panels, for inclusion with other
operation and maintenance instructions specified in Division 1 Section
TRANSLUCENT WALL SYSTEMS 08951-1
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
H. Anchorage: After system components are positioned, fix connections to
building structure as indicated on Shop Drawings.
1. Provide separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and .�
electrolytic deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of
moving joints.
I. Welding: Weld components to comply with referenced standard and Shop
Drawings, unless otherwise indicated. Weld in concealed locations to
minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Protect glazing surfaces
from welding.
J. Install glazing according to Shop Drawings. Comply with requirements of
Section 08800 "Glazing, " unless otherwise indicated.
K. Install sealant according to Shop Drawings. Comply with requirements of
Section 07901 "Joint Sealants, " unless otherwise indicated.
war
L. Install insulation materials in locations indicated. Comply with
requirements of Section 07210 "Building Insulation, " unless otherwise
indicated.
M. Install entrance doors plumb and level, securely anchored, and without
distortion. Adjust weather-stripping contact and hardware movement to
provide specified performance and proper operation.
N. Erection Tolerances: Install glazed aluminum curtain wall system to
comply with the following maximum tolerances:
.ie
1. Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m) ; 1/4 inch in 40 feet (6 mm
in 12 m) .
2 . Level: 1/8 inch in 20 feet (3 mm in 6 m) ; 1/4 inch in 40 feet (6 mm Ak
in 12 m) .
3 . Alignment: Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true
alignment to 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) ; where a reveal or protruding
element separates aligned surfaces by less than 2 inches (50.8 mm) , Ara
limit offset to % inch (12.7 mm) .
4. Location: Limit variation from plane br location shown on Shop
Drawings to 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3 .7 m) ; % inch (12.7 mm)
over total length.
3 .3 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable
to manufacturer and Installer, that ensure glazed aluminum curtain wall
system is without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial
Completion.
END OF SECTION 08920
ow
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 08920 - 10
2r
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
thermo-cured system, composed of specially formulated inhibitive
primer and fluorocarbon color coat, and clear fluorocarbon topcoat,
with both color coat and clear topcoat containing not less than 70
400 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; comply with
AAMA 605.2 .
2. Organic Coating: AA-M10 C41R1x Siliconized Polyester Finish
primer/top coat system complying with AAMA 605.2, with a dry film
thickness at no less than 1.5 mils will be an acceptable
substitution.
a. Color and Gloss: As selected by the Architect from
manufacturer's standard choices for color and gloss.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .1 EXAMINATION
P0
A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance
of glazed aluminum curtain wall system. Do not proceed with installation
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected or accommodations
- acceptable to Architect have been made.
3 .2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for protecting,
handling, and installing glazed aluminum curtain wall system. Do not
install damaged components. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free
of burrs and distortion. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. Seal joints
watertight, unless otherwise indicated. Provide means to drain water to
the exterior to produce a permanently weatherproof system.
B. Metal Protection: Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect
against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by
applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.
Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against
corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring
in glazing channels, condensation occurring within framing members, and
moisture migrating within the system to the exterior.
D. Install framing members plumb and true in alignment with established
lines and grades.
E. Install factory-assembled frame units plumb and true in alignment with
established lines and grades.
F. Install aluminum trim plumb and true in alignment with established lines
and grades.
G. Install entrance doors plumb and level, securely anchored, and without
distortion. Adjust weather-stripping contact and hardware movement to
provide specified performance and proper operation.
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 08920 - 9
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
or deformations, before finishing.
C. Prepare components to receive concealed fasteners and anchor and
connection devices.
D. Fabricate components to drain water passing joints, condensation
occurring in glazing channels, condensation occurring within framing
members, and moisture migrating within the system to the exterior. `
E. Welding: Weld components to comply with referenced standard and Shop
Drawings, unless otherwise indicated. Weld before finishing components.
Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize
distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding
oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding.
F. Glazing Pockets: Provide minimum clearances for thickness and type of
glass indicated according to FGMA's "Glazing Manual. "
w
G. Metal Protection: Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect
against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by
applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.
Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against 6W
corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
H. Frame Units: Factory assemble frame units according to Shop Drawings to
greatest extent possible. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. Seal
joints watertight, unless otherwise indicated. Assemble components to
drain water passing joints, condensation occurring in glazing channels,
condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating *�*
within the system to the exterior.
1. Install glazing according to Shop Drawings. Comply with
requirements of Section 08800 "Glazing, " unless otherwise indicated.
2 . Weatherstripping: For exterior doors, provide compression
weatherstripping against fixed stops. At other edges, provide
sliding weatherstripping retained in adjustable strip mortised into
door edge.
3 . Provide EPDM or vinyl-blade gasket weatherstripping in bottom door A.
rail, adjustable for contact with threshold.
2.5 ALUMINUM FINISHES Oft
A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural
and Metal Products" for recommendations relative to applying and
designating finishes. to
B. High Performance Organic Coating: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish:
cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: chemical conversion
coating, acid chromate-fluoride-phosphate pretreatment; Organic Coating:
as specified below) . Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed
metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturer's
instructions.
1. Fluorocarbon 3-Coat Coating System: Manufacturer's standard 3-coat
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 08920 - 8
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
Ab TO T r A KB #96079
mil (0.762-mm) thickness per coat.
2 .3 COMPONENTS
A. Aluminum Trim Panels: Aluminum panels of thickness indicated, flat with
no deviations in plane exceeding 1/16 inch in 24 inches (1.5 mm in 600
mm) or 1/8 inch (3 mm) over entire panel.
1. Face Sheets: 1/8" (3mm) thick aluminum.
a. Texture: Smooth.
2 . Panel Framing: 1" aluminum angles, welded to face sheets.
3. Refer to Section 08410 "Aluminum Entrances."
B. Stile-and-Rail Type Entrance Doors: As specified in Section 08410
"Aluminum Entrances."
C. Brackets and Reinforcements: Provide manufacturer's standard high-
strength aluminum brackets and reinforcements. Provide nonstaining,
nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
D. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant,
nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with
adjacent materials. Finish exposed portions to match glazed aluminum
curtain wall.
1. At movement joints, use slip-joint linings, spacers, and sleeves of
material and type recommended by manufacturer.
2 . Where fasteners anchor into aluminum less than 0.125 inch (3 .2 mm)
thick, provide reinforcement to receive fastener threads.
3 . Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads finished
to match framing members, unless otherwise indicated.
E. Anchors: 3-way adjustable anchors that accommodate fabrication and
installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with adjoining
materials and recommended by manufacturer.
1. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron,
malleable-iron, or steel inserts complying with ASTM A 123 or
ASTM A 153 requirements.
F. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant,
nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing, compatible with adjacent materials,
and of type recommended by manufacturer.
2 .4 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate glazed aluminum curtain wall system according to Shop
Drawings. Fabricate components that, when assembled, will have
accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered to produce hairline
joints free of burrs and distortion. After fabrication, clearly mark
components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop
Drawings.
B. Forming: Form shapes with sharp profiles, straight and free of defects
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 08920 - 7
we
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA YM 496079
deflection.
2. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements.
3 . Failure of system to meet performance requirements.
4. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond
normal weathering.
5. Failure of operating components to function normally.
6. Water leakage.
7. Glazing breakage.
C. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion.
w
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
by the following:
1. "Thermally Improved S-5600 Curtain Wall", EFCO Corporation.
2 .2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use
and finish indicated, complying with the requirements of standards
indicated below.
wW
1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M) .
2 . Extruded Bars, Rods, Shapes, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M) .
3 . Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. """
4 . Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10.
B. Steel Reinforcement: ASTM A 36 (ASTM A 36M) for structural shapes, ,
plates, and bars; ASTM A 611 for cold-rolled sheet and strip; or
ASTM A 570 (ASTM A 570M) for hot-rolled sheet and strip.
C. Glazing as specified in Section 08800 "Glazing. " wr
D. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing
system of black, resilient elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks,
and shims or spacers; in hardness recommended by manufacturer. '
E. Glazing sealants and fillers as specified in Section 08800 "Glazing. "
of
F. Framing system gaskets and joint fillers as recommended by manufacturer
for joint type.
G. Sealants and joint fillers for joints within glazed aluminum curtain wall Abs
system as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants. "
H. Firesafing materials as specified in Section 07841 "Through-Penetration 00
Firestop Systems" .
I. Insulating materials as specified in Section 07210 "Building Insulation. "
J. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-
Paint 12 requirements, except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 08920 - 6
�t
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, D A KB #96079
curtain wall systems, including drawings, based on testing and
engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies
similar to those indicated for this Project.
D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of glazed aluminum curtain wall
system from one source and by a single manufacturer.
E. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional
requirements of glazed aluminum curtain wall system and are based on the
specific system indicated. Other manufacturers' systems with equal
'! performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1
Section "Substitutions. "
1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by
Architect, except with Architect's approval and only to the extent
needed to comply with performance requirements. Where modifications
are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for
review.
F. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.2,
"Structural Welding Code--Aluminum. "
1. Engage welders who have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification
tests for welding processes involved and who are currently certified
1A for these processes.
G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply
with requirements of Division 1 Section "Project Meetings. "
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
aA► A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurements before
fabrication and show recorded measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate
fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the
Work.
OR
1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work,
guarantee dimensions and proceed with fabrication without field
measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual
dimensions correspond to guaranteed dimensions.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall
not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other
provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run
concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under
requirements of the Contract Documents.
!' B. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by the manufacturer
agreeing to repair or replace components of a glazed aluminum curtain
wall system that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified
warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 08920 - 5
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTuATON, MA KB #9607
xAe
including anchorage, that accommodates dimensional tolerances of building
frame and other adjacent construction.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions
of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for each product specified, including details of
construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components,
profiles, and finishes.
C. Shop Drawings showing fabrication and installation of glazed aluminum
curtain wall system including plans, elevations, sections, details of
components, and attachments to other units of Work.
1. For installed products indicated to comply with certain design
loadings, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the �w
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
D. Samples for initial selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts
showing the full range of colors available for components with factory- '
applied color finishes.
E. Welder certificates indicating that welders comply with requirements
specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
F. Installer certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that installers
comply with requirements in "Quality Assurance" Article. '"W
G. Product test reports from a qualified independent testing agency
evidencing compliance of glazed aluminum curtain wall system with .A
requirements based on comprehensive testing of manufacturer's current
system.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE ow
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: To qualify for approval, an independent
testing agency must demonstrate to Architect's satisfaction, based on
evaluation of agency-submitted criteria conforming to ASTM E 699, that
it has the experience and capability to satisfactorily conduct the
testing indicated without delaying the Work.
w
B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is
legally qualified to practice in the State of Massachusetts and who is
experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated.
Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of
glazed aluminum curtain wall systems that are similar to those indicated
for this Project in material, design, and extent.
00
C. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to assume
engineering responsibility and perform work of this Section who has
specialized in installing glazed aluminum curtain wall systems similar
to those required for this Project and who is acceptable to manufacturer. va
1. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for glazed aluminum
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 08920 - 4
op
04
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
!A
(1.609 km) of wind for relevant exposure category.
F. Seismic Loads: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system, including
anchorage, capable of withstanding the effects of earthquake motions
calculated according to requirements of the Massachusetts State Building
Code, as determined by the Curtain wall Fabricator' s design engineer.
G. Dead Loads: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system members that do
not deflect an amount which will reduce glazing bite below 75 percent of
design dimension when carrying full dead load. Provide a minimum 1/8-
? inch (3 .18-mm) clearance between members and top of fixed panels,
glazing, or other fixed part immediately below. Provide a minimum 1/16-
inch (1.59-mm) clearance between members and operable windows and doors.
H. Live Loads: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system, including
anchorage, that accommodates supporting structure's deflection from
uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads indicated without
failure of materials or permanent deformation.
I. Air Infiltration: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system with
W permanent resistance to air leakage through system of not more than 0.10
cfm/sq. ft. of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a
static-air-pressure difference of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (299 Pa) .
1. Provide operable windows with permanent resistance to air leakage
complying with AAMA 101 requirements for types of windows indicated.
J. water Penetration: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system that does
not evidence water leakage when tested according to ASTM E 331 at minimum
differential pressure of 20 percent of inward acting wind-load design
pressure as defined by ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and
Other Structures, " but not less than 15 lbf/sq. ft.
K. Thermal Movements: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system,
Wa including anchorage, that accommodates thermal movements of system and
supporting elements resulting from the following maximum change (range)
in ambient and surface temperatures without buckling, damaging stresses
on glazing, failure of joint sealants, damaging loads on fasteners, noise
or vibration, and other detrimental effects.
1. Temperature Change (Range) : 120 deg F (67 deg C) , ambient; 180
deg F (100 deg C) , material surfaces.
L. Structural Support Movement: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system
that accommodates structural movements including, but not limited to,
sway, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection.
M. Condensation Resistance: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system
with condensation-resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 55 when tested
according to AAMA 1503 .1.
N. Average Thermal Conductance: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system
with an average U-value of not more than 0.65 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F
when tested according to AAMA 1503.1.
0. Dimensional Tolerances: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system,
op GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 08920 - 3
an
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA #96079
1.3 SUMMARY wo
A. This Section includes the following:
.e
1. Glazed aluminum curtain wall, stick system installation.
2 . Formed aluminum trim panels, including anchorages, shims, fasteners,
accessories and support brackets.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that
relate to this Section:
wee
1. Section 07210 "Building Insulation" for insulation materials, field
installed in conjunction with glazed aluminum curtain wall system.
2. Section 07841 "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" "Firestopping"
for firesafing materials.
3 . Section 07901 "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants installed as part
of glazed aluminum curtain wall system.
4. Section 08410 "Aluminum Entrances" for aluminum doors and hardware.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. General: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system that has the
following capabilities based on testing manufacturer's standard units in
assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project:
B. Glazing is physically and thermally isolated from framing members.
C. System is pressure equalized at its interior face.
D. System is reglazable from the exterior.
E. Wind Loads: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system, including
anchorage, capable of withstanding wind-load design pressures calculated
using a "design wind pressure" of 35 psf wind pressure, or as determined
from the Massachusetts State Building Code, whichever is greater, as
determined by the Curtain Wall Fabricator's design engineer.
1. Sidesway (Story Drift) : Accommodate building story drift when wind
loads effect maximum overturning moment. Calculate story drift
according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
2 . Deflection of framing members in a direction normal to wall plane is
limited to 1/175 of clear span or 3/4 inches (19 mm) , whichever is
smaller, unless otherwise indicated.
3 . Deflection of framing members in a direction normal to wall plane is
limited to 1/360 of clear span, 3/4 inches (19 mm) maximum, where
plaster or gypsum board surfaces are subject to bending.
4 . Deflection of framing embers overhanging 10
g ging an anchor point is limited
to 2 times the length of the cantilevered member, divided by 175.
5. Test Performance: Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system that
does not evidence material failures, structural distress, or *0
permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent
of clear span when tested according to ASTM E 330.
a. Test Pressure: 150 percent of inward and outward wind-load
design pressures.
b. Duration: As required by design wind velocity; fastest 1 mile
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 08920 - 2
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
` KB #96079
NORTHAMPTON, MA
SECTION 08920 - GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 TIME, MANNER AND REQUIREMENTS FOR FILING SUB-BIDS
A. Sub-Bids shall be submitted in accordance with the provisions of General
Laws, Chapter 149, Section 44A to 44I, inclusive, as amended.
B. Sub-Bids for work under this Section shall be received at the Council
Chambers at Town Hall, 210 Main Street, Northampton, MA 01060, until 2:00
p.m. local time on February 9, 1999, at which time all filed Sub-Bids
shall be opened, read aloud, and duly recorded.
C. Sub-Bids shall be submitted on forms identical to those contained in
Bidding Requirements: Bid Form for Sub-Bidder. The Bid Forms attached
hereto are for information only and shall not be detached, filled in, or
executed. All Sub-Bids shall be submitted on the FORM FOR SUB-BID
furnished by the Awarding Authority as required by Section 44G of Chapter
149 of the General Laws, as amended. Sub-Bids Forms shall be completely
filled in and all Sub-Bids which are incomplete, conditional, obscure,
or which contain any additions not called for will be rejected.
D. Sub-Bids filed with the Awarding Authority shall be accompanied by a Bid
Ywi Deposit in the form of a certified check or a treasurer's or cashier's
check issued by a responsible bank or trust company, payable to the City
of Northampton. A bid bond shall be:
1. On a form satisfactory to the Awarding Authority.
2 . With a surety company qualified to do business in the Commonwealth
and satisfactory to the Awarding Authority.
3 . Conditioned upon the faithful performance by the principal of the
agreements contained in the Bid. The amount of such bid deposit
shall be five percent (5%) of the value of the Bid.
E. Sub-Bids for work under this Section shall be for the complete work
required as specified and as shown on the drawings.
F. Sub-Bidders are directed to the Instructions to Bidders, and to the
requirements that all bidders visit the site to determine the scope of
work required under this Section.
G. Sub-Bidders must comply with all provisions of Division 1, General
Requirements, in the same manner as the General Contractor.
go H. Work to be done under this Filed Sub-Bid is included in the Contract
Documents as listed in LOD-1 through LOD-5 (List of Drawings) .
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this work. Note also all Addenda.
GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 08920 - 1
P0
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
KB #96079
NORTHAMPTON, b A
against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed
to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket
applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.
H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.
3.5 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)
A. Install continuous spacers between glass lites and glazing stops to
maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding
�w into glass channel weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers in
place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to
edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.
B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure
complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
�w C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away
from glass. Install pressurized gaskets to protrude slightly out of
channel to eliminate dirt and moisture pockets.
3 .6 PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately after installation by
attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not
apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean
surfaces.
B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from
construction operations including weld splatter. If, despite such
protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass,
remove them immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer.
! ! C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other
masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less
than once a month, for build-up of dirt, scum, alkali deposits, or
stains, and remove as recommended by glass manufacturer.
D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or
damaged in any way, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism,
during construction period.
E. Wash glass on both faces in each area of Project not more than 4 days
prior to date scheduled for inspections that establish date of
P0 Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended by glass
manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 08800
08800 - 11
GLAZING
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS an
NORT vm #96079
site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other
imperfections that, when installed, weaken glass and impair
performance and appearance.
w
C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants,
as determined by preconstruction sealant-substrate testing.
D. Install elastomeric setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located
to comply with referenced glazing standard, unless otherwise required
by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant
suitable for heel bead.
�sw
E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for
installing glass lites.
F. Provide spacers for glass sizes larger than 50 united inches (length
plus height) as follows:
1. Locate spacers inside, outside, and directly opposite each other.
Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face
clearances, except where gaskets and glazing tapes are used that
have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and
comply with system performance requirements.
2 . Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness
equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly
less than final compressed thickness of tape.
G. Provide edge blocking to comply with requirements of referenced glazing
publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. w
H. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and
similar characteristics.
w
3 .4 TAPE GLAZING
A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that when compressed by glass their 00
exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of
stops.
B. Install tapes continuously but not in one continuous length. Do not an
stretch tapes to make them fit opening.
C. Where framing joints are vertical, cover these joints by applying tapes so
to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Where framing joints are
horizontal, cover these joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to
heads and sills.
am
D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths
butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible
sealant approved by tape manufacturer.
E. Do not remove release paper from tape until just before each lite is
installed.
F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.
G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly
GLAZING 08800 - 10
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
TOT MA KB #96079
NORTHAMP ,E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass
lateral movement (side-walking) .
F. Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient,
nonstaining, nonextruding, nonoutgassing, strips of closed-cell plastic
foam of density, size, and shape to control sealant depth and otherwise
contribute to produce optimum sealant performance.
2 .9 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS
A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze
openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and
surface conditions, and bite complying with recommendations of product
manufacturer and referenced glazing standard as required to comply with
ON system performance requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
00
3 .1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine glass framing, with glazier present, for compliance with the
following:
1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for
size, squareness, offsets at corners.
2 . Presence and functioning of weep system.
3 . Minimum required face or edge clearances.
4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.
B. Do not proceed with glazing until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3 .2 PREPARATION
A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass
immediately before glazing. Remove coatings that are not firmly bonded
to substrates.
3 .3 GLAZING, GENERAL
A. Comply with combined recommendations of manufacturers of glass,
sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, except where more
stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced
glazing publications.
B. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation as
follows:
1. Use a rolling block in rotating glass units to prevent damage to
PF glass corners. Do not impact glass with metal framing. Use
suction cups to shift glass units within openings; do not raise or
drift glass with a pry bar. Rotate glass lites with flares or
bevels on bottom horizontal edges so edges are located at top of
opening, unless otherwise indicated by manufacturer's label.
2 . Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off
No
08800 - 9
GLAZING
W
.w
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA #96079
glass products, seals of insulating glass units, and glazing
channel substrates, under conditions of installation and service,
as demonstrated by testing and field experience.
2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturer's w
recommendations for selecting glazing sealants and tapes that are
suitable for applications indicated and conditions existing at time
of installation.
3 . Color: Provide color of exposed joint sealants to comply with the WN
following:
a. Provide selections made by Architect from Manufacturer's full
range of standard colors for roducts of type ype indicated.
B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard
chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of base polymer indicated that w�
comply with ASTM C 920 requirements.
1. Exterior Glazing Sealant - G.E. Silpruf.
2 . Interior Glazing Sealant - Pecora M242.
2.7 GLAZING TAPES
A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric
tape with a solids content of 100 percent, nonstaining and nonmigrating
in contact with nonporous surfaces, with or without spacer rod as
recommended by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated,
packaged on rolls with a release paper backing, and complying with
AAMA 800 for products indicated below:
1. AAMA 804 .1. OR
2 . AAMA 806.1.
3 . AAMA 807.1.
B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tape: Closed-cell, polyvinyl chloride foam
tape, factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces, packaged on rolls
with release liner protecting adhesive, and complying with AAMA 800 for so
product 810.5.
2 .8 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
OR
A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with
referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and
other glazing materials involved for glazing application indicated, and am
with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in
installation.
B. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket M
manufacturer.
C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness
of 85 plus or minus 5.
D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A
durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass ■w
lites in place for installation indicated.
GLAZING 08800 - 8
40
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB 496079
ON a. Mesh m2 (square) .
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide wired
on glass by one of the following companies.
1. Polished Wired Glass:
a. Ashai Glass Co.
b. Central Glass Co. , Ltd.
C. Nippon Sheet Glass Ltd.
d. Pilkington Sales (North America) Ltd.
2 .5 INSULATING GLASS PRODUCTS
A. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Preassembled units consisting of
organically sealed lites of glass separated by argon gas filled spaces
complying with ASTM E 774 and with other requirements indicated.
1. For properties of individual glass lites making up units, refer to
requirements specified elsewhere in this Section applicable to
types, classes, kinds, and conditions of glass products comprising
lites of insulating glass units.
2 . Provide heat-treated, coated float glass of Kind FT (fully
tempered) .
B. Configuration: Provide preassembled insulated glass units in the
following configurations:
1. Insulating units designated Type A, consisting of an exterior lite
of 1/4" thick tempered clear glass, separated by a %" thick air
space, with an interior lite of 1/4" thick tempered clear glass.
Manufacturer's Standard Low Emissivity coating applied to the #3
surface.
2 . Insulating units, designated Type D, consisting of an exterior lite
of 1/8" thick tempered clear glass, separated by a 5/8" air space,
with an interior lite of 1/8" thick tempered clear glass.
Manufacturer's Standard Low Emissivity coating applied to the #3
va surface.
3 . Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of
the following:
a. Viracon, Inc.
b. Tempglass, Inc.
C. Guardian.
d. AFG.
e. Cardinal IG.
2 .6 ELASTOMERIC GLAZING SEALANTS
A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the
following requirements:
1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants and tapes of proven
compatibility with other materials they will contact, including
08800 - 7
GLAZING
I�1
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #9607g
2.2 HEAT-TREATED FLOAT GLASS s
A. Uncoated, Clear, Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition A
(uncoated surfaces) , Type I (transparent glass, flat) , Class 1 (clear) ,
Quality q3 (glazing select) , kind as indicated below.
1. Kind FT (fully tempered) , 1/4" thickness, designated as Type C,
provide with grind-to-butt edges where required.
B. Coated, Clear, Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition C
(other coated glass) , Type I (transparent glass, flat) , Class 1 (clear) ,
Quality q3 (glazing select) , with coating type and performance
characteristics complying with requirements specified under coated glass
products; kind as indicated below:
1. Kind FT (fully tempered) , for use in sealed insulating glass units.
C. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
heat-treated glass by one of the following companies.
1. Guardian Industries Corp.
2 . Tempglass.
3 . Viracon, Inc.
D. Where Type C glass is indicated as one-way, provide the product listed
below.
1. Mirropane EP by L.O.F.
2.3 COATED MONOLITHIC GLASS PRODUCTS
A. Pyrolyti cal ly-Coated Glass Products: Flat glass with reflective
metallic oxide coating applied Pyrolytically either during initial
manufacture or during heat treatment.
B. Manufacturers: Provide Coated Monolithic Glass Products manufactured
by one of the manufacturers listed for Heat-Treated Float Glass meeting
the following criteria:
1. U-Value, winter: 0.32. ON
2 . U-Value, summer: 0.35.
3 . Shade Coefficient: 0.24.
4. Solar Transmittance: 13%.
5. Visible Light Transmittance: 17%. no
6. Relative Heat Gain: 53 .
7. Solar Reflectance: 9%.
2.4 WIRED GLASS
A. Wired Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type II (patterned and wired glass, flat) ,
Class 1 (clear) , Quality q8 (glazing) ; 6 mm (0.23 inch) thick; of form wo
and mesh pattern indicated below:
1. Polished Wired Glass designated as Type B: Form 1 (wired, polished no
both sides) , and as follows:
w
GLAZING 08800 - 6
40
eo
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTQN, MA WE #96079
condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other
causes.
1. Where insulating glass units will be exposed to substantial
altitude changes, comply with insulating glass fabricator's
recommendations for venting and sealing to avoid hermetic seal
ruptures.
1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and
substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by
glazing materials manufacturer or when glazing channel substrates are
wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
1. Install liquid sealants at ambient and substrate temperatures above
40 deg F (4.4 deg C) .
1.10 WARRANTY
A. General: Warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive the
Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the
Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with
other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the
Contract Documents.
B. Manufacturer's Warranty on Coated Glass Products: Submit written
warranty signed by coated glass manufacturer agreeing to furnish
replacements for those coated glass units that deteriorate as defined
in "Definitions" article, f.o.b. point of manufacture, freight allowed
Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below.
OR Warranty covers only deterioration due to normal conditions of use and
not to handling, installing, and cleaning practices contrary to glass
manufacturer's published instructions.
1. Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard but not less than 5 years
after date of Substantial Completion.
C. Manufacturer's Warranty on Insulating Glass: Submit written warranty
signed by manufacturer of insulating glass agreeing to furnish
replacements for insulating glass units that deteriorate as defined in
"Definitions" article, f.o.b. point of manufacture, freight allowed
Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below.
Warranty covers only deterioration due to normal conditions of use and
not to handling, installing, protecting, and maintaining practices
contrary to glass manufacturer's published instructions.
1. Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard but not less than 10
years after date of Substantial Completion.
P0
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
so
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
products specified.
08800 - 5
GLAZING
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS ns
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
tape, gaskets, setting blocks, and edge blocks. s,
G. Product test reports for each type of glazing sealant and gasket
indicated, evidencing compliance with requirements specified.
so
H. Maintenance data for glass and other glazing materials to include in
Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1.
an
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass
product manufacturers and organizations below, except where more so
stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for
glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced
standards.
so
1. FGMA Publications: "FGMA Glazing Manual. "
2 . LSGA Publications: "LSGA Design Guide. "
3. SIGMA Publications: TM-3000 "Vertical Glazing" .
B. Safety Glass: Products complying with ANSI 297.1 and testing
requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201 for Category II materials. a
1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide safety glass
permanently marked with certification label of Safety Glazing
Certification Council (SGCC) or other certification agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Insulating Glass Certification Program: Provide insulating glass units ..
permanently marked either on spacers or at least one component lite of
units with appropriate certification label of inspecting and testing
agency indicated below:
1. Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC) .
2 . Associated Laboratories, Inc. (ALI) .
3 . National Certified Testing Laboratories (NCTL) .
no
D. Glazier Qualifications: Engage an experienced glazier who has completed
glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for
Project with a record of successful in-service performance. w�
E. Single-Source Responsibility for Glass: Obtain glass from one source
for each product indicated below:
w
1. Primary glass of each (ASTM C 1036) type and class indicated.
2 . Heat-treated glass of each (ASTM C 1048) condition indicated.
3. Insulating glass of each construction indicated. so
F. Single-Source Responsibility for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing
accessories from one source for each product and installation method
indicated. wa
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
ewe
A. Protect glazing materials to comply with manufacturer's directions and
as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from
GLAZING 08800 - 4
ON
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB 496079
on in-service conditions. Provide glass lites for the various size
openings in the thicknesses and strengths (annealed or heat-treated) to
meet or exceed the following criteria:
■w
1. Tinted and heat-absorbing glass thicknesses for each tint indicated
are the same throughout Project.
PW 2 . Minimum glass thicknesses of lites, whether composed of annealed
or heat-treated glass, are selected so the worst-case probability
of failure does not exceed the following:
a. 8 lites per 1000 for lites set vertically or not over 15
degrees off vertical and under wind action. Determine minimum
thickness of monolithic annealed glass according to ASTM
E 1300. For other than monolithic annealed glass, determine
on thickness per glass manufacturer's standard method of analysis
including applying adjustment factors to ASTM E 1300 based on
type of glass.
an
C. Normal thermal movement results from the following maximum change
(range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass-framing
members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on
OR materials' actual surface temperatures due to both solar heat gain and
nighttime sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Change (Range) : 120 deg F (67 deg C) , ambient;
180 deg F (100 deg C) , material surfaces.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each glass product and glazing material indicated.
C. Samples for verification purposes of 12-inch-square samples of each type
of glass indicated except for clear monolithic glass products.
D. Product certificates signed by glazing materials manufacturers
certifying that their products comply with specified requirements.
1. Separate certifications are not required for glazing materials
bearing manufacturer' s permanent labels designating type and
so thickness of glass, provided labels represent a quality control
program of a recognized certification agency or independent testing
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
on E. Compatibility and adhesion test reports from sealant manufacturer
indicating that glazing materials were tested for compatibility and
adhesion with glazing sealants. Include sealant manufacturer's
interpretation of test results relative to sealant performance and
recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for
adhesion.
F. Compatibility test report from manufacturer of insulating glass edge
sealant indicating that glass edge sealants were tested for
compatibility with other glazing materials including sealants, glazing
08800 - 3
GLAZING
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #9607
1.3 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes glazing for the following products, including
those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are
specified by reference to this Section:
1. Window units.
2 . Vision lites. on
3. Entrances and other doors.
4. Curtain wall glazing.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that w
relate to this Section.
1. Section 07820 "Metal Framed Skylights" for skylight glazing. no
2 . Section 08111 "Standard Steel Doors and Frames" for glazed hollow
metal frames.
3. Section 08211 "Flush Wood Doors", for glazed wood doors.
4. Section 08410 "Aluminum Entrances", for glazed aluminum doors and go
entrances.
5. Section 08525 "Aluminum Architectural Windows", for preglazed
windows. aw
6. Section 08920 "Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls" .
7. Section 10800 "Toilet Accessories", for glass mirrors.
1.4 DEFINITIONS no
A. Manufacturer is used in this Section to refer to a firm that produces
primary glass or fabricated glass as defined in the referenced glazing am
standard.
B. Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that
are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than "*
glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning coated glass
contrary to manufacturer's directions. Defects include peeling,
cracking, and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating.
C. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of the hermetic seal under
normal use due to causes other than glass breakage and improper
practices for maintaining, and cleaning insulating glass. Evidence of ON
failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on the
interior surfaces of glass. Improper practices for maintaining and
cleaning glass do not comply with the manufacturer's directions.
uw
1.5 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General : Provide glazing systems that are produced, fabricated, and
installed to withstand normal thermal movement, wind loading, and impact
loading (where applicable) , without failure including loss or glass
breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture,
fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain
watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; and other
defects in construction.
B. Glass Design: Glass thicknesses indicated on Drawings are for detailing as
only. Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and
w
GLAZING 08800 - 2
ww
P"
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, 14A KB #96079
10
SECTION 08800 - GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 TIME, MANNER AND REQUIREMENTS FOR FILING SUB-BIDS
A. Sub-Bids shall be submitted in accordance with the provisions of General
Laws, Chapter 149, Section 44A to 44I, inclusive, as amended.
B. Sub-Bids for work under this Section shall be received at the Council
Chambers at Town Hall, 210 Main Street, Northampton, MA 01060, until
2:00 p.m. local time on February 9, 1999, at which time all filed Sub-
Bids shall be opened, read aloud, and duly recorded.
C. Sub-Bids shall be submitted on forms identical to those contained in
Bidding Requirements: Bid Form for Sub-Bidder. The Bid Forms attached
hereto are for information only and shall not be detached, filled in,
or executed. All Sub-Bids shall be submitted on the FORM FOR SUB-BID
furnished by the Awarding Authority as required by Section 44G of
Chapter 149 of the General Laws, as amended. Sub-Bids Forms shall be
completely filled in and all Sub-Bids which are incomplete, conditional,
obscure, or which contain any additions not called for will be rejected.
D. Sub-Bids filed with the Awarding Authority shall be accompanied by a Bid
on Deposit in the form of a certified check or a treasurer's or cashier's
check issued by a responsible bank or trust company, payable to the City
of Northampton. A bid bond shall be:
1. On a form satisfactory to the Awarding Authority.
2 . With a surety company qualified to do business in the Commonwealth
and satisfactory to the Awarding Authority.
3 . Conditioned upon the faithful performance by the principal of the
agreements contained in the Bid. The amount of such bid deposit
shall be five percent (5%) of the value of the Bid.
E. Sub-Bids for work under this Section shall be for the complete work
required as specified and as shown on the drawings.
am F. Sub-Bidders are directed to the Instructions to Bidders, and to the
requirements that all bidders visit the site to determine the scope of
work required under this Section.
OM G. Sub-Bidders must comply with all provisions of Division 1, General
Requirements, in the same manner as the General Contractor.
H. Work to be done under this Filed Sub-Bid is included in the Contract
Documents as listed in LOD-1 through LOD-5 (List of Drawings) .
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this work. Note also all Addenda.
08800 - 1
GLAZING
DOOR AND HARDWARE SCHEDULE
DOOR FRAME FIRE I HARDWARE-SEE SPECIFICATIONS INDICATES NEW WORK
SEE SHEET A11.01 - A11.03 RATING1 FIRE CODE IDISABLED REQUIREMENTS
INDICATES EXISTING
O w CC ® INDICATES REUSE/
LL z z w Q 0 O RELOCATED EXISTING
o 0 J aO o 0 0 0 O FOR ABBREVIATIONS -
m 00 O > Q j Q U z N = z 0 w Z SEE DRAWING R0.01
° W W
Co LL° u_ LL U w W w W J J ° J w v w �_- ACCESSIBLE THRESHOLD NOTED
z Z) W w z Q a Q W � 0 z C0 0 g U z a J Z a J w FOR SADDLE ONLY. REFER TO
c9 z J W -, 20 G� Q w w O 0 j W Q 0 D a Fw- 3 m THRESHOLD DETAILS. (FLOOR
z F- w J w w O � ° ° = z w > a w ° = g w in a FINISH AT ALL DOORS PROVIDE
z W m > > X w ° w LL ° m w F= ° F= > _ a -� rn 3
a a a u� r ti g w Y F= w o FLUSH CONDITION)
W i ? O U U w w w W Q = R R O 5 _j w � > v U U
O `" "' ° a a = m � _ -, F- 0 w w a a w ° a Y" c REMARKS
446 A1.09 3'-0' T-0 HM-1 HMF-tE H-1 J-1 60 4 464
4C A1.09 IT-O' T-0' T-0' HM-2. HMF-1D H-1 J-1 60 1 1 184 #4
4D A1.13 '-0" T-0' T-0" HM-2 HMF-ID H-1 J-1 1 1 184 #4
At.t6 3'-0' 7'-0' HM-2 HMF-1D H-1 J-1 60 150
51A A1.05 TV T-0' T-0" HM-2 HMF-1D H-0A J-6A T-1 60 032 Exit Only
518 A1.05 '-0' 3'-0" 7'-0' HM-2 HMF-1D H-1 J-1 60 W 0 0 184
51C I A1.10 0 T-0' Y 7'-0' HM-2, HMF-1D H-1 J-1 0 t1 184 #4
510 A1.14 f -0' T-0' HM-2 HMF-1D H-1 J-1 0 150
General Hardware Remarks/Notes and Comments
1. Reuse existing hinges.Remove exisitng weatherstripping,furnish&install weatherstripping. Patch&refinish
existing door where hardware has been removed.
2. Remove Existing Deadbolt and Patch Door
3. Contractor to verify all existing hardware prep's for compatibility with new hardware being installed on existing
doors&frames.
4. All exit devices length to be 6"less than width of door,except @ Opening 1418A,24"Leaf.
5. Cylinders by Section 08710,Balance of Hardware to be provided by Section 08410,
1/8199 2:37:37 PM Northampton High School
08710-DS Page 19 of 19
DOOR AND HARDWARE SCHEDULE
DOOR FRAME FIRE HARDWARE-SEE SPECIFICATIONS INDICATES NEW WORK
SEE SHEET A11.01 - A11.0T RATING FIRE CODE DISABLED REQUIREMENTS
0 INDICATES EXISTING
O w W ® INDICATES REUSE/
Q cn z af 0 rwn o RELOCATED EXISTING
z w ¢ O
0 o_ 3 O U Oz FOR ABBREVIATIONS -
ww 00 0 > Q > Q j F 00 of z �z—� Z z O Lu Z SEE DRAWING R0.01
p w w p ¢ = 0 O rn z_
w w w W w = 0 0 �_ p w z ►_- w ACCESSIBLE THRESHOLD NOTED
z w Q z ¢ w Q w ¢ a o O cn w g U z ¢ Z Q w FOR SADDLE ONLY. REFER TO
z z -' w O Q w w O �zz c9 > w f= a o ¢ 3 m THRESHOLD DETAILS. {FLOOR
z w w m > > _ — 0 LL o u=i z w > < } a w 3 FINISH AT ALL DOORS PROVIDE
a. o Q Q a w ° w w `� �' v7 w w j V U U FLUSH CONDITION)
W W ¢ = X X O J W W ¢ U ¢
cn v7 = -� �- w w n- ¢ w 0 a. � Y f ¢ X = REMARKS
STAIRS
12A A1.01 T-0' 7'-0' HM-1 . HMF-IA H-5A J-5A T-1 025 #4, Exit Only
12B A1.01 3'-0' 7'-0' HM-2 , HMF-1A H-2 J-2 60 152 #4
12C A1.06 3'-0' T-0' HM-2 HMF-1A H-2 J-2 60 152 #4
13A A1.01 3'-0' 7'-0' HM-2 HMF-1A H-2 J-2 60 152 #4
138 A1.01 3'-0' T-0' HM-1 HMF-1A H-5A J-5A T-1 025 #4, Exit Only
13C A1.06 3'-0' 7'-0` HM-2 HMF-11A H-2 J-2 T-1 60 � 153 #4
14A A1.01 6 S-0- 3'-0' 6'-8' HM-2 HMF-1A H-5A J-5A T-1 60 t♦ 031 #4, Exit Only
14B A1.01 3'-0' 6'-8' HM-1 HMF--JA H-12 J-12 90 152 #4
14C A1.01 -0' 6'-8- HM-1 HMF-tA H-12 J-12 90 152 #4
14D A1. 66 '-0- 7'-0' HM-2. 'HMF-1A H-1 J-1 T-1 60 154 #4
14E A1.06 3'-0- 7'-0' HM-2 HMF-1A H-1 J-1 T-1 60 0 0 0 154
15 A1.06 3'-0' T-0' HM-1 . HMF-tA H 1 J-1 60 � 464
21 A1.11 T-0- 7'-0' HM-2 HMF-1D H-1 J-1 60 1 1 152 1#4
22A A1.02 T-0' 7'-0' HM-1 HMF-1E H-1 J-1 I t♦I I 1 1 1210
228 A1.07 O EX EX 251
23A A1.15 Y-0' T-0' WD-1 HMF-tE H-13 J-13 60 6 464
236 A1.15 3'-0' 6'-8' EXHM EXHM 60 NIC No Work
41A A1.04 T-0' 3'-0' 7'-0' HM-2 HMF-1D —H-6A J-6A T-1 033 #4
41B A1.04 3'-0' T-0' HM-2 HMF-1D H-1 J-1 60 t1 6 150
41C A1.16 3'-0' 02'-0' 7'-0'6'-8' HM-2 HMF-1D H-1 J-1 60 184 #4
41D A1.13 3'-0' 7'-0' HM-2 HMF-1D H 1 J-1 60 t♦ t♦ � � � 184 �
41E A1.04 S-0' 7-0' HM-2 HMF-1D H-1 J-1 60 150 #4
42A A1. 44 T-0' 7'-0- HM-2 HMF-1 H-1 J-1 90 165 #4
W43BAI.09 3'-0' HM-2 HMF-1D H-7 J-7 424 3'-0' 7'-0' HM-2 HMF-1D H-2 J-2 90 t♦ t♦ 150 A
3'-0' T-0' HM-2 HMF-1D H-1 J-1 60 0 00 0 150 #4
T-0' T-0' HM-2 HMF-1D H-1 J-1 60 t♦ 150 #4
3'-0' 7'-0- AL-1 ALF-14 ALJ-5 T-1 001 #4 #5
7'-0' HM-2 HMF-1D H-1 J-1 60 184 #4
3C At.13 3'-0' 3'-0' 7'-0' HM-2 HMF-10 H-1 J-1 60 184 #4
30 A1.16 3'-0` 1 7'-0' HM-2 HMF-10 H-1 J-1 60 150 #4
4A A1.09 O 3'-0' 1 7'-0' EXAL EXAL Q O X Power Assisted Entfance
1/8/99 2:37:37 PM Northampton Hinh School
08710-DS Page 18 of 19
DOOR AND HARDWARE SCHEDULE
DOOR FRAME FIRE I HARDWARE-SEE SPECIFICATIONS INDICATES NEW WORK
SEE SHEET A11.01 - A11.03 RATING1 FIRE CODE DISABLED REQUIREMENTS INDICATES EXISTING
O w X ® INDICATES REUSE/
Q z z w Q p o RELOCATED EXISTING
w O J a 3 O v Oz FOR ABBREVIATIONS -
w O Q > Q > ¢ > w ° Q z U) O z O Z
03 SEE DRAWING R0.01
j m o LL LL U w W w W J J ° U W O w w ACCESSIBLE THRESHOLD NOTED
z ? w w Q z Q Q w Q Q o c9 w g U z Q J Z Q w FOR SADDLE ONLY. REFER TO
J w g f— F— z 0 O -' Q w 3 -' w THRESHOLD DETAILS. FLOOR
c7 z J w J O w w O �= c9 > w Q ° = F- m Z
Z J J w w = O ° ° z w > < m w a g w c7 FINISH AT ALL DOORS PROVIDE
w w z � � c? a w a w Q g w U)i N O 6 g w 1 cc
Y v v cn a° FLUSH CONDITION)
O ai in o a ¢ z w w i w w a Q w o a Y ►a ¢ _
REMARKS
GRANDSTAND/SUPPORT BUILDING
G101 A15.01 3'-6' T-6' 7'-0' HM-1 HMF-IA H-1 J-1 T-1 0 0 084 ALTERNATE#2
G102 A15.01 3'-0' T-0' HM-1 . HMF-1A H-1 J-1 T-1 0101 0 050 ALTERNATE#2
G103A A15.01 '-0' T-0' HM-1 HMF-1A H-1 J-1 T-1 0101 W 071
G103B A15.01 7-0' 7-6' T-0' HM-1 HMF-1A H-1 J-1 T-1 *lei 9 w 085 ALTERNATE#2
G104A A15.01 3'-0' T-0' HM-6 HMF-1A H-1 J-1 T-1 0 040
G104B A15.01 2-8' T-0' HM-1 HMF-1A 1-1-1 J-1 451
G104C A15.01 -0' T-0' HM-6 HMF-1A H-1 040
G105A A15.01 3'-0' T-0' HM-0 HMF-1A H-1 J-1 T-1 0 040
1058 A15.01 3'-0' 7'-0' HMS HMF-1A H-i J-1 T-1 pqp
G105C A15.01 2 8' T•0' HM-4 HMF-tA H-1 J-1 T-1 0 0 461
1/8/99 2:37:36 PM Northampton High School
08710-DS Page 17 of 19
DOOR AND HARDWARE SCHEDULE
DOOR FRAME FIRE HARDWARE-SEE SPECIFICATIONS INDICATES NEW WORK
SEE SHEET A11.01 - A11.03 RATING FIRE CODE IDISABLED REQUIREMENTS
O INDICATES EXISTING
O z
O w of INDICATES REUSE/
w z z0 w Q p0 o RELOCATED EXISTING
o J O J0 3 0 0 0 FOR ABBREVIATIONS -
w 00 0 j a > Q j F U � z_ 2 z O w z SEE DRAWING R0.01
W p p F-. jy W W J W p = = O U O In Z = F-
m LL LL LL v w J W w J J p J � J H ►_ z w ACCESSIBLE THRESHOLD NOTED
z w w Q z Q W Q w ¢ Q p c9 U) W g cU> z a J z a w FOR SADDLE ONLY. REFER TO
z z -' w p Q w w O 0 j w H Q p a 3 m w THRESHOLD DETAILS. (FLOOR
W J W W H 0 p p 2 Q W = Z Q
z w > w w rn FINISH AT ALL DOORS PROVIDE
~ J U) J
w w 0 F c=7 w} p w LL p m w O cv g = w a F w m p it
FLUSH CONDITION)
O (n In p Q Q S F- h Q 2 J X X O p J W W V Q U Q
_ -� F- w w o ¢ w p o J Y �-I <1 cel ml REMARKS
THIRD LEVEL FLOOR PLAN-AREA-D
3404 A1.16 O 3'-0' *7'- EXWD EXWD 250
3405 A1.16 O 3'-0' EXWD EXWD 250 #2
3406 A1.16 3'-0' WD-6 HMF-1D H-6 J-6 200
3407A A1.16 O 3'-0' EXWD EXWD 250
34078 A1. 66 O EXWD EXWD 520
3408 A1.16 O T-0" EXWD EXWD 250
3409A A1.16 O 3'-0' EXWD EXWD 250 #2
34098 A1. 66 O EXWD EXWD 520
3411 A1.16 3'-0' 7'-0" WD-1 HMF-1D H-1 J-1 T-2 209
3411 A1.16 2 A' 7'-0' HM-1 HMF-1E H-13 J-13 451
3412 ;1.16 6-T-0- 7'-0' EXWD EXHM 250
3413 A1.16 3'-0' T-0' WD,-6 HMF-10 H-6 J-6 200
3414A A1.16 0 0--o- T-0' HM-1 HMF-16 H-3 J-3 90 465
3414B A1.16 T-0' T-0' HM-1. HMF-1B H-3 J-3 45 467
3415 A1.16 '-0" 70' WD-1 HMF-1D H-3 J-3 452
3416 A1.16 O 3'-0' 7'-0' EXWD- EXWD 250 #2
3417 A1.16 O 3'-0" T-0' EXWD EXWD 250 #2
3418 A1.16 O 3'-0' T-0' EXWD EXWD 250
3419 A1.16 O 3'-0' 7'-0` EXWD EXWD 250
3420 A1.16 2'-0` 7'-0' HM-1 HMF-1E H-13 J-13 40 456
3421 A1.16 3'-0" 7'-0' WD-1 HMF-1D H-1 J-1 T-2 0 208
3422 A1.16 3'-0" 7'-0' WD-3 HMF-1B H-3 J-3 300
3423 ;1.16 3'-0' 7'-0' WD-3 HMF-1B H-3 J-3
3424 A1.16 O 3'-0' T-0' EXWD EXWD O 310
3425 ;1.16 '-0' 7-0- T-0' WD-1 HMF-1D H-1 J-i A10 474
3426 A1.16 O 3'-0' T-0` EXWD EXWD 250
3427 A1.16 3'-0' 7'-0' WD-1 HMF-1D H-13 J-13 300
3428 A1.16 3'-0- T-0' WD-,1 HMF-1B H-3 J-3 T-2 605
3429 A1.16 49 3'-0' 7'-0` WD-1 HMF-1B H-3 J-3 T-2 605
3430 A1.16 3'-0" T-0" WD 1 HMF-1B H-3 J-3 300
3431 ;1.16 4 -0' 7'-0' WZ HMF-1D H-6 J-6 300
3432 A1.16 O EXWD EXWD 480 '
1/8/99 2:37:36 PM Northampton High School
08710-DS Page 16 of 19
DOOR AND HARDWARE SCHEDULE
DOOR FRAME FIRE HARDWARE-SEE SPECIFICATIONS INDICATES NEW WORK
SEE SHEET A11.01 - A11.03 RATING FIRE CODE DISABLED REQUIREMENTS
INDICATES EXISTING
p w i ® INDICATES REUSE/
LL 3: w m w fl RELOCATED EXISTING
J 0 0 J 0 p o 0 FOR ABBREVIATIONS -
Q U W z z T- Z p w z SEE DRAWING R0.01
m w o o F w R 1 o M S V _5 i J z = w ACCESSIBLE THRESHOLD NOTED
� m LL LL LL v H w w J J O w �' V z Q J 0 Q w m FOR SADDLE ONLY. REFER TO
z Q Q a w ¢ Q o p g v z J w
a w J w z Q a g �' r ' z p p Q W 3 m w THRESHOLD DETAILS. (FLOOR
ca z J J 2 p w w O c� y w f' Q o = z
w ` p o o = z w > Q w n g w in O Q FINISH AT ALL DOORS PROVIDE
z w J m ? ? }} o ww LL v m w ►- O �i Q}Q = w a w rn aa FLUSH CONDITION)
p to ca 0 Q Q w F- w 1- w w Q 2 J X X O D J w w (J Q c) Q
U) z f � w w a Q w o o- J Y F- ¢ w- 2 REMARKS
THIRD LEVEL FLOOR PLAN-AREA-B
3204A A1.15 0 '-0' T-0' HM-2 . HMF-1D H-1 J-1 45 1 1210
3204B A1.15 T-0' T.0' WD-1 HMF-16 H-3 J-3 45 01 275
3204C A1.15 T-0- 7'-0' WD4- HMF-10 H-3 J-3 45 304
3208 A1.15 TV 7-W 7'-0' WD-1 EXWD 471
3210A A1.15 T-0' 7'-0' HM-2� HMF-1D H-1 J-1 45 ` 210
32108 A1.15 3'-0' T-0' WD-1 HMF-1B H-3 J-3 45 275
3210C A1.15 T-0' 7' 0' WU4 HMF-10 H-3 J-3 45 • 0 0 304
3210D A1.15 S-W 7' 0' WD 1 HMF-1B H-3 J-3 45 508
3211A A1.15 0 T-0' T-0' WQ-3 HMF-1D H-1 J-1 45 215
3211B A1.15 0 S-0' 7'-0' WD-3 HMF-1 H-1 J-1 45 215
3211C A1.15 Y-w 7'-0' WD=1 HMF-1D H-1 J-1 460
3211D A1.15 3'-5' 6'-8' WD-1 HMF-1B H-1 J-1 45 276 .5'x84'M.O.
3213 A1.15 T-0- T-0' HM4 HMF-1D H-2 J-2 504
3214 A1.15 0 3'-0' T-0- HM-1, HMF-1D H-1 J-1 45 464
3215 A1.15 7-6' T-W WD-1 EXHM 0 305
3216 A1.15 7-6' T-0' M1 EXWD 701
3217 A1.15 IT-W 7-8' 7'-0' EXWD EXWD 485
201A A1.15 T-O' 6'-8' EXHM EXHM O O NIC No Work
42016 A1.15 T-0' 6'-8' EXHM EXHM O O NIC No Work
4202 A1.15 '-8' JEXHM JEXHM 1491 453
1/8/99 2:37:35 PM Northampton High School
08710-DS Page 15 of 19
DOOR AND HARDWARE SCHEDULE
DOOR FRAME FIRE I HARDWARE-SEE SPECIFICATIONS INDICATES NEW WORK
SEE SHEET A11.01 - A11.03 RATING 1 FIRE CODE IDISABLED REQUIREMENTS
O INDICATES EXISTING
O w X INDICATES REUSE/
LL m m � uj a- uwi o RELOCATED EXISTING
p 0 J � 3 O _j Ox FOR ABBREVIATIONS -
Q ° O z 0 m O SEE DRAWING R0.01
w O O > Q > Q > rQ U Q z x z Z z
w p ° t= w iY w J o = U w z I w ACCESSIBLE THRESHOLD NOTED
z "- Q w c w J ° O O w ~ U z Q _j ° Q w m FOR SADDLE ONLY. REFER TO
c.9 z J J _ ? 2 p w w o O j w Q p _ ~ m Z w THRESHOLD DETAILS. (FLOOR
z w w w w f- - O ° ° x z w > ¢ 2 w a g w � C9 3 FINISH AT ALL DOORS PROVIDE
z w m ? >_ w ° w " ° m w O ci } x w Y w m ° FLUSH CONDITION)W U) CO v o z ¢ o i a w N w d Z) w o Q a ra-
REMARKS
243013 A1.13 101 IT-0- T-0' WD-3 HMF-16 H-3 J-3 I I I I 1 101 1 1 1300
2431 1 A1.13 101 12-6- 1 16'-6- JEXHM JEXHM I I 1 101 1 1 1 101 1 1 1 1320
SECOND LEVEL FLOOR PLAN-AREA-E
2501 A1.14 '-0' 4'-0" T-0' HM-1 HMF-1D H-tA J-1A 90 019 * 191 #4
2503A A1.14 S-0' T-0' WD-3 HMF-1D H-8 J-8 45 0 0 1 0 211 WT Hinge
2503B A1.14 0 S-0' T-0" WD-3 HMF-1D H-2 J-2 45 0 01 0 0 215
2504A A1.14 0 3'-0' T-0" WD-1 HMF-1D H-6 J-6 45 0 01 0 0 214
25048 A1.14 O EXWD EXHM 0 1 0 240
2504C A1.14 0 T-0" T-0' WD4 HMF-1B H-3 J-3 45 0 01 0 0 215
2505A A1.14 0 IT-O' T-0' WD-3 HMF-1D H-2 J-2 45 010 1 010 215
25058 A1.14 0 3'-0' 7'-0' WD-3 HMF-1D H-2 J-2 45 00 00 215
2506 A1.14 0 T-0" 7'-0' WD-3 HMF-1D H-2 J-2 45 00 00 214 7.5'x 35'C.W.G.,WD Stops
2507 A1.14 O T-0' 7'-0' EXWD EXHM 0 0 O 240
2508A A1.14 O 3'-0" 7'-0' EXWD EXHM 0 O 240
2508B A1.14 0 T-0' T-0' WD-1 HMF-1 H-3 J-3 45 0 0 00 214
2509A A1.14 0 IT-0- T-0' WD-1- HMF-1D H-2 J-2 101 00 01 460
2509B A1.14 O 3'-0' 7'-0' EXWD EXHM 1 01 1 0 O 620
2510A A1.14 0 T-0" T-0" HM-1 HMF-1D H-2 J-2 45 0101 1 1 w__w 463
25108 A1.14 0 T-0' T.0' HW1 HMF-16 H-3 J-3 90 0101 1 1 0 0 464
2511 A1.14 0 3'-0' 7'-0' WD-3. HMF-D H-2 J-3 45 0101 1 1 00 214
2512 A1.14 0 S-0" 7'-0' WD-3 HMF-D H-2 J-3 45 0101 1 1 0.0 214
2513 A1.14 3'-0' 1 7'-0" WD-3 EXHM 01 1 1 1 01 200
2514 A1.14 01 T-0' 1 7'-0' WD-3 HMF-1D H-6 J-6 45 0101 1 1 010, 211 WT Hinge
2515A A1.14 01 T-0' T-0' WD4 HMF-1B H-3 J-3 0 1 1 0 1 200
25158 A1.14 01 T-0" T-0" WDA HMF-1B H-3 J-3 45 0 0 001 1 215
2516A A1.14 0 T-0' T-0' WD-3 HMF-11) H-6 J-6 45 0 0 001 1 211 WTHinge
2516B A1.14 0 T-0' 7'-0" WD-3 HMF-1D H-6 J-6 45 0 0 00 211 WT Hinge
2518A A1.14 0 S-0' 7'-0' WD4 HMF-1B H-3 J-3 0 0 452
25188 A1.14 0 T-0' T-0' JWD4 HMF-18 H-3 J-3 45 0 0 00 0 469
2519 A1.14 0 IT-0- T-0" WD-3` HMF-1 H-1 J-1 0 300
2520 A1.14 0 13'-0' 1 7'-0' IEXWD _ EXHM 101 1 1 01 1 13101
1/8/99 2:37:34 PM Northampton High School
08710-DS Page 14 of 19
I I I I j
DOOR AND HARDWARE SCHEDULE
DOOR FRAME FIRE HARDWARE-SEE SPECIFICATIONS INDICATES NEW WORK
SEE SHEET A11.01 - A11.03 RATING FIRE CODE DISABLED REQUIREMENTS
INDICATES EXISTING
O w Ir ® INDICATES REUSE/
LL N 3 a. O o RELOCATED EXISTING
z
w p O O v Oz FOR ABBREVIATIONS -
m O O >_ C > Q > w p Q = �p o 0 Z = z SEE DRAWING R0.01
g w p p f- J -� p _, = c� �_ ►_ z w ACCESSIBLE THRESHOLD NOTED
m LL LL z Q Q < Q H w w ¢ ¢ p c� U) w g cUi z a z Q w w FOR SADDLE ONLY. REFER TO
c� z J J w z p w w w O O j w F- Q o p = w 3 m Z THRESHOLD DETAILS. (FLOOR
z w w w �- - O p p w z w > w a g J O 3 FINISH AT ALL DOORS PROVIDE
w w z j ►�-- c0 a w d w LL
Q J U) F- w g w > Y a.
v V FLUSH CONDITION)
0 w In Q Q 2 F- N � (n 2 H w w d- Q W 0 d J Y ►a- Q w _
REMARKS
SECOND LEVEL FLOOR PLAN-AREA-D
2404 A1.13 3'-6' 3'-6' T-0" HM-1 HMF-1D H-tA J-1A 90 190 #4
2405 A1.13 '-0' T-0" WD-1 HMF-1D H-2 J-2 T-2 207
2406 A1.13 T-O" 7'-0" WD-6 EXWD 200 #3
2407A A1. 33 O T-0". 7'-0' EXWD EXWD 250
2407B A1.13 T-0' 7'-0' WD-1 EXWD 502
2407C A1.13 O EX EX 520
2408A A1.13 0 X-0" 71-0" WD-6 HMF-1 D H-6 J-6 200
2408B A1.13 O EX • EX 250
2409 A1.13 0 IT-O' T-0' WD-6 HMF-1D H-6 J-6 200
2410 A1.13 O IT-O' 7'-0' EX EXHM 250
2411 A1.13 O '-0' T-0' EXWD- EXWD 250
2412 A1.13 0 IT-0- T-0" WD-1 EXWD 200
2413 1 A1.13 O 3'-0" 7'-0' EXWD EXWD 430
2414 A1.13 '-0' 7'-0' WD-1 HMF-1D H-1 J-1 T-2 1209
2415 A1.13 7.4' T-0' HM-1 HMF-lE H-13 J-13 454
2416 A1.13 O 7A' T-0" EXWD EXWD 01 250
2417 A1.13 3'-0' 7'-0" EXWD EXWD 250
2418A A1.13 3'-0' T-0" HM-1 HMF-lB 1-1-3 J-3 90 0 01 465
24188 1 A1.13 '-0' T-0' HM-1 HMF-16 H-3 -3 45 0 467
2419 A1.13 O EX EXHM 0 250
2 20 A1.13'. O EX EX Y50
2421A A1.13 O 3'-0' T-0' EXWD EXWD 450
2421B A1.13 O EX JEX 520
2422 A1.13 0 7A" T-0' HM-1 HMF-1E H-13 J-13 01 456
2423 A1.13 01 0'-0" T-0" WD-'l HMF-1D H-1 J-1 T-2 010 208
2424 A1.13 O 7-6" 7'-0" EXWD EXWD dol 01 250
2425 A1.13 0 13'-0* 7'-0" WD-1 HMF-1B H-3 J-3 T-2 01 01 604
2426 1 A1.13 O 3'-0" T-0- IEXWD` EXWD 01 01 250
2427 A1.13 0 3'-0" 7'-0' WDA HMF-1E H-13A J-13A 01 300
2428 A1.13 T-0' 7'-0' WD-1 HMF-1B H-3 J-3 T-2 0 605
2429 A1.13 3'-0" T-0" WD-1 IHMF-lB 1-1-3 J-3 T-2 605 -
2430A A1.13 37-0- T-0' WD-1 HMF-1D H-1 J-1 300
1/8/99 2:37:33 PM Northampton High School
08710-DS Page 13 of 19
DOOR AND HARDWARE SCHEDULE
DOOR FRAME FIRE HARDWARE-SEE SPECIFICATIONS INDICATES NEW WORK
SEE SHEET A11.01- A11.03 RATING FIRE CODE DISABLED REQUIREMENTS O INDICATES EXISTING
O a w ®INDICATES REUSE/
LL co z 3 w o RELOCATED EXISTING Ir w z O u' a o OJ O
J O 0 J Of 3 c7 J U 2 FOR ABBREVIATIONS -
m � 0 0 > Q > Q W O Q = � UO O rn Z z
SEE DRAWING R0.01
Z) �o u- u- u- w w w w J o o m F w v J Z ACCESSIBLE THRESHOLD NOTED
z a ,� a a ~ w ¢ a o O 0 W O z a J Z a w FOR SADDLE ONLY. REFER TO
W J W Z a s a F- F- -� z U , J w J w
c9 z J w J — � O w w O O j w F: a s a 3 m ir THRESHOLD DETAILS. (FLOOR
z w J w w f- - O o = z w > a g w a = J z FINISH AT ALL DOORS PROVIDE
z w -' m > > = a w N ag o 2 } g O
w w O f- f c7 a a a m w U) ►_ ~ O 6 g w Y p w in o FLUSH CONDITION)
O (n (n Q Q S W W W a 2 J X R O 0 J W �in W U Q U
rn �n _ �- w w a a w o a J x t- a o! = REMARKS
SECOND LEVEL FLOOR PLAN-AREA-B
2201A A1.11 T-T T-0' T-0' WD-2 HMF-1D H-2 J-2 90 -OTO-T-OT 163 1#4
L2208A1.11 1.11 T-0" T-0' T-0' WD-2 HMF-1D H-2 J-2 90 0 163 #4
1.11 9 T-0' T-0' WD-2 HMF-1D H-3 J-3 90 * 404
.11 T-O" 3'-0' T-0' WD-2 HMF-1D H-1 J-1 90 0 163 #4
.11 T-O' T-0" HM-1 HMF-1D H-1 J-1 102 #4
.11 O 2'-6' T-0" EXWD EXWD 430
.11 17-6' 7'-0' WD-1 EXWD 400
.11 7.6' T-0' WD-1 HMF-tE H-13 J-13 90 405
.11 7-6" 7-0' WD-1 HMF-tE H-13 J-13 90 406
.11 01 1"'-0' T-0' WD-i HMF-1E H-13 J-13 90 404
SECOND LEVEL FLOOR PLAN-AREA-A&C
2101 A1.12 3'-0' 6'-10' IH M-1 HMF-18 H-10 J-10 1-1 1 1 1 1 0101
04P
2301 A1.12 01 7-6' T-0" IEXWD EXWD 485
2302 1 A1.12 01 17-6'___[7'-O* JEXWD EXWD I I I T- 101 1 430
1/8/99 2:37:33 PM Northampton High School
08710-DS Page 12 of 19
DOOR AND HARDWARE SCHEDULE
DOOR FRAME FIRE HARDWARE-SEE SPECIFICATIONS INDICATES NEW WORK
SEE SHEET A71.01 - A11.03 RATING FIRE CODE DISABLED REQUIREMENTS
O INDICATES EXISTING
O w ® INDICATES REUSE/
LL rn 3 p ai o RELOCATED EXISTING
J p 0 J � O o () Oz FOR ABBREVIATIONS -
p a Q U p z z 0 Z O w z SEE DRAWING R0.01
W o > a > aw a = 0
w p p E of � of J p ° = U H E Lu z w ACCESSIBLE THRESHOLD NOTED
CD LL u- LL U w w w W -j J O U) i- U w c) p w `n FOR SADDLE ONLY. REFER TO
a a i- H Q Q p C7 In W Z a a W
z w w ? a a > ~ J z v g v O J a W 3 m w THRESHOLD DETAILS. (FLOOR
(� Z J w J O p p ►- C7 > w a p _ ~ Z
z w J w w ►- - O z w > a 2 w a g w in c7 a FINISH AT ALL DOORS PROVIDE
w w Z O v v w a W } w w `� cn O J W j j Y L) 0 FLUSH CONDITION)
O rn in p ¢ a = � ~ ( _ N W W 66. Q W p d w Y Fa Q ir Z
REMARKS
MAIN LEVEL FLOOR PLAN-AREA-E
1501 A1.10 '-0' 4'-0' T-0' HM-1 HMF-11) H-1A J-1A 90 016191 191
1503A A1.10 '-0' 4'-0' T-0' HM-1 HMF-1D H-1 J-1 1 10 01010 0 1 1 182 #4
1503B A1.10 T-0' 3'-0' T-0' HM-1 HMF-1D H-14 J-14 0 0 181 #4
1505 A1.10 0 T-0' T-0' EXHM EXHM 0 0 240
1506A A1.10 0 '-0' 7'-0' EXWD EXHM 240
15066 A1.10 O 3'-0' 7'-0' EXWD EXHM 510
1507A A1.10 O -0' T-0' EXWD ' EXHM 240
1507B A1.10 O 3'-0" T-0' EXWD EXHM 510
1508A A1.10 O 3'-0' T-0' EXWD EXHM 240
15088 A1.10 10 T-0' T-0' EXWD EXHM 0 510
1509 A1.10 0 T-0' T-0' WD-3 HMF-1D H-1 J-1 * 200
1512 A1.10 0 3'-0' 7'-0' WD-3 HMF-1D H-8 J-8 0 202 Wi Hinge
1513 A1.10 O 3'-0' 7'-0' EXWD ' EXHM 240
1514 A1.10 O '-0' 7'-0' EXWD EXHM 240
1515A At.10 O T-0" T-0" EXWD EXHM 240
15158 A1.10 O 3'-0' T-0' EXWD EXHM 510
1516A A1.10 O 3'-0' 7'-0' EXWD EXHM 240
1516B A1.10 O 3'-0' 7'-0' EXWD EXHM 510
1517 A1.10 3'4' 7'-0' WD-3 HMF-11) H-1 J-1 200
1518 A1.10 3'-0' T-0' WD-3 HMFAD H-3 J-3 501
1519 A1.10 S-0- T-0' WD-1 HMF-11) H-1 J-1 402
1520 A1.10 O T-0' 7'-0' EXWD- EXHM 480
1521A A1.10 T-0' 7'-0' WD-3- HMF-1D H-8 J-8 301 WT Hinge
15218 A1.10 3'-0' T-0' WD-5 HMF-17 H-8 J-8 301 WT Hinge
1522 A1.10 3'-0' T-0' WD-3 HMF-1D H-8 J-8 300
1523A A1.10 O T-0' 7'-0' EXWD EXHM Oil 240
15238 A1.10 O T-0' 7'-0' EXWQ EXHM 0111 510
1524 A1.10 O 3'-0' T-0' EXWD. EXHM 01 010 1 240
1525A A1.10 0 3-0' T-0' HM-1 HMF-1D H-8 J-8 45 00 0 462 WT Hinge
1525B A1.10 0 3'-0' T-0' HM-1 HMF-18 1-1-3 J-3 90 -- 00 01 01 464
1526 A1.10 0 T-0' 7'-0' HM-1` HMF-1D 11-1 J-1 0101 1 01 01 456
1527 1 A1.10 01-3'-0' T-0- EXWD- EXHM 401 200
1/8/99 2:37:32 PM Northampton High School
08710-DS Page 11 of 19
DOOR AND HARDWARE SCHEDULE
DOOR FRAME FIRE HARDWARE-SEE SPECIFICATIONS INDICATES NEW WORK
SEE SHEET A11.01 - A11.03 RATING FIRE CODE DISABLED REQUIREMENTS INDICATES EXISTING
O w I ® INDICATES REUSE/
LL o7 z Lu p w o RELOCATED EXISTING
w z w Q O
O � O O U Oz FOR ABBREVIATIONS -
w p0 O > a ;
DOOR AND HARDWARE SCHEDULE
DOOR FRAME FIRE HARDWARE-SEE SPECIFICATIONS 0 INDICATES NEW WORK
SEE SHEET A11.01 - All 1.03 RATING FIRE CODE DISABLED REQUIREMENTS 0 INDICATES EXISTING
O w a ® INDICATES REUSE/
LL cn w a0 w o RELOCATED EXISTING
w O J w � 0 Oz FOR ABBREVIATIONS -
a 0 w J ~a J a ¢ OU z z 0 z O w Z SEE DRAWING R0.01
Z m o LL LL U w w w w J J o o � w 0 w _ ACCESSIBLE THRESHOLD NOTED
a w a a ~ f' w a a o 0 0 w g U z a J z a w FOR SADDLE ONLY. REFER TO
0 w J w z a w a J z 0 0 J a w 3 -' w THRESHOLD DETAILS. FLOOR
0 z J w J - 20 2 a w w O U` > w 1- a o = H m Z t
Z w J w w - 0 - � o = z w > a w a g 0 3 FINISH AT ALL DOORS PROVIDE
a z z 0 v v w a. w a w g U --i O v g w w Y f= w in p FLUSH CONDITION)
O cn U) o a a = r � : � 3 w w a a w o a Y H Q
REMARKS
MAIN LEVEL FLOOR PLAN-AREA-D
1404 rA1.09 0 rT-01 T-0' T-0' HM-1 HMF-1 H-1 J-1 90 0 0 189 #4
1405A 0 2-10' 7'-0' AL-1 ALF-13 ALH-1 SI ALJ-5 0 0 0 0 0 003 , #5
14058 � T-O' 7'-0' HM-3 HMF-35 H-10 J-10 0 0 160 #4
1406 0 7'-0' WD-1, HMF-1D H-2 J-2 T-2 0 0 0 209
1407 O 7'-0" EXWD EXWD - 2 50
1408 T-0' WD-6 HMF-1D H-1 J-1 200
1409 A1.09 01 X-0" T-0" WD4& HMFAE H-13 J-13 101 1 1 1 0 200
1410 A1.09 0 '-0' 7'-0' WD-3 HMF-1D H-1 J-1 0. 300
1411 A1.09 O 4' 7'-0' EXWD EXWD 630
1412 A1.09 O -4' T-0' EXWD EXWD- 0 0 430
1413 A1.09 0 T-0' T-0' WD-1 HMF-1D H-1 J-1 1 0 300
1414 A1.09 O T-0" T-0' EXWD EXWD` 320
1416A A1.09 101 1 EX EX ` 0 P50
1416B A1.09 0 3'-0* T-0" WD-1 HMF-ID H-1 J-1 T-1 90 0 01 1 00 0 15071
1417 A1.09 0 T-0" 7'-0' WD-2 HMF-11) H-1 J-1 90 0 0 151 #4
1418A A1.09 0 3'-0" 7-0' T-0" WD-2 HMF-11) H-1 J-1 90 1011 101 1 1 00 192 #4
1418B A1.09 w '-0' 7'-0' HM-3 HMF-11) H-5 J-5 T-1 10101 1 1 0 10 060 Hold 0 n
1419 A1.09 0 3'-0' T-0' WD�1 HMF-1D H-1 J-1 T-2 101 0 0 0 209
1420 A1.09 0 7-0' T-0' HM-1 HMF-1E H-13 J-13 101 454
1421 A1.09 0 3'-0' 7'-0' EXWD EXWD. 01 1 250
1422 A1.09 O 3'-0' 7'-0' EXWD EXWD 01 1 01 250
1423 A1.09 0 3*-0* 7'-0' HM-t- HMF-1D H-3 J-3 45 0101 01 0 465
1424 A1.09 0 3'-0' 7'-0' IWDr5 HMF-33 H-10 J-10 300
1425A A1.09 0 '-0' 7'-0' WD-5 HMF-33 H-10 J-10 10 1 1 0101 1 205
14258 A1.09 0 T-0' 7'-0' WD-5 HMF-32 H-10 T-1 0 416
1427 A1.09 01 T-0' 7'-0" WD-3 HMF-5 H-3 J-3 I 1 101 300
1428 A1.09 0 T-0" 7'-0' WD-3 HMF-7 H-3 J-3 I I I I I r 01 1 1 300
1429A A1.09 0 T-0" T-0' WD-6 HMF-IE H-13 J-13 I 1 1010 0101 1 206 WTHinge
1429B A1.09 O '-0' 7'-0' EXWD EXWD -07-1 0 320
1430 A1.09 O 2'-4' 7'-0" EXWD EXWD 1 101 1 1 0 630
1431A A1.09 O 7-8" 7'-0' EXWD IEXWD I 14pi I 1 0 320
14318 A1.09 0 T-O' 7'-0' WD 3 HMF-1D H-1 J-1 1 1401 1 1 1 0 300
1/8/99 2:37:31 PM Northampton High School
08710-DS Page 9 of 19
DOOR AND HARDWARE SCHEDULE
DOOR FRAME FIRE HARDWARE-SEE SPECIFICATIONS INDICATES NEW WORK
SEE SHEET A11.01 - A11.03 RATING FIRE CODE IDISABLED REQUIREMENTS INDICATES EXISTING
O w X ® INDICATES REUSE/
11 m z 3: uj p uwj o RELOCATED EXISTING
O O of 3 0 -1 FOR ABBREVIATIONS -
Ix O
ir w Q ¢ Q UO z z 0 z O w Z SEE DRAWING R0.01
w O O > a > g > f a m
m ° LL v w W w w J J o ui iU -j w 0 w w ►_- ACCESSIBLE THRESHOLD NOTED
¢ w a f' < w Q a o O m w g U z ¢ J Z a w FOR SADDLE ONLY. REFER TO
C9 z w W -j Z 2 p w w O O j w ►= Q p _ 3 m Z THRESHOLD DETAILS. (FLOOR
z w r- o o = z w > a 2 w ° g w 6 0 3 FINISH AT ALL DOORS PROVIDE
z w 0 in ? ? � w w LL o m w p 6 } = w Y w Fh o FLUSH CONDITION)
a z z O U U w a}} w a-} w w -5 of r- w g m > v U U
O V) to 0 a a 2 F- � F � S -ai ►_- W W d Q W a ui a. w Y ►a- ¢ S
REMARKS
1223 A1.07 T-0' 7'-0' WD-1- HMF-1D 1-1-1 J-1 T-2 1 0101 208
1224A A1.07 -8' 'FO—' WD-3 EXWD 300
1224B A1.07 7-2' 7'-0' EXWD EXWD 520 Surface Deadbok
1225 A1.07 -6' T-0' WU-1 HMF-IE H-13 J-13 90 1 463
1226 A1.07 O 2-8' 7'-0' EXWD EXWD 485
1227 A1.07 '-0' T-0' HM-1 HMF-tA H-1 J-1 456
1228A A1.07 101 IT-0- T-0' WD-t HMF-1A H-3 J-3 452
1228B A1.07 101 JY-0' I JJ-3 I I 452
MAIN LEVEL FLOOR PLAN-AREA-C
1301A A1.08 10 T-O" T-0' T-0' HM-2 HMF-1D H-2 J-2 90 184
1301B A1.08 0 3'-0' 3'-0' 7'-0' HM-2' HMF-1D H-2 J-2 90 49 184
1302 A1.08 0 3'-0' T-0' T-0' WD-5 HMF-30 H4 J4 0101 1 010 162 #4
1303 A1.08 T-0' 7'-0' WDA HMF-31 H-3 J-3 0 459
1304 A1.08 T-0- T-0' WD-3 HMF-31 H-3 J-3 01 1 101 300
1305A A1.08 S-0' T-0' WD-3. HMF-9 H-3 J-3 01 1 1 01 200
13056 A1.08 3'-0' T-0' WD-3 HMF-1D Hal J-0 I 1 01 200
1306 A1.08 3'-0' 7'-0' jVV&l HMF-iA H-3 J-3 01 01 451
1307 A1.08 T-0' 7'-0' WD-1 HMF-1A H-3 J-3 01 200
1308 A1.08 3'-0' T-0' WD-3 HMF-IA H-3 J-3 200
1309 A1.08 S-0' T-0' WDA HMF-6 H-3 J-3 300
1310 A1.08 T-0' T-0" WD-1 HMF-1D H-2 J-2 90 215
1311 A1.08 3'-0' T-0' WD-1- HMF-1D 1-1-1 J-1 200
1/8/99 2:37:31 PM Northampton High School
08710-DS Page 8 of 19
DOOR AND HARDWARE SCHEDULE
DOOR FRAME FIRE HARDWARE-SEE SPECIFICATIONS INDICATES NEW WORK
SEE SHEET A11.01- A11.03 RATING FIRE CODE DISABLED REQUIREMENTS
O INDICATES EXISTING
O w rx (0 INDICATES REUSE/
U) 3 w p w o RELOCATED EXISTING
z
J p O0 J of 3 0 ° FOR ABBREVIATIONS -
w p a c O pX z z X z O w z SEE DRAWING R0.01
m o! 0 0 > a > aW w p a 2 o U O W z i ►-
w p p rr w W w J p -, = 0 J P f � z i w ACCESSIBLE THRESHOLD NOTED
03 z - Q 4 Q w ~ w Q Q p O vOi w ~ O wz Q J p Q w FOR SADDLE ONLY. REFER TO
w w ? a of a g r- E- z g O � Q � 3 m ir THRESHOLD DETAILS. (FLOOR
o z J J O a w w O H o > w a a p a = Z a
z w -i w w f- - O - � p p w a z ww > Y a g O FINISH AT ALL DOORS PROVIDE
-J co a w ? O v v w a w a w w i a O w g w Y cwi cn FLUSH CONDITION
o u� cn p a a = � w ui z w w a ¢ w o a � Y a w z
REMARKS
MAIN LEVEL FLOOR PLAN-AREA-B
1202 A1.07 0 '-0' 4'-0" T-0" HM-1 HMF-1D H-1 J-1 90 185 #4
1204A A1.07 0 '-0' 3'-0" T-0' HMA EX T-1 e 0 030 #1
12046 A1.07 W '-0- X-0" T-0- HM-4 EX T-1 030 #1
1204C A1.07 O EX EX NIC No Work
12040 Al.07 O EX EX NIC No Work
1205A A1.07 '-0" 3'-0- 6'-10' AL-1 ALF-i ALH-5 ALJ-2 T-1 e 0 0 004 , #5
12058 A1.07 X-0- X-0- 7'-0' AL-1 ALF-13 ALH-6 ALJA 0 006 #4, #5
1206 A1.07 '-0' 3'-0" 8'-0' WD-1 HMF-1D H-11 J-12 T-1 90 167 #4
1207 A1.07 '-0" T-0" HM-1. HMF-1D H-1 J-1 90 464 Rem Has wl Pad Lock
1208A A1.07 TV T-0" WD.1 HMF-1D H-2 J-2 90 215
1208B A1.07 TV 7'-0" WU-1 HMF-1D H-1 J-1 T-1 505
1209 A1.07 TV S-O" T-0' WD-1 HMF-11) H-2 J-2 0101 479
1210A A1.07 TV YV 7'-0" W04 HMF-1D H-1 J-1 90 0 163 1#4
12108 A1.07 3'-0' TV T-0" IWIM HMF-1D H-1 J-1 90 0 *101 163 #4
1210C A1.07 3'-0" 7'-0' WD-1 HMF-1D H-11A J-15 T-1 90 0 e 155 #4
12100 A1.07 T-0' T-0' WD-1 HMF-1D H-1 J-1 90 0101 151 #4
1210E A1.07 3'2' 3'-2" 7'-0' WD-1 HMF-11) H-2 J 42 90 164 #4
1211 A1.07 3'-0' 3'-0" 7'-0" WD-2 HMF-IA HAA JAA 90 232
1212A A1.07 10 TV TV 7'-0' WD-2 HMF-1A HAA JAA 90 163 #4
12128 A1.07 10 '-0" T-O' 7'-0' WD-2 HMF-1A HAA J4A 90 >♦ 163 #4
lip A1.07 01 TV T-0" WD-4 HMF-11 H-3 J-3 300
1214A A1.07 01 S-0' T-0" WD-3 HMF-IA H-3 J-3 200
12148 A1.07 01 SV T-0" WD-3" HMF-1A H-3 J-3 200
1215 A 1.07 0 -0' T-0' WD-3 HMF-28 H-3 J-3 200
1216 A1.07 01 IY-O' T-0' WD-3 HMF-28 .H-3 J-3 200
1217 A1.07 0 S-0' 7'-0' WD-3 HMF-28 H-3 J-3 200
1218 A1.07 40 3'-0' 7'-0" WD-2 HMF-1D H-1 J-1 100 #4
1219A A1.07 0 '-0' T-0' WD4 HMF-1D H-2 J-2 0 0 00 103 #4
12198 A1.07 W 3'-0- T-0- WD4 HMF-ID H-2 J-2 0 0 0 103 #4
1219C A1.07 3'-0' 7'-0' WDA HMF-1D H-2 J-2 103 #4
1220 A1.07 O 7-6" 7'-0" IEXWD EXWD 1 485
1221 A1.07 0 TV 7 0--- WD-1 HMF-1D H-1 J-1 T-2 208
1/8/99 2:37:30 PM Northampton High School
08710-DS Page 7 of 19
DOOR AND HARDWARE SCHEDULE
DOOR FRAME FIRE HARDWARE-SEE SPECIFICATIONS INDICATES NEW WORK
SEE SHEET A11.01 - A11.03 RATING FIRE CODE DISABLED REQUIREMENTS INDICATES EXISTING
O w W $ INDICATES REUSE/
LL z 3 w a- Lu RELOCATED EXISTING
O 3 O Oz FOR ABBREVIATIONS -
w O O w -� Q -, j ¢ OU jr z_ z z z O w z SEE DRAWING R0.01
m w O p0 > Q > Q w w o a = C/3 U O U) z = ►-
m LL LL v w w w W _j -� 0 -1 cn ~ U w U W w ACCESSIBLE THRESHOLD NOTED
a w Q ~ ~ w ¢ Q o (9 m w g U z Q -j z Q w FOR SADDLE ONLY. REFER TO
c7 z W _j z m p m M w w O O j w F- a p _ m Z w THRESHOLD DETAILS. (FLOOR
z w � w w F- - O � o o = z w > ¢ 2 w a _, u FINISH AT ALL DOORS PROVIDE
g �?
w w z m c9 as} w }} w Q w w N 0 v g w w Y F-- w u� o FLUSH CONDITION)
O to Q Q F=- D W W Qom. Q W 0 o- J Y Fa- Q Q' m
REMARKS
0521 A1.05 '-0' 7-0' 7'-10' HM-1 -HMF-1B H-7 J-7 T-2 063
0522 A1.05 3'-0' T-0' HM-1 HMF-10 H-3 J-3 90 466
0523 A1.05 3-0' T-0' HM-1 HMF-tA H-1 J-1 90 466
0524 A1.05 3'-0' T-0' WD-3 HMF-1D H-1 J-1 500
0525 A1.05 3'-0' T-0' HM-1 HMF-1D H-1 J-1 456
0526 A1.05 T-0' 7-0' T-10' HM-1. HMF-27 H-3 J-3 01 422
MAIN LEVEL FLOOR PLAN-AREA-A
1102 A1.06 3-0' T-0' 7'-0' HM-1 - HMF-tA H-1 J-1 60 -0-FO-TO-1-0- 0 184 #4
1103A A1.06 3'-0' 3'-0' T-0- HM-l' HMF-3 H-tA J-tA 90 011 1010 1 1 188 #4, Mag Ext Bracket Required
11038 A1.06 3'-0' 3'-0' T-0' HM-1 HMF-tA H-2 J-2 60 0101010 1 184 #4
1104A A1.06 T-0' 7'-0' WD-2 HMF-1A H-1 J-1 60 T 215
1104B A1.06 3'-0' T-0' WD-1 HMF-1A H-1 J-1 501
1105A A1.06 .03'.0- T-0' T-0' WD-2 HMF-IA H-2 J-2 T-1 60 168 #4
11058 A1.06 '-0' T-0' 7'-0' WU-2 HMF-tA H-2 J-2 T-1 60 00 0 188 #4
1105C A1.06 FT-0' 4'-0' T-0' WD-2 HMF-1A H-2 J-2 T-1 45 0 166 #4
1106 A1.06 4'-0' T-0' HM-1 HMF-tA H-1 J-1 0 472
1107 A1.06 T-0' WD-1 HMF-IA H-1 J-1 T-2 0 0 207
1108 A1.06 T-0' WD=1 HMF-IA H-1 J-1 T-2 207
1110 A1.06 7'-0' WD-4 HMF-28 HA J-4 300
1112 A1.06 7'-0' WOA HMF-1A H-3 J-3 403
1113 A1.06 7'-0' WD-1 HMF-IA H-3 J-3 601
1114 A1.06 7'-0' WD-1 HMF-1A H-3 J-3 601
1115 A1.06 7-6' T-0' WD-1 HMF-tA H-3 J-3 423
1116 A1.06 T-0' WD-1 HMF-tA H-3 J-3 T-2 804
1117 A1.06 7'-0' WD-1 HMF-1A H-1 J-1 T-2 804
1118 A1.06 0' 7'-0' HM-1 HMF-tA H-1 J-1 �90 466
1119 A1.06 T-0' 7'-0' HM-i HH-1 J-1 456
1120 A1.06 '-0' 3'-0' 7'-0' HM-1 HMF-tA H-1 J-1 90 1 14781
1/8/99 2:37:30 PM Northampton High School
08710-DS Page 6 of 19
DOOR AND HARDWARE SCHEDULE
DOOR FRAME FIRE HARDWARE-SEE SPECIFICATIONS INDICATES NEW WORK
SEE SHEET A11.01- A11.03 RATING FIRE CODE DISABLED REQUIREMENTS
O INDICATES EXISTING
S w a INDICATES REUSE/
3 a. u o RELOCATED EXISTING
V) ly w O 1 0 FOR ABBREVIATIONS -
� Q Q v a Z z 0 Z c� W z SEE DRAWING R0.01 ir
w o o H cr w w A ° = U 0 z i=-. w ACCESSIBLE THRESHOLD NOTED
LL u- < u. Q w iw w Q Q o w ~ U z Q Q w N FOR SADDLE ONLY. REFER TO
z w w w z 2 w w -O z U H 0 ¢ H '� m w THRESHOLD DETAILS. (FLOOR
(> Z w w O N U > w Q O 2 Z
z w w t- - O o O = z w > Q m w a g w cn a FINISH AT ALL DOORS PROVIDE
z w -i ? ? ? w O w u. o m w N Q ci r = �� Y w u� o FLUSH CONDITION)
o co co- a ¢ s z a = � w w a a w wn a Y ►a d w
REMARKS
LOWER LEVEL FLOOR PLAN-AREA-E
0501 A1.05 01 3'-0' T-0' HM-2 HMF=1D H-2 J-2 90 150 PM
0503A A1.05 TV T-0' WD-3 HMF-1D H-2 J-2 45 *lei 1 215
05038 A1.05 3'-0' 7'-0' W4=1 HMF-1D H-1 J-1 45 0101 1 260
0503C A1.05 3'-0' 7'-0' W4-1 HMF-1B H-3 J-3 01 456
0504A A1.05 T-O' T-0' WD-3 HMF-1D H-2 J-2 200
0504B A1.05 3'-0' 7'-0' WD-1 HMF-1D H-1 J-1 T-1 261
0505A A1.05 3'-6' 7'-0' WD-3 EXHM 1 201
0505B A1.05 '-0' 6'-10" AL-1 ALF-17 ALH-14 ALJ-14 T-1 0 le 001 #4, #5
0506 A1.05 01 T-0' T-0' WD-1 HMF-1D H-3 J-3 T-2 0 606
0507A A1.05 01 3'-0' 7'-0' HM-2 HMF-1D H-2 J-2 45 210
05078 A1.05 O -6' 7'-0- EXHM EXHM O O 01 NIC No Work
0507C A1.05 10 '-0' 3'-0' 7'-0' HWIl HMF-1D H-1 J-1 T-1 90 0 0 14771
0508 A1.05 01 3'-0' T-0' WD-I HMF-1D H-1 J-1 T-2 604
0509A A1.05 T-O' 7'-0' W073 HMF-10 H-1 J-1 300
05098 A1.05 T-0' 7'-0' WD-3 HMF-1D H-1 J-1 300
0510 A1.05 '-0' T-0' WD-3 HMF-1D H-3 J-3 458
0511A A1.05 '-0' 4'-0' 7'-10' HM4 HMF-25 H-9 J-9 T-1 081 Hold n
0511B A1.05 3'-0' 2-0' T-0' WD-3 HMF-1D H-2 J-2 90 40 231 WTHinge
0511C A1.05 T-0' T-0' WD-3 HMF-1D H-2 J-2 90 0 211 WTHN e
512 A1.05 O '-0- T-0' EXWD: EXHM 1 0 01 240
513 A1.05 O -0' T-0' EXWD- EXHM 480
0514 A1.05 O '-0' 7'-0' EXWD EXHM C 1 1480 113utch Door-Bottom Louver
0515A A1.05 O 3'-0' 7'-0' EXHM EXHM 0 O 0 480
5158 A1.05 '-0' 2'-0' 7'-0' HM-1 HMF-1D H-2 J-2 T-1 9 0 0 082
0516 Ai.05 -0' 7'-0' WD-3 HMF-ID H-2 J-2 202 WT Hinge
517 A1.05 T-0' 7'-0' HM-1 HMF-11) H-2 J-2 90 0 . .01 463
0518A A1.05 T-0' 7'-0' WD-1 HMF-1D H-2 J-2 202 WTHinge
05186 A1.05 3'-0" 7'-0' WD-1 HMF-1D H-3 J-3 200
518C A1.05 0 3'-0" T-0' WD-1 EXHM 200
0519A A1.05 0 T-0" T-0' WD-3 EXHM 203 #3,WT Hi e
05196 A1.05 0 3'-0' 7'-0' WD-3 EXHM 203 #3,WT Hine "
0520 A1.05 0 T-0" 71-0' lWhA-2 , HMF-10 H-1 J-1 45 210
1/8/99 2:37:29 PM Northampton High School
08710-DS Page 5 of 19
r
o Z
r co
0
�
J �
o �
O
O
•r ,D O
m
? cn
O 0 ,
aw '" S
00
m _
me
*.
OPENING NUMBER
SHEET NUMBER
SINGLE LEAF DOOR
DOUBLE LEAF DOOR
v
0
ACTIVE LEAF
O
O
m
�
r
m
ACTIVE/INACTIVE LEAF
m
r
T
r
HEIGHT
O
TYPE / MATERIAL
z
SEE DOOR ELEVATIONS
TYPE / MATERIAL
y
O
y
SEE FRAME ELEVATIONS
m
O
c
`h
2
X
HEAD DETAIL
M
-n
D
;
D
J
7
JAMB DETAIL
g
m
0
D
THRESHOLD DETAIL
c
W
T
U.L. RATING
?1
m
0
EXISTING SOLID CORE WOOD
EXIT DEVICES HARDWARE
/u
>
m
POSITIVE LATCHING
,.DT-
On
ch
AUTOMATIC CLOSING
ELEC.MAGNETIC HOLD OPEN
m
DELAYED-ACTION CLOSER
rn
m
PUSH/PULL
m
rn
looll
m
KICKPLATE
v n
RUN
m n
TACTILE WARNING
ACCESSIBLE THRESHOLD
RM.SIGN.
; Z
m y
HARDWARE SET NO.
1
N
T_T 0>0 o
C Z m� m(nm� ® O
cm, (m, p> mZ Z Z
(��Optn �W ro� � p
p AD D D
00�rmm
Ri Zm
_ < D� -1 m
9 fir'°p-., 11D mcmi� m m
D O0Omr� �_� pc m
?o>{trnn oz Xc ?� m
co) ch cn22
�,.TO �m Z
O�mp 0
��
< �z �
1�
m2O0
0
oo�o
OPENING NUMBER
SHEET NUMBER
SINGLE LEAF DOOR
DOUBLE LEAF DOOR
v
0
ACTIVE LEAF
O
O
m
�
r
m
ACTIVE/INACTIVE LEAF
m
r
T
r
HEIGHT
O
TYPE / MATERIAL
z
SEE DOOR ELEVATIONS
TYPE / MATERIAL
y
O
y
SEE FRAME ELEVATIONS
m
O
c
`h
2
X
HEAD DETAIL
M
-n
D
;
D
J
7
JAMB DETAIL
g
m
0
D
THRESHOLD DETAIL
c
W
T
U.L. RATING
?1
m
0
EXISTING SOLID CORE WOOD
EXIT DEVICES HARDWARE
/u
>
m
POSITIVE LATCHING
,.DT-
On
ch
AUTOMATIC CLOSING
ELEC.MAGNETIC HOLD OPEN
m
DELAYED-ACTION CLOSER
rn
m
PUSH/PULL
m
rn
LEVER HANDLES
m
KICKPLATE
v n
M
m n
TACTILE WARNING
ACCESSIBLE THRESHOLD
RM.SIGN.
; Z
m y
HARDWARE SET NO.
1
N
T_T 0>0 o
C Z m� m(nm� ® O
cm, (m, p> mZ Z Z
(��Optn �W ro� � p
p AD D D
00�rmm
Ri Zm
_ < D� -1 m
9 fir'°p-., 11D mcmi� m m
D O0Omr� �_� pc m
?o>{trnn oz Xc ?� m
co) ch cn22
�,.TO �m Z
O�mp 0
��
< �z �
m2O0
0
DOOR AND HARDWARE SCHEDULE
DOOR FRAME FIRE HARDWARE-SEE SPECIFICATIONS INDICATES NEW WORK
SEE SHEET A11.01 - A11.03 RATING FIRE CODE DISABLED REQUIREMENTS
O INDICATES EXISTING
O w rr 41) INDICATES REUSE/
LL U w a- L o RELOCATED EXISTING
z
w p O of Oz FOR ABBREVIATIONS -
rr rr 0 w J FQ J a Q z_ Z O Z w Z SEE DRAWING R0.01
m rr p O > Q > Q w w p a = 0 c) O cn Z = F
w p ° rY w rr J p J = U J H I-- W z F w ACCESSIBLE THRESHOLD NOTED
03 z Q ¢ LL ¢ W w Q Q p 0 w g U Z ¢ Z Q w FOR SADDLE ONLY. REFER TO
J w z ¢ w a F J Z U_ o a W 3 -' W THRESHOLD DETAILS. FLOOR
U Z J J W W O 0 > W F a p J = F- !� Z
z F J w w w = — p — 9 p p w w z w° > 2 } a g J (n 3 FINISH AT ALL DOORS PROVIDE 0 co a w z =p v v w a W a W w J F � o W g 0) � U v cwi `" FLUSH CONDITION)
w w a = x x o J w w a v a REMARKS
O cn 0) p ¢ ¢ _ U) U _ < F ° w w a a w ° a J Y F ¢ _
LOWER LEVEL FLOOR PLAN-AREA-C
0302A A1.03 IT-0"-0' T-W 6'-8' HM-1 HMF-1A H-1 J-1 180 A, Exit Only,Hold n
03028 A1.03 O -0' 7'-0' EX EX NIC No Work
0302C A1.03 6'-8' WD-5 HMF-1A H-1 J-1 100 #4
0304 A1.03 -0' 6'-8' WD-1 HMF-1A H-1 J-1 T-2 104 0305 A1.03 '-0' 6'-8' WD-1 HMF-tA H-1 J-1 101 0306 A1.03 -0' 6'-8' WD-3\ HMF-4 1-1-1 J-1 T-2 302
0307 A1.03 10 0'-0* 1 6'-8' WD-1 HMF-1A H-1 J-1 700
0308 A1.03 '-0' 6'-8' WD-1 HMF-1A H-1 J-1 T-2 606
0311A A1.03 T-0' 6'-8' WD-1 HMF-1A H-1 J-1 T-2 104 #4
0311B A1.03 T-0' V-8' WD-3 HMF-1A H-1 J-1 205
0313 A1.03 3'-0' 6'-8' WD-1 HMF-1A H-1 J-1 t♦ 101
0314 A1.03 '-0' 6'-8' WD-1 HMF-tA H-1 J-1 101
0315 A1.03 3'-0' 6'-8' WD-3 HMF-4 H-1 J-1 T-2 4 302
0316 A1.03 %0" 6'-8' WD-1 HMF-tA H-1 J-1 700
0317 A1.03 0 T-0' 6'-8' WD-1 HMF-1A H-1 J-1 T-2 0 606
0320 A1.03 0 T-0- 6'-8- WD-3 HMFAA H-1 J-1 200
0321 A1.03 S-0' 6'-8' WD-1 HMF-IA H-1 J-1 402
0322 A1.03 S-0' 6'-8' HM-1 HMF-IA H-1 J-1 456
0323A A1.03_ '-0' 6'-8' WD-1 HMF-1A H-1 J-1 T-2 t♦ 104
03238 A1.03 3'-0' 6'-8' WD-3 HMF-1A H-1 J-1 206
03?6A A1.03 T-0' 7'-0' WD-3 HMF-1D H-1 J-1 101 , Frame Depth to be 5-3/4'
0326B A1.03 T-0' 7'-0' WD-3 HMF-1D H-1 J-1 101 #4, Frame Depth to be 5-3/4'
0326C A1.03 '-6' 6'-10' HM-5 EXHM 026 #3, #4, Exit Only
0326D A1.03 3'-6' 6'-10' HM-5 EXHM 026 #3, #4, Exit Only
0326E A1.03 3'-0' T-0' WD-1 HMF-1A H-1 J-1 205
0327 A1.03 T-O' 3'-0' 6'-8' HM-1 HMF-tA H-1 J-1 1 1421
0328A A1.03 49 T-0' 1 6'-8' WD4 HMF-IA H-i J-1 204
0328E I A1.03 0 IT-0- 1 6'-8' WD-1 HMF-1A 1-1-1 J-1 4m
1/8/99 2:37:28 PM Northampton High School
08710-DS Page 3 of 19
DOOR AND HARDWARE SCHEDULE
DOOR FRAME FIRE HARDWARE-SEE SPECIFICATIONS • INDICATES NEW WORK
SEE SHEET A11.01 - A11.03 RATING FIRE CODE DISABLED REQUIREMENTS
O INDICATES EXISTING
O w W INDICATES REUSE/
LL m m 3: w aO w o RELOCATED EXISTING
J p 0 J � O o 1 :r FOR ABBREVIATIONS -
rr 0
cr w J Q J Q Q v X z z z z O w Z SEE DRAWING R0.01
m w 0 0 > Q > Q W w p Q = U O U) Z =
w p p t= -i W w J p �= i= � z w ACCESSIBLE THRESHOLD NOTED
z g a w < Q H w Q ¢ p O O co
w g v z Q J Z Q J w FOR SADDLE ONLY. REFER TO
� w ? a m a 2 ►- ►- z �? c� p ¢ W 3 m rr THRESHOLD DETAILS. (FLOOR
z w W w w H- p w w Oz ¢ z w > Q 2 w a = g w rn Q FINISH AT ALL DOORS PROVIDE
z w m > >_ = w p w u- p m w w P: p ~ O cj } 2 w a- � w in o FLUSH CONDITION)
w w z 0 F— t- c? a w a w Q g J m F w g rn > v U U m
o u=i Z o a a = � w � N z w w a Q w o a �c ra- a z
REMARKS
0122 A1.01 • '-0' T-0' WD-1 HMF-1A H-1 J-1 • el 450
0123 A1.01 • 3'-0" S-0' 7'-0' WD-3 HMF-1A H-1 J-1 45 01•101 • • 1 163 /14
0124 A1.01 '0' T-0' T-0" HM-1 HMF-1C H-1 J-11 10101 475
0125 A1.01 • '-0' T-0' WD-1 HMF-1A H-1 J-1 • 300
0126 A1.01 • '-0' T-0" WD-1 HMF-1A H-1 J-1 • • 451
0127 A1.01 • 3'-0" T-0' WD-1 HMF-1A H-1 J-1 • • • • 1 503
0128 A1.01 • T-0' 1 7'-0' HM-1 HMF-1A H-1 J-1 • • *1 • 454
0129 A1.01 • '-0- 7'-0" WDA HMF-23 H-1 J-1 • • 300
0130 A1.01 • T-0' T-0' WD-1 HMF-IA H-1 J-1 • 600
0131 A1.01 • '-0' T-0' WD-1 HMF-IA H-1 J-1 • • • • 304
0132 A1.01 • T-0' T-0' WD-1 HMF-1A H-1 J-1 • • 600
0133 A1.01 • 3'-0' 7'-0' WD-1- HMF-1A H-1 J-1 • • • 452
0134 A1.01 • 3'-0" T-0" WD-1 HMF-1A 11-1 J-1 • • 300
LOWER LEVEL FLOOR PLAN-AREA-B
0203 A1.02 • S-0' 6'-8" HM-1 HMF-1A H-1 J-1 45 • • • • 466
,0204A A1.02 • '-0" 3'-0' 6'-8' HM-1 HMF-1A H-1 J-1 90 • • • • 476
0204B A1.02 • 3'-0" T-0' HM-1 HMF-1E H-1 J-1 90 • • • • 468
0205 A1.02 • T-0" 6'-8" HM-1 HMF-IA H-1 J-1 90 • • • • 466
0206 A1.02 • 3'-0" 3'-0' 6'-8' HM-1 HMF-1A H-1 J-1 • • • 473
0207 A1.02 O 3'-0' 7'-0' EX EX NIC No Work
0209 A1.02 • 3'-7' 1 T-0' HM-1 HMF-1D H-2 J-2 90 • • • • 464
0210 A1.02 • 2'-6' 2'-0' T-0' HM-1 HMF-1D H-2 J-2 90 • • • 488
0211 A1.02 • 3'-0' 6'-8' HM-1 HMF-IA H-1 J-1 90 • • • • 466
0212A A1.02 • 3'-0' TV 6'-8" HM-1 HMF-1A H-1 J-1 • • • • 476
02128 A1.02 • 3'-0" 3'-0' 8'-0' HM-1 HMF-1A H-5 J-5 T-1 • • • 062 Exit Onl ,Hold Open
0212C A1.02 • T-0' 3'-0' 8'-4' HM-1 HMF-1A H-5 J-5 T-1 • • • • • 080
0213 A1.02 • 3'-0" 6'-8" HM-1 HMF-tA H-1 J-1 90 • • • • 466
1/8/99 2:37:27 PM Northampton High School
08710-DS Page 2 of 19
I I I I I
DOOR AND HARDWARE SCHEDULE
DOOR FRAME FIRE HARDWARE-SEE SPECIFICATIONS INDICATES NEW WORK
SEE SHEET A11.01 - A11.03 RATING FIRE CODE DISABLED REQUIREMENTS
0 INDICATES EXISTING
O w Of (0 INDICATES REUSE/
U 3 w a0 w 0 RELOCATED EXISTING
J z0 O J � p o 0 TT FOR ABBREVIATIONS -
F .Q Q v z z_ z p w z SEE DRAWING R0.01
w p 0 > ¢ > a w w p ¢ _ 0 U 0
w 0 0 F it J it J 0 J m U OJ F H J z w ACCESSIBLE THRESHOLD NOTED
LL LL ui p w v z Q 0 ¢ w m FOR SADDLE ONLY. REFER TO
z w J w z Q Q ra r¢- fl z `n U g c9 0 Q W m w THRESHOLD DETAILS. (FLOOR
p z - w J O a p }= c7 > w ¢ ¢ O a T 0 ¢
z w w w - O ¢ z_ w > 2 w g w � c7 3 FINISH AT ALL DOORS PROVIDE
z w -J in > > T- w 0 w w 0 m w cr 0 F- O ci } = w a F w m o FLUSH CONDITION)
w w o 0 ►= i p a a a U m w g � > Y U U w
d T O U U W W W w ¢ T J X X p J W w U ¢ U ¢
p m m 0 ¢ a T U F- w w a ¢ w 0 a J x f- a T REMARKS
LOWER LEVEL FLOOR PLAN-AREA-A
0101A A1.01 '-0" 4'-0' T-0' HM-2 HMFAA H-1 J-1 60 0 1 1185
0101B A1.01 10 T-0' 3'-0' 7'-0' HM-2 HMF-IA H-1 J-1 60 49 01010 1 101 1 1184 #4
102A A1.01 10 T-0' 3'-0- 6'-8- HM-1 HMF-3 H-IA J-1A g0 0 We 1 187 #4, Mag Ext Bracket Requked
0102B A1.01 10 3'-8' 3'-8' 6'-8' HM-1 HMF-1A H-1 J-1 60 0 0 0 183 #4
0103A A1.01 0 3'-0' 3'-0' T-0' HM-2 HMF-1C H-1 J-11 0 160 #4
0103B A1.01 0 '-0' 3'-0' 7'-8' HM-1 HMF-1A H-5 J-5 T-1 O 061 Hold Open
0104A A1.01 0 3'-0' T-0' 7'-0' AL-1 ALF-3 ALH-1A ALJ-1 SI T-1 0 004 #4, #5
01048 A1.01 3'-0' 3'-0' T-0' AL-1 ALF-3A ALH-2 ALJ-2 0 006 A. #5
0105A A1.01 � -0' 6'-8' AL-1 ALFA ALH-3 ALJ-1 T-1 0 001 #4, #5
0105B A1.01 0 3'-0' T-0" 6'-8' AL-1 ALFA ALH-3 ALJ-1 SI T-1 0 004 A. #5
01050 A1.01 '-0' 6'-8' AL-1 ALFA ALH-3 ALJ-1 T-1 0 � 0 001 94, #5
0105D A1.01 '-0- 6'-8' AL-1 ALF-0 ALHA ALJ-3 SI T-1 0 0 002 , #5
0105E A1.01 '-0" T-0' 6'-8' AL-1 ALFA ALHA ALJ-3 006 #4, #5 ;
0105E A1.01 3'-0' 6'-8' AL-1 ALFA ALHA ALJ-3 SI T-1 0 002 , #5
0106 A1.01 0 3'-0' 3'-0' T-0' HM-1 HMF-1A H-1 J-1 0 0 470
0107 A1.01 3'-0" T-0' HM-1 HMF-1A H-1 J-1 45 0 463
0108 A1.01 T-0' 7'-0' WD-1 HMF-1A H-1 J-1 T-2 207
0109 A1.01 0 '-0" 7'-0' WD-1 HMF-1A H-1 J-1 T-2 207
0110 A1.01 '-0' 7'-0" HM-1 HMF-IA H-1 J-1 90 463
111A A1.01 'A" 6'-8' WD-1 HMF-8 H-1 J-1 45 215
01118 A1.01 3'-0' 6'-8' WD-1 HMF-8A H-1 J-1 45 215
0112 A1.01 '-0' 3'-0' 6'-8- WD-1 HMF-1A H-1 J-1 471
0113 A1.01 '-0' T-0' 7'-0' WD-1 HMF-1A H-1 J-1 45 163 #4
0114 A1.01 T-0' 7'-0' WD-1 HMF-1A H-1 J-1 402
0115A A1.01 '-0' T-0' WD-3 HMF-1A H 1 J-1 45 212
01158 A1.0_1 3'-0' T-0' WD-3 HMF-1A H-1 J-1 45 0 0 0 213
'0115C A1.01 o 3'-0' 3'-0' T-0' WD-3 HMF-1A H-1 J-1 0 * 230
0116 A1.01 0 T-0- 7'-0' WD-1 HMF-1A H-1 J-1 402
0118A A1.01 T-0' 7'-0' WD-3 HMF-1A H-1 J-1 0 0 303
01188 A1.01 0 3'-0' 7'-0' WD-3 HMF-1A H-1 J-1 45 0 0 506
0119 A1.01 T-0' T-0' WD-1 HMF-1A H-1 J-1 458 "
0120 A1.01 T-0' T-O" T-0" AL-1 ALF-16 ALH-1 ALJ-1 T-1 005 #5, Exit Only
1/8/99 2:37:27 PM Northampton High School
08710-DS Page 1 of 19
w
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079 wr+
Hardware Set 701
1 Hinge, Bali Bearing Hinges-Re-use Existing Existing a1s
1 Pull Plate 107-70C-(4"x 16")-US32D Rockwood
1 Push Plate 70C-(4"x 16")-US32D Rockwood
1 Kick Plate 16"x 28"-18 ga.-US32D Rockwood
1 Stop,Floor 438-B26D H.B.Ives
3 Silencer,HM Dr. Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Hardware Set NIC
Headina Notes
No Work Required
�rw
No
A*
s�
eH,
■w
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-46
to
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS
on NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
Hardware Set 604
on 3 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Lockset,Privacy CL3320 x NZD x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Stop, Floor 438-B26D H.B.Ives
1 Threshold Marble By Others
3 Silencer,HM Dr.Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Hardware Set 605
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Lockset,Privacy CL3320 x NZD x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Stop,Overhead-Surf. 9-336-Stop-(33-1/16-38)-US26D Rixson
1 Threshold Marble By Others
3 Silencer,HM Dr. Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Hardware Set 606
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Lockset,Privacy CL3320 x NZD x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
OR 1 Stop,Wall 407.5-S32D H.B.Ives
1 Threshold Marble By Others
3 Silencer,HM Dr. Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Hardware Set 620
1 Lockset, Privacy CL3320 x NZD x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
Headina Notes
Remove Existing Lock and Replace with New Lever Lock.
Hardware Set 630
1 Lockset,Privacy CL3320 x NZD x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Wrap-Around CW-4-S (2.75 x 1.75-4.25 x 9) Don-Jo
Headina Notes
Remove Existing Lock and Replace with New Lever Lock.
NO
Hardware Set 700
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
00 1 Pull Plate 107-70C-(4"x 16")-US32D Rockwood
1 Push Plate 70C-(4"x 16")-US32D Rockwood
1 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x M54(SNB)x A3(HD) Corbin-Russwin
1 Kick Plate 16"x 34"-18 ga.-US32D Rockwood
1 Stop, Floor 436-B26D H.B.Ives
3 Silencer,HM Dr. Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
tIAA
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-45
.r
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079 ew
Hardware Set 507
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager ftl
1 Latchset, Passage CL3310 x NZD x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x M54(SNB)x A3(HD) Corbin-Russwin
1 Kick Plate 16"x 34"-18 ga.-US32D Rockwood
1 Stop,Floor 438-B26D H.B.Ives 40
1 Threshold 172A-(Depth of Frame)-36" Pemko
3 Silencer,HM Dr.Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
go
Hardware Set 508
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing B81279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Latchset,Passage CL3310 x NZD x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin wu
1 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x M54(SNB)x A3(HD) Corbin-Russwin
1 Kick Plate 16"x 34"-18 ga.-US32D Rockwood
1 Stop,Floor 436-B26D H.B.Ives
3 Silencer,HM Dr.Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives ow
Hardware Set 510 .�.
1 Latchset,Passage CL3310 x NZD x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
Headina Notes
Remove Existing Lock and Replace with New Lever Lock. �u
Hardware Set 520
1 Latchset,Passage CL3310 x NZD x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Wrap-Around CW-4-S (2.75 x 1.75-4.25 x 9) Don-Jo
Heading Notes oft
Remove Existing Lock and Replace with New Lever Lock.
Hardware Set 600 +
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Lockset, Privacy CL3320 x NZD x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Stop,Wall 407.5-S32D H.B.Ives
3 Silencer, HM Dr.Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives +
Hardware Set 601
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Lockset,Privacy CL3320 x NZD x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Stop, Floor 436-B26D H.B.Ives
3 Silencer,HM Dr.Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives w
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-44
ae
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS
so NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
Hardware Set 501
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Latchset,Passage CL3310 x NZD x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Stop,Floor 436-B26D H.B.lves
3 Silencer,HM Dr.Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Hardware Set 502
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing Hinges-Re-use Existing Existing
1 Latchset,Passage CL3310 x NZD x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Stop,Floor 436-B26D H.B.Ives
3 Silencer,HM Dr.Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Hardware Set 503
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Latchset,Passage CL3310 x NZD x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Closer,Overhead Regular Arm DC2200 x 689 x A10(HD) Corbin-Russwin
1 Kick Plate 16"x 34"-18 ga.-US32D Rockwood
1 Stop,Wall 407.5-S32D H.B.Ives
3 Silencer, HM Dr. Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Hardware Set 504
3 Hinge, Ball Bearing BB1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Latchset,Passage CL3310 x NZD x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Closer,Overhead Regular Arm DC2200 x 689 x A10(HD) Corbin-Russwin
1 Stop, Floor 436-B26D H.B.Ives
3 Silencer,HM Dr. Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Hardware Set 505
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Latchset,Passage CL3310 x NZD x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x M54(SNB)x A3(HD) Corbin-Russwin
1 Stop, Floor 438-B26D H.B.Ives
1 Threshold 172A-(Depth of Frame)-36" Pemko
3 Silencer,HM Dr. Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Hardware Set 506
3 Hinge, Ball Bearing BB1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Latchset,Passage CL3310 x NZD x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Closer,Overhead Regular Arm DC2200 x 689 x M54(SNB)x A10(HD) Corbin-Russwin
1 Kick Plate 16"x 34"-18 ga.-US32D Rockwood
1 Stop,Wall 407.5-S32D H.B.Ives
3 Silencer,HM Dr. Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
ee�
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-43
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
Hardware Set 479
6 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager Am
1 Lockset,Storeroom/Closet CL3357 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x M21 (KLO)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Bolts,Flush-Self Latching 356-B26D-(UL WD Doors) H.B.Ives
1 Bolts,Flush-Automatic 556-B26D-(UL WD Doors) H.B.Ives
1 Oust Proof Strike 487-B26D/489-B26D H.B.Ives
1 Coordinator,Door 900-72"-FP,w/Closer Mounting Brackets H.B.Ives
2 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x M54(SNB) Corbin-Russwin
2 Kick Plate 16"x 34"-18 ga.-US32D Rockwood
2 Stop,Floor 436-B26D H.B.Ives
2 Silencer, HM Dr.Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives °
Hardware Set 480 �+++
1 Lockset,Storeroom/Closet CL3357 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x M21 (KLO)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
Headina Notes
Remove Existing Lock and Replace with New Lever Lock.
Hardware Set 485 dw
1 Lockset, Storeroom/Closet CL3357 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x M21 (KLO)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Wrap-Around CW-4-S (2.75 x 1.75-4.25 x 9) Don-Jo
Headina Notes raw
Remove Existing Lock and Replace with New Lever Lock.
Hardware Set 488
6 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Lockset, Storeroom/Closet CL3357 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x M21 (KLO)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Bolts, Flush-Self Latching 357-B26D-(UL HM Doors) H.B.Ives ,11ei
1 Bolts,Flush-Automatic 559-B26D-(UL HM Doors) H.B.Ives
1 Dust Proof Strike 487-B26D/489-B26D H.B.Ives
1 Coordinator,Door 900-60"-FP,w/Closer Mounting Brackets H.B.Ives
2 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 Corbin-Russwin
2 Stop,Floor 436-B26D H.B.Ives
2 Silencer, HM Dr.Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Hardware Set 500
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB 1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Latchset,Passage CL3310 x NZD x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Stop,Overhead-Surf. 9-326-Hold Open-(33-1/16-38)-US26D Rixson
3 Silencer,HM Dr.Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
wn
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-42
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
Hardware Set 475
6 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1168-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Lockset,Storeroom/Closet CL3357 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x M21 (KLO)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Bolts,Flush-Self Latching 357-B26D-(UL HM Doors) H.B.Ives
1 Bolts, Flush-Automatic 559-B26D-(UL HM Doors) H.B.Ives
t>w 1 Dust Proof Strike 487-B26D/489-826D H.B.Ives
1 Coordinator,Door 900-72"-FP,w/Closer Mounting Brackets H.B.Ives
2 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x A5(HD-BS-HO) Corbin-Russwin
2 Silencer,HM Dr. Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Hardware Set 476
6 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Lockset,Storeroom/Closet CL3357 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x M21 (KLO)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Bolts, Flush-Self Latching 357-B26D-(UL HM Doors) H.B.lves
1 Bolts, Flush-Automatic 559-B26D-(UL HM Doors) H.B.Ives
1 Dust Proof Strike 487-B26D/489-B26D H.B.Ives
1 Coordinator,Door 900-72"-FP,w/Closer Mounting Brackets H.B.Ives
2 Closer,Overhead Regular Arm DC2200 x 689 Corbin-Russwin
2 Stop,Floor 436-B26D H.B.Ives
2 Silencer,HM Dr.Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
I!l Hardware Set 477
6 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Lockset,Storeroom/Closet CL3357 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x M21 (KLO)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Bolts, Flush-Self Latching 357-B26D-(UL HM Doors) H.B.Ives
1 Bolts,Flush-Automatic 559-B26D-(UL HM Doors) H.B.Ives
1 Dust Proof Strike 487-B26D/489-B26D H.B.Ives
1 Coordinator,Door 900-72"-FP,w/Closer Mounting Brackets H.B.Ives
2 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 Corbin-Russwin
2 Stop, Floor 436-B26D H.B.Ives
1 Threshold 172A-(Depth of Frame)-72" Pemko
2 Silencer,HM Dr.Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Hardware Set 478
6 Hinge, Ball Bearing BB1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Lockset,Storeroom/Closet CL3357 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x M21 (KLO)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Bolts,Flush-Self Latching 357-B26D-(UL HM Doors) H.B.Ives
1 Bolts,Flush-Automatic 559-B26D-(UL HM Doors) H.B.Ives
1 Dust Proof Strike 487-B26D/489-B26D H.B.Ives
1 Coordinator,Door 900-72"-FP,w/Closer Mounting Brackets H.B.Ives
2 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 Corbin-Russwin
2 Stop,Floor 436-B26D H.B.Ives
2 Silencer,HM Dr.Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Headina Notes
Template Closer Installations for 180 Degree Swing
ON
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-41
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
Hardware Set 470
6 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager „b
1 Lockset,Storeroom/Closet CL3357 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x M21 (KLO)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
2 Bolt,Flush 458-B26D-12" H.B.1ves
1 Dust Proof Strike 487-B26D/489-B26D H.B.1ves
2 Stop,Floor 436-B26D H.B.1ves so
2 Silencer,HM Dr. Frame 20R-Gray H.B.1ves
Hardware Set 471
6 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Lockset,Storeroom/Closet CL3357 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x M21 (KLO)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Bolts,Flush-Self Latching 356-B26D-(UL WD Doors) H.B.1ves on
1 Bolts,Flush-Automatic 556-826D-(UL WD Doors) H.B.1ves
1 Dust Proof Strike 487-B26D/489-B26D H.B.1ves
2 Stop,Floor 436-B26D H.B.1ves
2 Silencer, HM Dr.Frame 20R-Gray H.B.1ves Aft
Hardware Set 472
Am
6 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB 1168-5.0 x 5.0-US26D Hager
1 Lockset, Storeroom/Closet CL3357 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x M21 (KLO)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
2 Bolt,Flush 458-B26D-12" H.B.1ves
1 Dust Proof Strike 487-B26D/489-B26D H.B.1ves wo
2 Stop,Floor 436-B26D H.B.1ves
2 Silencer, HM Dr. Frame 20R-Gray H.B.1ves
am
Hardware Set 473
6 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Lockset, Storeroom/Closet CL3357 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x M21 (KLO)x 626 Corbin-Russwin wM
2 Bolt, Flush 458-B26D-12" H.B.1ves
1 Dust Proof Strike 487-B26D/489-B26D H.B.1ves
2 Stop,Wall 407.5-S32D H.B.1ves
2 Silencer, HM Dr.Frame 20R-Gray H.B.1ves wo
Hardware Set 474
on
6 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Lockset, Storeroom/Closet CL3357 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x M21 (KLO)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Bolts, Flush-Self Latching 356-B26D-(UL WD Doors) H.B.1ves
1 Bolts,Flush-Automatic 556-B26D-(UL WD Doors) H.B.1ves oft
1 Dust Proof Strike 487-B26D/489-B26D H.B.1ves
2 Stop,Overhead-Surf. 9-136-Stop Only-[24"-28"Dr]-US26D Rixson
2 Silencer, HM Dr.Frame 20R-Gray H.B.1ves
40
w�
A!r
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-40
00
NORTHAMPTON SIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA RB #96079
Hardware Set 464
m 3 Hinge,Bali Bearing BB1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Lockset,Storeroom/Closet CL3357 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x M21 (KLO)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 Corbin-Russwin
1 Stop,Floor 436-B26D H.B.Ives
an 3 Silencer,HM Dr.Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Headina Notes
Template Closer Installtion for 180 Degree Swing where indicated
- Hardware Set 465
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB 1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Lockset,Storeroom/Closet CL3357 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x M21 (KLO)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x A4(HD-BS) Corbin-Russwin
3 Silencer,HM Dr.Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Hardware Set 466
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB 1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
" 1 Lockset,Storeroom/Closet CL3357 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x M21 (KLO)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Closer,Overhead Regular Arm DC2200 x 689 Corbin-Russwin
1 Stop,Wall 407-S32D H.B.Ives
A" 3 Silencer,HM Dr. Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Hardware Set 467
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB 1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Lockset,Storeroom/Closet CL3357 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x M21 (KLO)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 Corbin-Russwin
1 Stop,Wall 407.5-S32D H.B.Ives
3 Silencer,HM Dr.Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Hardware Set 468
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing Hinges-Re-use Existing Existing
1 Lockset,Storeroom/Closet CL3357 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x M21 (KLO)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 Corbin-Russwin
1 Stop,Wall 407.5-S32D H.B.Ives
3 Silencer,HM Dr. Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Hardware Set 469
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB 1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Lockset,Storeroom/Closet CL3357 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x M21 (KLO)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x M54(SNB)x A3(HD) Corbin-Russwin
1 Kick Plate 16"x 34"-18 ga.-US32D Rockwood
1 Stop,Floor 436-B26D H.B.Ives
3 Silencer,HM Dr. Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-39
ow
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079 •
Hardware Set 459
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager V^
1 Lockset,Storeroom/Closet CL3357 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x M21 (KLO)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x M54(SNB)x A4(HD-BS) Corbin-Russwin
1 Kick Plate 16"x 34"-18 ga.-US32D Rockwood
3 Silencer, HM Dr.Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Hardware Set 460 �••
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Lockset, Storeroom/Closet CL3357 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x M21 (KLO)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Closer,Overhead Regular Arm DC2200 x 689 x M54(SNB) Corbin-Russwin
1 Kick Plate 16"x 34"-18 ga.-US32D Rockwood
1 Stop,Floor 436-B26D H.B.Ives
3 Silencer, HM Dr. Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Hardware Set 461
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Lockset,Storeroom/Closet CL3357 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x M21 (KLO)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 Corbin-Russwin
1 Stop,Wall 407.5-S32D H.B.Ives
1 Threshold 172A-(Depth of Frame)-36" Pemko
3 Silencer, HM Dr. Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Hardware Set 462
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing-Wide Throw WW-BB1279-4.5 x 6.0-US26D Hager
1 Lockset, Storeroom/Closet CL3357 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x M21 (KLO)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 Corbin-Russwin
1 Stop,Floor 436-B26D H.B.Ives
3 Silencer, HM Dr.Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Headina Notes
Template Closer Installtion for 180 Degree Swing
Hardware Set 463
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Lockset,Storeroom/Closet CL3357 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x M21 (KLO)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Closer,Overhead Regular Arm DC2200 x 689 Corbin-Russwin
1 Stop,Floor 436-B26D H.B.Ives OR
3 Silencer, HM Dr.Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
�w
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-38 "'"'
w�
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS
!! NORTHAMPTON, MA
KB #96079
Hardware Set 451
im 3 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D
1 Lockset,Storeroom/Closet CL3357 x NZD x Key M17 WSB x M21 KLO x 626 Hager
1 Stop, y (WSB) (KLO) Corbin-Russwin
p 407.5-S32D H.B.Ives
3 Silencer,HM Dr. Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Hardware Set 452
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Lockset,Storeroom/Closet CL3357 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x M21 (KLO)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Stop,Floor 436-B26D H.B.Ives
3 Silencer,HM Dr.Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Hardware Set 453
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing 9 Hinges-Re-use Existing Existing
1 Lockset,Storeroom/Closet CL3357 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x M21 (KLO)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x A4(HD-BS) Corbin-Russwin
3 Silencer,HM Dr.Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Hardware Set 454
3 Hinge, Ball Bearing BB1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D
1 Lockset,Storeroom/Closet CL3357 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x M21 (KLO)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x M54(SNB)x A5(HD-BS-HO) Corbin-Russwin
w 3 Silencer,HM Dr. Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Headina Notes
Template Closer Installation for 180 Degree Swing where indicated
Hardware Set 456
3 Hinge, Ball Bearing BB1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1�MI 1 Lockset,Storeroom/Closet CL3357 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x M21 (KLO)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Closer,Overhead Regular Arm DC2200 x 689 Corbin-Russwin
1 Stop,Floor 436-B26D H.B.Ives
3 Silencer,HM Dr. Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Hardware Set 458
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Lockset,Storeroom/Closet CL3357 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x M21 (KLO)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x M54(SNB)x A5(HD-BS-HO) Corbin-Russwin
1 Kick Plate 16"x 34"-18 ga.-US32D Rockwood
3 Silencer,HM Dr. Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Headina Notes
Install Closer on"PUSH"Side of Door
tl DOOR HARDWARE
08710-37
Oft
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA RH #96079 go
Hardware Set 423
8 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager w
1 Lockset,Storeroom/Closet CL3357 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
2 Bolt,Flush 458-B26D-12" H.B.Ives
1 Dust Proof Strike 487-B26D/489-B26D H.B.Ives
2 Stop,Floor 436-826D H.B.Ives on
2 Silencer,HM Dr. Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Hardware Set 424
8 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Lockset,Storeroom/Closet CL3357 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Key Switch,Momentary 643-05-626 Locknetics "
1 Cylinder,Mortise 1000 x 114 x A02 x 6-Key x 626 Corbin-Russwin
2 Bolt, Flush 458-B26D-12" H.B.Ives
1 Dust Proof Strike 487-B26D/489-B26D H.B.lves wee
2 Stop,Floor 438-B26D H.B.Ives
1 Electro-Magnetic Lock 268-TJ-10-MBS-24 VDC x Filler Plates&Angle Brackets Locknetics
1 Power Supply 505 "FAIL SAFE" Locknetics
1 Weatherstrip 312CR-60"x 84" Pemko
1 Astragal,Overlapping 357SS w/S88-84" Pemko
1 Door Bottom Sweep 315CN-30" Pemko
1 Door Bottom Sweep 315CN-36" Pemko
1 Threshold 172A-(Depth of Frame)-60" Pemko No
2 Silencer,HM Dr. Frame 20R-Gray H.B.lves
Headina Notes
268-TJ-10-MBS-24 VDC x Filler Plates&Angle Brackets @ RHR-ACT Leaf Only
Installation of Mag Locks to be"Fail Safe" of
Hardware Set 430 ON
1 Lockset, Storeroom/Closet CL3357 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Wrap-Around CW-4-S (2.75 x 1.75-4.25 x 9) Don-Jo
Headina Notes
w
Remove Existing Lock and Replace with New Lever Lock.
Hardware Set 450 so
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1168-5.0 x 5.0-US26D Hager
1 Lockset, Storeroom/Closet CL3357 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x M21 (KLO)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Stop,Overhead-Surf. 9-526-Hold Open-(43-1/16-48)-US26D Rixson OR
3 Silencer, HM Dr. Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-36
OR
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA RB #96079
Hardware Set 404
go 3 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Lockset,Storeroom/Closet CL3357 x NZD x Key 17
y x (WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x M54(SNB) Corbin-Russwin
1 Kick Plate 16"x 34"-18 ga.-US32D Rockwood
1 Stop,Floor 436-B26D H.B.Ives
3 Silencer,HM Dr.Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
w Hardware Set 405
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Lockset,Storeroom/Closet CL3357 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x M54(SNB)x A4(HD-BS) Corbin-Russwin
3 Silencer,HM Dr. Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Hardware Set 406
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Lockset,Storeroom/Closet CL3357 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x M54(SNB) Corbin-Russwin
1 Stop,Floor 436-B26D H.B.Ives
3 Silencer,HM Dr.Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
illy
Hardware Set 421
6 Hinge, Ball Bearing BB1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Lockset,Storeroom/Closet CL3357 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
2 Bolt, Flush 458-B26D-12" H.B.Ives
1 Dust Proof Strike 487-B26D/489-B26D H.B.Ives
2 Stop,Overhead-Surf. 9-326-Hold Open-(33-1/16-38)-US26D Rixson
2 Silencer, HM Dr. Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Hardware Set 422
8 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D
Hager
1 Lockset,Storeroom/Closet CL3357 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Bolt,Flush 458-B26D-12"ROD(Bottom) H.B.Ives
1 Bolt, Flush 458-B26D-24"ROD(Top) H.B.Ives
1 Dust Proof Strike 487-B26D/489-B26D H.B.Ives
1 Stop,Overhead-Surf. 9-126-Hold Open-(24-28)-US26D Rixson
1 Stop,Overhead-Surf. 9-326-Hold Open-(33-1/16-38)-US26D Rixson
2 Silencer,HM Dr.Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
00
1lI
P'
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-35
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079 +
Hardware Set 305
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager ob
1 Lockset,Entrance/Office CL3351 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Closer,Overhead Regular Arm DC2200 x 689 x M54(SNB)x A10(HD) Corbin-Russwin
1 Kick Plate 16"x 28"-18 ga.-US320 Rockwood
1 Stop,Floor 436-B26D H.B.Ives *"
3 Silencer,HM Dr.Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Hardware Set 310
1 Lockset,Entrance/Office CL3351 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
Headina Notes
Remove Existing Lock and Replace with New Lever Lock.
Hardware Set 320 ""
1 Lockset,Entrance/Office CL3351 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Wrap-Around CW-4-S (2.75 x 1.75-4.25 x 9) Don-Jo
Heading Notes '*
Remove Existing Lock and Replace with New Lever Lock.
00
Hardware Set 400
3 Hinge, Ball Bearing Hinges-Re-use Existing Existing
1 Lockset,Storeroom/Closet CL3357 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Closer,Overhead Regular Arm DC2200 x 689 x M54 SNB
g ( ) Corbin-Russwin
1 Stop,Floor 436-B26D H.B.Ives
w
Hardware Set 402
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Lockset, Storeroom/Closet CL3357 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Closer,Overhead Regular Arm DC2200 x 689 x M54 SNB
( ) Corbin-Russwin
1 Kick Plate 16"x 34"-18 ga.-US32D Rockwood
1 Stop, Floor 436-B26D H.B.Ives
3 Silencer, HM Dr. Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
ear
Hardware Set 403
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D
Hager
1 Lockset, Storeroom/Closet CL3357 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Stop,Overhead-Surf. 9-326-Hold Open-(33-1/16-38)-US26D Rixson
3 Silencer, HM Dr.Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-34 s
ON
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS
pa NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
Hardware Set 276
to 3 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1168-5.0 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Lockset,Classroom CL3355 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x M21 (KLO)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Closer,Overhead Regular Arm DC2200 x 689 x M54(SNB)x A10(HD) Corbin-Russwin
1 Stop,Floor 436-B26D H.B.1ves
3 Silencer,HM Dr. Frame 20R-Gray H.B.1ves
Hardware Set 300
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB 1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
- 1 Lockset,Entrance/Office CL3351 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Stop,Floor 436-B26D H.B.1ves
3 Silencer,HM Dr. Frame 20R-Gray H.B.1ves
Hardware Set 301
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing-Wide Throw WW-BB1279-4.5 x 6.0-US26D Hager
1 Lockset,Entrance/Office CL3351 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Stop,Floor 436-B26D H.B.1ves
3 Silencer,HM Dr. Frame 20R-Gray H.B.1ves
Hardware Set 302
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB 1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Lockset,Entrance/Office CL3351 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Stop, Floor 436-B26D H.B.1ves
1 Threshold Marble By Others
3 Silencer,HM Dr. Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Hardware Set 303
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB 1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Lockset,Entrance/Office CL3351 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x M54(SNB)x A4(HD-BS) Corbin-Russwin
1 Kick Plate 16"x 34"-18 ga.-US32D Rockwood
3 Silencer,HM Dr. Frame 20R-Gray H.B.1ves
Hardware Set 304
3 Hinge,Bali Bearing BB 1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
AIR 1 Lockset, Entrance/Office CL3351 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x M54(SNB)x A3(HD) Corbin-Russwin
1 Kick Plate 16"x 34"-18 ga.-US32D Rockwood
1 Stop, Floor 436-B26D H.B.1ves
3 Silencer,HM Dr. Frame 20R-Gray H.B.1ves
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-33
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
Hardware Set 240
1 Lockset,Classroom CL3355 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin *!�!
Headina Notes
Remove Existing Lock and Replace with New Lever Lock.
wa
Hardware Set 250
1 Lockset,Classroom CL3355 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin go
1 Wrap-Around CW-4-S (2.75 x 1.75-4.25 x 9) Don-Jo
Headina Notes
Remove Existing Lock and Replace with New Lever Lock.
no
Hardware Set 251
1 Lockset,Classroom CL3355 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin am
1 Wrap-Around CW-4-S (2.75 x 1.75-4.25 x 9) Don-Jo
1 Closer,Overhead Regular Arm DC2200 x 689 x M54(SNB)x A10(HD) Corbin-Russwin
Headina Notes
Remove Existing Lock and Replace with New Lever Lock.
Hardware Set 260
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Lockset,Communicating CL3362 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x M54(SNB)x A3(HD) Corbin-Russwinr
1 Kick Plate 16"x 34"-18 ga.-US32D Rockwood
1 Stop,Floor 436-B26D H.B.Ives
3 Silencer,HM Dr. Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
w
Hardware Set 261
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing 661279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager ft
1 Lockset,Communicating CL3362 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-.Russwin
1 Kick Plate 16"x 34"-18 ga.-US32D Rockwood
1 Stop,Floor 438-B26D H.B.Ives
1 Threshold 172A-(Depth of Frame)-36" Pemko am
3 Silencer,HM Dr.Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
as
Hardware Set 275
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Lockset,Classroom CL3355 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x M21 (KLO)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Closer,Overhead Regular Arm DC2200 x 689 x M54(SNB)x A10(HD) Corbin-Russwin no
1 Kick Plate 16"x 34"-18 ga.-US32D Rockwood
1 Stop,Floor 436-B26D H.B.Ives
3 Silencer,HM Dr. Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
04
as
w
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-32 w
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
Hardware Set 216
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB 1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Lockset,Classroom CL3355 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x M54(SNB)x A3(HD) Corbin-Russwin
1 Kick Plate 16"x 34"-18 ga.-US32D Rockwood
1 Stop, Floor 436-B26D H.B.Ives
1 Threshold 172A-(Depth of Frame)-36" Pemko
3 Silencer,HM Dr. Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
4
Hardware Set 230
6 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1168-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Lockset,Classroom CL3355 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
2 Bolts,Flush-Automatic 556-B26D-(UL WD Doors) H.B.Ives
1 Dust Proof Strike 487-B26D/489-B26D H.B.Ives
1 Coordinator,Door 900-72"-FP,w/Closer Mounting Brackets H.B.Ives
2 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x M54(SNB)x A5(HD-BS-HO) Corbin-Russwin
2 Kick Plate 16"x 34"-18 ga.-US32D Rockwood
Headina Notes
!If►
Hardware Set 231
6 Hinge, Ball Bearing-Wide Throw WW-BB1279-4.5 x 6.0-US26D Hager
1 Lockset,Classroom CL3355 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Bolts, Flush-Self Latching 357-B26D-(UL HM Doors) H.B.Ives
1 Bolts,Flush-Automatic 556-B26D-(UL WD Doors) H.B.Ives
1 Dust Proof Strike 487-B26D/489-B26D H.B.Ives
1 Coordinator,Door 900-72"-FP,w/Closer Mounting Brackets H.B.Ives
2 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x M54(SNB)x A3(HD) Corbin-Russwin
1 Kick Plate 16"x 22"-18 ga.-US32D Rockwood
1 Kick Plate 16"x 34"-18 ga.-US32D Rockwood
2 Stop, Floor 436-B26D H.B.Ives
Hardware Set 232
6 Hinge, Ball Bearing BB 1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Lockset,Classroom CL3355 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Bolts, Flush-Self Latching 357-B26D-(UL HM Doors) H.B.Ives
1 Bolts, Flush-Automatic 556-B26D-(UL WD Doors) H.B.Ives
1 Dust Proof Strike 487-B26D/489-B26D H.B.Ives
1 Coordinator,Door 900-72"-FP,w/Closer Mounting Brackets H.B.Ives
2 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x M54(SNB)x A3(HD) Corbin-Russwin
2 Kick Plate 16"x 34"-18 ga.-US32D Rockwood
2 Stop,Floor 436-B26D H.B.Ives
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-31
..t
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
Hardware Set 211
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing-Wide Throw WW-BB1279-4.5 x 6.0-US26D Hager
1 Lockset,Classroom CL3355 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x M54(SNB)x A3(HD) Corbin-Russwin
1 Kick Plate 16"x 34"-18 ga.-US32D Rockwood
1 Stop,Floor 436-B26D H.B.Ives ,
3 Silencer, HM Dr.Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Headinsa Notes
Template Closer Installation for 180 Deggree Swing as indicated.
Im
Hardware Set 212
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager ow
1 Lockset,Classroom CL3355 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x M54(SNB)x A3(HD) Corbin-Russwin
1 Kick Plate 16"x 34"-18 ga.-US32D Rockwood
1 Stop,Wall 407.5-S32D H.B.Ives �w
3 Silencer,HM Dr. Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
to
Hardware Set 213
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Lockset,Classroom CL3355 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x M54(SNB)x A4(HD-BS) Corbin-Russwin am
1 Kick Plate 16"x 34"-18 ga.-US32D Rockwood
3 Silencer, HM Dr. Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
ON
Hardware Set 214
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Lockset, Classroom CL3355 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin am
1 Closer,Overhead Regular Arm DC2200 x 689 x M54(SNB)x A10(HD) Corbin-Russwin
1 Kick Plate 16"x 34"-18 ga.-US32D Rockwood
1 Stop, Floor 436-B26D H.B.Ives
3 Silencer, HM Dr.Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives ' 1
Hardware Set 215
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Lockset,Classroom CL3355 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x M54(SNB)x A3(HD) Corbin-Russwin
1 Kick Plate 16"x 34"-18 ga.-US32D Rockwood
1 Stop,Floor 436-B26D H.B.Ives
3 Silencer, HM Dr.Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Headina Notes
Template Closer Installation for 180 Deggree Swing as indicated.
eft
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-30
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS
W11 NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
Hardware Set 207
IN 3 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Lockset,Classroom CL3355 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Closer,Overhead Regular Arm OC2200 x 689 x M54(SNB)x A10(HD) Corbin-Russwin
1 Kick Plate 16"x 34"-18 ga.-US32D Rockwood
1 Stop,Floor 438-B26D H.B.Ives
1 Threshold Marble H.H.
3 Silencer,HM Dr.Frame 20R-Gray By Others
Ot Ot he e
Or
Hardware Set 208
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Lockset,Classroom CL3355 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x M54(SNB)x A4(HD-BS) Corbin-Russwin
1 Kick Plate 16"x 34"-18 ga.-US32D Rockwood
1 Threshold Marble By Others
3 Silencer,HM Dr.Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Hardware Set 209
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Lockset,Classroom CL3355 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x M54(SNB)x A3(HD) Corbin-Russwin
1 Kick Plate 16"x 34"-18 ga.-US32D Rockwood
1 Stop,Floor 438-B26D H.B.Ives
1 Threshold Marble By Others
» 3 Silencer, HM Dr. Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Headinsa Notes
Template Closer Installation for 180 Deggree Swing as indicated.
Hardware Set 210
3 Hinge, Ball Bearing BB1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Lockset,Classroom CL3355 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x A3(HD) Corbin-Russwin
1 Stop, Floor 436-B26D H.B.Ives
ow 3 Silencer,HM Dr. Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Headina Notes
Template Closer Installation for 180 Deggree Swing as indicated.
OR
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-29
Oft
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079 Am
• Hardware Set 201
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing Hinges-Re-use Existing Existing OR
1 Lockset,Classroom CL3355 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Stop,Floor 436-B26D H.B.Ives
3 Silencer, HM Dr.Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Hardware Set 202
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing-Wide Throw WW-BB1279-4.5 x 6.0-US26D Hager aRe
1 Lockset,Classroom CL3355 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Stop,Floor 436-B26D H.B.Ives
3 Silencer, HM Dr. Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Hardware Set 203
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing-Wide Throw WW-BB 1279-4.5 x 6.0-US26D Hager *
1 Lockset,Classroom CL3355 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Stop,Floor 436-B26D H.B.Ives
3 Silencer, HM Dr.Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
+wR
Headina Notes
Contracot to verify exisitng hinge prep.
No
Hardware Set 204
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB 1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Lockset,Classroom CL3355 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin ow
1 Closer,Overhead Regular Arm DC2200 x 689 x M54(SNB)x A10(HD) Corbin-Russwin
1 Kick Plate 16"x 34"-18 ga.-US32D Rockwood
1 Stop,Floor 436-B26D H.B.Ives
3 Silencer, HM Dr. Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Hardware Set 205
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Lockset,Classroom CL3355 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x M54(SNB)x A3(HD) Corbin-Russwin
1 Kick Plate 16"x 34"-18 ga.-US32D Rockwood
1 Stop,Floor 436-B26D H.B.Ives
3 Silencer, HM Dr. Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Hardware Set 206
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Lockset,Classroom CL3355 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x M54(SNB)x A4(HD-BS) Corbin-Russwin
1 Kick Plate 16"x 34"-18 ga.-US32D Rockwood
3 Silencer, HM Dr. Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-28
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
Hardware Set 189
2 Hinge,B.B.-Anchor BB1160-5.0 x 4.5-US26D Hager
4 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1168-5.0 x 4.5-US26D Hager
2 Exit Device,V.R.,Surface ED5400A x EO-(30"-84")x 626 Corbin-Russwin
2 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x A3(HD) Corbin-Russwin
2 Electromagnetic Door Release 998-24 VDC-SA Rixson
2 Silencer,HM Dr.Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Hardware Set 190
2 Hinge,B.B.-Anchor BB1160-5.0 x 5.0-US26D Hager
4 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1168-5.0 x 5.0-US26D Hager
OR 2 Exit Device,V.R.,Surface ED5400A x EO-(36"-84")x 626 Corbin-Russwin
2 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x A3(HD) Corbin-Russwin
2 Electromagnetic Door Release 998-24 VDC-SA Rixson
2 Silencer,HM Dr. Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
M
Hardware Set 191
2 Hinge,B.B.-Anchor BB1160-5.0 x 5.0-US26D Hager
4 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1168-5.0 x 5.0-US26D Hager
2 Exit Device,V.R.,Surface ED5400A x EO-(42"-84")x 626 Corbin-Russwin
2 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x A3(HD) Corbin-Russwin
2 Electromagnetic Door Release 998-24 VDC-SA Rixson
2 Silencer,HM Dr. Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Hardware Set 192
2 Hinge,B.B.-Anchor BB1160-5.0 x 4.5-US26D Hager
4 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1168-5.0 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Exit Device,V.R.,Surf.-Keyed ED5400A x N955 x Key-(24"-84")x 626
1 Exit Device,V.R.,Surf.-Keyed ED5400A x N955 x Key-(30"-84")x 626 Corbin-Russwin
2 Cylinder,Rim 3000 x Key x 626 Corbin-Russwin
2 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x M54(SNB)x A3(HD) Corbin-Russwin
1 Kick Plate 16"x 22"-18 ga.-US32D Rockwood
1 Kick Plate 16"x 34"-18 ga.-US32D Rockwood
2 Stop,Floor 436-B26D H.B.Ives
2 Silencer,HM Dr.Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Hardware Set 200
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1279-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Lockset,Classroom CL3355 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Stop, Floor 436-826D H.B.Ives
3 Silencer,HM Dr. Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Aft>
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-27
ok
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA RB #96079 at
Hardware Set 184
2 Hinge, B.B.-Anchor BB1160-5.0 x 4.5-US26D Hager
4 Hinge, Ball Bearing BB1168-5.0 x 4.5-US26D Hager
2 Exit Device,V.R.,Surf.-Keyed ED5400A x N955 x Key-(30"-84")x 626 Corbin-Russwin
2 Cylinder,Rim 3000 x Key x 626 Corbin-Russwin
2 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x A3(HD) Corbin-Russwin
2 Electromagnetic Door Release 998-24 VDC-SA Rixson
2 Silencer,HM Dr.Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
ewe
Hardware Set 185
2 Hinge,B.B.-Anchor BB1160-5.0 x 5.0-US26D Hager
4 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1168-5.0 x 5.0-US26D Hager
2 Exit Device,V.R.,Surf.-Keyed ED5400A x N955 x Key-(42"-84")x 626 Corbin-Russwin
2 Cylinder,Rim 3000 x Key x 626 Corbin-Russwin
2 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x A3(HD) Corbin-Russwin
2 Electromagnetic Door Release 998-24 VDC-SA Rixson
2 Silencer,HM Dr. Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Hardware Set 186
2 Hinge,B.B.-Anchor BB1160-5.0 x 5.0-US26D Hager
6 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1168-5.0 x 5.0-US26D Hager
2 Exit Device,V.R.,Surf.-Keyed ED5400A x N955 x Key-(30"-92")x 626 Corbin-Russwin
2 Cylinder,Rim 3000 x Key x 626 Corbin-Russwin
2 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x M54(SNB)x A3(HD) Corbin-Russwin
2 Kick Plate 16"x 34"-18 ga.-US32D Rockwood
2 Electromagnetic Door Release 980-24 VDC-SA-(Floor Mounted) Rixson w
2 Silencer,HM Dr.Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Hardware Set 187
2 Hinge,B.B.-Anchor BB1160-5.0 x 4.5-US26D Hager
4 Hinge, Ball Bearing BB1168-5.0 x 4.5-US26D Hager
2 Exit Device,V.R.,Surface ED5400A x EO-(30"-80")x 626 Corbin-Russwin r
2 Closer, Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x A3(HD) Corbin-Russwin
2 Electromagnetic Door Release 998-24 VDC-SA (Provide Bracket Exrensions As Required) Rixson
2 Silencer,HM Dr.Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Hardware Set 188
2 Hinge,B.B.-Anchor BB1160-5.0 x 4.5-US26D Hager
4 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1168-5.0 x 4.5-US26D Hager
2 Exit Device,V.R.,Surface ED5400A x EO-(30"-84")x 626 Corbin-Russwin
2 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x A3(HD) Corbin-Russwin
2 Electromagnetic Door Release 998-24 VDC-SA (Provide Bracket Exrensions As Required) Rixson
2 Silencer,HM Dr.Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
.er►
Aw
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-26
aw
OR
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS
06, NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
Hardware Set 168
1111" 2 Hinge,B.B.-Anchor BB1160-5.0 x 4.5-US26D Hager
4 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1168-5.0 x 4.5-US26D Hager
2 Exit Device,Rim-Keyed ED5200A x N955 x Key-(30")x 626 Corbin-Russwin
2 Cylinder,Rim 3000 x Key x 626 Corbin-Russwin
III 1 Mullion,Removable 707A-84" Corbin-Russwin
2 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x M54(SNB)x A4(HD-BS) Corbin-Russwin
2 Kick Plate 16"x 34"-18 ga.-US32D Rockwood
1 Threshold 172A-(Depth of Frame)-72" Pemko
+flat 2 Silencer,HM Dr.Frame 2011-Gray H.B.ives
ox Hardware Set 180
2 Hinge,B.B.-Anchor BB1160-5.0 x 4.5-US26D Hager
4 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB 1168-5.0 x 4.5-US26D Hager
2 Exit Device,V.R.,Surface ED5400 x EO-(30")x 626 Corbin-Russwin
2 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x A3(HD) Corbin-Russwin
2 Electromagnetic Door Release 998-24 VDC-SA Rixson
2 Silencer,HM Dr.Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Hardware Set 181
2 Hinge,B.B.-Anchor BB1160-5.0 x 4.5-US26D Hager
mill 4 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1168-5.0 x 4.5-US26D Hager
2 Exit Device,V.R.,Surf.-Keyed ED5400 x N955 x Key-(30"-84")x 626 Corbin-Russwin
2 Cylinder,Rim 3000 x Key x 626 Corbin-Russwin
2 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x A3(HD) Corbin-Russwin
2 Electromagnetic Door Release 998-24 VDC-SA Rixson
2 Silencer,HM Dr. Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Hardware Set 182
2 Hinge,B.B.-Anchor BB1160-5.0 x 5.0-US26D Hager
4 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1168-5.0 x 5.0-US26D Hager
2 Exit Device,V.R.,Surf.-Keyed ED5400 x N955 x Key-(42"-84")x 626 Corbin-Russwin
2 Cylinder,Rim 3000 x Key x 626 Corbin-Russwin
2 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x A3(HD) Corbin-Russwin
2 Electromagnetic Door Release 998-24 VDC-SA Rixson
2 Silencer,HM Dr. Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Hardware Set 183
2 Hinge,B.B.-Anchor BB1160-5.0 x 5.0-US26D Hager
4 Hinge,Bali Bearing BB1168-5.0 x 5.0-US26D Hager
2 Exit Device,V.R.,Surf.-Keyed ED5400A x N955 x Key-(38"-84")x 626 Corbin-Russwin
2 Cylinder,Rim 3000 x Key x 626 Corbin-Russwin
2 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x A3(HD) Corbin-Russwin
2 Electromagnetic Door Release 998-24 VDC-SA Rixson
2 Silencer, HM Dr. Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-25
oft
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079 46
Hardware Set 164
2 Hinge,B.B.-Anchor BB 1160-5.0 x 4.5-US26D Hager
4 Hinge, Ball Bearing BB1168-5.0 x 4.5-US26D Hager
2 Exit Device,Rim-Keyed ED5200A x N955 x Key-(32")x 626 Corbin-Russwin
2 Cylinder,Rim 3000 x Key x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Mullion,Removable 707A-84" Corbin-Russwin
2 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x M54(SNB)x A3(HD) Corbin-Russwin
2 Kick Plate 16"x 36"-18 ga.-US32D Rockwood
2 Stop,Floor 436-B26D H.B.Ives
2 Silencer,HM Dr.Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Headina Notes
Template Closer Installation for 180 Deggree Swing as indicated.
Hardware Set 165
2 Hinge,B.B.-Anchor BB1160-5.0 x 4.5-US26D Hager am
4 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1168-5.0 x 4.5-US26D Hager
2 Exit Device,Rim-Keyed ED5200A x N955 x Key-(30")x 626 Corbin-Russwin
2 Cylinder,Rim 3000 x Key x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Mullion, Removable 707A-84" Corbin-Russwin go
2 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x A3(HD) Corbin-Russwin
2 Stop,Floor 436-B26D H.B.Ives
2 Silencer,HM Dr. Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Hardware Set 166
2 Hinge,B.B.-Anchor BB1160-5.0 x 5.0-US26D Hager go
4 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1168-5.0 x 5.0-US26D Hager
2 Exit Device,Rim-Keyed ED5200A x N955 x Key-(42")x 626 Corbin-Russwin
2 Cylinder,Rim 3000 x Key x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Mullion, Removable 707A-84" Corbin-Russwin oft
2 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x M54(SNB)x A3(HD) Corbin-Russwin
2 Kick Plate 16"x 42"-18 ga.-US32D Rockwood
2 Stop, Floor 438-B26D H.B.Ives
1 Threshold 172A-(Depth of Frame)-96" Pemko
2 Silencer,HM Dr. Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives an
Hardware Set 167 00
2 Hinge,B.B.-Anchor BB1160-5.0 x 4.5-US26D Hager
6 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1168-5.0 x 4.5-US26D Hager
2 Exit Device,Rim-Keyed ED5200A x N955 x Key-(30")x 626 Corbin-Russwin
2 Cylinder,Rim 3000 x Key x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Mullion,Removable 707B-96" Corbin-Russwin
2 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x M54(SNB)x A3(HD) Corbin-Russwin
2 Kick Plate 16"x 34"-18 ga.-US32D Rockwood
2 Stop,Floor 438-B26D H.B.Ives
1 Threshold 172A-(Depth of Frame)-72" Pemko
2 Silencer, HM Dr.Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
s
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-24
wb
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
Hardware Set 160
2 Hinge,B.B.-Anchor BB1160-5.0 x 4.5-US26D Hager
4 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1168-5.0 x 4.5-US26D Hager
2 Exit Device,Rim-Keyed ED5200 x N955 x Key-M52(CD)-(30")x 626 Corbin-Russwin
2 Cylinder,Mortise 1000 x Key x 626 Corbin-Russwin
2 Cylinder,Rim 3000 x Key x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Mullion,Removable 707A-84" Corbin-Russwin
2 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x A5(HD-BS-HO) Corbin-Russwin
2 Silencer,HM Dr.Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
lilR
Hardware Set 161
6 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1168-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
2 Exit Device,Rim-Keyed ED5200 x N955 x Key-M52(CD)-(30")x 626 Corbin-Russwin
2 Cylinder,Mortise 1000 x Key x 626 Corbin-Russwin
2 Cylinder,Rim 3000 x Key x 626 Corbin-Russwin
ON 1 Mullion,Removable 707A-82" Corbin-Russwin
2 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x A3(HD) Corbin-Russwin
2 Stop,Floor 436-826D H.B.Ives
2 Silencer,HM Dr.Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Hardware Set 162
2 Hinge,B.B.-Anchor BB1160-5.0 x 4.5-US26D Hager
4 Hinge, Ball Bearing BB1168-5.0 x 4.5-US26D Hager
2 Exit Device,Rim-Keyed ED5200 x N955 x Key-M52(CD)-(30")x 626 Corbin-Russwin
2 Cylinder,Mortise 1000 x Key x 626 Corbin-Russwin
2 Cylinder,Rim 3000 x Key x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Mullion, Removable 707A-84" Corbin-Russwin
2 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x M54(SNB)x A3(HD) Corbin-Russwin
2 Kick Plate 16"x 34"-18 ga.-US32D Rockwood
2 Stop, Floor 436-B26D H.B.Ives
2 Silencer,HM Dr.Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Hardware Set 163
2 Hinge,B.B.-Anchor BB1160-5.0 x 4.5-US26D Hager
4 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1168-5.0 x 4.5-US26D Hager
2 Exit Device,Rim-Keyed ED5200A x N955 x Key-(30")x 626 Corbin-Russwin
2 Cylinder,Rim 3000 x Key x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Mullion,Removable 707A-84" Corbin-Russwin
2 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x M54(SNB)x A3(HD) Corbin-Russwin
2 Kick Plate 16"x 34"-18 ga.-US32D Rockwood
2 Stop, Floor 436-B26D H.B.Ives
2 Silencer,HM Dr.Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Headina Notes
Template Closer Installation for 180 Deggree Swing as indicated.
RMA
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-23
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA RS #96079
Hardware Set 152
1 Hinge,B.B.-Anchor BB1160-5.0 x 4.5-US26D Hager
2 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1168-5.0 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Exit Device,Rim-Keyed ED5200A x N955 x Key-(30")x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Cylinder,Rim 3000 x Key x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Closer,Overhead Regular Arm DC2200 x 689 x A10(HD) Corbin-Russwin
1 Stop,Floor 436-B26D H.B.Ives
3 Silencer,HM Dr. Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Hardware Set 153
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1168-5.0 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Exit Device,Rim-Keyed ED5200A x N955 x Key-(30")x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Cylinder,Rim 3000 x Key x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Closer,Overhead Regular Arm DC2200 x 689 x A10(HD) Corbin-Russwin
1 Stop, Floor 438-B26D H.B.Ives
1 Threshold 172A-(Depth of Frame)-36" Pemko ,,W
3 Silencer,HM Dr.Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Hardware Set 154
1 Hinge, B.B.-Anchor BB1160-5.0 x 4.5-US26D Hager
2 Hinge, Ball Bearing BB1168-5.0 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Exit Device,Rim-Keyed ED5200A x N955 x Key-(30")x 626 Corbin-Russwin 4e�
1 Cylinder,Rim 3000 x Key x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Closer,Overhead Regular Arm DC2200 x 689 x A10(HD) Corbin-Russwin
1 Stop, Floor 438-B26D H.B.Ives
1 Threshold 172A-(Depth of Frame)-36" Pemko
3 Silencer,HM Dr. Frame 20R-Gray, H.B.Ives
Hardware Set 155
1 Hinge,B.B.-Anchor BB1160-5.0 x 4.5-US26D Hager
2 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1168-5.0 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Exit Device,Rim-Keyed ED5200A x N955 x Key-(30")x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Cylinder,Rim 3000 x Key x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x M54(SNB)x A3(HD) Corbin-Russwin
1 Kick Plate 16"x 34"-18 ga.-US32D Rockwood
1 Stop,Floor 436-B26D H.B.Ives 40
1 Threshold 172A-(Depth of Frame)-36" Pemko
3 Silencer,HM Dr. Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
00
Mft
rr
w
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-22
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
Hardware Set 103
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1168-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Exit Device,Rim-Keyed ED5200 x N955 x Key-M52(CD)-(30")x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Cylinder,Mortise 1000 x Key x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Cylinder,Rim 3000 x Key x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x M54(SNB)x A4(HD-BS) Corbin-Russwin
1 Kick Plate 16"x 34"-18 ga.-US32D Rockwood
3 Silencer,HM Dr.Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Hardware Set 104
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1168-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Exit Device,Rim-Keyed ED5200 x N955 x Key-M52(CD)-(30")x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Cylinder,Mortise 1000 x Key x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Cylinder,Rim 3000 x Key x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x M54(SNB)x A3(HD) Corbin-Russwin
1 Kick Plate 16"x 34"-18 ga.-US32D Rockwood
1 Stop,Floor 438-B26D H.B.Ives
1 Threshold Marble By Others
3 Silencer,HM Dr. Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
+l4r
Headina Notes
Template Closer Installation for 180 Deggree Swing as indicated.
Hardware Set 150
1 Hinge,B.B.-Anchor BB1160-5.0 x 4.5-US26D Hager
2 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1168-5.0 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Exit Device, Rim-Keyed ED5200A x N955 x Key-(30")x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Cylinder,Rim 3000 x Key x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x A3(HD) Corbin-Russwin
0" 1 Electromagnetic Door Release 998-24 VDC-SA Rixson
3 Silencer,HM Dr. Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Headina Notes
Template Closer Installation for 180 Deggree Swing as indicated.
Hardware Set 151
1 Hinge,B.B.-Anchor BB1160-5.0 x 4.5-US26D Hager
2 Hinge,Ball Bearing 6131168-5.0 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Exit Device,Rim-Keyed ED5200A x N955 x Key-(30")x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Cylinder,Rim 3000 x Key x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x M54(SNB)x A3(HD) Corbin-Russwin
1 Kick Plate 16"x 34"-18 ga.-US32D Rockwood
1 Stop, Floor 436-B26D H.B.Ives
3 Silencer,HM Dr. Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
IAA
+sw
�Mt
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-21
oft
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA RB #96079 up
Hardware Set 085
6 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1191 -5.0 x 4.5-US26D-NRP Hager *s
1 Lockset,Storeroom/Closet CL3357 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x M21 (KLO)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
2 Bolt,Flush 458-B26D-12" H.B.Ives
1 Dust Proof Strike 487-B26D/489-826D H.B.Ives
1 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x A5(HD-BS-HO) Corbin-Russwin +W
1 Stop,Overhead-Surf. 9-226-Hold Open-(28-1/16-33)-US26D Rixson
1 Weatherstrip 312CR-60"x 84" Pemko
1 Astragal,Overlapping 357SS w/S88-84" Pemko
2 Door Bottom Sweep 315CN-30" Pemko wo
1 Overhead Rain Drip 346C-64" Pemko
1 Threshold 172A-(Depth of Frame)-60" Pemko
Headina Notes ON
DC2210 x 689 x A5(HD-BS-HO)@ Active Leaf
9-226-Hold Open-(28-1/16-33)-US26D @ in-Active Leaf
Hardware Set 100
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1168-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Exit Device,Rim-Keyed ED5200 x N955 x Key-M52(CD)-(30")x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Cylinder,Mortise 1000 x Key x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Cylinder,Rim 3000 x Key x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x M54(SNB)x A3(HD) Corbin-Russwin
1 Kick Plate 16"x 34"-18 ga.-US32D Rockwood
1 Electromagnetic Door Release 998-24 VDC-SA Rixson
3 Silencer,HM Dr. Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
w
Hardware Set 101
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1168-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Exit Device,Rim-Keyed ED5200 x N955 x Key-M52(CD)-(30")x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Cylinder, Mortise 1000 x Key x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Cylinder, Rim 3000 x Key x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x M54(SNB)x A3(HD) Corbin-Russwin
1 Kick Plate 16"x 34"-18 ga.-US32D Rockwood
1 Stop,Floor 436-B26D H.B.Ives
3 Silencer,HM Dr. Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Hardware Set 102
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing B131 168-4.5 x 4.5-US26D Hager
1 Exit Device,Rim-Keyed ED5200 x N955 x Key-M52(CD)-(30")x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Cylinder,Mortise 1000 x Key x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Cylinder,Rim 3000 x Key x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Closer,Overhead Regular Arm DC2200 x 689 x A10(HD) Corbin-Russwin
1 Stop,Floor 436-B26D H.B.Ives
3 Silencer, HM Dr.Frame 20R-Gray H.B.Ives
Headina Notes
s�
,tee
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-20
4"
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
Hardware Set 083
iii 8 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1191 -5.0 x 4.5-US26D-NRP Hager
1 Lockset,Storeroom/Closet CL3357 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x M21 (KLO)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Bolt,Flush 458-B26D-12"ROD(Bottom) H.B.Ives
1 Bolt,Flush 458-B26D-24"ROD(Top) H.B.Ives
IN 1 Dust Proof Strike 487-B26D/489-B26D H.B.Ives
1 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x A5(HD-BS-HO) Corbin-Russwin
1 Stop,Overhead-Sun`. 9-126-Hold Open-(24-28)-US26D Rixson
1 Weatherstrip 312CR-60"x 94" Pemko
1 Astragal,Overlapping 357SS w/S88-94" Pemko
1 Door Bottom Sweep 315CN-24" Pemko
1 Door Bottom Sweep 315CN-36" Pemko
1 Overhead Rain Drip 346C-64" Pemko
!M 1 Threshold 172A-(Depth of Frame)-60" Pemko
Headina Notes
DC2210 x 689 x A5(HD-BS-HO)@ Active Leaf
9-123-Hold Open-(24-28)-US26D @ In-Active Leaf
tw Hardware Set 084
6 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1199-5.0 x 4.5-US26D-NRP Hager
1 Lockset,Storeroom/Closet CL3357 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x M21 (KLO)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
2 Bolt, Flush 458-B26D-12" H.B.Ives
1 Dust Proof Strike 487-B26D/489-B26D H.B.Ives
1 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x A5(HD-BS-HO) Corbin-Russwin
1 Stop,Overhead-Surf. 9-326-Hold Open-(33-1/16-38)-US26D Rixson
1 Weatherstrip 312CR-84"x 84" Pemko
low 1 Astragal,Overlapping 357SS w/S88-84" Pemko
2 Door Bottom Sweep 315CN-42" Pemko
1 Overhead Rain Drip 346C-88" Pemko
1 Threshold 172A-(Depth of Frame)-84" Pemko
Headina Notes
DC2210 x 689 x A5(HD-BS-HO)@ Active Leaf
9-326-Hold Open-(33-1/16-38)-US26D @ In-Active Leaf
00
111 DOOR HARDWARE 08710-19
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
Hardware Set 081
8 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1199-4.5 x 4.5-US26D-NRP Hager
1 Lockset,Storeroom/Closet CL3357 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x M21 (KLO)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Bolt,Flush 458-B26D-12"ROD(Bottom) H.B.Ives
1 Bolt,Flush 458-B26D-24"ROD(Top) H.B.Ives
1 Dust Proof Strike 487-B26D/489-B26D H.B.Ives +w
1 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x A5(HD-BS-HO) Corbin-Russwin
1 Stop,Overhead-Surf. 9-526-Hold Open-(43-1/16-48)-US26D Rixson
1 Weatherstrip 312CR-96"x 94" Pemko
1 Astragal,Overlapping 357SS w/S88-94" Pemko
2 Door Bottom Sweep 315CN-48" Pemko
1 Overhead Rain Drip 346C-100" Pemko
1 Threshold 172A-(Depth of Frame)-96" Pemko
Headinsa Notes
DC2210 x 689 x A5(HD-BS-HO)@ Active Leaf
9-526-Hold Open-(43-1/16-48)-US26D @ In-Active Leaf
me
Hardware Set 082
6 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1191 -5.0 x 4.5-US26D-NRP Hager No
1 Lockset,Storeroom/Closet CL3357 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x M21 (KLO)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
2 Bolt, Flush 458-B26D-12" H.B.Ives
1 Dust Proof Strike 487-B26D/489-B26D H.B.Ives
1 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x A5(HD-BS-HO) Corbin-Russwin rw
1 Stop,Overhead-Surf. 9-126-Hold Open-(24-28)-US26D Rixson
1 Weatherstrip 312CR-60"x 84" Pemko
1 Astragal,Overlapping 357SS w/S88-84" Pemko
1 Door Bottom Sweep 315CN-24" Pemko so
1 Door Bottom Sweep 315CN-36" Pemko
1 Overhead Rain Drip 346C-64" Pemko
1 Threshold 172A-(Depth of Frame)-60" Pemko
ow
Headinsa Notes
DC2210 x 689 x A5(HD-BS-HO)@ Active Leaf
9-123-Hold Open-(24-28)-US26D @ In-Active Leaf
aaa
am
sw
a lk
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-18 �'
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
Hardware Set 062
2 Hinge,B.B.-Anchor BB1190-5.0 x 4.5-US26D-NRP Hager
6 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1199-5.0 x 4.5-US26D-NRP Hager
1 Latchset,Passage/Blank Plate CL3380 x NZD x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Bolt,Flush 458-B26D-12"ROD(Bottom) H.B.Ives
1 Bolt,Flush 458-826D-24"ROD(Top) H.B.Ives
1 Dust Proof Strike 487-B26D/489-826D H.B.Ives
1 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x A5(HD-BS-HO) Corbin-Russwin
1 Stop,Overhead-Surf. 9-326-Hold Open-(33-1/16-38)-US26D Rixson
1 Weatherstrip 312CR-72"x 96" Pemko
1 Astragal,Overlapping 357SS w/S88-96" Pemko
2 Door Bottom Sweep 315CN-36" Pemko
1 Overhead Rain Drip 346C-76" Pemko
1 Threshold 171 A-72" Pemko
Headina Notes
DC2210 x 689 x A5(HD-BS-HO)@ Active Leaf
ON 9-326-Hold Open-(33-1/16-38)-US26D @ In-Active Leaf
Hardware Set 071
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing B81199-5.0 x 5.0-US26D-NRP Hager
1 Lockset,Storeroom/Closet CL3357 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x M21 (KLO)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x A5(HD-BS-HO) Corbin-Russwin
1 Weatherstrip 312CR-48"x 84" Pemko
1 Door Bottom Sweep 315CN-48" Pemko
1 Overhead Rain Drip 346C-52" Pemko
1 Threshold 171A-48" Pemko
Hardware Set 080
No 8 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1199-4.5 x 4.5-US26D-NRP Hager
1 Lockset,Storeroom/Closet CL3357 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x M21 (KLO)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Bolt,Flush 458-B26D-12"ROD(Bottom) H.B.Ives
1 Bolt, Flush 458-B26D-24"ROD(Top) H.B.Ives
1 Dust Proof Strike 487-B26D/489-B26D H.B.Ives
1 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x A5(HD-BS-HO) Corbin-Russwin
1 Stop,Overhead-Surf. 9-326-Hold Open-(33-1/16-38)-US26D Rixson
1 Weatherstrip 312CR-72"x 100" Pemko
1 Astragal,Overlapping 357SS w/S88-100" Pemko
2 Door Bottom Sweep 315CN-36" Pemko
1 Overhead Rain Drip 346C-76" Pemko
1 Threshold 171 A-72" Pemko
Heading Notes
DC2210 x 689 x A5(HD-BS-HO)@ Active Leaf
9-326-Hold Open-(33-1116-38)-US26D @ In-Active Leaf
' DOOR HARDWARE 08710-17
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
Hardware Set 050
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1191 -4.5 x 4.5-US26D-NRP Hager
1 Lockset,Classroom CL3355 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin w
1 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x A5(HD-BS-HO) Corbin-Russwin
1 Weatherstrip 312CR-36"x 84" Pemko
1 Door Bottom Sweep 315CN-36" Pemko
1 Threshold 171A-36" Pemko "a
Hardware Set 060 ,wa
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1191 -4.5 x 4.5-US26D-NRP Hager
1 Lockset,Storeroom/Closet CL3357 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x A5(HD-BS-HO) Corbin-Russwin AS
1 Weatherstrip 312CR-36"x 84" Pemko
1 Door Bottom Sweep 315CN-36" Pemko
1 Threshold 171 A-36" Pemko
am
Hardware Set 061
2 Hinge,B.B.-Anchor BB1190-5.0 x 4.5-US26D-NRP Hager .VW
6 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1199-5.0 x 4.5-US26D-NRP Hager
1 Lockset,Storeroom/Closet CL3357 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Bolt,Flush 458-B26D-12"ROD(Bottom) H.B.Ives
1 Bolt,Flush 458-B26D-24"ROD(Top) H.B.Ives
1 Dust Proof Strike 487-B26D/489-B26D H.B.Ives
1 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x A5(HD-BS-HO) Corbin-Russwin
1 Stop,Overhead-Sun`. 9-326-Hold Open-(33-1/16-38)-US26D Rixson
1 Weatherstrip 312CR-72"x 92" Pemko
1 Astragal,Overlapping 357SS w/S88-92" Pemko
2 Door Bottom Sweep 315CN-36" Pemko
1 Overhead Rain Drip 346C-76" Pemko
1 Threshold 171A-72" Pemko
Headinsa Notes
DC2210 x 689 x A5(HD-BS-HO)@ Active Leaf
9-326-Hold Open-(33-1/16-38)-US26D @ In-Active Leaf
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-16
#0
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS
IA�n NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
Hardware Set 032
2 Hinge,B.B.-Anchor 13131190-5.0 x 4.5-US26D-NRP Hager
4 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB 1191 -5.0 x 4.5-US26D-NRP Hager
2 Exit Device,Rim ED5200A x EO-(30")x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Mullion,Removable 707A-84" Corbin-Russwin
2 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x A4(HD-BS) Corbin-Russwin
2 Weatherstrip 312CR-36"x 84" Pemko
2 Door Bottom Sweep 315CN-36" Pemko
1 Overhead Rain Drip 346C-76" Pemko
M 1 Threshold 172A-(Depth of Frame)-72" Pemko
Hardware Set 033
2 Hinge,B.B.-Anchor BB1190-5.0 x 4.5-US26D-NRP Hager
4 Hinge, Ball Bearing BB1191 -5.0 x 4.5-US26D-NRP Hager
2 Exit Device,Rim-Keyed ED5200 x N955 x Key-M52(CD)-(30")x 626 Corbin-Russwin
i 2 Cylinder, Mortise 1000 x Key x 626 Corbin-Russwin
2 Cylinder, Rim 3000 x Key x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Mullion,Removable 707A-84" Corbin-Russwin
2 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x M54(SNB)x A4(HD-BS) Corbin-Russwin
2 Weatherstrip 312CR-36"x 84" Pemko
2 Door Bottom Sweep 315CN-36" Pemko
1 Overhead Rain Drip 346C-76" Pemko
1 Threshold 172A-(Depth of Frame)-72" Pemko
40
Hardware Set 040
3 Hinge, Ball Bearing 13131199-4.5 x 4.5-US26D-NRP Hager
1 Lockset,Classroom CL3355 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x A5(HD-BS-HO) Corbin-Russwin
1 Weatherstrip 312CR-36"x 84" Pemko
go 1 Door Bottom Sweep 315CN-36" Pemko
1 Overhead Rain Drip 346C-40" Pemko
1 Threshold 171A-36" Pemko
Hardware Set 042
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1191 -4.5 x 4.5-US26D-NRP Hager
1 Lockset, Institutional/Utility CL3332 x NZD x Key x M17(WSB)x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x A5(HD-BS-HO) Corbin-Russwin
1 Weatherstrip 312CR-36"x 84" Pemko
1 Door Bottom Sweep 315CN-36" Pemko
1 Overhead Rain Drip 346C-40" Pemko
1 Threshold 171A-36" Pemko
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-15
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079 a�eo
Hardware Set 025
1 Hinge,B.B.-Anchor BB1190-5.0 x 4.5-US26D-NRP Hager
2 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1191 -5.0 x 4.5-US26D-NRP Hager
1 Exit Device,Rim ED5200 x ED-(30")x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x A4(HD-BS) Corbin-Russwin
1 Weatherstrip 312CR-36"x 84" Pemko wr.
1 Door Bottom Sweep 315CN-36" Pemko
1 Overhead Rain Drip 346C-40" Pemko
1 Threshold 172A-(Depth of Frame)-36" Pemko
*s,
Hardware Set 026
3 Hinge,Ball Bearing Hinges-Re-use Existing Existing
1 Exit Device,Rim ED5200 x ED-(36")x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x A4(HD-BS) Corbin-Russwin
1 Weatherstrip 312CR-42"x 82" Pemko
1 Door Bottom Sweep 315CN-42" Pemko
1 Overhead Rain Drip 346C-46" Pemko
1 Threshold 172A-(Depth of Frame)-42" Pemko
VA
Hardware Set 030
6 Hinge, Ball Bearing Hinges-Re-use Existing Existing
2 Exit Device,Rim-Keyed ED5200 x N955 x Key-M52(CD)-(30")x 626 Corbin-Russwin
2 Cylinder,Mortise 1000 x Key x 626 Corbin-Russwin
2 Cylinder,Rim 3000 x Key x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Mullion,Removable 707A-84" Corbin-Russwin
2 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x A4(HD-BS) Corbin-Russwin im
2 Weatherstrip 312CR-36"x 84" Pemko
2 Door Bottom Sweep 315CN-36" Pemko
1 Overhead Rain Drip 346C-80" Pemko
1 Threshold 172A-(Depth of Frame)-72" Pemko
Hardware Set 031
2 Hinge, B.B.-Anchor BB1190-5.0 x 4.5-US26D-NRP Hager
4 Hinge, Ball Bearing BB1191 -5.0 x 4.5-US26D-NRP Hager
2 Exit Device,Rim ED5200A x ED-(30")x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Mullion,Removable 707A-80" Corbin-Russwinr
2 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x A4(HD-BS) Corbin-Russwin
2 Weatherstrip 312CR-36"x 84" Pemko
2 Door Bottom Sweep 315CN-36" Pemko Ak
1 Overhead Rain Drip 346C-76" Pemko
1 Threshold 172A-(Depth of Frame)-72" Pemko
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-14
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
Hardware Set 001
1 Cylinder,Mortise 1000 x Key x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Cylinder,Rim 3000 x Key x 626 Corbin-Russwin
Headina Notes
Balance of Hardware to be provided by Aluminum Door Supplier
Hardware Set 002
1 Cylinder,Mortise 1000 x Key x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Cylinder,Rim 3000 x Key x 626 Corbin-Russwin
Headina Notes
Balance of Hardware to be provided by Aluminum Door Supplier
Hardware Set 003
2 Cylinder,Mortise 1000 x Key x 626 Corbin-Russwin
2 Cylinder,Rim 3000 x Key x 626 Corbin-Russwin
Headina Notes
Mullion and Balance of Hardware to be provided by Aluminum Door Supplier
Hardware Set 004
2 Cylinder,Mortise 1000 x Key x 626 Corbin-Russwin
2 Cylinder,Rim 3000 x Key x 626 Corbin-Russwin
Headina Notes
Mullion and Balance of Hardware to be provided by Aluminum Door Supplier
Hardware Set 005
Headina Notes
Mullion and Balance of Hardware to be provided by Aluminum Door Supplier
Hardware Set 006
2 Cylinder,Mortise 1000 x Key x 626 Corbin-Russwin
2 Cylinder,Rim 3000 x Key x 626 Corbin-Russwin
Headina Notes
Mullion and Balance of Hardware to be provided by Aluminum Door Supplier
Hardware Set 024
1 Cylinder Cylinder-Verify Type Required with Aluminum Door Supplier Corbin-Russwin
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-13
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
B. Exterior Entrance Doors: Provide adjustable units not less than the
width required extending to the edge of entry mat frame.
2.12 HARDWARE FINISHES
A. Match items to the manufacturer's standard color and texture finish for
the latch and lock sets (or push-pull units if not latch or lock sets) ,
or unless noted otherwise in the specifications or hardware sets.
B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if
any) , composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with
manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by
referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware.
C. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware
finishes are those listed in ANSI/BHMA A156.18, " Materials and
Finishes, " including coordination with the traditional U.S. finishes
shown by certain manufacturers for their products.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
wo
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Installation of Door Hardware is by Section 06105 " Miscellaneous
Carpentry" .
3.02 HARDWARE SCHEDULE am
A. General: Provide hardware for each door to comply with requirements of
Section 08710 " Door Hardware, Door Schedule Section 08710DS, and the no
following Hardware Sets.
on
wo
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-12
40
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
A. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners for door
trim units consisting of either machine screws or self-tapping screws.
B. Fabricate protection plates not more than 2" inches less than door
width on hinge side and not more than 1" inch less than door width on
pull side by height indicated.
1. Metal Plates: Stainless steel, 0.050 inch (U.S. 18 gage) .
2 .10 WEATHER-STRIPPING, SOUND STRIPPING AND SEALS
A. General: provide continuous weather-stripping on exterior doors and
smoke, light, or sound seals, including automatic drop seals on interior
doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide non-corrosive fasteners for
exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated.
B. Replaceable Seal Strip: Provide only those units where resilient or
flexible seal strip is easily replaceable and readily available from
stocks maintained by manufacturer.
C. Weather-stripping at Jambs and Heads: Provide bumper-type resilient
insert and metal retainer strips, surface applied unless shown as
A mortised or semi-mortised, and of following metal, finish, and resilient
bumper material:
1. Extruded anodized finish aluminum, 0.094-inch minimum thickness of
main walls and flanges, 4" wider than door.
2. Sponge neoprene conforming to MIL R 6130, Class II (Closed Cell) .
tai a. Grade A (30 degree F to 150 degree F, oil-resistant and self-
extinguishing) .
D. Weather-stripping at Door Bottoms: Provide threshold consisting of
contact-type resilient insert and metal housing of design and size shown
and of following metal, finish, and resilient seal strip:
1. Extruded aluminum with natural anodized finish, 0.062-inch minimum
thickness of main walls and flanges.
2. Solid neoprene wiper or sweep seal complying with MIL R 6855, Class
II, and Grade 40.
3. Flexible vinyl wiper or sweep seal strip.
4. Brush pile insert of polypropylene or nylon woven pile and aluminum
strip backing complying with AAMA 701.2 .
2.11 THRESHOLDS
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide standard metal
threshold unit of type, size and profile as shown or scheduled.
!!M
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-11
am
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079 gee
3. Provide dust-proof strikes for foot bolts, except where special
threshold construction provides non-recessed strike for bolt.
4. Provide roller type strikes where recommended by manufacturer of the 04
latch and lock units.
B. Lock Throw: Provide M inch standard throw of latch on all single and
pairs except, provide Y. inch minimum throw of latch on all pairs of UL A*
doors. Comply with UL requirements for throw of bolts and latch bolts
on rated fire openings.
C. Flush Bolt Heads: Minimum of % inch diameter rods of brass, bronze, or AN
stainless steel with minimum 12-inch long rod for doors up to 7' -0" in
height. Provide longer rods as necessary for doors exceeding 7' -0" in
height.
D. Exit Device Dogging: Except on fire-rated doors where closers are
provided on doors equipped with exit devices, equip the units with ,
cylinder keyed dogging device to deep the latch bolt retracted, when
engaged.
E. Where notation for knurling appears on door schedule, provide knurled
outside lever.
2 .08 CLOSERS AND DOOR CONTROL DEVICES
A. Size of Units: Except as otherwise specifically indicated, comply with
the manufacturer's recommendations for size of door control unit
depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated
frequency of use.
1. Where parallel arms are indicated for closers, provide closer unit on
size larger than recommended for use with standard arms.
2. Provide parallel arms for all overhead closers, except as otherwise
indicated. •*
3. Closers must operate at 180 degree opening where indicated on plans .
B. Access-Free Manual Closers: Where manual closers are indicated for doors +
required to be accessible to the physically handicapped, provide
adjustable units complying with ANSI A117.1 provisions for door opening
force and delayed action closing.
C. Combination Door Closers and Holders: Where indicated, provide units
designed to hold door in open position under normal usage and to release
and close door automatically under fire conditions.
D. Provide black resilient parts for exposed bumper.
2 .09 DOOR TRIM UNITS
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-10
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS
OF NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
2.05 LOCK CYLINDERS AND KEYING
A. Review the keying system with the Owner and provide the type required
(grandmaster or great-grandmaster) , integrated with Owner's existing
system. Provide new (grandmaster or great-grandmaster as required) key
system.
B. Equip locks with manufacturer's special 6-pin tumbler cylinder with
construction master-key feature that permits voiding of construction
keys without cylinder removal.
C. Metals: Construct lock cylinder parts from brass or bronze, stainless
steel, or nickel silver.
D. Comply with Owner's instructions for master keying and, except as
otherwise indicated, provide individual change key for each lock that is
not designated to be keyed alike with a group of related locks.
E. Key Material: Provide keys of nickel silver only.
F. Key Quantity: Furnish 3 change keys for each lock, 5 master keys for
each master system, and 5 grandmaster keys for each grandmaster system.
Furnish 12 construction masterkeys.
1. Furnish one extra blank for each lock.
2. Deliver keys to Owner.
2 .06 KEY CONTROL SYSTEM
A. Provide a key control system including envelopes, labels, tags with
self-locking key clips, receipt forms, 3-way visible card index,
temporary markers, permanent markers, and standard metal cabinet, all as
recommended by system manufacturer, with capacity for 150 percent of the
number of locks required for the Project.
1. Provide complete cross-index system set up by key control
manufacturer, and place keys on markers and hooks in the cabinet as
determined by the final key schedule.
2. Provide hinged-panel type cabinet for wall mounting.
2 .07 LOCKS, LATCHES, AND BOLTS
A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard wrought box strike for each
latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished
to match hardware set, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Provide curved lip strikes for locks with anti-friction latchbolts as
recommended by manufacturer.
2. Provide recess type top strikes for bolts locking into head frames,
unless otherwise indicated.
NO
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-9
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of this other work as
closely as possible including " prepared for paint" surfaces to receive
painted finish.
E. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when
door is closed except to the extent no standard units of type specified
area available with concealed fasteners. Do not use thru-bolts for
installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other
work unless their use is the only means of reinforcing the work
adequately to fasten the hardware securely. Where thru-bolts are used
as a means of reinforcing the work, provide sleeves for each thru-bolt
or use sex screw fasteners.
2.04 HINGES, BUTTS, AND CONTINUOUS (PIANO) HINGES
A. Templates: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both
leaves) into wood doors and frames, provide only template-produced
units.
B. Screws: Provide Phillips flat-head screws complying with the following `
requirements:
1. For metal doors and frames install machine screws into drilled and
tapped holes.
2. For wood doors and frames install wood screws.
3. For fire-rated wood doors install #12 x % inch, threaded-to-the-head
steel wood screws. +^
4. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges or pivots.
wr
C. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hinge pins as
follows:
1. Out-Swing Exterior Doors: Non-removable pins.
2. Out-Swing Corridor Doors with Locks: Non-removable pins.
3. Interior Doors: Non-rising pins.
4. Tips: Flat button and matching plug, finished to match leaves,
except where hospital tips (HT) indicated.
D. Number of Hinges: Provide number of hinges indicated but not less than 3 �,..
hinges per door leaf for doors 90 inches or less in height and one
additional hinge for each 30inches of additional height.
1. Fire-Rated Doors: Not less than 3 hinges per door leaf for doors 86
inches or less in height with same rule for additional hinges.
E. SIZE AND WEIGHT OF BUTTS
1. See Hardware Headings for Details.
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-8
4W
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
2. ASNS/BHMA designations used elsewhere in this Section or in schedules
to describe hardware items or to define quality or function are
derived from the following standards. Provide products complying
with these standards and requirements specified elsewhere in this
Section.
a. Butts and Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1.
b. Bored and Pre-assembled Locks and Latches: ANSI/BHMA A156.2.
c. Exit Devices: ANSI/BHMA A156.3
d. Door Controls - Closers: ANSI/BHMA A156.4.
Od e. Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products: ANSI/BHMA A156.5.
f. Architectural Door Trim: ANSI/BHMA A156.6.
g. Template Hinge Dimensions: ANSI/BHMA A156.7.
t h. Door Controls - Overhead Holders: ANSI/BHMA A156.8.
i. Interconnected Locks and Latches: ANSI/BHMA A156.12 .
j. Mortise Locks and Latches: ANSI/BHMA A156.13 .
k. Sliding and Folding Door Hardware: ANSI/BHMA A156.14.
1. Closer Holder Release devices: ANSI/BHMA A156.15.
m. Auxiliary Hardware: ANSI/BHMA A156.16.
n. Self-Closing Hinges and Pivots: ANSI/BHMA A156.17.
o. Materials and Finishes: ANSI/BHMA A156.18.
2.03 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION
A. Manufacturer' s Name Plate: Do not use manufacturers' products that have
manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location (omit
removable nameplates) except in conjunction with required fire-rated
labels and as otherwise acceptable to Architect.
1. Manufacturer's identification will be permitted on rim of lock
cylinders only.
B. Base Metals: Product hardware units of basic metal and forming methods
indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition,
temper, and hardness, but in no case of lesser (commercially recognized)
quality than specified for applicable hardware units. Product hardware
units to be applicable ANSI/BHMA A156 series standards for each type of
hardware item, and with ANSI/BHMA A156.18 for finish designations
indicated. Do not furnish " optional" materials or forming methods for
those indicated, except as otherwise specified.
C. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published
templates generally prepared for machine screw installation. Do not
provide hardware that has been prepared for self-tapping sheet metal
screws, except as specifically indicated.
D. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Provide
Phillips flat-head screws except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed
(exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish or, if
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-7
w,
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079 ow
13. Weatherstrip and Seals:
a. Pemko Manufacturing Co. , Inc, all with stainless steel screws,
etc. Sri
b. Reese Enterprises, Inc.
c. Zero International, Inc.
14. Thresholds (full frame width)
a. Pemko Manufacturing Co. , Inc.
b. Reese Enterprises, Inc.
c. Zero International, Inc.
15. Automatic Drop Seals:
a. Pemko Manufacturing Co. , Inc.
b. Reese Enterprises, Inc.
c. Zero International, Inc.
16. Sound Stripping:
a. Pemko Manufacturing Co. , Inc.
b. Reese Enterprises, Inc.
c. Zero International, Inc.
17. Astragals:
a. Pemko Manufacturing Co. , Inc.
b. Reese Enterprises, Inc.
c. Zero International, Inc.
win
18. Wall Stop (at all doors except where noted) :
a. Rockwood Manufacturing.
b. H. B. Ives.
c. Hager Hinge Company.
2.02 SCHEDULED HARDWARE wo
A. Requirements for each type of finish hardware are indicated on the
" Door Schedule" , and in the Schedule at the end of this Section. 60
Products are identified by using hardware designation numbers of the
following:
1. Manufacturer's Product Designations: The product designation and name
of one manufacturer are listed for each hardware type required for
the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Provide either the
product designated or, where more than one manufacturer is specified
under the Article " Manufacturers" in Part 2 for each hardware type,
the comparable product of one of the other manufacturers that
complies with requirements.
DOOR HARDWARE
08710-6 _
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS
10 NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
4. Flush Bolts ( automatic where required) ;
a. Rockwood Manufacturing.
b. H. B. Ives, A Harrow Company.
c. Hager Hinge Co.
5. Exit/Panic Devices (provide U.L. label rated doors) :
a. Corbin/Russwin Architectural Hardware, " ED5000" Series Device
with " L9" Series Trim. See Hardware Headings for details.
b. Von Duprin, Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group, 99 Series.
c. Yale Security, Inc, 7000 Series x 600 Series Heavy Duty Trim.
6. Push/Pull Units:
a. Rockwood Manufacturing.
b. H.B. Ives, A Harrow Company.
c. Hager Hinge Co.
7. Overhead Closers:
a. Exterior Door Closers: Corbin-Russwin Model DC2200 Series
adjustable spring power, with full case cover, hold open, stop,
spacer angle support and drop bracket where required.
b. Interior Door Closers: Corbin-Russwin Model DC 2200 Series,
adjustable spring power with full case cover, three adjustable,
independent valves for speed, closing and backcheck. Furnish
parallel arm to conceal closer from corridor or room view.
Backcheck must operate at 180 degree opening where indicated on
plans.
c. LCN, Div. of Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group. Model 4000
Series
d. Sargent Manufacturing Co. Model 350 Series
8. Electro Magnetic Hold Opens:
a. Rixson-Firemark, Div. Yale Security Inc.
b. Sargent Manufacturing Co.
9. Electric Strikes:
a. H.E.S, Inc.
o1 b. Locknetics, A Harrow Company.
c. Folger Adam Co.
10. Mortised Electrical Contact:
a. Folger Adam Co.
b. Locknetics, A Harrow Company.
11. Door Control Devices:
a. Rixson-Firemark, Div. Yale Security Inc.
00 b. Sargent Manufacturing Co.
c. Glynn Johnson.
12. Kick and Mop Plates:
a. Rockwood. Stainless steel satin finish, lx" high x 2" less than
door width for kicks and i" less for mops.
b. Hager Hinge Co.
c. H. B. Ives, A Harrow Company.
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-5
..
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079 ""R
match set numbers of approved hardware schedule. Two or more identical
sets may be packed in same container.
C. Inventory door hardware jointly with representatives of hardware so
supplier and hardware installer until each is satisfied that count is
correct.
44
D. Deliver individually packaged door hardware items promptly to place of
installation (shop or Project site) .
E. Provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to the Project, but
not yet installed. Control handling and installation of hardware items
that are not immediately replaceable so that completion of the Work will
not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation.
1.06 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of
specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's
continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door
hardware.
1.07 OWNERS STOCK
A. Include in the Base Bid,
The Contractor shall carry an Additional 10 ED5200 x L955 x US626
PART 2 _ PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following:
1. Butts and Hinges:
a. Hager Hinge Co. .r
b. Stanley Hardware, Division of Stanley Works.
c. McKinney Builders Hardware
.w
2. Key Control System:
a. Key Control Systems, Inc.
b. Telkee Inc.
3. Cylinders and Locks:
a. Corbin-Russwin Architectural Hardware, CL 3300 Series with NZD
trim in 626 finish with 2-3/4" backset.
b. Schlage Lock Division, Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group, " D"
Series.
c. Yale Security, Inc, 540OLN Series.
w
DOOR HARDWARE
08710-4 OR
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project
construction schedule. Include with schedule the product data,
samples, shop drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and
other information essential to the coordinated review of schedule.
3. Keying Schedule: Submit separate detailed schedule indicating clearly
how the Owner's final instructions on keying of locks has been
fulfilled.
D. Templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory
prepared for the installation of door hardware. Check shop drawings of
other work to confirm that adequate provision are made for locating and
installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of hardware (latch and
locksets, hinges, closers, etc. ) from a single manufacturer.
B. Supplier Qualifications: A recognized architectural door hardware
PW supplier, with warehousing facilities in the Project's vicinity, and has
a record of successful in-service performance for supplying door
hardware similar in quantity, type, and quality to that indicated for
this Project. Employs an experienced architectural hardware consultant
(AHC) who is available to Owner, architect, and Contractor, at
reasonable times during the course of the Work, for consultation.
1. Require supplier to meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements
and to obtain final instructions in writing.
C. Fire-Rated Openings: Provide door hardware for fire-rated openings that
complies with NFPA Standard No. 80 and requirements of authorities
having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door hardware that are
listed and are identical to products tested by UL, Warnock Hersey, and
Factory Mutual. Testing and inspecting organization acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction for use on types and sizes of doors
indicated in compliance with requirements of fire-rated door and door
04 frame labels.
1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING
fn
A. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to final
hardware schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each
0A item or package.
B. Packaging of door hardware is responsibility of supplier. Upon receipt
of material by hardware supplier from manufacturers, sort and repackage
in containers clearly marked with appropriate hardware set number to
so DOOR HARDWARE
08710-3
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
4. Aluminum doors are specified in Section 08410 " Glazed Aluminum
Curtain Walls and Sloped Glazing Systems."
D. Products furnished but not installed under this Section include:
1. Cylinders required for locks on aluminum entrance doors.
2. Cylinders required for locks on overhead coiling doors.
3. Cylinders required for locks on pass door in operable panel
partition.
E. Products not furnished under this Section include:
1. Cabinet Hardware is specified in Section 06402 " Interior
Architectural Woodwork" .
2. Aluminum Door Hardware is specified in Section 08410 " Aluminum
Entrances" .
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract
and Division 1 Specification sections.
B. Product data including manufacturers, technical product data for each
item of door hardware, installation instructions, maintenance of
operating parts and finish, and other information necessary to show
compliance with requirements.
ow
C. Final hardware schedule coordinated with doors, frames, and related work
to ensure proper size, thickness, hand function, and finish of door
hardware. 06
1. Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on hardware indicated,
organize schedule into " hardware sets" indicating complete WF
designation of every item required for each door or opening. Include
the following information:
a. Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item. *
b. Name and manufacturer of each item.
c. Fastenings and other pertinent information.
d. Location of each hardware set cross referenced to indications of
Drawings both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. �w
e. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in
schedule.
f. Mounting locations for hardware.
g. Door and frame sizes and materials.
h. Keying information.
AW
2. Submittal Sequence: Submit final schedule at earliest possible date
particularly where acceptance of hardware schedule must precede aw
DOOR HARDWARE 08710-2 AP
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND ALTERATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
SECTION 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE
P0
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Instruction to Bidders, AIA Document A201, " The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction," 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this Work. Note also all Addenda.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes items known commercially as finish or door
hardware that are required for swing, sliding, and folding doors, except
special types of unique hardware specified in the same sections as the
doors and door frames on which they are installed.
B. This Section includes the following:
1. Hinges.
2. Continuous (piano) hinges.
3. Key control system.
4. Lock cylinders and keys.
5. Lock and latch sets.
6. Bolts.
7. Exit devices.
8. Push/pull units.
9. Closers.
10. Overhead holders.
11. Electro Magnetic Hold Opens.
12. Electric strikes and magnetic switches.
13. Miscellaneous door control devices.
14. Door trim units.
15. Protection plates.
16. Weather-stripping for exterior doors.
17. Sound stripping for interior doors.
18. Automatic drop seals (door bottoms) .
19. Astragals or meeting seals on pairs of doors.
20. Thresholds.
C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that
relate to this Section:
1. Section 06105 Miscellaneous Carpentry" for installation of door
hardware.
2. Section 08111 Standard Steel Doors and Frames" for silencers
integral with hollow metal frames.
3. Section 08211 " Flush Wood Doors" for factory pre-fitting and
factory pre-machining of doors for door hardware.
DOOR HARDWARE
08710-1
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
END OF SECTION 08525
ALUMINUM ARCHITECTURAL WINDOWS 08525-11
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA RB #96079
w
C. Set sill members and other members in a bed of compound or with joint
fillers or gaskets, as shown, to provide weathertight construction.
Refer to the "Joint Sealer" Sections of Division 7 for compounds,
fillers, and gaskets to be installed concurrently with window units.
Coordinate installation with wall flashings and other components of the
work.
w
1. Compounds, joint fillers, and gaskets to be installed after
installation of window units are specified as work in Section 07901
"Joint Sealants".
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Conduct on-site tests for air and water infiltration with the
manufacturer's representative present. The Architect will select units
to be tested. Units not meeting specified requirements and other units
having similar deficiencies shall be corrected at no cost to the Owner.
Testing shall be performed by an accredited testing agency in accordance *■
with procedures specified in AAMA 502.
1. Air Infiltration Tests for Operable Windows: Conduct tests in w
accordance with ASTM E 783. Allowable infiltration per linear foot
of operable sash or ventilator joint shall not exceed 1.5 times the
maximum amount allowed under Section C, paragraph 7 for an inward
test pressure of not less than 1.56 lbs per sq. ft.
2. Air Infiltration Tests for Fixed Windows: Conduct tests in
accordance with ASTM E 783. Allowable infiltration per square foot
of fixed window area shall not exceed 1.5 times the maximum amount
allowed under Section C, paragraph 7 for an inward test pressure
of not less than 1.56 lbs per sq. ft.
3 . Water Resistance Tests: Conduct tests in accordance with
ASTM 1105. No water penetration as defined in AAMA 502 shall be w
permitted.
3 .4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operating sash and hardware to provide a tight fit at contact
points and at weatherstripping for smooth operation and weathertight
closure.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean aluminum surfaces promptly after installation of windows.
Exercise care to avoid damage to protective coatings and finishes.
Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances.
Lubricate hardware and other moving parts.
B. Clean glass of preglazed units promptly after installation of windows.
Comply with requirements of the Section 08800 "Glazing" for cleaning and
maintenance.
3 .6 PROTECTION
A. Initiate and maintain protection and other precautions required through
the remainder of the construction period to ensure that, except for
normal weathering, window units will be free of damage or deterioration
at the time of Substantial Completion.
ALUMINUM ARCHITECTURAL WINDOWS 08525-10
ww
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA ED #96079
on
2.10 FINISHES
VP A. General: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations
relative to application and designations of finishes.
B. Finish designations prefixed by "AA" conform to the system established
*R by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.
C. High Performance Organic Coating: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish:
on cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: chemical conversion
coating, acid chromate-fluoride-phosphate pretreatment; Organic Coating:
as specified below) . Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed
metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturer's
instructions.
1. Fluorocarbon 3-Coat Coating System: Manufacturer's standard 3-coat
thermo-cured system, composed of specially formulated inhibitive
primer and fluorocarbon color coat, and clear fluorocarbon topcoat,
with both color coat and clear topcoat containing not less than 70
percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; comply with
!!11 AAMA 605.2 .
2. Organic Coating: AA-M10 C41R1x Siliconized Polyester Finish
primer/top coat system complying with AAMA 605.2, with a dry film
thickness at no less than 1.5 mils will be an acceptable
substitution.
a. Color and Gloss: As selected by the Architect from
manufacturer's standard choices for color and gloss.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
an
3 .1 INSPECTION
40 A. Inspect openings before beginning installation. verify that rough or
masonry opening is correct and the sill plate is level.
1. Masonry surfaces shall be visibly dry and free of excess mortar,
sand and other construction debris.
2 . Metal surfaces shall be dry; clean; free of grease, oil, dirt, rust
and corrosion, and welding slag; and without sharp edges or offsets
WM at joints.
3 .2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's specifications and recommendations for
installation of window units, hardware, operators, and other components
of the work.
an B. Set units plumb, level, and true to line, without warp or rack of frames
or sash. Provide proper support and anchor securely in place. Do not
bridge thermal breaks.
w
1. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of
corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other
ON materials by complying with the requirements specified under
paragraph "Dissimilar Materials" in the Appendix to AAMA 101.
on ALUMINUM ARCHITECTURAL WINDOWS 08525-9
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA RB #96079
1. Sash Rollers: Steel lubricated ball-bearing rollers.
2. Sash Lock: White bronze Cam action sweep sash lock and keeper at
meeting rails.
2.7 FIXED WINDOWS
1. Provide architectural window units that comply with performance
requirements indicated.
2 .8 TICKET WINDOW
40
1. Provide one (1) ticket window unit for "Tickets 0134" consisting
of a 24" wide by 36" high aluminum framed 1/2" clear tempered glass
window with manufacturer's standard integral stainless steel speak-
thru and hinged pass-thru and sitting on a 18 gauge stainless steel
shelf top measuring 24 11wide x 1811deep x 2 11high.
2.9 FABRICATION
no
A. General: Fabricate aluminum window units to comply with indicated
standards. Include a complete system for assembly of components and
anchorage of window units. +■*
1. Provide units that are reglazable without dismantling sash framing.
B. Thermal-Break Construction: Fabricate window units with an integral
concealed low-conductance structural thermal barrier, located between
exterior materials and window members exposed on the interior, in a
manner that eliminates direct metal-to-metal contact. *■
1. Provide thermal-break construction that has been in use for not
less than 3 years, has been tested to demonstrate resistance to .�
thermal conductance and condensation, and has been tested to show
adequate strength and security of glass retention.
2. Provide hardware with low conductivity or nonmetallic material for
hardware bridging thermal breaks at frame or vent sash. •
C. Weepholes: Provide weepholes and internal passages to conduct
infiltrating water to the exterior.
D. Provide water-shed members above side-hinged ventilators and similar
lines of natural water penetration.
se
1. Subframes: Provide subframes fabricated from thermally broken
weathersripped extrusions with anchors for window units, where
shown, of profile and dimensions indicated but not less than
0.062-inch-thick extruded aluminum.
2. Glazing: Glass shall be accomplished through the use of snap-in
glazing beads. Vinyl materials shall not promote corrosion and ,..
shall be resistant to deterioration by all forms of weathering and
shall be suitably restrained to maintain a watertight seal between
the glass and its surrounding frame.
w
E. Preglazed Fabrication: Preglaze window units at the factory. Comply
with glass and glazing requirements of Section 08800 "Glazing" and
AAMA 101.
ALUMINUM ARCHITECTURAL WINDOWS 08525-8
RM
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON. MA RB #96079
H. Inf ill Panels: Provide flush-laminated infill panels of thickness
indicated, fabricated with panel core material laminated with waterproof
glue between two sheets of aluminum. Panel Face Sheets: Tension-leveled
aluminum, 0.050" thick conforming to ASTM B209, 3003 alloy, H14 temper,
smooth surface.
2.3 HARDWARE
A. General: Provide the manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from
aluminum, stainless steel, or other corrosion-resistant material
compatible with aluminum and of sufficient strength to perform the
function for which it is intended.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. General: Provide the manufacturer's standard accessories that comply
with indicated standards.
B. Insect Screens: Provide insect screens for each operable exterior sash
or ventilator. Locate screens on the inside or outside of the window
sash or ventilator, depending upon window type. Design windows and
hardware to accommodate screens in a tight-fitting removable
arrangement, with a minimum of exposed fasteners and latches.
1. Screen Frames: Fabricate frames of tubular-shaped extruded or
formed aluminum members of 0.040-inch minimum wall thickness, with
mitered or coped joints and concealed mechanical fasteners. Finish
frames to match window units.
a. Provide removable PVC spline-anchor concealing the edge of the
screen frame.
2 .5 PROJECTED WINDOWS
A. General: Provide architectural window units that comply with
performance requirements indicated including component structural tests
for ventilator torsion, balance arm load, horizontal and vertical
concentrated loads on the ventilator latch rail, and vertical
OM concentrated load on intermediate frame rails.
B. Hardware: Provide the following operating equipment and hardware:
1. Hinges: Concealed four-bar friction hinges with adjustable slide
shoe (2 per ventilator) .
2. Sash Lock: Cam action sweep lock handle with surface-mounted
strike.
2 .6 HORIZONTAL SLIDING WINDOWS
ww A. General: Provide architectural window units that comply with
performance requirements indicated including component structural tests
for operating force and sash rail rigidity.
1. Provide window units with sash that can be removed from the inside
for cleaning.
", B. Hardware: Provide the following operating equipment and hardware:
ALUMINUM ARCHITECTURAL WINDOWS 08525-7
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON. MA #9607
3. Fixed Windows: Same manufacturers and model series specified for
operable windows.
4. Ticket Window:
a. "Model SCW10211, with 1/2" clear tempered glass by Nissen & Co,
Inc.
b. "Mode1SCW102N", with 1/2" clear tempered glass by C.R.Lawrence
Co, Inc.
2.2 MATERIALS ws
A. Aluminum Extrusions: Provide alloy and temper recommended by the window
manufacturer for the strength, corrosion resistance, and application of
required finish, but not less than 22,000-psi ultimate tensile strength
and not less than 0.094 inch for sill members; 0.062 inch thick for
other frame and sash members; and 0.125 inch thick for other projected
frame and sash members.
B. Fasteners: Provide aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, epoxy
adhesive, or other materials warranted by the manufacturer to be
noncorrosive and compatible with window members, trim, hardware, ew
anchors, and other components of window units.
1. Reinforcement: Where fasteners screw-anchor into aluminum less „
than 0.125 inch thick, reinforce the interior with aluminum or
nonmagnetic stainless steel to receive screw threads, or provide
standard noncorrosive, pressed-in, splined grommet nuts.
2 . Exposed Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners except where so
unavoidable for application of hardware. For application of
hardware, use fasteners that match the finish of the member or
hardware being fastened, as appropriate. an
C. Anchors, Clips, and Window Accessories: Depending on strength and
corrosion-inhibiting requirements, fabricate anchors, clips, and window
accessories of aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless steel. Anchors, clips, w
and window accessories fabricated of zinc-coated steel or iron complying
with ASTM B 633 may be used for concealed work.
w
D. Sash Members: Provide sash fabricated from members not to exceed the
following depths:
1. Projected: 211 .
2. Horizontal Slider: 3-1/411 .
E. Weatherstripping: Provide dual Santoprene sash weatherstripping at all
locations including the interlock held in extruded ile
p' pockets and
secured to prevent loss during operation.
F. Sealant: For sealants required within fabricated window units, provide ■m
type recommended by the window manufacturer for joint size and movement.
Sealant shall remain permanently elastic, nonshrinking, and
nonmigrating. Unless otherwise indicated, comply with Section 07901
"Joint Sealants" for selection and installation of sealants.
G. Wire Fabric Insect Screen: Provide 18 by 18 mesh of 0.013-inch diameter
coated aluminum wire, complying with FS RR-W-365, Type VII.
ALUMINUM ARCHITECTURAL WINDOWS 08525-6
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
substitutions must be made in strict accordance with paragraph 3.3,
Substitutions, of Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A701, and the
Supplementary Instructions to Bidders.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
00 A. Field Measurements: Check actual window openings by accurate field
measurement before fabrication. Show recorded measurements on final
shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction
progress to avoid delay of work.
00
1. Where necessary, proceed with fabrication without field
measurements and coordinate fabrication tolerances to ensure proper
go fit of window units.
1.8 WARRANTY
ON A. Aluminum Architectural Window Warranty: Submit a written warranty,
executed by the window manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace
window units that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified
w warranty period. Failures include but are not necessarily limited to:
1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, excessive
leakage, or air infiltration.
!-0 2. Faulty operation of sash and hardware.
3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond
normal weathering.
PM 4. Failure of the glass, insulated units, glazing, unchanged and
setting system, sealing, flashing, etc.
B. Warranty period: 1 year after the date of Substantial Completion.
C. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights or remedies
that the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents
and is in addition to and runs concurrent with other warranties made by
the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 .1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products of one of the following:
1. Projected Windows:
a. "Series 290011, Thermal P-HC55, 4-1/2" frame depth, EFCO Corp.
b. "Series 425011, Thermal P-HC55, 4 1/2" frame depth, Wausau
Metals Corporation.
2 . Horizontal Sliders:
PM a. "Series 650011, Thermal HS-HC65", 3-7/8" frame depth, EFCO
Corp.
b. 11TR-1200011, Thermal HS-HC65, 4" frame depth, TRACO.
C. "Series 210011, Thermal HS-HC65, 3 3/4" frame depth, Wausau
on Metals Corporation.
ALUMINUM ARCHITECTURAL WINDOWS 08525-5
M
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON. MA RB #9607
right to require additional samples, that show fabrication go
techniques and workmanship, and design of hardware and accessories.
B. Laboratory Test Reports: Provide test reports from a recognized MM
independent testing laboratory certifying performance of architectural
window units required for the following:
1. Air infiltration rate.
2. Water resistance.
3. Uniform load deflection.
4. Uniform load structural performance.
S. Window component structural performance.
6. Condensation resistance.
7. Thermal transmittance.
C. On-Site Test Reports: Provide on-site test reports from a recognized
independent testing laboratory, certifying performance of installed
window units for air infiltration and water resistance as indicated in w,
article "Field Quality Control. " Field test to be performed on one (1)
to three (3) windows of each type, selected at random by the Architect.
D. Certification: Provide certification by a recognized independent
testing laboratory or agency showing that each type and size of window
unit complies with performance requirements indicated.
E. Material Test Reports: Engage a recognized independent testing
laboratory or agency to perform tests specified. Provide certified test
results showing that each type and size of window unit complies with
performance requirements indicated. +0
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has no
completed installation of aluminum windows similar in design and extent
to those required for the project, using the products by the window
manufacturer that the window contractor proposes to supply, and which ■w
has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service
performance.
B. Testing Laboratory Qualifications: To qualify for acceptance, an
independent testing laboratory must demonstrate to the Architect's
satisfaction that it has the experience and capability to conduct
satisfactorily the testing indicated without delaying the progress of
the Work, based on evaluation of laboratory-submitted criteria
conforming to ASTM E 699.
C. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide aluminum window units from one ap
source and produced by a single manufacturer.
D. Design Concept: The drawings indicate the size, profiles, and an
dimensional requirements of the aluminum window types required and are
based on the specific type and model indicated. Aluminum windows by
other manufacturers may be considered provided deviations in dimensions
and profiles are minor and do not change the design concept as judged so
by the Architect. The burden of proof of equality is on the proposer.
E. Substitutions: Substitute manufacturers of equal or superior quality w
must be reviewed and approved by the Architect. Requests for
ALUMINUM ARCHITECTURAL WINDOWS 08525-4
w
RM
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
A
ASTM E 330 at the following static air pressure differences
with the pressure applied first on one side of the unit then
the other.
1) Projected: 82 .5 psf positive pressure and 82.5 psf
negative pressure.
2) Horizontal Slider: 90 psf positive pressure and 90 psf
negative pressure.
3) Permanent deformation of any frame, sash, or ventilator
member shall not exceed 0.4 percent of its span.
b. Window Component Structural Performance: When tested in
accordance with the test procedures described in AAMA Guide
Specification AAMA 101-93, window components shall comply with
performance requirements indicated.
9. Condensation Resistance: Where window units are indicated to be
of "thermal-break construction, " provide units that have been
tested for thermal performance in accordance with AAMA 1503 .1
showing the following condensation resistance factors (CRF) :
4M
1) Projected: 45.
2) Horizontal Slider: 56.
10. Thermal Transmittance: Provide window units that have a U-value
maximum of 0.64 BTU/hour/sq. ft./deg F at 15 mph exterior wind
velocity when tested in accordance with AAMA 1503 .1.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the
Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
1. Product data for each type of window required, including:
PW
a. Construction details and fabrication methods.
b. Data on hardware, accessories, and finishes.
C. Recommendations for maintenance and cleaning of exterior
surfaces.
2 . Shop drawings for each type of window required. Include
information not fully detailed in manufacturer's standard product
data and the following:
a. Layout and installation details, including anchors.
b. Elevations of continuous work at 1/4-inch scale and typical
window unit elevations at 3/4-inch scale.
C. Full-size section details of typical composite members,
including reinforcement.
d. Hardware including operators.
e. Glazing details.
f. Accessories.
so
3 . Samples for Initial Color Selection: Submit samples of each
specified finish on 12-inch-long sections of window members. Where
on finishes involve normal color variations, include sample sets
showing the full range of variations expected.
4. Samples for Verification Purposes: The Architect reserves the
ALUMINUM ARCHITECTURAL WINDOWS 08525-3
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NOR TA #9607
from standard extruded sections and components stocked by the
manufacturer. Window types required include:
1. Projected Windows. w�
2. Horizontal sliding windows.
3. Fixed windows.
4. Ticket Window.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that
relate to this Section:
1. Section 08111, "Standard Steel Doors and Frames" for glazed hollow
metal frames.
2. Section 08410 "Aluminum Entrances" for glazed aluminum doors.
3 . Section 08800 "Glazing" for glass types.
1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide aluminum architectural window units that comply with
performance requirements specified, as demonstrated by testing
corresponding systems according to test methods indicated.
w.
B. Test Procedures: Each type and size of required window unit shall be
tested by a recognized independent testing laboratory accredited by
AAMA.
1. Sizes of test units for air infiltration, water resistance, and
structural performance shall conform to requirements indicated in
AAMA guide specification AAMA 101-93.
2. Test units shall be glazed, completely assembled, and constructed
in accordance with requirements indicated. Perform tests on units
with window sash and ventilators closed and locked. .w
3. Materials and workmanship used in test units shall be identical to
those proposed for the project. Use of nonrepresentative measures
or techniques is prohibited.
4. Thermal test units shall consist of a single typical vent, in the
following sizes:
a. Projected: 4' -0" x 6' -011 .
b. Horizontal Sliders: 4' -0" x 6' -011 .
5. Design wind pressure at the project site is 30 psf. Heights of
window units above grade at the window centerline are indicated or
can be determined from the drawings. Consult with the Architect
for clarification needed to confirm required loading and test an
pressures.
6. Air infiltration rate shall not exceed the following cfm per ft.
of operable sash joint for an inward test pressure of 1.56 lbs per
sq. ft. , when tested in accordance ASTM E 283 : am
a. Projected: 0.10 cfm.
b. Horizontal Slider: 0.05 cfm
7. Water Penetration: There shall be no water penetration, as defined .w
in ASTM E 331, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 331 at static
air pressure of 8 lbs per sq. ft.
8. Structural Performance: When tested in accordance with ASTM E 330
window units shall comply with the following requirements: "
a. Uniform Load Structural Performance: There shall be no glass
breakage, no permanent damage to fasteners, hardware parts,
support arms, or actuating mechanism, and no damage that would
cause the unit to be inoperable when tested in accordance with
ALUMINUM ARCHITECTURAL WINDOWS 08525-2
O
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
SECTION 08525 - ALUMINUM ARCHITECTURAL WINDOWS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 TIME, MANNER AND REQUIREMENTS FOR FILING SUB-BIDS
A. Sub-Bids shall be submitted in accordance with the provisions of General
Laws, Chapter 149, Section 44A to 44I, inclusive, as amended.
B. Sub-Bids for work under this Section shall be received at the Council
Chambers at Town Hall, 210 Main Street, Northampton, MA 01060, until
2:00 p.m. local time on February 9, 1999, at which time all filed Sub-
Bids shall be opened, read aloud, and duly recorded.
C. Sub-Bids shall be submitted on forms identical to those contained in
Bidding Requirements: Bid Form for Sub-Bidder. The Bid Forms attached
hereto are for information only and shall not be detached, filled in,
or executed. All Sub-Bids shall be submitted on the FORM FOR SUB-BID
furnished by the Awarding Authority as required by Section 44G of
Chapter 149 of the General Laws, as amended. Sub-Bids Forms shall be
completely filled in and all Sub-Bids which are incomplete, conditional,
obscure, or which contain any additions not called for will be rejected.
D. Sub-Bids filed with the Awarding Authority shall be accompanied by a Bid
! Deposit in the form of a certified check or a treasurer's or cashier's
check issued by a responsible bank or trust company, payable to the City
of Northampton. A bid bond shall be:
1. On a form satisfactory to the Awarding Authority.
2 . With a surety company qualified to do business in the Commonwealth
and satisfactory to the Awarding Authority.
3 . Conditioned upon the faithful performance by the principal of the
agreements contained in the Bid. The amount of such bid deposit
shall be five percent (5%) of the value of the Bid.
on E. Sub-Bids for work under this Section shall be for the complete work
required as specified and as shown on the drawings.
PW F. Sub-Bidders are directed to the Instructions to Bidders, and to the
requirements that all bidders visit the site to determine the scope of
work required under this Section.
G. Sub-Bidders must comply with all provisions of Division 1, General
Requirements, in the same manner as the General Contractor.
00 H. Work to be done under this Filed Sub-Bid is included in the Contract
Documents as listed in LOD-1 through LOD-5 (List of Drawings) .
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
w General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this work. Note also all Addenda.
1.3 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes aluminum architectural window units fabricated
ALUMINUM ARCHITECTURAL WINDOWS 08525-1
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA
KB #96079
w
Hardware Set 001
1 Hinge, B.B.-Anchor BB1190-5.0 x 4.5-US26D-NRP Hager
2 Hinge, Ball Bearing BB1199-5.0 x 4.5-US26D-NRP Hager
1 Exit Device,Rim-Keyed ED5200 x N955 x Key-M52(CD)-(30")x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x A5(HD-BS-HO) Corbin-Russwin
1 Weatherstrip Door Weatherstrip by Aluminum Door Manufacturer Door Supplier
1 Door Bottom Sweep Door Bottom Sweep by Aluminum Door Manufacturer Door Supplier
1 Threshold 172A-(Depth of Frame)-36" Pemko
Heading Notes
Mullion to be provided by Aluminum Door Supplier
Hardware Set 002
1 Hinge, B.B.-Anchor BB1190-5.0 x 4.5-US26D-NRP Hager
2 Hinge, Ball Bearing BB1199-5.0 x 4.5-US26D-NRP Hager
1 Exit Device,Rim-Keyed ED5200 x N955 x Key-M52(CD)-(30")x 626 Corbin-Russwin
1 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x A5(HD-BS-HO) Corbin-Russwin
1 Threshold 172A-(Depth of Frame)-36" Pemko w
Hardware Set 003
2 Hinge,B.B.-Anchor BB1190-5.0 x 4.5-US26D-NRP Hager e�
4 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1199-5.0 x 4.5-US26D-NRP Hager
2 Exit Device,Rim-Keyed ED5200 x N955 x Key-M52(CD)-(28")x 626 Corbin-Russwin
2 Closer, Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x A5(HD-BS-HO) Corbin-Russwin
1 Weatherstrip Door Weatherstrip by Aluminum Door Manufacturer Door Supplier ww
1 Door Bottom Sweep Door Bottom Sweep by Aluminum Door Manufacturer Door Supplier
1 Threshold 172A-(Depth of Frame)-68" Pemko
no
Hardware Set 004
2 Hinge,B.B.-Anchor BB1190-5.0 x 4.5-US26D-NRP Hager
4 Hinge, Ball Bearing BB1199-5.0 x 4.5-US26D-NRP Hager
2 Exit Device, Rim-Keyed ED5200 x N955 x Key-M52(CD)-(30")x 626 Corbin-Russwin °
2 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x A5(HD-BS-HO) Corbin-Russwin
1 Weatherstrip Door Weatherstrip by Aluminum Door Manufacturer Door Supplier
1 Door Bottom Sweep Door Bottom Sweep by Aluminum Door Manufacturer Door Supplier
1 Threshold 172A-(Depth of Frame)-72" Pemko
Hardware Set 005
2 Hinge, B.B.-Anchor BB1190-5.0 x 4.5-US26D-NRP Hager
4 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1199-5.0 x 4.5-US26D-NRP Hager
2 Exit Device,Rim ED5200 x EO-(30")x 626 Corbin-Russwin
2 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x A5(HD-BS-HO) Corbin-Russwin ,
1 Weatherstrip Door Weatherstrip by Aluminum Door Manufacturer Door Supplier
1 Door Bottom Sweep Door Bottom Sweep by Aluminum Door Manufacturer Door Supplier
1 Threshold 172A-(Depth of Frame)-72" Pemko
Hardware Set 006
2 Hinge, B.B.-Anchor BB1190-5.0 x 4.5-US26D-NRP Hager
4 Hinge,Ball Bearing BB1199-5.0 x 4.5-US26D-NRP Hager
2 Exit Device,Rim-Keyed ED5200 x N955 x Key-M52(CD)-(30")x 626 Corbin-Russwin *�+
2 Closer,Overhead Parallel Arm DC2210 x 689 x A5(HD-BS-HO) Corbin-Russwin
1 Threshold 172A-(Depth of Frame)-72" Pemko
e�
END OF SECTION 08410
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES 08410 - 10 s
on
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
exceed 1/16 inch.
3. Diagonal Measurements: The maximum difference in diagonal
measurements shall not exceed 1/8 inch.
on 4. Offset at Corners: The maximum out-of-plane offset of framing at
corners shall not exceed 1/32 inch.
D. Separate aluminum and other corrodible metal surfaces from sources of
corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other
materials.
1. Zinc or cadmium plate steel anchors and other unexposed fasteners
after fabrication.
2. Paint dissimilar metals where drainage from them passes over
aluminum.
E. Drill and tap frames and doors and apply surface-mounted hardware items.
Comply with hardware manufacturer's instructions and template
ON requirements. Use concealed fasteners wherever possible.
F. Set sill members and other members in bed of sealant as indicated, or
with joint fillers or gaskets as indicated to provide weathertight
construction. Comply with requirements of Section 07901 "Joint
Sealants" for sealants, fillers, and gaskets.
G. Refer to Section 08800 "Glazing" for installation of glass and other
panels indicated to be glazed into doors and framing, and not preglazed
by manufacturer.
3 .3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust operating hardware to function properly, for smooth operation
without binding, and for weathertight closure.
3 .4 CLEANING
ON A. Clean the completed system, inside and out, promptly after installation,
exercising care to avoid damage to coatings.
B. Clean glass surfaces after installation, complying with requirements
contained in Section 08800 "Glazing" for cleaning and maintenance.
Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt and other substances
from aluminum surfaces.
P"
3 .5 PROTECTION
A. Institute protective measures required throughout the remainder of the
construction period to ensure that aluminum entrances and storefronts
will be without damage or deterioration, other than normal weathering,
at time of acceptance.
OR
3 .6 HARDWARE SCHEDULE
A. General: Provide hardware for each door to comply with requirements of
Section 08710 "Finish Hardware", Door Schedule Section 08710DS, and the
following Hardware Sets:
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES 08410 - 9
no
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA RB 49607-
H. Weatherstripping: For exterior doors, provide compression
weatherstripping against fixed stops. At other edges, provide sliding
weatherstripping retained in adjustable strip mortised into door edge.
1. Provide EPDM or vinyl-blade gasket weatherstripping in bottom door
rail, adjustable for contact with threshold.
2 . At interior doors and other locations without weatherstripping,
provide neoprene silencers on stops to prevent metal-to-metal
contact.
no
2.6 FINISHES
A. General: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations
relative to application and designations of finishes. s.
B. Finish designations prefixed by "AA" conform to the system established
by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes. ON
C. Siliconized Polyester Finish: AA-M10C41R1x, Chemical Finish: cleaned
with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: chemical conversion coating,
acid chromate-fluoride-phosphate �"
pretreatment; Organic Coating.
Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply
with coating and resin manufacturer's instructions.
1. Organic Coating: Siliconized Polyester Finish primer/top coat
system complying with AAMA 605.2, with a dry film thickness at no
less than 1.5 mils.
wie
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and supports, with the Installer present, for
compliance with requirements indicated, installation tolerances, and
other conditions that affect installation of aluminum entrances.
Correct unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding with the
installation.
1. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions
are corrected.
3 .2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for
installation.
B. Set units plumb, level, and true to line, without warp or rack of
framing members, doors, or panels. Install components in proper
alignment and relation to established lines and grades indicated.
Provide proper support and anchor securely in place.
C. Construction Tolerances: Install aluminum entrance to comply with the
following tolerances:
1. Variation from Plane: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 12 feet of length
or 1/4 inch in any total length. we
2 . Offset from Alignment: The maximum offset from true alignment
between two identical members abutting end to end in line shall not
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES 08410 - 8 �e
ON
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
panels, without disassembly of stiles and rails. Provide snap-on
extruded aluminum glazing stops with a minimum wall thickness of
0.05011, with exterior stops anchored for nonremoval.
2. Design: Provide 2-inch-thick doors of design indicated.
a. EFCO D-318 Durastyle doors.
s* b. Medium Stile, Kawneer Series 350 Tuffline doors.
2.5 FABRICATION
on A. General: Fabricate aluminum entrance components to designs, sizes and
thicknesses indicated and to comply with indicated standards. Sizes and
profile requirements are indicated on the drawings. Variable dimensions
are indicated, with maximum and minimum dimensions required, to achieve
design requirements and coordination with other work.
1. Thermal-Break Construction: Fabricate framing system with an
am integrally concealed, low-conductance thermal barrier, located
between exterior materials and exposed interior members to
eliminate direct metal-to-metal contact. Use manufacturer's
standard construction that has been in use for similar projects for
period of not less than 3 years.
B. Prefabrication: Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware
w application, and other work to the greatest extent possible before
shipment to the Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary
for shipment and installation.
1. Perform fabrication operations, including cutting, fitting,
forming, drilling and grinding of metal work to prevent damage to
exposed finish surfaces. Complete these operations for hardware
an prior to application of finishes.
2 . Do not drill and tap for surface-mounted hardware items until time
of installation at project site.
3 . Preglaze door and frame units to greatest extent possible.
on
C. Welding: Comply with AWS recommendations. Grind exposed welds smooth
to remove weld spatter and welding oxides. Restore mechanical finish.
an
1. Welding behind finished surfaces shall be performed in such a
manner as to minimize distortion and discoloration on the finished
surface.
Rr
D. Reinforcing: Install reinforcing as required for hardware and as
necessary for performance requirements, sag resistance and rigidity.
on E. Dissimilar Metals: Separate dissimilar metals with bituminous paint,
or a suitable sealant, or a nonabsorptive plastic or elastomeric tape,
or a gasket between the surfaces. Do not use coatings containing lead.
am
F. Continuity: Maintain accurate relation of planes and angles with
hairline fit of contacting members.
1. Uniformity of Metal Finish: Abutting extruded aluminum members
shall not have an integral color or texture variation greater than
half the range indicated in the sample pair submittal.
G. Fasteners: Conceal fasteners wherever possible.
04
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES 08410 - 7
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KE #96079
1. Reinforcement: Where fasteners screw-anchor into aluminum members w�
less than 0.125 inches thick, reinforce the interior with aluminum
or nonmagnetic stainless steel to receive screw threads, or provide
standard noncorrosive pressed-in splined grommet nuts. „
2. Exposed Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners except for
application of hardware. For application of hardware, use Phillips
flat-head machine screws that match the finish of member or
hardware being fastened.
E. Concealed Flashing: 0.0179-inch (26 gage) minimum dead-soft stainless
steel, or 0.026-inch-thick minimum extruded aluminum of alloy and type
selected by manufacturer for compatibility with other components.
F. Brackets and Reinforcements: Provide high-strength aluminum brackets
and reinforcements; where use of aluminum is not feasible provide
nonmagnetic stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized steel complying with
ASTM A 123.
G. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Provide cast iron, malleable iron, or
hot-dip galvanized steel inserts complying with ASTM A 123.
H. Compression Weatherstripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable
compressible weatherstripping gaskets of molded neoprene complying with
ASTM D 2000 or molded PVC complying with ASTM D 2287.
I. Sliding Weatherstripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable
weatherstripping of wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile, with nylon
fabric or aluminum strip backing, complying with AAMA 701.2.
w�
2.3 HARDWARE
A. General: Refer to Section 08710 "Finish Hardware" for requirements for
hardware items indicated to be provided by the aluminum entrance w
manufacturer.
2.4 COMPONENTS
no
A. Storefront Framing System: Provide storefront and entrance framing
systems fabricated from extruded aluminum members of size and profile
indicated with a minimum wall thickness of 0.080" . Include subframes .w
and other reinforcing members of the type indicated. Provide for flush
glazing storefront from the exterior on all sides without projecting
stops. Shop-fabricate and preassemble frame components where possible. so
Provide storefront frame sections without exposed seams.
1. Mullion Configurations: Provide pockets at the inside glazing face
to receive resilient elastomeric glazing. Mullions and horizontals am
shall be one piece. Make provisions to drain moisture accumulation
to the exterior.
2. Use Kawneer 350 Tuffline or EFCO 403 Storefront framing at jambs so
and heads of door openings.
B. Stile-and-Rail Type Entrance Doors: Provide tubular frame members with
a minimum wall thickness of 0.18811, fabricated with mechanical joints 4M
using heavy inserted reinforcing plates and concealed tie-rods or
j -bolts.
1. Glazing: Fabricate doors to facilitate replacement of glass or so
ALUMINIIM ENTRANCES 08410 - 6
�e
K"
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA RB #96079
on fabrication. Show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate
fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of the
work.
O
1. Where necessary, proceed with fabrication without field
measurements, and coordinate fabrication tolerances to ensure
po proper fit.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the manufacturer,
agreeing to repair or replace units that fail in materials or
workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failures include, but
are not necessarily limited to:
so
1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, excessive
leakage or air infiltration.
On 2. Faulty operation.
3 . Deterioration of metals, metal finishes and other materials beyond
normal weathering.
4. Glass, insulated glass units, glazing anchorage and setting system,
OR sealing, flashing, etc.
B. Warranty Period: 1 year after the date of Substantial Completion.
OR C. The warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights or remedies the
Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents, and is
in addition to and runs concurrent with other warranties made by the
Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
on
2 .1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide entrance
" and storefront systems manufactured by one of the following:
1. EFCO Corporation.
2. Kawneer Company, Inc.
2 .2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Members: Alloy and temper recommended by the manufacturer for
strength, corrosion resistance, and application of required finish;
comply with ASTM B 221 for aluminum extrusions, ASTM B 209 for aluminum
P0 sheet or plate, and ASTM B 211 for aluminum bars, rods and wire.
B. Carbon steel reinforcement of aluminum framing members shall comply with
ASTM A 36 for structural shapes, plates and bars, ASTM A 611 for cold
40 rolled sheet and strip, or ASTM A 570 for hot rolled sheet and strip.
C. Glass and Glazing Materials: Comply with requirements of Section 08800
"Glazing" .
D. Fasteners: Provide fasteners of aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel,
zinc plated steel, or other material warranted by the manufacturer to
be noncorrosive and compatible with aluminum components, hardware,
anchors and other components.
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES 08410 - 5
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
5. Samples for Verification Purposes: The Architect reserves the
right to require additional samples, that show fabrication
techniques and workmanship, and design of hardware and accessories.
6. Test Reports: Provide certified test reports from a qualified .w
independent testing laboratory showing that aluminum entrance
systems have been tested in accordance with specified test
procedures and comply with performance characteristics indicated.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer
Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has
completed installations of aluminum entrances similar in design and
extent to those required for the project and whose work has resulted in
construction with a record of successful in-service performance. �w
B. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Provide aluminum entrance systems
produced by a firm experienced in manufacturing systems that are similar es
to those indicated for this project and that have a record of successful
in-service performance.
C. Fabricator Qualifications: Provide aluminum entrance systems fabricated +*!
by a firm experienced in producing systems that are similar to those
indicated for this Project, and that have a record of successful
in-service performance. The fabricator shall have sufficient production
capacity to
p y produce components required without causing delay in
progress of the Work.
D. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain aluminum entrance systems from one wF
source and from a single manufacturer.
E. Design Criteria: The drawings indicate the size, profile, and
dimensional requirements of aluminum entrance work required and are
based on the specific types and models indicated. Aluminum entrance and
storefront by other manufacturers may be considered, provided deviations
in dimensions and profiles are minor and do not change the design w„
concept as judged by the Architect. The burden of proof equality is on
the proposer.
1. Submit data for alternate manufacturers in accordance with
Conditions of the Contract and Section 01300, "Submittals and
Product Substitutions" .
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver aluminum entrance components in the manufacturer's original
protective packaging.
B. Store aluminum components in a clean dry location away from uncured
masonry or concrete. Cover components with waterproof paper, tarpaulin
or polyethylene sheeting in a manner to permit circulation of air. .�.
1. Stack framing components in a manner that will prevent bending and
avoid significant or permanent damage.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Check openings by accurate field measurement before ..e
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES 08410 — 4
we
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA RE #96079
b. Parallel Deflection: When carrying the full dead load,
deflection of framing members measured in a direction parallel
to the plane of the wall shall not exceed an amount that will
reduce glass bite by less than 75 percent of the design
dimension and reduce edge clearance to less than 25 percent of
pa design dimension or 1/8 inch, whichever is greater.
C. At the conclusion of the test, there shall be no glass
breakage, permanent damage to fasteners, storefront parts, or
any other damage that would cause the storefront to be
p` defective.
3. Thermal Movements: The curtain wall system shall be capable of
NO withstanding thermal movements resulting from an ambient
temperature range of 120 deg F (67 deg C) that may result in a
temperature range within the curtain wall framing of 180 deg F (100
deg C) without causing buckling, stresses on glass, failure of
4" sealants, damaging loads on fasteners, or other detrimental
effects.
PR 1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of the
Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
4M
1. Product data for each aluminum entrance and storefront system
required, including:
a. Manufacturer's standard details and fabrication methods.
b. Data on finishing, hardware and accessories.
C. Recommendations for maintenance and cleaning of exterior
on surfaces.
2 . Shop drawings for each aluminum entrance and storefront system
an required, including:
a. Layout and installation details, including relationship to
adjacent work.
b. Elevations at 1/4-inch scale.
C. Detail sections of typical composite members.
d. Anchors and reinforcement.
e. Hardware mounting heights.
f. Provisions for expansion and contraction.
g. Glazing details.
3. Hardware Schedule: Coordinate hardware with doors, frames, and
related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and
finish. Include item name, name of the manufacturer and complete
designations of every item required for each door opening.
■w
a. Cylinders and keying are furnished under Section 08710,
"Finish Hardware" for installation under this Section.
4. Samples for Initial Color Selection: Submit pairs of samples of
each specified color and finish on 12-inch-long sections of
extrusions or formed shapes. Where normal color variations are
anticipated, include 2 or more units in each set of samples
indicating extreme limits of color variations.
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES 08410 - 3
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
A. This Section includes the following types of aluminum entrance and
storefront work:
1. Exterior entrance doors.
2. Vestibule doors matching entrance doors.
3. Sidelights.
4. Frames for entrances.
5. Hardware for entrance doors.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that
relate to this Section:
1. Section 08525 "Aluminum Architectural Windows" for aluminum
windows.
2. Section 08710 "Finish Hardware" for hardware requirements.
3. Section 08800 "Glazing" for glazing requirements for aluminum
entrances.
4. Section 08920 "Glazed Aluminum Curtain Wall" for curtain walls. ■w
1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide aluminum entrance and storefront assemblies that
comply with performance characteristics specified, as demonstrated by
testing the manufacturer's corresponding stock assemblies according to
test methods indicated.
B. Air and Water Infiltration: Design and install the manufacturer's
aluminum entrance and storefront system to permanently resist leakage
of air and water through the system in accordance with the following: so
1. Air Infiltration: Air leakage through the curtain wall system
shall not exceed 0.06 cfm per sq. ft. of wall area when tested in ■o
accordance with ASTM E 283 at a minimum static air pressure
differential of 1.56 lbf per sq. ft.
2 . Water Penetration: There shall be no uncontrolled water leakage
through the curtain wall system, as defined in AAMA 501, when Am
tested in accordance with ASTM E 331 at a minimum differential
pressure of 20 percent of inward design wind load but not less than
6.24 lbf per sq. ft. or more than 12 lbf per sq. ft. an
C. Structural Performance: Design, engineer, fabricate, and install the
aluminum entrance and storefront system to withstand effects of a wind
load of 35 psf acting inward and 30 psf acting outward, normal to the w",
plane of the wall, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 330, with no
material failures or permanent deformation of structural members.
1. Structural Test Pressure shall be equal to 150
q percent of the
inward and outward acting design pressures.
2. Deflections: The aluminum entrance and storefront system shall be
capable of withstanding building movements and weather exposures so
including wind loading and of performing within the following
limitations, under the required design load both positive and
negative:
a. Perpendicular Deflection: Deflection of framing members,
measured perpendicular to the plane of wall, shall not exceed
1/175 of the unsupported span (defined as the distance between
anchor center lines) or 3/4 inch, whichever is less.
ALUMINUM ENTRANCES 08410 - 2
PW
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON. MA KB #96079
SECTION 08410 - ALUMINUM ENTRANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 TIME, MANNER AND REQUIREMENTS FOR FILING SUB-BIDS
A. Sub-Bids shall be submitted in accordance with the provisions of General
Laws, Chapter 149, Section 44A to 44I, inclusive, as amended.
B. Sub-Bids for work under this Section shall be received at the Council
Chambers at Town Hall, 210 Main Street, Northampton, MA 01060, until
2:00 p.m. local time on February 9, 1999, at which time all filed Sub-
Bids shall be opened, read aloud, and duly recorded.
No C. Sub-Bids shall be submitted on forms identical to those contained in
Bidding Requirements: Bid Form for Sub-Bidder. The Bid Forms attached
hereto are for information only and shall not be detached, filled in,
or executed. All Sub-Bids shall be submitted on the FORM FOR SUB-BID
furnished by the Awarding Authority as required by Section 44G of
Chapter 149 of the General Laws, as amended. Sub-Bids Forms shall be
completely filled in and all Sub-Bids which are incomplete, conditional,
obscure, or which contain any additions not called for will be rejected.
D. Sub-Bids filed with the Awarding Authority shall be accompanied by a Bid
Deposit in the form of a certified check or a treasurer's or cashier's
check issued by a responsible bank or trust company, payable to the City
of Northampton. A bid bond shall be:
1. On a form satisfactory to the Awarding Authority.
-- 2 . With a surety company qualified to do business in the Commonwealth
and satisfactory to the Awarding Authority.
3 . Conditioned upon the faithful performance by the principal of the
agreements contained in the Bid. The amount of such bid deposit
shall be five percent (5%) of the value of the Bid.
E. Sub-Bids for work under this Section shall be for the complete work
required as specified and as shown on the drawings.
OR F. Sub-Bidders are directed to the Instructions to Bidders, and to the
requirements that all bidders visit the site to determine the scope of
work required under this Section.
G. Sub-Bidders must comply with all provisions of Division 1, General
Requirements, in the same manner as the General Contractor.
H. Work to be done under this Filed Sub-Bid is included in the Contract
Documents as listed in LOD-1 through LOD-5 (List of Drawings) .
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this work. Note also all Addenda.
1.3 SUMMARY
ALUMINIIM ENTRANCES 08410 - 1
ma
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA
1cB #o6n7a
related to startup and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing,
preventive maintenance, and procedures for testing and resetting
release devices.
3. Schedule training with Owner with at least 7 days, advance notice.
3.4 SCHEDULE ,
A. Furnish doors of the following types for the locations indicated:
1. Exterior/Receiving 0124: Electrically operated, interior face w
mounted, galvanized prime finish, insulated service door.
2. Servery 0113/Cafeteria 0120: Electrically operated, between jamb
mounted, stainless steel finish, service door. .�.
3. Dishwash 0118/Cafeteria 0120: Electrically operated, face mounted,
stainless steel finish, counter door.
4. Control Room 2202/Upper Balcony 2201: Electrically operated, face
mounted, galvanized prime finish, counter door.
5. Exterior/Concession G102 : Chain-hoist operated, interior face
mounted, stainless steel finish, counter door. (Alternate No. 2)
END OF SECTION 08331
�e
w
w
war
awr
w�
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08331 - 8
M"
OR
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
H. Remote-Control Station: Provide momentary-contact, 3-button control
station with push-button controls labeled "Open, " "Close, " and "Stop."
1. Provide interior units, full-guarded, surface-mounted, heavy-duty
type, with general-purpose NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure.
2. Provide exterior units, full-guarded, standard-duty,
R surface-mounted, weatherproof type, NEMA ICS 6, Type 4 enclosure,
key operated.
I. Obstruction Detection Device: Provide each motorized door with indicated
` external automatic safety sensor able to protect full width of door
opening. Activation of sensor immediately stops and reverses downward
door travel.
1. Sensor Edge: Provide each motorized door with an automatic safety
sensor edge, located within astragal or weather stripping mounted to
bottom bar. Contact with sensor immediately stops and reverses
4` downward door travel. Connect to control circuit using
manufacturer's standard take-up reel or self-coiling cable.
a. Provide electrically actuated automatic bottom bar.
J. Limit Switches: Provide adjustable switches, interlocked with motor
controls and set to automatically stop door at fully opened and fully
closed positions.
K. Provide electric operators with ADA-compliant audible alarm and visual
indicator lights.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
go
3 .1 INSTALLATION
am A. General: Install door and operating equipment complete with necessary
hardware, jamb and head mold strips, anchors, inserts, hangers, and
equipment supports according to Shop Drawings, manufacturer's written
ow instructions, and as specified.
3 .2 ADJUSTING
ON
A. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts; adjust doors to operate easily,
free from warp, twist, or distortion and fitting weathertight for entire
* perimeter.
3 .3 DEMONSTRATION
sm
A. Startup Services: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
perform startup services and to train Owner's maintenance personnel as
specified below:
1. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
2 . Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08331 - 7
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KE #96079
MM
2.8 MANUAL DOOR OPERATORS
so
A. Chain-Hoist Operator: Provide manual chain-hoist operator consisting of
endless steel hand chain, chain pocket wheel and guard, and
gear-reduction unit with a maximum 35-lbf effort for door operation. ,o
Provide alloy steel hand chain with chain holder secured to operator
guide.
am
2.9 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS
A. General: Provide electric door operator assembly of size and capacity
recommended and provided by door manufacturer for door and operational as
life specified, with electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls,
starter, gear-reduction unit, solenoid-operated brake, clutch,
remote-control stations, control devices, integral gearing for locking am
door, and accessories required for proper operation.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
am
C. Disconnect Device: Provide hand-operated disconnect or mechanism for
automatically engaging sprocket-chain operator and releasing brake for
emergency manual operation while disconnecting motor, without affecting am
timing of limit switch. Mount disconnect and operator so they are
accessible from floor level. Include interlock device to automatically
prevent motor from operating when emergency operator is engaged.
.w
D. Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch
adjustment and without affecting emergency auxiliary operator.
E. Provide control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1, NEMA ICS 2, and we
NEMA ICS 6, with NFPA 70 Class 2 control circuit, maximum 24-V, ac or dc.
F. Door-Operator Type: Provide wall-, hood-, or bracket-mounted, jackshaft, w
gear-head-type door operator unit consisting of electric motor, enclosed
worm-gear running-in-oil primary drive, chain and sprocket secondary
drive, and quick disconnect-release for manual operation.
G. Electric Motors: Provide high-starting torque, reversible,
continuous-duty, Class A insulated, electric motors, complying with
NEMA MG 1, with overload protection, sized to start, accelerate, and
operate door in either direction, from any position, at not less than 2/3
fps or more than 1 fps, without exceeding nameplate ratings or
considering service factor.
1. Type: Polyphase, medium-induction type.
2. Service Factor: According to NEMA MG 1, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Coordinate wiring requirements and electric characteristics of
motors with building electrical system. "
4. Provide open dripproof-type motor, and controller with NEMA ICS 6,
Type 1 enclosure.
5. Provide totally enclosed, nonventilated or fan-cooled motors, fitted + ?
with plugged drain, and controller with NEMA ICS 6, Type 4 enclosure
at exterior service door.
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08331 - 6
w
ON
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
grease-sealed bearings or self-lubricating graphite bearings for rotating
members.
B. Counterbalance Barrel: Fabricate spring barrel of hot-formed,
structural-quality, welded or seamless carbon-steel pipe, of sufficient
diameter and wall thickness to support rolled-up curtain without
distortion of slats and to limit barrel deflection to not more than 0.03
in./ft. of span under full load.
C. Provide spring balance of one or more oil-tempered, heat-treated steel
helical torsion springs. Size springs to counterbalance weight of
curtain, with uniform adjustment accessible from outside barrel. Provide
cast-steel barrel plugs to secure ends of springs to barrel and shaft.
D. Fabricate torsion rod for counterbalance shaft of cold-rolled steel,
sized to hold fixed spring ends and carry torsional load.
E. Brackets: Provide mounting brackets of manufacturer's standard design,
either cast-iron or cold-rolled steel plate with bell-mouth guide groove
for curtain.
2 .5 FINISHES, GENERAL
A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural
and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating
finishes.
- B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or
adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range
of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not
acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable
if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or
installed to minimize contrast.
2 .6 STEEL AND GALVANIZED STEEL FINISHES
uw A. Factory Primer for Field Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer,
compatible with field-applied finish according to coating manufacturer's
written instructions for cleaning, pretreatment, application, and minimum
dry film thickness.
PM
2 .7 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES
A. General: Remove or blend tool and die marks and stretch lines into
finish.
1. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directional textured,
polished finish indicated, free of cross scratches. Run grain with
long dimension of each piece.
B. Bright, Cold-Rolled, Unpolished Finish: No. 2B finish.
C. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove
embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08331 - 5
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA
RB #aan7o
overtravel of curtain and a continuous bar for holding windlocks.
G. Curtain Jamb Guides for counter doors: Fabricate curtain jamb guides of
angles, or channels and angles of material and finish to match curtain
slats, with sufficient depth and strength to retain curtain, to allow
curtain to operate smoothly, and to withstand loading. Provide
continuous integral wear strips to prevent metal-to-metal contact and
minimize noise of travel and removable stops on guides to prevent
overtravel of curtain.
w+
2.3 HOODS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Hood: Form to entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism ww
at opening head and act as weatherseal. Contour to suit end brackets to
which hood is attached. Roll and reinforce top and bottom edges for
stiffness. Provide closed ends for surface-mounted hoods and fascia for
any portion of between-jamb mounting projecting beyond wall face.
Provide intermediate support brackets as required to prevent sag.
1. Fabricate steel hoods, for steel doors, of not less than 0.028-inch
thick, hot-dip galvanized steel sheet with G90 zinc coating,
complying with ASTM A 653.
2. Fabricate hoods of stainless-steel sheet, Type 300 series, complying
with ASTM A 240 or ASTM A 666, and not less than 0.025-inch thick,
for stainless-steel doors.
3. Shape: Round.
B. Weatherseals: Provide replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible s
weather-stripping gaskets fitted to bottom and at top of exterior doors,
unless otherwise indicated. At door head, use 1/8-inch thick,
replaceable, continuous sheet secured to inside of curtain coil hood. +
1. Provide motor-operated doors with combination bottom weatherseal and
sensor edge.
2 . In addition, provide replaceable, adjustable, continuous, flexible,
1/8-inch thick seals of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene at door
jambs for a weathertight installation.
C. Fabricate locking device assembly with lock, spring-loaded dead bolt,
operating handle, cam plate, and adjustable locking bar to engage through
slots in tracks.
.ee
1. Locking Bars: Single-jamb side, operable from inside only.
2. Lock cylinder is specified in Section 08710 "Door Hardware" .
D. Chain Lock Keeper: Suitable for padlock.
E. Where door unit is power operated, provide safety interlock switch to
disengage power supply when door is locked.
2.4 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM
A. General: Counterbalance doors by means of adjustable-tension steel
helical torsion spring, mounted around a steel shaft and contained in a
spring barrel connected to door curtain with required barrel rings. Use ..
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08331 - 4
ON
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON. MA KB #96079
2.2 DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION
A. Door Curtain: Fabricate overhead coiling door curtain of interlocking
slats, designed to withstand wind loading indicated, in a continuous
length for width of door without splices. Unless otherwise indicated,
provide slats of material thickness recommended by door manufacturer for
performance, size, and type of door indicated, and as follows:
1. Steel Door Curtain Slats: Structural-quality, cold-rolled
galvanized steel sheets complying with ASTM A 653, with G90 zinc
coating.
a. Provide manufacturer's standard flat-profile slats.
2 . Stainless-Steel Door Curtain Slats: Type 300 series.
a. Provide manufacturer's standard flat-profile slats.
3. Insulation: Fill slat with manufacturer's standard rigid cellular
polystyrene or polyurethane-foam-type thermal insulation complying
with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 75 and 450,
respectively, according to ASTM E 84. Enclose insulation completely
within metal slat faces.
4. Inside Curtain Slat Face: To match material of outside metal
curtain slat and as follows:
a. Galvanized Steel Sheet Thickness: Not less than 0.028 inch.
B. Endlocks for service doors: Malleable-iron castings galvanized after
fabrication, secured to curtain slats with galvanized rivets, or
high-strength nylon. Provide locks on not less than alternate curtain
slats for curtain alignment and resistance against lateral movement.
C. Endlocks for counter doors: Manufacturer's standard locks on not less
than alternate curtain slats for curtain alignment and resistance against
on lateral movement.
D. Windlocks: Malleable-iron castings secured to curtain slats with
galvanized rivets or high-strength nylon, as required to comply with wind
load.
E. Bottom Bar: Consisting of two angles, each not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2
by 1/8 inch thick, galvanized or stainless steel extrusions to suit type
of curtain slats.
1. Astragal: Provide a replaceable, adjustable, continuous,
0" compressible gasket of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene, between
angles or fitted to shape, as a cushion bumper for interior door.
2 . Provide motor-operated doors with combination bottom astragal and
sensor edge.
F. Curtain Jamb Guides for service doors: Fabricate curtain jamb guides of
steel angles, or channels and angles, with sufficient depth and strength
to retain curtain, to allow curtain to operate smoothly, and to withstand
loading. Build up units with not less than 3/16-inch thick, galvanized
steel sections complying with ASTM A 36, and ASTM A 123. Slot bolt holes
for guide adjustment. Provide removable stops on guides to prevent
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08331 - 3
AM
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON. MA KB #96079
accessory. Include details of construction relative to materials, Am
dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes. Provide
roughing-in diagrams, operating instructions, and maintenance
information. Include the following: am
1. Setting drawings, templates, and installation instructions for
built-in or embedded anchor devices.
2. Summary of forces and loads on walls and jambs. so
3. Motors: Show nameplate data and ratings; characteristics; mounting
arrangements; size and location of winding termination lugs, conduit
entry, and grounding lug; and coatings. 40
B. Shop Drawings: For special components and installations not dimensioned
or detailed in manufacturers data sheets.
as
1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control
systems. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and
field-installed wiring and between components provided by door Ok
manufacturer and those provided by others.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who is an
authorized representative of the overhead coiling door manufacturer for
both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain overhead coiling doors through one source
from a single manufacturer.
1. Obtain operators and controls from the overhead coiling door
manufacturer.
C. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated fixtures specified
in this Section that are listed and labeled.
w
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled" : As defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100.
go
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 .1 MANUFACTURERS an
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work Of
include, but are not limited to, the following:
B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
by one of the following:
1. Atlas Door Corp. ; Div. of Clopay Building Products Co.
2. Cornell Iron Works Inc.
3 . Overhead Door Corporation.
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08331 - 2
so
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
ow NORTHAMPTON, MA B #96079
SECTION 08331 - OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
ON
PART 1 - GENERAL
no
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
As A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, 11 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
po who performs this work. Note also all Addenda.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following types of overhead coiling doors:
s 1. Service doors.
2 . Exterior insulated service doors.
3. Counter doors.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 08710 "Door Hardware" for lock cylinders and keying.
2 . Section 09900 "Painting" for field applied paint finish.
3 . Division 16 Sections for electrical service and connections for
powered operators, and accessories.
4. Division 16 Sections for disconnect switches and circuit breakers
0 for powered operators.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Operation Cycle: One complete cycle of a door begins with the door in
the closed position. The door is then moved to the open position and
NO back to the closed position.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Structural Performance: Provide overhead coiling doors capable of
withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and
A" stresses without evidencing permanent deformation of door components:
1. Wind Load: Uniform pressure (velocity pressure) of 30 lbf/sq. ft. ,
acting inward and outward.
go
B. Operation-Cycle Requirements: Design overhead coiling door components
and operator to operate for not less than 20,000 cycles.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
40 A. Product Data: For each type and size of overhead coiling door and
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08331 - 1
ON
an
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB # 607Q
3 .3 ADJUSTING AND PROTECTION: am
A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors which do not swing or operate
freely. 4•
B. Finished Doors: Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation.
C. Protect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to ensure that wood am
doors will be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial
Completion.
Am
END OF SECTION 08211
on
X"
M
ww
+ir
Am
ew
w
40
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211-6
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
A. Examine installed door frames prior to hanging door:
1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type,
size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed
with plumb jambs and level heads.
2. Reject doors with defects.
B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected.
ON 3 .2 INSTALLATION:
A. Hardware: For installation see Section 08710 "Door Hardware" section
of these specifications.
B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Install wood doors to comply with
manufacturer's instructions and of referenced AWI standard and as
am indicated.
1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames in
accordance with requirements of NFPA No. 80.
an
C. Job-Fit Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances
and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess
of limits set by manufacturer or permitted with fire-rated doors.
Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and
machining.
1. Fitting Clearances for Non-Rated Doors: Provide 1/8" at jambs and
heads; 1/16" per leaf at meeting stiles for pairs of doors; and
1/8" from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or
covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4"
clearance from bottom of door to top of threshold.
2 . Fitting Clearances for Fire-Rated Doors : Complying with NFPA 80.
3 . Bevel non-rated doors 1/8" in 2" at lock and hinge edges.
4 . Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8" in 2" at lock edge; trim stiles and
rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency.
D. Prefit Doors: Fit to frames for uniform clearance at each edge.
E. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation, if fitting
or machining is required at the job site.
On
A"
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211-5
A"
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON. MA B #9607
resistance. MW
5. Pairs: Furnish veneer wrapped formed steel edges and astragals for
pairs of fire-rated doors.
so
2.3 LOUVERS AND LIGHT FRAMES:
A. Metal Frames for Light Openings in Fire Doors: Manufacturer's standard
frame formed of veneer wrapped 18-gage cold-rolled steel, .e.
factory-primed, and approved for use in door of fire-rating indicated.
2.4 FABRICATION: �w
A. Fabricate flush wood doors to produce doors complying with following
requirements:
1. In sizes indicated for job-site fitting.
2. Optional factory-prefit and premachine doors to fit frame opening
sizes indicated with the following uniform clearances and bevels: �w
a. Comply with tolerance requirements of AWI for prefitting.
Comply with final hardware schedules and door frame shop
drawings and with hardware templates.
b. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames
to verify dimensions and alignment before proceeding with
factory premachining. ..�
C. Coordinate locations of additional laminated edge construction
for fire-rated door hardware requiring improved screw holding
capability.
.w
B. Metal Astragals: Premachine astragals and formed steel edges for
hardware where required for pairs of fire-rated doors.
ww
C. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors to comply with applicable
requirements of referenced standards for kind(s) of doors required.
1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and
profile indicated.
2.5 FACTORY FINISHING:
am
A. General: Comply with referenced AWI quality standard including Section
1500 "Factory Finishing" .
me
B. Prefinish wood doors at factory.
C. Transparent Finish: Comply with requirements indicated for grade, aw
finish system, staining effect and sheen.
1. AWI Grade: Premium.
2 . Finish: AWI System #5 catalyzed polyurethane. ,1,
3 . Staining: Match approved sample for color.
4 . Effect: Match approved sample.
5 . Sheen: Match approved sample.
No
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION:
an
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211-4
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
warped (bow, cup or twist) or that show telegraphing of core
construction in face veneers, or do not conform to tolerance limitations
of referenced quality standards.
1. Warranty shall also include reinstallation which may be required
due to repair or replacement of defective doors where defect was
not apparent prior to hanging.
2. Warranty shall be in effect during following period of time after
date of Substantial Completion.
3. Solid Core Interior Doors:
a. Life of installation.
C. Contractor's Responsibilities: Replace or refinish doors where
Contractor's work contributed to rejection or to voiding of
manufacturer's warranty.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS:
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
of one of the following:
OM 1. Solid Core Doors with Wood Veneer Faces:
a. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.
b. Eggers Industries, Architectural Door Division.
C. VT Industries, Inc.
d. Weyerhauser Company.
go 2.2 INTERIOR FLUSH WOOD DOORS:
A. Solid Core Doors for Transparent Finish: Comply with the following
on requirements:
1. Faces: Red Oak, plain sliced.
2 . AWI Grade: Premium.
3 . Construction: PC-5 (Particleboard core, hot pressed, 5-ply) .
B. Fire-Rated Solid Core Doors: Comply with the following requirements.
1. Faces and Grade: Provide faces and grade to match non-fire-rated
doors in same area of building, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Construction: Manufacturer's standard core construction as
04 required to provide fire-resistance rating indicated.
3 . Blocking: Provide composite blocking designed to maintain fire
resistance of door but with improved screw-holding capability of
same thickness as core and with minimum dimensions as follows:
40
a. 5-inch (125-mm) top rail blocking.
b. 5-inch (125-mm) bottom rail blocking.
0* C. 5-by-18-inch (125-by-450-mm) lock blocks.
d. 5-inch (125-mm) midrail blocking.
4. Edge Construction: Provide additional laminated edge construction
of sufficient width and thickness to accommodate fire-rated door
hardware, and provide total screw holding capability and split-
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211-3
w.
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON,* MA KB AIEM
A. Quality Standards: Comply with the following standards: dW
1. NWWDA Quality Standard: I.S.1 "Industry Standard for Wood Flush
Doors", of National Wood Window and Door Association (NWWDA) . 40
2. AWI Quality Standard: "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards";
including Section 1300 "Architectural Flush Doors", of
Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) for grade of door, core
construction, finish and other requirements exceeding those of ""
NWWDA quality standard.
B. NWWDA Quality Marking: Mark each wood door with NWWDA Wood Flush Door am
Certification Hallmark certifying compliance with applicable
requirements of NWWDA I.S. 1 Series.
C. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Provide wood doors which are identical in as
materials and construction to units tested in door and frame assemblies
per ASTM E 152 and which are labeled and listed for ratings indicated
by UL or Warnock Hersey. AM
1. Oversized, Fire-Rated Wood Doors: For door assemblies exceeding
sizes of tested assemblies, provide manufacturer' s certificate
stating that doors conform to all standard construction no
requirements of tested and labeled fire-door assemblies except for
size.
D. Manufacturer: Obtain doors from a single manufacturer.
1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
A. Protect doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage,
soiling and deterioration. Comply with requirements of referenced
standards and recommendations of NWWDA pamphlet "How to Store, Handle,
Finish, Install, and Maintain Wood Doors", as well as with
manufacturer's instructions.
B. Identify each door with individual opening numbers which correlate with
designation system used on shop drawings for door, frames, and hardware,
using temporary, removable or concealed markings.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS:
A. Conditioning: Do not deliver or install doors until conditions for
temperature and relative humidity have been stabilized and will be w
maintained in storage and installation areas during remainder of
construction period to comply with the following requirements applicable
to project's geographical location:
1. Referenced AWI quality standard including Section 100-5-3 "Moisture
Content" .
1.7 WARRANTY:
A. General: Warranties shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of,
other rights the Owner may have under the Contract Documents. w
B. Door Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit written agreement in door
manufacturer's standard form signed by Manufacturer, Installer and
Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace defective doors that have
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211-2
.%
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON. MA KB #96079
SECTION 08211 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this work. Note also all Addenda.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. Extent and location of each type of flush wood door is indicated on
drawings and in schedules.
B. Types of doors required include the following:
1. Solid core flush wood doors with wood veneer faces.
C. Factory-finishing of flush wood doors is required.
D. Factory-prefitting to frames and factory-premachining for hardware for
wood doors is required.
E. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that
relate to this Section.
1. Section 06402, "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for additional
woodwork other than flush wood doors.
2 . Section 08111, "Standard Steel Doors and Frames" for metal door
Opp frames for flush wood doors.
3 . Section 08710 "Door Hardware", for door hardware.
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Door manufacturers technical data for each type of door,
including details of core and edge construction, trim for openings and
on factory-finishing specifications.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating location and size of
00 each door, elevation of each kind of door, details of construction,
location and extent of hardware blocking, fire ratings, requirements for
factory finishing and other pertinent data.
1. For factory-premachined doors, indicate dimensions and locations
of cutouts for locksets and other cutouts adjacent to light and
louver openings.
C. Samples: Submit samples for the following:
1. Doors for Transparent Finish: Door faces with solid wood edging
representing typical range of color and grain for each species of
veneer and solid lumber required.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211-1
Am
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, a KB #96079
woo
condition.
40
END OF SECTION 08111
ow
am
an
im
a�
�w
sa
STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111-6 .ft
AM
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON. MA KB #96079
secure side of interior doors for glass, louvers, and other panels
in doors.
2. Provide screw applied removable glazing beads on inside of glass,
louvers, and other panels in doors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install standard steel doors, frames, and accessories in
?! accordance with final shop drawings, manufacturer's data, and as herein
specified.
B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of SDI-105 "Recommended Erection
Instructions For Steel Frames, " unless otherwise indicated.
1. Except for frames located at concrete or masonry installations,
place frames prior to construction of enclosing walls and ceilings.
Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced
securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction
is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders leaving
surfaces smooth and undamaged.
2. In masonry construction, locate 3 masonry Tee wall anchors per jamb
adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding
heights on strike jamb.
3 . Install fire-rated frames in accordance with NFPA Standard No. 80 .
4 . In metal stud partitions, install at least 3 wall anchors per jamb
at hinge and strike levels. In closed steel stud partitions,
attach wall anchors to studs with screws.
C. Door Installation: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within
clearances specified in ANSI/SDI-100.
1. Install fire-rated doors with clearances as specified in NFPA
Standard No. 80.
D. Modifying existing frames: Cut and patch existing frames to receive new
hardware.
1. Close all openings in frames made visible by removal of existing
hardware. Grind smooth all welds.
E. Existing Fire Rated Frames: Inspect existing fire-rated frame
construction in openings indicated, submit certification of conformance
and apply listing agency' s field certification label to frame.
3 .2 ADJUST AND CLEAN
ON A. Prime Coat Touch-up: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted
or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch-up of compatible
air-drying primer.
B. Protection Removal: Immediately prior to final inspection, remove
protective plastic wrappings from prefinished doors.
0-0 C. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items, leaving
steel doors and frames undamaged and in complete and proper operating
STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111-5
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON- MA WA #96079
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance and
free from defects, warp or buckle. Wherever practicable, fit and
assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that
cannot be permanently factory- assembled before shipment, to assure
proper assembly at project site. Comply with ANSI/SDI-100 requirements.
1. Internal Construction: Manufacturer' s standard polyurethane, or
rigid mineral fiber core with internal sound deadener on inside of w
face sheets where appropriate in accordance with SDI standards.
2. Clearances: Not more than 1/8 inch at jambs and heads except
between non-fire-rated pairs of doors not more than 1/4 inch. Not
more than 3/4 inch at bottom. 00
B. Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels from only cold-rolled steel.
nw
C. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117 "Manufacturing Tolerances Standard
Steel Doors and Frames. "
D. Fabricate frames, concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels,
louvers and moldings from either cold-rolled or hot-rolled steel.
E. Fabricate exterior doors, panels, and frames from galvanized sheet steel ..
in accordance with SDI-112. Close top and bottom edges of exterior
doors as integral part of door construction.
F. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat
or oval heads for exposed screws and bolts.
G. Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and
concealed hardware in accordance with final Door Hardware Schedule and w
templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable
requirements of ANSI A115 Series Specifications for door and frame
preparation for hardware.
H. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware.
Drilling and tapping for surface-applied hardware may be done at project
site.
I. Locate hardware as indicated on final shop drawings or, if not
indicated, in accordance with "Recommended Locations for Builder' s
Hardware on Standard Steel Doors and Frames, " published by Door and
Hardware Institute.
J. Shop Painting: Clean, treat, and paint exposed surfaces of steel door
and frame units, including galvanized surfaces.
1. Clean steel surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt, and
other foreign materials before application of paint.
2. Apply shop coat of prime paint of even consistency to provide a
uniformly finished surface ready to receive finish paint.
3 . Apply finish coat to doors indicated to be prefinished by spraying '
and baking, to produce a paint thickness of 1.25 mils.
K. Glazing Stops: Minimum 20 gage steel. aw
1. Provide non-removable stops on outside of exterior doors and on
STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111-4 Wk
40
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON. MA
KB #g6n7o
A. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets and Strip: Commercial quality carbon steel,
pickled and oiled, complying with ASTM A 569 and ASTM A 568.
B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: Commercial quality carbon steel, complying
with ASTM A 366 and ASTM A 568.
C. Galvanized Steel Sheets: Zinc-coated carbon steel sheets of commercial
quality, complying with ASTM A 526, or drawing quality, ASTM A 642, hot
dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 525, with G60 coating
designation, mill phosphatized.
D. Supports and Anchors: Fabricate of not less than 18-gage sheet steel;
galvanized where used with galvanized frames.
E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where
items are to be built into exterior walls, hot-dip galvanize in
compliance with ASTM A 153, Class C.
so
F. Shop Applied Paint: Apply after fabrication.
1. Primer: Rust-inhibitive enamel or paint, either air-drying or
baking, suitable as a base for specified finish paints complying
with ANSI A224.1, "Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime
Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames. "
2 .3 DOORS
A. Provide metal doors of types and styles indicated on drawings or
schedules.
B. Provide metal doors of SDI grades and models specified below or as
indicated on drawings or schedules:
1. Interior Doors: ANSI/SDI-100, Grade II, heavy-duty, 1-3/4" thick,
Model 4, rigid urethane 18-gage cold-rolled sheet steel faces, with
core bonded to all interior surfaces.
2 . Exterior Doors: ANSI/SDI-100, Grade III, extra heavy-duty 1-3/4"
thick, Model 4, 16-gage galvanized steel faces, with polyurethane
ON foam core bonded to all interior surfaces.
C. Door Louvers: Provide louvers according to SDI 111C for interior doors
where indicated, with blades or baffles formed of 0.0239-inch thick
cold-rolled steel sheet set into minimum 0.0359-inch thick steel frame.
2.4 FRAMES
A. Provide metal frames for doors, sidelights, borrowed lights, and other
openings, of types and styles as shown on drawings and schedules.
Conceal fastenings, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate frames of
16-gage cold-rolled steel.
1. Fabricate frames with mitered, welded corners.
2 . Form exterior frames from 14-gage galvanized steel.
B. Door Silencers: Except on weatherstripped frames, drill stops to
receive 3 silencers on strike jambs of single-door frames and 2
silencers on heads of double-door frames.
STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111-3
NORTHAMPTON RIGS SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
xE #26079
and accessory items.
1. Provide schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers .�
for details and openings as those on contract drawings.
2. Indicate coordination of glazing frames and stops with glass and
glazing requirements.
D. Label Construction Certification: For door assemblies required to be
fire-rated and exceeding limitations of labeled assemblies, submit
manufacturer's certification that each door and frame assembly has been +.A
constructed to conform to design, materials and construction equivalent
to requirements for labeled construction.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide doors and frames complying with Steel Door Institute
"Recommended Specifications Standard Steel Doors and Frames"
ANSI/SDI-100 and as herein specified.
B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Units that comply with NFPA 80, are
identical to door and frame assemblies whose fire resistance �®
characteristics have been determined per ASTM E 152 and which are
labeled and listed by UL, Factory Mutual, or Warnock Hersey.
�s
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver doors and frames cardboard-wrapped or crated to provide
protection during transit and job storage. Provide additional
protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished doors and
frames.
B. Inspect doors and frames upon delivery for damage. Minor damages may ..�
be repaired provided refinished items are equal in all respects to new
work and acceptable to Architect; otherwise, remove and replace damaged
items as directed. ••
C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on
minimum 4-inches high wood blocking. Avoid use of non-vented plastic
or canvas shelters which could create humidity chamber. If cardboard
wrapper on door becomes wet, remove carton immediately. Provide
1/4-inches spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 .1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide standard
steel doors and frames by one of the following:
1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames:
a. Amweld Building Products, Inc.
b. Ceco Corp.
C. Republic Builders Products.
d. Steelcraft Manufacturing Co.
w�
2.2 MATERIALS
STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
08111-2 �
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTRAMP SECTION 08111 - STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this work. Note also all Addenda.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following products manufactured in accordance
with SDI Recommended Standards:
1. Doors: Seamless, composite construction standard steel doors for
interior and exterior locations.
2 . Frames: Pressed steel frames for doors, sidelights, interior
glazed panels, and other interior and exterior openings of
following types:
a. Welded unit type.
on b. Drywall Slip-On type.
3 . Assemblies: Provide standard steel door and frame assemblies as
required for the following:
a. Labeled and fire rated.
b. Thermal rated (insulated) .
C. Sound rated (acoustical) .
4. Provide factory primed doors and frames to be field painted.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that
relate to this Section:
1. Section 04200 "Unit Masonry" for building in of anchors and
grouting of frames in masonry construction.
2. Section 08211 "Flush Wood Doors" for wood doors.
3 . Section 08710 "Door Hardware" for door hardware.
4. Section 08800 "Glazing" for glass and glazing.
5. Section 09900 `Painting" for painting primed doors and frames.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract
and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of door and frame specified, including
details of construction, materials, dimensions, hardware preparation,
core, label compliance, sound ratings, profiles, and finishes.
C. Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of standard steel
doors and frames. Include details of each frame type, elevations of
door design types, conditions at openings, details of construction,
location and installation requirements of door and frame hardware and
reinforcements, and details of joints and connections. Show anchorage
oft STANDARD STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08111-1
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #9607
6. All exposed joints between steel columns and masonry, drywall or
other dissimilar materials: Urethane Sealant.
7. All control joints in concrete slabs, finish flooring, etc. :
Multi-Part, Self Levelling, Urethane Sealant.
8. All exposed joints between masonry: Urethane Sealant.
END OF SECTION 07901
on
ON
ON
Or
a!
JOINT SEALANTS 07901-9
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA rR A 9 6 0 7 9
3 .4 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work
progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by *0
manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.
3 .5 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with
contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction
operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or ,e
damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection,
damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or
deteriorated joint sealants immediately so that and installations with
repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. �"
3.6 GUARANTEE AND CERTIFICATION
eaw
A. This Contractor shall and hereby does guarantee that all sealant work
will be free from defects of materials and workmanship for a period of
five (5) years. The following types of failure will be adjusted:
1. Leakage, cracking, crumbling, melting, shrinking or running of
caulking, or staining of adjacent work by caulking.
B. This Contractor shall repair and replace work which becomes defective
during guarantee term without cost to the Owner.
C. This Contractor shall furnish a certificate to the Owner from the
sealant manufacturer(s) stating that the materials furnished to the job
site and installed are as specified and approved by the Architect.
rre
3 .7 SCHEDULE
A. Exterior Joints (including interior face of exterior wall) :
.w
1. Joints between precast units: Multi-Part, Non-Sag Urethane
Sealant
2 . Masonry to precast concrete joints: Multi-Part, Non-Sag .�
Urethane Sealant
3 . Masonry to door frames: Multi-Part, Non-Sag Urethane Sealant
4 . Masonry to window frames: Multi-Part; Non-Sag Urethane Sealant
5. All expansion and control joints: Multi-Part, Non-Sag Urethane
Sealant
6. Steel frame and louver perimeters: Multi-Part, Non-Sag Urethane
Sealant
7. All exposed joints between dissimilar materials: Multi-Part, `
Non-Sag Urethane Sealant joints between masonry and structural
steel when exposed to view: Multi-Part, Non-Sag Urethane
Sealant. oft
B. Interior Joints
1. Masonry to door frames: Acrylic-Emulsion Sealant so
2 . Masonry to drywall: Acrylic-Emulsion Sealant
3 . All expansion and control joints: Acrylic-Emulsion Sealant
4. Steel frame and louver perimeters: Acrylic-Emulsion Sealant no
5. Plumbing fixtures: Acrylic-emulsion Mildew-Resistant Sealant
JOINT SEALANTS 07901-8
44
so
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA
# 6079
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where
recommended by joint sealant manufacturer based on preconstruction joint
sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply
with joint sealant manufacturer's recommendations. Confine primers to
areas of joint sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto
adjoining surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of
sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently
00, stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to
remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without
disturbing joint seal.
3 .3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's printed installation
aft instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except
where more stringent requirements apply.
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of
ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials,
applications, and conditions indicated.
Mr C. Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to comply
with the following requirements:
1. Install joint fillers of type indicated to provide support of
sealants during application and at position required to produce the
cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative
to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
on
a. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint fillers.
b. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint fillers.
C. Remove absorbent joint fillers that have become wet prior to
ON sealant application and replace with dry material.
2. Install bond breaker tape between sealants where backer rods are
d, not used between sealants and joint fillers or back of joints.
D. Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques that
result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint
ON substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint
configuration, and providing uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths
relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
ON Install sealants at the same time sealant backings are installed.
E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and
prior to time skinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth,
OR uniform beads of configuration indicated, to eliminate air pockets, and
to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove
excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling
agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved
by sealant manufacturer.
1. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193,
unless otherwise indicated.
JOINT SEALANTS 07901-7
...
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTQK MA RB_#96079
C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as
recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering
to rigid, inflexible joint filler materials or joint surfaces at back .w
of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide
self-adhesive tape where applicable.
04
2 .5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where
required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as .m
determined from preconstruction joint sealant-substrate tests and field
tests.
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to so
manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily
residues or other substances capable of staining or harming in any way
joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces, and formulated to AN
promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates.
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint XWO
sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
a
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer
present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, am
installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint sealant
performance. Notify Owner' s Representative and do not proceed with
installation of joint sealants until unsatisfactory conditions have been ,o
corrected.
3 .2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before
installing joint sealants to comply with recommendations of joint
sealant manufacturer and the following requirements: am
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could
interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints
(except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for *0
sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer) , old
joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents,
water, surface dirt, and frost. ok
2 . Clean concrete, masonry, unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile, and
similar porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding,
blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these
methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing as
optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining
from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints
with oil-free compressed air.
3 . Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete.
4. Clean metal, glass, porcelain enamel, glazed surfaces of ceramic
tile, and other nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other
means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable .�
of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.
JOINT SEALANTS 07901-6
as
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
KB # 6079
Class, and Uses.
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
1. Multi-Part, Non Sag Urethane Sealants:
a. "Dynatrol II", Pecora Corp.
b. "Sonolastic NP211, Sonneborn Building Products Division
C. "Dymeric Plus", Tremco.
2. Multi-Part, Self Leveling Urethane Sealant:
a. "Sikaflex - 20 SL", Sika Corp. , Use T.
b. ''Sonolastic SL211, Sonneborn Building Products Division, Use T.
2.3 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard one-part, nonsag,
mildew-resistant, paintable latex sealant of formulation indicated that
is recommended for exposed applications on interior and protected
exterior locations and that accommodates indicated percentage change in
joint width existing at time of installation without failing either
adhesively or cohesively.
B. Acrylic-Emulsion Sealant: Provide product complying with ASTM C 834
that accommodates joint movement of not more than 5 percent in both
extension and compression for a total of 10 percent.
C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,q provide one of the
following:
1. Acrylic-Emulsion Sealant:
a. "AC-20, " Pecora Corp.
b. "Sonolac, " Sonneborn Building Products Div. , ChemRex, Inc.
C. "Tremco Acrylic Latex 834, " Tremco, Inc.
2 .4 JOINT SEALANT BACKING
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are
nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers and
other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by
sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B. Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible, resilient,
nonstaining, nonwaxing, nonextruding strips of flexible plastic foam of
material indicated below and of size, shape, and density to control
sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant
performance:
ON
1. Open-cell polyurethane foam.
2. Closed-cell polyethylene foam, nonabsorbent to liquid water and
gas, nonoutgassing in unruptured state.
3 . Proprietary, reticulated, closed-cell of
p ymeric foam,
nonoutgassing, with a density of 2 .5 pcf and tensile strength of
35 psi per ASTM D 1623, and with water absorption less than
0. 02 gms/cc per ASTM C 1083 .
4 . Any material indicated above.
JOINT SEALANTS 07901-5
MW
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
KB #96079
NORTHAMPTON, MA
woo
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or
bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and .w►
designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time,
and mixing instructions for multi component materials.
B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's
recommendations to prevent their deterioration or damage due to
moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Notify Owner' s Representative and do not .A.
proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following
conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the w■
limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer.
2. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the
limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F
(4.4 deg C) .
3 . When joint substrates are wet.
B. Joint Width Conditions: Notify Owner' s Representative and do not ,
proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are less
than allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for application indicated.
C. Joint Substrate Conditions: Notify Owner's Representative and do not
proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable
of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates.
r�
1.9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Sequence installation of joint sealants to occur not less than 21 nor we
more than 30 days after completion of waterproofing, unless otherwise
indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 .1 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related •�+
materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates
under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant
manufacturer based on testing and field experience. ,
B. Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealants to comply with the
following:
1. Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range
of colors for products of types indicated.
w
2.2 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard
chemically curing elastomeric sealants that comply with those
requirements referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for Type, Grade,
07901-4
JOINT SEALANTS
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
#96079
1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
t-0 A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that have been produced and installed
to establish and to maintain watertight and airtight continuous seals
without causing staining or deterioration of joint substrates.
B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that have been produced
and installed to establish and maintain airtight continuous seals that
are water resistant and cause no staining or deterioration of joint
substrates.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract
and Division 1 Specification Sections.
Rot B. Product data from manufacturers for each joint sealant product required.
1. Certification by joint sealant manufacturer that sealants plus the
*a primers and cleaners required for sealant installation comply with
State of Massachusetts regulations controlling use of volatile
organic compounds.
C. Certificates from manufacturers of joint sealants attesting that their
products comply with specification requirements and are suitable for the
use indicated.
D. Compatibility and adhesion test reports from elastomeric sealant
manufacturer indicating that materials forming joint substrates and
joint sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion
with joint sealants. Include sealant manufacturer's interpretation of
test results relative to sealant performance and recommendations for
primers and substrate preparation needed to obtain adhesion.
ON E. Product test reports for each type of
yp joint sealants indicated,
evidencing compliance with requirements specified.
No 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has
completed joint sealant applications similar in material, design, and
00 extent to that indicated for Project that have resulted in construction
with a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Single Source Responsibility for Joint Sealant Materials: Obtain joint
sealant materials from a single manufacturer for each different product
required.
C. Field-Constructed Mock-Ups: Prior to installation of joint sealants,
apply elastomeric sealants as follows to verify selections made under
sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as
qualities of materials and execution:
1. Locate joints as directed by the Architect.
2 . Conduct mock-ups for each type of elastomeric sealant and joint
substrate indicated.
JOINT SEALANTS 07901-3
..
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following locations: 00
1. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and nontraffic horizontal
surfaces as indicated below: AO
a. Control and expansion joints in cast-in-place concrete.
b. Joints between architectural precast concrete units.
C. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry.
d. Joints between different materials listed above.
e. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of
doors, windows and louvers.
f. Control and expansion joints in soffits and overhead surfaces.
g. Other joints as indicated.
2. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic
surfaces as indicated below:
a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of R,
exterior walls.
b. Control and expansion joints in ceilings and overhead
surfaces.
C. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated.
d. Joints between tops of non-fire-resistance-rated
non-load-bearing unit masonry walls and underside of floor or
roof deck.
e. vertical control joints on exposed surfaces of interior unit
masonry and concrete walls and partitions.
f. Perimeter joints of toilet fixtures.
g. Penetrations in smoke proof partitions due to flute decks, *M
pipes, conduits, ducts, wiring, etc.
h. All exposed joints between steel columns, masonry, drywall, or
other dissimilar materials.
.w,
3 . Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces as indicated below:
a. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring. .�►
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that
relate to this Section:
1. Section 07242 "Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems - Class PM"
for sealing expansion and control joints in this system.
2. Section 07533 "Single-Ply CSPE Membrane Roofing, Flashing and w
Sheetmetal" for sealing joints related to flashing and sheet metal
for roofing.
3 . Section 07841 "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for fire-
resistance-rated joint sealants.
4. Section 08410 for caulking perimeter of aluminum entrances and
storefront.
5. Section 08525 "Aluminum Architectural Windows" for structural and we
other glazing sealants and caulking window perimeters.
6. Section 08800 "Glazing" for sealants used in glazing.
7. Section 08920 for caulking perimeter of glazed aluminum curtain
walls.
8. Section 09255 "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for sealing concealed
perimeter joints of gypsum board partitions to reduce sound
transmission.
.w
9. Section 09300 "Tile" for sealing tile joints.
JOINT SEALANTS 07901-2
40
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
#96079
SECTION 07901 - JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 TIME, MANNER AND REQUIREMENTS FOR FILING SUB-BIDS
A. Sub-Bids shall be submitted in accordance with the provisions of General
Laws, Chapter 149, Section 44A to 44I, inclusive, as amended.
B. Sub-Bids for work under this Section shall be received at the Council
Chambers at Town Hall, 210 Main Street, Northampton, MA 01060, until
2:00 p.m. local time on February 9, 1999, at which time all filed Sub-
Bids shall be opened, read aloud, and duly recorded.
C. Sub-Bids shall be submitted on forms identical to those contained in
Bidding Requirements: Bid Form for Sub-Bidder. The Bid Forms attached
hereto are for information only and shall not be detached, filled in,
or executed. All Sub-Bids shall be submitted on the FORM FOR SUB-BID
furnished by the Awarding Authority as required by Section 44G of
Chapter 149 of the General Laws, as amended. Sub-Bids Forms shall be
completely filled in and all Sub-Bids which are incomplete, conditional,
obscure, or which contain any additions not called for will be rejected.
D. Sub-Bids filed with the Awarding Authority shall be accompanied by a Bid
Deposit in the form of a certified check or a treasurer's or cashier's
check issued by a responsible bank or trust company, payable to the City
of Northampton. A bid bond shall be:
1. On a form satisfactory to the Awarding Authority.
2 . With a surety company qualified to do business in the Commonwealth
and satisfactory to the Awarding Authority.
3 . Conditioned upon the faithful performance by the principal of the
agreements contained in the Bid. The amount of such bid deposit
shall be five percent (5%) of the value of the Bid.
E. Sub-Bids for work under this Section shall be for the complete work
required as specified and as shown on the drawings.
F. Sub-Bidders are directed to the Instructions to Bidders, and to the
requirements that all bidders visit the site to determine the scope of
work required under this Section.
G. Sub-Bidders must comply with all provisions of Division 1, General
Requirements, in the same manner as the General Contractor.
H. Work to be done under this Filed Sub-Bid is included in the Contract
Documents as listed in LOD-1 through LOD-5 (List of Drawings) .
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this work. Note also all Addenda.
1.3 SUMMARY
JOINT SEALANTS 07901-1
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
remove damaged or deteriorated through-penetration firestop systems
immediately and install new materials to produce through-penetration
firestop systems complying with specified requirements.
,f.
END OF SECTION 07841
+etA
WX
AM
go
ww
me
0%
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841-10
Ap
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
3 . For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work,
finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with
adjoining finishes.
3 .4 INSTALLING FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with the "System Performance Requirements" article in
Part 1, with ASTM C 1193, and with the sealant manufacturer's
installation instructions and drawings pertaining to products and
applications indicated.
B. Install joint fillers to provide support of sealants during application
and at position required to produce the cross-sectional shapes and
depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum
sealant movement capability and develop fire-resistance rating required.
C. Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly
contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling
recesses provided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform,
cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint width that optimum
sealant movement capability. Install sealants at the same time joint
fillers are installed.
D. Tool nonsag sealants immediately after sealant application and prior to
the time skinning or curing begins. Form smooth, uniform beads of
configuration indicated or required to produce fire-resistance rating,
as well as to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion
of sealants with sides of joint. Remove excess sealant from surfaces
adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or
adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer.
3 .5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. The Owner's Representative will examine completed through-penetration
firestop systems to determine, in general, if it is being installed in
compliance with requirements.
B. The Owner's Representative will report observations promptly and in
PR writing to Contractor and Architect.
C. Do not proceed to enclose through-penetration firestop systems with
other construction until installations are approved.
D. Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace through-penetration
firestop systems so that it complies with requirements.
3 .6 CLEANING
A. Clean off excess fill materials and sealants adjacent to openings and
joints as work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials
approved by manufacturers of through-penetration firestop systems
products and of products in which opening and joints occur.
B. Protect through-penetration firestop systems during and after curing
period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage
resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are
without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If,
despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841-9
an
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
KB #96079
compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating
items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of
through-penetration firestop systems.
B. Notify Owner's Representative and do not proceed with installation until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3 .2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings and joints immediately prior to
installing through-penetration firestop systems to comply with
recommendations of through-penetration firestop system manufacturer and
the following requirements:
1. Remove all foreign materials from surfaces of opening and joint
substrates and from penetrating items that could interfere with
adhesion of through-penetration firestop systems .
2 . Clean opening and joint substrates and penetrating items to produce a,
clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with
through-penetration firestop systems Remove loose particles
remaining from cleaning operation. .ft
3 . Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete.
B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended by through-penetration
firestop system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended W
products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow
spillage and migration on to exposed surfaces.
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent through-penetration firestop
�wr
systems from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed upon
completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or
damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears w�a
from through-penetration firestop systems materials. Remove tape as
soon as it is possible to do so without disturbing through-penetration
firestop systems' s seal with substrates. aft
3 .3 INSTALLING THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
A. General: Comply with the "System Performance Requirements" article in .w
Part 1 and the through-penetration through-penetration firestop system
manufacturer's installation instructions and drawings pertaining to
products and applications indicated.
.rw
B. Install forming/damming materials and other accessories of types
required to support fill materials during their application and in the
position needed to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths
required to achieve fire ratings of designated through-penetration
firestop systems. After installing fill materials, remove combustible
forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent
components of firestop systems.
C. Install fill materials for through-penetration firestop systems by
proven techniques to produce the following results: .rs
1. Completely fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming
materials, accessories, and penetrating items.
2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by „o
openings and penetrating items.
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841-8
so
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA ICB #96079
ON
neutral-curing elastomeric sealant of grade indicated below:
1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors
? and other horizontal surfaces and nonsag spray formulation for
openings in vertical and other surfaces requiring a nonslumping/
spray able sealant, unless indicated firestop system limits use to
nonsag gunnable grade for both opening conditions.
2 .4 FIRE-RESISTIVE ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS
! A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard
chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of base polymer indicated that
complies with ASTM C 920 requirements, including those referenced for
Type, Grade, Class, and Uses, and requirements specified in this Section
applicable to fire-resistive joint sealants.
B. Sealant Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealants to comply with
the following:
1. Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range
of standard colors for products of type indicated.
C. Single-Component, Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant: Type S; Grade NS;
Class 25; exposure-related Use NT, and joint-substrate-related Uses M,
{ G, A, and (as applicable to joint substrates indicated) 0.
1. Additional Movement Capability: Provide sealant with the
capability to withstand the following percentage changes in joint
width existing at time of installation, when tested for adhesion
and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, and
remain in compliance with other requirements of ASTM C 920 for uses
indicated:
a. 50 percent movement in both extension and compression for a
total of 100 percent movement.
D. Multicomponent, Nonsag, Urethane Sealant: Type M; Grade NS; Class 25;
exposure-related Use NT, and joint-substrate-related Uses M, A, and (as
applicable to joint substrates indicated) 0.
1. 50 percent movement in both extension and compression for a total
of 100 percent movement.
2 .5 MIXING
A. For those products requiring mixing prior to application, comply with
through-penetration firestop systems manufacturer's directions for
accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required) , type of mixing
equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time,
and other procedures needed to produce through-penetration firestop
systems products of uniform quality with optimum performance
characteristics for application indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841-7
so
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
MA RB #96079
00
"System Performance Requirements" article in Part 1. Use only
components specified by the through-penetration firestop systems
manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency
for the designated fire-resistance-rated systems. Accessories include Ak
but are not limited to the following items:
1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials including the „M
following:
a. Ceramic fiber.
b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming k
materials to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid
state.
C. Fire-rated form board. No
d. Fillers for joint sealants.
2 . Temporary forming materials. go
3 . Substrate primers.
4 . Collars.
5. Steel sleeves.
ww
C. Applications: Provide through-penetration firestop systems systems
composed of materials specified in this Section that comply with system
performance and other requirements.
2 .3 FILL MATERIALS
A. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in
cast-in-place concrete floors and consisting of an outer metallic sleeve
lined with an intumescent strip, a radial extended flange attached to
one end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a neoprene
gasket.
B. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that after cure do
not re-emulsify during exposure to moisture.
C. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized
steel and lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter
of penetrant.
D. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties
containing no solvents, inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds.
E. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric
sheets with aluminum foil on one side.
F. Ceramic-Fiber Forming/Backing/Damming Material: Formulation of
continuous filament ceramic fibers and inorganic binders.
G. Pillows/Bags: Re-usable, heat-expanding pillows/bags composed of glass-
fiber cloth cases filled with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-
insoluble expansion agents and fire-retardant additives.
H. Silicone Foam: Two-component, silicone-based liquid elastomer that,
,r
when mixed, expands and cures in place to produce a flexible,
nonshrinking foam.
ws
I. Silicone Sealant: Moisture-curing, single-component, silicone-based,
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841-6
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #9607
and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project;
curing time; and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.
B. Store and handle through-penetration firestop systems to prevent their
deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes,
contaminants, or other causes.
ON 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Do not install through-penetration firestop
air systems when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits
permitted by through-penetration firestop system manufacturers or when
substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
PW B. Ventilation: Ventilate through-penetration firestop systems per
manufacturers' instructions by natural means or, where this is
inadequate, forced air circulation.
1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that
through-penetration firestop systems are installed according to
specified requirements.
B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut
openings to accommodate through-penetration firestop systems.
C. Do not cover up those through-penetration firestop systems installations
that will become concealed behind other construction until the Owner' s
Representative and authorities having jurisdiction, if required, have
examined each installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 .1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products by one of the following:
1. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc.
2 . Firestop Systems Inc.
3 . Hilti Construction Chemicals, Inc.
4. Isolatek International.
5. Specified Technologies Inc.
6. 3M Fire Protection Products
7 . United States Gypsum Company.
2 .2 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS, GENERAL
A. Compatibility: Provide through-penetration firestop systems composed
of components that are compatible with each other, the substrates
forming openings, and the items, if any, penetrating the through-
penetration firestop systems under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by through-penetration firestop systems
manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
B. Accessories: Provide components for each through-penetration firestop
system that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841-5
am
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTQN, MA KB #96079
requirements:
a. Fire-Resistance Ratings of Joint Sealants: As indicated by
reference to design designations listed by UL in their "Fire
Resistance Directory" or by another qualified testing and
inspecting agency.
b. Joint sealants, including backing materials, bear
classification marking of qualified testing and inspection "a
agency.
B. Information on drawings referring to specific design designations of
through-penetration firestop systems is intended to establish
requirements for performance based on conditions that are expected to
exist during installation. Any changes in conditions and designated
systems require the Architect' s prior approval. Submit documentation "' '
showing that the performance of proposed substitutions equals or exceeds
that of the systems they would replace and are acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction. ON
C. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is qualified by
having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install
manufacturer's products per specified requirements. A manufacturer' s so
willingness to sell its through-penetration firestop system products to
Contractor or to an installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself
confer qualification on buyer. so
D. Source Limitations: Obtain through-penetration firestop systems for
each kind of penetration and construction condition indicated from a
single manufacturer.
E. Provide through-penetration firestop systems products containing no
detectable asbestos as determined by the method specified in 40 CFR Part
.�w
763, Subpart F, Appendix A, Section 1, "Polarized Light Microscopy. "
F. Coordinating Work: Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating
items to ensure that designated through-penetration firestop systems are if*
installed per specified requirements.
G. Field-Constructed Mockup: Prior to installing through-penetration
firestop systems, erect mockups for each different through-penetration
firestop system indicated to verify selections made and to demonstrate
qualities of materials and execution. Build mockups to comply with the
following requirements, using materials indicated for final
installations.
1. Locate mockups on site in locations indicated or, if not indicated,
as directed by Architect.
2 . Obtain Architect's acceptance of mockups before start of final unit
of Work.
3. Accepted mockups in an undisturbed condition at time of Substantial w�
Completion may become part of completed unit of Work.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver through-penetration firestop system products to Project site in
original, unopened containers or packages with intact and legible
manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer; date of
manufacture; lot number; shelf life, if applicable; qualified testing
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841-4
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
firestop system, and each kind of construction condition penetrated and
kind of penetrating item. Include firestop design designation of
qualified testing and inspecting agency evidencing compliance with
requirements for each condition indicated.
1. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified
testing and inspecting agency that is applicable to each
through-penetration firestop configuration for construction and
penetrating items.
2 . Where Project conditions require modification of qualified testing
and inspecting agency's illustration to suit a particular
through-penetration firestop condition, submit illustration, with
modifications marked, approved by through-penetration firestop
system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer.
D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of through-penetration
firestop system products certifying that their products comply with
wa specified requirements.
E. Product test reports from, and based on tests performed by, a qualified
la testing and inspecting agency evidencing compliance of through-
penetration firestop system with requirements based on comprehensive
testing of current products.
F. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality
Assurance" article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience.
Include list of completed projects with project names, addresses, names
of Architects and Owners, and other information specified.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
�w A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide through-penetration
firestop systems that complies with the following requirements and those
specified under the "System Performance Requirements" article:
Air 1. Through-penetration firestop systems tests are performed by a
qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified testing and
inspecting agency is UL or Warnock Hersey.
2 . Through-penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested
per ASTM E 814 under conditions where positive furnace pressure
differential of at least 0.01 inch of water is maintained at a
distance of 0.78 inch below the fill materials surrounding the
I penetrating items in the test assembly. Provide rated systems
complying with the following requirements:
a. Through-penetration firestop system products bear
classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting
agency.
b. Through-penetration firestop systems correspond to those
indicated by reference to through-penetration firestop system
designations listed by UL in their "Fire Resistance
Directory, " or by Warnock Hersey.
3 . Fire-resistive joint sealant systems are identical to those tested
for fire-response characteristics per ASTM E 119 under conditions
where the positive furnace pressure differential is at least 0.01
inch of water, as measured 0.78 inch from the face exposed to
furnace fire. Provide systems complying with the following
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841-3
46
...
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
ever►
through-penetration firestop systems with F-ratings indicated, as
determined per ASTM E 814, but not less than that equaling or exceeding
the fire-resistance rating of the constructions penetrated.
C. T-Rated Systems: For the following conditions, provide
through-penetration firestop systems with T ratings, in addition to F
ratings, as determined per ASTM E 814, where indicated and where systems w�
protect penetrating items exposed to potential contact with adjacent
materials in occupiable floor areas.
1. Where firestop systems protect penetrations located outside of wall
cavities.
2 . Where firestop systems protect penetrations located outside
fire-resistive shaft enclosures.
3 . Where firestop systems protect penetrations located in construction
containing fire-protection-rated openings.
4. Where firestop systems protect penetrating items larger than a
4-inch-diameter nominal pipe or 16 sq. in. in overall
cross-sectional area.
D. Fire-Resistive Joint Sealants: Provide joint sealants with
fire-resistance ratings indicated, as determined per ASTM E 119, but not
less than that equaling or exceeding the fire-resistance rating of the
construction in which the joint occurs.
E. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, traffic,
moisture, and physical damage, provide products that do not deteriorate
when exposed to these conditions.
1. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler
systems, provide moisture-resistant through-penetration firestop
systems. ■o
2 . For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches (100
mm) in width and exposed to possible loading and traffic, provide
firestop systems capable of supporting floor loads involved either
by installing floor plates or by other means.
3 . For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide
through-penetration firestop systems not requiring removal of
insulation.
F. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide
products with flame-spread values of less than 25 and smoke-developed
values of less than 450, as determined per ASTM E 84. '
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of product specified.
1. Certification by through-penetration firestop systems manufacturer
that products supplied comply with Commonwealth of Massachusetts
regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs)
and are nontoxic to building occupants.
C. Shop drawings detailing materials, installation methods, and so
relationships to adjoining construction for each through-penetration
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841-2
00
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
SECTION 07841 - THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this work. Note also all Addenda.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes through-penetration firestop systems for
penetrations through the following fire-resistance-rated assemblies,
including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items:
_ 1. Floors.
2 . Walls and partitions.
3 . Smoke barriers.
4 . Construction enclosing compartmentalized areas.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that
relate to this Section:
1. Section 03300, "Cast-In-Place Concrete" for construction of
openings in concrete slabs.
2 . Section 04200, "Unit Masonry" for joint fillers for
non-fire-resistive-rated masonry construction.
3 . Section 07210, "Building Insulation" for safing insulation and non-
4W fire-resistive-rated insulation and accessories.
4 . Section 07901, "Joint Sealants" for non-fire-resistive-rated joint
sealants.
5. Division 15 Sections specifying ducts and piping penetrations.
'! 6. Division 16 Sections specifying cable and conduit penetrations.
1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide through-penetration firestop systems systems that are
produced and installed to resist the spread of fire, according to
requirements indicated, and the passage of smoke and other gases, and
maintain original fire-resistance rating of assembly penetrated.
1. Joints along the top of fire-resistance-rated wall construction and
the underside of roof or floor deck above.
2. Penetrations through fire-resistance-rated floor and roof
construction including both empty openings and openings containing
cables, pipes, ducts, conduits, and other penetrating items.
M1 3 . Penetrations through fire-resistance-rated walls and partitions
including both empty openings and openings containing cables,
pipes, ducts, conduits, and other penetrating items.
4. Penetrations through smoke barriers and construction enclosing
compartmentalized areas involving both empty openings, openings
containing penetrating items, and openings due to flute decks.
S. Sealant joints in fire-resistance-rated construction.
B. F-Rated Through-Penetration Firestop Systems: Provide
THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS 07841-1
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #960-7-2
3 .1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions under which board fire protection is
to perform. Do not proceed with installation of board fire protection
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3 .2 PREPARATION
A. Where welded-stud anchorage system is used, remove rust and scale from
steel substrates at locations to receive steel studs.
3.3 INSTALLATION
' A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for particular conditions
of installation in each case.
B. Install board fire protection to comply with requirements for
thicknesses, number of courses (layers) , construction of joints and
corners, and anchorage methods applicable to fire-resistance-rated
assemblies indicated.
!fir
C. Finish exposed calcium silicate board to comply with written instructions
of calcium silicate board manufacturer, and as follows:
1. At joints in calcium silicate board, embed tape in joint compound
and apply first, fill, and finish coats over joint compounds,
fastener heads, and accessories.
2 . Apply a thin, uniform, skim coat of joint compound over entire
surface.
3 . Touch up and sand between coats and after last coat as needed to
produce a surface free of visual defects, tool marks, and ridges;
NO ready for decoration.
3 .4 PROTECTION
A. Coordinate installation of board fire protection with other construction
to minimize cutting into, or removal of, installed fire-resistive
materials. As other construction is successively completed, replace or
repair board fire protection that has been cut away to facilitate this
other construction. Maintain complete coverage of full thickness on
members and substrates protected by board fire protection.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable
to Installer, manufacturer, and authorities having jurisdiction that
ensures board fire protection is without damage or deterioration at the
time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 07821
BOARD FIRE PROTECTION 07821 - 3
W
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA XE #9 6 0 7 9
Wo
A. Coordinate installation of board fire protection with other construction
specified in other Sections to comply with the following:
Aft
1. Avoid unnecessary exposure of board fire protection to abrasion and
other damage likely to occur during construction operations
subsequent to its application. am
2 . Do not install board fire protection on structural members until
piping and other construction behind fire-resistive materials have
been completed, uninterrupted coverage of fire-resistive materials so
can be provided, and the need for subsequent cutting and patching of
fire-resistive materials has been eliminated.
3 . Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after
board fire protection has been applied and inspected by authorities 00
having jurisdiction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 .1 CALCIUM SILICATE BOARD FIRE-PROTECTION MATERIALS ,
A. Calcium Silicate Board: Rigid board containing no asbestos and
consisting primarily of lime, silica, inert fillers, and cellulosic A*
reinforcing fibers; with flame-spread and smoke-developed ratings of 0;
passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics; and as follows:
1. Xonotlite and Tobomorite Form: Sanded finish on one side, and as
follows:
a. Nominal Density and Thermal Resistivity: 54.31 lb/cu. ft and
0.88 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F.
2 . Sheet Sizes: 48 by 96 inches by thickness required to produce
fire-resistance rating indicated.
B. Anchorage Accessories: For each fire-resistive assembly in which calcium
silicate board serves as fire protection, provide manufacturer's standard
board-anchorage components complying with related design of UL or another
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
C. Joint Treatment and Finishing Materials: For exposed applications,
provide joint treatment tape and joint compounds recommended in writing
by calcium silicate board manufacturer for finishing surfaces of calcium
silicate board. ►
D. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the
following:
1. Xonotlite and Tobomorite Form of Calcium Silicate Board:
a. Promat H; Promat, Division of Eternit Inc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
BOARD FIRE PROTECTION 07821 - 2
m
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
SECTION 07821 - BOARD FIRE PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this work. Note also all Addenda.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Calcium silicate board fire-protection materials.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 07841 "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems. "
2 . Section 07251 "Sprayed-on Fireproofing. "
3 . Section 09255 "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for metal stud framing
system.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product specified.
B. Product Test Reports: Indicate compliance of board fire protection based
on comprehensive testing of current products.
C. Research/Evaluation Reports: Evidence of board fire protection
compliance with the Massachusetts State Building Code, Sixth Edition.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of board fire protection and
accessory from one manufacturer.
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide board fire protection
complying with the following:
1. Fire-resistance-rated assemblies that include board fire protection
are identical in materials and construction to those tested for fire
resistance per ASTM E 119, for surface-burning characteristics per
ASTM E 84, and for combustion characteristics per ASTM E 136.
1.5 COORDINATION
BOARD FIRE PROTECTION 07821 - 1
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
MA KB #96079
,ser
D. Welding: Where field welding is required or permissible in concealed
locations use only Gas Tungsten Arc Welding (TIG) or Gas Metal Arc
Welding (MIG) process. Take care to protect exposed finishes.
E. Coordinate installation and connections of seals, insulation and
flashings at perimeter of assemblies to maintain continuity of thermal
and water barriers.
F. Glazing: Inspect glazing material and framing for compliance with
manufacturing and installation tolerances, including size, squareness,
and offsets at corners; edge or face clearances; and effective sealing.
Comply with requirements of glazing material and glazing sealant
manufacturers. Avoid point loading glazing material.
G. Structural Silicone Glazing in Field: Clean frames and glass surfaces
with an approved solvent. Prime surfaces and apply setting blocks,
spacer gaskets and structural sealant in accordance with glass and
sealant manufacturers' recommendations. Mechanically retain glass
firmly in place until sealant has cured sufficiently to hold the glass.
Clean excess sealant before curing. Install compressible backer rods
in joints prior to applying weatherseal sealant.
H. Perimeter Sealants and Joint Fillers: Install weathering sealant at
connections of skylights to other materials. Comply with requirements
of sealant manufacturers.
3 .4 CLEANING
A. Clean the completed skylight, both metal and glazing material, inside
Mer
and outside, promptly after erection, allowing for nominal curing of
liquid sealants.
wo
1. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable coatings from
prefinished metal surfaces. Remove labels and part-number markings
from all components.
2. Wash exposed surfaces using a solution of mild detergent in warm
water applied with soft clean cloths. Wipe clean. Take care to
clean member connections and inside corners. Avoid use of harsh
cleaning materials and methods that would damage metal finishes or
glazing.
B. Remove remaining excess sealant by moderate use of solvent acceptable
to the sealant manufacturer. '
C. Follow recommendations of the skylight manufacturer for proper and
adequate protection and cleaning procedures during the remainder of the
construction period, so that the system will be without damage at the
time of acceptance.
D. Demonstrate proper cleaning methods and materials to the Owner's +•
maintenance personnel.
E. At time of substantial completion clean skylight system thoroughly.
END OF SECTION 07820
METAL FRAMED SKYLIGHTS 07820 - 12
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL
NORTHAMPTON 14A ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
# 6079
3 .1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the supporting structure and substrate for dimensions and
tolerances, material conditions, and support before beginning the
skylight installation. Carefully check provisions for anchorage and
adjustment, allowances for expansion and contraction, and conditions of
II preset flashings and flashing connections.
B. Notify Architect and do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions in
affected areas have been corrected.
3 .2 PREPARATION
t
A. Furnish anchor bolts and inserts for setting in concrete formwork or
masonry indicated to support skylights.
B. Separate aluminum and other corrodible and dissimilar metals from
sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with
other materials.
C. Paint concealed aluminum surfaces that will contact lime mortar,
concrete or other masonry materials with an alkali-resistant coating or
provide other separation recommended by the skylight manufacturer.
D. Separate aluminum components from contact with preservative
pressure-treated wood by painting the wood with two coats of aluminum
house paint and sealing the joints with sealant, or separate the
materials by other methods recommended by skylight manufacturer.
3 .3 INSTALLATION
A. Instructions: Comply with skylight and glazing material manufacturer's
instructions for protecting, handling and installing skylight
components. Pay particular attention to preservation of applied
finishes and use of sealants. Discard members damaged before
installation and remove installed members that become damaged; provide
new acceptable components.
B. Anchor components securely and permanently in place, shimming and using
attachment methods that permit adjustment for construction tolerances,
irregularities, and alignment. Allow for structural movement and
VIII
changes due to varying thermal conditions.
tt_ C. Erection Tolerances: Install skylight components in place, plumb,
level, accurately aligned and correctly located in reference to building
features and without warpage or racking. Adjust framing to conform to
the following tolerances:
1. Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet.
2 . Level: 1/8 inch in 20 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet.
3 . Alignment: Limit the offset from true alignment between two
members abutting end-to-end, in line edge-to-edge, or separated by
less than 3 inches to less than 1/32 inch; otherwise limit offsets
to 1/8 inch.
4 . Location: Install framing with maximum deviation from measured
theoretical plane or location of any member at any location to 1/8
inch per 12 feet of length or 1/2 inch in total length.
METAL FRAMED SKYLIGHTS 07820 - 11
:0.
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
A� O T MA KB #96079
so
2. Except were formed aluminum members are indicated, construct
metal-framed skylights with extruded aluminum components similar
to sections indicated on the drawings.
B. Fabricate components to allow for expansion and contraction, field
adjustment, and minimum clearance and shimming at the perimeter. Fit
and secure corners and joints rigidly with screw and spline, internal ,wt
reinforcement or welding. Make exposed framing and trim joints and
connections flush, hairline and weatherproof. Match exposed work to
produce continuity of line.
C. Design and assemble components to drain water passing joints,
condensation occurring in glazing channels, condensation occurring
within framing members and moisture migrating within the system to the
exterior.
D. Provide a continuous aluminum curb with expansion joints and locked and
sealed or fully welded corners. Locate weep holes in the curb at each
rafter connection to drain condensation.
E. Prepare components to receive anchor and connection devices and
fasteners. Provide concealed connectors, attachments, and fasteners.
Where fasteners exposed to view from interior are permissible, provide
bolts and screws with countersunk heads. Provide acceptable exposed
fasteners with finish matching the framing members or trim.
F. Where shop-welding is permissible or required use only the Gas Tungsten
Arc Welding (TIG) or Gas Metal Arc Welding (MIG) process. Grind visible
welds to a minimum of 100-grit finish.
2 .10 FINISHES
wo
A. General: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations
relative to application and designations of finishes.
B. Finish designations prefixed by AA conform to the system for designating
aluminum finishes established by the Aluminum Association.
C. High-Performance Organic Coating: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical finish:
cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: chemical conversion
coating, acid chromate-fluoride-phosphate pretreatment; Organic Coating:
as specified below) . Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed
metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturer's
instructions.
D. Fluorocarbon Two-Coat Coating System: Manufacturer's standard two-coat
thermocured system, complying with AAMA 605.2, composed of specially
formulated inhibitive primer and fluorocarbon color topcoat containing
not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene resin by weight.
E. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze
openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and
surface conditions, and bite complying with recommendations of product
manufacturer and referenced glazing standard as required to comply with
system performance requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
METAL FRAMED SKYLIGHTS 07820 - 10
4*
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
an interior lite of 5/16" thick laminated glass comprised of two
lites of 1/8" thick, heat strengthened clear glass with a .060" PVB
interlayer. Solar Screen VE4-40 coating applied to the #2 surface.
2 .8 GLAZING ACCESSORIES
A. Spacer Gaskets and Setting Blocks: Provide extruded silicone rubber,
heat-cured, bond-breaking spacer gaskets and bonding setting blocks of
types suitable for the conditions, compatible with the structural
silicone sealant, and hardness as recommended by the skylight
manufacturer.
B. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket
manufacturer.
„. C. Sealants for Structural Glazing: Provide sealant types recommended by
structural silicone sealant and skylight manufacturers, and compatible
with glazing accessories.
1. Structural Silicone Sealant: Silicone sealants shall be
specifically formulated and tested for use as a structural sealant.
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
one of the following:
1) Two-Part Structural Silicone Sealant:
a) Dow Corning 983 .
b) General Electric 4200.
2 . Secondary Seal (Weatherseal) : Silicone sealant secondary seals
shall be compatible with structural silicone sealant used. The
weatherseal shall accommodate a 50 percent increase or decrease of
joint width as measured at time of application according to ASTM
C 719. Provide backer rod as recommended by the manufacturer.
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
one of the following:
1) Weatherseal Sealant:
a) Dow Corning 790.
b) Dow Corning 795.
c) General Electric Silpruf 2000.
D. Secondary structural silicone sealant stress shall be designed so that
each light in an insulating glass unit carries 50 percent of total
applied wind load when both lights are of equal thickness.
2 .9 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate metal-framed skylights to meet aesthetic and
performance criteria indicated. Fit and assemble components in the
manufacturer's shop to the fullest extent practicable and prior to
application of finishes.
1. Before shipment, shop-assemble, mark and disassemble components
that cannot be permanently shop assembled.
METAL FRAMED SKYLIGHTS 07820 - 9
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
2.5 COATED GLASS
A. Sputter-Coated Glass Products: Float glass with metallic oxide or
metallic nitride coating deposited by magnetic sputtering process after "
manufacture and heat treatment.
2.6 LAMINATED GLASS PRODUCTS
A. Laminated Glass Products: Comply with ASTM C 1172 for kinds of
laminated glass indicated and other requirements specified. Refer to
primary and heat-treated glass requirements relating to properties of +*
glass products comprising laminated glass products.
B. Interlayer: Interlayer material as indicated below, in clear or colors,
and of thickness indicated with a proven record of no tendency to
bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after
laminating glass lites and installation.
1. Interlayer Material: Polyvinyl butyral sheets or urethane acrylate
resin.
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of
w
the following:
a. Polyvinyl Butyral Interlayer:
1) Saflex, Monsanto Co.
C. Laminating Process: Fabricate laminated glass to produce glass free of
foreign substances and air or glass pockets as follows:
1. Laminate lites with polyvinyl butyral interlayer in autoclave with
heat plus pressure.
Alk
2.7 INSULATING GLASS PRODUCTS
A. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Preassembled units consisting of
organically sealed lites of glass separated by dehydrated air spaces yea
complying with ASTM E 774 and with other requirements indicated.
1. For properties of individual glass lites making up units, refer to 04
requirements specified elsewhere in this Section applicable to
types, classes, kinds, and conditions of glass products comprising
lites of insulating glass units.
2 . Provide heat-treated, coated float glass of kind indicated or, if .w
not otherwise indicated, Kind HS (heat strengthened) where
recommended by manufacturer to comply with system performance
requirements specified and Kind FT (fully tempered) where
designated.
3 . Performance characteristics designated for coated insulating glass
are nominal values based on manufacturer's published test data for
units with lites 6.0 mm (0.23 inch) thick and nominal 1/2-inch
dehydrated space between lites, unless otherwise indicated.
4 . U-values are expressed as Btu/hour x sq. ft. x deg F.
B. Configuration: Provide preassembled insulating glass units in the
following configurations:
1. Insulating units consisting of an exterior lite of 1/4" thick
tempered bronze glass, separated by a 1/2" thick air space, with
METAL FRAMED SKYLIGHTS 07820 - 8 Aft
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
skylight manufacturer, use either 300 series stainless steel
- fasteners that comply with ASTM A 193, aluminum alloy 2024-T5
fasteners complying with ASTM B 211, as required by the type of
connection, for bolting aluminum extrusions and connecting members.
2 . Connections to the Supporting Structure: Use zinc-coated steel
fasteners complying with ASTM A 307 for anchoring the skylight to
the supporting structure.
3 . Aluminum-Cap-Retainer Fasteners: Use stainless-steel screws,
complying with ASTM A 193, series 300, type as recommended by the
manufacturer for securing exterior aluminum cap retainers.
4 . Anchor Bolts: Provide galvanized steel anchor bolts conforming to
ASTM A 307, Grade A.
5. Concrete or Masonry Inserts: Provide hot-dip galvanized cast-iron,
malleable-iron, or steel inserts. Comply with ASTM A 123 .
E. Concealed Flashing: Provide dead-soft, minimum 0.018-inch-thick
(26-gage) stainless steel flashing, complying with ASTM A 167, of the
type selected by the manufacturer for compatibility.
F. Exposed Flashing and Closures: Provide minimum 0.060-inch-thick
aluminum sheet flashing, complying with ASTM B 209, 5005-H34 or 1100-H14
alloy and temper.
G. Touch-Up Primer: Provide zinc dust-zinc oxide primer for use over
galvanized metal surfaces on the exterior.
H. Bituminous Paint: Provide cold applied asphalt mastic paint complying
with SSPC-Paint 12, formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat.
I. Thermal Insulation: Provide glass-fiber-type insulation, without
membrane covering, complying with ASTM C 665, Type I, Class A.
2 .3 GLASS AND GLAZING MATERIALS
A. Glass: Provide glass of types and thicknesses indicated. Fabricate
glass to sizes required for openings indicated with wedge clearances and
tolerances complying with manufacturer's recommendations.
2 .4 HEAT TREATED GLASS
A. Uncoated, Clear, Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition A
(uncoated surfaces) , Type I (transparent glass, flat) , Class 1 (clear) ,
! * Quality q3 (glazing select) , kind as indicated below.
1. Kind HS (heat strengthened) where indicated.
2. Kind FT (fully tempered) where indicated.
B. Coated, Tinted, Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Condition C
(other coated glass) , Type I (transparent glass, flat) , Class 2 (tinted
heat-absorbing and light-reducing) , Quality q3 (glazing select) , with
kind, coating type, and performance characteristics complying with
requirements specified under coated glass products.
C. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
heat-treated glass by the following companies.
1. Viracon, Inc.
METAL FRAMED SKYLIGHTS 07820 - 7
oft
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON _MA KB #9 6 0 7 9
against delamination, seal failure, coating deterioration, and defects
in manufacturing.
D. The Warranty submitted under this Section shall not deprive the Owner
of other rights or remedies that the Owner may have under other
provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run
concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under
requirements of the Contract Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
+ru
2 .1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide ,w
products by one of the following:
1. Fisher Skylights, Inc.
2. Naturalite/EPI, Inc.
3 . Super Sky Products, Inc.
4. Imperial Glass Structures Co. , Wheeling Illinois 60090. (708)
253-6150.
2.2 FRAMING MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Members: Provide aluminum members of the alloy and temper
recommended by the manufacturer to satisfy requirements for strength,
corrosion resistance and application of finish indicated. Comply with
requirements of ASTM B 221 for extrusions, ASTM B 209 for aluminum sheet
or plate, and ASTM B 211 for aluminum bars, rods and wire.
1. Principal Framing Members: Provide extruded aluminum members of
6063-T5 alloy and temper with a minimum thickness of 0.125 inch. fisr
2. Trim Members: Provide miscellaneous nonsupporting trim members
of 6063-T5 alloy and temper with minimum thickness of 0.062 inch.
3 . Formed metal members shall be sheet aluminum of 6061-T6 alloy and
temper with a minimum thickness of 0.125 inch for structural
members and 0.060 inch for closures and trim.
B. Gaskets and Joint Fillers: Provide the manufacturer' s standard
permanent-type framing system gaskets and joint fillers for sliding
joints, compression joint translation, or nonmoving joints depending on
joint movement and sealing requirements.
C. Brackets and Reinforcements: Provide the manufacturer's standard
high-strength aluminum brackets and reinforcements.Provide standard
nonmagnetic stainless steel brackets and reinforcements where required.
1. Provide nonstaining, nonferrous shims to install and align skylight
work.
D. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard noncorrosive
fasteners and accessories that are compatible with materials used in the
framing system and exposed portions of fasteners and accessories that
match the finish of the skylights. Where movement is expected, provide
slip-joint linings of sheets, pads, shims, or washers of fluorocarbon
resin or a similar material recommended by the manufacturer.
1. Framework Connections: Unless otherwise recommended by the
METAL FRAMED SKYLIGHTS 07820 - 6
40
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB J&e%,
B. Glazing Standards: Comply with recommendations of Flat Glass Marketing
Association (FGMA) "Glazing Manual" and "Sealant Manual" except where
more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to those publications
for definitions of glass and glazing terms not otherwise defined in this
Section or referenced standards.
C. Insulating Glass Certification Program: Provide insulating glass units
permanently marked either on spacers or on one component pane of unit,
with the appropriate certification label of inspecting and testing
organization indicated below.
1. Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC) .
ob 2 . Associated Laboratories, Inc. (ALI) .
D. Design Criteria: The drawings indicate sizes, profiles, and dimensional
requirements of the metal-framed skylights, and are based on the
specific types and models indicated. Metal-framed skylights by other
manufacturers may be considered, provided deviations in dimensions and
profiles are minor and do not change the design concept as judged by the
Architect. The burden of proof of equality is on the proposer.
E. Preinstallation Conference: Before installing the skylights, conduct
a preinstallation conference at the Project with the Architect,
manufacturer, installer, and the Owner's Representatives to review
procedures, schedules, and coordinate installation with other elements
of the Work.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements before fabrication; show
recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication
schedule with construction progress to avoid delay.
1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Schedule skylight installation in sequence with related elements of the
Work specified in other Sections, and as directed by the Architect to
ensure that assemblies, including flashing, trim, and joint sealers, are
protected against damage from weather, aging, corrosion, and other
causes.
F 1.9 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the manufacturer,
agreeing to repair or replace skylights that fail in materials or
workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failures include, but
are not necessarily limited to, the following:
1. Structural failure.
2 . Sealant failure
3. Uncontrolled leakage.
4. Deterioration of metal finishes beyond normal weathering.
5. Failure of the skylight to meet performance requirements.
B. Warranty Period: 5 years after the date of Substantial Completion.
C. Glazing Materials: Provide the glass manufacturer's standard warranty
METAL FRAMED SKYLIGHTS 07820 - 5
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA RE #9 6 0 7 9
1. Clearly indicate the anchorage system, methods of interface with
the building construction, field welding, if required, and
provisions for expansion and contraction.
2. Include setting drawings, templates, and directions for
installation of anchor bolts and other anchorages installed under
other sections.
3 . Show the adaptation of the manufacturer's standard metal-framed w
skylight system to the Project. Show clearly where and how the
manufacturer's system deviates from the contract drawings and
specifications.
D. Samples for Initial Color Selection: Provide pairs of samples of each
specified color and finish on 12-inch-long sections of extrusions or
formed shapes. Where normal color variations are anticipated, include
two or more units in each set of samples indicating extreme limits of
color variations.
E. Structural Calculations: Provide calculations for information only, '"
prepared in accordance with the Aluminum Association's Specifications
for Aluminum Structures (SAS30) , bearing the seal of a structural
engineer qualified in the design of self-supporting skylight assemblies
and licensed in the State of Massachusetts.
1. Indicate the section moduli of wind-load-bearing members.
2 . Include calculations of stresses and deflections for performance
under design loading.
F. Test Reports: Provide test reports from a qualified independent testing .ur
laboratory showing compliance of the metal-framed skylight system with
performance requirements indicated on the basis of the laboratory' s
comprehensive testing of the system.
1. For structural silicone sealant adhesion to samples of metal and
glazing material, include the following:
a. Reports for tests made according to ASTM C 794.
b. A statement that working stress on the structural silicone
sealant does not exceed 20 psi for material having a minimum
strength of 100 psi with a safety factor of 5:1 when exposed
to loads indicated.
C. The sealant manufacturer's statement of compatibility of
materials in contact with the sealant.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Single-Source Responsibility for Fabrication and Installation: Engage ,
a Fabricator/Installer for the metal-framed skylights to assume
undivided responsibility for all components, including structural
design, installation, glazing and weatherproof integrity of the system
in place.
1. Manufacturer shall be regularly engaged in metal-framed skylight
construction and able to demonstrate successful performance on
comparable projects.
2 . Responsibility shall also include design, furnishing and installing
anchor assemblies, support framing, related connections, and
fasteners as required for compliance with specified performance '
data.
METAL FRAMED SKYLIGHTS 07820 - 4 ,
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #9607
performing within the following limitations:
a. Deflection of framing members in a direction normal to the
glazing plane, when subjected to uniform load deflection test
in accordance with ASTM E 330 and specified design loads,
shall not exceed 1/175 of the clear span or 3/4 inch,
whichever is less. Assume the required outward pressure is
the same as the inward pressure.
b. Deflection of members in a direction parallel to the glazing
plane, when carrying full dead load, shall not exceed an
amount that will reduce the glazing bite below 75 percent of
the design dimension and shall not reduce edge clearance to
less than 25 percent of the design dimension or 1/8 inch,
whichever is greater, nor shall it damage or impair the
function of joint seals.
C. Thermal Movement: Provide for expansion and contraction of metal
skylight components resulting from an ambient temperature differential
of 120 deg F, which may result in a metal surface temperature range of
200 deg F (100 deg C) within the skylight framing without causing
buckling, excessive stresses on structural elements or fasteners,
stresses on glazing, failure of seals, reduction of performance or other
detrimental effects.
Ms D. Air and Water Infiltration: Design and install the metal-framed
skylight system to permanently resist air and water leakage through the
system at a test pressure differential of 20 percent of the design
loading in accordance with the following:
1. Air Infiltration: Air leakage through the skylight system shall
not exceed 0.06 cfm per sq. ft. of assembly surface when tested in
4k accordance with ASTM E 283 at a minimum static air pressure
differential of 6.24 lbf per sq. ft.
2 . Water Penetration: There shall be no uncontrolled water leakage
through the skylight when the assembly is tested in accordance with
ASTM E 331 at a minimum differential static pressure of 20 percent
of the inward acting design wind load, but not less than 6.24 lbf
per sq. ft. or more than 12 lbf per sq. ft.
a. Water penetration is defined as the appearance of uncontrolled
water other than the condensation occurring on the interior
po surface of any part of the skylight.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract
and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's installation instructions and
recommendations for maintenance. Include test reports that show
compliance with Project requirements where test method is indicated.
C. Shop Drawings: Fully dimensioned plans and elevations of typical and
special units. Include sections at 1/2-inch scale and details at 3-inch
scale or larger to show tolerances, member profiles, connections and
fasteners, flashing and drainage. Indicate glazing method and pane
opening sizes.
METAL FRAMED SKYLIGHTS 07820 - 3
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
1.3 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes site-assembled, self-supporting, structural
sealant glazed-aluminum-framed skylights with structural silicone
sealant as glazing adhesive at supports and without exterior metal cap
retainers, in the following configurations:
1. Octagonal.
2 . Four-sided.
B. Primary components of metal-framed skylight construction include the w
following:
1. Skylight framing system. 'All
2. Sills, retainers, fillers, trim, gutters, and similar items.
3. Glass in skylights.
4. Sheet-metal flashings within the skylight assembly.
5. Glazing gaskets and sealants, and joint sealants.
6. Anchors, shims, fasteners, accessories and support brackets.
7. Insulation within the skylight assembly.
C. Related Sections include the following: '
1. Section 05120, "Structural Steel" for support framing.
2 . Section 07533, "Single-Ply CSPE Membrane Roofing, Sheet Metal and
Flashing" for roofing.
3 . Section 07721, "Roof Accessories. "
4. Section 07901, "Joint Sealants. "
am
1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide the manufacturer's metal-framed skylights that have Aw
been adapted to the application indicated and comply with performance
requirements specified as demonstrated by testing the manufacturer's
corresponding system according to test methods indicated.
1. Unacceptable conditions include noise or vibration created by
thermal movement, structural movement, or wind; thermal movement
transferred to the building structure; and loosening, weakening or
failure of fasteners, attachments, or other components.
B. Structural Performance: Design, engineer, fabricate, and install
metal-framed skylights to withstand the effects of the following loads do
and stresses under conditions indicated without material failure or
permanent deformation of structural members.
1. Uniform live load of 40 psf plus dead load.
2. Snow load of 30 psf, where applicable, plus dead load.
3. Wind load of 45 psf plus dead load.
4. Concentrated load of 250 lb applied to any framing member at a
location that will produce the most severe stress or deflection.
5. Assume that compression flanges of flexural members receive
effective lateral bracing only from anchors to the building
structure and horizontal glazing bars or interior trim in contact '
at least 50 percent of the member's total depth. Skylights shall
be thrustless.
6. Deflections: The metal-framed skylight shall be capable of Ak
withstanding building movements, including wind loading, and of
METAL FRAMED SKYLIGHTS 07820 - 2
40
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
SECTION 07820 - METAL FRAMED SKYLIGHTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 TIME, MANNER AND REQUIREMENTS FOR FILING SUB-BIDS
A. Sub-Bids shall be submitted in accordance with the provisions of General
Laws, Chapter 149, Section 44A to 44I, inclusive, as amended.
B. Sub-Bids for work under this Section shall be received at the Council
! A Chambers at Town Hall, 210 Main Street, Northampton, MA 01060, until
2:00 p.m. local time on February 9, 1999, at which time all filed Sub-
Bids shall be opened, read aloud, and duly recorded.
C. Sub-Bids shall be submitted on forms identical to those contained in
Bidding Requirements: Bid Form for Sub-Bidder. The Bid Forms attached
hereto are for information only and shall not be detached, filled in,
or executed. All Sub-Bids shall be submitted on the FORM FOR SUB-BID
furnished by the Awarding Authority as required by Section 44G of
Chapter 149 of the General Laws, as amended. Sub-Bids Forms shall be
completely filled in and all Sub-Bids which are incomplete, conditional,
obscure, or which contain any additions not called for will be rejected.
D. Sub-Bids filed with the Awarding Authority shall be accompanied by a Bid
Deposit in the form of a certified check or a treasurer's or cashier's
check issued by a responsible bank or trust company, payable to the City
of Northampton. A bid bond shall be:
1. On a form satisfactory to the Awarding Authority.
2 . With a surety company qualified to do business in the Commonwealth
and satisfactory to the Awarding Authority.
3 . Conditioned upon the faithful performance by the principal of the
agreements contained in the Bid. The amount of such bid deposit
shall be five percent (5%) of the value of the Bid.
E. Sub-Bids for work under this Section shall be for the complete work
required as specified and as shown on the drawings.
F. Sub-Bidders are directed to the Instructions to Bidders, and to the
requirements that all bidders visit the site to determine the scope of
work required under this Section.
G. Sub-Bidders must comply with all provisions of Division 1, General
Requirements, in the same manner as the General Contractor.
H. Work to be done under this Filed Sub-Bid is included in the Contract
Documents as listed in LOD-1 through LOD-5 (List of Drawings) .
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this work. Note also all Addenda.
METAL FRAMED SKYLIGHTS 07820 - 1
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
3 .1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
Coordinate with installation of roof deck and other substrates to
receive accessory units, vapor barriers, roof insulation, roofing and
flashing, as required, to ensure that each element of the Work performs
properly and that combined elements are waterproof and weathertight.
Anchor units securely to supporting structural substrates, adequate to
withstand lateral and thermal stresses, as well as inward and outward
loading pressures.
1. Except as otherwise indicated, install roof accessory items
according to construction details of NRCA "Roofing and
Waterproofing Manual. "
B. Isolation: Where metal surfaces of units are to be installed in contact
with incompatible metal or corrosive substrates, including wood, provide
permanent separation by saturated fabric.
C. Flange Seals: Unless otherwise indicated, set flanges of accessory
units in a thick bed of roofing cement to form a seal.
D. Cap Flashing: Termination of roofing membrane and Installation of base
flashing by other Division 7 Sections.
00
E. Operational Units: Test operate units with operable components. Clean
and lubricate joints and hardware. Adjust for proper operation.
F. Heat-and-Smoke Vents: Locate, install, and test according to NFPA 204M.
1. Install offsetting pulleys and cable for inside manual release at
location and height to be determined by Architect, coordinate
routing of cables with other installations.
3 .2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
11M1
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces according to manufacturer's instructions.
Touch up damaged metal coatings.
END OF SECTION 07720
7
4
ROOF ACCESSORIES 07721 - 5
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
designed for trowel application or other adhesive compatible with
roofing system.
J. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by unit manufacturer that
is compatible with joint surfaces. ASTM C 920; Type S; Grade NS; Class
25; and Uses NT, G, A, and (as applicable to joint substrates indicated)
0.
2 .3 FINISHES
A. General: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations
on applying and designating finishes.
B. Finish: Red Oxide Primer.
C. Finish designations prefixed by AA conform to the system for designating
aluminum finishes established by the Aluminum Association.
40
D. Class I, Clear-Anodized Finish: AA-C22A41 (Chemical Finish: etched,
medium matte; Anodic Coating: Class I Architectural, clear film thicker
than 0.7 mil) complying with AAMA 607.1.
Im
2 .4 HEAT-AND-SMOKE VENTS
A. General : Construct units to comply with NFPA 204M. Custom fabricate
units only to extent necessary to comply with indicated dimensions,
slope and other special requirements. Unless otherwise indicated,
fabricate to withstand a minimum 40-lbf per sq. ft. external live load
and 20-lbf per sq. ft. uplift.
B. Code Requirements: UL-listed and FM-approved.
C. Framing: Fabricate of the following materials, with manufacturer's
standard welded mechanical corner joints, including cap flashing.
1. Material: Hot-dipped galvanized or galvalume coated sheet steel. 11°
D. Curb: 12" high (36" High with side louvers and safety grate at elevator
hoistway) , double-wall, 14 gauge steel curb construction with 1-inch
insulation and 3-1/2" mounting flange.
1. Where roof deck slopes more than 1/4 inch per foot, provide tapered
curb heights to match slope and to level tops of units.
E. Hatch-Type Units: Equip units with lid gaskets, automatic self-lifting
mechanisms, UL-listed fusible links or other heat-sensitive or
smoke-sensitive release devices, as indicated, and hardware including
hinges, hold-open devices, and independent manual-release devices for
inside and outside operation of covers.
1. When release is actuated, cover is to open and lock open against
10-lbf per sq. ft. snow or wind load.
2 . Lid: Double leaf sheet galvanized steel covers, 14 gauge lid, with
1-inch integral insulation, and 22 gauge liner.
3 . Inside Manual Release: Provide offsetting pulleys, cable and
release handles to locate release on side wall of room below.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
ROOF ACCESSORIES 07721 - 4
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the
Contract Documents and shall be in addition to and run concurrent with
other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the
Contract Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 .1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
! products by one of the following:
1. Hatch-Type Heat-and-Smoke Vents:
a. "B-D Automatic Smoke Vent, Model UL 6060V211, Babcock-Davis
Hatchways, Inc.
b. "Automatic Fire Vent, Type DSH606011, Bilco Co.
C. "Low Profile Heat and Smoke Vent, Model U-LP-606011, Milcor,
Inc.
2 . Smoke Vent at Elevator Hoistways:
a. Single Leaf Smoke Vent Model 6-101VS with Louver & Safety
grille.
2 .2 MATERIALS, GENERAL
A. Structural-Quality Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 446 with G90 coating
complying with ASTM A 525, Grade C, or to suit manufacturer's standards.
B. Commercial-Quality Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 526 with G90 coating
complying with ASTM A 525.
C. Galvalume-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792 with class AZ-50 coating,
Grade 40, or to suit manufacturer's standards.
D. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 alloy 6063-T52, mill finish unless
indicated otherwise.
E. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with water-borne
preservatives for above-ground use, complying with AWPA C2; not less
than 1-1/2 inch thick.
F. Fasteners: Same metal as metals being fastened, or nonmagnetic
x. stainless steel or other noncorrosive metal as recommended by
manufacturer. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material
being fastened.
1. Where removal of exterior exposed fasteners affords access to
building, provide nonremovable fastener heads.
G. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard tubular or fingered design of neoprene
or polyvinyl chloride, or block design of sponge neoprene.
H. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying,
nonmigrating sealant.
I. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, nonasbestos, fibrated asphalt cement
ROOF ACCESSORIES 07721 - 3
Im
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
Filed Sub Bid.
B. This Section includes the following:
.w
1. Hatch-type heat-and-smoke vents.
C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that
relate to this Section:
1. Section 06105 "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for roof deck and
blocking.
2. Section 07533 "Single-Ply CSPE Membrane Roofing, Flashing and Sheet
Metal" for roofing types and roofing accessories included as part
of roofing Work.
3. Mechanical equipment curbs are specified in a Division 15 Section
and installed under this section.
1.4 SUBMITTALS e
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and
Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product data for each type of product specified. Submit manufacturer's
detailed technical product data, installation instructions and
recommendations, including details of construction relative to
materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes.
C. Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of each roof
accessory specified including fully dimensioned plans, elevations,
sections, details of components, and attachments to other units of Work.
Also show layout, anchorage details, rough-in requirements, and
conditions on the roof or for other accessories.
D. Samples for initial selection purposes in the form of manufacturer's
color charts showing full range of colors, textures, shapes, and sizes
available for each type of roof accessory indicated. w
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
OR
A. Heat-and-Smoke Vent Compliance: Provide units that have been tested,
listed, or approved as follows:
1. Construction/Operation: UL-listed and FM-approved. 40
B. Standards: Comply with the following:
1. SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" details for fabrication No
of units, including flanges and cap-flashing to coordinate with
type of roofing indicated.
2. NRCA "Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" details for installation .+
of units.
3 . NFPA 204M for smoke-and-heat vent design constraints, operation,
and location.
4. Massachusetts State Building Codes (Sixth Edition) .
1.6 WARRANTY
A. General: Warranties specified in this Section shall not deprive the
ROOF ACCESSORIES 07721 - 2
■w
M
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
SECTION 07721 - ROOF ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 TIME, MANNER AND REQUIREMENTS FOR FILING SUB-BIDS
A. Sub-Bids shall be submitted in accordance with the provisions of General
Laws, Chapter 149, Section 44A to 44I, inclusive, as amended.
B. Sub-Bids for work under this Section shall be received at the Council
Chambers at Town Hall, 210 Main Street, Northampton, MA 01060, until
2:00 p.m. local time on February 9, 1999, at which time all filed Sub-
Bids shall be opened, read aloud, and duly recorded.
C. Sub-Bids shall be submitted on forms identical to those contained in
Bidding Requirements: Bid Form for Sub-Bidder. The Bid Forms attached
hereto are for information only and shall not be detached, filled in,
00 or executed. All Sub-Bids shall be submitted on the FORM FOR SUB-BID
furnished by the Awarding Authority as required by Section 44G of
Chapter 149 of the General Laws, as amended. Sub-Bids Forms shall be
completely filled in and all Sub-Bids which are incomplete, conditional,
obscure, or which contain any additions not called for will be rejected.
D. Sub-Bids filed with the Awarding Authority shall be accompanied by a Bid
Deposit in the form of a certified check or a treasurer's or cashier' s
check issued by a responsible bank or trust company, payable to the City
of Northampton. A bid bond shall be:
1. On a form satisfactory to the Awarding Authority.
2. With a surety company qualified to do business in the Commonwealth
and satisfactory to the Awarding Authority.
3 . Conditioned upon the faithful performance by the principal of the
agreements contained in the Bid. The amount of such bid deposit
shall be five percent (5%) of the value of the Bid.
! E. Sub-Bids for work under this Section shall be for the complete work
required as specified and as shown on the drawings.
ON F. Sub-Bidders are directed to the Instructions to Bidders, and to the
requirements that all bidders visit the site to determine the scope of
- work required under this Section.
G. Sub-Bidders must comply with all provisions of Division 1, General
Requirements, in the same manner as the General Contractor.
H. Work to be done under this Filed Sub-Bid is included in the Contract
Documents as listed in LOD-1 through LOD-5 (List of Drawings) .
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
so this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this work. Note also all Addenda.
1.3 SUMMARY
A. The Work described in this Section shall be included in the Roofing
ROOF ACCESSORIES 07721 - 1
.w.
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
END OF SECTION 07533 w
w�
w�
w
SINGLE—PLY CSPE MEMBRANE ROOFING, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07533 — 18
ew
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
of not less than 1-1/2" .
2 . Perform soldering with well-heated coppers to thoroughly heat sheet
and completely sweat solder through full width of seam. When
soldering lead-coated copper, brush a liberal amount of flux into
seam.
C. Provide 4-inch-wide flanges set in roofing cement for applying
thermoplastic single-ply roofing system membrane concealed by flashing.
D. Fabricate work with flat-lock soldered joints and seams; except where
joint movement is necessary, provide 1-inch-deep interlocking hooked
flanges filled with mastic sealant.
1. Provide sheet metal work of watertight and weather tight
construction; lines, arises and angles shall be sharp and true, with
plane surfaces free from waves and buckles.
E. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion type joints are indicated
or required for proper performance of work, form metal to provide for
proper installation of elastomeric sealant, in compliance with SMACNA
standards.
F. Fabricate penetration sleeves with minimum 8-inch-high stack of diameter
1 inch larger than penetrating element. Counterflashing is specified
as work of another section of these specifications.
G. Metal Fascia and Flashings: Provide cold rolled lead coated copper 20
oz. , with 20 oz. copper hook strips.
1. Double back exposed edges 1/2" to conceal edge and provide
stiffness.
2 . Lap end joints 2" and solder.
3 . External cap flashing required in connection with base flashing at
all intersections of pitched vertical or horizontal surfaces into
masonry wall except where reglet is used. Bottom edge to have 1/2"
folded edge and overlap base flashing 211 . Extend into masonry 4"
and turn up 111 .
a. Note all special flashing conditions as shown in details.
4. Caulk all flashings set into masonry.
3 .13 PROTECTING AND CLEANING
A. Protect sheet membrane roofing from damage and wear during remainder of
construction period. When remaining construction will not affect or
endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage,
describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to
Architect and Owner.
B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing that does not comply with
requirements, repair substrates, reinstall roofing, and repair sheet
flashings to a condition free of damage and deterioration at the time
of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.
C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning
agents and procedures required by manufacturer of affected construction.
SINGLE-PLY CSPE MEMBRANE ROOFING, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07533 - 17
11 1 loll
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
sheet flashing as recommended by manufacturer.
D. Clean seam areas, overlap sheets, and firmly roll flashings into the
adhesive. Weld side and end laps to ensure a watertight seam *w
installation.
E. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap
■w
sealant and seal exposed edges of sheet flashing terminations.
F. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to
substrate through termination bars. ws
3.10 WALKWAY INSTALLATION
A. Walkways: Install walkway pads in locations indicated. Heat weld or
adhere walkway pads to substrate with compatible adhesive according to
roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
3 .11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily, according to
manufacturer's written instructions, and repair seam sample areas. '
1. Perform on-site evaluation of welded seams in locations as directed
by the Owner's representative or the roofing Manufacturer's
representative.
B. Quality Control of Welded Seams: Check all completed welded seams after
cooling for continuity using a rounded screwdriver or other suitable
blunt object. Visible evidence that welding is proceeding acceptably is
smoke during the welding operation, shiny membrane surfaces, and an
uninterrupted flow of black material from the edge of completed joints.
1. Take two inch wide cross section samples a minimum of three times a
day through completed seams.
2 . Correct welds that display failure from shearing of the membrane
prior to separation of the weld.
3 . Patch each test cut at no extra charge to the Owner.
C. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's
technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion and
submit report to Architect.
1. Notify Architect or Owner 48 hours in advance of the date and time
of inspection.
3 .12 FABRICATING SHEET METAL ACCESSORIES
A. SMACNA and NRCA Details: Conform metal work with details shown and with
applicable fabrication requirements of Architectural Sheet Metal Manual ON
by SMACNA. Comply with installation details of NRCA Roofing and
Waterproofing Manual.
B. Prefabricate units as indicated or provide standard manufactured units so
complying with requirements; fabricate from lead-coated copper.
1. Tin edges of sheet of metal to be soldered on both sides for a width
SINGLE-PLY CSPE MEMBRANE ROOFING, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07533 - 16
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
3 .7 SEAM INSTALLATION
A. Clean seam areas, overlap sheets, and weld side and end laps of sheets
w and flashings according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure
a watertight seam installation. Weld seam as follows:
1. Weld Method: Hot air.
PR 2 . Minimum Lap areas: 3 inches wide when machine welding; 4 inches wide
when hand welding.
3 . Use only welding equipment provided by or approved by the roofing
Manufacturer.
4 . Only mechanics that have successfully completed a course of
instruction provided by a Manufacturer' s representative prior to
welding may perform welding operations.
B. Hand Welding: Complete hand welded seams in three stages. Allow equipment
to warm up for at least one minute prior to start of welding.
1. Tack weld the lap every 3 feet to hold the material in place.
2 . Weld the back edge of the lap a thin, continuous weld to prevent
loss of hot air during the final welding.
3 . Insert the hot air nozzle into the lap, keeping the welding
equipment at a 45 degree angle to the side lap. Once the proper
welding temperature has been reached and the material starts to
flow, the hand roller shall be applied at a right angle to the
welding gun and pressed lightly. For straight laps, use the 1-1/2"
wide nozzle; for corners and compound connections, use the 3/4" wide
nozzle.
C. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply seam
calk to seal cut edges of sheet membrane.
D. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not meet
requirements.
3 .8 INSTALLING FOAM MEMBRANE ROOF SYSTEM
A. General: Comply with Manufacturer's instructions in the application of
this system.
B. Base Layer: Install base layer of rigid polyurethane foam spray to match
existing.
C. Spray Foam Membrane: Apply two layers of roof coating in thicknesses to
match existing.
ON 3 .9 FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere
on to substrate according to roofing system manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of flashing sheet at
ON required rate and allow to partially dry. Do not apply bonding adhesive
to seam area of flashing.
C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with
SINGLE-PLY CSPE MEMBRANE ROOFING, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07533 - 15
am
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
straight line with end joints staggered between rows, abutting edges and
ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch (6 mm) with
insulation.
w
1. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch (6 mm) of nailers,
projections, and penetrations.
F. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes
indicated and to Shop Drawings.
G. Attached Insulation: Secure first layer of insulation to deck using w
mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening
specified board-type roof insulation to deck type indicated. Install
subsequent layers of insulation in a solid application of adhesive
approved by the Roofing Manufacturer, at a rate required by insulation
manufacturer.
1. Fasten insulation according to requirements of FM's "Approval Guide"
for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification and the insulation
and roofing system manufacturers' written instructions, but not less
than 1 fastener for each 4 sq. ft. (0.38 sq. m) and at least 2
fasteners per board.
H. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous
straight lines with end joints staggered between rows. Loosely butt
cover boards together and fasten to roof deck according to roofing
system manufacturer's written instructions.
I. Install slip sheet over insulation and immediately beneath sheet.
3 .6 ADHERED SHEET INSTALLATION
A. Install thermoplastic sheet over area to receive roofing according to
roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll sheet and
allow to relax for a minimum of 30 minutes.
was
1. Install sheet according to ASTM D 5036.
B. Start installation of sheet in presence of roofing system manufacturer's
technical personnel.
C. Accurately align sheets and maintain uniform side and end laps of
minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.
D. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet at rate
required by manufacturer and allow to partially dry. Do not apply
bonding adhesive to seam area of sheet.
E. Mechanically fasten sheet securely at terminations and perimeter of
roofing.
F. Apply roofing sheet with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck
where possible.
an
G. Spread sealant bed over deck drain flange at deck drains and securely
seal roofing sheet in place with clamping ring.
40
SINGLE-PLY CSPE MEMBRANE ROOFING, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07533 - 14
am
on
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
C. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors
and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction.
Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is
forecast.
PF D. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to
prevent water from entering completed sections of the roofing system at
the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and discard
temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.
3 .4 WOOD NAILERS AND BLOCKING
A. Install continuous treated wood nailers at the perimeter of the entire
PM roof, around roof projections and penetrations and other locations
required.
B. Anchor nailers to resist a minimum force of 300 lbf in any direction.
Provide a 1/2" space between lengths of nailers.
1. Fasten nailers with fasteners spaced at 12 inches on center,
staggered 1/3 the nailer width and installed within 6 inches of each
end.
2 . Comply with the requirements of Factory Mutual Loss Prevention Data
Sheet 1-49.
C. Do not use nailers less than three feet in length.
D. Build up nailer thickness as required to match thickness of substrate
or insulation, with smooth transitions.
1. Wood nailers and blocking are generally indicated in nominal lumber
sizes. Where required, whether indicated or not, furnish ripped,
continuous shims to create nailer heights to match substrate or
insulation height.
E. Firmly anchor existing blocking designated to remain to meet the
requirements set forth for new wood as stated above.
3 .5 INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation is not
W exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday.
B. Comply with roofing system manufacturer's written instructions for
installing roof insulation.
C. Install one or more layers of insulation under area of roofing to
achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation thickness is 2
s inches (50 mm) or greater, install required thickness in 2 or more
layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of
previous layer a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) in each direction.
D. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed
surface is flush and does not restrict flow of water.
ON E. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous
SINGLE-PLY CSPE MEMBRANE ROOFING, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07533 - 13
am
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces at locations of ""'
contact, with bituminous coating or other permanent separation as
recommended by manufacturer/fabricator.
me
F. Prime all surfaces of pitch pockets prior to filling with pourable
sealer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION °W
3 .1 REMOVAL OF EXISTING ROOFING SYSTEMS
A. Erect dust chutes for the removal of rubbish and debris from the roof.
B. Removal of Existing Roof Systems: Remove existing roof system, where
indicated.
1. Thoroughly clean existing substrate of all debris, fasteners, etc.
weA
C. Provide services for effective air and water pollution controls as
required by local authorities having jurisdiction.
D. If unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that
conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate
and measure both nature and extent of the conflict. Submit report to
the Architect in written, accurate detail. Pending receipt of directive
■s
from the Architect, rearrange selective demolition schedule as necessary
to continue overall job progress without undue delay.
3 .2 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions under which roofing will be
applied, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements.
ww
B. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and set and
braced and that roof drains are properly clamped into position.
C. Verify that wood nailers are in place and secured and match thicknesses
of insulation required.
D. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, and other substances detrimental to
roofing installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written
instructions. "'
1. Remove sharp ridges, projections and accumulations of bitumen above
the surface.
w
B. Existing Substrate: Comply with manufacturers' instructions to prepare
substrate to receive foam membrane system.
0M
1. Verify that penetrations, expansion joints, and blocking are in
place and secured and that roof drains are properly clamped into
position.
MM
SINGLE-PLY CSPE MEMBRANE ROOFING, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07533 - 12
so
on
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
a. "3-500 Silicone/Polyurethane Foam Roof System", Dow Corning
Corporation.
2.8 WALKWAYS
A. Walkway Pads: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, slip-resisting,
surface-textured walkway pads, approximately 3/16 inch (5 mm) thick, of
materials acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
2 .9 SHEETMETAL FLASHINGS AND TRIM MATERIALS
A. Aluminum: Manufacturer' s coated aluminum in widths as indicated on the
drawings and exposed to view.
1. Roof Edge: Manufacturer's standard two-piece system comprised of a
.100-inch thick anchor bar, fabricated from 6063-T6 aluminum,
P0 finished with the Manufacturer's Kynar 500, 20 year warranteed
finish system, prepunched for fasteners; and snap-on fascia cover
fabricated from .040-inch thick aluminum.
2 . Fascia Extension: Provide Manufacturer's extended fascia materials
where required, fabricated from and finished the same material as
the fascia cover.
3 . Manufacturer's flashing in concealed locations as indicated on the
drawings.
B. Submit color chart of standard finishes for selection by the Architect.
2 .10 SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A. General Metal Fabrication: Shop-fabricate work to greatest extent
possible. Comply with details shown and with applicable requirements
of SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and other recognized
industry practices. Fabricate for waterproof and weather-resistant
performance, with expansion provisions for running work, sufficient to
permanently prevent leakage, damage, or deterioration of the work. Form
work to fit substrates. Comply with material manufacturer instructions
and recommendations for forming material. Form exposed sheet metal work
without excessive oil-canning, buckling, and tool marks, true to line
and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
B. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams.
For metal other than aluminum, tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and
solder. Form aluminum seams with epoxy seam sealer; rivet joints for
additional strength where required.
C. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions
in work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently water/weatherproof,
form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1
inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints) .
D. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion type joints are indicated
or required for proper performance of work, form metal to provide for
proper installation of elastomeric sealant, in compliance with SMACNA
standards.
E. Separations: Provide for separation of metal from noncompatible metal
SINGLE-PLY CSPE MEMBRANE ROOFING, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07533 - 11
w
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
flashings, T-joint covers, seam calk, termination reglets, and other
accessories recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use.
2.5 INSULATION MATERIALS
A. General: Provide preformed roof insulation boards that comply with
requirements, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes and of w
thicknesses indicated.
1. Provide preformed, tapered insulation boards where indicated for
sloping to drain. Fabricate with the following taper: +�
a. 1/4 inch per 12 inches (1:48) , unless otherwise indicated.
b. Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.
2 . Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other
insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate
to slopes indicated. so
B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: Rigid, cellular polyisocyanurate
thermal insulation with core formed by using HCFCs as blowing agents to
wA
comply with FS-HH-1972/2 Class 1 PS1-25 lb, ASTM C 1289, classified by
facer type as follows:
1. Facer Type: Type II, 2 lb glass-fiber mat on both major surfaces. so
2 . Subject to compliance with requirements, provide roof insulation
manufactured by the following:
a. "SarnaTherm I Isocyanurate Insulation with Manniglas 1279 for
GAF Ultra Facer" as supplied by Sarnafil, Inc. For system
warranty applications, Manufacturer's approved insulation must
be used.
3 . See drawings for required thickness.
2.6 INSULATION ACCESSORIES so
A. General: Furnish roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation
manufacturer for intended use and compatible with sheet roofing
material.
B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates
meeting corrosion-resistance provisions of FM 4470, designed for
fastening roof insulation to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system
manufacturer.
C. Protection Mat: Woven or nonwoven polypropylene, polyolefin, or so
polyester fabric mat, water permeable and resistant to ultraviolet
degradation, type and weight as recommended by roofing system
manufacturer for application. +?
2.7 FOAM MEMBRANE
A. Roof System: Manufacturer's spray foam roof system.
w
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products of the following:
SINGLE-PLY CSPE MEMBRANE ROOFING, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07533 - 10
on
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
wo g. Tear resistance, (1 bf. ) : D1004, 14.
h. Low temperature, (-40 deg. F) : D2136, pass.
i. Accelerated weathering test (Xenon) : D25655, 10,000 hours.
ON j . Cracking (7X mag. ) : none.
k. Discoloration (observed) : negligible.
1. Crazing (7x mag.) : none.
M. Linear dimension, change %: D1204, 0.0%.
OR n. Weight change after immersion in water, max.%: D570, 2 .5%.
5. Traffic membrane: Manufacturer' s textured membrane, suitable for
traffic surface.
2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system
manufacturer for intended use and compatible with membrane roofing
material.
PM 1. Furnish liquid-type auxiliary materials that meet the Commonwealth
of Massachusetts VOC limits.
B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard sheet flashing of same
material, type, thickness, and color as sheet membrane.
go C. Flashing Membrane: Manufacturer' s fiberglass-reinforced, asphalt-
compatible, 60 mil thickness membrane used where asphalt contamination
is anticipated or when adhering to smooth asphalt flashings.
D. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer' s standard bonding adhesive.
E. Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's recommended slip sheet, of type required for
application.
F. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard aluminum bars,
approximately 1 inch (25 mm) wide, roll formed and prepunched.
00
G. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates
meeting corrosion-resistance provisions of FM 4470, designed for
fastening sheet to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system
manufacturer.
H. Miscellaneous Fasteners and Anchors: Furnish fasteners meeting Factory
on Mutual Standard 4470 for corrosion resistance; of the same type as metal
being secured. In general, provide fasteners, anchors, nails, straps,
fabricated from zinc or cadmium plated steel, galvanized, or stainless
steel.
on
1. Provide fasteners in lengths sufficient for a minimum embedment of
1-1/411 , and of approved type for such use by the fastener
manufacturer.
2 . Fasteners for attachment of metal to wood blocking: Annular ring
nails.
3 . Fasteners for attachment of metal to masonry: Expansion type
fasteners.
I. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and
vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet
SINGLE-PLY CSPE MEMBRANE ROOFING, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07533 - 9
am
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
no
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL an
A. Performance: Provide roofing materials identified to be of generic type
indicated and tested to show compliance with required performances.
B. Compatibility: Provide products recommended by manufacturers to be fully
compatible with indicated substrates. Provide separation materials as
required to eliminate contact between incompatible materials.
2 .2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
by one of the following:
1. PVC Sheet:
a. GenFlex Roofing Systems; GenCorp Polymer Products.
b. HPG Roofing Systems.
C. Sarnafil, Inc.
2 . Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation:
a. Apache Products Co.
b. GAF Materials Corp.
C. NRG Barriers, Inc.
d. Sarnafil, Inc.
3 . Perlite Board Insulation:
a. GAF Materials Corp.
b. Schuller Roofing Systems.
2.3 PVC SHEET
A. PVC Sheet: Uniform, flexible sheet formed from polyvinyl chloride with
plasticizers and modifiers, complying with ASTM D 4434, of the following am
type, grade, thickness, and exposed face color:
1. Type: Type II, Grade 1, fiber-reinforced sheet.
2. Thickness: 60 mils (1.5 mm) , nominal. so
3. Exposed Face Color: Gray.
4. Physical Properties: Provide reinforced PVC sheets with the
following properties as determined per ASTM test method indicated:
a. Color: standard.
b. Overall thickness mm (inches) : D751, 1.80 (0.072) .
C. Tensile strength, psi: D638, 1600 psi.
d. Elongation at break, %: D638, 270%, MD, 270% CMD.
e. Seam strength, % of tensile strength: D638, 85%.
f. Retention of properties after heat aging: D3045.
40
1) Tensile strength, % of original: D638, 93%.
2) Elongation, $ of original: D638, 93%.
W
SINGLE-PLY CSPE MEMBRANE ROOFING, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07533 - 8
an
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
E. Conduct fastener pullout tests in accordance with industry standards to
verify condition of the deck/substrate and to confirm expected pullout
values.
0M
F. Coordinate the operation of vents and air intakes and the use of spaces
requiring ventilation with the Owner.
1. Temporarily seal all rooftop vents or air intakes. Temporarily turn
off and seal all motorized vents or air intakes in the immediate
area where adhesives are being used to eliminate odors from entering
w the building.
G. Do not install mechanically attached membrane under the following
conditions without consulting the Membrane Manufacturer for precautionary
"a steps:
1. The roof assembly permits interior air to pressurize the membrane
PW underside at a rate of 2 .6 lbs/sf or greater (equivalent to a 1/2-
inch water rise. )
2 . Any exterior wall has 10% or more of the surface area comprised of
opening doors or windows.
PP 3 . The wall/deck intersection permits air-entry into the wall flashing
area.
an 1.10 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The warranties specified in this Article shall not
deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other
provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run
concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under
requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Warranty Period: 15 years for labor and material from dates of
Substantial Completion. Accepted warranty program - Sarnafil Services
15 Year Roof Management Warranty.
C. Standard Roofing Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit a written warranty,
without monetary limitation, signed by roofing system manufacturer
agreeing to promptly repair leaks resulting from defects in materials or
workmanship for the following warranty period:
1. Warranty Period: 15 years.
D. Special Project Warranty: Submit roofing Installer's warranty, covering
Work of this Section, including membrane roofing, sheet flashing, roof
insulation, and fasteners for the following warranty period:
1. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion.
2 . In the event any work related to roofing, flashing, or metal work is
aww found to be defective or otherwise not in accordance with the
Contract Documents within two years of Substantial Completion, the
roofing contractor shall remove and replace at no cost to the Owner.
3 . The Contractor's warranty obligation shall run directly to the
as Owner, and a copy shall be sent to the roofing Manufacturer.
E. Foam Membrane Warranty Period: 10 years for labor and material from date
of Substantial Completion.
SINGLE-PLY CSPE MEMBRANE ROOFING, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07533 - 7
MR
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
required, and furnish copy of record to each participant.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with
seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name
and type, date of manufacture, and directions for storing and mixing with
other components.
B. Store membrane rolls lying down on pallets, and fully protected form the
weather with clean canvas tarpaulins.
as
1. Unvented polyethylene tarpaulins are not acceptable.
C. Store adhesives at room temperature above 40 degrees, F. am
D. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean,
dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by no
roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid materials from direct
sunlight.
1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be no
applied within its stated shelf life.
E. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from
deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store no
in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written
instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.
F. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to
avoid permanent deflection of deck.
1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS ws
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with roofing work only when existing and
forecasted weather conditions permit roofing to be installed according
to manufacturers ' written instructions and warranty requirements.
B. Substrate Conditions: Do not begin roofing installation until substrates
have been inspected and are determined to be in satisfactory condition. p11
C. Install uninterrupted waterstops at the end of each day's work;
completely remove them before proceeding with the next day's work. so
1. Do not use waterstops that emit dangerous or unsafe fumes.
2 . Do not permit waterstops to remain in contact with the finished roof
as the installation progresses. OR
3 . Remove contaminated membrane and replace at no additional cost to
the Owner.
D. Utilize extreme caution not to permit incompatible materials to remain an
in contact with roof membrane.
1. Incompatible materials are asphalt, coal tar, heavy oils and roofing so
cements. Also creosote and preservative materials are incompatible.
2 . Consult the Membrane Manufacturer regarding compatibility,
precautions and recommendations.
Mw
SINGLE-PLY CSPE MEMBRANE ROOFING, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07533 - 6
so
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
3 . Monitor that the roofing Contractor's applicators have been through
the Membrane Manufacturers' training program.
4. Monitor the quality of the hot air welded seams by taking a minimum
of three cross seam cuts measuring 2 inches by 6 inches each day
that membrane is installed.
a. Technical Field Representative shall include samples with
40 weekly reports.
b. Patch test cuts with same material at no additional cost to the
Owner.
P4
5. Inspect roof installation on a daily basis, prepare punchlist for
corrective action by the Installer on a daily basis.
6. Provide a written daily reports to the Contractor, with copies to
the Architect and Owner's Representative.
F. The Contractor is responsible to pay the manufacturer for all costs
including expenses for the Technical Field Representative.
G. No deviations from the contract specification or the approved shop
drawings may be made without prior written approval by the Owner, the
Owner's representative, and the Manufacturer.
H. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide roofing materials with the
fire-test-response characteristics indicated as determined by testing
identical products per test method indicated below by UL, FM, or another
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable
A' testing and inspecting agency.
1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class A; ASTM E 108, for application
and slopes indicated.
I. Preinstallation Conference: Before installing roofing system, conduct
conference at Project site to comply with requirements of Division 1
*a Section "Project Meetings. " Notify participants at least 5 working days
before conference.
1. Meet with Owner; Architect; roofing Installer; roofing system
manufacturer's representative; deck Installer; and installers whose
work interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers of
roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.
ON 2 . Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation,
including manufacturer's written instructions.
3 . Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with
requirements, including flatness and fastening.
4. Review loading limitations of deck during and after roofing.
5. Review flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof
penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction
Mw that will affect roofing.
6. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance,
certificates, and inspection and testing, if applicable.
7. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during
and after installation.
8. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing
installation.
9. Document proceedings, including corrective measures or actions
SINGLE-PLY CSPE MEMBRANE ROOFING, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07533 - 5
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
based on comprehensive testing of current product compositions.
H. Research/Evaluation Reports: Evidence of roofing system's compliance
with building code in effect for Project, from a model code organization �a
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
I. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in the maintenance
manuals specified in Division 1. "•""
J. Warranty: Sample copy of standard roofing system manufacturer's warranty
stating obligations, remedies, limitations, and exclusions of warranty. wM
K. Inspection Report: Copy of roofing system manufacturer's inspection
report of completed roofing installation.
L. Certification that materials comply with the Commonwealth of
Massachusetts VOC limitations.
ew
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Certification: Obtain written certification from manufacturer
of roofing system certifying that Installer is approved by manufacturer so
to install specified roofing system. Provide copy of certification for
Architect prior to awarding roofing work. Such certification shall have
been issued by the manufacturer no less than 1 year prior to the date of
the Contractor's Bid Proposal. ..�
B. The Contractor shall be doing business under the same name a minimum of
five years prior to January 1, 1998. so
1. The Contractor shall have applied specified roofing system on ten
(10) or more projects which have been completed for at least two (2)
years. (Furnish names of projects) . Projects named shall be
written fifty (50) miles radius of this project.
C. Installer's Field Supervision: Maintain a full-time supervisor/foreman 40
who is on job site during times that roofing work is in progress and who
is experienced in installing roofing systems similar to type and scope
required for this Project. The supervisor/foreman shall be certified by
the manufacturer as an approved applicator of the roofing system. am
D. The Contractor that receives award of this project shall be the
Contractor who installs the roof. The roof work shall not be om
subcontracted without prior approval of the Owner. Architect. and
manufacturer.
E. Arrange with roofing membrane Manufacturer to have the services of a 4W
full-time Technical Field Representative to visit the site to observe the
total roof application, and provide the following services:
1. Monitor quality control over the total roof operations, including, wm
but not limited to tear-off, wood installation, roofing, metal work,
flashing and all other Manufacturer supplied roofing system
components and other related products that are called for in the +A
assembly of the roofing system.
2. Monitor that all work is in compliance with the Contract Documents,
and the roofing system warranty.
SINGLE-PLY CSPE MEMBRANE ROOFING, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07533 - 4
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
C. FM Listing: Provide sheet membrane, base flashings, and component
materials that meet requirements of FM 4450 and FM 4470 as part of a
roofing system and that are listed in FM's "Approval Guide" for Class 1
or noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with
FM markings.
1. Roofing system shall comply with the following:
a. Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class 1A-90.
D. Roofing System Design: Provide a single-ply roofing system that complies
with roofing system manufacturer's written design instructions and with
PW the following:
1. SPRI's "Wind Design Guide for Adhered Roofing Systems. "
No a. Exposure Category: Exposure A.
b. System Design: System 1.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
No
A. Product Data: For each type of roofing product specified. Include data
substantiating that materials comply with requirements.
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections, and details of the following:
1. Base flashings and membrane terminations.
2 . Tapered insulation, including slopes.
C. Samples for Verification: Of the following products:
1. 12-by-12-inch (300-by-300-mm) square of sheet roofing, of color
specified, including T-shaped side and end lap seam.
2 . 12-by-12-inch (300-by-300-mm) square of roof insulation.
3 . 12-by-12-inch (300-by-300-mm) square of walkway pads.
4. 12-inch (300-mm) length of metal termination bars.
5. 6 insulation fasteners of each type, length, and finish.
on D. Installer Certificates: Signed by roofing system manufacturer certifying
that Installer is approved, authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to
install specified roofing system.
E. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying
that the roofing system complies with requirements specified in the
"Performance Requirements" Article. Upon request, submit evidence of
meeting requirements.
F. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality
Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience.
Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses,
names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information
specified.
G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of tests performed by
manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified independent testing agency,
indicate compliance of components of roofing system with requirements
SINGLE-PLY CSPE MEMBRANE ROOFING, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07533 - 3
am
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
w
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Adhered sheet roofing.
2. Roof insulation. j"
3. Walkway pads.
4. Rigid roof insulation, crickets and fiber cants.
5. Membrane base flashing throughout.
6. Pitch pockets where required. '
7. Flashing for new and existing roof drains and vent piping.
8. The resetting of all curb-mounted mechanical equipment to receive
new base flashing. am
9. New wood blocking as indicated on the drawings.
10. Perimeter metal gravel stops and fasciae, metal roof penetration
flashings, flashings and counterflashings.
11. Modifications to existing spray foam membrane roofing. am
a. The existing foam membrane roofing system is covered by a 10
year warranty by Dow Corning Corporation. Repairs and/or M"
alterations can only be made by an applicator approved by this
Manufacturer.
B. Related Sections include the following: no
1. Section 05320, "Metal Roof Deck" for steel roof deck.
2. Section 07901, "Joint Sealants. " an
3 . Division 15 Sections for installation of roof drains and related
piping.
4 . Division 16 Sections for removal and reconnection of electrical
powered roof top mechanical equipment. do
C. Related Sections for product specifications, furnished and installed by
the Roofing Filed Sub-Bid, include the following: me
1. Section 06105, "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs,
blocking, and other related items.
2 . Section 07721, "Roof Accessories. " 40
3. Section 07820, "Metal Framed Skylights. "
D. Unit Prices: Refer to Division 1 Section "Unit Prices" for description OR
of Work in this Section affected by unit prices.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
so
A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1079 for definition of terms
related to roofing work not otherwise defined in this Section.
1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS go
A. General: Install sheet membrane roofing and base flashing that are
watertight; will not permit the passage of liquid water; and will an
withstand wind loads, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather
without failure.
B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible am
with one another under conditions of service and application required,
as demonstrated by roofing system manufacturer based on testing and field
experience. on
SINGLE-PLY CSPE MEMBRANE ROOFING, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07533 - 2
no
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
SECTION 07533 - SINGLE-PLY CSPE MEMBRANE ROOFING, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 TIME, MANNER AND REQUIREMENTS FOR FILING SUB-BIDS
A. Sub-Bids shall be submitted in accordance with the provisions of General
Laws, Chapter 149, Section 44A to 44I, inclusive, as amended.
B. Sub-Bids for work under this Section shall be received at the Council
Chambers at Town Hall, 210 Main Street, Northampton, MA 01060, until 2:00
p.m. local time on February 9, 1999, at which time all filed Sub-Bids
shall be opened, read aloud, and duly recorded.
po C. Sub-Bids shall be submitted on forms identical to those contained in
Bidding Requirements: Bid Form for Sub-Bidder. The Bid Forms attached
hereto are for information only and shall not be detached, filled in, or
executed. All Sub-Bids shall be submitted on the FORM FOR SUB-BID
furnished by the Awarding Authority as required by Section 44G of Chapter
149 of the General Laws, as amended. Sub-Bids Forms shall be completely
filled in and all Sub-Bids which are incomplete, conditional, obscure,
or which contain any additions not called for will be rejected.
D. Sub-Bids filed with the Awarding Authority shall be accompanied by a Bid
Deposit in the form of a certified check or a treasurer's or cashier' s
check issued by a responsible bank or trust company, payable to the City
of Northampton. A bid bond shall be:
1. On a form satisfactory to the Awarding Authority.
2. With a surety company qualified to do business in the Commonwealth
and satisfactory to the Awarding Authority.
3 . Conditioned upon the faithful performance by the principal of the
agreements contained in the Bid. The amount of such bid deposit
shall be five percent (5%) of the value of the Bid.
E. Sub-Bids for work under this Section shall be for the complete work
required as specified and as shown on the drawings.
F. Sub-Bidders are directed to the Instructions to Bidders, and to the
requirements that all bidders visit the site to determine the scope of
work required under this Section.
Or G. Sub-Bidders must comply with all provisions of Division 1, General
Requirements, in the same manner as the General Contractor.
H. Work to be done under this Filed Sub-Bid is included in the Contract
on Documents as listed in LOD-1 through LOD-5 (List of Drawings) .
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
so
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this work. Note also all Addenda.
1.3 SUMMARY
SINGLE-PLY CSPE MEMBRANE ROOFING, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL 07533 - 1
ow
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
no
evidence of soiling.
B. Cure exposed cementitious fireproofing materials according to
fireproofing manufacturer's recommendations to prevent premature drying.
C. Protect fireproofing, according to advice of fireproofing manufacturer
and Installer, from damage resulting from construction operations or
other causes so that fireproofing will be without damage or
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
D. Coordinate installation of fireproofing with other construction to
minimize the need to cut or remove fireproofing. As installation of
other construction proceeds, inspect fireproofing and patch any areas
where fireproofing was removed or damaged.
E. Repair or replace work that has not been successfully protected.
END OF SECTION 07251
OR
00
OR
SPRAYED-ON FIREPROOFING 07251 - 9
40
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
method to produce the following finish:
1. Spray textured finish with no further treatment.
3.4 INSTALLING CONCEALED FIREPROOFING
A. Apply concealed fireproofing in thicknesses and densities indicated but
not less than those required to achieve fire-resistance ratings
designated for each condition and comply with requirements for thickness
specified in Part 2 "Concealed Fireproofing" article.
3 .5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing Agency: A qualified independent testing agency employed and
paid by Owner will perform field quality-control testing.
B. Extent and Testing Methodology: Testing of completed fireproofing will
take place in successive stages in areas of extent described below; do
not proceed with fireproofing of next area until test results for
previously completed fireproofing show compliance with requirements.
1. Within each area, testing agency will randomly select one +
structural member of each type (primary beam, secondary beam,
joist, truss, steel deck, and column) and test fireproofing as
follows:
so
a. For cohesion and adhesion per ASTM E 736.
b. For thickness per ASTM E 605.
C. Lower flanges and webs of beams, column webs, column flanges, ON
and floor deck for density per ASTM E 605 or Appendix A
"Alternate Method for Density Determination" of AWCI Technical
Manual 12-A.
d. When testing discovers fireproofing not in compliance with on
requirements, testing agency will perform additional random
testing to determine extent of noncompliance.
C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to
Contractor, Owner's Representative and Architect.
D. Remove and replace fireproofing where test results indicate that it does
not comply with specified requirements for cohesion and adhesion or for
density or both.
E. Apply additional fireproofing per manufacturer's directions where test
results indicate that the thickness does not comply with specified
requirements.
wu
F. Additional Testing: Where fireproofing is removed and replaced or
repaired, additional testing will be performed to determine compliance
with specified requirements. ow
3 .6 CLEANING, REPAIR, AND PROTECTION
A. Cleaning: Immediately after completing spraying operations in each ass
containable area of Project, remove material over-spray and fall-out
from surfaces of other construction and clean exposed surfaces to remove
SPRAYED-ON FIREPROOFING 07251 - 8
go
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
on primers, loose mill scale, dirt, or other foreign substances
capable of impairing bond of fireproofing with substrate under
conditions of normal use or fire exposure.
on 3 . Objects penetrating fireproofing, including clips, hangers, support
sleeves, and similar items, are securely attached to substrates.
4. Substrates are not obstructed by ducts, piping, equipment, and
other suspended construction that will interfere with applying the
fireproofing.
B. Conduct tests according to sprayed-on fireproofing manufacturer's
recommendations to verify that substrates are free of oil, rolling
compounds, and other substances capable of interfering with bond where
there is any doubt as to their presence.
C. Do not proceed with installation of fireproofing until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
3 .2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of fireproofing,
including oil, grease, rolling compounds, incompatible primers, and
loose mill scale.
B. Prime substrates where recommended by fireproofing manufacturer, except
where compatible shop primer has been applied and is in satisfactory
condition to receive fireproofing.
C. Cover other work subject to damage from fall-out or overspray of
fireproofing materials during application. Provide temporary enclosure
as required to confine spraying operations, protect the environment, and
ensure maintaining adequate ambient conditions for temperature and
P" ventilation.
3 .3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with fireproofing manufacturer's instructions for mixing
materials, application procedures, and types of equipment used to convey
and spray on fireproofing materials; as applicable to the particular
conditions of installation and as required to achieve fire-resistance
ratings indicated.
B. Apply sprayed-on fireproofing that is identical to products tested as
specified in Part 1 under "Test Reports" in "Submittals" article, with
respect to rate of application, use of sealers, topcoats, tamping,
troweling, water overspray, or other materials and procedures affecting
test results.
C. Coat substrates with adhesive prior to applying fireproofing where
required to achieve fire-resistance rating or as recommended by
fireproofing manufacturer for material and application indicated.
D. Extend fireproofing in full thickness over entire area of each substrate
to be protected. Unless otherwise recommended by fireproofing
manufacturer, install body of fireproof covering in a single course.
E. Apply cement-aggregate cementitious fireproofing materials by sprayed-on
SPRAYED-ON FIREPROOFING 07251 - 7
ON
so
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
allowable individual sprayed-on fireproofing thickness is the am
greater of 0.375 inch or 75 percent of the design thickness.
C. No reduction in average thickness is permitted for those
fire-resistive designs whose fire resistance ratings were Aft
established at densities of less than 15 pcf.
9. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread value of 0
and smoke-developed value of 0. me
D. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
1. Cementitious Fireproofing:
a. Monokote Type MK-6/CBF, Construction Products Div. , W.R. Grace
& Co. - Conn.
b. Monokote Type MK-6/ED, Construction Products Div. , W.R. Grace
& Co. - Conn.
C. Cafco 300, Isolatek International Corp.
2 .2 AUXILIARY FIREPROOFING MATERIALS
A. General: Provide auxiliary fireproofing materials that are compatible
with sprayed-on fireproofing products and substrates and are approved
by UL having for use in the fire-resistive designs indicated. wu
B. Substrate Primers: For use on each different substrate and with each
different sprayed-on fireproofing product, provide primer that complies
with one or more of the following requirements:
1. Primers bond strength complies with requirements specified in UL
"Fire Resistance Directory" for coating materials based on a series
of bond tests per ASTM E 736.
2 . Primer is identical to those used in assemblies tested for the
fire-test-response characteristics of sprayed-on fireproofing, per
ASTM E 119, by UL. ►
C. Adhesive for Bonding Fireproofing: Product approved by manufacturer of
sprayed-on fireproofing. so
D. Reinforcing Fabric: Glass-fiber fabric of type, weight, and form
required to comply with fire-resistive designs indicated, approved by
manufacturer of intumescent mastic fireproofing. am
PART 3 - EXECUTION
40
3 .1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates with Installer present to determine if they are in as
satisfactory condition to receive sprayed-on fireproofing. A substrate
is in satisfactory condition if it complies with the following:
1. Substrates comply with requirements in the Section where the am
substrate and related materials and construction are specified.
2. Substrates are free of oil, grease, rolling compounds, incompatible
go
SPRAYED-ON FIREPROOFING 07251 - 6
am
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
1
1. Cementitious fireproofing consisting of factory-mixed, dry
formulation of gypsum or portland cement binders and lightweight
mineral or synthetic aggregates mixed with water at Project site
00 to form a slurry or mortar for conveyance and application.
C. Physical Properties: Minimum values, unless otherwise indicated or
ON higher values required to attain designated fire-resistance ratings,
measured per standard test methods referenced with each property listed
below:
1. Bond Strength: 200 lbf per sq. ft. as determined per ASTM E 736
under the following conditions:
a. Field test sprayed-on fireproofing that is applied to flanges
of wide-flange structural steel members on surfaces matching
those that will exist for remainder of steel receiving
fireproofing.
b. If surfaces of structural steel receiving sprayed-on
fireproofing are primed or otherwise painted, perform series
of bond tests specified in UL "Fire Resistance Directory" for
coating materials.
C. Minimum sprayed-on fireproofing thickness tested in laboratory
shall be 0.75 inch.
2 . Compressive Strength: 1200 lbf per sq. ft. as determined in the
laboratory per ASTM E 761. Minimum sprayed-on fireproofing
thickness tested shall be 0.75 inch and the minimum dry density
shall be as specified, but not less than 15 pcf.
3 . Corrosion Resistance: No evidence of corrosion as determined per
ASTM E 937.
4. Deflection: No cracking, spalling, delamination or the like as
determined per ASTM E 759.
5 . Effect of Impact on Bonding: No cracking, spalling, delamination
or the like as determined per ASTM E 760.
6. Air Erosion: Maximum weight loss of 0.025 gram per sq. ft. in 24
hours as determined per ASTM E 859. For laboratory tests, the
minimum sprayed-on fireproofing thickness is 0.75 inch, the maximum
dry density is 15 pcf, test specimens are not prepurged by
an mechanically induced air velocities, and tests are terminated after
24 hours.
7. Dry Density: 15 pcf for average and individual densities
regardless of density indicated in referenced fire-resistive
00 design, or greater if required to attain fire-resistance ratings
indicated, as determined per ASTM E 605 or Appendix A "Alternate
Method for Density Determination" of AWCI Technical Manual 12-A.
8. Thickness: Provide minimum average thickness required for
ON fire-resistive design indicated according to the following
criteria, but not less than 0.375 inch, as determined per
ASTM E 605.
a. Where the referenced fire-resistive design lists a thickness
of one inch or greater, the minimum allowable individual
sprayed-on fireproofing thickness is the design thickness
minus 0.25 inch.
b. Where the referenced fire-resistive design lists a thickness
of less than one inch but more than 0.375 inch, the minimum
SPRAYED-ON FIREPROOFING 07251 - 5
ON
am
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
following requirements: .w
1. Provide temporary enclosures to prevent deterioration of sprayed-on
fireproofing for interior applications due to exposure to
unfavorable environmental conditions.
2 . Avoid unnecessary exposure of sprayed-on fireproofing to abrasion
and other damage likely to occur during construction operations
subsequent to its application.
3 . Do not apply fireproofing to metal roof decking substrates until
roofing has been completed; prohibit roof traffic during
application and drying of fireproofing.
4. Do not begin applying fireproofing until clips, hangers, supports,
sleeves, and other items penetrating fireproofing are in place.
5. Defer installing ducts, piping, and other items that would
interfere with applying fireproofing until fireproofing is so
installed.
6. Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after
fireproofing has been applied, inspected, tested, and corrections M"
have been made to any defective fireproofing.
1.9 WARRANTY
Am
A. General: The warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the
Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the
Contract Documents and shall be in addition to and run concurrent with rX
other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the
Contract Documents.
B. Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by Contractor and Oft
cosigned by Installer, agreeing to repair or replace sprayed-on
fireproofing that has failed within the specified warranty period.
Failures include but are not limited to the following: so
1. Cracking, flaking, eroding in excess of specified requirements,
peeling, and delaminating of sprayed-on fireproofing from
substrates due to defective materials and workmanship within the 40
specified warranty period.
2. Not covered under the warranty are failures attributable to damage
by occupants and Owner's maintenance personnel, exposure to
an
environmental conditions other than those investigated and approved
during fire-response testing, and to other causes not reasonably
foreseeable under conditions of normal use.
w
C. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCEALED SPRAYED-ON FIREPROOFING MATERIALS
A. General: For concealed applications of sprayed-on fireproofing provide w
manufacturer's standard products complying with requirements indicated
in this article for material composition and physical properties
representative of installed products.
B. Material Composition: Provide composition indicated below:
SPRAYED-ON FIREPROOFING 07251 - 4
■w
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
Subpart F, Appendix A, Section 1, Polarized Light Microscopy.
F. Field-Constructed Mockups: Prior to installing sprayed-on fireproofing,
apply each product specified for exposed applications to demonstrate
both aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. Build
mockups to comply with the following requirements, using materials
indicated for final unit of Work.
1. Locate mockups on site in location or, if not indicated, directed
by the Owner' s Representative.
2 . Extent of Mockups: Approximately 10 sq. ft. of surface for each
product indicated.
3 . Notify Owner's Representative and Architect one week in advance of
the dates and times when mockups will be erected.
4 . Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and
workmanship.
5. Obtain Architect's acceptance of mockups before start of final unit
"a of Work.
6. Retain and maintain mockups during construction in undisturbed
condition as a standard for judging completed unit of Work.
A a. Accepted mockups in undisturbed condition at time of
Substantial Completion may become part of completed unit of
Work.
ps
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to Project site in original, unopened packages with
40 intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and
manufacturer; date of manufacture; shelf life, if applicable; and
fire-resistance ratings applicable to Project.
B. Use materials with limited shelf life within period indicated. Remove
from Project site and discard any materials whose shelf life has
expired.
C. Store sprayed-on fireproofing materials inside, under cover, above
ground, so they are kept dry until ready for use. Remove from Project
site and discard any materials that have deteriorated.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Do not install sprayed-on fireproofing when
ambient or substrate temperatures are 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and falling,
unless temporary protection and heat is provided to maintain
temperatures at or above this level for 24 hours before, during, and for
24 hours after applying sprayed-on fireproofing.
B. Ventilation: Ventilate sprayed-on fireproofing by natural means or,
where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation during and after
application until fireproofing dries thoroughly.
1.8 SEQUENCING
A. Sequence and coordinate application of sprayed-on fireproofing with
other related work specified in other Sections to comply with the
SPRAYED-ON FIREPROOFING 07251 - 3
.ft
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
w
3. Treatment of fireproofing after its application.
C. Product certificates from fireproofing manufacturers that each Oft
sprayed-on fireproofing product indicated for Project complies with
specified requirements including those for fire-test-response
characteristics and compatibility with adhesives, primers, and other ON
surface coatings on substrates indicated to receive fireproofing.
D. Results from tests and inspections performed by Owner-employed
independent testing agency will be reported promptly to Architect, ■m
Owner's Representative and Contractor.
E. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality
Assurance" article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. an
Include list of completed projects with project names, addresses, names
of Architects and Owners, and other information specified.
am
F. Research reports or evaluation reports of the model code organization
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction showing that sprayed-on
fireproofing products comply with building code in effect for Project.
as
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide sprayed-on fireproofing No
products identical to those used in assemblies tested for the following
fire-test-response characteristics, per test method indicated below, by
UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction. Identify packages (bags) containing fireproofing 'ft
with appropriate classification markings of applicable testing and
inspecting agency.
1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: As indicated by reference to
fire-resistive designs listed in UL "Fire Resistance Directory, "
for fire-resistive assemblies where sprayed-on fireproofing serves
as direct-applied protection, tested per ASTM E 119. ""A!
2 . Surface-Burning Characteristics: As indicated for each sprayed-on
fireproofing product required, tested per ASTM E 84.
B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer certified,
licensed, or otherwise qualified by the sprayed-on fireproofing
manufacturer as having the necessary experience, staff, and training to
install manufacturer's products per specified requirements. A
manufacturer's willingness to sell its sprayed-on fireproofing products
to the Contractor or to an Installer engaged by the Contractor does not
in itself confer qualification on the buyer.
C. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain sprayed-on fireproofing materials
from a single manufacturer for each different product required.
D. Owner will employ and pay a qualified independent testing agency to
perform field quality-control testing services specified in Part 3 of
this Section.
E. Provide fireproofing products containing no detectable asbestos as
determined according to the method specified in 40 CFR Part 763,
SPRAYED-ON FIREPROOFING 07251 - 2
do
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
SECTION 07251 - SPRAYED-ON FIREPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
00 the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this work. Note also all Addenda.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Concealed sprayed-on fireproofing.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that
relate to this Section:
1. Section 04200 "Unit Masonry" for masonry fireproofing.
2 . Section 05120 "Structural Steel" for surface conditions specified
for structural steel receiving sprayed-on fireproofing.
"a 3 . Section 07841 "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" .
4. Section 09255, "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for gypsum-board-based
fireproofing.
S. Section 09900 "Painting" for field priming structural steel prior
to applying sprayed-on fireproofing.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Concealed sprayed-on fireproofing refers to applications where
sprayed-on materials are applied to surfaces that are concealed from
view behind other construction when the Work is completed.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product data for each sprayed-on fireproofing product indicated.
1. Certification by manufacturers that products supplied comply with
Commonwealth of Massachusetts regulations controlling use of
volatile organic compounds (VOCs) .
B. Submittal data indicating the following:
1. Where and what kinds of surface preparations are required before
applying fireproofing.
2 . Extent of sprayed-on fireproofing for each different construction
u and fire-resistance rating including the following:
a. Applicable fire-resistive design designations of inspecting
and testing agency acceptable to authorities having
! " jurisdiction.
b. Minimum thicknesses needed to achieve required fire-resistance
ratings of structural components and assemblies.
SPRAYED-ON FIREPROOFING 07251 - 1
Oft
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #9607
on
a. Heavy duty reinforcing fabric unless otherwise indicated.
I. Apply finish and top coats over cured base coat in thickness specified ,o
by system manufacturer to produce a uniform finish of texture and color
matching approved sample.
J. Install joint sealant according to Shop Drawings. Comply with s*
requirements of Section 07901, "Joint Sealants", unless otherwise
indicated.
3 .4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION ox
A. Remove temporary covering and protection of other work. Promptly remove
protective coatings from window and door frames and any other surfaces
outside areas indicated to receive protective coating.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable rye
to Installer and system manufacturer that ensures system's being without
damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 07241 w,
so
Wo
oft
as
EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PM 07242 - 10
ew
No
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
*TART Ah TQ T MA
RE #96079
6. Cut insulation to fit openings, corners, and projections precisely
and to produce edges and shapes conforming to details indicated.
7. Rasp or sand flush entire surface of insulation to remove
irregularities projecting more than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) from surface
of insulation, and to remove yellowed areas due to sun exposure,
and smooth surface film created by extrusion process. Do not
create depressions deeper than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) .
8. Interrupt insulation where expansion joints are indicated or
required by system manufacturer.
9. Coordinate flashing installation with installation of insulation
to produce a wall system that does not allow water to penetrate
behind protective coating.
C. Install expansion joints at locations indicated and as follows:
wr
1. Where expansion or control joints occur in surface of construction
directly behind insulation.
4, 2 . Where system abuts dissimilar materials.
3 . Form joints for sealant application by leaving gaps between
adjoining insulation edges as well as between insulation edges and
dissimilar adjoining surfaces. Make gaps wide enough to produce
ww joint widths indicated after encapsulation of joint substrates with
base coat, reinforcing fabric, and finish coat.
D. Install control joints at locations indicated or, if not indicated, at
locations complying with the following criteria and approved by the
Architect:
OR 1. At a maximum spacing of 12 feet (3 .7 m) in any direction, with no
panel exceeding 144 sq. ft. (13 sq. m) in area.
2. At locations so that no panel has a width to length ratio of more
than 2-1/2 to 1.
3 . Where panels formed by system change in size, extend joints full
width or height of protective coating.
4 . Above and below door, window and louver openings.
E. Install trim accessories at locations indicated. Mechanically fasten
accessories to framing members, concrete, or masonry.
1. Corner beads and control joints may be attached to the insulation
with threaded plastic fasteners when approved by the system
manufacturer.
MW
F. Treat exposed edges of insulation to comply with system manufacturer' s
directions.
G. Cover insulation with reinforcing fabric and fasten through insulation
to framing members, concrete, or masonry.
H. Trowel-apply base coat over and into reinforcing fabric in thickness
specified by system manufacturer to produce a flush, uniform surface
with fabric fully embedded and prepared to receive finish coat.
1. Fully embed reinforcing fabric of type indicated below in wet base
coat to produce wrinkle-free installation with fabric continuous
at corners and lapped or otherwise treated at joints to comply with
system manufacturer's requirements.
EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PM 07242 - 9
am
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
behind system and deterioration of substrates. no
C. Substrate Preparation: Prepare and clean substrates to comply with
system manufacturer's requirements to obtain optimum bond between a%
substrate and adhesive for insulation.
1. Apply surface sealer over substrates where required by system
manufacturer for improving adhesion. am,
2. Apply surface sealer over gypsum sheathing substrates where
required by system manufacturer to protect sheathing from premature
degradation. Oft
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. General: Comply with system manufacturer's current published ar
instructions for installation of system as applicable to each type of
substrate indicated.
B. Mechanically attach insulation to substrate by method complying with am
system manufacturer's current requirements. Initially install
sufficient number of fasteners to hold insulation board in place prior
to application of reinforcing fabric. Install additional fasteners
after application of reinforcing fabric to comply with manufacturer's
requirements and spacing indicated below.
1. Space fasteners as indicated below: No
a. Vertically: Not more than 12 inches (305 mm) o.c. nor more
than 12 inches (305 mm) from bottom edge of starting course of
insulation board.
b. Horizontally: Not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. , and to
match stud spacing.
C. Secure mechanical fasteners to framing members behind sheathed
substrates so that they penetrate framing members 5/8 inch (16
mm) or more and recess flush with exterior surface of
insulation board.
d. Secure mechanical fasteners to masonry and concrete substrates
so that they penetrate substrate 1 inch (25.4 mm) or more and
recess flush with exterior surface of insulation board.
2. Apply insulation boards over dry substrates in courses with long
edges oriented horizontally. Begin first course from a level base
line and work upward. .s
3 . Stagger vertical joints in successive courses to produce running
bond pattern. Locate joints so that no piece of insulation is less
than 12 inches (300 mm) wide or 6 inches (150 mm) high. Offset
joints at least 6 inches (150 mm) from corners of window and door '
openings.
a. Offset joints of insulation at least 4 inches (100 mm) from �w
joints in sheathing.
4. Interlock ends at internal and external corners.
S. Abut boards tightly at joints within and between each course to so
produce flush, continuously even surfaces without gaps or raised
edges between insulation boards. If gaps occur, fill with
insulation cut to fit gaps exactly; insert without use of adhesive. .o
EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PM 07242 - 8
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
2 . For attachment to masonry and concrete substrates, provide hammer-
driven pin and predrilled expandable nylon sheath.
1R� I. Trim Accessories: Type as designated or required to suit conditions
indicated and to comply with system manufacturer's requirements,
manufactured from zinc alloy. Coordinate depth of accessories with
thickness of base and finish coats required.
1. Control Joints : Prefabricated, 1-piece type manufactured with
expanded metal flanges, formed to provide double keying action with
protective coating, extending only to face of insulation, with
removable tape on plaster face and 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) joint
sightline and bellows configuration as indicated below:
"a a. Shallow Configuration: Bellows extends to face of insulation
only.
2 . Corner Bead: Prefabricated small-nosed corner bead with expanded
metal flanges extending minimum of 2-7/8 inches (73 mm) from
corner.
3 . Casing Bead: Prefabricated 1-piece type for attachment to surface
of insulation or behind insulation, of depth required to suit
thickness of coating and, where attached behind insulation,
thickness of insulation as well.
J. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt
felt) , unperforated.
K. Joint sealants for expansion and control joints within the system as
specified in Section 07901, "Joint Sealants" .
2.3 MIXING
A. General: Comply with system manufacturer' s requirements for combining
and mixing materials. Do not introduce admixtures, water, or other
materials except as approved by system manufacturer. Mix materials in
clean containers. Use materials within time period specified by system
manufacturer or discard.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, to determine if they are in
satisfactory condition for installation of system. Notify Construction
Manager and do not proceed with installation of system until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3 .2 PREPARATION
ON
A. Protect contiguous work from moisture deterioration and soiling
resulting from application of systems. Provide temporary covering and
other protection needed to prevent spattering of exterior finish
coatings on other work.
B. Protect system, substrates, and wall construction behind them from
inclement weather during installation. Prevent infiltration of moisture
EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PM 07242 - 7
■w
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #9607
1219 mm) and in thickness indicated but not less than that allowed 'n
by system manufacturer, nor more than 4 inches (102 mm) .
D. Reinforcing Fabric: Balanced, alkali-resistant open-weave glass- fiber am
fabric treated for compatibility with other system materials, made from
continuous multiend strands with tensile strength of not less than 120
lb (535 N) and 140 lb (620 N) in warp and fill directions, respectively,
per ASTM D 5035 and complying with ASTM D 578, and of the following an
minimum weight:
1. Heavy Duty 22 oz./sq. yd. sw.
E. Base Coat Materials: System manufacturer's standard mixture complying
with the following requirements for material composition and method of
combining materials: me
1. Job-mixed formulation of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150,
Type I, natural color; clean, washed, silica sand complying with so
ASTM C 897 and system manufacturer's requirements; alkali-resistant
chopped glass fibers; and polymer emulsion admixture for base coat
use.
2 . Factory-blended dry formulation of portland cement, natural sand
aggregate, alkaline-resistant chopped glass fibers, and dry polymer
admixture to which only water is added at the job site.
3 . Either job-mixed or factory-blended formulation indicated above.
F. Polymer-Modified Portland Cement Finish Coat Materials: System
manufacturer's standard mixture complying with the following
requirements for material composition and method of combining materials:
1. Job-mixed formulation of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150,
Type I, natural color or white; clean, washed, bagged silica sand
complying with ASTM C 897 and system manufacturer's requirements;
color-fast mineral pigments; and system manufacturer's standard
polymer emulsion admixture for finish coat use.
2 . Factory-mixed formulation of portland cement complying with ASTM
C 150, Type I, natural color; hydrated lime complying with ASTM C
206, Type S; natural sand aggregate complying with ASTM C 897;
color-fast mineral pigments; and system manufacturer's standard
polymer admixture.
3. Job-mixed or factory-mixed formulation indicated above.
4. Top Coat for Polymer-Modified Portland Cement Finish Coat: Where
required by system manufacturer, provide factory-mixed pigmented
polymer-based formulation.
G. Water: Clean and potable.
40
H. Mechanical Fasteners: System manufacturer's standard corrosion-
resistant fastener assemblies, complete with system manufacturer's
standard washer attachments, selected for properties of pullout,
tensile, and shear strength required to resist design loads of
application indicated, capable of pulling fastener head below surface
of insulation board, and of the following description:
.ot
1. For attachment to steel studs and light-gage steel framing members
not less than 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm) in thickness, provide Type S-12
Bugle Head corrosion-resistant steel drill screws.
EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PM 07242 - 6
w�,
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB 496079
manufacturer's labels identifying products legible and intact.
B. Store materials inside and under cover; keep them dry and protected from
the weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, aging, corrosion,
damaging temperatures, damage from construction traffic, and other
causes.
1. Stack insulation boards flat and off the ground.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Do not install system when ambient outdoor
temperatures are 40 deg F (4 deg C) and falling unless temporary
protection and heat are provided to maintain ambient temperatures above
40 deg F (4 deg C) during installation of wet materials and for 24 hours
after installation or longer to allow them to become thoroughly dry and
weather resistant.
1.9 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate installation of system with related units of Work specified
in other Sections to ensure that wall assemblies, including flashing,
trim, and joint sealants, are protected against damage from the effects
of weather, age, corrosion, and other causes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Class
PB system of one of the following:
1. Dryvit Systems, Inc.
2 . Senergy Inc.
3 . STO Industries, Inc.
4. Thoro System Products.
2 .2 MATERIALS
A. Compatibility: Provide board insulation, reinforcing fabric, base an
finish coat materials, mechanical anchors, and accessories that are
compatible with one another and approved for use by system manufacturer.
B. Provide color and texture of protective coating to comply with the
following requirements:
1. Provide Architect's selections from manufacturer's full range of
colors and textures for type of finish coat indicated.
r C. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation: Rigid, cellular thermal
insulation with closed cells and integral high-density skin, formed by
the expansion of polystyrene base resin in an extrusion process to
comply with ASTM C 578 for Type IV; approved by system manufacturer for
material qualities including corner squareness and other dimensional
tolerances.
to 1. Provide insulation in boards not more than 24 by 48 inches (610 by
EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PM 07242 - 5
OR
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #9607
that are identical to those tested with the following fire-test-response M
characteristics, as determined by testing per ASTM test method indicated
below, by UL or other testing and inspecting agencies acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate .era
markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
1. Flame Spread of Insulation Board and Finish Coats: 25 or less when
tested individually per ASTM E 84. am
2 . Smoke Developed of Insulation Board and Finish Coats: 450 or less
when tested individually per ASTM E 84 .
3 . Full-Scale Fire Test: Tested mockup, in the form indicated below, ,
that represents completed wall assembly of which system is a part,
shows no tendency to propagate flame over the surface or through
finish to the core, or to cause delamination of finish when
vertically mounted exterior face is exposed 15 minutes to a fire
source using spread of flame test per ASTM E 108 modified for
testing vertical walls as indicated below:
am
a. Provide 2 panels, 72 by 120 inches (1830 by 3050 mm) ,
consisting of protective finish coating and 4-inch- (102-mm-)
thick insulation applied to 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) thick gypsum
board, cured for 28 days, with protective finish coating
removed to leave surface of insulation exposed on one panel in
an area 4 inches (102 mm) high by 24 inches (610 mm) wide
centered 24 inches (610 mm) above the bottom edge of panel. ,
4 . Radiant Heat Exposure, Unrestricted Installation: Tolerable level
of incident radiant heat energy of at least 12 .5 kW/sq. m when
tested according to BOCA National Building Code Section 1406.2.
S. Fire Resistance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide
materials and construction identical to those of assemblies whose
fire resistance has been determined per ASTM E 119 by testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
E. Field-Constructed Mock-Up: Prior to installation of system, erect
mock-ups for each form of wall construction and finish required to *A
verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate
esthetic effects including those related to execution. Build mock-ups
to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for
final work:
1. Locate mock-ups on site in location and of size indicated or, if
not indicated, as directed by the Architect.
2. Notify Architect one week in advance of the dates and times when
mock-ups will be erected.
3 . Demonstrate the proposed range of color, texture, and workmanship
to be expected in completed work.
4 . Obtain Architect's acceptance of mock-ups before start of final
work.
5. Accepted mock-up may be incorporated in to the Work.
a. When directed, demolish mock-ups not accepted and remove from
Project site.
ww
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products in original, unopened packages and containers with
EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PM 07242 - 4
wi►
pe
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTH_A_MPTQN MA KB #96079
10. Negative Wind Load Performance: Sample assembly, 48 by 48 inches
(1220 by 1220 mm) in size, consisting of studs, sheathing, and f-
inch- (25.4-mm-) thick exterior insulation and finish system, shows
04 capability to withstand wind loads indicated when tested per ASTM
E 330.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract
and Division 1 Specification Sections.
Mau
B. Product data for each component of exterior insulation and finish
systems.
C. Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of system including
plans, elevations, sections, details of components, joint locations and
configurations within system and between system and construction
so penetrating it, and attachments to construction behind system.
D. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer' s
standard color charts and small-scale samples indicating available
textural choices.
E. Samples for verification purposes in the form of 2-foot-square panels
"o for each finish, color, and texture specified. Prepare samples using
same tools and techniques intended for actual work.
1. Incorporate within each sample a typical control joint filled with
40 sealant of color indicated or selected.
F. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in "Quality
oft Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience.
Include list of completed projects with project names, addresses, names
of Architects and Owners, plus other information specified.
G. Installer certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that Installers
comply with requirements under "Quality Assurance" Article.
00 H. Product test reports from a qualified independent testing agency
evidencing compliance of components and systems with requirements based
on comprehensive testing of current products.
AMr 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in manufacturing
systems that are similar to those indicated for this Project and that
have a record of successful in-service performance.
B. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who is
certified in writing by system manufacturer as qualified to install
manufacturer's system.
C. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain materials for system from either
a single manufacturer or manufacturers approved by the system
manufacturer as compatible with other system components.
D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide materials and construction
EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PM 07242 - 3
..
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
effectiveness or other degradation of system and assemblies behind MW
system, including substrates, supporting wall construction, and
interior finish.
Aft
B. Physical Properties of Class PM, Type A System: Provide exterior
insulation and finish systems whose physical properties and structural
performance comply with the following requirements when tested per
methods referenced. OR
1. Accelerated Weathering Characteristics: Sample of size suitable
for test equipment and consisting of 1-inch- (25.4-mm-) thick Aw
exterior insulation and finish system, cured for 28 days, shows no
evidence of cracking, flaking, peeling, blistering, or deleterious
effects after testing for 2, 000 hours per ASTM G 23 Method 1 or
ASTM G 53 . on
2. Water Penetration: Sample, 24 by 48 inches (609.6 by 1219.2 mm)
in size, consisting of 1-inch- (25.4-mm-) thick exterior insulation
and finish system, cured for 28 days, shows no evidence of visible No
leaks, no blistering, cracking, or wear of the finish coat when
tested per FS TT-C-555 or ASTM E 331.
3 . Salt-Spray Resistance: Sample, minimum of 4 by 6 inches (101.6 by
152.4 mm) in size, consisting of 1-inch- (25.4-mm-) thick exterior
insulation and finish system, cured for 28 days, shows no
deleterious effects after testing for 300 hours per ASTM B 117.
4. Absorption-Freeze Resistance: Sample, 3 by 5 inches (76.2 by 127.0
mm) in size, consisting of 1-inch- (25.4-mm-) thick exterior
insulation and finish system coated on one side with base and
finish coats including reinforcing fabric, cured for 28 days, shows
no visible change and negligible weight gain when subjected to 50 d.►
cycles of 20 hours' freezing at 16 deg F (8.9 deg C) and 4 hours
of thawing in water of 75 deg F (23 .9 deg C) , plus or minus 10 deg
F (5.5 deg C) per ASTM C 67.
5. Mildew Resistance: Sample, consisting of finish coat applied to
2-by-2-inch (50.8-by-50.8-mm) glass slides per manufacturer's
instructions, cured for 28 days, shows no mildew growth when tested
per MIL Standard 810C, Method 508.
6. Abrasion Resistance: Sample, consisting of 1-inch- (25.4-mm-)
thick exterior insulation and finish system cured for 28 days,
shows no evidence of cracking, checking, or loss of film integrity
after exposure to 500 liters of sand when tested per ASTM D 968,
Method A.
7. Water Vapor Transmission of Coating: Sample, consisting of
protective coating including base and finish coats plus reinforcing
fabric, shows minimum permeability greater than that of insulation
and a maximum of 7.5 perms (430 ng/Pa x s x sq. m) when tested per
ASTM E 96, Water Method, Procedure B.
8. Water Vapor Transmission of Insulation: Sample of 1-inch- (25.4-
mm-) thick insulation shows maximum permeability of 1 perm (57
ng/Pa x s x sq. m) when tested per ASTM E 96, Water Method,
Procedure B. s�
9. Impact Resistance: Sample, consisting of 1-inch- (25.4-mm-) thick
exterior insulation finish system when constructed, conditioned,
and tested per EIMA 101.86, produces the following impact
classification and range: w�
a. High Impact Resistance: 90-150 inch-lb (10-17 N-m) .
EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PM 07242 - 2
on
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
go SECTION 07242 - EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PM
PART 1 - GENERAL
04
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this Work. Note also all Addenda.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Applications over gypsum sheathing.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that
relate to this section:
1. Section 09255, "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for gypsum sheathing
substrates behind system.
2 . Section 07901, "Joint Sealants" for sealing joints in system with
elastomeric joint sealants.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Exterior insulation and finish systems refer to exterior assemblies
composed of an inner layer of board insulation and an outer layer
composed of a glass-fiber-mesh-reinforced base coat applied directly to
board insulation and a textured protective finish coat. These
assemblies are applied to supporting substrates of construction
indicated.
00 B. Designation PM for class of exterior insulation and finish systems
specified in this Section is based on the classification developed by
the EIFS Industry Members Association (EIMA) .
C. System in this Section refers to Class PM exterior insulation and finish
systems.
As D. System manufacturer refers to the manufacturer of exterior insulation
and finish systems.
1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide systems complying with the following performance
requirements:
1. Bond Integrity: Free from bond failure within system components
or between system and supporting wall construction, resulting from
exposure to fire, wind loads, weather, or other in-service
conditions.
2 . Weathertightness: Resistant to water penetration from exterior
into system and assemblies behind it or through them into interior
of building that results in deterioration of thermal-insulating
EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS - CLASS PM 07242 - 1
am
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
3 .7 PROTECTION
A. General: Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage
due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes.
Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation will be
subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent
construction immediately after installation.
END OF SECTION 07210
wAr
w
wRe
ewe
so
no
BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 6
wMA.
W*
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #96079
C. Apply a single layer of insulation of required thickness, unless
otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.
! 3.4 INSTALLATION OF PERIMETER AND UNDER-SLAB INSULATION
A. On vertical surfaces, set units in adhesive applied in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions. Use type of adhesive recommended by
manufacturer of insulation.
B. Protect below-grade insulation on vertical surfaces (from damage during
MR back-filling) by application of protection board. Set in adhesive in
accordance with recommendations of manufacturer of insulation.
3 .5 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION
A. Apply insulation units to substrate by method indicated, complying with
manufacturer's recommendations. If no specific method is indicated,
r bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to
provide permanent placement and support of units.
B. Set vapor retarder faced units with vapor retarder to warm side of
construction, except as otherwise indicated. Do not obstruct
ventilation spaces, except for firestopping.
OR 1. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each
continuous area of insulation to surrounding construction to ensure
airtight installation.
-00 C. Set reflective, foil-faced units accurately with not less than 0.75-inch
air space in front of foil as indicated.
so 3 .6 INSTALLATION OF SAFING INSULATION
A. Install safing insulation to fill gap between edge of concrete floor
slab and back of exterior spandrel glass on safing clips spaced as
04 needed to support insulation but not further apart then 24 inches o.c.
Cut safing insulation wider than gap to be filled to ensure compression
fit and seal joint between insulation and edge of slab with caulking
approved by safing insulation manufacturer for this purpose. Leave no
voids in completed installation.
1
BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 5
MMW
oft
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
(23 .9 deg C) . so
B. Caulking Compound: Material approved by manufacturer of safing
insulation for sealing joint between foil backing of safing insulation Am
and edge of concrete floor slab against penetration of smoke.
C. Safing Clips: Galvanized steel safing clips approved by manufacturer
of safing insulation for holding safing insulation in place. a
2.4 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS
A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability w
to bond insulation or mechanical anchors securely to substrates
indicated without damaging or corroding either insulation, anchors, or
substrates. no
B. Adhesively Attached Pin Anchors: Perforated plate, 2 inches square,
welded to projecting pin, with self-locking washer, complying with the an
following requirements:
1. Plate: Zinc-plated steel, 0.106 inch thick.
2 . Pin: Copper-coated low carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106 inches wr
in diameter, length to suit depth of insulation indicated and, with
washer in place, to hold insulation tightly to substrate behind
insulation.
3 . Self-Locking Washer: Mild steel, 0.016 inch thick, size as ...
required to hold insulation securely.
a. Where spindles will be exposed to human contact after
installation, protect ends with capped self-locking washers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions with Installer present, for compliance
with requirements of the Sections in which substrates and related work
are specified and to determine if other conditions affecting performance
of insulation are satisfactory. Do not proceed with installation of
insulation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3 .2 PREPARATION
A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapor
retarders, including removal of projections that might puncture vapor
retarders.
.w
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's instructions applicable to
products and application indicated. If printed instructions are not
available or do not apply to project conditions, consult manufacturer's
technical representative for specific recommendations before proceeding
with installation of insulation.
B. Extend insulation full thickness as indicated to envelop entire area to
be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions, and fill voids
with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. .0
BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 4
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON MA KB #9 6 0 7 9
C. Owens/Corning Fiberglas Corp.
3. Manufacturers of Semi-Refractory Fiber Insulation:
00
a. Cafco Industries Ltd.
b. Fibrex Inc.
C. USG: Thermafiber Div. , USG Interiors, Inc.
00
2 .2 INSULATING MATERIALS
OR A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and
with referenced standards.
1. Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated, selected
0" from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths.
B. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation: Rigid, cellular polystyrene
�w thermal insulation with closed-cells and integral high density skin,
formed by the expansion of polystyrene base resin in an extrusion
process to comply with ASTM C 578 for type indicated; with 5-year aged
r-values of 5.4 and 5 at 40 and 75 deg F (4 .4 and 23 .9 deg C) ,
respectively; and as follows:
1. Type VII, 2 .2 pcf min. density.
OR 2 . Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread and smoke
developed values of 75 and 450, respectively.
C. Unfaced Semi-Refractory Fiber Board Insulation: Thermal insulation
produced by combining semi-refractory mineral fibers manufactured from
slag with thermosetting resin binders to comply with ASTM C 612 for
class indicated; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics; and
W as follows:
1. Low Density Semi-Rigid Board: Class 1 and 2, nominal density of
4 .0 pcf, r-value of 4.0 at 75 deg F (23 .9 deg C) .
2 . Rigid Board: Class 4, nominal density of 8.0 pcf, r-value of 4.35
at 75 deg F (23 .9 deg C) .
3 . Fiber Color: Regular color, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Faced Mineral Fiber Blanket/Batt Insulation: Thermal insulation
produced by combining mineral fibers of type described below with
thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM C 665 for Type III, Class A
(blankets with reflective vapor-retarder membrane facing with flame
spread of 25 or less) ; foil-scrim-kraft vapor-retarder membrane on one
face, and as follows:
1. Mineral Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass or slag.
2 . Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread and smoke
developed values of 25 and 50, respectively.
2.3 SAFING INSULATION AND ACCESSORIES
A. Semi-Refractory Fiber Board Safing Insulation: Semi-rigid boards
designed for use as a fire stop at openings between edge of slab and
exterior wall panels, produced by combining semi-refractory mineral
fiber manufactured from slag with thermosetting resin binders to comply
with ASTM C 612, Class 1 and 2; nominal density of 4.0 pcf; passing
ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics; r-value of 4 .0 at 75 deg F
BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 3
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
of current products.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
+s�
A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide insulation materials
identical to those whose indicated fire performance characteristics have
been determined per the ASTM test method indicated below, by UL or other
testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having am
jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable
testing and inspecting organization.
1. Surface Burning Characteristic: ASTM E 84 . w
2 . Fire Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119.
3 . Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.
No
B. Single-Source Responsibility for Insulation Products: Obtain each type
of building insulation from a single source with resources to provide
products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties
without delaying progress of the Work. am
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
go
A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration
by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry
location. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling,
storage, and protection during installation.
B. Protect plastic insulation as follows:
1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period
of installation and concealment.
2 . Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic
insulating materials to project site ahead of installation time. Am
3 . Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as
rapidly as possible in each area of construction.
oft
C. Fire Precaution: Do not store rigid insulation or similar combustible
materials inside the building or within 15 feet of any structure on the
site. Observe proper fire precautions during installation of
insulation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2 .1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
insulation products of one of the following:
1. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation:
a. Amoco Foam Products Co. wo
b. Dow: The Dow Chemical Company.
C. UC Industries, Inc.
2 . Manufacturers of Glass Fiber Insulation:
a. CertainTeed Corp.
b. Manville: Building Insulations Div. , Manville Sales Corp.
BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 2
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
F NORTHAMPTON MA KB #9 6 0 7 9
SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this work. Note also all Addenda.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Foundation wall insulation (supporting backfill) .
2 . Safing insulation.
3 . Building insulation in batt form.
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that
relate to this section:
1. Section 02711 "Foundation Drainage Systems" for drainage panels and
rigid insulation over composite sheet waterproofing.
2 . Section 04200 "Unit Masonry" for polystyrene board insulation
installed in cavity walls and masonry cells.
3 . Section 07242 "Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems - Class PM"
40 for insulation installed as part of these systems.
4 . Section 07533 "Single-Ply CSPE Membrane Roofing, Flashing and Sheet
Metal" for roof insulation specified as part of roofing
construction.
S. Section 07841 "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for insulation
installed as part of fire and smoke resistance assemblies.
6. Section 09255 "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for sound attenuation
insulation installed as part of metal-framed wall and partition
assemblies.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Thermal Resistivity: Where the thermal resistivity of insulation
products are designated by "r-values, " they represent the reciprocal of
thermal conductivity (k-values) . Thermal conductivity is the rate of
heat flow through a homogenous material exactly 1 inch thick. Thermal
resistivities are expressed by the temperature difference in degrees F
between the two exposed faces required to cause one BTU to flow through
one square foot per hour at mean temperatures indicated.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract
and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product test reports from and based on tests performed by qualified
independent testing laboratory evidencing compliance of insulation
products with requirements including r-values (aged values for plastic
foam insulations) , fire performance characteristics, perm ratings, water
absorption ratings, and other properties, based on comprehensive testing
BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 1
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA
KB #96079
temperature, rubberized-asphalt composite sheet.
3 . On substrates to receive hot-mixed asphalt paving, install heavy-
duty, rubberized-asphalt composite sheet.
D. Apply sheet membrane from low point to high point of deck to ensure side
laps shed water.
E. Apply continuous sheet membrane over membrane strips bridging each type
of joint to dimensions indicated or required by manufacturer.
111�t F. Seal exposed edges of membrane terminations not concealed by metal
counterflashings or ending in reglets with mastic or sealant.
G. Install sheet membrane and auxiliary materials to tie in adjacent
waterproofing.
H. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in waterproofing not meeting
requirements. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with
sheet membrane extending 6 inches (150 mm) beyond repaired areas in all
directions.
3 .4 PROTECTION COURSE INSTALLATION
A. Install protection course over waterproofing membrane using tape or
adhesive according to manufacturer' s written instructions and before
commencing subsequent construction operations. Minimize exposure of
membrane.
3 .5 INSULATION INSTALLATION
A. Installation of rigid insulation over composite sheet waterproofing is
by Section 02711, "Foundation Drainage Systems" .
3 .6 DRAINAGE PANEL INSTALLATION
,tom A. Installation of drainage panels over rigid insulation is by Section
02711, "Foundation Drainage Systems" .
3 .7 PROTECTING AND CLEANING
A. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during application and
remainder of construction period, according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Protect installed insulation from damage due to ultraviolet light
exposure, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings
where insulation will be subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and
protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.
C. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning
agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected
construction.
END OF SECTION 07111
COMPOSITE SHEET WATERPROOFING 07111 - 7
aft
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
contaminants from concrete. A"
D. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb,
aggregate pockets, holes, and other voids. 04
E. Prepare, fill, prime, and treat joints and cracks in substrate. Remove
dust and dirt from joints and cracks according to ASTM D 4258.
1. Install membrane strip and center over construction and control
joints and cracks exceeding a width of 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) .
F. Inside Corners: Prepare, prime, and treat inside corners according to ma
waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Install membrane strip centered over vertical inside corners. I
Install 3/4-inch (19-mm) fillets of liquid membrane on horizontal
inside corners and as follows:
so
a. At footing-to-wall intersections, extend liquid membrane each
direction from corner or install membrane strip centered over
corner.
b. At deck-to-wall intersections, extend liquid membrane or sheet MR
membrane flashing onto deck waterproofing and to finished
height of sheet flashing.
G. Outside Corners: Prepare and treat outside corners according to up
waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Install strip of membrane 12 inches (300 mm) wide, centered over 4k
corner.
H. Prepare, treat, and seal vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations
and penetrations through waterproofing and at drains and protrusions 40
according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions.
1. At expansion joints and discontinuous deck-to-wall or deck-to-deck aft
joints, bridge and cover with sheet membrane strips.
3 .3 SELF-ADHERING COMPOSITE SHEET APPLICATION
A. Install self-adhering composite sheet according to waterproofing
manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Apply primer to substrate at required rate and allow to dry. Limit
priming to areas that will be covered by waterproofing membrane in same
day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours.
C. Apply and firmly adhere sheet membrane over area to receive
waterproofing. Accurately align sheets and maintain uniform 2-1/2-inch-
(64-mm-) minimum lap widths and end laps. Overlap and seal seams and w�
stagger end laps to ensure watertight installation.
1. When ambient and substrate temperatures exceed 40 deg F (5 deg C) ,
install manufacturer's standard rubberized-asphalt composite sheet.
2 . When ambient and substrate temperatures range between 25 and 40
deg F (minus 4 and 5 deg C) , install manufacturer's standard, low-
COMPOSITE SHEET WATERPROOFING 07111 - 6
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON 'Mpg KB #96079
F. Mastic, Adhesives, and Tape: Liquid mastic and adhesives, and adhesive
tapes recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.
G. Penetration Seal: Self-adhering reinforced membrane, 2-1/2 inches (64
mm) wide, with a tack-free protective adhesive coating on 1 side and a
release film on self-adhering side.
H. Protection Course: As follows:
1. Semirigid sheets of fiberglass or mineral-reinforced asphaltic core,
pressure laminated between 2 asphalt-saturated fibrous liners and as
follows:
a. Thickness : 1/8 inch (3 mm) , nominal, for vertical
applications; 1/4 inch (6 mm) , nominal, elsewhere.
2 .4 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANELS
A. Composite drainage panels, 3-dimensional, nonbiodegradable, manufactured
with a permeable geotextile bonded to molded-plastic-sheet drainage core
and designed to effectively convey water.
1. Geotextile: Nonwoven geotextile fabric of polypropylene or
polyester fibers, or combination of both.
2 . Geotextile: Woven geotextile fabric of polypropylene or polyester
fibers, or combination of both.
3 . Minimum Flow Rate: 15 gpm/foot at a hydraulic gradient of 1.0 and
3600-psf (172-kPa) normal pressure when tested according to
ASTM D 4716.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3 .1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions under which waterproofing
# systems will be applied, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements. Notify Construction Manager and do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Do not proceed with installation until after minimum concrete curing
period recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.
2. Verify substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for
capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263 .
3 . Notify Architect in writing of anticipated problems using
waterproofing over substrate.
3 .2 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrate according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for
waterproofing application.
B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent
spillage affecting other construction.
C. Remove grease, oil, form release agents, paints, and other penetrating
COMPOSITE SHEET WATERPROOFING 07111 - 5
aft
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON. MA KB #96079
PART 2 - PRODUCTS in
2 . 1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the
following:
1. Heavy-Duty, Rubberized-Asphalt Composite Sheet:
a. QSC 711; Carlisle Corporation, Carlisle Coatings &
Waterproofing Inc.
wet
b. Bituthene 5000; Grace: W.R. Grace & Co.
C. Mel-Dek; Meadows: W.R. Meadows, Inc.
d. Miradri 700; Nicolon/Mirafi Inc.
2 .2 SELF-ADHERING COMPOSITE SHEET
A. Heavy-Duty, Rubberized-Asphalt Composite Sheet: One of the following:
1. 65-mil- (1.6-mm-) thick self-adhering sheet consisting of 53 to 56
mils (1.3 to 1.4 mm) of rubberized asphalt laminated to a heat-
resistant, 9- to 12-mil- (0.2- to 0.3-mm-) thick woven polypropylene '■�*
geotextile with release liner on adhesive side.
2 . Physical Properties: Provide waterproofing complying with the
following:
r�
a. Tensile Strength, Membrane: 250 lbf (1112 N) minimum;
ASTM D 882 .
b. Pliability: Unaffected when bent 180 degrees over a 1/4-inch *��+
(6.4-mm) mandrel at minus 15 deg F (minus 26 deg C) ;
ASTM D 146.
C. Puncture Resistance, Mesh: 200 lbf (890 N) minimum;
ASTM E 154.
2 .3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A. General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by waterproofing
manufacturer for intended use and compatible with waterproofing sheet
membrane.
1. Furnish liquid-type auxiliary materials that meet State of
Massachusetts VOC limits.
B. Primer: Liquid primer recommended by manufacturer of sheet waterproofing
material for substrate.
C. Sheet Flashing: Self-adhering, rubberized-asphalt composite sheet of
same material, construction, and thickness as waterproofing sheet
membrane.
D. Liquid Membrane: Elastomeric, 2-component, liquid, cold fluid-applied, ..e
trowel grade or low viscosity as recommended by waterproofing
manufacturer for application.
E. Patching Membrane: Low-viscosity, 2-component, asphalt-modified coating.
COMPOSITE SHEET WATERPROOFING 07111 - 4
oft
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTIAMPTON, MA KB #96079
B. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain waterproofing materials from a
single manufacturer regularly engaged in manufacturing waterproofing.
C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site prior to
commencement of Work as directed by the Owner's Representative.
1. Before installing waterproofing, meet with the Owner's
Representative, Architect, consultants, independent testing agency,
waterproofing manufacturer, and other concerned entities.
2 . Review requirements for waterproofing, including surface preparation
specified under other Sections, substrate condition and
pretreatment, minimum curing period, forecasted weather conditions,
special details and sheet flashings, installation procedures,
" inspection and testing procedures, and protection and repairs.
3 . Notify participants at least 7 days before conference.
410 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to Project site in original packages with seals
unbroken, labeled with manufacturer's name, product, date of manufacture,
and directions for storage.
B. Store materials in their original undamaged packages in a clean, dry,
protected location and within temperature range required by waterproofing
manufacturer. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Conditions: Apply waterproofing within range of ambient
and substrate temperatures recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.
Do not apply waterproofing to a damp or wet substrate.
1. Do not apply waterproofing in snow, rain, fog, or mist.
B. Maintain adequate ventilation during preparation and application of
waterproofing materials.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall
not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other
provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run
concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under
requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by waterproofing
manufacturer and Installer agreeing to repair or replace waterproofing
that does not meet requirements or that does not remain watertight during
op the specified warranty period. Warranty does not include failure of
waterproofing due to failure of substrate prepared and treated according
to requirements or formation of new joints and cracks in substrate
exceeding 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) in width.
1. Warranty Period: 5 years after date of Substantial Completion.
COMPOSITE SHEET WATERPROOFING 07111 - 3
40
NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB #96079
1.3 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Below-grade wall waterproofing.
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that
relate to this Section:
1. Section 02711, "Foundation Drainage Systems" for drainage systems
over rigid insulation over composite sheet waterproofing.
2. Section 03300, "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for concrete placement,
curing, and finishing.
3. Section 05810, "Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies" for expansion-
joint cover assemblies and installation.
4. Section 07901, "Joint Sealants" for joint sealant materials and
installation.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Provide waterproofing that prevents the passage of liquid water
under hydrostatic pressure and complies with requirements as demonstrated �.
by testing performed by an independent testing agency of manufacturer's
current sheet membrane.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. General : Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions
of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.
B. Product Data for each type of waterproofing specified, including
manufacturer's printed instructions for evaluating, preparing, and
treating substrate, technical data, and tested physical and performance
properties.
C. Shop Drawings showing locations and extent of waterproofing, including
details for substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations,
tie-ins with adjoining construction, and other termination conditions.
D. Samples, 3-by-6-inch (75-by-150-mm) minimum size, of each waterproofing
material required for Project.
E. Installer certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that Installers
comply with requirements under the "Quality Assurance" Article.
F. Product test reports from a qualified independent testing agency
evidencing compliance of waterproofing with requirements and other
physical properties reported by manufacturer based on comprehensive
testing of products according to current standard test methods within
previous 5 years. no
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who is
certified in writing by waterproofing manufacturer as qualified to
install manufacturer's waterproofing.
COMPOSITE SHEET WATERPROOFING 07111 - 2
go NORTHAMPTON HIGH SCHOOL ADDITIONS AND RENOVATIONS
NORTHAMPTON, MA KB 496079
SECTION 07111 - COMPOSITE SHEET WATERPROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 TIME, MANNER AND REQUIREMENTS FOR FILING SUB-BIDS
A. Sub-Bids shall be submitted in accordance with the provisions of General
Laws, Chapter 149, Section 44A to 44I, inclusive, as amended.
B. Sub-Bids for work under this Section shall be received at the Council
Chambers at Town Hall, 210 Main Street, Northampton, MA 01060, until 2:00
p.m. local time on February 9, 1999, at which time all filed Sub-Bids
shall be opened, read aloud, and duly recorded.
MW C. Sub-Bids shall be submitted on forms identical to those contained in
Bidding Requirements: Bid Form for Sub-Bidder. The Bid Forms attached
hereto are for information only and shall not be detached, filled in, or
executed. All Sub-Bids shall be submitted on the FORM FOR SUB-BID
furnished by the Awarding Authority as required by Section 44G of Chapter
149 of the General Laws, as amended. Sub-Bids Forms shall be completely
filled in and all Sub-Bids which are incomplete, conditional, obscure,
'! or which contain any additions not called for will be rejected.
D. Sub-Bids filed with the Awarding Authority shall be accompanied by a Bid
Deposit in the form of a certified check or a treasurer's or cashier' s
check issued by a responsible bank or trust company, payable to the City
of Northampton. A bid bond shall be:
1. On a form satisfactory to the Awarding Authority.
2 . With a surety company qualified to do business in the Commonwealth
and satisfactory to the Awarding Authority.
3 . Conditioned upon the faithful performance by the principal of the
agreements contained in the Bid. The amount of such bid deposit
shall be five percent (5%) of the value of the Bid.
E. Sub-Bids for work under this Section shall be for the complete work
required as specified and as shown on the drawings.
F. Sub-Bidders are directed to the Instructions to Bidders, and to the
requirements that all bidders visit the site to determine the scope of
work required under this Section.
G. Sub-Bidders must comply with all provisions of Division 1, General
Requirements, in the same manner as the General Contractor.
H. Work to be done under this Filed Sub-Bid is included in the Contract
Documents as listed in LOD-1 through LOD-5 (List of Drawings) .
1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Instructions to Bidders, AIA Document A201, "The General Conditions of
the Contract for Construction, " 14th Edition, 1987, the Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1, General Requirements, are a part of
this Section and shall be binding on the Contractor and/or Subcontractor
who performs this work. Note also all Addenda.
COMPOSITE SHEET WATERPROOFING 07111 - 1
16770 INTEGRATED SCHOOL COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK SYSTEM
.; 16772 DATA AND VIDEO CABLING SYSTEMS
16773 SOUND SYSTEMS
16780 THEATRICAL DIMMING SYSTEM
16790 DRAMA LAB LIGHTING SYSTEM
1
1
a
�i
-s
w
TOC-5
TABLE OF CONTENTS
._, LOD-1
NORTHAMPTON,HIGH SCHOOL ADI)',DTMONS?ANDv.RENOVr,T'ONS
N6RTHAY.PTON X
11062 STAGE CURTAINS
11132 PROJECTION SCREENS All
11160 LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT
11400 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT
11452 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES
11482 SCOREBOARDS
11491 GYMNASIUM EQUIPMENT
11500 ART ROOM KILN
11610 LABORATORY FUME HOODS
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
12345 LABORATORY CASEWORK
12348 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT
12511 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS
12690 FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES
12710 FIXED AUDIENCE SEATING
12760 TELESCOPING BLEACHERS
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
13050 MODULAR PRESSBOX
13125 PERMANENT GRANDSTAND SEATING SYSTEM
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS
14240 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
15010 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL
15050 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS - MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
15160 BASIC MATERIALS - SEISMIC RESTRAINT AND VIBRATION ISOLATION FOR MECHANICAL
15250 BASIC MATERIALS - MECHANICAL INSULATION
15300 FIRE PROTECTION TRADE WORK
15400 PLUMBING TRADE WORK
15410 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT AND FIXTURES
15500 HVAC TRADE WORK
15510 HVAC EQUIPMENT - FLUID HANDLING
15550 HVAC EQUIPMENT - HEAT GENERATION
15650 HVAC EQUIPMENT - REFRIGERATION
15850 BASIC MATERIALS - AIR HANDLING
15880 BASIC MATERIALS - AIR DISTRIBUTION
15950 CONTROL TRADE WORK
15951 CONTROL EQUIPMENT - VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
15990 BASIC MATERIALS - ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
16001 ELECTRICAL FILED SUB-BID
16010 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK
16050 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS - ELECTRICAL
16160 SEISMIC AND VIBRATION ISOLATION / ELECTRICAL
16400 SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION
16450 ELECTRICAL GROUNDING
16500 LIGHTING
16501 EXTERIOR SPORTS LIGHTING
16600 SPECIAL SYSTEMS
16620 STANDBY POWER GENERATOR SYSTEMS
16720 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
16725 SECURITY SYSTEMS
16740 LIGHTNING PROTECTION
16750 LOW VOLTAGE RACEWAY DISTRIBUTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC-4
Additions & Renovations
Northampton High School
Northampton, Massachusetts
Northampton High School Building Committee Awarding Authority
clo: Northampton Public Schools Dr. Lawrence Fink, Chairman
212 Main Street Joseph Misterka,Asst. Superintendent
Northampton, MA 02360
(413) 486-6970
Kaestle Boos Associates, Inc. Architect-Michael J. McKeon,AIA
416 Slater Road Structural-Richard Gossoo, PE
New Britain, CT 06050 Landscape-Richard Webb,ASLA
(860) 229-0361
vanZelm,Heywood& Shadford MechanicallElectricallPlumbmg
Town Center Consultant
29 South Main Street Steve Krawczynski, PE
West Hartford, CT 06107
860-521-4329
Purcell Associates Civil Engineer
90 National Drive William Soares, PE
Glastonbury, CT 06033
(860) 633-8341
Zaralban &Associates, Inc. Food Service
4250 Veterans Highway Albert Zaralban
Holbrook, NY 11741
(516) 630-3456
Edvance Technology Design, Inc. Video & Data Network
54 Middlesex Turnpike Scott Goodrich
Bedford, Massachusetts 01730
(617) 275-5370
International Engineering Group, Inc. Abatement Consultant
1 29 West Mountain Street Monica Hawes, Sr. Consultant
Worcester,MA 01606
508-853-6754
=: .
y„.A ... ., � r
- '.� .. ._
'.�a ...
_� :,
� ..
i...
Project Manual Specifications
Additions and Renovations
7.
to the.
.ltorthampton High School
380 Eln Street
Northampton, Massachusetts
VOLUME TWO - DIVISIONS 714
o Hi�y
,�rAV �p55P
Released for Bid:January 12 1999
®.®AAALJ,AdA
v4 �~ A `n�y/�F o
KAESTLE BOOS
4TAN
ASSOC I RTES,I NC. �J
ARCHITECTS